JP2026011474A - gaming machines - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players.
[Solution] After a variable winning device 32A (large winning opening shutter 32Ab) is in an open state during a jackpot game state, the length of the interval period until the next open state (next round) begins is changed depending on the trigger for the variable winning device 32A to transition to a closed state. In particular, when a predetermined state that is less advantageous to the player (a state in which the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 32A has not reached the specified maximum number of prize balls and the specified maximum open time has elapsed) occurs and the variable winning device 32A transitions to the closed state, the interval period during which the variable winning device 32A is maintained in the closed state is shorter than when a specific state that is more advantageous to the player (a state in which the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 32A has reached the specified maximum number of prize balls) occurs and the variable winning device 32A transitions to the closed state, allowing the variable winning device 32A to transition to the next open state (next round) more quickly.
[Selected figure] Figure 1-4

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Pachinko machines, which are a type of gaming machine known in the art, involve firing gaming balls into a gaming area. Gaming machines such as pachinko machines offer players a variety of entertainment options (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-31769 A

However, there is a demand for further improvements in entertainment value when it comes to conventional gaming machines.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest, etc.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A specific game state that can occur when a specific condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the starting condition;
a predetermined operation means for executing a predetermined operation state a plurality of times when the specific gaming state is reached;
a control means for executing control regarding the specific game state and control of the predetermined operation means,
the control means shifts the predetermined operation means to a predetermined stop state when at least a first state occurs and a second state different from the first state occurs after the predetermined operation means has entered the predetermined operation state in the specific game state,
The control means
a maintenance state execution means for maintaining the predetermined operation means in the predetermined stopped state for at least a predetermined period when the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state,
In the specific game state, when the first state occurs and the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state, the predetermined operation state can be shifted to the predetermined stopped state earlier than when the second state occurs and the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state,
The gist of the invention is that the second state is more advantageous to the player than the first state.

The gaming machine of the present invention can increase the player's interest, etc.

FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the state in which the inner frame and front frame are open. This is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. in an open state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used in game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process. A flowchart showing the second start winning process. A flowchart showing the first start winning process. 10A is a flowchart showing the first correct/incorrect judgment process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the second correct/incorrect judgment process. 10A is a flowchart showing a first type determination process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a second type determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing reach determination processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process. 10 is a flowchart showing a launch permission command setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first special display control process. A flowchart showing the first variable display setting process. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second special display control process. A flowchart showing the second variable display setting process. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing the variable prize-winning device control process. 10 is a flowchart showing an end setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal display control process. 10 is a flowchart showing the general map change setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a general map discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing the start-up prize winning section control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used to determine decorative patterns, etc. 10 is a flowchart showing a counter update process. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold information storage process. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold process. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a production display device for normal stage production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for an opening performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device related to a round performance. A figure showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for interval performance (standby performance). A figure showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device related to interval performance (transition performance). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for an ending performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for rush stage performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for battle stage performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a production display device for a lucky stage production. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing interval time determination tables. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the pachinko machine and the card unit. FIG. 2A is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine, and FIG. 2B is a plan view showing a second operation unit (cross key). This is an oblique view showing the state in which the inner frame and front frame are open. This is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. in an open state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a card unit, a card unit connection board, a card unit operation unit, a counting management device, and a sub-control device. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used in game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 10A is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process. A flowchart showing the second start winning process. A flowchart showing the first start winning process. 10A is a flowchart showing the first correct/incorrect judgment process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the second correct/incorrect judgment process. 10A is a flowchart showing a first type determination process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a second type determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing reach determination processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process. 10 is a flowchart showing a launch permission command setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first special display control process. A flowchart showing the first variable display setting process. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second special display control process. A flowchart showing the second variable display setting process. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing the variable prize-winning device control process. 10 is a flowchart showing an end setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal display control process. 10 is a flowchart showing the general map change setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a general map discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing the start-up prize section control processing. 10A is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process of the counting management device, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process of the counting management device. 10 is a flowchart showing a lending setting process for the counting management device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process of the counting management device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used to determine decorative patterns, etc. 10 is a flowchart showing a counter update process. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold information storage process. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold process. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop process. 10 is a flowchart showing a standby process. 10A is a flowchart showing the main processing of the card unit, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the card unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a card unit lending instruction process. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for normal stage performance, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for jackpot performance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for rush stage performance, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for battle stage performance, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for lucky stage performance. 10 is a timing chart showing switching of signals exchanged between the pachinko machine and the card unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a menu selection process. 10 is a flowchart showing a language setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a volume setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a luminance setting process. 10A is a diagram showing a menu screen, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a language setting screen. 10A is a diagram showing a volume setting screen, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a brightness setting screen, and FIG. 10C is a diagram showing a performance customization screen. 10A is a diagram showing a game history screen, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a custom setting continuation selection screen, and FIG. 10C is a diagram showing a custom setting notification screen. 1 is a system configuration diagram showing a communication system between a pachinko machine and a mobile terminal. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing an NFC module on the pachinko machine side. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of an NFC module. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a BT module. FIG. 2A is a front view showing the portable terminal, and FIG. 2B is a rear view showing the portable terminal. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the mobile terminal. 10 is a flowchart showing a BT connection process on the mobile terminal side. 10 is a flowchart showing BT connection processing on the pachinko machine side. FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing the exchanges that take place between the pachinko machine and the mobile terminal. 10 is a flowchart showing BT communication processing performed on the mobile terminal side during BT communication connection. 10 is a flowchart showing BT communication processing performed on the pachinko machine (sub-control device) side during BT communication connection. 10 is a flowchart showing a process of disconnecting a BT communication connection performed on the mobile terminal side; 10 is a flowchart showing the process of disconnecting a BT communication connection performed on the pachinko machine (sub-control device) side. 10 is a flowchart showing BT connection processing on the pachinko machine side according to another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing BT connection processing on the pachinko machine side according to another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing BT connection processing on the pachinko machine side according to another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing BT connection processing on the pachinko machine side according to another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing BT connection processing on the pachinko machine side according to another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing BT connection processing on the pachinko machine side according to another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing BT communication processing on the pachinko machine side according to another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing BT communication processing on the pachinko machine side according to another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing BT communication processing on the pachinko machine side according to another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing BT communication processing on the pachinko machine side according to another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing BT communication processing on the pachinko machine side according to another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a BT communication disconnection process performed on the pachinko machine side in another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a BT communication disconnection process performed on the mobile terminal side in another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a BT communication disconnection process performed on the pachinko machine side in another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a BT communication disconnection process performed on the pachinko machine side in another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a BT communication disconnection process performed on the pachinko machine side in another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a BT communication disconnection process performed on the pachinko machine side in another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a BT communication disconnection process performed on the pachinko machine side in another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a BT communication disconnection process performed on the pachinko machine side in another embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance customization process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a background music setting screen. 1A is a diagram showing a screen for setting background music during symbol fluctuation, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a screen for setting background music during a jackpot. 10 is a flowchart showing a character setting process. 1A is a diagram showing a character setting screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a main character setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a girl character setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a background setting screen. 10 is a flowchart showing a background setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a preview performance setting screen. 10 is a flowchart showing a preview performance setting process. A figure showing a super reach effect setting screen. 10 is a flowchart showing a reliability setting process. 10A is a diagram showing a reliability setting screen, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state in which an input completion display is displayed. 10 is a flowchart showing an appearance rate setting process. 10A is a diagram showing an appearance rate setting screen, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state in which an input completion display has been displayed. 10 is a flowchart showing reach effect setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the preview performance execution setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a plurality of reach effect tables. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a user correspondence area (custom information storage area). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a communication disconnection confirmation screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device during a BT communication connection, and (b) is a diagram showing a communication connection notification screen that is displayed when it is not possible to continue playing the ball game. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the state in which the inner frame and front frame are open. This is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. in an open state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used in game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process. A flowchart showing the second start winning process. A flowchart showing the first start winning process. 10A is a flowchart showing the first correct/incorrect determination process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the second correct/incorrect determination process. 10A is a flowchart showing a first type determination process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a second type determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a reach determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process. 10 is a flowchart showing a launch permission command setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first special display control process. A flowchart showing the first variable display setting process. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second special display control process. A flowchart showing the second variable display setting process. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing the variable prize-winning device control process. 10 is a flowchart showing an end setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal display control process. 10 is a flowchart showing the general map change setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a general map discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing the start-up prize section control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used to determine decorative patterns, etc. 10 is a flowchart showing a counter update process. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold information storage process. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold process. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a production display device for normal stage production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an effect display device for a jackpot effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for rush stage performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for battle stage performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a production display device for a lucky stage production. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a second operation unit (cross key). 10 is a flowchart showing a menu selection process. 10 is a flowchart showing a language setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a volume setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a luminance setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a menu screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a language setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a volume setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a brightness setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a performance customization screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a game history screen. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the state in which the inner frame and front frame are open. This is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. in an open state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used in game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process. A flowchart showing the second start winning process. A flowchart showing the first start winning process. 10A is a flowchart showing the first correct/incorrect determination process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the second correct/incorrect determination process. 10A is a flowchart showing a first type determination process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a second type determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a reach determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process. 10 is a flowchart showing a launch permission command setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first special display control process. A flowchart showing the first variable display setting process. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second special display control process. A flowchart showing the second variable display setting process. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing the variable prize-winning device control process. 10 is a flowchart showing an end setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal display control process. 10 is a flowchart showing the general map change setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a general map discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing the start-up prize section control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used to determine decorative patterns, etc. 10 is a flowchart showing a counter update process. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold information storage process. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold process. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a production display device for normal stage production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for a jackpot performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for rush stage performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device for battle stage performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a production display device for a lucky stage production. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a second operation unit (cross key). 10 is a flowchart showing a menu selection process. 10 is a flowchart showing a language setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an audio output setting process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an output volume setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an output device setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a luminance setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance customization process. 10 is a flowchart showing a character setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a background setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a preview performance setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a reliability setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an appearance rate setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing reach effect setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the preview performance execution setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a plurality of reach effect tables. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a user correspondence area (custom information storage area). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a menu screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a language setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an audio output setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an output volume setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an output device setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a brightness setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a performance customization screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a game history screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a background music setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a screen for setting background music during pattern fluctuation. A figure showing a screen for setting background music during a jackpot. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a character setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a main character setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a girl character setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a background setting screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a preview performance setting screen. A figure showing a super reach effect setting screen. 10A is a diagram showing a reliability setting screen, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state in which an input completion display is displayed on the reliability setting screen. 10A is a diagram showing an appearance rate setting screen, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state in which an input completion display is displayed on the appearance rate setting screen. FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram showing a communication system between a pachinko machine and wireless earphones. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a BT module. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the wireless earphone. 10 is a flowchart showing a wireless earphone setting process on the pachinko machine side. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a connection setting screen. 10 is a flowchart showing a BT connection process on the earphone side. 10 is a flowchart showing BT communication processing performed on the pachinko machine (sub-control device) side during BT communication connection. 10 is a flowchart showing BT communication processing performed on the earphone side during BT communication connection. 10 is a flowchart showing a process of disconnecting a BT communication connection performed on the earphone side. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of disconnecting a BT communication connection performed on the pachinko machine (sub-control device) side. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to an embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. An oblique view showing the inner frame and front frame set in an open state. This is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame and game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. in an open state. 10A and 10B are perspective views showing the configuration of the handle. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view mainly showing the components inside the handle. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view mainly showing the components inside the handle. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view mainly showing the components inside the handle. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view mainly showing the components inside the handle. 1A is a front view showing the handle when the rotary operating body is in a non-operated state, and is a diagram explaining the relative rotational position relationship between the first and second gear bodies and the state of the spiral spring; FIG. 1B is a front view showing the handle when the rotary operating body is in a rotationally operated state, and is a diagram explaining the relative rotational position relationship between the first and second gear bodies and the state of the spiral spring; FIG. 10 is a rear view showing the rotation operation body to which the first gear body and the spiral spring are assembled. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state before a rotation operation body is assembled to a handle base portion. (a) is a front view showing the state before the stop lever is pressed at the handle base to which various components are assembled, and (b) is a front view showing the state after the stop lever is pressed at the handle base and the locking protrusion engages with the locking recess. 10 is a perspective view showing a state in which the stop lever is pressed and the locking protrusion is engaged with the locking recess at the handle base. FIG. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a state in which a rotation operation body (first gear body) is about to be assembled to a handle base portion. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which a rotation operation body (first gear body) is assembled to a handle base portion. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the rotation operation body is assembled to the handle base and the hook portion at the other end of the spiral spring is screwed. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view mainly showing the components on the outside of the handle. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view mainly showing the components on the outside of the handle. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing the operation modes of the second rotary operation body and the restricting means. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing the outer components of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing the outer components of a handle in another embodiment. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing an operation mode of a second rotary operation body and a restricting means in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a handle in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a handle in another embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 according to a first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

Pachinko machines are a type of gaming machine known in the art, in which game balls are fired into a play area.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, for example, a gaming ball is fired toward a gaming area, and if a specific condition is met based on the gaming ball entering a predetermined starting ball entry means (for example, if a predetermined lottery is won), a specific gaming state (e.g., a jackpot state) occurs (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A).

When a specific game state is reached, the predetermined operating means (e.g., variable winning device) enters an operating state, and then transitions to a stopped state if the first state occurs (e.g., the specified maximum opening time has elapsed) or the second state occurs (the specified maximum number of game balls has been won), and after a specified period of time has elapsed, transitions to the next operating state.

However, if the period during which the predetermined operation means remains stopped is always the same, whether the first state occurs and the device transitions to a stopped state, or the second state occurs and the device transitions to a stopped state, this could reduce the player's interest. Therefore, there is a desire to improve the player's interest.

In other words, the aim is to increase interest by providing a change in interest between when the first state occurs and transitions to a stopped state and when the second state occurs and transitions to a stopped state.

As such, the present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest, etc.

In contrast to this, specifically, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A specific game state that can occur when a specific condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the starting condition;
a predetermined operation means for executing a predetermined operation state a plurality of times when the specific gaming state is reached;
a control means for executing control regarding the specific game state and control of the predetermined operation means,
the control means shifts the predetermined operation means to a predetermined stop state when at least a first state occurs and a second state different from the first state occurs after the predetermined operation means has entered the predetermined operation state in the specific game state,
The control means
a maintenance state execution means for maintaining the predetermined operation means in the predetermined stopped state for at least a predetermined period when the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state,
In the specific game state, when the first state occurs and the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state, the predetermined operation state can be shifted to the predetermined stopped state earlier than when the second state occurs and the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state,
By making the second state more advantageous to the player than the first state,
It is possible to improve the interest of players, etc.

More specifically, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A jackpot game state that can occur when a jackpot is won based on the starting winning;
A variable winning device (big winning opening shutter) that can open multiple times when a big win game state is reached;
A pachinko machine equipped with a main control device that controls the jackpot game state and the variable prize winning device (the large prize winning port shutter),
The main control device transitions the variable winning device (large winning opening shutter) to a closed state when a predetermined state occurs in which at least a specified maximum opening time has elapsed after the variable winning device (large winning opening shutter) has been in an open state during a jackpot game state, or when a specific state occurs in which a specified maximum number of game balls have been won,
The main control unit is
When the variable prize winning device (large prize winning opening shutter) is shifted to a closed state, the variable prize winning device (large prize winning opening shutter) is configured to be maintained in a closed state for at least a predetermined period of time,
In the jackpot game state, when the predetermined state occurs (the specified maximum opening time has elapsed) and the variable winning device (large winning opening shutter) is shifted to a closed state, the variable winning device (large winning opening shutter) is configured to be shifted to the next open state more quickly than when the specific state occurs (the specified maximum number of game balls have entered) and the variable winning device (large winning opening shutter) is shifted to a closed state,
By making the pachinko machine characterized in that the specific state, i.e., the number of winning game balls in the variable winning device reaches the specified maximum number of winning balls [the number of winning balls acquired by the player is the specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 10 winning game balls x 15 winning balls per ball)], is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined state, i.e., the specified maximum opening time has elapsed without the number of winning game balls in the variable winning device reaching the specified maximum number of winning balls [the number of winning balls acquired by the player does not reach the specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 7 winning game balls x 15 winning balls per ball)],
It is possible to improve the interest of players, etc.

In the present invention, a "predetermined operating state" may be one that can be executed multiple times, and may be any state as long as it can achieve the gist of the present invention, such as an operating state in which a predetermined operating means opens and closes a predetermined opening or spherical passage, or an operating state in which a predetermined operating means causes a predetermined operating object to open and close a predetermined opening or spherical passage; an operating state in which a predetermined operating means slides up and down, left and right, front and back, or diagonally, or an operating state in which a predetermined operating means slides a predetermined operating object up and down, left and right, front and back, or diagonally; an operating state in which a predetermined operating means reciprocates, vibrates, or swings up and down, left and right, front and back, or diagonally, or an operating state in which a predetermined operating means reciprocates, vibrates, or swings a predetermined operating object up and down, left and right, front and back, or diagonally; an operating state in which a predetermined operating means rotates and displaces around an axis in up and down, left and right, front and back, or diagonally, or an operating state in which a predetermined operating means rotates and displaces a predetermined operating object around an axis in up and down, left and right, front and back, or diagonally; an operating state in which a predetermined operating means moves, or an operating state in which a predetermined operating means moves a predetermined operating object.

In the present invention, the "maintenance state execution means" may be anything that maintains the predetermined operation means in a predetermined stopped state for at least a predetermined period of time when the predetermined operation means is transitioned to a predetermined stopped state, and may be, for example, a main control device, sub-control device, display control device, audio control device, lamp control device, or other control device capable of executing predetermined control, or various calculation means possessed by these control devices, or various functions capable of executing various control processes in these control devices, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized.

In the present invention, a "specific gaming state" may be any gaming state that can occur when specific conditions are met, provided that it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, a small jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which the probability of obtaining a winning result through a specified lottery means is higher than in the normal gaming state (including a low probability state), a high ball entry state in which the rate at which gaming balls enter a specified ball entry means (including a variable ball entry means) is higher than in the normal gaming state (including a low ball entry state), or a state in which a specified number of rights to enter a specified lottery are reserved in a reservation means capable of reserving such rights (including a full reservation state in which the upper limit is reserved).

In this invention, a "predetermined operation means" may be anything that can execute a predetermined operation state multiple times when a specific game state is reached, regardless of its shape, size, location, operation mode, etc., as long as it is capable of achieving the gist of this invention. For example, it may be anything that can execute a predetermined operation state in a variable winning device installed in the game area or its internal area, anything installed in the game area that can execute a predetermined operation state (including movable devices), anything that can execute a predetermined operation state that acts on game balls flowing down the game area (including variable ball entry means), anything that can execute a predetermined operation state that opens or closes a predetermined opening or ball passage through which game balls can pass, anything that can execute a predetermined operation state that guides game balls in a predetermined direction or to a predetermined position, or anything that can execute a predetermined operation state that changes the visibility (including operation mode, display mode, etc.) of a predetermined part or area visible to the player.

In this invention, a "specific condition" may be anything that can achieve the gist of the invention, such as a specific lottery result being obtained through a specific lottery executed when a gaming ball enters or passes through a specific entry means, a gaming ball entering or passing through a specific entry means (including variable entry means) being detected by a specific detection means, the right to hold a specific lottery based on a gaming ball entering or passing through a specific entry means being reserved in a reservation means that can reserve up to a specific number of rights to hold a specific lottery, a gaming ball entering a specific entry means entering a specific entry area (such as a V entry slot), or a specific variable display executed by a specific display means being fixed and stopped in a specific manner based on a gaming ball entering or passing through a specific entry means.

In the present invention, the "control means" may be anything that executes control related to a specific game state and control of a predetermined operation means, and may be anything that can achieve the gist of the present invention, such as a main control device, sub-control device, display control device, audio control device, lamp control device, or other control device capable of executing predetermined control, or various calculation means possessed by these control devices, or various functions capable of executing various control processes in these control devices.

In this invention, the "starting condition" may be anything that can achieve the gist of the invention, such as a game ball entering or passing through a predetermined ball entry means located in the play area, a game ball entering or passing through a predetermined ball entry means provided on a device (including a center frame, stage, etc.) located in the play area, a game ball entering or passing through a predetermined ball entry means provided in a variable entry device located in the play area, or a game ball entering or passing through a predetermined ball entry means provided in an area that can only be reached by game balls launched in a predetermined launch mode.

In the present invention, "the second state is more advantageous than the first state" means, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, that when the second state occurs, a greater number of game balls enter the predetermined entry means (including variable entry means) during a predetermined period than when the first state occurs; that when the second state occurs, a greater number of prize balls are paid out as a result of game balls entering the predetermined entry means (including variable entry means) during a predetermined period than when the first state occurs; that when the second state occurs, a greater proportion of predetermined lotteries are executed based on game balls entering the predetermined entry means (including variable entry means) during a predetermined period than when the first state occurs; and that when the second state occurs, a greater number of game balls enter the predetermined entry means (including variable entry means) during a predetermined period than when the first state occurs. This may be anything, such as the predetermined movable means operating in a more advantageous manner for the player based on this, the game ball becoming easier (including becoming possible) to enter the predetermined ball entry means (including variable ball entry means) during a predetermined period when the second state occurs compared to when the first state occurs, the probability of a winning result being obtained by the predetermined lottery means during a predetermined period when the second state occurs compared to when the first state occurs, the fixed stop display being displayed in a more advantageous manner for the player when the variable display executed by the predetermined variable display means ends when the second state occurs compared to when the first state occurs, or a predetermined effect being executed in a more advantageous manner for the player on the predetermined effect means (for example, display means) during a predetermined period when the second state occurs compared to when the first state occurs.

In the present invention, the "first state" and "second state" may refer to any state that transitions a predetermined operating means to a predetermined stopped state when this state occurs, and may refer to any state that can realize the gist of the present invention, such as a state in which a predetermined specified maximum open time has elapsed since a predetermined variable ball entry means has been opened based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means or ball entry area; a state in which a predetermined specified maximum number of game balls have entered a variable ball entry means after the predetermined variable ball entry means has been opened based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means or ball entry area; a state in which a predetermined number of game balls have entered a predetermined ball entry means (including a variable ball entry means) or ball entry area; a state in which game balls have entered a predetermined ball entry means or ball entry area; Alternatively, it may be any state in which the variable display executed by the specified display means based on the ball entering the ball entry area has ended and the display has stopped in a specified stopped state (for example, a first state that is not advantageous to the player or a second state that is advantageous to the player), or the state in which this has been confirmed; a state in which a specified result has been obtained in a specified lottery executed based on the game ball entering the specified ball entry means or ball entry area; a state in which a specified operation period has passed since the specified specified operation means (including variable ball entry means) began operating based on the game ball entering the specified ball entry means or ball entry area; a state in which a specified advantageous state that is advantageous to the player has been granted; or a state in which a specified advantageous state that is advantageous to the player has ended.

In the present invention, a "predetermined stopped state" may be any state to which the predetermined operation means transitions after entering the predetermined operation state, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. For example, it may be a state in which the predetermined operation means has stopped or completed, or has confirmed, an opening or closing operation, a state in which the predetermined operation means has stopped or completed, or has confirmed, an operation ... displaced (sliding, reciprocating, vibrating, swinging, rotating, etc.), or an operation in which the predetermined operation means has stopped or completed, or has confirmed, an operation in which the predetermined operation means has displaced a predetermined operation object.

The gaming machine according to the present invention (pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment), which will be described in detail below, has a special state as the specific gaming state of the present invention described above, an operation unit as the predetermined operation means of the present invention, a control unit as the control means of the present invention, a predetermined state as the first state of the present invention, a specific state as the second state of the present invention, a maintenance function as the maintenance state execution means of the present invention, a standby effect as the first effect of the present invention, a transition effect as the second effect of the present invention, a specific effect as the special effect of the present invention, an effect control execution unit as the special effect execution means of the present invention, an invalid discrimination function as the invalid means of the present invention, a change means as the variable means of the present invention, and a specific stop function as the specific stop execution means of the present invention.

The specific configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present invention will be described in detail below. As shown in Figures 1-3 and elsewhere, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of this outer frame 11 so that it can be opened and closed. However, for the sake of convenience, Figure 1-3 omits the game components (nails, accessories, etc.) arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame 14, and other elements.

As shown in Figures 1-6 and elsewhere, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made from wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made from extruded aluminum alloy material. These frame components 11a-11d are assembled together into a rectangular frame shape using detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left-side frame component 11c, respectively (see Figure 1-1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, allowing the inner frame 12 to open and close. The inner frame 12 and other components are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

The right-side frame component 11d has an extending wall 83 that protrudes from near its rear widthwise end toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see Figure 1-6) provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1-5). In addition, as shown in Figure 1-3, the front side of the extending wall 83 is provided with a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 that engage with the locking member of the locking device 600, which serves as the operating portion. Furthermore, the lower receiving portion 85 has a pressing portion 86 that protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 and abuts against the inner frame opening detection switch 92, which will be described later.

A resin decorative panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. An upward-protruding rib 88 is integrally formed on the innermost part of the top surface of the decorative panel 87. This reduces the likelihood of a gap forming between the decorative panel and the inner frame 12.

As shown in Figure 1-3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward around this opening/closing axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly oval window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

A front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened forward around an opening and closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The front frame 14 may also be configured so that it can be opened and closed directly by the outer frame 11, rather than via the inner frame 12.

The front frame 14, like the inner frame 12, has a rectangular outer shape, and in the closed state, which is a specific state, it covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12. A roughly oval window 101 is formed in the center of the front frame 14. This makes it possible to view the game board 30 (play area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. Details of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in Figure 1-1, etc., a lower tray 15 serving as a ball receiving tray is provided at the center of the lower part of the front side of the front frame 14, and gaming balls discharged from the lower payout outlet 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. In addition, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging gaming balls from the lower tray 15 is provided on the front side of the lower tray 15.

To the right of the lower tray 15 is a game ball launch handle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "handle") 18, which serves as an operating part that protrudes forward. The handle 18 is equipped with a rotational operation part 18a that can be rotated by the player, a touch sensor (not shown) that can detect when the player's hand touches the handle 18, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of operation of the rotational operation part 18a. With this configuration, when the rotational operation part 18a is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by the launching device 60, described below, with a launch strength that corresponds to the amount of rotational operation.

The handle 18 is also provided with a stop lever 18b that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the rotation control unit 18a. When the stop lever 18b is pressed to the on state, the launcher 60, which serves as the operating unit, is prohibited from launching game balls, even if the handle 18 is being held. This makes it possible to rotate the rotation control unit 18a while prohibiting the launch of game balls, or to temporarily stop the launch of game balls when the handle 18 is in a specified operating state.

As shown in Figure 1-2, an upper tray 19 capable of storing game balls is provided above the lower tray 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls paid out from the upper payout opening 17 and guides them toward the launching device 60 while aligning them in a line. Furthermore, game balls paid out when the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls in a specific state are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray connecting passage 71 and the lower payout opening 16, which will be described later.

A loan switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display unit 124 are provided on the upper right surface of the front edge of the upper tray 19. Typically, in amusement halls, a CR unit (not shown) is located on the left side of the pachinko machine 10. When the loan switch 121, which serves as an input unit, is operated in a specific state where a gaming card with a balance is inserted into the CR unit, loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to that operation. On the other hand, the return switch 122, which also serves as an input unit, is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted into the CR unit. The balance display unit 124 also displays the balance of the card inserted into the CR unit.

In addition, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper right surface of the front edge of the upper tray 19. The ball removal button 123 is configured to be retractable and is always biased upward by a biasing means (not shown). With this configuration, when the ball removal button 123 is pressed, the space between the upper tray 19 and the lower tray 15 is opened, and game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided to the lower tray 15. In other words, by operating the ball removal button 123, the player can transfer game balls from the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time.

Furthermore, a first operation unit 125 and a second operation unit 126, which can be operated by the player, are provided on the upper surface of the center of the front edge of the upper tray 19.

The first operation unit 125 is primarily used for presentation purposes. In this embodiment, the first operation unit 125 is a contact-type input unit that includes a button section that can move in the direction of pressure when pressed by the player's finger or hand (for example, by pressing downwards), and an operation detection switch that turns into a predetermined on state and can output a predetermined detection signal when pressed by the player's finger or hand in this manner and moves a predetermined amount, approaching or coming into contact with a sensor section serving as a predetermined detection section within a predetermined distance. Of course, the configuration of the first operation unit 125 is not limited to this, and other different configurations may be used.

When the first operation unit 125 (hereinafter referred to as the "effect button 125") is pressed by the player, a predetermined detection signal, which is a predetermined input by the player, is input from the operation detection switch to the sub-control device 262 described below.

As a result, for example, during a specified period of time when a variable display is being executed (during a performance) in the performance display device 42, which will be described later, and which is in a specified operating state, the player can press the performance button 125, causing the performance display device 42, which serves as the operating unit, to execute a specified performance.

In addition, when the effect display device 42 is in a standby state (waiting for customers), which is a predetermined state in which no effects such as variable displays are being performed, the player can press the effect button 125 with their finger or other object to display the game history on the effect display device 42 or customize the effect content to suit the player's preferences.

On the other hand, the second operation unit 126 is primarily used by the player to perform various setting operations, etc. In this embodiment, an operation means known as a cross key or the like is used as the second operation unit 126.

Specifically, the second operation unit 126 (hereinafter referred to as the "cross key 126") consists of five operation buttons: an up button 126a, a down button 126b, a left button 126c, a right button 126d, and a center button 126e (see Figure 1-7).

Each of the buttons 126a-126e of the cross key 126 employs a contact-type input unit that includes a button section that can move in the direction of pressure when pressed by the player (for example, by pressing downwards), and an operation detection switch that, when pressed by the player's finger or the like, moves the button section a predetermined amount and comes within a predetermined distance of or comes into contact with a sensor section acting as a predetermined detection section, turns on and outputs a predetermined detection signal.

Of course, the configuration of the input unit that allows players to input operations is not limited to the first operation unit 125 or the second operation unit 126, and other different types may be used. For example, the input unit may be a touch panel that allows players to input operations by touch, a jog dial that allows players to input operations by rotation, or a slide lever that allows players to input operations by sliding. Furthermore, the installation location is not limited to the front edge of the upper tray 19, and may be anywhere that the player can operate.

When the player presses any of the buttons 126a to 126e on the cross key 126, a predetermined detection signal representing a predetermined input by the player is input from each of the operation detection switches to the sub-control device 262, which will be described later.

As a result, for example, when a menu screen (not shown) or the like is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, the player can use their finger or other object to press the buttons 126a to 126d of the directional pad 126 to move the cursor (not shown) displayed on the menu screen or the like in any direction, up, down, left, or right, or can confirm the item selected by the cursor by pressing the center button 126e.

In addition, various decorative lights (decorative lamps) are provided on the front frame 14 and the game board 30. The lighting conditions of these lights are changed and controlled in response to changes in the game state, and they serve as a means of enhancing the dramatic effects during play.

For example, the front frame 14 has a frame illumination section 102 around the periphery of the window section 101. Error indicator lamps 105 that light up in the event of a specific error are also provided on both sides of the frame illumination section 102.

The game board 30 also has a central illumination section 103 on the periphery of the center frame 47 (described below), and side illumination sections 104 on the left and right lower parts of the game area. These illumination sections 102-104 incorporate light sources such as LEDs and a light emission control board that drives and controls the light sources.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-1, speakers SP are provided in the upper left and right corners of the front frame 14, which output audio information such as sound effects and background music depending on the game status (see Figure 1-3, etc.).

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of rectangular glass panes attached separately to the front and rear, but rather is round overall and is attached as an assembly.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to Figures 1-4. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 behind the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge abutting the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, approximately the center of the front of the game board 30, which forms the play area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 in the resin base 38.

Mounted at the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39, are a launching device 60 as a launching means and a launching rail 61 that guides the game balls immediately after they are launched by the launching device 60. In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device is used as the launching device 60. Furthermore, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device 63 is provided as the operating part that guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the launch position of the launching device 60.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (play area) will be explained with reference to Figures 1-4. A rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which guides game balls launched from the launching device 60 to the top of the game board 30. As a result, game balls launched in response to the rotation of the handle 18 are guided into the play area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 via the launch rail 61 and rail 50. The rail 50 consists of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in Figure 1-4). This prevents a game ball that has been guided from the rail 50 into the play area from returning back into the rail 50. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip of the outer rail component 52 (upper right in Figure 1-4). This ensures that a game ball launched with more than a predetermined force will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned, for example, toward the approximate center of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the gaming board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the gaming board 30. Therefore, the playing area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 in the resin base 38. However, because a gaming ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 before passing through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the playing area.

The game area is equipped with a general winning section 31A, a variable winning device 32A as a ball entry means (variable ball entry means), a first start winning section 33WA as a start means (first start winning means), a second start winning section 33WB as a start means (second start winning means), a through gate 34 as a start means (trigger start winning means), a variable display unit 35, etc. These are explained in detail below.

A variable display unit 35 is located approximately in the center of the play area. A first start-up winning section 33WA is located in the play area lower area ED, which is located below the variable display unit 35 within the play area.

The variable display unit 35 is provided with a display device 42 that performs various display effects, and a center frame 47 that surrounds the display device 42. The center frame 47 has a frame shape with an opening in its center, through which the display section 42a of the display device 42 can be seen.

A stage portion 770, on which the game ball can roll, is provided on the upper surface of the lower edge of the center frame 47. A guide groove 774 that slopes gently downward toward the front is formed in the center of the stage portion 770. As shown in Figure 1-4, when the center frame 47 is placed on the game board 30, the guide groove 774 is located directly above the first start winning portion 33WA.

A ball passage (warp flow path) 775 is formed inside the left edge of the center frame 47 to allow game balls to pass through. The entrance of the ball passage 775 opens to the left side of the center of the left edge of the center frame 47 (towards the game board 30 surface). Meanwhile, the exit of the ball passage 775 opens to the right side of the lower end of the left edge of the center frame 47 (towards the stage portion 770). This ball passage 775 can guide game balls flowing down the game board 30 surface in the game area left-side area EA, which is located to the left of the variable display unit 35 within the game area, onto the stage portion 770 within the center frame 47.

A game ball guided onto the stage portion 770 via the ball passage 775 or the like rolls on the stage portion 770, then either falls from the front edge of the stage portion 770 onto the surface of the game board 30, or is ejected onto the surface of the game board 30 via the guide groove 774. Of these, game balls ejected via the guide groove 774 have a relatively high probability of landing in the first start winning section 33WA.

The first start winning section 33WA is located in the lower area ED of the play area, protruding forward from the front of the game board 30, with a winning opening (first start winning opening) above it through which game balls can always enter. In addition, a first start winning switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the first start winning section 33WA, which can detect game balls that enter through the first start winning opening.

Under this configuration, when a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and the first start winning switch 224a detects the gaming ball and turns on, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot state will be generated as a special state (jackpot lottery), and the first special pattern display device 43A, described below, displays a changing special pattern. When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and the first start winning switch 224a detects the gaming ball and turns on, the start condition is met, and based on this, the first special pattern display device 43A displays a changing special pattern.

A variable winning device 32A, which serves as the operating unit, is located below the first starting winning unit 33WA in the lower play area ED.

The variable prize winning device 32A is equipped with a large prize winning opening 32Aa through which game balls can enter, a large prize winning opening shutter 32Ab as an operating unit (operating object) that opens and closes the large prize winning opening 32Aa, a large prize winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the large prize winning opening shutter 32Ab to open and close, and a large prize winning opening count switch 222 as a detection unit that can detect game balls that have entered the large prize winning opening 32Aa.

Under this configuration, the variable winning device 32A is normally in a closed state (closed state) in which the large prize opening shutter 32Ab closes the large prize opening 32Aa from above and below, preventing game balls flowing down the lower game area ED from entering the large prize opening 32Aa. Furthermore, in this closed state, game balls can flow down in front of the large prize opening shutter 32Ab.

On the other hand, when a jackpot occurs, the variable winning device 32A tilts forward with the large winning opening shutter 32Ab pivoting around its lower edge, and enters an open state (open state), which is a predetermined operating state in which a game ball flowing down the lower area ED of the game area can enter the large winning opening 32Aa.

In the lower area ED of the play area, in the left-hand region, located to the left of the first start-up winning unit 33WA and the variable winning device 32A, multiple general winning units 31A are arranged along the periphery of the play area. The general winning units 31A are arranged to protrude forward from the front of the play board 30, with a winning opening (general winning opening) above them through which game balls can always enter. Additionally, a left general winning switch 221a is provided in a position corresponding to the general winning unit 31A, which can detect game balls entering through the general winning opening.

In addition, a through gate 34 is provided in the right-side area EB of the gaming area, located to the right of the variable display unit 35, and a second start-up winning section 33WB is provided downstream of the through gate 34.

The through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area to pass through one by one, and is equipped with a through gate switch 225 that can detect game balls passing through it. Note that instead of a through gate through which game balls that have entered the game area pass and return to the game area, the gate may be configured with a normal symbol start port through which entered game balls are ejected outside the game area.

When a gaming ball passes through the through gate 34 (when the through gate switch 225 detects the gaming ball and turns on), a start-up winning support lottery is held to determine whether the second start-up winning section 33WB will be opened, as described below, and a variable display is displayed on the normal pattern display device 41, described below, to indicate the result of the start-up winning support lottery. Here, if the start-up winning support lottery is won, a specific condition is met, and after the variable display ends, the second start-up winning section 33WB is opened for a predetermined period of time.

The second start-up winning section 33WB is a variable winning device that changes state between an open state (open state), which is a predetermined operating state in which the game ball can enter, and a closed state (closed state), which is a predetermined stop state in which the game ball cannot enter.

In more detail, the second start winning section 33WB comprises a second start winning opening 33WBa through which a gaming ball can enter, a pair of left and right blade members 33WBb as operating units (operating objects) provided on the left and right sides of the second start winning opening 33WBa, a start winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the pair of blade members 33WBb to open and close, and a second start winning switch 224b that can detect a gaming ball that has entered the second start winning opening 33WBa.

The pair of blade members 33WBb are each rotatably supported on a shaft, and are normally maintained in a closed position (closed state) close to each other by a predetermined maintenance function. In addition, an entry prevention member 145 is provided directly above the second start winning section 33WB to prevent game balls from entering between the pair of blade members 33WBb when they are in the closed state. As a result, under normal circumstances, the second start winning section 33WB is in a closed state, preventing game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area from entering the second start winning opening 33WBa.

On the other hand, as described below, when a specific starting condition (opening condition) is met, the pair of blade members 33WBb rotate and displace so that their tips move away from each other, entering the open position (open state). This creates a gap between the entry prevention member 145 and the tip of each blade member 33WBb through which game balls can pass, and the second starting winning section 33WB enters the open state, allowing game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area to enter the second starting winning opening 33WBa.

Under this configuration, when a gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, which is in the open state, and the second start winning switch 224b detects the gaming ball and turns on, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot state will be generated as a special state (jackpot lottery), and the second special pattern display device 43B, described below, displays a changing special pattern. Here, when a gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB and the second start winning switch 224b detects the gaming ball and turns on, the start condition is met, and based on this, the second special pattern display device 43B displays a changing special pattern.

For ease of explanation, the fluctuating display for a predetermined period triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will be referred to as the "first fluctuating display," and the fluctuating display for a predetermined period triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be referred to as the "second fluctuating display." Furthermore, the fluctuating time of the first fluctuating display will be referred to as the "first fluctuating time," and the fluctuating time of the second fluctuating display will be referred to as the "second fluctuating time."

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) one of the various winning sections, such as the general winning section 31A, variable winning device 32A, or start-up winning section 33WA, 33WB, it is detected by the various ball entry detection switches, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15.

In this embodiment, 10 game balls (prize balls) are paid out when the ball enters the general prize section 31A, 15 when the ball enters the variable prize device 32A (large prize opening 32Aa), 3 when the ball enters the first start prize section 33WA, and 3 when the ball enters the second start prize section 33WB. Of course, the number of prize balls paid out for each prize section is not limited to these and may be other different numbers.

In addition, the gaming board 30 is provided with an outlet 36 corresponding to the bottom of the gaming area (the gaming area lower area ED), and gaming balls that do not win in the various winning sections, such as the general winning section 31A, are discharged through this outlet 36 to the outside of the gaming area (the back side of the gaming board 30). The gaming board 30 is also equipped with various components, such as numerous nails and windmills, as a means of changing or altering the direction in which gaming balls flow.

Next, we will explain the various game states in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. First, we will explain the types of jackpots in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "15-round jackpot," "8-round jackpot," and "4-round jackpot."

Hereinafter, a "15-round jackpot" will be referred to as a "15R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "15RS" in the drawings. Similarly, an "8-round jackpot" will be referred to as an "8R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "8RS" in the drawings. Furthermore, a "4-round jackpot" will be referred to as a "4R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "4RS" in the drawings.

In the "15R jackpot" jackpot state, the jackpot opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). The "jackpot opening operation" refers to the opening and closing operation that occurs when, for example, the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable prize winning device 32A is switched from a closed state (closed state) to an open state (open state) by the function of the change means, and then the shutter is closed after a specified state occurs in which the specified maximum opening time of "30 seconds" has elapsed, or when a specific state occurs in which the specified maximum number of winning balls, "8," has entered the variable prize winning device 32A (same below).

The specified maximum opening time is not limited to "30 seconds" and may be set to a different time, such as "25 seconds" or "35 seconds." The specified maximum number of winning prizes is not limited to "8" and may be set to a different number, such as "10" or "15."

Of the two termination triggers for the "jackpot opening operation (round play)" described above, one termination trigger, "the specified maximum opening time has elapsed," is a state in which the specified maximum number of game balls do not enter the variable winning device 32A during the jackpot opening operation (round play), causing it to enter a closed state. This state is less advantageous to the player than the other termination trigger, "the specified maximum number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 32A."

For this reason, in this embodiment, when an end trigger occurs that is less advantageous to the player, the interval period is made shorter than when the other end trigger occurs, which is "a state in which the specified maximum number of game balls have won in the variable winning device 32A," so that the game can move on to the next round more quickly, in order to work to the player's advantage.

As will be explained in more detail below, one advantage of shortening the interval period is that, for example, even if a game ball enters the variable winning device 32A just before the end of a round of play (if there is a win that could result in an over-win), the winning game ball (the game ball before being detected by the large winning slot count switch 222) can be detected by the large winning slot count switch 222 as a valid game ball that has entered the variable winning device 32A in the next round of play, in the same way as a game ball that will enter the variable winning device 32A in the next round of play, without being considered an over-win.

In an "8R jackpot" state, the jackpot release action is repeated eight times (8 rounds), and in a "4R jackpot" state, the jackpot release action is repeated four times (4 rounds).

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot awarded when a winning lottery is won and specific conditions are met differs depending on whether the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB. If the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA is won and specific conditions are met, the jackpot is assigned to either a "15R jackpot" or a "4R jackpot." Furthermore, if the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is won and specific conditions are met, the jackpot is assigned to either a "15R jackpot," an "8R jackpot," or a "4R jackpot."

Next, the start ball entry support state for the second start ball entry section 33WB will be explained. In this embodiment, the start ball entry support state is switched by the function of the change means between a "high ball entry state (high support state)" in which the blade members 33WBb of the second start ball entry section 33WB are opened relatively frequently, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB, and a "low ball entry state (low support state)" in which the blade members 33WBb are opened less frequently than in the "high ball entry state," making it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB.

The "high ball entry state" may be defined as: (1) a state in which the variable display time of the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the "low ball entry state"; (2) a state in which the specified maximum opening time of the second start entry section 33WB is longer than in the "low ball entry state"; (3) a state in which the specified maximum number of game balls that can enter per opening of the second start entry section 33WB is greater than in the "low ball entry state"; (4) a state in which the second start entry section 33WB is opened more times per winning of the start entry support lottery than in the "low ball entry state"; or (5) a state in which the probability of winning the start entry support lottery is higher than in the "low ball entry state." The "high ball entry state" in this embodiment employs the above configurations (1), (2), and (5). Of course, the "high ball entry state" is not limited to these, and any one of configurations (1) through (5), or any combination of configurations (1) through (5), may be employed.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the start ball entry support lottery is won and specific conditions are met, the second start ball entry section 33WB opens twice over a predetermined period of 0.2 seconds in the "low ball entry state," and twice over a predetermined period of 1.8 seconds in the "high ball entry state." This makes it easier for game balls to frequently enter the second start ball entry section 33WB in the "high ball entry state."

Next, we will explain the various game states (various game modes) when the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display changes.

In this embodiment, the game modes are configured to be switched between three modes by the function of the change means: "normal mode," which is the normal game state; "time-saving mode with starting ball entry support (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving A mode")," which can be entered after the end of a jackpot state; and "time-saving mode with starting ball entry support (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving B mode")," which can be activated if a predetermined period of time has passed without a jackpot state occurring.

In "normal mode," the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B change to the "normal change state," a predetermined operating state in which the display changes at normal times, and the starting goal support state changes to the "low goal state."

In the specific states of "Time-saving A Mode" and "Time-saving B Mode," the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B enter a "Time-saving State," a predetermined operating state in which the variable display is performed for a shorter time than normal, and the starting goal support state becomes a "High-goal state." Furthermore, the "Normal Variable State" and the "Time-saving State" can be switched between by changing the variable time determination table, as described below.

"Time-saving A mode" is a game mode that can be entered after the end of a jackpot state. In this embodiment, regardless of whether a "15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," or "4R jackpot" occurs, a predetermined period of "Time-saving A mode" can be granted after the end of that jackpot state. Specifically, after the end of a "15R jackpot" or "8R jackpot," "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted, and after the end of a "4R jackpot," "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play times is granted.

When the start conditions for "Time-saving A Mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a low ball entry state (non-assisted state) as a predetermined state corresponding to "Normal Mode" to a high ball entry state (assisted state) as a specific state corresponding to "Time-saving A Mode," as described below.

Then, if the number of times that variable play (miss variable play) is executed on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B (mainly the second special symbol display device 43B, which is the operating unit) during "Time-saving A Mode" reaches the upper limit of 100 times or 10 times without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving A Mode" ends and the game transitions to "Normal Mode."

When the termination conditions for "Time-saving A Mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a high ball entry state (auxiliary state) corresponding to "Time-saving A Mode" to a low ball entry state (non-auxiliary state) corresponding to "Normal Mode."

In addition, "Time-saving B mode (ceiling time-saving mode)" is a game mode that can be activated when no jackpot state occurs during "normal mode" and the number of times that variable play (missing variable play) is executed on special pattern display devices 43A, 43B (first special pattern display device 43A, which is primarily the operating unit) reaches a predetermined upper limit (the so-called ceiling) of 500 times.

When the start conditions for "Time-saving B mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a low ball entry state (non-assisted state) corresponding to "normal mode" to a high ball entry state (assisted state) corresponding to "Time-saving B mode," as described below.

Then, if the number of variable games (miss variable games) executed on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B (mainly the second special symbol display device 43B) during "Time-saving B Mode" reaches a predetermined upper limit of 200 times without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving B Mode" ends and the game transitions to "Normal Mode."

When the termination conditions for "Time-saving B mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a high ball entry state (auxiliary state) corresponding to "Time-saving B mode" to a low ball entry state (non-auxiliary state) corresponding to "normal mode."

However, in this embodiment, once "Time-saving B Mode" is activated and ends without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving B Mode" will not be activated again unless a new jackpot occurs or data is cleared from RAM 503 of the main control unit 261.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in "normal mode," the start ball entry support state for the second start ball entry section 33WB does not become a "high ball entry state," but becomes a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB, so essentially, balls do not enter the second start ball entry section 33WB.

In addition, as will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, the effect display device 42 displays various effects corresponding to the current game state (game mode). For example, there is a "normal stage effect" that is displayed when the ball enters the first start winning section 33WA in "normal mode," a "rush stage effect" that is displayed when "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted, a "battle stage effect" that is displayed when "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play times is granted, and a "lucky stage effect" that is displayed when "time-saving B mode" with a maximum of 200 variable play times is granted.

As shown in Figure 1-4, on the outer right upper corner of the playing area, a normal pattern display device 41 is provided that displays the results of the start ball entry support lottery, which is held based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34; a first special pattern display device 43A is provided that displays the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) which is held based on the ball entering the first start ball entry section 33WA; and a second special pattern display device 43B is provided that displays the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) which is held based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section 33WB. These are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The display section (normal symbol variation area) of the normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two operating LEDs (normal symbol lamps that constitute the normal symbol to be operated). In the normal symbol display device 41, for example, the right-side normal symbol lamp flashes (varies) when a game ball passes through the through gate 34. After the normal symbol lamp, which is in a predetermined operating state, flashes (symbol variation state) for a predetermined period of time, the flashing (varies) display stops in a manner based on the results of the start-going ball support lottery. In other words, the stop mode, i.e., the lighting mode, of the normal symbol lamps when the variation display stops (combination of lit normal symbol lamps) corresponds to the various results of the start-going ball support lottery, and the stop mode of the normal symbol lamps when the variation display stops definitively displays the results of the start-going ball support lottery. For example, lighting both the left and right normal symbol lamps indicates a "win," while lighting only the left normal symbol lamp indicates a "lose."

The display section (special pattern variation area) of the first special pattern display device 43A is composed of four LEDs (first special pattern lamps that constitute the first special pattern to be operated) that serve as the operating section. When a ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, the first special pattern display device 43A switches the lighting of the first special pattern lamp, which corresponds to the first variation display, which is in the specified operating state.

Then, on the display unit of the first special symbol display device 43A, the first special symbol lamp is switched on and off (symbol fluctuating state) for a predetermined period of time, and then the first special symbol lamp stops switching on and off in a predetermined stopped display state based on the result of the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery), and enters a stopped display confirmation state (symbol confirmation state) for a predetermined period of time.

In other words, the lighting state (combination of lit first special symbol lamps) when the first special symbol lamps reach the stop display confirmation state is pre-associated with various results of the win/lose lottery, and the lighting state of the first special symbol lamps when they reach the stop display confirmation state will definitively indicate the result of the win/lose lottery (whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss").

In other words, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a specific result, which is a predetermined jackpot winning result, a first variable display (jackpot variable display) corresponding to the specified jackpot, which is a specific variable display, is displayed for a specified period of time, and then the stop display is confirmed in a specific state where the display is stopped in a jackpot stop display mode, which is a specific mode corresponding to the specified jackpot, and this state is maintained for a specified period of time by a specified maintenance function. On the other hand, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a specific loss result, a first variable display (loss variable display) corresponding to the specified loss is displayed for a specified period of time, and then the stop display is confirmed in a specific state where the display is stopped in a loss stop display mode, which is a specific mode corresponding to the specified loss, and this state is maintained for a specified period of time by the specified maintenance function.

The display section (special pattern variation area) of the second special pattern display device 43B is composed of four LEDs (second special pattern lamps that constitute the second special pattern to be operated) that serve as the operating section. When a ball enters the second start-up winning section 33WB, the second special pattern display device 43B switches the second special pattern lamp on and off, corresponding to the second variation display, which is in the specified operating state.

Then, on the display unit of the second special symbol display device 43B, the second special symbol lamp is switched on and off (symbol fluctuating state) for a predetermined period of time, and then the second special symbol lamp stops switching on and off in a predetermined stop display state based on the result of the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery), and enters a stop display confirmation state (symbol confirmation state) for a predetermined period of time.

In other words, the lighting state (combination of lit first special symbol lamps) when the second special symbol lamp reaches the stop display confirmation state is pre-associated with various results of the win/lose lottery, and the lighting state when the second special symbol lamp reaches the stop display confirmation state will definitively indicate the result of the win/lose lottery (whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss").

In other words, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a specific result, which is a predetermined jackpot winning result, a second variable display (jackpot variable display) corresponding to the specified jackpot, which is a specific variable display, is displayed for a specified period of time, and then the stop display is confirmed in a specific state where the display is stopped in a jackpot stop display mode, which is a specific mode corresponding to the specified jackpot, and this state is maintained for a specified period of time by a specified maintenance function. On the other hand, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a specific loss result, a second variable display (loss variable display) corresponding to the specified loss is displayed for a specified period of time, and then the stop display is confirmed in a specific state where the display is stopped in a loss stop display mode, which is a specific mode corresponding to the specified loss, and this state is maintained for a specified period of time by the specified maintenance function.

Furthermore, the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B also indicate the type of jackpot (whether it is a "15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," or "4R jackpot") depending on the lighting pattern (stop pattern) that they stop. Note that the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B may have multiple stop patterns to indicate various jackpots and misses, rather than just one, and one of these may be selected and displayed as a stop pattern.

In addition, the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B are configured so that the next variable display can begin after the stopped display (stop display confirmed state) is maintained for a predetermined period (stop display confirmed period).

Furthermore, if the next variable display does not occur even after the stop display confirmation period has elapsed after the first special pattern display device 43A or second special pattern display device 43B displays a stop (except during the jackpot state described below), the first special pattern display device 43A or second special pattern display device 43B is configured to switch from an illumination mode indicating the result of the win/lose lottery to an illumination mode indicating a standby state in which no variable display is occurring, representing a specific stop state. Alternatively, the illumination mode indicating the result of the win/lose lottery may be maintained as is by a specified specific stop function, as in the jackpot state described below.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, which is a start condition, while the first variable display is being executed, the first variable display corresponding to the ball is reserved and stored, and the reserved first variable display is started after the currently executing first variable display is stopped. Similarly, if a game ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, which is a start condition, while the second variable display is being executed, the reserved second variable display corresponding to the ball is reserved and stored, and the currently executing second variable display is stopped and stored, and the reserved second variable display is started.

Note that the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B may have a configuration different from that described above. For example, the display section (special pattern variation area) of each of the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B may be configured with two segment display devices. Each segment display device has eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. As a result, each segment display device will individually display a predetermined symbol (including letters and numbers) as a special pattern. Additionally, the color displayed in any or all display segments may be configured to be changeable as needed.

In addition, if a game ball passes through the through gate 34 while a variable display is being displayed on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display corresponding to that passage is stored on hold, and after the currently running variable display is stopped, the stored variable display is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, adjacent to the normal symbol display device 41 and the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B are a normal hold display device 44 that indicates that the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held and stored; a first hold display device 46A as first hold display means that can notify or indicate that the first variable display is held and stored (the right to execute the first variable display has been obtained); and a second hold display device 46B as second hold display means that can notify or indicate that the second variable display is held and stored (the right to execute the second variable display has been obtained). In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 43A, the second special symbol display device 43B, the first hold display device 46A, the second hold display device 46B, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 are directly display-controlled by the main control device 261, which serves as the control unit (main control unit) described below.

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps) that act as operating units. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to reserve and store up to four display variations of the normal symbol display device 41, which are performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34. For example, when one display variation of the normal symbol display device 41 is reserved, the normal hold lamp on the left lights up; when two displays are reserved, the normal hold lamps on the left and right lights up; when three displays are reserved, the normal hold lamp on the left flashes and the normal hold lamp on the right flashes; and when four displays are reserved, the normal hold lamps on the left and right flash up.

Furthermore, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during a jackpot state, the corresponding variable display may be put on hold. Furthermore, even during a jackpot state, the variable display of the normal symbol (flashing of the normal symbol lamp) on the normal symbol display device 41 is executed sequentially. Therefore, even while the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed on the display unit of the normal symbol display device 41, the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable winning device 32A may be executed repeatedly. Furthermore, if the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the winning result of the start-up ball entry support lottery, the blade member 33WBb of the second start-up winning section 33WB will be in an open state for a predetermined time, even during a jackpot state.

The first hold display device 46A is composed of two LEDs (first hold lamps) that act as operating units. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four first change displays based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning section 33WA. For example, if one first change display is held, the first hold lamp on the left will light up; if two first change displays are held, the first hold lamps on the left and right will light up; if three first change displays are held, the first hold lamp on the left will flash and the first hold lamp on the right will light up; and if four first change displays are held, the first hold lamps on the left and right will flash. If multiple first change displays are held and stored, they will be consumed sequentially in the order they were held and stored (starting with the earliest one).

The second hold display device 46B is composed of two LEDs (second hold lamps) that act as operating units. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four second variable displays based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning section 33WB. For example, if one second variable display is held, the second hold lamp on the left will light up; if two second variable displays are held, the second hold lamps on the left and right will light up; if three second variable displays are held, the second hold lamp on the left will flash and the second hold lamp on the right will light up; and if four second variable displays are held, the second hold lamps on the left and right will flash. If multiple second variable displays are held and stored, the second variable displays will be consumed sequentially in the order in which they were held and stored (starting with the earliest one).

Furthermore, if a new game ball enters the start winning section 33WA, 33WB during a jackpot state, the corresponding variable display will also be put on hold and will not be started if it can be put on hold. The variable display will not be executed during the jackpot state, and will start in a predetermined order after the jackpot state ends. However, in this embodiment, as described below, during a jackpot state, a "right hit" is usually performed, and it is relatively easy for a game ball to enter the second start winning section 33WB located in the right area EB of the play area. Therefore, after the jackpot state ends, the second variable display will basically be put on hold and stored.

As described above, basically, the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the first start winning section 33WA and is consumed in the order in which they entered, and the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the second start winning section 33WB and is consumed in the order in which they entered.

However, if the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB are on hold (one or more of the first hold lamps and one or more of the second hold lamps are lit), the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be consumed first. In other words, unless a specific state is reached in which all second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB have been consumed, the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will not be displayed. For example, in a specified state where one first hold lamp on the first hold display device 46A is lit, if a game ball enters the second start winning section 33WB and one second hold lamp on the second hold display device 46B lights up, the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will be postponed, and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be displayed first.

The performance display device 42 of the variable display unit 35 is composed of a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display section 42a, and the display content is controlled by the sub-controller 262 and display controller 45, which will be described later. That is, in the performance display device 42, the auxiliary display content is determined by the sub-controller 262 based on commands from the main controller 261 to correspond to the results displayed on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B, etc., and is displayed by the display controller 45, which will be described later.

The effect display device 42 is configured to be able to display effect variations (such as varying decorative patterns) in accordance with the variations displayed by the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 1-44, the effect display device 42 is provided with three pattern display areas: top, middle, and bottom (top pattern display area, middle pattern display area, bottom pattern display area), and multiple types of decorative patterns (patterns numbered 1 to 9) are displayed (variably displayed) in sequence in each pattern display area, after which the decorative patterns are displayed in a static manner in each pattern display area (for example, in the order of top pattern display area → bottom pattern display area → middle pattern display area).

Then, when the main control device 261 confirms that a jackpot state has occurred, the first or second special symbol display device 43A, 43B displays a stop display in a manner that corresponds to the specific display result of a jackpot, and the effect display device 42 displays a stop display of a decorative symbol combination that corresponds to the specific display result of a jackpot (for example, the same decorative symbols are displayed stopped so that they are lined up on a specified active line in the upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area), and after this confirmed stop display state is maintained for a specified period by a specified maintenance function, the jackpot state begins.

Also, when decorative symbols are displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot, the preliminary step is, for example, to display the same decorative symbols stopped on a predetermined effective line in the upper and lower symbol display areas. This special state, in which the same symbols are displayed stopped on a predetermined effective line in the upper and lower symbol display areas and a variable display is still occurring in the middle symbol display area, is called a reach state. Of course, just because a reach state has occurred does not necessarily mean that a jackpot state will occur, and there are cases in which a jackpot will not occur.

In this embodiment, after a reach state occurs, if a decorative pattern in the middle symbol display area is displayed stopped on the same active line as the decorative pattern (reach pattern) displayed stopped in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area (if a decorative pattern with the same number as the number is displayed stopped), the fixed stopped display state is maintained for a predetermined period by a predetermined maintenance function, and then a jackpot state occurs. However, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot cannot be determined depending on the type of decorative pattern displayed. Of course, instead, the type of jackpot can be determined based on the type of decorative pattern displayed.

As shown in Figure 1-3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray connecting passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 (described below) to the lower payout outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray connecting passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19. Furthermore, there is a predetermined gap between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame 14 is formed with a foul ball passage 72 that guides game balls that fall through the gap to the lower tray 15. As a result, if a game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and travels back up the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72.

Furthermore, a launched ball passage 74 is provided which connects the upper tray 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and guides game balls stored in the upper tray 19 to the ball feeding device 63. In addition, a communication hole (not shown) which connects with the lower tray communication passage 71 is formed in the launched ball passage 74, and a first shutter (not shown) which opens and closes the communication hole is provided. The first shutter is normally biased by a biasing means (not shown) towards a closed position which closes the communication hole. Furthermore, the first shutter is linked to the ball removal button 123, and is configured to displace to an open position which opens the communication hole when the ball removal button 123 is pressed.

As shown in Figure 1-2, the lower tray 15 is formed with an outlet 15a that allows game balls stored in the lower tray 15 to be discharged outside the pachinko machine 10, and is provided with a second shutter 15b that opens and closes the outlet 15a. The second shutter 15b is normally biased toward a closed position that closes the outlet 15a by a biasing means (not shown). Furthermore, the second shutter 15b is configured to move in conjunction with the ball removal lever 25, and is configured to displace to an open position that opens the outlet 15a when the ball removal lever 25 is slid to the left, for example.

Reference numeral 67 in Figures 1-3 and 1-4 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by the payout mechanism 352 (described later) to the front of the inner frame 12, and is divided into a passage leading to the upper tray connecting passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray connecting passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Furthermore, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame 14 is in a predetermined open state, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, thereby almost completely closing the outlet of the dispensing passage 67.

On the other hand, in a specific state where the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end of the entrance side of the lower tray connecting passage 71. The entrance (ball inlet) of the lower tray connecting passage 71 and the entrance (ball inlet) of the upper tray connecting passage 73 are located adjacent to each other. Furthermore, in a specific stop state where the front frame 14 is closed, the two entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance, allowing game balls to pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray connecting passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow toward the lower tray connecting passage 71 (overflowing into the entrance side of the lower tray connecting passage 71), and are paid out through the lower tray connecting passage 71 to the lower tray 15.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray connecting passage 71. The presence of this full detection switch makes it possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and game balls are stuck in the lower tray connecting passage 71). In this embodiment, based on the full detection switch continuously detecting game balls for a predetermined period of time, an error notification is controlled to inform the player that the lower tray 15 is full using a display or sound on the performance display device 42. Furthermore, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray connecting passage 71 is resolved and game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are not detected continuously for a predetermined period of time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 1-5, 1-6, etc. On the rear of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some parts overlapping front to back. Furthermore, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) that serves as the operating part for supplying game balls, a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. The payout mechanism and protective cover are integrated into a single unit, and as the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as the back pack, this unit will be referred to here as the "back pack unit 203."

First, we will explain the rear structure of the gaming board 30. As shown in Figure 1-6, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided protruding rearward on the rear side of the variable display unit 35 (see Figure 1-4), which is arranged corresponding to the through-hole in the center of the gaming board 30. Also, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the effect display device 42, which is an LCD display device facing forward through the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 are removably attached in a stacked state in the front and rear.

The effect display device 42 is housed in a storage box (reference numeral omitted) with an opening formed to expose the LCD display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is fixed to the back side of the frame cover 213. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42. The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and is fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, so that the interior can be seen. An LED control board that drives the LEDs built into the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning section 31A, variable winning device 32A, and start winning sections 33WA, 33WB from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won in the various winning sections. The game balls recovered by this ball recovery mechanism are guided to the discharge passage section 217, described below, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control unit 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control unit 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215 and can be opened to the rear.

The main control device 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 comprises a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, with the box base and box cover connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless specified traces are left behind. This makes it easy to detect if the board box 263 has been tampered with.

Although not shown in the figures, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221a, the large winning slot count switch 222, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. This first board relay board relays the general winning switch 221a, etc., and the main control unit 261, which serves as the operating unit, and is electrically connected to the main control unit 261 via a cable connector. In contrast, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, which detect winning in the start winning units 33WA and 33WB, are connected directly to the main control unit 261 via a connector cable, without going through a relay board.

The detection results from the various ball entry detection switches are input into the main control unit 261. The main control unit 261 then sends a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) based on the winning status at each time to the payout control unit 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the output signal from the payout control unit 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, the back of the game board 30 is also provided with a second board relay board that relays various motors and solenoids to the main control unit 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in Figure 1-5, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit consisting of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (right side in Figure 1-5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward around an opening/closing axis extending vertically. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left side (upper right side in Figure 1-5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is a relay board for externally outputting various information from the main control unit 261 to the hall computer (not shown) of the gaming hall. It is electrically connected to the main control unit 261 and has multiple output terminals (10 in this embodiment) that can output signals according to the gaming status to the outside.

A specified communications cable (in this embodiment, a two-core cable consisting of two core wires) is connected to each output terminal. Each output terminal is composed of a pair of upper and lower core wire insertion sections (numbers omitted), each of which is configured to insert and clamp one core wire. In other words, a pair of upper and lower core wire insertion sections function as a single output terminal.

Meanwhile, the other end of the communication cable is electrically connected to the hall computer via a relay device (not shown). As a result, information (signals) output from a specified output terminal on the external terminal board 240 is input to the hall computer via the communication cable connected to that output terminal. The hall computer then uses the various pieces of information input in this way to grasp the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 that is the output source.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 1-5, the output terminals for outputting information from the main control device 261 to the hall computer include a terminal (first terminal) for outputting information (jackpot signal 1) that is output only when the current gaming state is in a jackpot state, and a terminal (second terminal) for outputting information (jackpot signal 2) that is output when the current gaming state is either in a jackpot state or a high ball entry state (high support state).

In addition, although not designated by reference numerals for the sake of simplicity, the external terminal board 240 of this embodiment also includes a terminal (third terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a variable display has been made in the first special pattern display device 43A, a terminal (fourth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a variable display has been made in the second special pattern display device 43B, a terminal (fifth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a game ball has entered the first start winning section 33WA, and a terminal (fifth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a game ball has entered the second start winning section 33WB. The machine is provided with a terminal (sixth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that the inner frame 12 is open, a terminal (seventh terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that the front frame 14 is open, a terminal (ninth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that various errors (winning error, no tank ball error, payout error, etc.) have been detected, and a terminal (tenth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls have been paid out from the payout control device 311, which serves as the operating unit.

Furthermore, it is not necessary for all output terminals on the external terminal board 240 to be connected to the hall computer; which output terminal to obtain information from is determined at the discretion of the amusement hall manager, etc. In other words, the amusement hall manager, etc. can use only the information necessary depending on the type of operation of the amusement hall.

Furthermore, the type of information output from the external terminal board 240 and the number of output terminals for outputting the information are not limited to the configuration exemplified above, and may be configured to output information different from the information (signals) exemplified above depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

The back pack 351 is molded as a single unit from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, with only the bottom open, and is large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to also cover the top and right portions of the board box 263 (the left portion in Figure 1-5). As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is closed, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board-side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered.

The payout mechanism 352 is arranged to bypass the protective cover 354. Above the protective cover 354, a tank 355 with an opening at the top is provided, and this tank 355 is continuously replenished with gaming balls supplied from the arcade's island facilities. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356, which has, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently slopes downstream, is connected, and a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of gaming balls are appropriately paid out using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The gaming balls paid out by the payout device 358, which serves as the operating unit, are then supplied to the upper tray 19, etc.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 is also equipped with a dispensing relay board 381 that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, as well as a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. The power switch board 382 is supplied with main power, for example, 24V AC, via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a as a changing means.

Below the rear pack unit 203 (base box 263), a lower frame set 251 is provided, pivoted on the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in Figure 1-5) and openable to the rear. As shown in Figure 1-6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage 217 into which game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a discharge chute (not shown) is formed at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage 217 for discharging game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, game balls that win in each winning section, such as the general winning section 31A, are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the rear frame set 215 and then discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage 217, and game balls that do not win in any winning section are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are constructed as separate units that can be opened and closed independently, but the rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 may also be formed as a single unit.

Also, as shown in Figure 1-5, the power supply/launch control device 310, payout control device 311, and CR unit connection board 314 are removably attached in a stacked front-to-back position to the back side of the lower frame set 251. The power supply/launch control device 310 includes a launch control circuit 312 and a power supply circuit 313, and is housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

The dispensing control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 housing the main control device 261 described above, so that evidence that the board box 311a has been opened will remain.

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in board box 314a and fixed to the back side of board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, allowing the interior to be seen.

The dispensing control device 311 is also provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the base box 311a. For example, when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, pressing the state return switch 321 places the dispensing motor in a predetermined operating state in which it rotates forward and reverse, thereby resolving the ball jam (returning it to a normal state).

Furthermore, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the circuit board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is maintained, and when power is restored after the power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, when the power is turned off in the normal manner (for example, when the amusement hall closes), the state before the power outage is stored and retained. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, press the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power.

As shown in Figure 1-6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 has a cylinder lock 600a (see Figure 1-1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame 14. By inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, the inner frame 12 can be unlocked, and by rotating it in the other direction, the front frame 14 can be unlocked. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As mentioned above, the right-hand frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 has an extended wall 83 formed on it that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1-5). This makes it difficult to insert a wire or similar object from the rear side of the outer frame 11 and use the wire or similar object to operate the locking device 600. As a result, defensive performance is improved. Furthermore, the extended wall 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in Figure 1-5) of the rear pack unit 203 and lower frame set 251 from the rear side, preventing the rear pack unit 203 and lower frame set 251 from opening when the inner frame 12 is in the closed, predetermined stopped state.

As shown in Figure 1-4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (to the right of the launcher 60), and as shown in Figure 1-5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in Figure 1-5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can be retracted into the switch main body, with the front frame open detection switch 91 being arranged so that its detection unit faces forward and the inner frame open detection switch 92 being arranged so that its detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in the ON state protruding from the switch main body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control unit 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and retracted into the switch main body, it outputs an OFF signal to the main control unit 261. In other words, when the front frame 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14, turning it to the OFF state, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detection part of the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing part 86 integrally formed with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11, turning it to the OFF state, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Figure 1-7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 is equipped with a CPU 501, which is a one-chip microcomputer that serves as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 contains a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, and each function may be integrated into a separate chip.

RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of the CPU 501's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by the CPU 501 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 503a.

In addition, RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a is backed up.

Backup area 503a is an area that stores the values of the stack pointer, registers, I/O, etc. at the time of power outage (including power outages; the same applies below) so that when power is restored, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off due to a power outage or other reason. Data is written to backup area 503a by the main processing when power is cut off, and conversely, the values written to backup area 503a are restored by the main processing when power is turned on (including power on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies below). Note that when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from power outage monitoring circuit 542 (described below). When a power outage occurs, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501, which has built-in ROM 502 and RAM 503, via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus, a data bus, etc. The input/output port 505 is also connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, special symbol display devices 43A and 43B, and normal symbol display device 41, which will be described later. With this configuration, the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

For convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input/output port 505 is connected to various ball entry detection switches such as the general winning switch 221a, the large winning slot count switch 222, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, and the through gate switch 225; various boards such as the power supply/launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the sub-control device 262; information display devices such as the hold display devices 46A and 46B and the normal hold display device 44; a solenoid that operates the variable winning device 32A; and a solenoid that operates the second start winning unit 33WB. In other words, the main control device 261 is provided with multiple terminals (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminals and the like constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) serving as the control unit (sub-control unit) comprises a CPU 551, which is an arithmetic unit; a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551; a RAM 553 that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 552 are executed; an input/output port 554; a bus line 555; and various other circuits, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown).

RAM 553 is provided with a game information storage area for storing various game information (game data). The game information storage area, which serves as a history information storage area, stores game history information such as the number of times a variable display has been executed (number of starts) and the number of jackpots, as well as execution history information indicating that a specific effect such as a premium effect has been executed, and, when a jackpot variable display is executed, execution history information related to the jackpot variable display (such as the type of effect executed in the jackpot variable display and the type of jackpot stop symbol). Of course, the configuration may also be such that the number of times a variable display has been executed in which various effects such as a school of fish effect have been executed is stored, not just in the case of a jackpot variable display, but also in the case of a miss variable display.

More specifically, the sub-controller 262 updates various counters based on commands sent from the main controller 261, and stores these in the game status information storage area of RAM 553.

For example, when the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 261, it increments the values of the total start counter and the inter-jackpot start counter set in the game information storage area by 1.

The total start counter counts the number of times (starts) the variable display has been executed in this pachinko machine 10 from the time the power was turned on until the present time. The inter-jackpot start counter counts the number of times the variable display has been executed in this pachinko machine 10 from the end of the previous jackpot state until the present time.

In addition, when the sub-controller 262 receives an opening command from the main controller 261 indicating the start of a jackpot state, it increments the values of the total jackpot counter and consecutive jackpot counter set in the game information storage area by one.

The total jackpot counter counts the number of jackpots that have been executed on this pachinko machine 10 from the time the power was turned on until the present time. The consecutive jackpot counter counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have been executed without returning to the normal state from the first jackpot (number of consecutive wins). Note that a "first jackpot" refers to a jackpot won in the normal state with a low ball entry state (low support state).

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 via the bus line 555. Furthermore, the input/output port 554 is also connected to the display control device 45, speaker SP, effect buttons 125, cross key 126 (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d, and center button 126e), illumination units 102-104, and error indicator lamp 105.

The CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines the performance content based on command signals (e.g., variation pattern commands) sent from the main controller 261, and controls the output of various information to the performance display device 42, speaker SP, illumination units 102-104, etc.

More specifically, the sub-controller 262 causes the display controller 45 to execute display control related to the performance display device 42 based on a command signal transmitted from the main controller 261, and causes the performance display device 42 to output specified image information.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B controlled by the main control device 261 indicate that various winning conditions have been met by winning, and the effect display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 displays decorative pattern changes in accordance with the display of special pattern changes on the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B.

In addition, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262, which serves as the operating unit, reads out specific audio data from among the multiple audio data stored in ROM 552 based on a command signal sent from the main control device 261 (for example, in synchronization with the above-mentioned display control), converts the audio data into an audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to an amplifier (an amplifier that amplifies audio signals) built into the speaker SP, thereby outputting the specific audio information from the speaker SP.

Similarly, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 reads out predetermined light-emitting control data from among the multiple light-emitting control data (on/off pattern data) stored in the ROM 552 based on a command signal sent from the main controller 261 (for example, in synchronization with the above-mentioned display control), converts the light-emitting control data into a light-emitting control signal, and supplies the light-emitting control signal to a light-emitting control board built into the illumination units 102-104, etc., thereby turning the illumination units 102-104, etc. on/off and outputting predetermined light information.

The payout control device 311, which serves as the control unit (payout control unit), controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which serves as the calculation unit, is equipped with a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 that is used as work memory, etc.

Like the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261, the RAM 513 of the dispensing control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the CPU 511 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 513a.

RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is backed up. Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the configuration may be such that data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

Backup area 513a is an area that stores the values of the stack pointer, registers, I/O, etc. at the time of power outage so that when power is restored, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was turned off when power is turned back on if the power is turned off due to a power outage or other reason. Writing to this backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when power is turned off, and the values written to backup area 513a are restored by the main processing when power is turned on. Note that, like CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, a power outage signal SK1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of CPU 511 when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When this power outage signal SK1 is input to CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power outage processing.

The working area is provided with a payout permission flag that sets permission for the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag that is set when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received, and a command buffer that stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out prize balls. A specific command that allows the payout of prize balls is sent from the main control unit 261, and is turned on when the specific command is received, and is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before power was cut off is restored. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initial process of the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a payout restoration command that is sent when power is restored to the main control unit 261.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the dispensing control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the dispensing permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before power was cut off is restored, and it is also turned off when the received command is judged by the command judgment process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified storage area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands have been stored in all of the storage area, the buffer returns to the beginning of the storage area and the command is updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on these pointers.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, main control unit 261, power supply/launch control unit 310 (launch control circuit 312), payout device 358, CR unit connection board 314, etc.

The CR unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball dispensing operation unit (dispensing switch 121 and return switch 122) which is the operating unit on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the CR unit (card reader unit, ball dispensing unit) which is located to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, and the payout control device 311. When information regarding the player's ball dispensing operation to the ball dispensing operation unit or the CR unit is input to the CR unit and the game value balance is stored on a card, which is a recording medium inserted into the CR unit, the balance on the card is deducted and a payout request signal for the number of game balls corresponding to the deducted value is output to the payout control device 311. Note that the recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to card type, and may be coin type or stick type.

In addition, the payout control device 311 is configured to periodically (e.g., every 2 msec) output a CR unit connection signal to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310, indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected.

The launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310 permits or prohibits the launch of gaming balls by the launch device 60. The handle 18, payout control device 311, and main control device 261 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312. The launch control circuit 312 is also configured to be able to input from the handle 18 a dial position signal from the variable resistor indicating the rotational operation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation operation unit 18a, a touch signal from the touch sensor indicating that the player is touching the handle 18, and a launch switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b. The launch control circuit 312 is also configured to be able to input from the payout control device 311 a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the CR unit.

The launch control circuit 312 outputs a launch status signal to the main control device 261 on the condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, and a CR unit connection signal have been input, and the main control device 261 outputs a launch permission signal and a ball feed signal to the launch control circuit 312 on the condition that a launch status signal has been input. When a launch status signal has been input, the main control device 261 outputs a launch permission signal at 0.6 second intervals.

Furthermore, when a ball feed signal is input, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball feed device 63 to a predetermined operating state and send the gaming ball to the launch position. Furthermore, when a preparation ball detection sensor provided in the ball feed device 63, which is capable of detecting whether a gaming ball is present at the launch position, detects that a gaming ball is already present at the launch position, the ball feed device 63 is not driven (even if a ball feed signal is received, the gaming ball is not sent to the launch position).

Furthermore, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) on the condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, a CR unit connection signal, a dial position signal, and a launch permission signal are input. This causes the gaming ball set in the launch position to be launched by the launch device 60 with a strength based on the dial position signal.

The power supply circuit 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each component of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control unit 261, dispensing control unit 311, etc. via a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24-volt AC power supplied from an external source, generates +12V power to drive various switches and motors, +5V power for logic, and backup power for RAM backup, and supplies these +12V power, +5V power, and backup power to the main control unit 261, dispensing control unit 311, etc. Operating power is supplied to the various switches, motors, etc. via the control devices to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the NMI terminals of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control unit 311 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and if this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and perform power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the 5-volt output, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value using a specified maintenance function for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage processing, even after the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage drops below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and dispensing control unit 311 can execute and complete the power outage processing normally.

The RAM clearing switch circuit 543 is a circuit that receives the switch signal from the RAM clearing switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 depending on the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clearing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clearing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clearing signal SK2 to the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on in the specific state in which the RAM clearing switch 323 is pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAMs 503, 513 of the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311 are cleared.

The display control device 45 executes the display of varying decorative patterns on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45, which serves as a control unit (display control unit), is equipped with a CPU 521, program ROM 522, work RAM 523, video RAM 524, character ROM 525, video display processor (VDP) 526, input port 527, output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. The CPU 521, program ROM 522, work RAM 523, and VDP 526 are also connected to the input port 527 via bus line 530. The VDP 526 is also connected to an output port 529 via bus line 531, and the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives display commands sent from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received commands, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 526 (generate internal commands for the VDP 526). This allows for display control in the performance display device 42.

The program ROM 522 is used to store various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and includes, for example, a program storage area and a data table storage area.

The program storage area is a storage area in which various control programs executed by the CPU 521 are stored.

The data table storage area is a memory area that stores display data tables that define the display content to be displayed on the performance display device 42 over time in various display performances executed based on commands from the main control device 261 (e.g., variation pattern commands), and additional data tables that define the display content to be displayed on the performance display device 42 over time in various additional performances (e.g., preview performances) executed by the sub-control device 262 in addition to various display performances executed based on commands from the main control device 261.

The display data table corresponds to an address, which represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a), and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time. Details of the display data table will be provided later.

The additional data table specifies the display content to be displayed over time for additional effects that are added to a display effect based on a command from the main control device 261 and displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a). Like the display data table, it specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time, corresponding to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for which one frame of image is displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a). Details of the additional data table will be given later.

One display data table and one additional data table are prepared for each type of display effect and each type of additional effect. For example, if there are 32 variable effect patterns that can be executed based on the variable effect pattern command from the main control device 261, one table will be prepared for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 display data tables. Display data tables prepared include those corresponding to, for example, miss variable display effects, various reach effects, re-variation effects, re-lottery effects, demo effects, etc.

Of course, when controlling the display of the performance display device 42, instead of using the display data table and additional data table to perform drawing processing, the additional data table may be omitted. In this case, the display content added on the sub-control device 262 side may be added to the display data table.

The work RAM 523 is used to temporarily store (set) various data tables read from the program ROM 522, as well as work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. For example, it has a display data table setting area, an additional data table setting area, a pointer setting area, a drawing list setting area, a drawing target buffer flag setting area, a command buffer, etc.

The display data table setting area is a storage area for setting a display data table corresponding to the effects to be displayed on the effect display device 42.

The additional data table setting area is a memory area for setting additional data tables corresponding to additional effects to be displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the effect display device 42 using the display data table set in the display data table setting area.

Here, we will explain in detail the configuration (drawing content) of each address in the display data table.

As described above, the display data table corresponds to an address, which represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a), and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite, which is the display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, as well as drawing information for displaying each sprite on the performance display device 42, such as the display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information, and storage information for each sprite.

The sprite type is information used to identify the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information used to identify the coordinates on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a) where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information used to specify the magnification ratio relative to the standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is determined by this magnification ratio. If the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when the sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value specifies the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite will be visible through it.

The alpha blending information specifies a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information specifies the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information specifies the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing it.

The storage information indicates the address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored.

For example, in a display data table for variable display, the drawing content for one frame specified for each address is one background image, multiple decorative patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects (character 1, character 2, ...) for each sprite.

Here, with regard to the "background image," the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the performance display device 42, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information remain constant over time, so only the "background type," which is information for identifying the type of background image, and the storage information are specified.

Background images for variable displays include, for example, background images for various stages corresponding to various game states, and background images for various reach effects, and the "background type" specifies information that specifies which of these will be displayed.

Based on this "background type," the CPU 521 identifies the background image to be displayed as the drawing target, and further identifies the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame over time.

In this embodiment, the display data table describes a case where only the "background type" is specified in addition to the storage information as the drawing content of the background image. However, instead, the "background type" and "position information" indicating which range of the background image corresponding to that "background type" should be displayed may be specified. This "position information" may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the background image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the CPU 521 will identify the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the background image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the "position information" was displayed.

The "position information" may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or display on the performance display device 42) based on this display data table began. In this case, the CPU 521 will determine the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the background image that was displayed when the drawing of the image based on the display data table began, and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image, indicated by the "position information," began.

Furthermore, depending on the "background type," the "position information" may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the background image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the performance display device 42) began, or, together with the "background type" and "position information," the type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time since the background image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display data table began) may be specified as the drawing content of the background image. Alternatively, the "position information" may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating the address where the range of the background image to be displayed is stored.

For "decorative symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...)," "symbol type offset information" is specified as symbol type information for specifying the decorative symbol to be displayed. This offset information represents the difference in the numbers attached to each decorative symbol. The reason offset information is specified rather than directly specifying the type of decorative symbol is because the display of decorative symbols in a variable effect changes depending on the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect and the stopped symbol of the current variable effect. The "symbol type offset information" from the start of the variable effect until a predetermined time has elapsed specifies the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect. This causes the variable effect to start from the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stopping pattern set by the sub-controller 262 is specified based on commands from the main controller 261, etc. This allows the fluctuation performance to stop at the stopping pattern corresponding to the stopping type specified by the sub-controller 262.

In addition, each decorative pattern is assigned a unique number, so the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the sub-controller 262 are managed by the number assigned to the decorative pattern.Furthermore, by representing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to the various decorative patterns, the decorative pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time period during which the "symbol type offset information" is switched from the offset information for the stopped symbols in the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols in the current variable effect is set to be the time during which the decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing state. While the decorative symbols serving as the action target are displayed in a rapidly changing state, they are invisible to the player. Therefore, by switching the "symbol type offset information" from the offset information for the stopped symbols in the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols in the current variable effect during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers in the decorative symbols is interrupted, the player will not be aware of the interruption.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," specifies "Start" information, which indicates the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table specifies "End" information, which indicates the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is specified and the address where the "End" information is specified, drawing content is specified that corresponds to the presentation style to be specified in that display data table.

In response to a command sent from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 selects the display data table to use from multiple display data tables, reads the selected display data table from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area), sets it in the work RAM 523 (display data table setting area), and initializes the value of the table pointer set in the pointer setting area.

Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the update function unit increments the value of the table pointer by one, and identifies the image content to be drawn next based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area, creating a drawing list (described below). The CPU 521 instructs the VDP 526 to draw that image by sending this drawing list to the VDP 526. As a result, as the table pointer is updated, the drawing content is specified in chronological order in the order specified in the display data table, and the image specified in that display data table is displayed on the performance display device 42.

Next, we will explain in detail the configuration (drawing content) of each address in the additional data table.

As described above, the additional data table specifies the display content to be displayed over time for additional effects that are added to a display effect based on a command from the main control unit 261 and displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a).

Here, "adding to one display performance" means changing the display content of one display performance based on a command from the main control device 261, and includes concepts such as, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one display performance and overlaying another performance on that display performance, changing the color tone of part or all of that display performance, or changing the image displayed in that display performance.

In other words, the additional data table predefines the drawing content required to add and display images that are not normally displayed to a display performance displayed by the display data table selected by the sub-controller 262 based on commands from the main controller 261, the drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of that display performance, and the drawing content required to change and display an image displayed in that display performance.

Here, we will explain the case where the display content for displaying a preview effect that is displayed in addition to the variable effect displayed by the display data table for variable display selected by the sub-controller 262 based on the variable pattern command from the main controller 261 is specified by an additional data table.

Additional data tables are prepared to correspond to preview effects that are added to variable effects. For example, additional data tables corresponding to "bubble effects" and "school of fish effects," which are display modes of preview effects, are stored in the data table storage area.

This additional data table specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is an additional display object to be displayed in one frame of image, and also specifies drawing information for the sprite to be drawn on the performance display device 42, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the sprite type.

On the other hand, if there is no object to be added at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the additional data table will specify null data, which means that there is no object to be added corresponding to that address.

The first address of the additional data table, "0000H," specifies "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the final address of the additional data table specifies "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is specified and the address where the "End" information is specified, drawing content corresponding to the presentation style to be specified in that additional data table is specified.

Based on the display command from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 determines whether there are any additional effects to be displayed in addition to the display effects output to the effect display device 42 using the display data table set in the display data table setting area. If there are any additional effects to be displayed, the CPU 521 reads the additional data table corresponding to that effect mode from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area) and sets the additional data table in the work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area).

For example, when the CPU 521 receives a display command related to a specified preview performance from the sub-control device 262, it selects an additional data table corresponding to the preview mode indicated by the command, reads the selected additional data table from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area), and sets it in the work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area).

In addition, when the CPU 521 sets a display data table in the display data table setting area, it first clears the contents of the additional data table setting area by writing null data, which means that there are no additional objects to be displayed.

Then, each time the table pointer is updated, the CPU 521 creates a drawing list that defines the image drawing instructions for the VDP 526 based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

In addition, if the information specified by the address indicated by the table pointer in the additional data table is "End" information, or if the table pointer points to an address not specified in the additional data table, it is determined that there are no objects to add, and a drawing list is generated based on the various sprites specified in the display data table.

The CPU 521 then sends the generated drawing list to the VDP 526, instructing the VDP 526 to draw the image. As a result, as the table pointer is updated, the drawing content is identified in chronological order in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing content specified in the additional data table is added, so that the image specified in the display data table and additional data table is displayed on the performance display device 42.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the display control device 45 displays another effect image (e.g., a preview effect image) in addition to the effect image (e.g., a variable effect image) to be displayed on the effect display device 42 in response to a command sent from the sub-control device 262, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be added and displayed can be set in the additional data table setting area, so that the other effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed.

If no additional data table is set in the additional data table setting area, null data is set in the additional data table setting area, and the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed as is on the effect display device 42.

For example, if there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of additional effect images to be displayed, and a separate display data table defining images in which the other effect images are overlaid on each original effect image is prepared, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables would have to be prepared. However, by separately defining data tables corresponding to the other effect images as additional data tables, as in this embodiment, only 32 + 5 = 37 types of display and additional data tables need to be prepared, thereby preventing an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area. Therefore, data tables corresponding to a wide variety of effect modes can be stored within the capacity provided in the data table storage area, making it easy to further diversify the effect images.

Furthermore, by defining the other effect images to be displayed as additional data tables, as in this embodiment, even if it is decided to display the other effect images to be displayed after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in work RAM 523 (display data table setting area), the other effect images to be displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed by simply setting the additional data table corresponding to the other effect images separately in work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area) without changing the display data table set in work RAM 523 (display data table setting area).

In addition, since the additional data table is configured to have the same data structure as the display data table, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer can be easily identified from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area while updating the table pointer every time, and a drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily generated from these.

Therefore, even if the sub-controller 262 or the like decides to display another effect in addition to a single display effect performed based on a command from the main controller 261, by specifying the display content of that additional effect in an additional data table, it is possible to easily display a wide variety of effects using a small number of data tables.

The pointer setting area is a storage area for setting table pointers that specify addresses from which to obtain corresponding drawing content from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

When the display data table is set in the display data table setting area, the CPU 521 initializes the value of the table pointer to "0." Then, based on the vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as the "V interrupt signal") sent from the VDP 526 every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process is performed as part of the display content setting process of the V interrupt process (described below) executed by the CPU 521, and the value of the table pointer is incremented by one.

Each time the table pointer is updated in this way, the CPU 521 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area, and creates a drawing list, which will be described later.

As a result, the effects corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table setting area will be displayed on the effect display device 42, and if an additional data table is set in the additional data table setting area, the effects corresponding to that additional data table will be displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the effects corresponding to the display data table.

In addition, the effects displayed on the effect display device 42 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table setting area or the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

The drawing list setting area is a storage area for setting a drawing list that instructs the VDP 526 to draw one frame of an image. The drawing list is generated based on the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

Here, we will explain the composition of the drawing list in detail. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the VDP 526 to draw one frame's worth of images. For example, it defines the drawing information for each sprite, such as the background image, decorative pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), and reserved icon (reserved icon 1, reserved icon 2, ...) used in one frame of image.

As described above, the drawing information for each sprite includes, as storage information, the address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. VDP 526 retrieves the image data for that sprite from the storage area in character ROM 525 specified by that address and transfers it to video RAM 524.

The drawing information for each sprite also includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The VDP 526 performs scaling on the standard image generated from the image data for that sprite read from the character ROM 525 according to the magnification ratio, rotation according to the rotation angle, translucency according to the translucency value, compositing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction according to the color information, and filtering according to the filter specification information using the method specified by that information, and then draws the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The VDP 526 then expands the drawn image into either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer flag, which will be described later.

The CPU 521 generates drawing information for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area, and the content of other images to be drawn (such as reserved icons), and creates a drawing list by sorting the drawing information by sprite.

The address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where the sprite (display object) data is stored in the drawing information for each sprite is generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and additional data table, or the sprite type identified from the content of other images. In other words, since the storage area in character ROM 525 where the image data for each sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, CPU 521 can instantly identify the address in character ROM 525 where the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the drawing information of the drawing list.

In addition, the CPU 521 copies the other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) of each sprite's drawing information as is, as specified in the display data table and additional data table.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the CPU 521 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from those that should be placed furthest in the background to those that should be placed in the foreground, and sets drawing information for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, drawing information corresponding to the background image is set first, followed by drawing information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: decorative pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), and reserved icon (reserved icon 1, reserved icon 2, ...).

The VDP 526 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order set in the drawing list, which defines the image drawing instructions for each frame, and then overwrites the drawn sprites in the frame buffer of the video RAM 524. Therefore, in one frame of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed in the background, and the last sprite drawn can be placed in the foreground.

The drawing target buffer flag setting area is a storage area for setting a drawing target buffer flag to specify the frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer") in which the image drawn by the VDP 526 is displayed, from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer and second frame buffer) of the video RAM 524 described below.

If the drawing target buffer flag is "0", the first frame buffer is designated as the drawing target buffer, and if it is "1", the second frame buffer is designated. Information about this designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the VDP 526 along with the drawing list.

As a result, the VDP 526, which serves as the operating unit, executes a drawing process in which an image drawn based on the drawing list is displayed on the specified drawing target buffer. Simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, the VDP 526 also reads previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers this image information to the performance display device 42 as a video signal, thereby executing an image output process (display process) in which the image is displayed on the performance display device 42.

The drawing target buffer flag is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the VDP 526 along with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". This causes the drawing target buffer to alternate between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer each time a drawing list is sent.

The drawing list is also sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process executed by the CPU 521 is executed, based on a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 526 every 20 msec when the drawing process and output process for one frame of image is completed.

In other words, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image drawing and output processes are executed. 20 msec after the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer to be read and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer.

Then, after another 20 msec, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer to be read and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, by alternately specifying either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, every 20 msec, it is possible to perform the drawing process for one frame's image while continuously outputting one frame's worth of image in 20 msec increments.

The command buffer is used to temporarily store commands received from the sub-controller 262 and is composed of a ring buffer.

The video RAM 524 is used to display images to be displayed on the performance display device 42, and is equipped with two frame buffers (a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer).

The two frame buffers are each capable of storing one frame of image (one screen's worth of image). Here, one frame of image refers to one screen's worth of image displayed at one update timing in a configuration in which the image displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Specifically, each frame buffer contains a large number of unit areas, each corresponding to a pixel (dot) of the LCD display unit 42a at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area is configured to store data for specifying which color to display. In this embodiment, a full-color system is used, allowing each pixel to be set to 256 levels for each of the colors R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Correspondingly, in each unit area, one byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color. In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least three bytes.

In this way, by adopting a double-buffer system with two frame buffers (first and second frame buffers) in the video RAM 524, the VDP 526 writes a one-frame image created in accordance with instructions from the CPU 521 into either the first or second frame buffer, thereby displaying the one-frame image in that frame buffer. While the image is being displayed in one of the frame buffers, the VDP 526 reads the one-frame image previously displayed in the other frame buffer and outputs the image information to the performance display device 42, thereby executing a process to display the one-frame image on the performance display device 42.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read in order to display the image on the performance display device 42 are alternately designated by the CPU 521 as either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

In other words, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read, and image drawing and output processing is performed. 20 msec after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read.

As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer is read and output to the performance display device 42, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer.

Then, after another 20 msec, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read.

This allows one frame of image that was previously loaded into the second frame buffer to be read out and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is loaded into the first frame buffer.

After that, by alternately specifying the frame buffer that displays one frame's worth of image and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read every 20 msec, either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer, it is possible to perform the drawing process of one frame's worth of image while continuously outputting one frame's worth of image in 20 msec increments.

The character ROM 525 is used to pre-store image data for various images to be displayed on the performance display device 42, such as various background images and various sprites (decorative patterns, characters, hold icons, etc.), and has a pattern storage area, a character storage area, a hold icon storage area, a background image storage area, etc.

Here, the image data for each sprite includes at least a combination of bitmap data that defines the design, character shape, and pattern, and a color palette table that is referenced when determining the display color for each pixel in the bitmap image. Furthermore, image data for the background image is stored, for example, as JPEG data, which is compressed still image data.

The various background HGs described below may have any configuration. For example, they may be composed of only one piece of background image data (still image data) stored in the character ROM 525, or they may be a series of video data, or they may be composed of a combination of static background image data and static or dynamic image data (sprite data).

The pattern storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to the decorative patterns that are displayed in a variable manner on the performance display device 42. In this embodiment, pattern image data corresponding to nine types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" is stored.

The character storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to various characters displayed on the performance display device 42. In this embodiment, for example, multiple types of character image data corresponding to humanoid characters are stored.

The hold icon storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to the hold icons displayed on the performance display device 42. In this embodiment, multiple types of image data corresponding to hold icons are stored, such as the hold icon H461 (see Figure 1-44, etc.).

The background image storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to various background images displayed on the performance display device 42. In this embodiment, multiple types of image data corresponding to background images are stored.

Of course, a configuration may be adopted in which a portion of the image data stored in character ROM 525 is stored in ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which character ROM 525 is omitted and all of the image data stored in character ROM 525 is stored in ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that operates the liquid crystal drive circuit (LCD driver) that drives and controls the liquid crystal display unit 42a of the performance display device 42. It draws images based on drawing instructions (drawing list) from the CPU 521 and displays the drawn images on the performance display device 42 at a predetermined timing. In this embodiment, the VDP 526 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing.

The VDP 526 sends a V interrupt signal to the CPU 521 every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. The CPU 521 executes V interrupt processing each time it detects this V interrupt signal, instructing the VDP 526 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the VDP 526 executes drawing processing for the next frame of image, and also executes image output processing (display processing) to display the image previously developed by drawing on the performance display device 42.

More specifically, the VDP 526 draws one frame of image and expands the drawn image in either the first or second frame buffer, while outputting the one frame of image previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the performance display device 42, thereby displaying the image on the performance display device 42. The VDP 526 processes the drawing process of this one frame of image and the output process of this one frame of image in parallel within the image display time of one frame on the performance display device 42 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

In this way, the CPU 521 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from the VDP 526 and issues drawing instructions to the VDP 526, so the VDP 526 can receive an image drawing instruction from the CPU 521 at each execution interval (20 msec) of the image drawing and output processing. Therefore, the VDP 526 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing or output processing is complete, preventing the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image or the display of an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer where the currently displayed image is displayed.

Under the above configuration, when the VDP 526 performs drawing processing, it first reads the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 525 based on the storage information contained in the drawing list sent from the CPU 521, and then expands the read image data into a specified frame buffer in the video RAM 524.

In addition, when the VDP 526 performs image output processing to output an image to the performance display device 42, a video signal containing pixel information corresponding to each pixel of the LCD display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 is generated based on the image expanded in the first frame buffer or second frame buffer of the video RAM 524, and this video signal is output to the performance display device 42 via the output port 529.

More specifically, the VDP 526 outputs, as video signals, RGB signals consisting of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color information that indicate the color data of each pixel of the LCD display unit 42a, as well as synchronization signals for synchronizing the RGB signals with the LCD display unit 42a to the performance display device 42.

When the VDP 526 outputs video signals for one frame of image (one screen's worth of image) to the performance display device 42, for example, it first outputs video signals to each pixel in the same horizontal line, starting with the pixel in the upper left corner (first row, first column) of the LCD display unit 42a (m x n pixels), and continuing to the pixel in the upper right corner (first row, nth column) of the LCD display unit 42a. After outputting the video signal to the pixel in the upper right corner (first row, nth column), it then outputs video signals to each pixel in the same horizontal line, starting with the pixel in the leftmost part of the second row (second row, first column). In this manner, video signals are output sequentially from the top, from the leftmost pixel to the rightmost pixel, thereby displaying an image across the entire screen of the LCD display unit 42a.

Then, the VDP 526 outputs a V interrupt signal to the CPU 521 at the timing when it outputs a video signal to the last pixel in the bottom right corner of the LCD display unit 42a, causing the CPU 521 to recognize that updating of one frame of image has been completed. In this embodiment, the output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, the same as the update cycle of one frame of image. In other words, in this embodiment, every 20 msec that the V interrupt signal is output, output processing of the video signal for one frame of image is executed to the performance display device 42.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 conducts a lottery using various counter information during play. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1-8, the following are used: a win/loss random number counter CLH1 as a win/loss random number generating means used in the win/loss lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot state will occur; a type determination counter CLH2 used to determine the jackpot type (type lottery); a variable selection counter CLH3 used to determine whether or not a reach state will occur in the effect display device 42; an initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the win/loss random number counter CLH1; a first variable type counter CS1 and a second variable type counter CS2 used to determine the variable display time of the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B (effect display device 42); and a normal symbol random number counter CLH4 used in the start-up winning support lottery to determine whether or not the second start-up winning section 33WB will be opened. The variation selection counter CLH3 is also used to draw reach patterns when the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 are changed to a missing symbol. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used to select the effect pattern on the effect display device 42 (such as selecting the decorative symbol variation pattern).

Counters CLH1, CLH2, CLH3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CLH4 are loop counters that add 1 to the previous value each time they are updated, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching their upper limit. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

RAM 503 has a special variable reserve area where the values of the win/lose random number counter CLH1, the type determination counter CLH2, and the variable selection counter CLH3 are stored, and a normal variable reserve area where the value of the normal pattern random number counter CLH4 is stored.

The special variable reserve area includes a first special variable reserve area and a second special variable reserve area, each of which has four reserve areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special variable holding area, the values of the win/loss random number counter CLH1, the type determination counter CLH2, and the variable selection counter CLH3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history in the first start winning section 33WA.

In each holding area of the second special variable holding area, the values of the win/loss random number counter CLH1, the type determination counter CLH2, and the variable selection counter CLH3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history in the second start winning section 33WB.

In this embodiment, there is only one execution area for the special variable pending area, and the data stored in the first special variable pending area and the second special variable pending area is shifted to a common execution area when a variable display based on that data is performed.

The normal variable reserve area has four reserve areas (reserve areas 1 to 4) and one execution area. Each reserve area in the normal variable reserve area stores the values of the normal symbol random number counter CLH4 in chronological order, in accordance with the history of game balls passing through the through gate 34.

By adopting this configuration, the first variable display on the first special pattern display device 43A, the second variable display on the second special pattern display device 43B, and the variable display on the normal pattern display device 41 can each be held up to four times.

Explaining each counter in more detail, the win/loss random number counter CLH1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 599) as the closing value, it returns to the lower limit (0) as the opening value. Normally, when the win/loss random number counter CLH1 goes through one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win/loss random number counter CLH1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the win/loss random number counter CLH1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once per timer interrupt and repeatedly within the remaining time of normal processing. Meanwhile, the win/loss random number counter CLH1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the win/loss random number counter CLH1 is stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer. Then, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the win/lose random number counter CLH1 stored in the win/lose random number counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area).

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) does not change depending on the game mode (either "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"). The number of values of the win/loss random number counter CLH1 that result in a jackpot state is three, and the value is "7,207,407." In other words, based on the game ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, there is a 1/200 probability of winning the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery), and the jackpot state occurs.

ROM 502 contains a win/lose determination table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CLH1 corresponds to a win.

In this embodiment, there is a first hit/miss determination table corresponding to a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA (a first hit/miss determination table including a jackpot determination common to "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," and "time-saving B mode"), and a second hit/miss determination table corresponding to a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB (a second hit/miss determination table including a jackpot determination common to "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," and "time-saving B mode").

The type determination counter CLH2 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 19), return to the lower limit, 0.

ROM 502 contains a type determination table that is referenced when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter CLH2 corresponds to. In this embodiment, a first type determination table corresponding to a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and a second type determination table corresponding to a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB are provided.

If a jackpot is won in the lottery and certain conditions are met, the type of jackpot state to be awarded will be determined based on the value of the type determination counter CLH2 (a type lottery will be held), and the determined type of jackpot state will be awarded.

In this embodiment, if a player wins a jackpot in the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by a ball entering the first start-up winning section 33WA, regardless of the game mode ("normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"), there is a 40% chance that the jackpot will be a "15R jackpot," and a 60% chance that the jackpot will be a "4R jackpot."

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the ball entering the second start-up winning section 33WB, regardless of the game mode ("normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"), there is a 50% chance of a "15R jackpot," a 30% chance of an "8R jackpot," and a 20% chance of a "4R jackpot."

The type determination counter CLH2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the type determination counter CLH2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the type determination counter CLH2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area) of RAM 503.

The variable selection counter CLH3 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 238). In this embodiment, the variable selection counter CLH3 draws between three possible outcomes: a "reach/miss before/after" in which, after a reach state has occurred for a decorative pattern, the final stopping pattern stops just one symbol before or after the reach pattern; a "reach other than a miss before/after" in which, after a reach state has occurred, the final stopping pattern stops anywhere other than before or after the reach pattern; and a "miss (complete miss)" in which no reach state occurs.

ROM 502 contains a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variable selection counter CLH3 and various reach patterns.

The variable selection counter CLH3 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the variable selection counter CLH3 is stored in the variable selection counter buffer. Then, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the variable selection counter CLH3 stored in the variable selection counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area) of RAM 503.

Furthermore, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, one of the fluctuation type counters, CS1, is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 255, and after reaching its upper limit (i.e., 255), return to its lower limit of 0. The other fluctuation type counter, CS2, is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 31, and after reaching its upper limit (i.e., 31), return to its lower limit of 0.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the first special pattern display device 43A or second special pattern display device 43B and the general fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display on the effect display device 42 (reach patterns such as normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) are associated by a fluctuation pattern table, so that once the fluctuation time of the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the effect display device 42 is also determined.

For example, the variation time may be determined based on the first variation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B may be determined by the second variation type counter CS2. For example, when a "15R jackpot" is to be handled, one of the stop display modes corresponding to a "15R jackpot" is determined. Note that the counters used to determine the variation time and variation pattern are not limited to the above configuration, and can be changed as appropriate for each model.

Furthermore, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and are repeatedly updated during the remaining time of the normal processing. In this embodiment, with regard to the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer of RAM 503 are stored in the special fluctuation holding area of RAM 503.

In this way, by obtaining the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 at the timing of the start winning, the first fluctuation time of the stored first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display can be known (predicted) before the fluctuation begins, and this information can be used to perform various effects, etc. Furthermore, if a configuration that predicts the fluctuation time and performs an effect is not required, the buffer values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 can be obtained when the effect display device 42 determines the fluctuation pattern when the decorative pattern begins to fluctuate.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the win/lose random number counter CLH1, type determination counter CLH2, variation selection counter CLH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and that the values are not synchronized under any circumstances.

The normal symbol random number counter CLH4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 29, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 29). The normal symbol random number counter CLH4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter CLH4 is obtained when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 34.

When a winning value is obtained from the normal symbol random number counter CLH4, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable value for a predetermined period of time (after the normal symbol lamps that make up the normal symbol display device 41 flash alternately), and then the display is stopped in a manner (lighting pattern) that corresponds to the win, and the second start-up winning section 33WB is opened in a pattern that corresponds to the game mode at that time.

In this embodiment, in a "low ball entry state," the winning random number values are two: "0" and "1." On the other hand, in a "high ball entry state," the winning random number values are 28: "0 to 27." In other words, in a "low ball entry state," there is a 1/15 probability that the second start entry section 33WB will be open, and in a "high ball entry state," there is a 14/15 probability that the second start entry section 33WB will be open.

ROM 502 contains a support determination table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the normal symbol random number counter CLH4 corresponds to a win. In this embodiment, a first support determination table corresponding to a "low ball score state" and a second support determination table corresponding to a "high ball score state" are set.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261 will be explained with reference to flowcharts. The processes performed by the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is started when the power is turned on; timer interrupt processing, which is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment); and NMI interrupt processing, which is started when a stop signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then the main processing.

Figure 1-11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec.

First, in step SL301, the system executes a process to read various switches. That is, it reads the status of the various switches connected to the main control unit 261 (except for the RAM clear switch 323), determines the status of those switches, and saves the detection information. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, it proceeds directly to the next process.

For example, when there is ball entry detection information from the various ball entry detection switches (left general entry switch 221a, large entry port count switch 222, first start entry switch 224a, second start entry switch 224b, through gate switch 225), the values of the prize ball counters corresponding to the various ball entry detection switches provided in RAM 503 are incremented. Then, in the external output process of the normal processing described below (see step SL200), a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and prize balls are paid out based on this prize ball command. Furthermore, when this prize ball command is output, the values of each prize ball counter are reset.

In addition, during the switch reading process in step SL301, each ball entry detection switch (left general entry switch 221a, large entry slot count switch 222, first start entry switch 224a, second start entry switch 224b, through gate switch 225) is individually monitored and similar processing is performed individually.

The switch reading process for the ball entry detection switch will be explained in detail below, using as an example the switch reading process for the large prize entry port count switch 222, which detects the entry of game balls into the variable prize entry device 32A, which is one of the ball entry means.

First, the CPU 501 checks the signal level of the input signal from the ball entry detection switch (large prize entry slot count switch 222).

For example, under normal circumstances when a gaming ball has not yet passed the ball entry detection switch (large prize entry slot count switch 222), a high-level signal (H) of +12V is output from the ball entry detection switch (large prize entry slot count switch 222), and a low-level signal (L) of reference potential 0V is input to CPU 501 via an inversion circuit on the main control unit 261 side. On the other hand, when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means (large prize entry slot 32Aa of variable prize entry device 32A) and is passing through the ball entry detection switch (large prize entry slot count switch 222), a low-level signal (L) is output from the ball entry detection switch (large prize entry slot count switch 222), and a high-level signal (H) is input to CPU 501 via an inversion circuit on the main control unit 261 side.

Next, the CPU 501 performs a ball entry determination process to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the game. For example, if the signal level from the ball entry detection switch (large prize entry port count switch 222) switches from "L" to "H," the CPU 501 determines that a ball has entered the ball entry means (large prize entry port 32Aa of variable prize entry device 32A), and sets the value of the ball entry determination flag corresponding to the ball entry detection switch (large prize entry port count switch 222) to "1," which indicates ball entry detection information.

On the other hand, if the signal level remains at "L" or does not switch to "H", or if the signal level switches from "H" to "L", the CPU 501 determines that no ball has entered the ball entry means (large prize entry opening 32Aa of variable prize entry device 32A) and sets the value of the ball entry determination flag corresponding to the ball entry detection switch (large prize entry opening count switch 222) to "0".

The ball entry discrimination flag is a discriminator for determining whether or not a ball has entered the game, and is provided for each ball entry detection switch. This flag is used to determine whether or not a ball has entered the game in the second start winning process of step SL305, the first start winning process of step SL306, the through gate passing process of step SL307, and the variable winning device control process of step SL207, which will be described later.

However, in addition to the above series of processes, the ball entry determination process for the large prize opening count switch 222 (large prize opening 32Aa of the variable prize opening device 32A) also checks the value of the round end trigger discrimination flag, which can be set during a large prize state, as described below. If the value of the round end trigger discrimination flag is set to "M2," i.e., if the specified round (open state) has ended when the specified maximum number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 32Aa, then even if it was determined that a ball has entered the large prize opening 32Aa and the value of the ball entry discrimination flag corresponding to the large prize opening count switch 222 was set to "1," the value of the ball entry discrimination flag is reset to "0." This processing function constitutes the invalidity determination function in this embodiment.

In other words, even if a game ball enters the large prize opening 32Aa of the variable prize winning device 32A during a jackpot state and is detected by the large prize opening count switch 222, and it is determined that a ball has entered the large prize opening 32Aa, if the end of a specified round is triggered by the entry of the specified maximum number of game balls, then the interval after the end of the specified round (the period from when control to close the large prize opening 32Aa begins until the next time control to open the large prize opening 32Aa begins) will be an invalid prize-winning period, and the ball detection by the large prize opening count switch 222 during this period will be invalid, and the ball will be considered not to have entered.

Furthermore, when a specific state that is highly advantageous to the player occurs (a state in which game balls are allowed to enter the variable prize device 32A until the specified maximum number of prize balls is reached, allowing the player to win the maximum number of prize balls), it is undesirable to create any further states that are excessively advantageous to the player (for example, a so-called "over-prize" in which game balls exceed the specified maximum number of prize balls in one round during a jackpot state and enter the large prize opening 32Aa of the variable prize device 32A).

In contrast, in this embodiment, if the above-mentioned invalidation processing results in a specific state that is highly advantageous to the player (if the trigger for the end of a specified round is the entry of the specified maximum number of game balls), even if game balls are detected by the large prize opening count switch 222 (if an over-entry occurs) during the interval after the end of the specified round (from the time when control to close the large prize opening 32Aa is initiated until the time when control to open the large prize opening 32Aa is next initiated), the over-entry is deemed to have not occurred, and prize balls corresponding to the over-entry are not paid out. In other words, the number of prize balls actually paid out in a jackpot state can be kept from exceeding the planned number of prize balls.

In step SL302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SL303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the win/lose random number counter CLH1, type determination counter CLH2, variable selection counter CLH3, and normal pattern random number counter CLH4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter CLH1, CLH2, CLH3, and CLH4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503.

Then, in step SL305, the second start winning process is executed in response to the game ball entering (winning) the second start winning section 33WB, and in step SL306, the first start winning process is executed in response to the game ball entering (winning) the first start winning section 33WA.

Furthermore, in step SL307, a through gate passing process is executed in response to the passage of the gaming ball through the through gate 34. The following step SL308 executes a launch permission command setting process to perform processes such as sending a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 has a mode memory area that is referenced when determining the current game mode. The mode memory area stores one of the following values: "11" corresponding to "normal mode," "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode," or "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode."

In response to this, the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 also has a mode storage area that the sub-controller 262 references when determining the game mode. The game mode information set in the main controller 261 is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step SL200) each time the game mode is switched and set by the change means.

Next, the second start winning process of step SL305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 1-13. Note that RAM 503 is provided with a second pending counter Nb that counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB.

First, in step SL501, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the second start winning section 33WB based on the ball entry detection information of the second start winning switch 224b (the value of the ball entry determination flag corresponding to the second start winning switch 224b). If the determination in step SL501 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SL501 returns a positive result, step SL502 determines whether the value of the second reserve counter Nb is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment), i.e., whether the reserve is full, which is a special state. If step SL502 returns a negative result, the detection of a game ball by the second start winning switch 224b is invalidated by a predetermined invalidation determination function, and it is considered that no game ball has entered the second start winning section 33WB, and this process is then terminated.

On the other hand, if step SL502 returns a positive result and the specific condition is met, proceed to step SL503 and increment the second hold counter Nb by 1.

In the following step SL504, an additive display process is performed on the second hold display device 46B (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number in the second variable display by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right second hold lamps are off, the left second hold lamp is turned on; if the left second hold lamp is on and the right second hold lamp is off, both left and right second hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right second hold lamps are on, the right second hold lamp remains on and the left second hold lamp flashes; and if the left second hold lamp is flashing and the right second hold lamp is on, processing is performed to flash both left and right second hold lamps.

After step SL504, in the processing of step SL505, the values of the win/lose random number counter CLH1, type determination counter CLH2, variation selection counter CLH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 (the values stored in the win/lose random number counter buffer, type determination counter buffer, variation selection counter buffer, and each variation type counter buffer) are stored in the first available holding area of the second special variation holding area (win/lose random number memory area, win type random number memory area, reach random number memory area, and first and second variation type random number memory area). At the same time, the game mode when this second variation display starts is identified based on the values of the variation count counters A and B, described below, and the game mode information is stored in the mode memory area. After step SL505, the processing proceeds to step SL506.

In step SL506, a second win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CLH1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area corresponds to a jackpot.

Here, details of the second pass/fail determination process in step SL506 will be explained with reference to Figure 1-15(b).

First, in step SL5111, the second win/loss determination table common to each game mode is referenced to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CLH1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area matches any of the values corresponding to a jackpot: "7", "207", or "407". If a positive determination is made in step SL5111, then in step SL5112 the jackpot expected flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SL5111, this processing ends as is.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-13, in step SL507 following step SL506, if it is determined in step SL506 that the value of the win/lose random number counter CLH1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a second type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the type determination counter CLH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area.

The second type determination process of step SL507 will now be explained with reference to Figure 1-16(b). In the second type determination process, first in step SL5300, it is determined whether the jackpot expected flag was set to ON in the second hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step SL5300 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SL5300 returns a positive result, step SL5301 refers to the second type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CLH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area matches the value "0-9" corresponding to a "15R jackpot." If step SL5301 returns a positive result, step SL5302 turns on the 15R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SL5301 returns a negative result, step SL5303 refers to the second type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CLH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area is "10-15," which corresponds to an "8R jackpot." If step SL5303 returns a positive result, step SL5304 turns on the 8R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SL5303 returns a negative result, i.e., if the value of the type determination counter CLH2 is between 16 and 19, step SL5305 turns on the 4R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserved area in the second special variable reserved area, and then this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-13, in step SL508 following step SL507, a second fluctuation time determination process is performed to determine the second fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display. Here, if the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "normal mode," the second normal fluctuation time determination table for "normal mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "time-saving A mode," the second shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving A mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Furthermore, if the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "time-saving B mode," the second shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving B mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time determined here is stored in the corresponding holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area. However, the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in that holding area is not erased.

In this embodiment, the second normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode," the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving A mode," and the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving B mode" each have a "jackpot" table and a "miss" table.

In step SL509, which follows step SL508, the start command is set, and then this process ends. This start command includes fluctuation information (information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the second win/loss determination process, the second type determination process, and the second fluctuation time determination process, as well as information indicating whether the fluctuation display was triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, and game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SL200).

Next, the first start winning process of step SL306 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 1-14. RAM 503 is provided with a first pending counter Na, which counts the number of pending first variable displays triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA.

First, in step SL510, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the first start winning section 33WA based on the ball entry detection information of the first start winning switch 224a (the value of the ball entry determination flag corresponding to the first start winning switch 224a). If the determination in step SL510 is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SL510 returns a positive result, step SL511 determines whether the value of the first reserve counter Na is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment), i.e., whether the reserve is not in a full state, which is a special state. If step SL511 returns a negative result, the detection of a game ball by the first start winning switch 224a is invalidated by a predetermined invalidation determination function, and it is considered that no game ball has entered the first start winning section 33WA, and this process is then terminated.

On the other hand, if step SL511 returns a positive result and the specific condition is met, proceed to step SL512 and increment the first pending counter Na by 1.

In the following step SL513, an additive display process is performed on the first hold display device 46A (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number in the first variable display by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are off, the left first hold lamp is turned on; if the left first hold lamp is on and the right first hold lamp is off, both left and right first hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right first hold lamps are on, the right first hold lamp is left on and the left first hold lamp is flashed; and if the left first hold lamp is flashing and the right first hold lamp is on, processing is performed to flash both left and right first hold lamps.

After step SL513, in the processing of step SL514, the values of the win/lose random number counter CLH1, type determination counter CLH2, variation selection counter CLH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 (the values stored in the win/lose random number counter buffer, type determination counter buffer, variation selection counter buffer, and each variation type counter buffer) are stored in the first available holding area of the first special variation holding area (win/lose random number memory area, win type random number memory area, reach random number memory area, and first and second variation type random number memory area). At the same time, the game mode when this first variation display starts is identified based on the values of the variation count counters A and B, described below, and the game mode information is stored in the mode memory area. After step SL514, the processing proceeds to step SL515.

In step SL515, the first win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CLH1 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area corresponds to a jackpot.

Here, details of the first pass/fail determination process in step SL515 will be explained with reference to Figure 1-15(a).

First, in step SL5101, the first win/loss determination table common to all game modes is referenced to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CLH1 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area matches any of the values corresponding to a jackpot: "7", "207", or "407". If a positive determination is made in step SL5101, then in step SL5102 the jackpot expected flag for the corresponding reserve area in the first special variable reserve area is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SL5101, this processing ends as is.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-14, in step SL516 following step SL515, if it is determined in step SL515 that the value of the win/lose random number counter CLH1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a first type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the type determination counter CLH2 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area.

The first type determination process of step SL516 will now be explained with reference to Figure 1-16(a). In the first type determination process, first in step SL5201, it is determined whether the jackpot expected flag was set to ON in the first hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step SL5201 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SL5201 returns a positive result, step SL5202 refers to the first type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CLH2 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area matches the value "0-7" corresponding to a "15R jackpot." If step SL5202 returns a positive result, step SL5203 turns on the 15R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the first special variable reserve area, and then ends this processing.

On the other hand, if step SL5202 returns a negative result, i.e., if the value of the type determination counter CLH2 is between 8 and 19, step SL5204 turns on the 4R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserved area in the first special variable reserved area, and then this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-14, in step SL517 following step SL516, if it is determined in step SL515 that the value of the hit/miss random number counter CLH1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot (a miss), a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the variable selection counter CLH3 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area.

The reach determination process of step SL517 will now be explained with reference to Figure 1-17. First, in step SL5401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot expected flag was set in the first hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step SL5401 is affirmative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SL5401 returns a negative result, i.e., if a miss occurs, step SL5402 refers to the reach determination table to determine whether the value of the fluctuation selection counter CLH3 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either the value "0" or "1" corresponding to a "front or rear miss reach." If step SL5402 returns a positive result, step SL5403 turns on the front or rear flag, indicating the occurrence of a front or rear miss reach, and then ends this processing.

On the other hand, if step SL5402 returns a negative result, step SL5404 refers to the reach determination table to determine whether the value of the variable selection counter CLH3 newly stored in the special variable pending area matches any of the values "2-21" corresponding to a "reach other than a miss before or after." If step SL5404 returns a positive result, step SL5405 turns on the non-reach before or after flag, and then this processing ends.

Also, if step SL5404 returns a negative result, meaning the variable display ends without going through a reach state (a "complete miss"), this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-14, in step SL518 following step SL517, a first fluctuation time determination process is performed to determine the first fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display. Here, if the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "normal mode," the first normal fluctuation time determination table for "normal mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "time-saving A mode," the first shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving A mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "time-saving B mode," the first shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving B mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time determined here is stored in the corresponding holding area among the first special fluctuation holding areas. However, the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in this holding area is not erased.

In this embodiment, the first normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode," the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode," and the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" are provided with tables for "jackpot," "front and rear miss reach," "non-front and rear miss reach," and "complete miss," respectively.

Furthermore, for example, with regard to the fluctuation time determination table for a "complete miss," it is possible to provide fluctuation time determination tables such as "for 1 and 2 reserved items (normal fluctuation time)," "for 3 reserved items (reduced fluctuation time)," and "for 4 reserved items (reduced fluctuation time)," and to change the fluctuation time determination table (fluctuation time) referenced depending on the number of reserved fluctuation displays stored in the first special variable hold area. This allows the shortened time of the first variable display for a miss to be set depending on the number of reserved first variable displays scheduled for execution at that time in a specified operating state where the reserved first variable displays are being executed sequentially. Here, for example, in a situation where the fluctuation time determination table for "4 reserved items" is referenced when executing a specified variable display, if the variable display corresponds to a variety of wins such as a jackpot, the fluctuation time determination table for "jackpot" may be prioritized.

After step SL518, in step SL519, the start command is set and the process ends. This start command includes fluctuation information (information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the first hit/miss determination process, first type determination process, reach determination process, and first fluctuation time determination process, as well as information indicating whether the fluctuation display was triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, and game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display, which is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SL200).

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start winning section 33WA, 33WB, the value of the win/lose random number counter CLH1, etc. is directly stored in the special variable hold area, and then the win/lose determination process, etc. is executed, but this configuration is not limited to this. For example, a temporary memory area may be provided to temporarily store the value of the win/lose random number counter CLH1, etc. when it is obtained, and the information stored in the temporary memory area may be stored in the hold area of the corresponding special variable hold area after the win/lose determination process, etc. is executed.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SL307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 1-18.

In step SL601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the ball entry detection information of the through gate switch 225 (the value of the ball entry determination flag corresponding to the through gate switch 225). If the determination in step SL601 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SL601 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34, step SL602 determines whether the value of the normal hold counter Nd, which counts the number of reserved variable displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative judgment is made here, this processing ends as is. On the other hand, if step SL602 returns a positive judgment and a specific condition is met, i.e., if it is confirmed that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34 and the value of the normal hold counter Nd is < 4, proceed to step SL603 and increment the normal hold counter Nd by 1.

Furthermore, in the following step SL604, an additive display process is performed on the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of one in the hold number displayed in the variable display on the normal pattern display device 41. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are off, the left normal hold lamp is turned on; if the left normal hold lamp is on and the right normal hold lamp is off, both left and right normal hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right normal hold lamps are on, the right normal hold lamp is left on and the left normal hold lamp is flashed; and if the left normal hold lamp is flashing and the right normal hold lamp is on, both left and right normal hold lamps are flashed.

After step SL604, in step SL605, a random number related to the win or loss is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CLH4 updated in the random number update process in step SL303 above is stored in the first free memory area in the normal variable reserve area of RAM 503. Then, the through gate passing process ends.

Next, the launch permission command setting process in step SL308 will be explained with reference to Figure 1-19.

First, in step SL701, it is determined whether the launch permission flag, which indicates that a launch status signal is being received from the launch control circuit 312, is set to on. The launch status signal is sent from the launch control circuit 312 to the main control unit 261 when the launch control circuit 312 receives a touch signal from the handle 18, a launch switch signal, and a CR unit connection signal from the payout control device 311.

If step SL701 returns a positive result, step SL702 determines whether a launch status signal has been received. If step SL702 returns a negative result, step SL703 turns off the launch permission flag and then terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if step SL702 returns a positive result, step SL704 determines whether the value of the launch timer used to measure the interval between launches of game balls is "0." If step SL704 returns a negative result, step SL707 subtracts 1 from the value of the launch timer, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SL704 returns a positive answer, then in step SL705, the main control unit 261 sends a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312. In the following step SL706, the launch permission flag is turned off. After step SL706, this process ends.

If the answer in step SL701 is negative, then in step SL708 it is determined whether a launch status signal has been received. If the answer in step SL708 is negative, then this processing ends. On the other hand, if the answer in step SL708 is positive, then in step SL709 the launch permission flag is set to on.

In the following step SL710, a ball feed signal is sent to the launch control circuit 312. Furthermore, in step SL711, the launch timer is set to "300", which corresponds to 0.6 seconds. This ensures that the game ball is set securely at the launch position by the ball feed device 63 before being launched by the launch device 60. Additionally, while the main control device 261 continues to receive a launch status signal from the launch control circuit 312, a launch permission signal is sent from the main control device 261 at 0.6 second intervals, causing the game ball to be launched by the launch device 60 at 0.6 second intervals. After step SL711, this processing ends.

When the launch control circuit 312 receives a launch permission signal from the main control unit 261, it determines whether it has received all of the touch signal, launch switch signal, and CR unit connection signal from the handle 18 and payout control unit 311, and if a positive determination is made, it drives the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) and performs a launch process to launch the gaming ball. The launch control circuit 312 also controls the launch device 60 to adjust the launch strength (launch speed) of the gaming ball based on the dial position signal. This allows the gaming ball to be launched by the launch device 60 with the adjusted strength.

In addition, when the launch control circuit 312 receives a ball feed signal from the main control unit 261, it checks the preparation ball detection sensor, which detects whether a game ball has been set at the launch position on the launch rail 61 where the game ball will be launched by the launch device 60, and if it confirms that a game ball has not been set at the launch position, it drives the ball feed device 63 and performs a ball feed process to set the game ball at the launch position.

Figure 1-12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control unit 261 at the time of power cut to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261. The CPU 501 then interrupts the ongoing control and begins NMI interrupt processing. In step SL401, the power outage occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the power outage occurrence information setting, and the NMI interrupt processing ends.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311, and this NMI interrupt causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, causing the CPU 511 to interrupt the control it was currently executing and start the NMI interrupt processing. The details of this processing are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 1-9. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SL101, initial setting processing is performed when the power is turned on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and a wait process is performed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-controllers (sub-controller 262, dispensing controller 311, etc.) to become operational. In the following step SL102, RAM access is permitted.

Then, data backup processing is performed on RAM 503 in CPU 501. In other words, in step SL103, it is determined whether RAM erase switch 323 provided on power supply circuit 313 of power supply/launch control device 310 is pressed (ON). If it is pressed, the process proceeds to step SL112 to clear (erase) the backup data. On the other hand, if RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the process proceeds to the following step SL104, where it is determined whether power outage information is set in backup area 503a of RAM 503. If it is not set, no backup data is stored, and in this case too, the process proceeds to step SL112. If power outage information is set in backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SL105. In the following step SL106, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, i.e., the validity of the backup is determined. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, so in this case too, proceed to step SL112.

In step SL112, an initialization command is sent to initialize the sub-controller 262, dispensing controller 311, etc. After that, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SL113, etc.). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, if you want to return the machine to its initial state when powering it on, for example, when the hall opens for business, you can turn on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 323 is ON, the system proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SL113, etc.). Similarly, if no power outage information has been set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the system also proceeds to RAM 503 initialization processing (step SL113, etc.). That is, in step SL113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step SL114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step SL111, and the system proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 323 has not been pressed (step SL103: NO), power recovery processing (processing upon recovery from power outage) is executed, provided that power outage information has been set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. That is, in step SL107, the stack pointer before the power outage is restored, and in step SL108, the power outage information is cleared.

In step SL109, a command is sent to return the sub-controller to the gaming state it was in when power was turned off. In step SL110, the used registers are restored from the backup area 503a of RAM 503. Then, in step SL111, interrupt permission is set and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 1-10. In this normal processing, the main game processing is executed. In summary, the processing of steps SL200 to SL211 is executed as periodic processing at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps SL212 and SL213 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step SL200, external output processing is performed to send control signals to each device based on the settings of the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B and the settings of the second start-up winning section 33WB, etc., updated in the previous normal processing, and to send output data such as commands to each sub-side control device.

For example, when starting a variable display for a predetermined period on the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B, a variable pattern command is sent to the sub-control device 262 to start a performance such as a variable display of decorative patterns on the performance display device 42. The sub-control device 262, which has input the variable pattern command, determines the display mode (variation time, performance pattern, etc.) of the performance display device 42 based on the various commands, and issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to display that display mode on the performance display device 42.

The variation pattern command contains information that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative symbols, such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach. Meanwhile, the sub-controller 262 stores a table that contains the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. Based on the variation pattern command, the sub-controller 262 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbols, and controls the display controller 45, audio, etc.

Here, we will explain the decorative symbol change patterns. A "normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the decorative symbol change display.

"Super Reach" is a reach pattern in which, while decorative symbols are being displayed in a changing manner (after a reach state is established), characters and the like are displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols, thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

"Special Reach" is a presentation mode that can be derived when there is a high probability of a jackpot occurring (in this embodiment, only when a jackpot occurs). During the display of changing decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative symbols, presentation patterns and characters that differ from those of the Super Reach are displayed, creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

"Complete Miss" is a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol display stops moving without any reach state being reached.

The sub-control device 262 also determines the stopping pattern (combination of stopping patterns) for the decorative pattern changing display on the effect display device 42 based on the change pattern and change time information included in the change pattern command. Information about the stopping pattern determined here is output to the display control device 45, and added to the display data table for the changing display selected as described above. Then, by performing an image drawing process according to the display data table to which information about the stopping pattern has been added, the stopping pattern is displayed as stopped on the effect display device 42 after the change time has elapsed. In other words, if a jackpot is won ("15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," "4R jackpot"), the changing display is displayed as a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern combination) consisting of the same numbers 1 to 9 that are all the same.

A combination of symbols that miss before and after corresponds to a "reach that misses before and after", where after a reach occurs, the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol. A combination of symbols other than a miss before and after corresponds to a "reach that does not miss before and after", where after a reach occurs, the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol. A combination of symbols that miss completely corresponds to a "complete miss", where no reach even occurs.

In addition, the main control device 261 may be configured to set a pattern command specifying one of a jackpot pattern combination, a combination of patterns that are not a front-to-back miss, a combination of patterns that are not a front-to-back miss, or a combination of patterns that are a complete miss, and output this to the sub-control device 262 together with a variation pattern command.

In addition, the external output process of step SL200 also involves processing to externally output various information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 240 in order to grasp the various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10.

For example, if the current gaming state is a jackpot state, jackpot signal 1 (high level signal) is output from the first terminal to the hall computer. Furthermore, if the current gaming state is a jackpot state or a high support state, jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) is output from the second terminal to the hall computer. This allows the hall computer to grasp the start and end of the jackpot state and the start and end of the high support state in the pachinko machine 10 that output the signal.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-10, in step SL201, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

In the following step SL202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SL203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Then, in step SL205, the second special display control process is executed. In this process, control is performed regarding the second special pattern display device 43B, and the jackpot determination, the variable display settings executed by the second special pattern display device 43B, and the effect display settings executed by the effect display device 42 are also performed. Details of this second special display control process will be described later.

Furthermore, in step SL206, the first special display control process is executed. In this process, control is performed regarding the first special pattern display device 43A, and the jackpot determination, the setting of the variable display executed by the first special pattern display device 43A, and the setting of the effect display executed by the effect display device 42 (such as the variable pattern of decorative patterns) are performed. Details of this first special display control process will be described later.

In step SL207, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this processing, control is performed regarding the variable prize winning device 32A. Details of the variable prize winning device control processing will be described later.

In step SL208, normal display control processing is executed. In this processing, control is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

In step SL209, the start winning section control process is executed. In this process, control is performed on the second start winning section 33WB, which has a blade member 33WBb that opens and closes. Details of this start winning section control process will be described later.

Then, in step SL210, it is determined whether power outage information has been set in the backup area 503a of RAM 503. If power outage information has not been set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step SL211 whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) has passed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already passed, it proceeds to step SL200 and repeats the processing from step SL200 onwards.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps SL212 and SL213).

In other words, in step SL212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SL213, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step SL201 above). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (255 and 31 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. The changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

Here, the execution time for each process in steps SL200 to SL210 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the win/lose random number counter CLH1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated in the same way.

Furthermore, if power outage information is set in the backup area 503a of RAM 503 (step SL210: YES), this means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step SL214 onwards is carried out as power outage processing in the event of a power outage. The power outage processing first prohibits the occurrence of interrupt processing in step SL214, then saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step SL215, and stores the value of the stack pointer in the backup area 503a in step SL216.

Then, in step SL217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (such as the dispensing control device 311). Then, in step SL218, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 503. Then, in step SL219, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

The processing of step SL210 is executed at the end of a series of processing steps SL200 through SL209 corresponding to changes in game status, or at the end of one cycle of processing steps SL212 and SL213 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, during normal processing by the main control unit 261, power outage information is checked at the end of each processing step, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing step is in progress, making storage easier. Furthermore, when restoring the state before the power outage, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is smaller, making restoration easier and reducing the processing burden on the main control unit 261. Furthermore, by prohibiting interrupt processing before data storage (step SL214), data at the time of the power outage is prevented from being changed, and the state before the power outage can be reliably stored.

Next, the first special display control process of step SL206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 1-20.

First, in step SL800, it is determined whether the value of the variable interval timer, which measures the remaining time of the variable interval (stop display confirmation period) set after the first variable display of the first special pattern display device 43A, is "0."

If step SL800 returns a negative result, i.e., if the time is within the variable interval period, step SL819 subtracts the value from the variable interval timer, and then the process ends. For example, if the variable interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the variable interval timer is set to 249 (or 250 if step SL819 is performed before step SL800), the variable interval timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec in this process, and becomes 0 after 1 second.

On the other hand, if step SL800 returns a positive result, i.e., if the interval is not a variable interval, step SL801 refers to the win status memory area (described below) to determine whether the current state is other than a jackpot state.

The jackpot state includes an opening period after the first special pattern display device 43A or second special pattern display device 43B displays a fixed stop in a specific manner corresponding to a jackpot, followed by an opening period until the variable winning device 32A is opened, a round period during which the variable winning device 32A is in an open state, an interval period between round periods during which the variable winning device 32A is in a closed state, and an ending period after the end of the final round until the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B can begin displaying a variable display.

In this embodiment, the hit status memory area stores "0" when in a state other than a jackpot state, and when in a jackpot state, stores "1" during the opening period and interval period, "2" during the round period, and "3" during the ending period. In other words, in step SL801, it is determined whether "0" is stored in the hit status memory area to determine whether the state is other than a jackpot state.

If step SL801 returns a negative result, i.e., if the jackpot state is in progress, this process is terminated. As a result of this process, in this embodiment, if the jackpot state occurs even after the fluctuation interval (stop display confirmation period) has elapsed, the first fluctuation display is not executed. During the jackpot state (from the start of the opening period to the end of the ending period), the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B maintains a specific stop state (stop display confirmation state) that is displayed as a fixed stop in a specific manner corresponding to the jackpot, using a predetermined specific stop function. In other words, the fluctuation stop state (maintenance of the stop display confirmation state) during the jackpot state is not achieved by control that changes the fluctuation interval (stop display confirmation period), but is achieved by skipping the symbol fluctuation display process through the processing of step SL801.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SL801, the process proceeds to step SL802. In step SL802, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is being performed on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to on. If the special symbol 2 display flag is set to on, the process is determined to be positive. If a positive judgment is made in step SL802, the process is terminated.

If the result of step SL802 is negative, proceed to step SL803, where it is determined whether the second pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, is greater than 0. If the value of the second pending counter Nb is greater than 0, it is determined to be positive. If the result of step SL803 is positive, the process ends.

If the result of step SL803 is negative, step SL804 determines whether the special pattern 1 display flag, which indicates that the first variable display is being performed on the first special pattern display device 43A, is set to on.

If step SL804 returns a negative result, meaning the game is not in a jackpot state, is not showing the first or second variable display, and no second variable display is currently being held, the program proceeds to step SL805, where it determines whether the first hold counter Na, which counts the number of first variable displays held due to a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, is greater than 0.

In other words, if the second special pattern display device 43B is currently displaying a second variable display or if at least one second variable display is stored in reserve, the first special pattern display device 43A is configured not to be able to start a new first variable display.

If step SL805 returns a positive answer, step SL806 subtracts 1 from the first pending counter Na. In the following step SL807, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the first special variable pending area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the first special variable pending area sequentially toward the execution area, with data in each area being shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SL807, in step SL808, a subtraction display process is performed on the first hold display device 46A (first hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of one hold number in the first variable display. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are flashing, the left first hold lamp is kept flashing while the right first hold lamp is turned on; if the left first hold lamp is flashing and the right first hold lamp is lit, both left and right first hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right first hold lamps are lit, the left first hold lamp is kept lit while the right first hold lamp is turned off; and if the left first hold lamp is lit and the right first hold lamp is turned off, both left and right first hold lamps are turned off. After step SL808, in step SL809, the first variable display setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SL805 above, in step SL811, standby display settings (such as setting a standby display command to be output to the sub-control device 262) are made to derive a display mode corresponding to a standby state in which no change display is being performed in the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B (for example, a mode in which only the first or second special pattern lamp from the right in the bottom row is lit), and then this processing is terminated.

In other words, in the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B of this embodiment, after the fluctuation stops, a predetermined stop state (stop display confirmed state) in which the stop pattern is displayed as a confirmed stop in a manner that indicates the result of a win/lose lottery (for example, a predetermined manner corresponding to a loss) is maintained by a predetermined maintenance function for a predetermined period (stop display confirmation period) that is a predetermined fluctuation interval, but when the predetermined period ends, the display mode is switched to a display mode that indicates a fluctuation standby state. Of course, it is also possible to configure the predetermined stop state (stop display confirmed state) in which the stop pattern is displayed as a confirmed stop in a manner that indicates the result of a win/lose lottery until the next fluctuation display starts, without entering a fluctuation standby state, by a predetermined maintenance function.

The display modes indicating that the effect display device 42 is in a waiting state for change include a first waiting display mode and a second waiting display mode. Upon receiving a waiting display command, the sub-control device 262 first sets the effect display device 42 to the first waiting display mode, in which the brightness is maintained and the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern changing display is maintained almost unchanged by a predetermined maintenance function, and may be configured to set a value corresponding to a predetermined time (e.g., a value corresponding to 30 seconds) to a waiting time measurement timer that measures the time since the first waiting display mode was derived. Furthermore, when the value of the waiting time measurement timer is decremented every predetermined time and reaches "0," the brightness of the effect display device 42 is dimmed and the display mode is simplified (e.g., no decorative pattern is displayed), in which case the second waiting display mode is set.

Here, details of the first variable display setting process in step SL809 will be explained with reference to Figure 1-21.

First, in step SL900, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CLH1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is "7," which corresponds to a jackpot. In addition, in step SL900, it may also be determined whether the first variable display, which corresponds to a jackpot, is being displayed by determining whether the jackpot expected flag in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set to on.

If step SL900 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SL901, where it is determined whether the 15R jackpot flag is set to ON in the execution area of the special variable pending area. If step SL901 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SL903.

In step SL903, a 15R jackpot pattern setting process is performed. The 15R jackpot pattern setting process is a process for causing the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 to execute a variable display and effect display corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area (the same applies to the various pattern setting processes described below). Here, the variable pattern table corresponding to the 15R jackpot is taken into consideration to determine the variable pattern (variable display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42, and variable pattern commands are set, etc.

Specifically, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process of step SL903 (the same applies to the various pattern setting processes of steps SL905, SL907, SL909, and SL910 described below), the mode memory area is first checked to determine the game mode. If "11," corresponding to "normal mode," is stored in the mode memory area, the first normal variable time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected as the first variable time determination table referenced when setting the first variable time. Furthermore, if "21," corresponding to "time-saving A mode," is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. If "31," corresponding to "time-saving B mode," is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected.

Then, the main control unit 261, using the function of the change means for varying the length of the first variable time, references the selected first variable time determination table and determines the first variable time based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area. The determined first variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable reserve area.

Furthermore, a reach pattern is determined based on the first fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern. For example, the first normal fluctuation time determination table for jackpots is referenced, and if the first fluctuation time is determined to be, for example, "22 seconds," a "normal reach" is set; if it is determined to be, for example, "30 or 35 seconds," a "super reach" is set; and if it is determined to be, for example, "40 seconds," a "special reach" is set.

In this embodiment, after a "normal reach (or super reach)" with lower expectations is performed, a "15R jackpot" that is more advantageous to the player may occur, or after a "super reach (or special reach)" with higher expectations is performed, a "4R jackpot" that is less advantageous to the player may occur. For this reason, if a first period of time (e.g., 40 seconds) of varying display is followed by a jackpot confirmation display and a jackpot state (e.g., a 4R jackpot) occurs, a second period of time (e.g., 22 seconds) of varying display that is shorter than the first period of time is followed by a jackpot confirmation display, and the display may transition to the first varying display sooner than if a jackpot (15R jackpot) had occurred.

Then, various information including the first variable display, the 15R jackpot, the determined reach pattern, game mode information, and the variable time are set in the variable pattern command. Furthermore, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process, the special chart 1 jackpot variable flag, which indicates that the first variable display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed, is set to ON.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reach pattern (either normal reach, super reach, or special reach) of the effect display device 42 is determined on the main control device 261 side, but in order to reduce the burden on the main control device 261, the main control device 261 may not determine the reach pattern, and the variation pattern command may be configured to include information on whether it is the first variation display or the second variation display, information indicating the variation pattern (information that allows one to determine whether it is a 15R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, a reach that misses before and after, a reach that misses other than before and after, or a complete miss), information indicating the variation time, etc., and the reach pattern of the effect display device 42 may be determined on the sub-control device 262 side.

After step SL903, in step SL911, the special symbol 1 display flag, which indicates that the first variable display is in progress on the first special symbol display device 43A, is set to ON, and in step SL912, a value corresponding to the first variable time is set for the special symbol 1 display timer, which measures the remaining time of the first variable display. If the jackpot expected flag is then set to ON, in step SL913, the jackpot expected flag is set to OFF, and this processing is terminated.

If step SL901 returns a negative result, step SL905 performs a 4R jackpot pattern setting process. Here, the variation pattern table corresponding to the 4R jackpot is referenced to determine the variation patterns (variation display time, stop mode, presentation pattern, etc.) of the first special symbol display device 43A and the presentation display device 42, and variation pattern commands are set. Also, in the 4R jackpot pattern setting process, the special symbol 1 jackpot variation flag, which indicates that the first variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed, is set to ON.

After step SL905, in step SL911, the special chart 1 display flag is set to ON, and in step SL912, a value corresponding to the first variable time is set for the special chart 1 display timer. If the jackpot expected flag is then set to ON, in step SL913, the jackpot expected flag is turned OFF, and this processing ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step SL900, step SL906 takes into consideration the execution area of the special variable pending area and determines whether the front and rear flag (see reach judgment process in Figure 1-17) is on. If a positive judgment is made in step SL906, that is, if the "front and rear miss reach" is present, then step SL907 performs the front and rear reach pattern setting process (setting of variable pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, proceeds through steps SL911, SL912, and SL913, before terminating this process.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step SL906, step SL908 checks the execution area of the special variable pending area to determine whether the non-front and rear flag is on. If a positive judgment is made in step SL908, that is, if the result is a "reach other than a front and rear miss," step SL909 performs a non-front and rear reach pattern setting process (setting of a variable pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SL911, SL912, and SL913 are carried out, and this process ends.

Also, if the result of step SL908 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "complete miss," then step SL910 performs the miss fluctuation pattern setting process (setting the fluctuation pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SL911, SL912, and SL913 are performed, after which the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-20, if a positive judgment is made in step SL804, i.e., if the first variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SL812, where a subtraction process is performed on the special chart 1 display timer. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special chart 1 display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 6 seconds (6000 msec), the special chart 1 display timer is set to "1500", and is subtracted by 1 every 4 msec.

Next, the process proceeds to step SL813, where the value of the special chart 1 display timer after the above subtraction is used to determine whether the specified change time has elapsed. At this time, if the specified change time has elapsed, i.e., the value of the special chart 1 display timer becomes "0," a positive judgment is made in step SL813.

If step SL813 returns a negative answer, step SL818 performs a lighting switch display setting (special pattern 1 switching display setting) to continue the lighting switch display (first variable display) of the first special pattern display device 43A. Based on the lighting switch display setting settings, a control signal to perform lighting switch display is output to the first special pattern display device 43A in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This realizes the lighting switch display (first variable display) of the first special pattern display device 43A at the execution timing of the first special display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SL818, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SL813, the special symbol 1 display flag is turned off in step SL814, and the special symbol 1 stop display setting is made in step SL815 to display a stop on the first special symbol display device 43A. Based on the settings of this special symbol 1 stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop is output to the first special symbol display device 43A in the external output processing of the next normal processing. In other words, the first special symbol display device 43A will display a stop corresponding to each jackpot type, miss, etc. set in the first variable display setting processing.

Furthermore, after step SL815, in step SL816, a special symbol 1 stop command is set to the sub-control device 262, which causes the effect display device 42 to display a stop. This ensures that the stop timing of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 is synchronized. However, because the stop mode of the effect display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the variable pattern command output at the start of the variable display, there is no need to add information regarding the stop mode of the effect display device 42 again. Also, to reiterate, the stop display by the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B is the primary display, and the display of the decorative pattern by the effect display device 42 is merely auxiliary (for performance purposes).

Next, in step SL817, the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process is performed to set the initial winning status and switch game modes, and then this process ends.

Here, the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process in step SL817 will be explained with reference to Figure 1-22.

First, in step SL1001, the execution area of the special variable pending area is referenced to determine whether the special chart 1 jackpot variable flag is set to on.

If a positive judgment is made in step SL1001, the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SL1002, and the jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot state is in progress (the special chart 1 jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred in the first fluctuation display stored in the first special fluctuation pending area) is turned on in step SL1003.

Furthermore, in step SL1004, the round number counter Rx is set to a value corresponding to the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area ("15" corresponding to a 15R jackpot, or "4" corresponding to a 4R jackpot). Note that the round number counter Rx is used to determine the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32A is opened).

In the following step SL1005, a "1" is set in the winning status memory area. Furthermore, in step SL1006, a predetermined value (here, a value of "2000" corresponding to an 8-second opening period) is set in the special variable timer. The special variable timer is used to measure the control times related to various controls during the jackpot state (such as the opening and closing control of variable winning device 32A).

Next, in step SL1007, the prize counter Vx is set to "8," which indicates the maximum number of prizes allowed per round in a jackpot, 8.

The winning counter Vx counts the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32A. During the switch reading process (see Figure 1-11) of the timer interrupt process described above, the value of the winning counter Vx is determined based on the ball entry detection information of the large winning slot count switch 222 (the value of the ball entry determination flag corresponding to the large winning slot count switch 222) to determine whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32A. During the variable winning device control process (see Figure 1-26), the value of the winning counter Vx is decremented by one if it is determined that a ball has entered the variable winning device 32A.

Then, in step SL1008, an opening command (jackpot start command) is set to notify the sub-controller 262 that the jackpot state has begun. The opening command includes information such as the type of win, allowing the sub-controller 262 to grasp the total number of rounds in the win state, etc. (The same applies to the opening commands set in the various processes below.)

In the following step SL1009, the value of the normal mode duration counter (ceiling counter) is reset to "0". The normal mode duration counter is a counting means for measuring the duration of "normal mode" (up to 500 variable displays) without the occurrence of a jackpot, and as described below, is incremented by one each time a variable display is executed in "normal mode". In step SL1009, upon the occurrence of a jackpot, the value of the normal mode duration counter that has been incremented up to that point is reset to "0".

In the following step SL1010, the time-saving B mode activation flag (ceiling activation flag) is turned off. Then, this process ends. The time-saving B mode activation flag is determination information used to determine whether or not "time-saving B mode" has already been activated, and is set on when "time-saving B mode" is activated. In step SL1010, when a jackpot state occurs, the time-saving B mode activation flag that was set on is turned off.

If the answer is negative in step SL1001, in step SL1013, the variable interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable interval (e.g., 1 second).

When the decorative pattern variable display is executed on the effect display device 42, the decorative pattern variable display is basically displayed statically at the same time as the special pattern variable display device 43A, 43B displays the special pattern variable display statically, and the decorative pattern displayed as a fixed fixed display on the effect display device 42 continues to be displayed statically until the variable interval period ends (until the next variable display starts on the special pattern display device 43A, 43B). Then, when the variable interval period ends and a new variable display is reserved and stored, the special pattern variable display on the special pattern display device 43A, 43B and the decorative pattern variable display on the effect display device 42 start simultaneously. On the other hand, if a new variable display is not reserved and stored even after the variable interval period ends (the next variable display does not start on the special pattern display device 43A, 43B), the decorative pattern displayed as a fixed fixed display continues to be displayed statically on the effect display device 42 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 minutes), and then a demonstration effect display (demo screen display) described below is executed as a predetermined standby effect.

After step SL1013, in step SL1014, it is determined whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the "Time-saving A mode" is in effect.

If step SL1014 returns a positive answer, step SL1015 subtracts 1 from the value of first fluctuation count counter A. First fluctuation count counter A is used to measure the duration of "time-saving A mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until the upper limit is reached).

In this embodiment, after all types of jackpots have ended, a "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 or 10 variable play times is granted, and therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the first variable play counter A is set to "100" or "10."

In the following step SL1016, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0." If the determination in step SL1016 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SL1016 is positive, "11," indicating "normal mode," is set in the mode memory area in step SL1017. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "100" or "10," the predetermined game state, "time-saving A mode," ends and the game transitions to "normal mode."

After step SL1017, in step SL1018, a time-saving A mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving A mode"). Then, this processing ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step SL1014, step SL1019 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "time-saving B mode."

If a positive judgment is made in step SL1019, the value of second fluctuation count counter B is decremented by 1 in step SL1020. Second fluctuation count counter B is used to measure the duration of "time-saving B mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until the upper limit is reached).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the "Time-saving B mode" is granted for a maximum of 200 variable play times, so when the "Time-saving B mode" is activated, the second variable play counter B is initially set to "200."

In the following step SL1021, it is determined whether the value of the second variation counter B is "0." If the determination in step SL1021 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SL1021 is positive, "11," indicating "normal mode," is set in the mode memory area in step SL1022. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "200 times," the "time-saving B mode," which is the specified game state, ends and the game transitions to "normal mode."

After step SL1022, in step SL1023, a time-saving B mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving B mode"), and then this processing ends.

If the answer to step SL1019 is negative, step SL1024 determines whether "11" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "normal mode." If the answer to step SL1024 is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SL1024 returns a positive answer, step SL1025 increments the value of the normal mode duration counter by 1. Then, step SL1026 determines whether the value of the normal mode duration counter has reached its ceiling value (upper limit).

In this embodiment, the ceiling value is set to 500 times for the variable display, so here we determine whether the value of the normal mode continuation counter is 500 or greater. In other words, we determine whether normal mode has continued for 500 variable display cycles without a jackpot occurring.

If the result of step SL1026 is negative, i.e., if the value of the normal mode continuation counter has not reached the ceiling value (if the number of variable displays is less than 500), this process ends.

If step SL1026 returns a positive result, i.e., the value of the normal mode continuation counter has reached its ceiling value (500 variable displays), step SL1027 determines whether the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF.

If the result of step SL1027 is negative, i.e., if the "time-saving B mode" has already been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to on, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SL1027 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the "time-saving B mode" has not yet been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF, step SL1028 sets "31" in the mode storage area, indicating that the mode is the "time-saving B mode." In other words, setting processing is executed to activate the "time-saving B mode."

In the following step SL1029, the upper limit number of times "200" is set for the second fluctuation number counter B, and in step SL1030, a time-saving B mode start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "time-saving B mode," and in step SL1031, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned on. This process then ends.

Next, the second special display control process (step SL205) of the normal process (see Figure 1-10) will be explained with reference to Figure 1-23.

First, in step SL1600, it is determined whether the value of the variable interval timer, which measures the remaining time of the variable interval (stop display confirmation period) set after the second variable display of the second special pattern display device 43B, is "0."

If step SL1600 returns a negative result, i.e., if the time is within the variable interval period, step SL1619 subtracts the value from the variable interval timer, and then the process ends. For example, if the variable interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the variable interval timer is set to "249" (or "250" if step SL1619 is performed before step SL1600), the variable interval timer is decremented by "1" every 4 msec in this process, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if step SL1600 returns a positive result, i.e., if the interval is not a variable interval, step SL1601 determines whether the value in the win status storage area is "0," i.e., whether the state is other than a jackpot state.

If step SL1601 returns a negative result, i.e., if the jackpot state is in progress, this process is terminated. As a result of this process, in this embodiment, if the jackpot state occurs even after the fluctuation interval (stop display confirmation period) has elapsed, the second fluctuation display is not executed. During the jackpot state (from the start of the opening period to the end of the ending period), the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B maintains a specific stop state (stop display confirmation state) that is displayed as a fixed stop in a specific manner corresponding to the jackpot, using a predetermined specific stop function. In other words, the fluctuation stop state (maintenance of the stop display confirmation state) during the jackpot state is not achieved by control that changes the fluctuation interval (stop display confirmation period), but is achieved by skipping the symbol fluctuation display process through the processing of step SL1601.

On the other hand, if step SL1601 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SL1603, where it is determined whether the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is being performed on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to on.

If the result of step SL1603 is negative, meaning the game is not in a jackpot state and is not currently showing the second variable display, proceed to step SL1604 to determine whether the second pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, is greater than 0. If the result of step SL1604 is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SL1604 returns a positive answer, step SL1605 subtracts 1 from the second pending counter Nb. In the following step SL1606, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the second special variable pending area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the second special variable pending area sequentially toward the execution area, with the data in each area being shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SL1606, in step SL1607, a subtraction display process is performed on the second hold display device 46B (second hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of one hold number in the second variable display. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right second hold lamps are flashing, the left second hold lamp is kept flashing while the right second hold lamp is turned on; if the left second hold lamp is flashing and the right second hold lamp is lit, both left and right second hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right second hold lamps are lit, the left second hold lamp is kept lit while the right second hold lamp is turned off; and if the left second hold lamp is lit and the right second hold lamp is turned off, both left and right second hold lamps are turned off. After step SL1607, in step SL1608, a second variable display setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

Here, details of the second variable display setting process in step SL1608 will be explained with reference to Figure 1-24.

First, in step SL1701, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CLH1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is "7," which corresponds to a jackpot. In addition, in step SL1701, it may also be possible to determine whether the second variable display, which corresponds to a jackpot, is being displayed by determining whether the jackpot expected flag in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set to on.

If step SL1701 returns a positive result, step SL1702 sets the special chart 2 jackpot variation flag, which indicates that the second variation display corresponding to a jackpot is being performed, to ON. The following step SL1703 determines whether the 15R jackpot flag is set to ON in the execution area of the special variation pending area. If step SL1703 returns a positive result, step SL1704 performs 15R jackpot pattern setting processing.

If step SL1703 returns a negative result, step SL1705 determines whether the 8R jackpot flag is set to ON. If step SL1705 returns a positive result, step SL1706 performs 8R jackpot pattern setting processing, and if step SL1705 returns a negative result, step SL1707 performs 4R jackpot pattern setting processing.

As with the first variable display setting process described above, the various pattern setting process is a process for executing variable displays and effect displays corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area on the second special symbol display device 43B and effect display device 42. Here, the variable pattern tables corresponding to various wins are taken into consideration to determine the variable patterns (variable display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) of the second special symbol display device 43B and effect display device 42, and variable pattern commands are set, etc.

In other words, in each pattern setting process related to step SL1704, step SL1706, and step SL1707, if "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area as the second variable time determination table referenced when setting the second variable time, the second normal variable time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. Also, if "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. If "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected.

The main control unit 261 then uses the function of the change means for varying the length of the second variable time to reference the selected second variable time determination table and determine the second variable time based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area. The determined second variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable reserve area.

Then, various information including the fact that it is the second variable display, jackpot type information, game mode information, and variable time are set in the variable pattern command.

In this embodiment, the effect display device 42 does not perform a reach effect or the like corresponding to the second variable display. However, as described above, since the value of the variable selection counter CLH3 is stored in each reserve area of the second special variable reserve area according to the winning history in the second start winning section 33WB, the effect display device 42 may be configured to perform a reach effect or the like corresponding to the second variable display, as in the case corresponding to the first variable display. Here, as in the case of the first variable display described above, a reach with a lower expectation level may be followed by a jackpot state that is more favorable to the player, or a reach with a higher expectation level may be followed by a jackpot state that is less favorable to the player. In other words, if a first variable display is performed, a jackpot confirmation display is displayed and a jackpot state is generated, and then a second variable display for a shorter time than the first time is performed, and then a jackpot confirmation display is displayed, and the display may transition to the second variable display earlier than when a jackpot is generated. Here, for example, the player may select whether or not to perform a reach effect or the like.

After step SL1704, step SL1706, or step SL1707, in step SL1710, the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is in progress on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to ON, and in step SL1711, a value corresponding to the second variable time is set for the special symbol 2 display timer, which measures the remaining time of the second variable display. Thereafter, if the jackpot expected flag is set to ON, the jackpot expected flag is set to OFF in step SL1712, and this processing is terminated.

Also, if the result of step SL1701 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "miss," then step SL1712 performs the miss fluctuation pattern setting process (setting the fluctuation pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SL1710, SL1711, and SL1712 are performed, after which the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-23, if a positive judgment is made in step SL1603, i.e., if the second variable display is in progress, proceed to step SL1609 and perform the decrement process on the special chart 2 display timer.

Next, the process proceeds to step SL1610, where the value of the special chart 2 display timer after the subtraction is used to determine whether the specified variable time has elapsed. At this time, if the specified variable time has elapsed, i.e., the value of the special chart 2 display timer becomes "0," a positive judgment is made in step SL1610.

If a negative judgment is made in step SL1610, in step SL1615, a lighting switch display setting (special pattern 2 switching display setting) is made to continue the lighting switch display (second variable display) of the second special pattern display device 43B. Based on the settings of the lighting switch display setting, a control signal to perform a lighting switch display is output to the second special pattern display device 43B in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This realizes the lighting switch display (second variable display) of the second special pattern display device 43B at the execution timing of the second special display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SL1615, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SL1610, the special symbol 2 display flag is turned off in step SL1611, and the special symbol 2 stop display setting is made in step SL1612 to display a stop on the second special symbol display device 43B. Based on the settings of this special symbol 2 stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop is output to the second special symbol display device 43B in the external output processing of the next normal processing. In other words, the second special symbol display device 43B will display a stop corresponding to the various jackpots, losses, etc. set in the second variable display setting processing.

Furthermore, after step SL1612, in step SL1613, a special symbol 2 stop command is set to the sub-control device 262, which causes the effect display device 42 to display a stopped image. This ensures that the stop timing of the second special symbol display device 43B and the effect display device 42 is synchronized.

Next, in step SL1614, the special chart 2 discrimination information setting process is performed to set the initial winning status and switch game modes, and then this process ends.

Here, the special chart 2 determination information setting process in step SL1614 will be explained with reference to Figure 1-25. First, in step SL1801, the execution area of the special variation pending area is referenced to determine whether the special chart 2 jackpot variation flag is set to on.

If a positive judgment is made in step SL1801, the special chart 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SL1802, and the jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot state is in progress (the special chart 2 jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred in the second fluctuation display stored in the second special fluctuation pending area) is turned on in step SL1803.

Furthermore, in step SL1804, the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area are referenced, and a value corresponding to the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set in the round number counter Rx.

For example, if the 15R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter Rx is set to "15". If the 8R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter Rx is set to "8". If the 4R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter Rx is set to "4".

In the following step SL1805, a "1" is set in the win status memory area. Furthermore, in step SL1806, a predetermined value (here, a value of "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds) is set in the special variable timer. Next, in step SL1807, the prize counter Vx is set to "8," indicating the maximum number of prizes allowed per round, which is 8.

Then, in step SL1808, an opening command is set to notify the sub-controller 262 that the jackpot state has begun.

In the following step SL1809, in response to the occurrence of a jackpot, the value of the normal mode continuation counter that has been incremented up to that point is reset to "0", and in step SL1810, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned off. Then, this processing ends.

If the answer is negative in step SL1801, in step SL1813, a value corresponding to the variable interval (e.g., 1 second) is set in the variable interval timer.

After step SL1813, in step SL1814, it is determined whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the "Time-saving A mode" is in effect.

If the answer is affirmative in step SL1814, the value of the first fluctuation count counter A is decremented by 1 in step SL1815.

In the following step SL1816, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0". If the determination in step SL1816 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SL1816 is positive, "11", indicating "normal mode", is set in the mode memory area in step SL1817. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "100" or "10", the "time-saving A mode" ends and the system transitions to "normal mode".

After step SL1817, in step SL1818, a time-saving A mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving A mode"). Then, this processing ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step SL1814, step SL1819 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether "Time-saving B mode" is in effect.

If the answer is affirmative in step SL1819, the value of the second fluctuation count counter B is decremented by 1 in step SL1820.

In the following step SL1821, it is determined whether the value of the second variation counter B is "0". If the result of step SL1821 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SL1821 is positive, the mode memory area is set to "11", indicating "normal mode", in step SL1822. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "200 times", the "time-saving B mode" ends and the system transitions to "normal mode".

After step SL1822, in step SL1823, a time-saving B mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving B mode"), and then this processing ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SL1819, step SL1824 determines whether "11" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "normal mode." If a negative determination is made in step SL1824, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SL1824 returns a positive answer, step SL1825 increments the value of the normal mode duration counter by 1. Then, step SL1826 determines whether the value of the normal mode duration counter has reached its ceiling value (upper limit).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the ceiling value is set to 500 times for the number of times the variable display is executed, so here, it is determined whether the value of the normal mode continuation counter is 500 or more. In other words, it is determined whether normal mode has continued for 500 times of variable display without a jackpot state occurring.

If the result of step SL1826 is negative, i.e., if the value of the normal mode continuation counter has not reached the ceiling value (if the number of variable displays is less than 500), this process ends.

If step SL1826 returns a positive result, i.e., the value of the normal mode continuation counter has reached its ceiling value (500 variable displays have been reached), step SL1827 determines whether the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF.

If the result of step SL1827 is negative, i.e., if the "time-saving B mode" has already been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to on, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SL1827 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the "time-saving B mode" has not yet been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF, step SL1828 sets "31" in the mode storage area, indicating that the mode is the "time-saving B mode." In other words, setting processing is executed to activate the "time-saving B mode."

In the following step SL1829, the upper limit number of times "200" is set for the second fluctuation number counter B, and in step SL1830, a time-saving B mode start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "time-saving B mode," and in step SL1831, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned on. This processing then terminates.

Next, the variable winning device control process of step SL207 above, which opens and closes the variable winning device 32A, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 1-26.

First, in step SL1201, it is determined whether the value set in the hit status memory area is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the state is other than a hit state. If the determination in step SL1201 is affirmative, i.e., if the state is not a hit state, this process ends. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "1" is set in the hit status memory area in the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process or special chart 2 discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, if step SL1201 returns a negative determination, i.e., if the game is in a winning state (if the winning status memory area is set to one of "1" to "3"), the program proceeds to step SL1202, where the value of the special variable timer is decremented by 1. In the following step SL1203, the program determines whether the value of the special variable timer is "0". If step SL1203 returns a positive determination, the program proceeds to step SL1204, where the program determines whether "1" is set in the winning status memory area.

If step SL1204 returns a positive result, step SL1205 sets the win status memory area to "2." In the following step SL1206, the special variable timer is set to a value corresponding to the opening time of variable winning device 32A. In this embodiment, the value set is "7500," which corresponds to the specified maximum opening time of 30 seconds per round in a jackpot.

After step SL1206, step SL1207 performs an opening process to open the variable winning device 32A, and step SL1208 sets a round command to inform the sub-control device 262 that a round is about to begin. Then, this process ends.

Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step SL1204, step SL1210 determines whether "3" is set in the win status memory area. As will be described in more detail below, "3" is set in the win status memory area when all rounds in the jackpot state end and the ending period begins. If a negative determination is made in step SL1210, i.e., if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, step SL1212 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter Rx. In the following step SL1213, it is determined whether the value of the round number counter Rx is "0." In other words, it is determined whether the number of times the series of round opening and closing operations have been performed in the jackpot state has reached a specified number.

The timing at which each round period ends varies depending on the behavior of the game balls released by the player operating the handle 18 and the state of the nails and other elements placed in the game area. Therefore, each round period may end when the specified maximum opening time of 30 seconds has elapsed, or it may end when the specified maximum number of game balls enters the variable winning device 32A (large winning slot count switch 222) before the specified maximum opening time has elapsed.

Instead of the above configuration, the value of the round number counter Rx may be set to an initial value of "0", and in step SL1212, the value of the round number counter Rx may be incremented by 1. In step SL1213, it may be determined whether the value of the round number counter Rx has reached the specified number of rounds corresponding to each type of win (for example, "15" for a "15R jackpot").

If step SL1213 returns a negative result, i.e., if there are still rounds to be played (if "2" is set in the win status memory area), proceed to step SL1215 and set "1" to the win status memory area.

Then, in step SL1216, interval setting processing is performed. In this processing, the round end trigger discrimination flag set in RAM 503 is first referenced to determine what triggered the end of the current round (open state).

As described below, the round end trigger discrimination flag is set to "M1" when a predetermined state occurs in which the specified maximum opening time of "30 seconds" has elapsed after the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable prize winning device 32A has been switched from a closed state to an open state. On the other hand, "M2" is set when a specific state occurs in which the specified maximum number of winning balls, "8," has entered the variable prize winning device 32A (large prize opening count switch 222) after the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable prize winning device 32A has been switched from a closed state to an open state.

Here, if the value of the round end trigger discrimination flag is "M1," i.e., if the current round (open state) has ended due to the elapse of the specified maximum open time of "30 seconds," the special variable timer is set to a value corresponding to the interval period of the short interval, so that the inter-round interval becomes a short interval. In this embodiment, a value (e.g., "1") corresponding to the short basic time TA (e.g., 4 msec), which is the preset basic time for the short interval, is set.

On the other hand, if the value of the round end trigger discrimination flag is "M2," i.e., if the current round (open state) ends when "8" game balls enter the variable prize winning device 32A (large prize opening count switch 222), which is the maximum number of prizes allowed, the special variable timer is set to a value corresponding to the interval period of the long-term interval, in order to set the inter-round interval to a long-term interval.

However, in this embodiment, the interval period for the long-term interval is configured to be changed by lottery as appropriate.

In this embodiment, if a predetermined round (open state) ends due to an ending trigger that is less advantageous to the player (the specified maximum open time has elapsed), the interval period until the next round is set to a short interval to favor the player, allowing for a quicker transition to the next round. On the other hand, if a predetermined round ends due to an ending trigger that is more advantageous to the player (the specified maximum number of winning game balls has been won), the interval period until the next round is set to a long interval as a handicap to prevent any further advantage to the player, preventing a quicker transition to the next round. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, a player who ends a predetermined round due to an ending trigger that is more advantageous to the player is likely to release their hands from the handle 18 and temporarily suspend the firing of game balls during the long interval to avoid wasting game balls.

However, if the length of the interval period for long-term intervals is uniform, a player who finishes a specified round at a highly advantageous ending point will be able to determine the start timing of the next round by measuring time from the end of the specified round (the start of the interval period) and will begin firing game balls again at that timing, which could weaken the handicap effect that does not work to the player's advantage.

For this reason, in this embodiment, the interval period of the long-term interval is variable to multiple periods of different lengths, making it difficult for the player to know when the next round will start.

However, with this configuration, a player who has finished a given round due to a highly advantageous ending trigger will not know when the next round will begin, and will be forced to continue firing game balls without pausing during the long interval, which could result in the player being handicapped too much. In contrast, in this embodiment, as described below, a transition effect (see Figure 1-48) is performed to notify the player that the next round will begin when there is little time left in the interval period, thereby further increasing the player's interest by allowing the player to intervene technically and prevent a decline in profit margins.

The process for changing the interval period of a long-term interval is described in detail below. In this embodiment, the interval period of a long-term interval is the interval period of the short-term interval (short-term basic time TA) plus a predetermined additional time. During the interval period of a long-term interval, the period during which this "predetermined additional time" is executed corresponds to the specific stop state in this embodiment, and the processing function that executes this period constitutes the specific stop function in this embodiment.

Here, the "predetermined additional time" is the long-term base time TB (e.g., 2000 msec), which is the base time for the long-term interval, plus the predetermined extension time TC determined by the interval time determination process described below. In other words, the interval period of the long-term interval is the short-term base time TA + long-term base time TB + extension time TC. However, in this embodiment, as described below, there are cases where the extension time TC is "0 seconds," in which case the interval period of the long-term interval is the short-term base time TA + long-term base time TB.

The interval time determination process first determines the remaining time on the special variable timer (remaining time of the round). Next, a predetermined interval time determination table corresponding to the remaining time on the special variable timer is read from among multiple interval time determination tables stored in ROM 502 (see Figures 1-53(a) to (c)), and set in a predetermined area in RAM 503.

Next, taking into consideration the value (any value between 0 and 31) of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 still stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation pending area, one extension time TC is determined from the selected predetermined interval time determination table.

For example, if the remaining time on the special variable timer is "20 seconds or more but less than 30 seconds," the corresponding interval time determination table (see Figure 1-53(a)) is used, taking into consideration the value of the second variable type counter CS2, and if the counter value is "0 to 9," the extension time TC is determined to be "6 seconds." Similarly, if the counter value is "10 to 19," the extension time TC is determined to be "7 seconds," and if the counter value is "20 to 31," the extension time TC is determined to be "8 seconds."

Furthermore, if the remaining time on the special variable timer is "10 seconds or more but less than 20 seconds," the corresponding interval time determination table (see Figure 1-53(b)) is used, taking into consideration the value of the second variable type counter CS2, and if the counter value is "0 to 9," the extension time TC is determined to be "3 seconds." Similarly, if the counter value is "10 to 19," the extension time TC is determined to be "4 seconds," and if the counter value is "20 to 31," the extension time TC is determined to be "5 seconds."

Furthermore, if the remaining time on the special variable timer is "less than 10 seconds," the corresponding interval time determination table (see Figure 1-53(c)) is used, taking into consideration the value of the second variable type counter CS2, and if the counter value is "0-9," the extension time TC is determined to be "0 seconds." Similarly, if the counter value is "10-19," the extension time TC is determined to be "1 second," and if the counter value is "20-31," the extension time TC is determined to be "2 seconds."

In this embodiment, in order to simplify the control process, a predetermined counter value (in this embodiment, the value of the second variation type counter CS2) stored in the execution area of the special variation holding area until the jackpot state ends and the next variation display begins is diverted as the random number counter value used in the interval time determination process. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a dedicated random number counter (interval type counter) is provided for use in the interval time determination process may also be used.

More specifically, for example, the interval type counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 9, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 9). The interval type counter is periodically updated, and each time the interval type counter value is updated, the corresponding counter buffer (interval type counter buffer) stores the interval type counter value. The interval time determination process then obtains the interval type counter value stored in the interval type counter buffer.

When the extension time TC is determined as described above, the special variable timer is set with the value corresponding to the long-term interval as the sum of the value corresponding to the short-term base time TA (e.g., "1" corresponding to 4 msec), the value corresponding to the long-term base time TB (e.g., "500" corresponding to 2000 msec), and the value corresponding to the extension time TC (e.g., "250" corresponding to 1000 msec).

According to the above series of interval time determination processes (see Figures 1-53 (a) to (c)), when the specified maximum number of game balls (8 balls) enter the variable winning device 32A in a first time period (e.g., "20 seconds or more but less than 30 seconds (less than 10 seconds remaining)"), the variable winning device 32A (large winning opening shutter 32Ab) is configured to transition to the next open state more quickly than when the specified maximum number of game balls (8 balls) enter the variable winning device 32A in a second time period (e.g., "10 seconds or more but less than 20 seconds (less than 10 seconds remaining)") that is shorter than the first time period. In other words, the longer the time it takes for the specified maximum number of winning balls, "8", to enter the variable winning device 32A, i.e., the shorter the difference (remaining time) between that time and the specified maximum opening time (30 seconds), the shorter the interval between when the variable winning device 32A (large winning opening shutter 32Ab) is switched to the closed state and when it is switched to the next open state, becomes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the time until the specified maximum number of game balls (8 balls) enter the variable winning device 32A during a specified round (when the variable winning device 32A is in an open state) can be varied by using nails or the like arranged on the game board 30. Under this configuration, if the maximum number of game balls (eight) entered the variable prize-winning device 32A in a first time (e.g., 25 seconds), the transition to the next round would occur later than if the maximum number of game balls (eight) entered the variable prize-winning device 32A in a second time (e.g., 20 seconds) that is shorter than the first time. If the amusement hall adjusts the pins to favor the player, the shorter the time it takes for the maximum number of game balls (eight) to enter the variable prize-winning device 32A, the faster the jackpot game state will progress, and the player may win a large number of prize balls in a short period of time (the payout rate during the jackpot game state will increase significantly). This could result in a significant deviation from the gaming specifications required by the gaming machine manufacturer, causing significant disadvantages to the amusement hall. In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the longer it takes for the maximum number of game balls (eight) to enter the variable prize-winning device 32A, the shorter the interval period until the next round begins, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned malfunction.

After step SL1216, in the following step SL1217, the winning counter Vx is set to "8". Furthermore, in step SL1218, a closing process is performed to close the variable winning device 32A.

Here, a setting process is performed to de-energize the large prize opening solenoid of the variable prize winning device 32A in order to close the large prize opening shutter 32Ab. Based on this setting process, in the next external output process (see step SL200), a control signal is output to the variable prize winning device 32A (large prize opening solenoid) to close the large prize opening shutter 32Ab.

After step SL1218, in the following step SL1219, an interval command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that an interval has started, and this processing ends.

In this embodiment, two types of interval commands are used as interval commands, each corresponding to the value of the round end trigger discrimination flag. Specifically, if the value of the round end trigger discrimination flag is "M1," i.e., if the current round (open state) has ended after the specified maximum open time of "30 seconds" has elapsed, a short interval command is set. On the other hand, if the value of the round end trigger discrimination flag is "M2," i.e., if the current round (open state) has ended after the specified maximum number of winning balls, "8," has entered the variable winning device 32A (large winning slot count switch 222), a long interval command is set.

Now, if the above step SL1203 returns a negative judgment, i.e., if there is still time remaining for the variable winning device 32A to remain in the open or closed state (open time or closed time), then in step SL1221, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32A based on the detection information of the large winning opening count switch 222 (based on the value of the ball entry judgment flag corresponding to the large winning opening count switch 222). If the above step returns a negative judgment, the process ends.

Here, the maintenance function in this embodiment is constituted by the function of the main control unit 261 that executes processing such as step SL1203 above when there is remaining time for maintaining the closed state of the variable winning device 32A.

As mentioned above, if a ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch 222 while the variable prize winning device 32A is in the closed state (during the interval between rounds), the value of the ball entry discrimination flag corresponding to the large prize opening count switch 222 is reset, so that the function that executes the processing of step SL1221 above can determine whether the current time is during a round (open state) or during the interval between rounds (closed state).

On the other hand, if step SL1221 returns a positive result, i.e., if it is determined that a ball has entered the variable winning device 32A (large winning slot count switch 222) during the round (open state), the value of the winning counter Vx is decremented by 1 in step SL1222.

Next, proceed to step SL1223, reset the value of the ball entry discrimination flag corresponding to the large prize slot count switch 222 to "0", and then proceed to step SL1224.

In step SL1224, it is determined whether the current value of the prize counter Vx is "0." As mentioned above, the prize counter Vx is set to "8," which is the upper limit of the number of prizes per round (the specified maximum number of prizes) at the start of the jackpot state or the start of the inter-round interval.

If the result of step SL1224 is negative, i.e., if the value of the winning counter Vx is "1" or greater and the round is still in progress (open state), this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SL1224 returns a positive result, i.e., if the trigger for ending the round arrives before the specified maximum opening time for one round (30 seconds) has elapsed, step SL1225 sets the value of the round end trigger determination flag to "M2", and then the process proceeds to step SL1212. As a result, if the specified maximum number of winning balls (8 balls) enters variable winning device 32A during one round, the round will end promptly at that point, even if the specified maximum opening time (30 seconds) has not yet elapsed.

Also, if step SL1213 returns a positive result, i.e., if all rounds in the jackpot state have been played, the process proceeds to step SL1227, where the win status memory area is set to "3." Then, in step SL1228, the special variable timer is set to the value "2500," which corresponds to the ending time (10 seconds).

After step SL1228, step SL1230 performs a closing process to close the variable winning device 32A.

Here, a setting process is performed to de-energize the large prize opening solenoid of the variable prize winning device 32A in order to close the large prize opening shutter 32Ab. Based on this setting process, in the next external output process (see step SL200), a control signal to close the large prize opening shutter 32Ab is output to the variable prize winning device 32A (large prize opening solenoid). In addition, the value of the round end trigger discrimination flag is reset to "0".

In the following step SL1231, an ending command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that an ending has begun. This process then ends.

Also, if step SL1210 returns a positive answer, i.e., the ending period has ended and it is time to end the jackpot state, step SL1232 performs an end setting process, and then this process ends.

The termination setting process will now be explained with reference to Figure 1-27. First, in step SL1401, it is determined whether the special chart jackpot flag (either the special chart 1 jackpot flag or the special chart 2 jackpot flag) is set to on. If the determination in step SL1401 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SL1401 returns a positive result, step SL1402 stores the value "21" corresponding to "Time-saving A mode" in the mode storage area. This causes the game to transition to "Time-saving A mode" after the jackpot state ends.

In the following step SL1403, a time-saving A mode start command is set to the sub-control device 262 to start "time-saving A mode" (transition to "rush stage effect" or "battle stage effect").

In the following step SL1404, the first variable count counter A is set to the upper limit of "100" or "100" for the "Time-saving A mode" corresponding to the jackpot type, and the process proceeds to step SL1405.

In step SL1405, the jackpot flag (special chart 1 jackpot flag or special chart 2 jackpot flag) that is set to ON is turned OFF.

In the following step SL1406, the value "0" is set in the win status memory area, indicating that the state is not a jackpot state. Furthermore, in step SL1407, a jackpot end command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that the jackpot state has ended. Then, this process ends.

Next, the normal display control processing of step SL208 of the normal processing (see Figure 1-10) will be explained with reference to Figure 1-28.

First, in step SL2101, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern interval timer, which measures the remaining time of the interval (normal pattern interval) set after the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41, is "0." If the determination in step SL2101 is negative, i.e., if it is a normal pattern interval, then in step SL2116 the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted, and then the process ends. In other words, for example, if the normal pattern interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the normal pattern interval timer is set to "249" (or "250" if step SL2116 is configured to be performed before step SL2101), then in this process the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if step SL2101 returns a positive result, i.e., if it is not the normal interval period, step SL2102 determines whether the support period flag, which indicates that the second start winning section 33WB (blade member 33WBb) is currently being controlled to open and close, is set to on. If step SL2102 returns a positive result, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SL2102, in step SL2103, it is determined whether the normal pattern display flag, which indicates whether a changing display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41, is on. Furthermore, if the normal pattern display flag is on, it is considered that a changing display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41.

If a negative judgment is made in step SL2103, the process proceeds to step SL2104, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nd is greater than 0. If a negative judgment is made in step SL2104, that is, if no variable display is held on the normal pattern display device 41, the process ends. Note that, for example, if a negative judgment is made in step SL2104, a standby display setting may be made in the normal pattern display device 41 to derive a display mode corresponding to a variable standby state in which no variable display is being performed.

In other words, in the normal symbol display device 41, after the variation stops, for a predetermined period (the stop display confirmation period) that is predetermined as the normal symbol interval, a predetermined maintenance function will maintain the predetermined stop state (the stop display confirmation state) in which the stop pattern is displayed as a confirmed stop in a manner that indicates the result of the start-goal-scoring support lottery (for example, a predetermined manner that corresponds to a miss), but when the predetermined period ends, the display mode will switch to a display mode that indicates a variation standby state. Of course, it is also possible to configure the specific stop state (the stop display confirmation state) in which the stop pattern is displayed as a confirmed stop in a manner that indicates the result of the start-goal-scoring support lottery without entering the variation standby state until the next variation display begins, by a predetermined specific stop function.

On the other hand, if step SL2104 returns a positive answer, step SL2105 subtracts 1 from the normal hold counter Nd. The following step SL2106 executes a process to shift the data stored in the normal variable hold area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in hold areas 1 to 4 of the normal variable hold area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area shifted in the following order: hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Then, in step SL2107, a normal pattern change setting process is executed to set and start the change display of the normal pattern display device 41.

The normal symbol variation setting process will now be explained with reference to Figure 1-29. First, in step SL2301, the normal symbol display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol display device 41 is currently displaying a varying normal symbol, is set to ON. In the following step SL2302, the win status memory area is referenced to determine whether "0" is stored, i.e., whether the current state is other than a jackpot state. If step SL2302 returns a positive determination, i.e., if the current state is not a jackpot state, then in step SL2303, it is determined whether a value of "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current state is a high ball entry state (time-saving A mode or time-saving B mode).

If step SL2303 returns a positive result, step SL2304 sets the normal symbol display timer to "100" to set the normal symbol variable display time to 0.4 seconds. The normal symbol display timer is used to measure the variable display time (remaining time) performed by the normal symbol display device 41.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SL2302 or step SL2303, that is, if a jackpot state or a high ball entry state is not reached, then in step SL2307, the normal symbol display timer is set to "1500" to set the normal symbol variable display time to 6 seconds.

Then, in step SL2305, it is determined whether the normal symbol random number counter CLH4 in the execution area of the normal variable pending area is equal to the winning value (0, 1 in the "low ball entry state," or 0 to 27 in the "high ball entry state"). If the determination in step SL2305 is negative, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SL2305 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the start-goal-entry support lottery for determining whether or not the second start-goal-entry section 33WB will be set to the open state (open state) is won, then in step SL2306, the start-goal-entry support flag is set to ON, indicating that the start-goal-entry support lottery has been won and the specific condition has been met. After step SL2306, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-28, after step SL2107, in step SL2108, a subtraction display process is performed on the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the reduction of the hold number in the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are flashing, the left normal hold lamp is kept flashing while the right normal hold lamp is lit; if the left normal hold lamp is flashing and the right normal hold lamp is lit, both left and right normal hold lamps are lit; if both left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp is kept lit while the right normal hold lamp is turned off; and if the left normal hold lamp is lit and the right normal hold lamp is turned off, both left and right normal hold lamps are turned off. After step SL2108, this process ends.

Also, if step SL2103 returns a positive result, i.e., if the normal pattern display device 41 is displaying a variable pattern, the process proceeds to step SL2109, where the normal pattern display timer is decremented. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal pattern display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the program proceeds to step SL2110, where it determines whether the count value of the normal map display timer is "0", i.e., whether the variable time has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step SL2110, the normal map display flag is turned off in step SL2111, and a normal map stop display setting is made in step SL2112 to display a stop on the normal pattern display device 41. In other words, if the start-goal-entry support lottery is won (if the goal-entry support flag is set on), both of the pair of normal map lamps on the left and right of the normal pattern display device 41 are lit, and if the result is a loss, only the left normal map lamp is lit.

Next, proceed to step SL2113 and perform the general map discrimination information setting process. The general map discrimination information setting process is explained here with reference to Figure 1-30.

First, in step SL2401, it is determined whether the above-mentioned goal-winning support flag is set to ON. If the result of step SL2401 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SL2401 is YES, in step SL2402, the normal variable flag is set to ON to determine whether the second start-up winning section 33WB is in the open state.

In the following step SL2403, it is determined whether "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the high ball entry state (time-saving A mode or time-saving B mode) is in effect. If a positive determination is made in step SL2403, in step SL2404, the normal variable timer is set to "450" to set the opening time of the second start winning section 33WB to 1.8 seconds. The normal variable timer is used to measure the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning section 33WB.

Furthermore, in step SL2405, the opening count counter is set to "2" to open the second start winning section 33WB twice. The opening count counter counts the number of times (remaining times) that the second start winning section 33WB is to be opened.

On the other hand, if step SL2403 returns a negative result, i.e., if the mode is not "Time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)" or "Time-saving B mode (high ball entry state)," then in step SL2406, the normal variable timer is set to "50" to set the opening time of the second start winning section 33WB to 0.2 seconds. In the following step SL2407, the opening count counter is set to "2" to open the second start winning section 33WB twice.

After step SL2405 or step SL2407, in step SL2408, the above-mentioned winning support flag is turned off, and in step SL2409, the above-mentioned support period flag is turned on. Furthermore, in step SL2410, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state, and then this processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-28, after step SL2113, in step SL2114, the normal interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the normal interval period (for example, 1 second), and then this processing ends.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step SL2110, a lighting switch display setting is made in step SL2115 to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 (a lighting switch display in which a pair of left and right normal lamps are alternately lit). Based on the settings of the lighting switch display setting, a control signal to perform a lighting switch display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This realizes the lighting switch display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 at the timing of the normal display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SL2115, this processing ends.

Next, the start-up prize section control processing of step SL209 of the normal processing (see Figure 1-10) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 1-31.

First, in step SL2201, it is determined whether the support period flag is on. If the result of step SL2201 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SL2201 is positive, the value of the normal variable timer is decremented by 1 in step SL2202.

In the following step SL2203, it is determined whether the value of the normal variable timer is "0." If the determination in step SL2203 is negative, i.e., if the period in which the second start winning section 33WB is to be maintained in an open or closed state by the specified maintenance function is in progress, the start winning section control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SL2203 returns a positive result, step SL2204 determines whether the normal variable flag is on. If step SL2204 returns a positive result, i.e., if the second start winning section 33WB is currently in the open state and the time has come to change it to the closed state, step SL2205 turns off the normal variable flag. In the following step SL2206, the value of the opening count counter is decremented by 1, and in step SL2207, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the closed state.

Then, in step SL2208, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter is "0." If the determination in step SL2208 is affirmative, in step SL2209, the support period flag is turned off, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SL2208 returns a negative result, i.e., if there are remaining times among the multiple times the second start winning section 33WB has been opened, step SL2210 sets the normal variable timer to a value equivalent to the interval time (e.g., "250"), and then the process ends.

Furthermore, if step SL2204 returns a negative judgment, i.e., if the second start winning section 33WB is in the interval period between multiple openings (second start winning section 33WB is in the closed state) and the timing to end the interval period has arrived, step SL2211 sets the normal variable flag to ON. Furthermore, step SL2212 determines whether "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area. If step SL2212 returns a positive judgment, step SL2213 sets the normal variable timer to a value of "450," which corresponds to an opening time of 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, if step SL2212 returns a negative judgment, step SL2214 sets the normal variable timer to a value of "50," which corresponds to an opening time of 0.2 seconds.

After step SL2213 or step SL2214, in step SL2215, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state (open state). Then, this processing ends. Note that if the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state, and the specified maximum number of game balls (for example, four) enters the second start winning section 33WB, the second start winning section 33WB may be configured to immediately close (closed state).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, if a game ball passes through the through gate 34 during a special symbol variable play (either the first variable display or the second variable display), the opening control of the second start winning section 33WB (pair of blade members 33WBb) can be executed regardless of whether a special symbol variable play is being executed or not.

Next, we will explain the dispensing control executed by the CPU 511 in the dispensing control device 311. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the reception interrupt processing with reference to Figure 1-32, and then explain the main processing with reference to Figure 1-33.

Figure 1-32 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing executed by the dispensing control device 311. The reception interrupt processing is a process that is executed by interrupting when the dispensing control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261. When the dispensing control device 311 confirms that the command sent from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 within the dispensing control device 311 is temporarily put on hold, and the reception interrupt processing is executed.

When the receive interrupt process is executed, first in step SL3001, the command sent from the main control unit 261 is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513, and in step SL3002, the command receive flag is turned on to record that a command has been sent from the main control unit 261, and this receive interrupt process is terminated. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a specified storage area, and the storage pointer is updated so that the next received command can be stored in the next storage area.

In this embodiment, the reception process for a command sent from the main control unit 261 is performed by interrupt processing that is executed when the command is received. However, for example, in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 1-34, it may be possible to check whether a command has been received before the command determination process (step SL3201) is performed, and if a command has been received, store the command in the command buffer in RAM 513 and turn on the command reception flag, or proceed to command determination processing if a command has not been received. In such a case, it is possible to check the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals to check whether a command has been received.

Next, the main processing of the dispensing control device 311 will be explained with reference to Figure 1-33. Figure 1-33 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device 311, which is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SL3101, initial setting processing is performed when power is turned on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SL3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step SL3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Then, in step SL3106, it is determined whether power outage information has been set in backup area 513a of RAM 513. If power outage information has been set in backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SL3107, and in the following step SL3108, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, i.e., the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether keywords written in a specified area of RAM 513 have been saved correctly.

If power outage information is not set in step SL3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step SL3108, the process proceeds to RAM 513 initialization processing from step SL3115 onwards.

In step SL3115, all areas of RAM 513 are cleared to 0, and in step SL3116, the initial values of RAM 513 are set. Then, in step SL3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SL3114 to enable interrupts.

On the other hand, if power outage information has been set in step SL3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SL3108, processing upon power recovery (processing upon recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step SL3109, the stack pointer before the power outage is restored, in step SL3110, the power outage information is cleared, and in step SL3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared. In addition, in step SL3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SL3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SL3114, interrupts are permitted.

After interrupts are permitted in step SL3114, step SL3122 determines whether power failure information is set in backup area 513a. If power failure information is set, it means that power has been cut off, and steps SL3123 and subsequent steps are performed as power failure processing in the event of a power failure. Power failure processing begins with step SL3123 prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing, followed by command determination processing (described later) in step SL3124. Subsequently, step SL3125 saves the contents of each register used by CPU 511 to the stack area, step SL3126 stores the value of the stack pointer in backup area 513a, step SL3127 calculates a RAM determination value and saves it in backup area 513a, and step SL3128 prohibits RAM access, continuing the infinite loop until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, the checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in RAM 513.

In addition, since the processing of step SL3122 checks for information about the occurrence of a power outage after the processing performed when the power is turned on is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513 is smaller than when each processing is in progress, and storage is easier. Furthermore, when returning to the state before the power was turned off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so recovery is easy, and the processing burden on the dispensing control device 311 can be reduced.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing of the dispensing control device 311 with reference to the flowchart in Figure 1-34. This timer interrupt processing is initiated periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment).

The timer interrupt process first obtains a command from the main control unit 261 and performs a determination process for that command (step SL3201). This command determination process is explained below with reference to Figure 1-35.

Figure 1-35 is a flowchart showing the command determination process performed by the dispensing control device 311. In the command determination process (steps SL3124 and SL3201), it is first determined in step SL3301 whether the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process described above (see Figure 1-32).

If it is determined in step SL3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control unit 261, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step SL3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from RAM 513 in step SL3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SL3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SL3303, the processing of steps SL3302 to SL3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control of the dispensing control unit 311.

Steps SL3304 to SL3306 determine the type of command read from RAM 513. Step SL3304 determines whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, step SL3305 determines whether it is a payout return command, and step SL3306 determines whether it is a prize ball command.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, step SL3307 determines whether the payout permission flag is already on. If the payout permission flag is off, this means that the main control unit 261 instructed RAM 513 to be initialized when the power was turned on, so step SL3308 clears the working area (area) other than the stack area of RAM 513 to 0, and step SL3309 sets the initial value of RAM 513. Then, step SL3311 turns on the payout permission flag, and permission to pay out prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control unit 261 initializes RAM 503 after sending the payout initialization command, and the payout control unit 311 initializes RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which RAM 503 and RAM 513 are initialized is approximately the same. Therefore, even if the payout control unit 311 receives a command sent from the main control unit 261 due to a difference in initialization timing, it is possible to prevent problems such as RAM 513 being initialized and not being able to perform control corresponding to the received command. Furthermore, since the payout permission flag is turned on after RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already on in step SL3307, the command determination process ends without clearing the working area of RAM 513 or initializing RAM 513. In other words, step SL3307 prohibits RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Note that the payout initialization command is only sent if the RAM clear switch 323 is on when the power is turned on, so it is not received while the payout permission flag is on. In such a case, it is possible that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a payout initialization command due to noise or other factors. Therefore, if the working area of RAM 513 is cleared (step SL3308) and the initial value of RAM 513 is set (step SL3309) while the payout permission flag is on, problems such as the failure to pay out remaining balls could occur, resulting in losses to the player. However, by preventing RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, losses to the player can be prevented.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout restoration command (step SL3304: NO, step SL3305: YES), the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 will return to the state they were in before the power was cut off, and the payout permission flag is turned on in step SL3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. In other words, if there is information that a power outage has occurred and the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 have returned to the state they were in before the power was cut off, the payout of prize balls will be allowed. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step SL3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer has ended, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a prize ball command (step SL3305: NO, step SL3306: YES), in step SL3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored, and in step SL3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control unit 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a specified buffer area and stores it. Since prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command sent from the main control unit 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of prize balls. Furthermore, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is set immediately, allowing prize balls to be paid out early in response to a win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in step SL3311, processing based on the command stored in the specified memory area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step SL3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step SL3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step SL3306: NO), the command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Now, let's return to the flowchart in Figure 1-34. Once the command determination process is complete, in step SL3202, it is determined whether a CR unit connection signal indicating electrical connection with the CR unit has been received from the CR unit connection board 314. If a positive determination is made in step SL3202, in step SL3203, a CR unit connection signal indicating electrical connection with the CR unit is sent to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply and launch control device 310.

After step SL3203, or if a negative judgment is made in step SL3202, step SL3204 determines whether the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command judgment process. If the payout permission flag has not been turned on, this process ends. In other words, it is possible to prevent prize balls from being paid out before a command is sent from the main control unit 261.

On the other hand, if step SL3204 returns a positive result, step SL3205 checks the state return switch 321, and if it determines that the state return operation should begin, executes the state return operation. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor enters a predetermined operating state in which it rotates forward and reverse, thereby resolving the ball jam (returning to a normal state).

Then, in step SL3206, the lower tray 15 is set to a full state or a full/unfull state depending on the change in state. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal from the full detection switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray is set to a full state as a special state, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray is set to a full/unfull state. Also, in step SL3207, the tank bulb is set to an empty state (bulb out state) or a no-bulb state (bulb present state) depending on the change in state of the tank bulb. That is, the tank bulb is set to an empty state based on the detection signal from the no-bulb switch, and when the tank bulb is no longer empty, the no-bulb state is set to a no-bulb state.

Then, in step SL3208, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be reported, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be reported, the condition is reported.

Next, the payout control process for prize balls and loan balls is executed. In detail, the payout number setting process is performed in step SL3209, the motor control status acquisition process is performed in step SL3210, and the motor drive process is performed in step SL3211.

In step SL3212, the state return switch 321 is checked to determine that the ball removal is not impossible and that the ball removal operation has not started, and the system then enters a predetermined operating state in which the payout motor is driven and the ball removal process is executed. In the following step SL3213, the system enters a predetermined operating state in which the vibrator is controlled (vibration motor control) on the condition that the ball is jammed. The system then returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be explained with reference to Figure 1-36. First, in step SL3900, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked to determine whether the command sent from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, in step SL3901, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. The command buffer of RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261.

The ring buffer has a specified storage area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of that storage area. When commands have been stored in the entire storage area, the storage area returns to the beginning and the commands are updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on these pointers.

In the following step SL3902, command determination processing is executed. If the received command is a first command, the first command reception flag set in RAM 553 is turned on. Note that the first command reception flag is set individually for the first command related to the first variable display and the first command related to the second variable display.

If the received command is a variation pattern command, the variation pattern command reception flag set in RAM 553 is turned on. Note that the variation pattern command reception flag is set individually to correspond to the variation pattern command related to the first variation display and the variation pattern command related to the second variation display.

If the received command is a stop command, the stop command reception flag set in RAM 553 is turned on. The stop command reception flag is set individually to correspond to the stop command related to the first variable display (special chart 1 stop command) and the stop command related to the second variable display (special chart 2 stop command).

If the received command is a time-saving mode start command, the time-saving mode start command reception flag set in RAM 553 is turned on. The time-saving mode start command reception flag is set individually to correspond to the time-saving mode start command for the time-saving A mode (time-saving A mode start command) and the time-saving mode start command for the time-saving B mode (time-saving B mode start command). If the sub-controller 262 determines, based on the time-saving mode start command reception flag, that a time-saving mode start command has been received from the main controller 261, it sets a value corresponding to the command in the mode storage area of RAM 553. That is, if a time-saving mode start command for the time-saving A mode (time-saving A mode start command) is received, "21," which corresponds to "time-saving A mode," is set in the mode storage area of RAM 553. If a time-saving mode start command for the time-saving B mode (time-saving B mode start command) is received, "31," which corresponds to "time-saving B mode," is set in the mode storage area of RAM 553.

If the received command is a time-saving mode end command, the time-saving mode end command reception flag set in RAM 553 is turned on. Note that the time-saving mode end command reception flag is set individually for the time-saving mode end command related to the time-saving A mode (time-saving A mode end command) and the time-saving mode end command related to the time-saving B mode (time-saving B mode end command).

Also, if the received command is an opening command (jackpot start command), the opening command reception flag set in RAM 553 is turned on.

Also, if the received command is a jackpot end command, the jackpot end command reception flag set in RAM 553 is turned on.

Also, if the received command is a round command, the round command reception flag set in RAM 553 is turned on.

If the received command is an interval command, the interval command reception flag set in RAM 553 is turned on. The interval command reception flag is set separately for a short-term interval command, which corresponds to the event when the round ends after the specified maximum open time has elapsed, and a long-term interval command, which corresponds to the event when the round ends after the specified maximum number of winnings has been won.

Also, if the received command is an ending command, the ending command reception flag set in RAM 553 is turned on.

Note that the various command reception flags that are set to ON will be turned OFF after referencing them in the various processes described below.

In the following step SL3903, a pending information storage process is performed to store the information of the advance command output from the main control unit 261 in a pending information storage area provided in RAM 553 of the sub-control unit 262. As described above, the advance command includes information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, information indicating whether the variable information corresponds to a jackpot, information indicating the type of win, information indicating the type of reach, game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the variable display, and information indicating the variable time.

The pending information storage area of the sub-controller 262 includes a first pending information storage area and a second pending information storage area, each of which has four pending areas (pending areas 1 to 4), as well as one execution area, similar to the special variable pending area of the main controller 261 (a first special variable pending area and a second special variable pending area, each of which has four pending areas, and one execution area).

The first pending information storage area stores information (variation information) related to the variable display, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, reach pattern, game mode information, and the variable display time, in chronological order, in accordance with the reception history of advance commands based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area).

The second pending information storage area stores information (variation information) related to the variable display, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and the variable display time, in chronological order, in accordance with the reception history of advance commands based on the second variable display (information stored in the second special variable pending area).

By adopting this configuration, it is possible to reserve and store change information regarding the first change display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, and change information regarding the second change display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB. As a result, the sub-controller 262 is able to grasp not only the execution area of the special change reserve area of the main controller 261, but also the change information stored in each reserve area of the first special change reserve area and the second special change reserve area.

The pending information storage process will now be explained with reference to Figure 1-39. First, in step SL4101, it is determined based on the above-mentioned prior command reception flag whether or not the prior command for the first variable display has been received (whether or not the prior command for the first variable display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

If a positive judgment is made in step SL4101, in step SL4102, the first variable hold counter NSa, which counts the number of variable information items held and stored in the first hold information storage area, is incremented by one.

In the following step SL4103, the information contained in the initial command regarding whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, the reach pattern, the game mode information, the first variable time information, etc. are stored in the first available reserved area in the first reserved information storage area.

Furthermore, in the following step SL4104, a preview information storage process is performed. In this embodiment, there are cases where related performance displays are intentionally derived from multiple consecutive variable displays (so-called "continuous previews" are performed). Here, the value of the consecutive preview counter, which determines whether or not to perform a consecutive preview, and the value of the preview type counter, which determines the type of consecutive preview, are obtained, and these counter values are stored in the holding area of the first pending information storage area where the variable information was newly stored in step SL4103 above.

The continuous warning counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 49, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 49). The continuous warning counter is periodically updated, and each time, the value of the continuous warning counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous warning counter buffer).

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 9, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 9). The notice type counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

Then, in the preview information storage process, when variable information is stored in the pending information storage area, the values of the consecutive preview counter and the preview type counter stored in the consecutive preview counter buffer and the preview type counter buffer are obtained. Furthermore, each pending area and execution area in the pending information storage area is provided with a consecutive preview flag that is turned on when it is determined that a consecutive preview will be derived.

In addition, in this embodiment, ROM 552 is provided with a prediction accuracy determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether to make consecutive predictions, and a prediction table that is taken into consideration when determining the type of consecutive predictions. Multiple prediction accuracy determination tables and prediction tables are provided, and the prediction accuracy determination table and prediction table to be taken into consideration are selected depending on the variable information.

After step SL4104, in step SL4105, a continuous preview lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview. The continuous preview lottery process in step SL4105 checks whether or not there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag already set on. If it is not confirmed that there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag set, and if only variable information corresponding to a complete miss (a miss that does not result in a reach state) is stored in the first reserved area, a continuous preview lottery is performed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag set, a continuous preview lottery is not performed.

In the continuous preview lottery process of step SL4105, if the value of the first variable pending counter NSa is "2" or greater, the system determines whether to execute a continuous preview by referencing the preview win/loss determination table corresponding to each jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (those corresponding to a jackpot are more likely to win than those corresponding to a miss) based on the value of the continuous preview counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a continuous preview, the system determines the type of continuous preview by referencing the preview table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode based on the value of the preview type counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area. In addition, the continuous preview flag is turned on for all pending areas in the first pending information storage area where variable information is stored. However, the continuous preview flag for the execution area is not turned on.

After step SL4105, in step SL4106, a hold icon setting process is performed to additionally display one hold icon, which is a specific corresponding display indicating that the first variable display is stored on hold, on the performance display device 42. Here, setting processes are performed to output to the display control device 45 a display control command to additionally set drawing information for drawing the hold icon to the display data table (or additional data table).

As a result, as will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, a hold icon H461 (see Figure 1-44, etc.) resembling a "lifebuoy" is displayed on the performance display device 42. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the hold icon corresponding to the second variable display is not displayed.

The hold icon H461 may also be derived in a manner that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot for the corresponding first variable display. Hereinafter, such a hold icon H461 is also referred to as the "preview hold icon H463." The preview hold icon H463 of this embodiment (see Figure 1-44, etc.) is derived in a manner in which the character is using a life jacket. Furthermore, multiple types of characters are provided for the preview hold icon H463, and the pattern of the preview hold icon H463 is associated with the likelihood of winning (jackpot expectation) for a jackpot state to occur. As a result, the preview hold icon H463 is ranked in terms of jackpot expectation depending on its appearance, and is configured to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot by deriving the preview hold icon H463 (performing a preview hold preview performance).

In addition, when a pre-reading hold icon H463 is derived, the pattern of the pre-reading hold icon H463 may change (a hold change effect may be derived) before the first variable display corresponding to the pre-reading hold icon H463 is consumed. In other words, in the hold icon setting process of step SL4106, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to derive the pre-reading hold icon H463. If the result is a non-win, the pattern of the hold icon H461 is determined to be the default (only a lifebuoy). On the other hand, if the result is a win, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a hold change effect. If the result is a win, the hold change flag for the corresponding hold area is set to on, and the pre-reading hold icon H463 is determined to have two patterns: an upper limit pattern that may ultimately be displayed, and a provisional pattern that has a lower probability of winning (lower rank) than the upper limit pattern and is initially displayed. Note that the provisional pattern may be configured to initially include an option to only display the default hold icon H461. On the other hand, if the result is a non-win, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the pre-reading hold icon H463.

Then, basically, the process is performed such that the hold icon H461 of the determined pattern is displayed to the right of the rightmost hold icon H461 displayed in the hold display area HW3 of the effect display device 42. Also, in this embodiment, in step SL4106, if the pre-read hold icon H463 is derived in the hold display area HW3, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is set to ON.

After step SL4106, or if a negative judgment is made in step SL4101, in step SL4107, it is determined based on the above-mentioned prior command reception flag whether or not a prior command for the second variable display has been received (whether or not the prior command for the second variable display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

If a positive judgment is made in step SL4107, in step SL4108, the second variable pending counter NSb, which counts the number of second variable information items pending and stored in the second pending information storage area, is incremented by 1.

Then, in step SL4109, information included in the initial command, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, information about the jackpot type, game mode information, and information about the second variable time, is stored in the first available reserved area in the second reserved information storage area. After step SL4109, or if a negative judgment is made in step SL4107, this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-36, after step SL3903 or if a negative judgment is made in step SL3901, the process proceeds to step SL3904, where it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has passed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SL3905; on the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step SL3914.

In step SL3905, various counters are updated. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in Figure 1-37, it uses the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO and the top, middle, and bottom symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, which are used to set the losing symbols in the top, middle, and bottom symbol display areas. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured so that the register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, resulting in randomly changing values. The values of these counters are stored appropriately in the counter buffer in RAM 553.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (jackpot symbol) that will be displayed in a stopped state on the effect display device 42 when a jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, nine counter values (0 to 8) are provided for the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. In other words, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 8, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 8).

When a variable pattern command corresponding to a jackpot is received from the main control unit 261, the jackpot symbol combination is determined based on a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols. For example, if the counter value is 0, it will be "1" (double number), and if it is 1, it will be "2" (double number).

This jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated by the counter update process of step SL3905, and is read from the counter buffer in RAM 553 when the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command, as described below. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer in RAM 553, but it is also possible to refer to the counter value when a variation pattern command is received, rather than storing it in a buffer.

The top, middle, and bottom pattern counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of symbols that will stop in the top, middle, and bottom pattern display areas when the lottery results in a loss. Since each column displays one of nine decorative symbols, nine counter values (0-8) are prepared for each. The top pattern counter CL determines the symbol that will stop in the top pattern display area, the middle pattern counter CM determines the symbol that will stop in the middle pattern display area, and the bottom pattern counter CR determines the symbol that will stop in the bottom pattern display area.

In this embodiment, the values of each counter CL, CM, CR are randomly updated using the value of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR are stored in either the front or rear miss reach symbol buffer, the front or rear non-miss reach symbol buffer, or the complete miss symbol buffer in RAM 553.

Here, the update process for each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR will be explained in detail. As shown in Figure 1-38, step SL4001 determines whether it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL, and step SL4002 determines whether it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. Note that the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in each update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR was updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment will be made in step SL4001. Furthermore, if the upper symbol counter CL was updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment will be made in step SL4002. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (step SL4001 is YES), proceed to step SL4003 and update the upper symbol counter CL. Furthermore, if it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM (step SL4002 is YES), proceed to step SL4004 and update the middle symbol counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (steps SL4001 and SL4002 are both NO), proceed to step SL4005 and update the lower symbol counter CR. When updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SL4003 to SL4005, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted, and the result of this calculation becomes the current value of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above CL, CM, and CR update process, the top, middle, and bottom symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in a single update process, and the update times for each counter value do not overlap. This means that one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every three times the update process is performed.

Then, in step SL4006, it is determined whether the updated combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a winning symbol combination (a jackpot symbol combination in which the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same as the symbol in the center symbol display area). If a positive determination is made in step SL4006, the process ends without storing the symbol counter combination CL, CM, and CR in RAM 553.

On the other hand, if step SL4006 returns a negative result, step SL4007 determines whether the updated combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a reach symbol combination (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same, and the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are different from the symbol in the center symbol display area). If it is a reach symbol combination (YES in step SL4007), step SL4008 determines whether the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a front-to-back miss symbol combination (a front-to-back miss reach). If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a front-to-back miss symbol combination (YES in step SL4008), step SL4009 is executed, where the current combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the front-to-back miss reach symbol buffer in RAM 553, and this process ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than a front-to-back miss (a reach other than a front-to-back miss) (step SL4008 is NO), proceed to step SL4010, store the current combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the reach symbol buffer other than a front-to-back miss in RAM 553, and end this process.

Also, if the combination is other than a reach pattern (step SL4007 is NO), the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of a losing pattern (a complete losing pattern), so in step SL4011, the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the complete losing pattern buffer in RAM 553, and this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-36, in step SL3906, the hold process is performed. The hold process is explained below with reference to Figure 1-40.

First, in step SL4201, it is determined based on the variation pattern command reception flag whether a variation pattern command for the first variation display has been received (whether the variation pattern command for the first variation display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). If a positive determination is made in step SL4201, the value of the first variation pending counter NSa is decremented by 1 in the processing of step SL4202.

The next step, step SL4203, executes a process to shift the data stored in the first pending information storage area. This data shift process shifts the data (including the consecutive preview flag) stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the first pending information storage area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SL4203, in step SL4204, a preview setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect to be used for the continuous preview. The preview setting process in step SL4204 determines whether the continuous preview flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area (see the continuous preview lottery process in step SL4105) is on. If the determination is negative, no continuous preview will be made, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is positive, the process determines whether or not there is a jackpot, and if there is a jackpot, what the type is, and if there is not a jackpot, what the reach pattern is, what the game mode is, etc. based on the variation information in the variation pattern command, and determines the type of continuous preview by referencing the corresponding tables. The continuous preview of the type determined here will be derived at the expected timing when the corresponding variable display is made.

After step SL4204, in step SL4205, a hold icon shift process is performed to shift the hold icon H461 displayed on the performance display device 42. Each hold area and execution area in the hold information storage area is provided with a hold icon storage area that stores the type of hold icon H461, and information related to the hold icon H461 is also shifted by the data shift process in the hold information storage area described above.

The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon H461 in accordance with the data shift (a process for changing the drawing information related to the hold icon in the display data table), and in the performance display device 42, each time one first variable display is consumed (executed), the hold icon H461 located at the far left is erased, and the hold icon H461 located to the right of it is shifted one position to the left (the display location moves).

In this embodiment, in step SL4205, prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon H461, if there is a hold area where the hold change flag is set to on, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a hold change effect on the pre-read hold icon H463. If the lottery is won, specific conditions are met and the pattern of the pre-read hold icon H463 is changed to a higher rank (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern will not be exceeded). In addition, if it is determined that there is no hold area where the hold change flag is set to on, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is turned off. Furthermore, if the pattern of the pre-read hold icon H463 is changed so that the pre-read hold icon H463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is turned off and the hold change flag is turned off.

After step SL4205, or if a negative judgment is made in step SL4201, in step SL4206, it is determined based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern command reception flag whether or not a fluctuation pattern command for the second fluctuation display has been received (whether or not the fluctuation pattern command for the second fluctuation display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

On the other hand, if step SL4206 returns a positive answer, step SL4207 subtracts 1 from the value of the second variable pending counter NSb. In the following step SL4208, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the second pending information storage area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the second pending information storage area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area being shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3. After step SL4208, or if step SL4206 returns a negative answer, this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-36, in step SL3907, the effect display setting process is performed. Here, various calculation processes, such as generating display commands to be output to the display control device 45, and command output settings are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. In other words, this is where the display format to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, the sub-control device 262 references the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, and stopping pattern, and determines the display pattern of the decorative pattern variation display, etc. Then, it performs control such as outputting the determined items to the display control device 45 as display commands.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to commands from the sub-control device 262, and begins displaying the changing decorative patterns on the effect display device 42. Once a change pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 and display control device 45 cooperate to continue displaying the changing decorative patterns (change in effect display) until the specified change time period corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed.

Furthermore, when starting the effect change display corresponding to the first change display, if the continuous preview flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area is on, the table corresponding to each situation is referenced based on the variation information of the variation pattern command to determine the type of continuous preview to be derived in the effect change display corresponding to the first change display, determine the derivation of a preview effect other than the continuous preview, or perform a display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125, etc. Furthermore, the effect display setting process of step SL3907 also performs processing to control the effects during a jackpot state (win display process). Note that the effect control execution unit in this embodiment is composed of the functions of the sub-control device 262 that controls various effect displays through the effect display setting process of step SL3907.

Here, the variable display setting process performed in the effect display setting process of step SL3907 will be explained with reference to Figure 1-42.

The effect display device 42 of this embodiment basically displays a first effect change display (first change-compatible effect display) corresponding to the first change display of the first special pattern display device 43A, and a second effect change display (second change-compatible effect display) corresponding to the second change display of the second special pattern display device 43B.

First, in step SL4501, it is determined whether a variation pattern command corresponding to the second variation display (hereinafter referred to as the "second variation pattern command") has been received.

For example, the second fluctuation reception flag may be turned on when processing corresponding to the reception of the second fluctuation pattern command is performed during the hold processing (see Figure 1-40), and the second fluctuation reception flag may be turned off when a positive judgment is made in step SL4501. In step SL4501, the second fluctuation reception flag may be checked to determine whether or not the second fluctuation pattern command has been received. Furthermore, the various fluctuation information included in the second fluctuation pattern command may be stored in the execution area of the corresponding hold information storage area, or may be stored in a separate storage area.

If step SL4501 returns a negative result, the process proceeds to step SL4508. On the other hand, if step SL4501 returns a positive result, step SL4503 determines whether "21" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (starting time of fluctuation) game mode is "Time-saving A mode."

If step SL4503 returns a positive judgment, step SL4504 performs a time-saving A second effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (pattern of the second effect variation display) for the "time-saving A mode" based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and second variation time), and then proceeds to step SL4508. The time-saving A second effect variation display setting process performs display setting processes (such as setting processes for outputting display control commands to the display control device 45 to select display data tables for the corresponding variation display) corresponding to the "rush stage presentation" and "battle stage presentation" related to the "time-saving A mode" shown in Figures 1-50 and 1-51.

If step SL4503 returns a negative result, step SL4505 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (at the start of the change) game mode is "Time-saving B mode."

If step SL4505 returns a positive judgment, step SL4506 performs a time-saving B second effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (pattern of the second effect variation display) for the "time-saving B mode" based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and second variation time), and then proceeds to step SL4508. The time-saving B second effect variation display setting process performs display setting processing corresponding to the "Lucky Stage Presentation" shown in Figure 1-52 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display).

If a negative judgment is made in step SL4505, step SL4507 performs a normal second effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern for "normal mode" (pattern of second effect variation display) based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and second variation time), and then proceeds to step SL4508. In the normal second effect variation display setting process, display setting processing corresponding to the "normal stage presentation" shown in Figure 1-44 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display) is performed.

In step SL4508, it is determined whether a variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display (hereinafter referred to as the "first variation pattern command") has been received.

For example, the first fluctuation reception flag may be turned on when processing corresponding to the reception of the first fluctuation pattern command is performed during the hold processing (see Figure 1-40), and if a positive judgment is made in step SL4508, the first fluctuation reception flag may be turned off. In step SL4508, the first fluctuation reception flag may be checked to determine whether or not the first fluctuation pattern command has been received. Furthermore, the various fluctuation information included in the first fluctuation pattern command may be stored in the execution area of the corresponding hold information storage area, or may be stored in a separate storage area.

If step SL4508 returns a negative result, the process ends. On the other hand, if step SL4508 returns a positive result, step SL4509 determines whether "21" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current game mode (at the start of the change) is "Time-saving A mode."

If step SL4509 returns a positive judgment, step SL4510 performs a time-saving A first effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (first effect variation display pattern) for the "time-saving A mode" based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time), and then terminates this process. The time-saving A first effect variation display setting process performs display setting processes (such as setting processes for outputting display control commands to the display control device 45 to select display data tables for the corresponding variation displays) corresponding to the "rush stage presentation" and "battle stage presentation" related to the "time-saving A mode" shown in Figures 1-50 and 1-51.

If step SL4509 returns a negative result, step SL4511 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (at the start of the change) game mode is "Time-saving B mode."

If step SL4511 returns a positive judgment, step SL4512 performs a time-saving B first effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (first effect variation display pattern) for "time-saving B mode" based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time), and then terminates this process. The time-saving B first effect variation display setting process performs display setting processing corresponding to the "Lucky Stage Presentation" shown in Figure 1-52 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display).

If step SL4511 returns a negative answer, step SL4513 performs a normal first effect variation display setting process to set a "normal mode" effect pattern (first effect variation display pattern) based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time), and then terminates this process. The normal first effect variation display setting process performs display setting processing corresponding to the "normal stage effect" shown in Figure 1-44 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display).

Next, the win display processing during the jackpot state (jackpot effect control processing) performed in the effect display setting processing of step SL3907 will be explained with reference to Figure 1-41.

First, in step SL4700, it is determined based on the opening command reception flag whether an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot state has been received from the main control unit 261.

If step SL4700 returns a positive result, in step SL4701, the round count counter used to count the remaining rounds is set to "15" if it is a "15R jackpot," "8" if it is an "8R jackpot," and "4" if it is a "4R jackpot," based on the jackpot type information included in the opening command.

Then, in step SL4702, the process sets up the opening effect, which is a specific effect that occurs when a jackpot starts, and then ends this process. The opening effect is used to notify the player of the start of the jackpot state, the value of the jackpot, and the gameplay method before the variable prize-winning device 32A (big prize opening 32Aa) opens.

In step SL4702, settings are made to output specified image data for the performance display device 42, to output specified audio data for the speaker SP, and to set the lighting modes for the various electric lights 102-104.

Specifically, the setting process for the opening effect related to the effect display device 42 includes setting process for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the jackpot opening effect.

Based on this, an opening effect such as that shown in Figure 1-45 is displayed on the LCD display unit 42a. During the opening effect, which serves as a waiting effect before the start of a round, an opening background HG8 consisting of an image with the word "jackpot" written on it is displayed as the background HG of the LCD display unit 42a, and a decorative pattern that represents a jackpot is displayed in front of it.

It is also possible to configure a different background HG to be set depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if the jackpot type is "15R jackpot," the background HG may be configured to display a "15R opening background" consisting of an image with the words "15R jackpot" or similar written on it. Similarly, if the jackpot type is "4R jackpot," the background HG may be configured to display a "4R opening background" consisting of an image with the words "4R jackpot" or similar written on it.

If a negative judgment is made in step SL4700, step SL4705 determines whether a round command has been received based on the round command reception flag. If a positive judgment is made in step SL4705, step SL4706 performs processing to set the round effect that will be a specific effect during the round, and then this processing ends.

In other words, when the performance period for the opening performance, which is executed prior to transitioning the variable winning device 32A to the open state, ends, the main control device 261 performs an opening process to transition the variable winning device 32A to the open state (step SL1207), and then performs a process to send a round command to the sub-control device 262 (step SL1208). Having received the round command, the sub-control device 262 then starts the round performance at the timing when the variable winning device 32A transitions to the open state.

In step SL4706, settings are made to output specified image data for the performance display device 42, to output specified audio data for the speaker SP, and to set the lighting modes for the various electric lights 102-104.

Specifically, the round effect setting process for the effect display device 42 involves setting processes such as outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the round effect.

Based on this, a round presentation is performed on the LCD display unit 42a. During this round presentation, as shown in Figure 1-46, a round background HG9 consisting of an image (video) that evokes the underwater world is displayed as the background HG of the LCD display unit 42a, and various characters moving around lively, the current round number, etc. are displayed in front of it.

In this embodiment, 15 different background images (e.g., a background image inspired by the Sea of Japan, a background image inspired by the ocean off Okinawa, a background image inspired by the ocean off Hawaii, a background image inspired by the ocean off Antarctica, etc.) are provided as the round background HG9 so that different round effects can be executed for each of the maximum 15 rounds that can occur during a jackpot state. The round background HG9 is configured to be switched in a predetermined order or randomly each time the round changes (at each interval). Furthermore, in conjunction with the switching process of the round background HG9, various character images that are displayed in correspondence with the various background images and various display effects that are executed in correspondence with the various background images are switched.

However, in this embodiment, the round presentation switching process (e.g., the round background HG9 switching process) is executed at the start of the next round only when it is determined that the round presentation switching process should be executed based on the value of the round presentation switching flag described below, i.e., only when a long interval is executed (when an interval presentation is executed), as described below. Here, if a short interval is executed after the specified maximum opening time has elapsed in the previous round (when an interval presentation is not executed), the interval period is as short as 4 msec, and the player may not be able to recognize that the previous round has been switched to the next round. Therefore, if the presentation were to be switched during a short interval, the player may be confused and their interest may decrease. In contrast, in this embodiment, when the specified maximum opening time has elapsed in the previous round and the transition to the short interval occurs before the transition to the next round, the round presentation switching process is not executed, and the round presentation (e.g., background image) displayed in the previous round continues to be displayed in the next round, without executing the round presentation switching process, thereby minimizing a decrease in player interest.

Therefore, each of the 15 types of round effects that can be executed in response to each background image is not set to end in the maximum 30 seconds allowed for one round, but is set to a length (for example, around 10 minutes) that allows a continuous series of round effects to be executed without interruption over multiple round periods (for example, rounds 1 to 15), including interval periods.

The sub-controller 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning, etc., and various presentation modes during the jackpot state. It references this table to select and execute the corresponding presentation. In other words, the sub-controller 262 is configured to reference the table based on the results of various lotteries performed by the main controller 261 (for example, the jackpot type, such as a 15R jackpot or a 4R jackpot) and the game state at the time of winning (for example, the mode type, such as normal mode or time-saving A mode), and to determine and execute one of multiple presentation display modes as the content of a specific presentation during the jackpot state (such as a round presentation, interval presentation, opening presentation, or ending presentation) to be executed by the presentation display device 42. Therefore, in this embodiment, the various presentation modes during the jackpot state are configured to differ depending on the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning, etc.

If the result of step SL4705 is negative, step SL4707 determines whether an interval command has been received based on the interval command reception flag.

If step SL4707 returns a positive result, step SL4708 decrements the round grasp counter by 1, and step SL4709 sets the interval effect, which is a specific effect during the interval, before terminating this processing. Here, settings are made to output specific image data for the effect display device 42, output specific audio data for the speaker SP, and the lighting modes for the various lights 102-104.

However, in this embodiment, the interval effect is only executed when a long-term interval is executed (when the long-term interval command reception flag is on).

Specifically, the interval performance setting process for the performance display device 42 involves setting processes such as outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the interval performance.

Based on this, an interval presentation is performed on the LCD display unit 42a. When the interval presentation starts, as shown in Figure 1-47, an interval background HG6 for the waiting presentation, consisting of an image with text such as "Please wait a moment," is displayed as the background HG of the LCD display unit 42a. Of course, while the interval background HG6 for the waiting presentation is displayed, the variable winning device 32A (large winning opening 32Aa) is always in a closed state.

Furthermore, when the remaining time for the interval presentation reaches a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), as shown in FIG. 1-48, an interval background HG7 for the transition presentation, consisting of an image with text such as "Opening soon," is displayed as the background HG of the LCD display unit 42a. In the board configuration of the gaming board 30 (play area) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1-4, etc., immediately after the LCD display unit 42a begins to display the interval background HG7 for the transition presentation, the player begins to fire the gaming ball with a "right hit." This causes the gaming ball to pass above the variable display unit 35 and flow down the right-hand area EB of the play area, reaching the variable winning device 32A, coinciding with the start of the next round when the large winning opening 32Aa switches from a closed state to an open state.

Here, if the above-mentioned interval background HG7 for the transition effect were not displayed, a player who had finished a predetermined round by winning the maximum number of game balls in the variable winning device 32A would wait aimlessly for the long interval to end without firing any game balls during the subsequent long interval, and would then begin firing game balls only after actually seeing the variable winning device 32A switch from a closed state to an open state. This could make it difficult for the player to win the maximum number of game balls in the variable winning device 32A within the maximum opening time of the next round.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the interval background HG7 for the transition effect is displayed when the remaining time in the interval effect reaches a predetermined time, allowing the player to intervene technically and begin firing the game ball immediately after seeing this display, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned malfunction. This ultimately allows the player to play the jackpot game more efficiently and increase the profit margin during the jackpot state.

In this embodiment, if the player does not perform the above-mentioned technical intervention, it will be difficult for the variable winning device 32A to win the specified maximum number of game balls within the specified maximum opening time of the next round.

In other words, according to this embodiment, players who have completed a predetermined round after the specified maximum opening time have elapsed can be given the benefit of progressing to the next round early in the subsequent short interval, while players who have completed a predetermined round after the specified maximum number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 32A can be given the excitement of technical intervention even if they are then faced with an unfavorable long interval.

When the interval effect setting process is performed, the long-term interval command reception flag is also turned off and the round effect switching flag is turned on.

The round effect switching flag is determination information used to determine whether or not to execute the round effect switching process (such as the switching process of the round background HG9) at the start of the next round. As described above, if an interval effect is executed, the round effect switching process is executed at the start of the next round, so the round effect switching flag is turned on.

On the other hand, if a short interval is executed (the short interval command reception flag is on), no interval performance is performed, so the interval performance setting process in step SL4709 only turns off the short interval command reception flag and sets the round performance switching flag to off, preventing the round performance switching process from being performed at the start of the next round.

If a negative judgment is made in step SL4707, then in step SL4710, it is judged whether or not an ending command has been received based on the ending command reception flag. If a positive judgment is made in step SL4710, then in step SL4711, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1, and in step SL4712, an ending effect that will be a specific effect at the end of a jackpot is set, and then this processing ends. This ending effect setting processing includes, for example, setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the ending effect.

Based on this, an ending presentation such as that shown in Figure 1-49 is displayed on the LCD display unit 42a. In this ending presentation, an ending background HG10 consisting of an image with text such as "See you later" is displayed as the background HG on the LCD display unit 42a.

In addition, in the process of setting the ending effect, which is a transition effect that notifies the player of the transition to the next game state after the end of a jackpot state, one ending effect pattern may be selected and executed from multiple ending effect patterns prepared according to the type of game state to transition to after the end of a jackpot. Here, a different background HG may be set depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if the jackpot type is a "probable jackpot," the background HG may be a "probable jackpot ending background" consisting of an image with text such as "It's not over yet." Similarly, if the jackpot type is a "normal jackpot," the background HG may be a "normal ending background" consisting of an image with text such as "Good luck."

Furthermore, if the variable display is on hold when the jackpot state ends, such as when a new game ball enters the start winning section 33WA, 33WB during the jackpot state and the variable display is on hold, the variable display will start after the ending performance has finished.

If the result of step SL4710 is negative, step SL4713 determines whether a jackpot end command has been received based on the jackpot end command reception flag. If the result of step SL4713 is negative, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SL4713 returns a positive answer, step SL4714 performs a jackpot display end process, and this process ends. In the jackpot display end process, the ending display immediately ends. Also, at the end of the jackpot state, the time-saving A mode start command is received at this timing (the time-saving A mode start command reception flag is set to on), and based on this command, the start setting process for the "rush stage effect" or "battle stage effect" corresponding to the "time-saving A mode" is performed.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-36, in step SL3908, a change stop process is executed to stop the change display of the performance display device 42. The change stop process will now be explained with reference to Figure 1-43.

First, in step SL4401, it is determined whether a special chart 2 stop command has been received based on the stop command reception flag. If a positive determination is made in step SL4401, it is determined in step SL4405 whether the second effect change display is currently being derived.

If step SL4405 returns a positive result, step SL4406 performs a process to stop the second effect variable display. This process causes the decorative pattern to be displayed as fixed and stopped on the effect display device 42. The decorative pattern that has been displayed as fixed and stopped on the effect display device 42 will continue to be displayed as fixed and stopped until the next variable display is started on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B (except when the next variable display is not started for an extended period of time). After step SL4406, the process proceeds to step SL4410, which will be described later. On the other hand, if step SL4405 returns a negative result, the process proceeds directly to step SL4410.

If step SL4401 returns a negative result, step SL4407 determines whether a special chart 1 stop command has been received based on the stop command reception flag. If step SL4407 returns a positive result, step SL4408 determines whether the first effect change display is currently being derived.

If step SL4408 returns a positive result, step SL4409 performs a process to stop the first effect variable display. This process causes the decorative pattern to be displayed as a fixed, stopped pattern on the effect display device 42. The decorative pattern that has been displayed as a fixed, stopped pattern on the effect display device 42 will continue to be displayed as a fixed, stopped pattern until the next variable display is started on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B (except when the next variable display is not started for an extended period of time). After step SL4409, the process proceeds to step SL4410. On the other hand, if step SL4408 returns a negative result, the process proceeds directly to step SL4410.

After the display change stop process of step SL4406 or step SL4409, or if a negative judgment is made in step SL4407, step SL4410 determines whether a time-saving A mode end command or a time-saving B mode end command has been received based on the time-saving mode end command reception flag. If a negative judgment is made in step SL4410, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SL4410 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the total number of times the first and second variable displays have been executed in "Time-saving A mode" or "Time-saving B mode" reaches a predetermined number, step SL4411 performs processing to change the display performance being performed by the performance display device 42 to "normal stage performance" corresponding to normal mode. At this time, the performance display device 42 may be configured to perform a transition performance to notify the user of the transition to "normal stage performance". Then, this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 1-36, in the lamp setting process of step SL3909, various settings are made to drive and control the illumination units 102-104, such as setting the lighting pattern of the illumination units 102-104 so that they are synchronized with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. In addition, if a lamp-related command is sent from the main control device 261, such as an error notification performed by the error indicator lamp 105, settings for controlling this are also made in step SL3909.

The audio setting process in the following step SL3910 performs various settings to control the operation of the speaker SP, such as setting the audio output pattern of the speaker SP to synchronize with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. In addition, if an audio-related command, such as an error notification, is sent from the main control device 261, settings for controlling this are also performed in step SL3910.

In this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 changes the amount of amplification by the amplifier (not shown) built into the speaker SP, making it possible to set the volume level of the speaker SP in multiple stages. However, the method of adjusting the volume is not limited to this, and other configurations may also be used.

In step SL3911, standby processing is performed. In standby processing, the sub-control device 262 first determines whether the standby flag set in RAM 553 is on. The standby flag is determination information used to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state (waiting for customers), and is set to on when a predetermined variable display has been confirmed and stopped in the performance display device 42 and no new variable display is pending in the execution area of the pending information storage area.

Furthermore, if the next variable display does not start even after a predetermined time (e.g., three minutes) has elapsed since the predetermined variable display was confirmed and stopped on the effect display device 42, a setting process is performed to execute a predetermined demonstration effect display (demo screen display) on the effect display device 42. In this embodiment, the demo screen display is configured to display, for example, a video of a predetermined duration that expresses the worldview that is the motif of the pachinko machine 10 on the entire screen of the effect display device 42.

In step SL3912, external output processing is performed to send control signals to each device based on the settings made in steps SL3905 to SL3911. For example, a display command is sent to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 displays a changing decorative pattern.

After steps SL3905 to SL3912 are executed every 2 msec, or if a negative determination is made in step SL3904, the process proceeds to step SL3914, where it is determined whether or not power-off information has been stored in RAM 553. Note that power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control unit 261.

If no power outage information is stored, the process proceeds to step SL3915, where it is determined whether RAM 553 has been corrupted. If RAM 553 has not been corrupted, the process returns to step SL3901, and normal processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 553 has been corrupted, the process enters an infinite loop to stop subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SL3914 that power failure occurrence information is to be stored, power failure processing is executed in step SL3916. During power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. The stored information about the power failure occurrence is also erased. After the power failure processing is executed, the processing enters an infinite loop.

Next, we will explain how the display mode of the effects on the effect display device 42 changes as the game progresses, along with the flow of the game played by the player. The display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays various display effects corresponding to the current game state (game mode, etc.).

In the normal game mode (a game mode in which the first variable display can be displayed based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA in "normal mode"), the "normal stage display" is displayed on the display device 42.

As shown in Figure 1-44, in the "normal stage presentation," a variable display area HW1 in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is set across most of the display section 42a of the presentation display device 42. Here, when the change begins, the background HG of the LCD display section 42a is set to the normal stage background HG1 corresponding to the "normal stage presentation." If a normal reach occurs in the "normal stage presentation," the background HG of the LCD display section 42a continues to be set to the normal stage background HG1. Furthermore, if the reach presentation develops from this point and a super reach occurs, the background HG switches to a super reach background (not shown). Furthermore, if the presentation further develops and a special reach occurs, the background HG switches to a special reach background (not shown). Furthermore, if a jackpot state occurs, the background HG switches to one of the various jackpot backgrounds HG6 to HG10.

In this embodiment, multiple patterns of "normal stage presentation" are prepared, and correspondingly, multiple patterns of various background HGs for normal stage presentations (normal stage background HG1, super reach background, special reach background, etc.) are also prepared. The sub-control device 262 then executes a stage change lottery each time a decorative pattern change display is performed, and executes a stage change (background change) if a predetermined winning result is obtained.

Therefore, during the "normal stage performance," as long as there are no stage changes, reach performance developments, or jackpot wins, the normal stage background HG1 will continue to be displayed on the LCD display unit 42a. Therefore, depending on the situation, multiple miss variations may be displayed during that time.

As described above, in this embodiment, three pattern display areas (top, middle, and bottom) are set in this variable display area HW1, and multiple types of decorative patterns (patterns numbered 1 to 9) are displayed in a scrolling manner in each pattern display area.

Above the variable display area HW1 is a message display area HW2 for displaying various information, and below the variable display area HW1 is a pending display area HW3 that clearly shows the number of pending variable displays.

In normal game mode, the message display area HW2 displays "← Left Hit" to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area (left side game area area EA) (such action will be referred to as "left hit" hereafter). In response, the player will play by "left hitting" (such gameplay will be referred to as "left hit game" hereafter).

In addition, a hold icon H461 resembling a life jacket is displayed in the hold display area HW3. In this embodiment, the hold display area HW3 includes an execution correspondence area H462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area, and a hold correspondence area H462b corresponding to each hold area of the first hold information storage area, and is capable of displaying up to five hold icons H461.

When a player "hits left," most of the game balls are guided by the above-mentioned nails toward the first start winning section 33WA, which is located below the variable display unit 35 (the lower game area ED). Some of these game balls will win in the first start winning section 33WA.

In this embodiment, the second start winning section 33WB and the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the pair of blade members 33WBb are located to the right of the variable display unit 35 (right-side area EB of the game area). In other words, the second start winning section 33WB and the through gate 34 are located in a position that cannot be reached by a game ball that has flowed down the left side of the variable display unit 35 (left-side area EA of the game area). Therefore, if the player continues to "hit left," the pair of blade members 33WBb will not be opened and the game ball will not enter the second start winning section 33WB.

Furthermore, even if a player were to fire a game ball toward the right side of the game area (the right side game area EB) in normal game mode (such an action will be referred to as a "right hit" hereinafter), with the configuration of this embodiment described above, there is almost no chance that the game ball will enter the second start winning section 33WB. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that in normal game mode, the player can play more advantageously by "left hit play" than by "right hit" (such play will be referred to as "right hit play" hereinafter).

When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, multiple types of decorative patterns are displayed in the variable display area HW1 of the effect display device 42, changing in each of the above-mentioned pattern display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns numbered "1" through "9" are displayed. The various decorative patterns are displayed in ascending or descending numerical order, scrolling from right to left with a periodicity, thereby forming a series of patterns.

In the upper pattern display area, various decorative patterns are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), while in the middle and lower pattern display areas, various decorative patterns are displayed in ascending order (in order of increasing numbers). After a predetermined time has passed, the varying display stops in the order of upper pattern display area → lower pattern display area → middle pattern display area, and decorative patterns are displayed statically in each pattern display area.

If a ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and a specific condition is met, the game will enter a reach state, after which decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination will be displayed stopped on a predetermined jackpot line. In the normal game mode of this embodiment, the jackpot line consists of left, center, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as five lines). Therefore, when three decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination are displayed stopped and confirmed in a line on any of the five lines in the top, center, and bottom symbol display areas, the occurrence of a jackpot state is confirmed.

When the occurrence of a jackpot state is confirmed, a predetermined jackpot opening effect is initiated on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 1-45). During the opening effect, a decorative symbol that has become the jackpot symbol is displayed so that the player can grasp the confirmed jackpot symbol that has been displayed.

In this embodiment, nails and other obstacles are used to prevent game balls that flow down the left-hand area EA of the game area from reaching the variable winning device 32A. Therefore, if a player continues to "hit from the left," it will be extremely difficult to make the game ball flow down toward the variable winning device 32A and win.

In addition, if the player continues to "hit left," at the start of "Time-saving A Mode," which is entered after the jackpot ends regardless of the type of jackpot, there will be no pending memory of the second variable display based on the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, and the first variable display will start after the jackpot ends. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, a jackpot win on the second variable display is more likely to be awarded to a player in a more advantageous gaming state than a jackpot win on the first variable display, so if the first variable display is displayed in "Time-saving A Mode" after the jackpot ends, it will be disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1-45, when the jackpot effect (opening effect) begins, the message display area HW2 displays "Right Hit →" to encourage the player to "hit right." In response, the player switches the game ball launch mode from "left hit" to "right hit" to play a jackpot game so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right-side area EB of the game area.

When a jackpot occurs, the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable prize device 32A opens, allowing a game ball to enter the large prize opening 32Aa, and a predetermined jackpot round presentation is initiated on the presentation display device 42 (see Figure 1-46). During the round presentation, the decorative symbol that becomes the jackpot symbol (in the drawing, only the corresponding number) is displayed frozen in place in the variable display area HW1, which is displayed in a reduced size downwards so that the player can grasp the jackpot symbol.

If the player hits the ball to the right, many of the balls will be guided by the pegs and flow from the right area EB of the play area through the lower area ED of the play area toward the variable winning device 32A, where they will win. This allows the player to win more balls.

As described above, in this embodiment, after the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable prize winning device 32A is switched from a closed state to an open state and a round of play begins, the round of play ends and the large prize opening shutter 32Ab closes when a predetermined state occurs in which the specified maximum opening time of "30 seconds" has elapsed, or when a specific state occurs in which the specified maximum number of winning balls, "8," has entered the variable prize winning device 32A.

If the current round of play ends after the specified maximum opening time (30 seconds) has elapsed, the next round of play will immediately begin after a short-term interval of the short-term basic time TA (e.g., 4 msec).

As a result, even if a game ball enters the variable prize winning device 32A just before the end of a round of play (if there is a win that could be considered an over-win), the winning game ball (the game ball before it is detected by the large prize winning port count switch 222) can be detected by the large prize winning port count switch 222 as a valid game ball that has entered the variable prize winning device 32A in the next round of play, in the same way as a game ball that will enter the variable prize winning device 32A in the next round of play, without being considered an over-win.

During this short interval, because the interval period is extremely short, the effect display device 42 does not perform an interval effect, and the round effect that was performed during the previous round of play continues. Even when the next round of play begins, the round effect does not change, and the round effect that was performed during the previous round of play continues. However, the round number display and other items do change.

On the other hand, if the current round of play ends when the maximum number of game balls (8) enter the variable prize winning device 32A (large prize opening count switch 222), the next round of play will begin after a long-term interval of 2 seconds or more (short-term basic time TA + long-term basic time TB + extension time TC).

As described above, when a long interval is executed, a specified interval effect is executed on the effect display device 42. As shown in FIG. 1-47, in the interval effect, an interval background HG6 for a waiting effect is displayed, which consists of an image with text such as "Please wait a moment." When a player sees this waiting effect display, they can temporarily stop firing game balls to avoid wasting their own balls (game balls).

After that, when the remaining time of the long interval (interval effect) reaches a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the effect display device 42 displays an interval background HG7 for the transition effect, consisting of an image with text such as "Opening soon," as shown in Figure 1-48.

As mentioned above, the interval period of the long-term interval in this embodiment (short-term basic time TA + long-term basic time TB + extension time TC) is variable, so by displaying a transition effect such as that shown in Figure 1-48, the player can start firing game balls in time with the start of the next round of play, preventing the player from wasting their own balls (game balls).

As mentioned above, even if a game ball enters the large prize opening 32Aa of the variable prize winning device 32A during a jackpot state and is detected by the large prize opening count switch 222, and it is determined that a ball has entered the large prize opening 32Aa, if the end of a specified round is triggered by the entry of the specified maximum number of game balls, then the interval after the end of the specified round (the period from when control to close the large prize opening 32Aa is initiated to when control to open the large prize opening 32Aa is next initiated) will be an invalid prize-winning period, and ball detection by the large prize opening count switch 222 during this period will be invalid, and the ball will be considered not to have entered.

As a result, even if an "over-win" occurs, in which more game balls than the maximum number of prizes allowed in one round during a jackpot state enter the large prize opening 32Aa of the variable prize winning device 32A, the over-win is considered to have occurred and prize balls corresponding to the over-win are not paid out. In other words, the number of prize balls actually paid out during a jackpot state can be prevented from exceeding the number of prize balls planned.

When the final round of play ends as described above, the effect display device 42 displays an ending effect as shown in Figure 1-49, and the jackpot state ends. In this ending effect, an ending background HG10 consisting of an image with text such as "See you later" is displayed.

In addition, in the right area EB of the game area, a through gate 34 and a second start-up winning section 33WB are provided along the flow path to the variable winning device 32A. During a jackpot, some game balls will pass through the through gate 34 and enter the second start-up winning section 33WB, which opens upon passing through the gate.

In this embodiment, if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 and wins the start-entry support lottery, and certain conditions are met, the pair of blade members 33WBb will open, allowing the game ball to enter the second start-entry section 33WB.

This means that the second variable display is reserved and stored during the jackpot state, and when the "Time-saving A Mode" begins after the jackpot ends, the second variable display can be started immediately, taking priority over the first variable display.

In this embodiment, if a "15R jackpot" is won through a lottery during "normal mode" based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and specific conditions are met, a "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted after the "15R jackpot" ends. When the "time-saving A mode for 100 variable play times" is granted, a "rush stage effect" is displayed on the effect display device 42, as shown in FIG. 1-50.

On the other hand, if a "4R jackpot" is won by a lottery during "normal mode" based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and specific conditions are met, a "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play rounds will be granted after the "4R jackpot" ends. And when the "time-saving A mode with 10 variable play rounds" is granted, a "battle stage effect" will be displayed on the effect display device 42, as shown in Figure 1-51.

Therefore, when a "Rush Stage Effect (15R or 8R jackpot)" is performed, there is a high probability of winning the next jackpot in succession during that period, whereas when a "Battle Stage Effect (4R jackpot)" is performed, there is a low probability of winning the next jackpot in succession during that period.

In the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect," the variable display area HW1 is displayed in a reduced size downwards. Furthermore, in the reduced variable display area HW1, the top, middle, and bottom symbol display areas are replaced with left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes a single line. Various characters and other effects related to the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect" are displayed on the background screen.

For example, in the "Rush Stage Effect," as shown in Figure 1-50, a rush stage background HG2 consisting of an image (video) that evokes a coral reef is displayed as the background HG of the LCD display unit 42a. Then, while the "Rush Stage Effect" continues (the period during which a maximum of 100 changing displays are executed), a continuous animation (continuous effect) of moving through the ocean is generated, and a jackpot is indicated by display modes such as a school of fish passing by, a large creature such as a whale appearing, or a treasure chest being discovered.

In addition, in the "Battle Stage Presentation," as shown in Figure 1-51, a battle stage background HG3 consisting of an image (video) that evokes the deep sea is displayed as the background HG of the LCD display unit 42a. During the duration of the "Battle Stage Presentation," a humanoid character appears, and an animation of the character fighting an enemy is displayed. Winning or losing the battle indicates whether a jackpot has been won and whether specific conditions have been met.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Presentation" and "Battle Stage Presentation," the various presentations described above indicate that a jackpot has been won and specific conditions have been met, so the reduced variable display area HW1 may also be omitted, and decorative symbols may not be displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, in the "Rush Stage Presentation" and "Battle Stage Presentation," the player may be able to select between a symbol presentation mode in which decorative symbols are displayed, and an animation presentation mode in which decorative symbols are not displayed.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect," in order to allow more game balls to enter the second start winning section 33WB and reserve and store more second variable displays, the message display area HW2 displays "Right Hit →," recommending that the player "hit right," just as in the case of a jackpot.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect," the hold display area HW3 is not set on the effect display device 42, and the hold display (derivation of the hold icon) corresponding to the second hold display device 46B (second variable display) is not performed.

Here, even if a first variable display stored in reserve exists, the reserve icon corresponding to that first variable display is not displayed. As described above, if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA while the second variable display is being executed, the first variable display corresponding to that ball is reserved and stored, and an advance command related to the first variable display is sent from the main control unit 261 to the sub-control unit 262, and information related to the first variable display is stored in the first reserve information storage area of the sub-control unit 262. However, during periods such as the "Rush Stage Performance," the reserve icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed. However, even if the reserve icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed here, if a game ball enters the next first start winning section 33WA, the data in the first reserve information storage area will be updated. Then, when the "Rush Stage Performance" or the like ends and the game returns to "Normal Mode," the reserve icon related to the first variable display stored in the first reserve information storage area at that time will be displayed.

In addition, if a game ball enters the second start-up winning section 33WB during "Time-saving A Mode (Rush Stage Presentation or Battle Stage Presentation)," a winning/losing lottery (jackpot lottery) is held, and the result is displayed in the reduced variable display area HW1.

Furthermore, during "Time-saving A Mode (Rush Stage Presentation or Battle Stage Presentation)," while the player is "hitting to the right," game balls rarely enter the first start winning section 33WA. However, many game balls tend to enter the second start winning section 33WB, which is in a high ball entry state, in a short period of time, and the number of reserved balls in the second variable display tends to quickly reach its upper limit. For this reason, some players switch the game ball launch mode from "hitting to the right" to "hitting to the left" when the number of reserved balls in the second variable display reaches its upper limit (full reserve state) and a second variable display with a relatively long presentation time, such as a reach presentation, begins, and during this time the game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA. Of course, the first variable display will not start while the second variable display is running, but by keeping the number of reserved memories for the first variable display at its upper limit (reserved full state) during this time, the reserved first variable display will start immediately after the "Time-saving A Mode" ends, so the performance will not be interrupted.

In addition, for "Rush Stage Effects" and "Battle Stage Effects," a count display area HW4 is set on the effect display device 42 (see Figures 1-50 and 1-51). The count display area HW4 clearly shows the number of variable display times (the value of the first variable count counter A) corresponding to the current remaining duration of the "Rush Stage Effects" or "Battle Stage Effects." Therefore, for example, if the value of the first variable count counter A is "83," the count display area HW4 will display "83 times remaining."

Then, each time the first or second variable display (mainly the second variable display) is displayed, its value (the value of the first variable count counter A) is decremented by one. Thereafter, during the "Time-saving A mode (rush stage effect or battle stage effect)," if a jackpot does not occur and the set number of variable displays (the value of the first variable count counter A) reaches 0, the "Time-saving A mode" ends, the game mode transitions to "normal mode," and the "Rush stage effect" or "Battle stage effect" on the effect display device 42 ends, returning to the "normal stage effect (see Figure 1-44)."

In addition, when the game mode transitions to "normal mode," "Time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)" ends, and "← hit left" is displayed in the message display area HW2 to encourage the player to "hit left." This allows the player to change the game mode upon the end of "Time-saving A mode (rush stage effect or battle stage effect)," preventing the occurrence of problems such as wasting game balls.

In this embodiment, when the game mode is "normal mode" as described above, if the value of the normal mode continuation counter (ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value of "500," that is, if the duration of "normal mode" (number of times the variable display is executed) reaches 500 without a jackpot occurring, the "time-saving B mode" will be activated as a rescue measure.

In this embodiment, a "time-saving B mode" with a maximum limit of 200 variable play times is granted. During "time-saving B mode," a "lucky stage effect" is executed on the effect display device 42. Note that when "time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)" is activated, an activation effect may be executed to liven up the game.

As shown in Figure 1-52, in the "Lucky Stage Effect," a variable display area HW1 is set on the effect display device 42, and basically the same variable decorative pattern display is performed as in "Normal Mode," but some display aspects, such as the background display, differ from those in "Normal Mode."

For example, since the game enters "Time-saving B mode (high ball entry state)," the message display area HW2 above the variable display area HW1 displays "Hit right →," recommending the player to "hit right," just as in "Time-saving A mode." Meanwhile, the hold display area HW3 is not set in the effect display device 42, and no hold display (derivation of the hold icon) is performed. Here, the background HG of the LCD display unit 42a is set to the lucky stage background HG4, which corresponds to the "lucky stage effect."

Of course, instead of this, during the duration of the "Lucky Stage Effect" (the period during which a maximum of 200 variable displays are executed), the variable display area HW1 may be displayed in a reduced size downwards, similar to the "Rush Stage Effect" described above, and an animation (continuous effect) in which various characters are displayed may be generated on the background screen.

In addition, for the "Lucky Stage Effect," a count display area HW4 is set on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 1-52). The count display area HW4 clearly shows the number of variable display times (the value of the second variable display counter B) that corresponds to the current remaining duration of the "Lucky Stage Effect." Therefore, for example, if the value of the second variable display counter B is "155," the count display area HW4 will display "155 times remaining."

Then, each time the first or second variable display (mainly the second variable display) is displayed once, its value (the value of the second variable count counter B) is decremented by one. After that, if the set number of variable displays (the value of the second variable count counter B) reaches 0 without a jackpot occurring during "Time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)," and "Time-saving B mode" ends, the game mode transitions to "Normal mode." This ends the "Lucky stage effect" on the effect display device 42, and the display returns to "Normal stage effect (see Figure 1-44)."

In addition, when "Time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)" ends and the game mode transitions to "normal mode," a notification may be made that "Time-saving B mode" will not occur again as a rescue measure until the next jackpot occurs and the ceiling is reset by the reset function.

In this embodiment, "ceiling reset" refers to the process of resetting the value of the normal mode continuation counter (ceiling counter) to "0" and turning off the time-saving B mode activation flag (ceiling activation flag).

As mentioned above, pachinko machines, which are a type of gaming machine known in the art, are machines in which game balls are fired into a play area.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, for example, a winning or losing lottery is held when a gaming ball launched into the gaming area enters a predetermined starting ball entry means, and a predetermined display means displays a variable display of identification information (e.g., a symbol). If specific conditions are met (a winning result is obtained), the display means displays a static display of identification information in a specific pattern, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved, resulting in a jackpot state (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A).

When a jackpot occurs, the player can win a large amount of game value (prize balls) by landing a game ball in a specified variable winning device.

A variable prize-winning device may include, for example, a large prize opening through which game balls can enter, a large prize opening shutter that opens and closes the large prize opening, a large prize opening solenoid that drives the large prize opening shutter to open and close, and a ball detection switch that can detect game balls that have entered the large prize opening. Under normal circumstances, the large prize opening solenoid is de-energized, causing the large prize opening shutter to assume a substantially vertical position and close the large prize opening, resulting in a closed state (closed state) in which game balls flowing down the play area cannot enter the large prize opening. However, when a jackpot occurs, the large prize opening solenoid becomes energized, causing the large prize opening shutter to tilt forward, causing the large prize opening shutter to assume a substantially horizontal position and opening the large prize opening, resulting in an open state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the play area can enter the large prize opening.

Under this configuration, when a jackpot occurs, the variable prize-winning device switches the large prize opening shutter from a closed state to an open state and enters a predetermined operating state. Once this state is met, either when a predetermined maximum opening time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, or when a predetermined maximum number of game balls (e.g., 10) have entered the large prize opening, the large prize opening shutter will switch back to a closed state and enter a predetermined stopped state. This open/close operation (round) will be repeated a predetermined number of times (e.g., 16 times).

The timing at which each round period ends varies depending on the behavior of the game balls launched into the game area and the state of the nails and other elements placed in the game area. Therefore, each round period may end when the specified maximum opening time has elapsed, or when the specified maximum number of game balls enter the large prize slot before the specified maximum opening time has elapsed.

Normally, within a specified time after the large prize opening shutter changes from an open state to a closed state and enters a specified stopped state, it is necessary to wait for the detection of a game ball (remaining ball) that entered the large prize opening properly just before the large prize opening shutter closed but has not yet been detected by the ball entry detection switch. For this reason, conventionally, after the specified round period in the large prize opening state has ended, a specified interval period (e.g., 2 seconds) is set as the remaining ball detection period, and after this interval period has elapsed, the system is configured to transition to the next specified operating state (round period).

However, if the closing state is conditional on the specified maximum number of game balls (for example, 10) entering the large prize opening, there will be a slight time lag between the maximum number of game balls (for example, 10) entering the large prize opening and the large prize opening shutter actually reaching a substantially vertical position and closing the large prize opening.

For this reason, it is possible that a game ball may enter the large prize opening during this time lag (before the large prize opening is actually closed). As a result, there is a risk of a so-called "over-winning" occurring, where more game balls than the maximum number of prizes allowed in one round are entered. When an over-winning occurs, there is a risk that the number of prize balls actually paid out may exceed the number of prize balls planned.

In response to this, some gaming machines have been designed to immediately close the main prize opening when the maximum number of game balls enters the machine, by installing a ball detection switch as close as possible to the main prize opening. However, this also has its limitations, making it extremely difficult to prevent over-winning.

In light of this, for example, in a configuration in which the main prize opening is closed when the specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the main prize opening, it is possible to consider that no more balls have entered the main prize opening, i.e., no over-entries have occurred, after the ball entry detection switch detects the specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, the 10th ball) (the time the main prize opening shutter closes) (for example, any balls detected by the ball entry detection switch are invalid).

However, in the past, gaming halls would sometimes make adjustments to the guide elements, such as nails, arranged on the gaming board surface that were disadvantageous to players (for example, adjusting the nails to make it more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the big prize slot).

If the pin adjustment described above is performed under a configuration that treats over-entries as non-existent, it is possible that, before the maximum number of 10 game balls enters the main prize slot, the ball detection switch detects fewer than the maximum number of game balls (e.g., 7 balls), and the maximum opening time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, causing the main prize slot shutter to close. In this case, even if several game balls (e.g., 1 to 3 balls) properly enter the main prize slot just before the main prize slot shutter closes, the game balls will be considered not to have entered. In other words, game balls that are not over-entries will be considered not to have entered, which could be detrimental to the player.

For this reason, in the past, whether the specified maximum opening time had elapsed and the large prize opening was closed (when State 1 occurred), or the specified maximum number of game balls had entered and the large prize opening was closed (when State 2 occurred), the same interval period was consistently given, and the game always transitioned to the next round (predetermined operating state) at the same time, which could reduce the player's interest. Therefore, there is a desire for ways to improve the player's interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest, etc.

In contrast to this, specifically, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A specific game state that can occur when a specific condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the starting condition;
a predetermined operation means for executing a predetermined operation state a plurality of times when the specific gaming state is reached;
a control means for executing control regarding the specific game state and control of the predetermined operation means,
the control means shifts the predetermined operation means to a predetermined stop state when at least a first state occurs and a second state different from the first state occurs after the predetermined operation means has entered the predetermined operation state in the specific game state,
The control means
a maintenance state execution means for maintaining the predetermined operation means in the predetermined stopped state for at least a predetermined period when the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state,
In the specific game state, when the first state occurs and the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state, the predetermined operation state can be shifted to the predetermined stopped state earlier than when the second state occurs and the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state,
By making the second state more advantageous to the player than the first state,
It is possible to improve the interest of players, etc.

More specifically, in this embodiment, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A jackpot game state that can occur when a jackpot is won based on the starting winning;
A variable winning device 32A (big winning opening shutter 32Ab) that can execute a plurality of opening states when a big winning game state is reached;
A pachinko machine 10 equipped with a main control device 261 that controls the jackpot game state and the variable winning device 32A (the large winning port shutter 32Ab),
The main control device 261 transitions the variable winning device 32A (large winning opening shutter 32Ab) to a closed state when a predetermined state occurs in which at least a specified maximum opening time has elapsed after the variable winning device 32A (large winning opening shutter 32Ab) has been opened during a jackpot game state, or when a specific state occurs in which the specified maximum number of game balls have entered the game.
The main control device 261 is
When the variable prize winning device 32A (large prize winning opening shutter 32Ab) is shifted to a closed state, the variable prize winning device 32A (large prize winning opening shutter 32Ab) is configured to be maintained in a closed state for at least a predetermined period of time,
In the jackpot game state, when the predetermined state occurs (the specified maximum opening time has elapsed) and the variable winning device 32A (large winning opening shutter 32Ab) is shifted to a closed state, the variable winning device 32A (large winning opening shutter 32Ab) is configured to be shifted to the next open state (next round) more quickly than when the specific state occurs (the specified maximum number of game balls have won) and the variable winning device 32A (large winning opening shutter 32Ab) is shifted to a closed state,
By configuring the pachinko machine 10 to be characterized in that the specific state, i.e., the number of winning game balls in the variable winning device reaches the specified maximum number of winning balls [the number of winning balls acquired by the player is the specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 10 winning game balls x 15 winning balls per ball)], is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined state, i.e., the specified maximum opening time elapses without the number of winning game balls in the variable winning device reaching the specified maximum number of winning balls [the number of winning balls acquired by the player does not reach the specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 7 winning game balls x 15 winning balls per ball)],
It is possible to improve the interest of players, etc.

To describe the effects of this embodiment more specifically, for example, in this embodiment, after the variable winning device 32A (large winning opening shutter 32Ab) is in an open state during a jackpot game state, the length of the interval period until the next open state (next round) begins is changed depending on the trigger that causes the variable winning device 32A to transition to a closed state.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a predetermined state that is less advantageous to the player is reached (a state in which the number of winning balls in variable winning device 32A has not reached the specified maximum number of prize balls and the specified maximum opening time has elapsed) and variable winning device 32A transitions to a closed state, the interval period during which variable winning device 32A is maintained in a closed state is shorter than when a specific state that is more advantageous to the player is reached (a state in which the number of winning balls in variable winning device 32A has reached the specified maximum number of prize balls) and variable winning device 32A transitions to a closed state, so that variable winning device 32A can transition to the next open state (next round) more quickly.

With this configuration, according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition occurs to transition the variable winning device 32A to a closed state, even if a game ball enters the variable winning device 32A just before the end of the open state (if a win that could result in an over-win occurs), the winning game ball (the game ball before being detected by the large winning slot count switch 222) is not considered an over-win, but is instead considered a valid game ball that entered the variable winning device 32A in the next open state (next round) and can be detected by the large winning slot count switch 222, just like a game ball that will enter the variable winning device 32A in the next open state (next round). This prevents the player's profits from being diminished. As a result, the player's interest can be improved, etc.

In addition, by shortening the interval period during which the variable winning device 32A is maintained in a closed state, at least some of the game balls (wasted balls) that would have flowed down the game area and passed through the variable winning device 32A during this interval period and been discharged from the outlet 36 can now be made to win the variable winning device 32A in the next open state (next round), thereby reducing the number of game balls that become wasted balls (out balls).

Furthermore, by reducing the number of wasted balls during the interval period, the payout rate during the jackpot state (the ratio of the number of game balls paid out from the pachinko machine 10 to the number of game balls fired by the player during the jackpot state) can be increased, thereby increasing the profits that the player can earn during the jackpot state.

As a result, the playing time during a jackpot state can be shortened, the player's profit margin during the jackpot state can be increased, and the player's enjoyment can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments, or some or all of them may be applied in any combination to the above-described embodiments. It is also possible to combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments in any combination.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is a first type gaming machine in which, when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery (variable symbol game) based on a ball entering a predetermined starting ball entry means (e.g., first starting ball entry section 33WA or second starting ball entry section 33WB), a jackpot state (direct hit jackpot) occurs in which a predetermined variable ball entry means (e.g., variable ball entry device 32A) opens and closes.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be implemented as other types of pachinko machines that award predetermined profit games (award profits), different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment. Furthermore, the present invention may also be implemented as various gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as arrange ball machines and mahjong ball machines.

Here, "profitable play (granted profit)" refers to any play that benefits the player, and can be anything that can achieve the purpose of this invention. Examples include prize ball games in which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball fired by a player lands in a predetermined ball entry means; prize ball games in which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball fired by a player lands in a variable ball entry means that is ready for entry based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions; lottery games in which a predetermined lottery is executed when a game ball fired by a player lands in a predetermined ball entry means; action games in which a predetermined movable means (such as a movable device or variable ball entry means) operates when a game ball fired by a player lands in a predetermined ball entry means; effect games in which a predetermined effect is executed in a predetermined effect means (such as a display means or light-emitting means) when a game ball fired by a player lands in a predetermined ball entry means; variable games in which a pattern is displayed variably on a predetermined display means when a game ball fired by a player lands in a predetermined ball entry means; and games that combine any of these various games.

(a-1) For example, this may be implemented as a second type of gaming machine that is equipped with a variable ball entry means that opens when a small jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery (variable symbol game) based on a ball entering a predetermined starting ball entry means, and in which a gaming ball that enters the variable ball entry means enters a specific ball entry section (for example, a V entry port) to trigger a jackpot state (V entry jackpot).

(a-2) It may also be implemented as a third type of gaming machine (for example, a so-called one-type/two-type hybrid machine) that combines the functions of the first type of gaming machine and the second type of gaming machine.

More specifically, the third type of gaming machine (a pachinko machine known as a type 1/type 2 mixed machine) may comprise, for example, a first starting ball entry means for aiming by shooting a gaming ball into the left area of the gaming area (a left hit), a first display device for displaying a first variable display based on the gaming ball entering the first starting ball entry means, a first holding means capable of holding the first variable display a predetermined number of times, a second starting ball entry means for aiming by shooting a gaming ball into the right area of the gaming area (a right hit), a second display device for displaying a second variable display based on the gaming ball entering the second starting ball entry means, a second holding means capable of holding the second variable display a predetermined number of times, and a display device for displaying ... It is equipped with an opening/closing member that changes between an open state allowing a ball to be entered and a closed state preventing a ball from entering. A jackpot lottery is held based on a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means or the second starting ball entry means, and if a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a jackpot state advantageous to the player can be generated. It is also configured to hold a small jackpot lottery based on a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means, and if a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a small jackpot state in which a predetermined variable entry device opens can be generated. If a game ball that enters the variable entry device enters a specific ball entry means (V entry port), a jackpot state can be generated.

Generally, in such pachinko machines, in the normal state (low support state) where it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means, the gameplay is such that the player hits with the left to get the game ball to enter the first start ball entry means in an attempt to reach the jackpot state. On the other hand, in the high support state that can be achieved after the jackpot state ends and where it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means, the gameplay is such that the player hits with the right to get the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means in an attempt to reach the small jackpot state, and then to get the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means (V entry port) within the opened variable entry device in an attempt to reach the jackpot state.

(a-3) It may also be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which gaming balls are circulated within the gaming machine and not paid out directly to the player, i.e., a so-called sealed-in type pachinko machine.

(a-4) The winning probabilities for various lotteries related to the pachinko machine 10 (such as software lottery processes or lotteries using mechanical mechanisms) are set appropriately for each model, and any value can be used. It goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate, as described below.

(a-5) In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and similar mahjong ball machines.

(b) The configurations relating to the various wins (big wins and small wins) as specific game states, such as the number of rounds, opening time, and game mode awarded after completion, are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

A "specific gaming state" may be any gaming state that can occur when specific conditions are met, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, such as a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, a small jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which the probability of obtaining a winning result through a specified lottery means is higher than in the normal gaming state (including a low probability state), a high ball entry state in which the rate at which gaming balls enter a specified ball entry means (including a variable ball entry means) is higher than in the normal gaming state (including a low ball entry state), or a state in which a specified number of rights to a specified lottery are reserved in a reservation means capable of reserving said rights (including a full reservation state in which the upper limit is reserved).

(b-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the allocation of the jackpot type awarded in the win/lose lottery is different when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and when the gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB. However, the ratio is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and different allocation ratios may also be used.

In addition, the allocation ratio of the jackpot type awarded when the winning lottery is decided may be the same when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and when the gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB.

(b-2) For example, in the above embodiment, "15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," and "4R jackpot" are set as "jackpots," but this is not limited to these, and other jackpot states with different numbers of rounds may also be configured to occur.

Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that can only generate one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15R jackpot), rather than a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states as a "jackpot."

(c) The configuration of the game mode (such as the award period and configuration content) is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

Here, the game mode may be any type, such as a game state that bestows a predetermined advantageous state on the player (for example, a time-saving state), a game state that increases the probability of winning in the lottery process that determines whether or not a special game state will occur (for example, a high-probability state), a game state that makes it easier for game balls to enter a predetermined ball entry means (for example, a high-ball entry state), a game state that increases the probability of winning in the lottery process that determines whether or not to open the opening/closing member that can open and close the predetermined ball entry means (for example, a high-ball entry state), or a game state that shortens the execution time of the variable display of patterns (for example, a time-saving state).

(c-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 switches between starting ball-scoring support states ("high ball-scoring state" or "low ball-scoring state"), but instead of or in addition to this, it may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that switches between lottery modes ("high probability mode" or "low probability mode").

More specifically, the present invention may be implemented as a pachinko machine of the type in which the lottery mode can be changed between a low probability mode in which the probability of winning the "jackpot" is a first probability (e.g., 1/300), and a high probability mode in which the probability of winning the "jackpot" is a second probability (e.g., 1/30) that is higher than the first probability.

(c-2) In the above embodiment, the "Time-saving A Mode (high ball entry state)" is always granted after the end of a "jackpot" regardless of the type of jackpot. However, this is not limited to this, and the "Time-saving A Mode (high ball entry state)" may not be granted depending on the type of jackpot.

(c-3) In the above embodiment, the "time-saving B mode (ceiling time-saving mode)" is configured to be activated when the number of times a variable game (miss variable game) is executed on the special symbol display device 43A, 43B (mainly the first special symbol display device 43A) reaches a predetermined upper limit (the so-called ceiling) of 500 times without a predetermined jackpot state occurring during "normal mode."

Furthermore, if the number of variable games (miss variable games) executed on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B (mainly the second special symbol display device 43B) during "Time-saving B Mode" reaches a predetermined upper limit of 200 times without the occurrence of a predetermined jackpot state, "Time-saving B Mode" ends and the game transitions to "Normal Mode."

The conditions for activating and terminating "Time-saving B Mode" are not limited to those described in the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted. Furthermore, the gaming machine may be configured so that "Time-saving B Mode" is not activated.

(d) The configuration on the surface of the game board 30 (such as the arrangement of the variable winning device 32A, first start winning section 33WA, second start winning section 33WB, through gate 34, variable display unit 35, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(d-1) For example, in the above embodiment, a through gate 34 is provided in the right area EB of the game area to the right of the variable display unit 35, and a second start-up winning section 33WB is provided downstream of the through gate 34.

However, the second start winning section 33WB may be located in the lower area ED of the play area, or the variable winning device 32A may be located in the right area EB of the play area.

(d-2) In the above embodiment, in normal mode, the game ball is fired in the first direction, toward the left side of the game area (left side game area EA), to play the first game, which is a left-handed game; and in the event of a jackpot or in time-saving mode, the game ball is fired in the second direction, toward the right side of the game area (right side game area EB), to play the second game, which is a right-handed game.

In addition to this, the configuration of the game board 30 may be changed so that "right-hand play" is performed in normal mode, and "left-hand play" is performed when a jackpot is hit or in time-saving mode.

(e) The configuration of various display means, such as the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B and the performance display device 42, is not limited to the above embodiment and may be any type regardless of shape, size, placement position, operating mode, etc.

For example, the device may be any device that can execute a predetermined operating state, such as a variable display or dramatic display that changes the visibility of a predetermined part or area visible to the player, such as a display device made up of a three-color light-emitting diode (three-color LED), a dot matrix display, a segment display (7-segment display), or an organic EL display; a mechanical reel, drum, or belt display; a display device attached to the gaming board that makes up the playing area; a display device attached to a center frame attached to the gaming board; a display device attached to the back side of a translucent gaming board; a display device attached to a mounting frame to which the gaming board is attached; or a combination of these.

(f) The configuration of the variable winning device is not limited to the variable winning device 32A of the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, the configuration may include a variable prize device that is equipped with a large prize opening shutter (or V prize opening shutter) that can slide back and forth, and when the large prize opening shutter (or V prize opening shutter) is not driven, it protrudes forward to close the large prize opening (or V prize opening), and when driven, it retracts backward to open the large prize opening (or V prize opening) upward.

(g) The game effects performed by various effect devices, such as the effect display device 42, are not limited to the above embodiment and may be configured to execute other different effects.

(g-1) In the above embodiment, when a long interval is set, the effect display device 42 is configured to display a standby effect such as "Please wait a moment" to notify that an interval is in progress, or a transition effect such as "Opening soon" to notify that the next round will soon be transitioned to.

Alternatively, for example, a countdown effect may be used as a transition effect, counting down the time until the next round begins. This allows players to use more advanced techniques and start and stop the release of game balls at more appropriate times.

(g-2) In the above embodiment, when a short interval is set, the interval period is as short as 4 msec, and there is a risk that the player will not be able to recognize the transition between rounds. Therefore, the interval presentation is not executed, and the round presentation (background image, etc.) that was displayed in the previous round continues to be displayed in the next round without executing the round presentation switching process.

Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be used in which individual presentation settings are made for each round, even when a short interval is executed so quickly that the player cannot recognize the transition between rounds.

Conversely, even when a long interval in which interval performances are performed is executed, the configuration may be such that a series of round performances can be continuously executed without interruption over multiple round periods (e.g., 1st round to 15th round) including the interval period by superimposing the round performances on the interval performances.

(h) In the above embodiment, even if a game ball enters the large prize opening 32Aa of the variable prize winning device 32A during a jackpot state and is detected by the large prize opening count switch 222, and it is determined that a ball has entered the large prize opening 32Aa, if the end of a specified round is triggered by the entry of the specified maximum number of game balls, then the interval after the end of the specified round (the period from when control to close the large prize opening 32Aa is initiated until the next time control to open the large prize opening 32Aa is initiated) becomes an invalid prize-winning period, and the ball detection by the large prize opening count switch 222 during this period is invalid, and the ball is deemed not to have entered.

(h-1) In addition to the above configuration, even if the end of a specified round is triggered by the elapse of the specified maximum opening time, the interval period after the end of the specified round (the period from when control to close the large prize opening 32Aa is initiated until the next time control to open the large prize opening 32Aa is initiated) may be a win invalid period, and ball detection by the large prize opening count switch 222 during this period is invalid, and the ball is considered to have not been entered.

For example, when the specified maximum opening time of the variable winning device 32A has elapsed and a specified round has ended, depending on the length of the subsequent interval period, if the interval period is set to a relatively long period (for example, one second or more), there is a risk of an over-winning occurring, and therefore the above-mentioned disabling configuration is effective.

On the other hand, if the interval period is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds or less), a game ball that enters the variable winning device 32A just before the end of a specified round (a game ball before being detected by the large winning slot count switch 222) can be considered to be a game ball that entered the variable winning device 32A in the next round without being considered an over-win, so there is no need to provide the invalidation configuration described above.

(h-2) As described above, instead of disabling the large prize opening 32Aa of the variable prize device 32A when the ball enters the large prize opening 32Aa and is detected by the large prize opening count switch 222, the large prize opening count switch 222 may be configured to stop detecting the ball during the interval period after the end of a predetermined round.

(i) The method for determining the interval period of the long-term interval is not limited to the configuration described in the above embodiment, and other different configurations may also be adopted.

(i-1) The remaining time on the special variable timer may be set as the interval period for the long-term interval.

(i-2) By setting the interval period for the long-term interval, it is possible that the total period of the round period (the period during which the ball is actually open) and the subsequent inter-round interval period (the period during which the ball is closed) may exceed the specified maximum open time (e.g., 30 seconds). However, from the perspective of being able to shorten the jackpot period, it is preferable that the total period of the round period and the subsequent inter-round interval period does not exceed the specified maximum open time.

(i-3) The interval period of the long-term interval may not be variable, but may be set uniformly to a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) as the interval period of the long-term interval.

[Note]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above-described embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional Issue FL. Pachinko machines, which are a type of gaming machine that shoots game balls into a play area, are known.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, for example, a winning or losing lottery is held when a gaming ball launched into the gaming area enters a predetermined starting ball entry means, and a predetermined display means displays a variable display of identification information (e.g., a symbol). If specific conditions are met (a winning result is obtained), the display means displays a static display of identification information in a specific pattern, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved, resulting in a jackpot state (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A).

When a jackpot occurs, the player can win a large amount of game value (prize balls) by landing a game ball in a specified variable winning device.

A variable prize-winning device may include, for example, a large prize opening through which game balls can enter, a large prize opening shutter that opens and closes the large prize opening, a large prize opening solenoid that drives the large prize opening shutter to open and close, and a ball detection switch that can detect game balls that have entered the large prize opening. Under normal circumstances, the large prize opening solenoid is de-energized, causing the large prize opening shutter to assume a substantially vertical position and close the large prize opening, resulting in a closed state (closed state) in which game balls flowing down the play area cannot enter the large prize opening. However, when a jackpot occurs, the large prize opening solenoid becomes energized, causing the large prize opening shutter to tilt forward, causing the large prize opening shutter to assume a substantially horizontal position and opening the large prize opening, resulting in an open state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the play area can enter the large prize opening.

Under this configuration, when a jackpot occurs, the variable prize-winning device switches the large prize opening shutter from a closed state to an open state and enters an operating state. Once this state is met, either when a predetermined maximum opening time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, or when a predetermined maximum number of game balls (e.g., 10) have entered the large prize opening, the large prize opening shutter will switch back to a closed state and enter a stopped state. This open/close operation (round) will be repeated a predetermined number of times (e.g., 16 times).

The timing at which each round period ends varies depending on the behavior of the game balls launched into the game area and the state of the nails and other elements placed in the game area. Therefore, each round period may end when the specified maximum opening time has elapsed, or when the specified maximum number of game balls enter the large prize slot before the specified maximum opening time has elapsed.

Normally, within a specified time after the large prize opening shutter changes from an open state to a closed state and stops, it is necessary to wait for the detection of a game ball (remaining ball) that entered the large prize opening properly just before the large prize opening shutter closed but has not yet been detected by the ball entry detection switch. For this reason, conventionally, after the end of a specified round period in the large prize opening state, a specified interval period (e.g., 2 seconds) is set as the remaining ball detection period, and after this interval period has elapsed, the machine is configured to transition to the next operating state (round period).

However, if the closing state is conditional on the specified maximum number of game balls (for example, 10) entering the large prize opening, there will be a slight time lag between the maximum number of game balls (for example, 10) entering the large prize opening and the large prize opening shutter actually reaching a substantially vertical position and closing the large prize opening.

For this reason, it is possible that a game ball may enter the large prize opening during this time lag (before the large prize opening is actually closed). As a result, there is a risk of a so-called "over-winning" occurring, where more game balls than the maximum number of prizes allowed in one round are entered. When an over-winning occurs, there is a risk that the number of prize balls actually paid out may exceed the number of prize balls planned.

In response to this, some gaming machines have been designed to immediately close the main prize opening when the maximum number of game balls enters the machine, by installing a ball detection switch as close as possible to the main prize opening. However, this also has its limitations, making it extremely difficult to prevent over-winning.

In light of this, for example, in a configuration in which the main prize opening is closed when the specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the main prize opening, it is possible to consider that no more balls have entered the main prize opening, i.e., no over-entries have occurred, after the ball entry detection switch detects the specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, the 10th ball) (the time the main prize opening shutter closes) (for example, any balls detected by the ball entry detection switch are invalid).

However, in the past, gaming halls would sometimes make adjustments to the guide elements, such as nails, arranged on the gaming board surface that were disadvantageous to players (for example, adjusting the nails to make it more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the big prize slot).

If the pin adjustment described above is performed under a configuration that treats over-entries as non-existent, it is possible that, before the maximum number of 10 game balls enters the main prize slot, the ball detection switch detects fewer than the maximum number of game balls (e.g., 7 balls), and the maximum opening time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, causing the main prize slot shutter to close. In this case, even if several game balls (e.g., 1 to 3 balls) properly enter the main prize slot just before the main prize slot shutter closes, the game balls will be considered not to have entered. In other words, game balls that are not over-entries will be considered not to have entered, which could be detrimental to the player.

For this reason, in the past, whether the specified maximum opening time had elapsed and the large prize opening was closed (state 1 occurred), or the specified maximum number of game balls had entered and the large prize opening was closed (state 2 occurred), the same interval period was consistently given, and the game always transitioned to the next round (operating state) at the same time, which could reduce the player's interest. Therefore, there is a desire for ways to improve the player's interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest, etc.

Means FL1. A specific game state that can occur when a specific condition is satisfied based on the establishment of a starting condition;
a predetermined operation means for executing a predetermined operation state a plurality of times when the specific gaming state is reached;
a control means for executing control regarding the specific game state and control of the predetermined operation means,
the control means shifts the predetermined operation means to a predetermined stop state when at least a first state occurs and a second state different from the first state occurs after the predetermined operation means has entered the predetermined operation state in the specific game state,
The control means
a maintenance state execution means for maintaining the predetermined operation means in the predetermined stopped state for at least a predetermined period when the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state,
In the specific game state, when the first state occurs and the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state, the predetermined operation state can be shifted to the predetermined stopped state earlier than when the second state occurs and the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second state is more advantageous to the player than the first state.

According to the above-mentioned means FL1, after a predetermined operation means (for example, a large prize opening shutter or a V prize opening guide valve, or a variable prize winning device having these) has become a predetermined operation state (for example, an open state or a guide state) in a specific game state (for example, a big win state or a small win state), if at least a first state (for example, a state in which the specified maximum opening time of the large prize opening shutter has elapsed, or a state in which the maximum operating time of the V prize opening guide valve has elapsed) occurs, or if a second state different from the first state (for example, a state in which the specified maximum number of game balls have entered, or a state in which a specified number of game balls have entered the V prize) occurs, the predetermined operation means is transitioned to a predetermined stopped state (for example, a closed state or a non-guiding state), and the predetermined operation means is maintained in the predetermined stopped state for at least a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined interval period), and if a first state that is less advantageous to the player occurs and the predetermined operation means is transitioned to the predetermined stopped state, the predetermined operation means is configured to be able to transition to the predetermined operation state more quickly than if a second state that is more advantageous to the player occurs and the predetermined operation means is transitioned to the predetermined stopped state.

In other words, in a specific game state, after the predetermined operation means has entered a predetermined operation state, the length of the predetermined period (interval period) until the next predetermined operation state begins is changed depending on the trigger for the predetermined operation means to transition to a predetermined stop state (the trigger for ending the predetermined operation state).

In particular, the above-mentioned means FL1 is configured so that when the first state, which is less advantageous to the player (for example, a state where the number of winning balls in the variable winning device has not reached the specified maximum number of prize balls and the specified maximum opening time has elapsed) is reached and the specified operation means transitions to a specified stopped state, the specified period (interval period) during which the specified operation means is maintained in the specified stopped state is shorter than when the second state, which is more advantageous to the player (for example, a state where the number of winning balls in the variable winning device has reached the specified maximum number of prize balls) is reached and the specified operation means transitions to a specified stopped state, allowing for a quicker transition to the next specified operation state (for example, the next round).

With this configuration, according to the above-mentioned means FL1, when the first state occurs and the predetermined operation means (e.g., a variable winning device) transitions to a predetermined stop state, even if a gaming ball enters the predetermined operation means just before the end of the predetermined operation state (if there is a winning that could result in an over-winning), the winning gaming ball (the gaming ball before being detected by the detection means) can be detected by the detection means as a legitimate gaming ball that has entered the predetermined operation means in the next predetermined operation state, without being considered an over-winning, in the same way as a gaming ball that will enter the predetermined operation means in the next predetermined operation state, thereby preventing the player's benefits from being diminished. As a result, the player's interest can be improved, etc.

Furthermore, by shortening the specified period (interval period) during which the specified operation means is maintained in a specified stopped state, at least some of the game balls (waste balls) that would have previously passed through the specified operation means and been ejected out of the game area during this stopped state period (interval period) can now enter the specified operation means in the next specified operation state, reducing the number of game balls that become waste balls (out balls).

Furthermore, by reducing the number of wasted balls during the stopped state (interval period), the payout rate during the specific game state (the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the gaming machine to the number of game balls fired by the player during the specific game state) can be increased, thereby increasing the profits that the player can earn during the specific game state.

As a result, it is possible to shorten the playing time for the specific game state, increase the player's profit margin during the specific game state, and enhance the player's enjoyment.

Means FL2. The gaming machine described in means FL1 is characterized in that it is equipped with an invalidating means that invalidates the detection if a predetermined winning event similar to the winning event that caused the second state to occur is detected between the time when the second state occurs and the predetermined operation means transitions to the predetermined stopped state, and the time when the predetermined operation means transitions to the predetermined operating state.

When a second state that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, a state in which game balls are allowed to enter a predetermined operating means such as a variable prize-winning device until the specified maximum number of prize balls is reached, allowing the player to win the maximum number of prize balls) occurs, it is undesirable to create any further states that are excessively advantageous to the player (for example, an over-prize in which game balls enter in excess of the specified maximum number of prize balls).

Under the configuration of means FL1 above, if control were to be exercised to shorten the stopped state period (interval period) every time, even in such cases, this would significantly deviate from the gaming specifications required by gaming machine manufacturers, and could potentially cause disadvantages to the gaming hall.

For example, if the pins are adjusted in an amusement hall to favor the player, allowing the game balls fired by the player to easily enter the predetermined operation means (variable winning device), and the second state occurs (the specified maximum number of game balls enters) and the device enters a stopped state (closed state), and then, after a short interval, the next operation state (round) begins, even game balls that would normally have passed through the predetermined operation means and been discharged during the interval period may end up entering the predetermined operation means in the next operation state, which could significantly increase the profits the player can earn during the specific game state (ball payout rate during the specific game state).

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means FL2, by providing the above-mentioned invalidation means, when the second state, which is more advantageous to the player, occurs, even if a gaming ball is detected (an over-winning occurs) between the time the predetermined operation means is transitioned to the predetermined stop state and the time it is transitioned to the next predetermined operation state (the interval period), this can be invalidated and the corresponding prize balls can be prevented from being paid out.

As a result, the occurrence of the above malfunctions can be prevented, and the number of prize balls that a player can win during a specific game state can be prevented from exceeding the planned number of prize balls.

Furthermore, when the first state occurs and the predetermined operation means transitions to a predetermined stopped state (for example, when the specified maximum opening time of a variable winning device or the like has elapsed), depending on the length of the period (interval period) until transition to the next predetermined operation state, if this period is set to be relatively long (for example, one second or more), there is a risk of over-winning as described above occurring.

Therefore, in such a case, the configuration may include "an invalidation means for invalidating the detection if a predetermined winning event similar to the winning event that caused the first state to occur is detected between the time when the first state occurs and the time when the predetermined operation means transitions to the predetermined stopped state and the time when the predetermined operation means transitions to the predetermined operating state."

However, if the period (interval period) between when the first state occurs and the predetermined operation means transitions to the predetermined stop state and when it transitions to the next predetermined operation state is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds or less), a gaming ball that enters the predetermined operation means just before the end of the predetermined operation state (the gaming ball before it is detected by the detection means) can be considered to have entered the predetermined operation means in the next predetermined operation state without being considered an over-entry, and therefore there is no need to provide the above-mentioned invalidating means in the event that the first state occurs. Furthermore, if the above-mentioned invalidating means in the event that the first state occurs is provided, there is a risk that even gaming balls that should not normally be considered over-entries will be determined to be invalid.

Means FL3. The gaming machine is provided with a variable means for varying the time until the second state occurs,
A gaming machine described in means FL1 or means FL2, characterized in that if the second state occurs within a first time, the machine is configured to transition to the specified operating state more quickly than if the second state occurs within a second time that is shorter than the first time.

For example, if the time until the second state occurs (e.g., the time until the specified maximum number of game balls wins) is variable using a variable means such as a pin on the gaming board, and if the second state occurs in a first time (e.g., 25 seconds), the transition to the next specified operating state will be slower than if the second state occurs in a second time (e.g., 20 seconds) that is shorter than the first time, then the gaming hall may adjust the pin to favor the player, and the shorter the time until the second state occurs, the faster the specific game state will progress, and the player may win a large number of prize balls in a short period of time (the ball payout rate during the specific game state will increase significantly). Ultimately, this could significantly deviate from the gaming specifications required by the gaming machine manufacturer, causing significant disadvantages to the gaming hall.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means FL3, the longer the time until the second state occurs, the shorter the period (interval period) until the transition to the next predetermined operating state can be. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunctions such as a player winning a large number of prize balls in a short period of time.

Means FL4. A gaming machine described in any one of means FL1 to FL3, characterized in that the first state can occur after the predetermined operation means continues the predetermined operation state for a predetermined period of time.

For example, in gaming halls, adjustments may be made to the guide members, such as nails, arranged on the game board of a pachinko machine in a way that is disadvantageous to players (for example, adjusting the nails to make it more difficult for the game ball to enter the variable winning device).

In such cases, if a time limit (prescribed maximum opening time) is not set as one of the triggers for ending the predetermined operation state of the predetermined operation means (for example, a variable winning device) in the specific game state, the predetermined operation state of the predetermined operation means may never end, causing the specific game state to be prolonged, resulting in a steady increase in the number of wasted balls that do not win a prize on the predetermined operation means, etc., and the player may end up wasting a large amount of their balls.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means FL4, after the predetermined operation means has entered the predetermined operation state in a specific game state, a predetermined duration (prescribed maximum opening time) is set as one of the triggers for the predetermined operation means to transition to a predetermined stop state (trigger for ending the predetermined operation state), thereby making it possible to prevent the occurrence of the various malfunctions described above.

However, if such a predetermined duration is set, a situation may arise in which the first state, which is less advantageous to the player (for example, a situation in which the number of winning balls in the variable winning device does not reach the specified maximum number of winning balls), occurs, but this situation can be alleviated by the configuration of means FL1 described above. In other words, with a configuration such as means FL4, the effect of means FL1 described above will be more effective.

Means FL5. This gaming machine is described in any one of means FL1 to FL4, characterized in that when the second state occurs in the specific gaming state and causes the predetermined operation means to transition to the predetermined stop state, the period until the predetermined operation means transitions to the predetermined operation state can be changed to a plurality of different periods.

If the period (interval period) until the predetermined operation means is transitioned to the predetermined operation state after the second state occurs and transitions to the predetermined stop state is uniform, the transition to the next predetermined operation state will always occur at the same time. As a result, during this period (until the transition to the next predetermined operation state), the player will not fire any game balls and will simply continue to stare blankly at the gaming machine, which could significantly reduce the player's interest in the game.

In contrast, the above-mentioned means FL5 is configured to be able to change the period (interval period) until the predetermined operation means transitions to the next predetermined operation state to a number of different periods. This allows the player to avoid wasting game balls and increase profit margins by always being aware of the start timing of the next predetermined operation state, allowing them to concentrate on the game. As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

Means FL6. The gaming machine described in any of means FL1 to FL5 is characterized in that it includes a specific stop execution means that executes a specific stop state different from the predetermined stop state executed by the maintenance state execution means when the second state occurs in the specific gaming state and causes the predetermined operation means to transition to the predetermined stop state.

According to the above-mentioned means FL6, when the second state occurs and the predetermined operation means transitions to a predetermined stop state (closed state), the specific stop execution means can execute a specific stop state (e.g., a closed state with an additional extension time of 0.5 seconds) that differs from the predetermined stop state (e.g., a closed state with a basic time of 0.1 seconds) set by the maintenance state execution means.

As a result, when the second state occurs and the predetermined operation means transitions to the predetermined stop state, it is only necessary to execute control related to the predetermined stop state by the maintenance state execution means, as well as control related to the specific stop state by the specific stop execution means, thereby simplifying the control process.

The configuration of this means FL6 is particularly effective in a configuration such as the above-mentioned means FL5, in which the period until transition to the next predetermined operating state can be changed to multiple different periods.

Means FL7. The gaming machine is provided with a special effect execution means for executing a special effect that would not be executed if the first state occurs and the game machine transitions to the predetermined stop state after the second state occurs and the game machine transitions to the predetermined stop state,
A gaming machine described in any of means FL1 to FL6, characterized in that the special effects include at least a first effect in which the specified operation means does not transition to the specified operation state during or after the execution of the effect, and a second effect that can be executed after the execution of the effect but before the specified operation means transitions to the specified operation state.

According to the above-mentioned means FL7, when the second state occurs and the predetermined stop state is entered, a first effect such as "Please wait a moment" is executed to notify the user that the predetermined operation means has not entered the predetermined operation state, or a second effect such as "Opening soon" is executed to notify the user that the predetermined operation means has entered the predetermined operation state.

This allows players to start and stop the launch of game balls at the appropriate time. As a result, players can intervene technically, avoid wasting game balls, and increase profit margins. Ultimately, this allows players to concentrate on playing even when the game is stopped at a specified time, increasing the player's interest.

Means FL8. The gaming machine described in any one of means FL1 to FL7 is configured to, in the specific gaming state, when the first state occurs in the first predetermined operating state, transition to the predetermined stop state, and then transition to the second predetermined operating state, continuously execute a predetermined effect at least from midway through the first predetermined operating state to after the start of the second predetermined operating state.

For example, if the predetermined stop state (closed state) to which the first state (e.g., the specified maximum open time has elapsed) occurs in a predetermined operating state (e.g., a predetermined round) is set to an extremely short time (e.g., 0.004 seconds) in order to enhance the effect of the above-mentioned means FL1, the player may not be able to recognize that they have transitioned from a predetermined operating state to the next predetermined operating state. Therefore, if the presentation were to change during a predetermined stop state (e.g., a short interval of 0.004 seconds), the player may be confused and their interest may decrease.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means FL8, in a specific game state, when the first state (e.g., the specified maximum opening time has elapsed) occurs in a first predetermined operation state (e.g., the first round) and transitions to a predetermined stop state (e.g., a short interval), and then transitions to a second predetermined operation state (e.g., the second round), the specified presentation is continuously executed at least from midway through the first predetermined operation state until after the start of the second predetermined operation state. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest.

Means FL9. The gaming machine described in any one of means FL1 to FL8 is configured to cause the predetermined stopped state to be maintained for the predetermined period by the maintenance state execution means, whether the first state occurs and causes the predetermined operation means to transition to the predetermined stopped state, or whether the second state occurs and causes the predetermined operation means to transition to the predetermined stopped state.

According to the above-mentioned means FL9, whether the first state occurs and causes the predetermined operation means to transition to the predetermined stopped state, or the second state occurs and causes the predetermined operation means to transition to the predetermined stopped state, common control processing can be executed by the maintenance state execution means at least at the end of the predetermined operation state of the predetermined operation means (at the start of the predetermined stopped state), thereby simplifying the control processing.

Second Embodiment
A pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with those of the first embodiment (such as the same components and the same processing contents) will be described using the same component names and the same reference numerals.

Pachinko machines are a type of gaming machine known in the art, in which game balls are fired into a play area.

For example, in a pachinko machine, a game ball is fired towards the game area, and when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, a variable display of a pattern is executed on a predetermined display means, and if the result of the variable display is a predetermined result, a predetermined winning state occurs.

Amusement machines such as pachinko machines offer players a variety of entertainment options (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A). For example, a predetermined display effect is produced by a predetermined effect display means in conjunction with the changing display of the symbols. Furthermore, in recent years, gaming machines have also become available that allow players to change various settings to suit their preferences.

However, with conventional gaming machines, there was a desire to further improve the enjoyment of players.

For example, in the past, if a specific player changed the settings on a specific gaming machine and the changed settings remained on the gaming machine even after the player finished playing, there was a risk that the next player playing on that gaming machine would lose interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that allows users to conveniently change or cancel settings on the gaming machine, thereby improving convenience and interest for players.

In contrast to this, specifically, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
a winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on the determination by a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
A variable display means for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the winning/losing lottery;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific game state after the end of a specific variable display that displays a specific display result that is executed when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a specific result;
A performance execution means for performing a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements during the variable display for the predetermined period;
and input means electrically connected to the effect execution means, and capable of allowing a player to input a predetermined value to the effect execution means.
This gaming machine is
a detection means that, in a predetermined input-enabled state, enters a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection target approaches or abuts on a predetermined detection unit within a predetermined distance;
an information output means capable of executing a predetermined output when the detection means reaches at least the predetermined detection state;
Numerical information update means for updating predetermined numerical information according to the progress of a predetermined game state;
When a predetermined output condition is established, the information output means outputs a plurality of pieces of information stored in a predetermined storage unit and corresponding to the input of the predetermined information to the performance execution means;
When the predetermined numerical information is updated to a specific numerical value based on the update by the numerical information update means after the input of the predetermined information is executed and a specific state occurs, a specific output state that outputs identification information corresponding to the specific state can be generated.
It is possible to conveniently change or cancel settings on the gaming machine, which in turn improves convenience and interest for players.

More specifically, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
a jackpot lottery unit that executes a jackpot lottery based on whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is met through a determination process that determines whether or not the predetermined lottery condition is met;
A special symbol display device that executes a symbol variation display for a predetermined period based on the result of the jackpot lottery;
a jackpot game execution unit that executes a jackpot game after the jackpot variable display that statically displays the jackpot result that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a winning result has ended;
A sub-controller that performs a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements (performance display devices, speakers, lamps, movable accessories, etc.) during the pattern variable display for the predetermined period;
A gaming machine equipped with a Bluetooth (registered trademark) module that is electrically connected to the sub-control device and allows a player to wirelessly input to the sub-control device,
This gaming machine is
an NFC module (NFC chip) that enters a current receiving state when a predetermined mobile terminal (NFC-equipped mobile terminal) approaches or touches a predetermined touch unit within a predetermined distance in an NFC reception permitted state (an NFC reception enabled state in a Bluetooth non-connected state);
an antenna unit capable of executing a predetermined output when the NFC module is at least in a current receiving state;
a remaining ball counting unit that can update the number of remaining game balls (number of balls held, etc.) according to the progress of the pinball game in which game balls are shot,
When an NFC communication state is established, the antenna unit is configured to output a plurality of pieces of information (device name, address, password) stored in a predetermined memory unit and corresponding to an input of a Bluetooth connection request to the Bluetooth module,
By providing a gaming machine characterized by being configured to generate a specific output state that outputs identification information (text information such as "communication connection in progress") corresponding to the Bluetooth communication connection state (pairing state) when the number of remaining balls is updated to "0" based on the update of the remaining ball counting unit after the Bluetooth connection request is input and a Bluetooth communication connection state (pairing state) is generated,
It is possible to conveniently change or cancel settings on the gaming machine, which in turn improves convenience and interest for players.

Similarly to the above, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be
a winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on the determination by a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
A variable display means for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the winning/losing lottery;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific game state after the end of a specific variable display that displays a specific display result that is executed when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a specific result;
A performance execution means for performing a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements during the variable display for the predetermined period;
and input means electrically connected to the effect execution means, and capable of allowing a player to input a predetermined value to the effect execution means.
This gaming machine is
a detection means that, in a predetermined input-enabled state, enters a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection target approaches or abuts on a predetermined detection unit within a predetermined distance;
an information output means capable of executing a predetermined output when the detection means reaches at least the predetermined detection state;
Numerical information update means for updating predetermined numerical information according to the progress of a predetermined game state;
When a predetermined output condition is established, the information output means outputs a plurality of pieces of information stored in a predetermined storage unit and corresponding to the input of the predetermined information to the performance execution means;
When the predetermined numerical information is updated to a specific numerical value based on the update by the numerical information update means after the input of the predetermined information is executed and a specific state occurs, a selectable state is generated in which selectable information that allows the player to select whether or not to continue the specific state is output.
It is possible to conveniently change or cancel settings on the gaming machine, which in turn improves convenience and interest for players.

More specifically, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
a jackpot lottery unit that executes a jackpot lottery based on whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is met through a determination process that determines whether or not the predetermined lottery condition is met;
A special symbol display device that executes a symbol variation display for a predetermined period based on the result of the jackpot lottery;
a jackpot game execution unit that executes a jackpot game after the jackpot variable display that statically displays the jackpot result that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a winning result has ended;
A sub-controller that performs a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements (performance display devices, speakers, lamps, movable accessories, etc.) during the pattern variable display for the predetermined period;
A gaming machine equipped with a Bluetooth (registered trademark) module that is electrically connected to the sub-control device and allows a player to wirelessly input to the sub-control device,
This gaming machine is
an NFC module (NFC chip) that enters a current receiving state when a predetermined mobile terminal (NFC-equipped mobile terminal) approaches or touches a predetermined touch unit within a predetermined distance in an NFC reception permitted state (an NFC reception enabled state in a Bluetooth non-connected state);
an antenna unit capable of executing a predetermined output when the NFC module is at least in a current receiving state;
a remaining ball counting unit that can update the number of remaining game balls (number of balls held, etc.) according to the progress of the pinball game in which game balls are shot,
When an NFC communication state is established, the antenna unit is configured to output a plurality of pieces of information (device name, address, password) stored in a predetermined memory unit and corresponding to an input of a Bluetooth connection request to the Bluetooth module,
When the number of remaining balls is updated to "0" based on the update of the remaining ball counting unit after the Bluetooth connection request is input and a Bluetooth communication connection state (pairing state) is generated, the gaming machine is configured to generate a selectable state that outputs selectable information (text information such as "Do you want to continue the communication connection?") that allows the player to choose whether or not to continue the Bluetooth communication connection state (pairing state),
It is possible to conveniently change or cancel settings on the gaming machine, which in turn improves convenience and interest for players.

In the present invention, the "specific game execution means" may be anything that executes a specific game state after the specific variable display has ended, as long as it can realize the gist of the present invention, such as a control process or control device that executes a small win state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, or a control process or control device that executes a big win state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state or the small win state (more specifically, a control process or control device that executes a big win state in which an advantageous state is granted after the end, a control process or control device that executes a big win state in which an advantageous state is granted after the end, a control process or control device that executes a big win state in which a high probability state is granted in which the probability of a transition to a special game state being determined by a predetermined lottery means after the end is higher than in the normal game state, or a control process or control device that executes a big win state in which a high probability state is granted after the end).

In this invention, the "performance execution means" may be anything that uses multiple performance elements to perform variable performances, and may be anything that can achieve the gist of the present invention, such as a display control device that uses a display device to perform display performances, an audio control device that uses a speaker to perform audio performances, a light emission control means that uses a light-emitting body such as a lamp to perform light emission performances, or any combination of these (such as a sub-controller), etc.

In this invention, the "input means" refers to any device that is electrically connected to the effect execution means and allows the player to make predetermined inputs to the effect execution means. Provided that the gist of this invention can be realized, it may be any device, such as an NFC module that allows input via NFC communication, a Bluetooth module that allows input via Bluetooth communication, a wireless LAN module that allows input via wireless LAN (including Wi-Fi) communication, a button switch that the player can press to input, or a touch panel that the player can touch to input. Note that, hereinafter, Bluetooth and Wi-Fi are registered trademarks. Bluetooth also includes Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE), etc.

In this invention, the "storage unit" may be any type of memory, as long as it is capable of realizing the gist of the present invention, including volatile memory such as RAM (Random Access Memory), SRAM (Static RAM), and DRAM (Dynamic RAM), non-volatile memory such as ROM (Read Only Memory), flash memory, EPROM (Erasable Programmable ROM), and EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM), and auxiliary storage devices such as HDD (hard disk drive) and SSD (Solid State Drive).

In this invention, the "variable display means" may be any device that performs a variable display for a predetermined period of time based on the results of a win/lose lottery, and may be any device that can achieve the gist of this invention, such as a display device consisting of a three-color light-emitting diode (three-color LED), an electric display device such as a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a segment display device (7-segment display device), or an organic EL display device; a mechanical reel display device such as a reel, drum, or belt; a display device attached to the game board that constitutes the play area; a display device attached to a center frame attached to the game board; a display device attached to the back side of a translucent game board; or a display device attached to a mounting frame to which the game board is attached.

In this invention, a "specific display result" may be any display result that is executed when the result of the win/lose lottery is a specific result, and may be anything that can achieve the gist of this invention, such as a small win stop display indicating that a small win state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will be generated, or a jackpot stop display indicating that a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state or small win state will be generated (more specifically, a jackpot stop display indicating that a jackpot state that will confer a predetermined advantageous state will be generated after completion, a jackpot stop display indicating that a jackpot state that will not confer a predetermined advantageous state will be generated after completion, a jackpot stop display indicating that a jackpot state that will confer a high probability state will be generated after completion, or a jackpot stop display indicating that a jackpot state that will not confer a high probability state will be generated after completion).

In the present invention, "plural pieces of information corresponding to the input of predetermined information" may be any information stored in a predetermined storage unit, and may be, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, device name information, address information, password, instruction information (command information) for issuing a predetermined instruction, code information, response information for issuing a predetermined response, request information for issuing a predetermined request, selection information for making a predetermined selection, permission information for requesting predetermined permission, text information for conveying predetermined content, image information for displaying a predetermined image, audio information for executing predetermined audio output, drawing information for executing predetermined drawing processing, and performance information for executing predetermined performances.

In the present invention, the "detection means" may be anything that enters a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection target approaches or contacts a predetermined distance (detection position or detection range) from a predetermined detection unit. As long as it can achieve the gist of the present invention, it may be anything, such as an NFC chip that can detect predetermined radio waves when a detection target approaches or contacts a predetermined antenna unit (current receiving unit) that serves as the detection unit; a touch panel that can detect changes in pressure or capacitance when a detection target approaches or contacts a predetermined electrode that serves as the detection unit; a switch that turns on when a detection target approaches or contacts a contact unit (switch unit) that serves as the detection unit; a light-shielding sensor that can detect predetermined light (including reflected light emitted from a predetermined light-emitting element) when a detection target approaches or contacts a light-receiving element that serves as the detection unit; or a human presence sensor that can detect a predetermined temperature change when a detection target approaches or contacts an infrared sensor that serves as the detection unit.

In the present invention, the "judgment means" may be any means that judges whether or not a predetermined lottery condition has been met, and may be any means that can realize the gist of the present invention, such as a device or process that can judge whether or not a gaming ball has entered a predetermined ball entry means (including a variable ball entry means), a device or process that can judge whether or not a gaming ball that entered a predetermined ball entry means has entered a specific ball entry area (such as a V entry port), a device or process that can judge whether or not a condition for starting a predetermined variable display in a predetermined variable display means has been met, a device or process that can judge whether or not a predetermined variable display has started in a predetermined variable display means, or a device or process that can judge whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since a predetermined variable display started in a predetermined variable display means. It may be any type of device or process, such as a device or process that can determine whether a predetermined variable display has started or stopped in a predetermined variable display means while at least one of the rights to play a predetermined lottery is reserved in a reservation means that can reserve up to a predetermined number of such rights, a device or process that can determine whether a predetermined variable display has stopped in a predetermined variable display means, a device or process that can determine whether the stop of a predetermined variable display has been confirmed in a predetermined variable display means, a device or process that can determine whether a predetermined period has passed since the stop of a predetermined variable display in a predetermined variable display means, or a process that can determine whether a predetermined operating means has been operated.

In this invention, the "information output means" is any means capable of executing a predetermined output when the detection means reaches at least a predetermined detection state, and configured to output, when a predetermined output condition is met, multiple pieces of information stored in a predetermined memory unit that correspond to the input of the predetermined information to the performance execution means. As long as the gist of this invention can be realized, it may be any means, such as an antenna and/or its control means that transmits multiple pieces of information via radio waves, a display means and/or its control means that displays an image containing multiple pieces of information (including code information such as a QR code), a speaker and/or its control means that outputs multiple pieces of information via sound waves, or a light-emitting means and/or its control means that outputs multiple pieces of information via light (including infrared light). Note that, as in the following, QR code is a registered trademark.

In the present invention, a "specific gaming state" may be anything that is executed after the end of a specific variable display that displays a specific display result when the result of the win/lose lottery is a specific result, and as long as it can achieve the gist of the present invention, it may be anything, such as a small win state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, or a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state or the small win state (more specifically, a jackpot state in which an advantageous state is granted after the end, a jackpot state in which an advantageous state is not granted after the end, a jackpot state in which a high probability state is granted in which the probability of a determination to transition to a special gaming state by a predetermined lottery means after the end is higher than in the normal gaming state, or a jackpot state in which a high probability state is not granted after the end).

In the present invention, a "predetermined input-enabled state" may be any state that achieves the gist of the present invention, such as an NFC communication receptive state (receptive period), a Bluetooth communication receptive state (receptive period), a wireless LAN (including Wi-Fi) communication receptive state (receptive period), a button switch operable state (operation valid period), a touch panel operable state (operation valid period), an opening or ending effect execution period in a jackpot state, an execution period of a mission effect, etc., a rapidly changing or stopped pattern display, a state in which a game ball can be released, etc.

In this invention, a "specific variable display" may be any variable display that displays a specific display result, and may be any variable display that can achieve the gist of this invention, such as a small win variable display that becomes a small win stop display mode indicating that a small win state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will be generated, or a jackpot variable display that becomes a jackpot stop display mode indicating that a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state or the small win state will be generated (more specifically, a jackpot variable display that becomes a jackpot stop display mode indicating that a jackpot state that will confer a predetermined advantageous state will be generated after completion, a jackpot variable display that becomes a jackpot stop display mode indicating that a jackpot state that will not confer a predetermined advantageous state will be generated after completion, a jackpot variable display that becomes a jackpot stop display mode indicating that a jackpot state that will confer a high probability state will be generated after completion, or a jackpot variable display that becomes a jackpot stop display mode indicating that a jackpot state that will not confer a high probability state will be generated after completion).

In this invention, a "selectable state" may be any state that outputs selectable information that allows the user to choose whether or not to continue a particular state, and may be any state that achieves the gist of this invention, such as a state that displays and outputs text information as selectable information, a state that displays and outputs an image as selectable information, a state that outputs sound as selectable information, a state that outputs light as selectable information, a state that externally outputs a signal as selectable information, or a state that outputs radio waves as selectable information.

In this invention, the "predetermined lottery conditions" may be anything that can achieve the gist of the invention, such as a gaming ball entering a predetermined entry means (including a variable entry means), a gaming ball that has entered the predetermined entry means entering a specific entry area (such as a V entry slot), a condition for starting a predetermined variable display in a predetermined variable display means being met, a predetermined variable display being started in a predetermined variable display means, a predetermined period of time having passed since the predetermined variable display was started in a predetermined variable display means, a holding means that can hold up to a predetermined number of rights to a predetermined lottery, with at least one such right being held, a predetermined variable display being stopped in a predetermined variable display means, a predetermined variable display being stopped in a predetermined variable display means, the stop of the predetermined variable display being confirmed in a predetermined variable display means, a predetermined period of time having passed since the stop of the predetermined variable display in a predetermined variable display means, or a predetermined operating means being operated.

In the present invention, a "variation effect" may be any effect that uses a specified effect element during a variation display, such as a reach effect, development effect, cut-in effect, advance notice effect, sign effect, continuous effect, re-variation effect, or break-in effect, including a display effect using a specified display means, a sound effect using a specified sound output means, a light-emitting effect using a specified light-emitting means, or an action effect using a specified action means.

In the present invention, the "predetermined output condition" may be any condition that allows the gist of the present invention to be realized, such as when an NFC communication state is established, when a Bluetooth communication state is established, when a wireless LAN (including Wi-Fi) communication state is established, when an operating means such as a button that can be operated by the player is operated, when a predetermined image (including code information such as a QR code) is displayed on a predetermined display means, when the variable display on a predetermined variable display means stops, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the variable display on a predetermined variable display means stopped, when the occurrence of a big win state is confirmed, when the occurrence of a small win state is confirmed, when a probability variable game state is started, or when a time-saving game state is started.

In the present invention, a "specific output state" may be any state that outputs identification information corresponding to a specific state, and may be any state that achieves the gist of the present invention, such as a state that displays and outputs text information as identification information corresponding to a specific state, a state that displays and outputs an image as identification information corresponding to a specific state, a state that outputs audio information as identification information corresponding to a specific state, a state that outputs light as identification information corresponding to a specific state, or a state that externally outputs a signal as identification information corresponding to a specific state.

In this invention, a "predetermined gaming state" may be any state as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the invention, such as a pinball gaming state in which gaming balls are fired, a normal gaming state during normal play, a probability-variable gaming state in which the probability of winning is higher than normal, a time-saving gaming state in which the fluctuation time is shorter than normal, a variable display state in which a predetermined pattern is displayed in a variable manner, an effect gaming state in which a predetermined effect is being executed, a standby state in which a variable display is not being executed, a standby effect execution state in which a predetermined standby effect is being executed, a variable stop state in which a predetermined variable display has stopped, a big win state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, or a small win state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In the present invention, a "specific state" may be anything that can achieve the gist of the present invention, such as an NFC communication connection state, a Bluetooth communication connection state, a wireless LAN (including Wi-Fi) communication connection state, a state in which the operation validity period of an operating means such as a button switch or touch panel is set (operable state), a state in which a specific effect is being executed, a custom change setting state, a big win state, a small win state, a probability change state, or a time-saving state.

In the present invention, a "predetermined detection target" may be any object that can be detected, and may be, for example, a part of the human body such as a player's hand or finger, an object held by a player (e.g., a mobile phone, smartphone, IC card, etc.), a detectable member displaceably mounted on a gaming machine (such as the movable contact of a button switch), a signal output from a predetermined device, light emitted in a predetermined manner, or sound output in a predetermined manner, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized.

In the present invention, the "win/lose lottery means" may be any means that executes a win/lose lottery based on the determination that predetermined lottery conditions have been met, and may be any means that can achieve the gist of the present invention, such as a means that executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a small win state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, or a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state or small win state (more specifically, a jackpot state that confers a predetermined advantageous state after completion, a jackpot state that does not confers a predetermined advantageous state after completion, a jackpot state that confers a high probability state after completion, or a jackpot state that does not confers a high probability state after completion).

In the present invention, the "numerical information update means" may be anything that can update predetermined numerical information (including specific numerical values) in accordance with the progress of a predetermined game state, and may be anything that can achieve the gist of the present invention, such as updating a counting counter that can count the number of game media (including virtual game media) as predetermined numerical information that increases or decreases in a pinball game state, updating a number counter that can count the number of variable displays as predetermined numerical information executed in a probability variable game state or a time-saving game state, updating a measurement timer that can measure elapsed time as predetermined numerical information in a variable display state, updating a measurement timer that can measure elapsed time as predetermined numerical information in a variable stop state or a standby state, or a counting counter that can count the number of rounds executed in a big win state or a small win state, etc.

In this invention, a "performance element" may be anything that can realize the gist of the present invention, such as a performance display device that performs a predetermined display performance (or a performance display, character, icon, still image, moving image, etc. displayed on the performance display device), a speaker that performs a predetermined sound performance (or a performance sound emitted from a speaker), a lamp that performs a predetermined light emission performance (or a performance light emitted from a lamp), or a movable prop that performs a predetermined action performance (or a performance action performed by a movable prop).

In the present invention, "input of specified information" may be anything, so long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, such as input of a connection request to perform specified communication (such as input of a connection request to perform NFC communication, input of a connection request to perform Bluetooth communication, input of a connection request to perform wireless LAN communication), input of customer information to obtain specified benefits, input of a password to identify an individual, input of command information to execute various effects, input of numerical information to identify the number of gaming media, input of configurable information to change (customize) various effect modes, input of characters using input means such as a keyboard or touch panel, or input of voice using voice input means such as a microphone.

In this invention, a "specific result" may be anything, so long as it is possible to achieve the gist of the present invention, such as the result of generating a small win state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal state, or the result of generating a big win state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal state or a small win state (more specifically, the result of generating a big win state that confers a predetermined advantageous state after completion, the result of generating a big win state that does not confers a predetermined advantageous state after completion, the result of generating a big win state that confers a high probability state after completion, or the result of generating a big win state that does not confers a high probability state after completion).

The gaming machine according to the present invention (pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment), which will be described in detail below, comprises a judgment unit as the judgment means of the present invention described above, a lottery unit as the win/lose lottery means of the present invention, a variable display unit as the variable display means of the present invention, a special game state as the specific game state of the present invention, a special game execution unit as the specific game execution means of the present invention, a presentation unit as the presentation element of the present invention, a presentation control unit as the presentation execution means of the present invention, an input unit as the input means of the present invention, a detectable unit as the detection target of the present invention, a detection unit as the detection unit of the present invention, an on state as the detection state of the present invention, a detection function unit as the detection means of the present invention, an interrupt state as the predetermined output condition of the present invention, a storage unit as the storage unit of the present invention, an output function as the information output means of the present invention, a transition state as the specific state of the present invention, an update function as the numerical information update means of the present invention, update information as the predetermined numerical information of the present invention, a specific value as the specific numerical value of the present invention, notification information as the identification information of the present invention, an information output state as the specific output state of the present invention, setting mode information as the selectable information of the present invention, an output selection state as the selectable state of the present invention, and a suppression function as the suppression means of the present invention.

The specific configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present invention will be described in detail below. The pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment is a so-called sealed-in pachinko machine, in which a predetermined number of game balls pre-sealed inside are circulated and used for pinball play. In a sealed-in pachinko machine 10, instead of lending out real game balls (rental balls) or paying out real game balls (prize balls), a gaming value (virtual gaming medium) equivalent to the real game balls is quantified and awarded to the player.

As shown in Figures 2-3 and other figures, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of this outer frame 11 so that it can be opened and closed. However, for the sake of convenience, Figure 2-3 does not show the game components (nails, accessories, etc.) arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame 14, etc.

As shown in Figures 2-6 and elsewhere, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made from wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made from extruded aluminum alloy material. These frame components 11a-11d are assembled together into a rectangular frame shape using detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left-side frame component 11c, respectively (see Figure 2-1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, allowing the inner frame 12 to open and close. The inner frame 12 and other components are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

The right-side frame component 11d has an extending wall 83 that protrudes from near its rear widthwise end toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see Figure 2-6) provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 2-5). In addition, as shown in Figure 2-3, the front side of the extending wall 83 is provided with a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 that engage with the locking member of the locking device 600. Furthermore, the lower receiving portion 85 has a pressing portion 86 that protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 and abuts against the inner frame opening detection switch 92 (described below).

A resin decorative panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. A rib 88 that protrudes upward is integrally formed on the innermost part of the top surface of the decorative panel 87. This reduces the likelihood of a gap forming between the decorative panel and the inner frame 12.

As shown in Figures 2-3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward around this opening/closing axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly oval window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

A front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened forward around an opening and closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The front frame 14 may also be configured so that it can be opened and closed directly by the outer frame 11, rather than via the inner frame 12.

The front frame 14, like the inner frame 12, has a rectangular outer shape, and when closed, covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12. A roughly oval window 101 is formed in the center of the front frame 14. This makes it possible to view the game board 30 (play area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. Details of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in Figures 2-1, 2-2(a), etc., a bulge 19 is provided on the front side of the front frame 14, below the window 101. To the right of the bulge 19 is a game ball launch handle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "handle") 18, which serves as an operating part that protrudes forward.

The handle 18 is equipped with a rotation operation unit 18a as an input unit that can be rotated by the player, a touch sensor (not shown) as a detection function unit that can detect when the player's hand, which is the detection unit, touches the handle 18, and a variable resistor (not shown) as a detection function unit that detects the amount of operation of the rotation operation unit 18a. With this configuration, when the rotation operation unit 18a is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by the launching device 60, described below, with a launch strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation operation.

The handle 18 is also provided with a stop lever 18b as a detection unit that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand while gripping the rotation control unit 18a. When the stop lever 18b is pressed to the on state, the launching of game balls by the launching device 60 is prohibited, even if the handle 18 is being gripped. This means that the rotation control unit 18a can be rotated while prohibiting the launching of game balls, or the launching of game balls can be temporarily stopped while gripping the handle 18.

The enclosed pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a ball circulation mechanism for circulating a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 50 balls) within the machine. Such ball circulation mechanisms are well-known technology, and a variety of technologies can be employed. Therefore, the main components will be briefly described below.

A supply passage 70, which forms part of the ball circulation mechanism, is provided inside the bulge 19 (see Figure 2-1). The supply passage 70 is configured to store game balls, align them in a row, and supply them toward the launching device 60 (ball feeding device 63, described below) located on the front side of the inner frame 12.

In addition, a predetermined gap is formed between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and a foul ball passage 72 is formed at a predetermined location on the back side of the front frame 14, located below this gap (see Figure 2-3).

The foul ball passage 72 is connected to the supply passage 70. As a result, if a game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 (described below) and returns up the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is returned to the supply passage 70 via the foul ball passage 72. The foul ball is then supplied again to the launching device 60 (ball feeding device 63) via the supply passage 70 and launched toward the playing area.

A foul ball detection switch 93 (see Figure 2-7) is provided in the foul ball passage 72. The foul ball detection switch 93 detects balls that have passed through the foul ball passage 72, and the detection results are output to the counting management device 311, described below. The counting management device 311 manages the number of game balls (held balls) owned by the player, and when the foul ball detection switch 93 detects a ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 72, it adds one to the value of the "held balls," described below.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the inlet 70a (left end in Figure 2-1) located at the upstream end of the supply passage 70 is connected to the outlet 75a located at the downstream end of the recovery passage 75 (described below) provided on the back side of the gaming board 30 (see Figures 2-3 and 2-4).

The outlet 70b (right end in Figure 2-1), located at the downstream end of the supply passage 70, is connected to the inlet 63a of the ball feeding device 63 located on the front side of the inner frame 12 when the front frame 14 is closed (see Figures 2-3 and 2-4).

A card unit operating section 120 is provided on the upper surface of the bulge 19. The card unit operating section 120 allows the player to operate the card unit 900 (see Figure 2-1) that is placed adjacent to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming hall.

In addition, a first operation unit 125 and a second operation unit 126, which can be operated and input by the player, are provided on the upper surface of the bulge portion 19.

The first operation unit 125 is primarily used for presentation purposes. In this embodiment, the first operation unit 125 is a contact-type input unit that includes a button as a detectable part that can move in the direction of pressure when pressed (for example, by pressing downward) by the player's finger or hand, which serves as the detectable part, and an operation detection switch as a detection function part that turns into a predetermined on state and outputs a predetermined detection signal when pressed by the player's finger or the like and the button moves a predetermined amount and comes within a predetermined distance of or comes into contact with a sensor as a predetermined detection part. Of course, the configuration of the first operation unit 125 is not limited to this, and other different configurations may be used.

When the first operation unit 125 (hereinafter referred to as the "effect button 125") is pressed by the player, a predetermined detection signal, which is a predetermined input by the player, is input from the operation detection switch to the sub-control device 262 described below.

As a result, for example, when a player presses the effect button 125 during a specified period while a variable display is being executed (during an effect) on the effect display device 42 (described below), a specified effect will be executed on the effect display device 42.

In addition, when the effect display device 42 is in a standby state where no effects such as variable displays are being performed (excluding when the custom setting continuation selection screen 8000 described below is being displayed), the player can press the effect button 125 with a finger or other object to generate a user-responsive interrupt state, causing the effect display device 42 to display the game history as described below, or to display a menu screen 3000 [see Figure 2-54(a)] that constitutes setting mode information including multiple pieces of information for customizing the effect content to the player's preferences.

On the other hand, the second operation unit 126 is primarily used by the player to perform various setting operations, etc. In this embodiment, an operation means known as a cross key or the like is used as the second operation unit 126.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 2-2(b), the second operation unit 126 (hereinafter referred to as the "cross key 126") is composed of five operation buttons: an up button 126a, a down button 126b, a left button 126c, a right button 126d, and a center button 126e.

Each of the buttons 126a-126e of the cross key 126 employs a contact-type input unit that includes a button section that can move in the direction of pressure when pressed (for example, by pressing downwards) by the player's finger or hand, which serves as the detectable part; and an operation detection switch that serves as a detection function part that turns on in a predetermined state and outputs a predetermined detection signal when pressed by the player's finger or the like, causing the button section, which serves as the detectable part, to move a predetermined amount and come within a predetermined distance of or come into contact with a sensor section, which serves as a predetermined detection part.

Of course, the configuration of the input unit that allows the player to perform input operations is not limited to the first operation unit 125 or the second operation unit 126, and other different types may be used. For example, the input unit may be a touch panel that allows the player to perform input operations by touch, a jog dial that allows the player to perform input operations by rotation, or a slide lever that allows the player to perform input operations by sliding. Furthermore, the installation location is not limited to the top surface of the bulge 19, and may be anywhere that the player can operate.

When the player presses any of the buttons 126a to 126e on the cross key 126, a predetermined detection signal representing a predetermined input by the player is input from each of the operation detection switches to the sub-control device 262, which will be described later.

As a result, for example, when an information output state occurs in which a menu screen 3000 (see Figure 2-54(a)) or the like is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 as described below, the player can move the cursor 3100 displayed on the menu screen 3000 or the like in any direction up, down, left, or right by pressing each of the buttons 126a to 126d of the directional pad 126 with a finger or the like, or can confirm the item selected by the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button 126e.

In this way, when an interrupt state occurs in which the menu screen 3000 is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, and input of predetermined information corresponding to the multiple pieces of information displayed and output on the menu screen 3000 (menu items such as "language settings," "volume settings," "brightness settings," and "effect customization," described below) (selection and confirmation of a menu item (e.g., "language settings") using the directional pad 126) is detected, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 enters a transition state in which information (e.g., various language options) related to predetermined game specifications (e.g., "language settings") is displayed and output, making it possible to input information related to the game specifications (e.g., selection and confirmation of a predetermined language using the directional pad 126) and output it (e.g., various output processes based on the selected language).

In addition, an NFC module 1100 is provided on the upper left surface of the front edge of the bulge 19, which constitutes a wireless communication unit for performing near field communication (NFC) with an external communication device outside the pachinko machine 10 (in this embodiment, a mobile terminal 2000 carried by the player). The detailed configuration of the NFC module 1100 will be described later.

Here, we will explain NFC (near field communication). NFC is a short-range wireless communication standard that uses radio waves at a frequency of 13.56 MHz, with a maximum communication distance of several centimeters to 10 cm and a maximum communication speed of several hundred Kbps. NFC is covered by international standards such as "ISO/IEC 18092 (NFCIP-1)" and "ISO/IEC 21481 (NFC-IP2)," and specific specifications based on these international standards are being formulated by the NFC Forum, a standardization organization for NFC-related technologies.

NFC has two operating modes: "active mode," in which two communication devices (NFC-compatible devices) that communicate with each other each generate radio waves to transmit data, and "passive mode," in which only one of the two communication devices generates radio waves.

More specifically, when operating in "active mode," both communication devices receive power from a designated power source and transmit data to the other party by modulating the radio waves (carrier waves) they generate.

On the other hand, when operating in "passive mode," one communication device (initiator) transmits data to the other communication device (target) with which it is communicating by modulating the radio waves (carrier waves) it generates. The other communication device (target) then transmits data to the one communication device (initiator) by load modulating the radio waves generated by the one communication device (initiator) (operating and modulating using the current generated in the antenna coil by electromagnetic induction). Therefore, no power supply is required for the other communication device (target) operating in "passive mode."

When performing NFC communication, the device that first generates electromagnetic waves and starts communication is called the "initiator," and the device that communicates with the "initiator" in response to commands issued by the "initiator" is called the "target."

With the above configuration, an NFC-compatible device has three functions: card emulation, reader/writer, and device-to-device communication. The card emulation function performs the same operations as a contactless IC card or IC tag. The reader/writer function reads and writes data from contactless IC cards or IC tags. The device-to-device communication function enables communication between NFC-compatible devices.

In addition, the front frame 14 and the game board 30 are provided with various decorative lights (decorative lamps) as presentation elements. These lights change and control the light emission mode, which is one of the light output settings, in response to changes in the game state, etc., and serve as a presentation device that enhances the presentation effect during play.

For example, the front frame 14 has a frame illumination section 102 around the periphery of the window section 101. Error indicator lamps 105 that light up in the event of a specific error are also provided on both sides of the frame illumination section 102.

The game board 30 also has a central illumination section 103 located around the periphery of the center frame 47 (described below), and side illumination sections 104 located at the left and right lower parts of the game area. These illumination sections 102-104 incorporate light sources such as LEDs and a light emission control board that drives and controls the light sources. The central illumination section 103, which is one of the presentation sections, is used for instant announcement presentations as notification information (described below).

Note that if the brightness of the light output from each illumination unit 102-104 as a presentation element is high, the presentation effect will be enhanced, but the player may find it dazzling. On the other hand, if the brightness of the light output as a presentation element is low, the glare can be reduced, but the presentation effect may be reduced.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured to allow the brightness of the light output from each of the illumination units 102-104 to be adjusted to suit the player's preferences, in order to provide a gaming environment suited to each player. Details of how this brightness is adjusted will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-1, speakers SP are provided in the upper left and right corners of the front frame 14 as a performance unit that outputs audio information such as sound effects and background music depending on the game status (see Figure 2-3, etc.).

Note that if the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker SP as a presentation element is high, the presentation effect will be enhanced, but the player may find it too noisy. On the other hand, if the volume of the sound emitted as a presentation element is low, the noise level can be reduced, but the presentation effect may be reduced.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured to allow the volume, which is one of the output settings for the sound emitted from the speaker SP, to be adjusted to suit the player's preferences, in order to provide a gaming environment that is suited to each player. Details of how to adjust the volume will be described later.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of rectangular glass panes attached separately to the front and rear, but rather is round overall and is attached as an assembly.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to Figures 2-4. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 behind the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge abutting the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, approximately the center of the front of the game board 30, which forms the play area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 in the resin base 38.

In addition, a launching device 60 serving as a launching means and a launching rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after it is launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front part of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39. In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device is used as the launching device 60.

Furthermore, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device 63 is provided which guides the game balls guided from the supply passage 70 within the bulge 19 one by one to the launching position of the launching device 60.

A fired ball detection switch 94 (see Figure 2-7) is provided at the outlet of the ball feeding device 63 (the firing position of the firing device 60). The fired ball detection switch 94 detects game balls set at the firing position of the firing device 60, and the detection results are output to the counting management device 311, which will be described later. When the fired ball detection switch 94 detects a game ball being fired by the firing device 60, the counting management device 311 subtracts 1 from the "number of balls held" value, which will be described later.

The location of the launched ball detection switch 94, which detects the game balls launched by the launching device 60, is not limited to the outlet of the ball feeding device 63 (the launching position of the launching device 60), but may be other different locations. For example, the launched ball detection switch 94 may be located at the middle position of the launching rail 61 or rail 50, or at the position of the return ball prevention member 53 described below.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (play area) will be explained with reference to Figures 2-4. A rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which guides game balls launched from the launching device 60 to the top of the game board 30. As a result, game balls launched in response to the rotation of the handle 18 are guided into the play area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 via the launch rail 61 and rail 50. The rail 50 consists of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in Figure 2-4). This prevents a game ball that has been guided from the rail 50 into the play area from returning back into the rail 50.

In addition, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip of the outer rail component 52 (upper right in Figure 2-4). As a result, a game ball launched with a force greater than a predetermined level will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned, for example, toward approximately the center of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the gaming board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the gaming board 30. Therefore, the playing area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 in the resin base 38. However, because a gaming ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 before passing through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the playing area.

The game area is equipped with a general winning section 31A, a variable winning device 32A as a ball entry means (variable ball entry means), a first start winning section 33WA as a start means (first start winning means), a second start winning section 33WB as a start means (second start winning means), a through gate 34 as a start means (trigger start winning means), a variable display unit 35, etc. These are explained in detail below.

A variable display unit 35 is located approximately in the center of the play area. A first start-up winning section 33WA is located in the play area lower area ED, which is located below the variable display unit 35 within the play area.

The variable display unit 35 is provided with a display device 42 that serves as a display section for various display effects, and a center frame 47 that surrounds the display device 42. The center frame 47 has a frame shape with an opening in its center, through which the display section 42a of the display device 42 can be seen.

A stage portion 770, on which the game ball can roll, is provided on the upper surface of the lower edge of the center frame 47. A guide groove 774 that slopes gently downward toward the front is formed in the center of the stage portion 770. As shown in Figure 2-4, when the center frame 47 is placed on the game board 30, the guide groove 774 is located directly above the first start winning portion 33WA.

A ball passage (warp flow path) 775 is formed inside the left edge of the center frame 47 to allow game balls to pass through. The entrance of the ball passage 775 opens to the left side of the center of the left edge of the center frame 47 (towards the game board 30 surface). Meanwhile, the exit of the ball passage 775 opens to the right side of the lower end of the left edge of the center frame 47 (towards the stage portion 770). This ball passage 775 can guide game balls flowing down the game board 30 surface in the game area left-side area EA, which is located to the left of the variable display unit 35 within the game area, onto the stage portion 770 within the center frame 47.

A game ball guided onto the stage portion 770 via the ball passage 775 or the like rolls on the stage portion 770, then either falls from the front edge of the stage portion 770 onto the surface of the game board 30, or is ejected onto the surface of the game board 30 via the guide groove 774. Of these, game balls ejected via the guide groove 774 have a relatively high probability of landing in the first start winning section 33WA.

The first start winning section 33WA is located in the lower area ED of the play area, protruding forward from the front of the game board 30, with a winning opening (first start winning opening) above it through which game balls can always enter. In addition, a first start winning switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the first start winning section 33WA as a detection function unit that can detect game balls that enter through the first start winning opening.

Under this configuration, when a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and the first start winning switch 224a detects the gaming ball and turns on, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot state will be generated as a special gaming state (jackpot lottery), and a changing pattern is displayed on the first special pattern display device 43A, which will be described later. When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and the first start winning switch 224a detects the gaming ball and turns on, the start condition is met, and based on this, a changing pattern is displayed on the first special pattern display device 43A.

A variable winning device 32A is located below the first starting winning section 33WA in the lower area ED of the play area.

The variable prize winning device 32A is equipped with a large prize winning opening 32Aa through which game balls can enter, a large prize winning opening shutter 32Ab as an opening/closing member that opens and closes the large prize winning opening 32Aa, a large prize winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the large prize winning opening shutter 32Ab to open and close, and a large prize winning opening count switch 222 as a detection function unit that can detect game balls that have entered the large prize winning opening 32Aa.

Under this configuration, the variable winning device 32A is normally in a closed state in which the large prize opening shutter 32Ab closes the large prize opening 32Aa from above and below, preventing game balls flowing down the lower game area ED from entering the large prize opening 32Aa. Furthermore, in this closed state, game balls can flow down in front of the large prize opening shutter 32Ab.

On the other hand, when a jackpot occurs, the variable winning device 32A tilts forward with the large winning opening shutter 32Ab pivoting around its lower edge, opening the game ball flowing down the lower area ED of the game area to enter the large winning opening 32Aa.

In the lower area ED of the play area, in the left-hand region, located to the left of the first start-up winning section 33WA and the variable winning device 32A, multiple general winning sections 31A are arranged along the periphery of the play area. The general winning sections 31A are arranged to protrude forward from the front of the play board 30, with a winning opening (general winning opening) above them through which game balls can always enter. Additionally, a left general winning switch 221a is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning section 31A as a detection function unit capable of detecting game balls that enter through the general winning opening.

In addition, a through gate 34 is provided in the right-side area EB of the gaming area, located to the right of the variable display unit 35, and a second start-up winning section 33WB is provided downstream of the through gate 34.

The through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area to pass through one by one, and has a through gate switch 225 as a detection function unit that can detect game balls passing through it. Note that instead of a through gate through which game balls that enter the gate pass and return to the game area, the gate may be configured with a normal symbol start port through which entered game balls are ejected outside the game area.

When a gaming ball passes through the through gate 34 (when the through gate switch 225 detects the gaming ball and turns on), a start-up winning support lottery is held to determine whether the second start-up winning section 33WB will be opened, as described below, and a variable display is displayed on the normal pattern display device 41, described below, to indicate the result of the start-up winning support lottery. Here, if the start-up winning support lottery is won, the second start-up winning section 33WB will be opened for a specified period of time after the variable display ends.

The second start-up winning section 33WB is a variable winning device that changes state between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter.

In more detail, the second start winning section 33WB comprises a second start winning opening 33WBa through which a game ball can enter, a pair of left and right blade members 33WBb that act as opening and closing members provided on the left and right sides of the second start winning opening 33WBa, a start winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the pair of blade members 33WBb to open and close, and a second start winning switch 224b that acts as a detection function unit that can detect a game ball that has entered the second start winning opening 33WBa.

The pair of blade members 33WBb are each rotatably supported on a shaft and are normally maintained in a closed position (closed state) close to each other. In addition, an entry prevention member 145 is provided directly above the second start winning section 33WB to prevent game balls from entering between the pair of blade members 33WBb in the closed state. As a result, under normal circumstances, the second start winning section 33WB is in a closed state, preventing game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area from entering the second start winning opening 33WBa.

On the other hand, as described below, when a predetermined opening condition is met, the pair of blade members 33WBb rotate and displace so that their tips move away from each other, entering the open position (open state). This creates a gap between the entry prevention member 145 and the tip of each blade member 33WBb through which game balls can pass, and the second start winning section 33WB enters an open state that allows game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area to enter the second start winning port 33WBa.

Under this configuration, when a gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, which is in the open state, and the second start winning switch 224b detects the gaming ball and turns on, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot state will be generated as a special gaming state (jackpot lottery), and the second special symbol display device 43B, described below, displays a changing symbol. When a gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB and the second start winning switch 224b detects the gaming ball and turns on, the start condition is met, and based on this, the second special symbol display device 43B displays a changing symbol.

For ease of explanation, the fluctuating display for a predetermined period triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will be referred to as the "first fluctuating display," and the fluctuating display for a predetermined period triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be referred to as the "second fluctuating display." Furthermore, the fluctuating time of the first fluctuating display will be referred to as the "first fluctuating time," and the fluctuating time of the second fluctuating display will be referred to as the "second fluctuating time."

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) one of the various winning sections, such as the general winning section 31A, the variable winning device 32A, or the starting winning sections 33WA and 33WB, it is detected by the various winning switches, and a predetermined number of virtual prize balls are awarded to the player as balls in their possession.

In this embodiment, if the ball lands in the general prize section 31A, 10 virtual prize balls are added to the "number of balls held" value, as described below. If the ball lands in the variable prize device 32A (large prize opening 32Aa), 15 virtual prize balls are added. If the ball lands in the first start prize section 33WA, 3 virtual prize balls are added. If the ball lands in the second start prize section 33WB, 3 virtual prize balls are added.

In addition, the gaming board 30 is provided with an outlet 36 corresponding to the bottom of the gaming area (the lower gaming area area ED), and gaming balls that do not win in the general winning section 31A or other winning sections are discharged through this outlet 36 to the outside of the gaming area (the back side of the gaming board 30). The gaming board 30 is also equipped with numerous nails, windmills, and other components to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the gaming balls fall.

Next, we will explain the various game states in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. First, we will explain the types of jackpots in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "15-round jackpot," "8-round jackpot," and "4-round jackpot."

Hereinafter, a "15-round jackpot" will be referred to as a "15R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "15RS" in the drawings. Similarly, an "8-round jackpot" will be referred to as an "8R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "8RS" in the drawings. Furthermore, a "4-round jackpot" will be referred to as a "4R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "4RS" in the drawings.

In the "15R jackpot" state, the jackpot opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Note that the "jackpot opening operation" refers to the opening and closing operation that occurs after the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable prize winning device 32A is switched from a closed state to an open state, until the shutter is closed, provided that a specific, specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed or a specific, specified number of eight game balls have entered the variable prize winning device 32A (the same applies below).

In an "8R jackpot" state, the jackpot release action is repeated eight times (8 rounds), and in a "4R jackpot" state, the jackpot release action is repeated four times (4 rounds).

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot awarded in the win/lose lottery differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB. If the win/lose lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first start winning section 33WA is won, the jackpot is assigned to either a "15R jackpot" or a "4R jackpot" (except during the time-saving B mode, described below). Also, if the win/lose lottery triggered by the game ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is won, the jackpot is assigned to either a "15R jackpot," an "8R jackpot," or a "4R jackpot."

Next, we will explain the start ball entry support state for the second start ball entry section 33WB. In this embodiment, the start ball entry support state is switched between a "high ball entry state (high support state)" in which the blade members 33WBb of the second start ball entry section 33WB are opened relatively frequently, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB, and a "low ball entry state (low support state)" in which the blade members 33WBb are opened less frequently than in the "high ball entry state," making it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB.

The "high ball entry state" may be defined as (1) a state in which the variable display time of the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the "low ball entry state," (2) a state in which the opening time (prescribed time) of the second start entry section 33WB is longer than in the "low ball entry state," (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can enter per opening of the second start entry section 33WB is greater than in the "low ball entry state," (4) a state in which the second start entry section 33WB is opened more times per winning of the start entry support lottery than in the "low ball entry state," or (5) a state in which the probability of winning the start entry support lottery is higher than in the "low ball entry state." The "high ball entry state" in this embodiment employs the above configurations (1), (2), and (5). Of course, the "high ball entry state" is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) through (5), or any combination of configurations (1) through (5), may be employed.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the start ball entry support lottery is won, the second start ball entry section 33WB opens twice over a predetermined period of 0.2 seconds in the "low ball entry state," and twice over a predetermined period of 1.8 seconds in the "high ball entry state." This makes it easier for game balls to frequently enter the second start ball entry section 33WB in the "high ball entry state."

Next, we will explain the various game states (various game modes) when the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display changes.

In this embodiment, the game mode is configured to switch between three modes: "Normal mode," which is the normal game mode; "Variable time reduction mode with starting ball entry support (hereinafter referred to as "Time reduction A mode")," which can be entered after the end of a jackpot state; and "Variable time reduction mode with starting ball entry support (hereinafter referred to as "Time reduction B mode")," which can be activated if a predetermined period of time has passed without a jackpot state occurring.

In "normal mode," the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display changes at normal times in a "normal change state," and the starting goal support state becomes a "low goal state."

In "Time-saving A Mode" and "Time-saving B Mode," the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display changes for a shorter time than normal, resulting in a "change time reduction state," and the starting goal support state becomes a "high goal state." Furthermore, the "normal change state" and "change time reduction state" can be switched by changing the change time determination table, as described below.

"Time-saving A mode" is a game mode that can be entered after the end of a jackpot state. In this embodiment, regardless of whether a "15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," or "4R jackpot" occurs, a predetermined period of "Time-saving A mode" can be granted after the end of that jackpot state. Specifically, after the end of a "15R jackpot" or "8R jackpot," "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted, and after the end of a "4R jackpot," "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play times is granted.

When the start conditions for "Time-saving A Mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a low ball entry state (non-assisted state) corresponding to "Normal Mode" to a high ball entry state (assisted state) corresponding to "Time-saving A Mode," as described below.

Then, if the number of times variable play (miss variable play) executed on the special symbol display device 43A, 43B (mainly the second special symbol display device 43B) reaches the upper limit of 100 or 10 times without a jackpot occurring during "Time-saving A Mode," the end function will end "Time-saving A Mode" and the game will transition to "Normal Mode."

When the termination conditions for "Time-saving A Mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a high ball entry state (auxiliary state) corresponding to "Time-saving A Mode" to a low ball entry state (non-auxiliary state) corresponding to "Normal Mode."

In addition, "Time-saving B mode (ceiling time-saving mode)" is a game mode that can be activated when the number of times a variable game (miss variable game) executed on the special symbol display device 43A, 43B (mainly the first special symbol display device 43A) has been executed without a jackpot occurring during "normal mode" reaches a predetermined upper limit (the so-called ceiling) of 500 times.

When the start conditions for "Time-saving B mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a low ball entry state (non-assisted state) corresponding to "normal mode" to a high ball entry state (assisted state) corresponding to "Time-saving B mode," as described below.

Then, if the number of times variable play (miss variable play) executed on the special symbol display device 43A, 43B (mainly the second special symbol display device 43B) reaches a predetermined upper limit of 200 times without a jackpot occurring during "Time-saving B Mode," the end function will end "Time-saving B Mode" and the game will transition to "Normal Mode."

When the termination conditions for "Time-saving B mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a high ball entry state (auxiliary state) corresponding to "Time-saving B mode" to a low ball entry state (non-auxiliary state) corresponding to "normal mode."

However, in this embodiment, once "Time-saving B Mode" is activated and ends without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving B Mode" will not be activated again unless a new jackpot occurs or data is cleared from RAM 503 of the main control unit 261.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in "normal mode," the start ball entry support state for the second start ball entry section 33WB does not become a "high ball entry state," but becomes a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB, so essentially, balls do not enter the second start ball entry section 33WB.

In addition, as will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, the effect display device 42 performs various display effects as an effect section corresponding to the current game state (game mode). For example, there is a "normal stage effect" that is performed when the ball enters the first start winning section 33WA in "normal mode," a "rush stage effect" that is performed when "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted, a "battle stage effect" that is performed when "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play times is granted, and a "lucky stage effect" that is performed when "time-saving B mode" with a maximum of 200 variable play times is granted.

As shown in Figure 2-4, on the outer right upper corner of the gaming area, the following devices are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10: a normal pattern display device 41 serving as a variable display device (normal pattern variable display device) for displaying the results of the start ball entry support lottery, which is held based on the passage of the gaming ball through the through gate 34; a first special pattern display device 43A serving as a variable display device (first special pattern variable display device) for displaying the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery), which is held based on the ball entering the first start ball entry section 33WA; and a second special pattern display device 43B serving as a variable display device (second special pattern variable display device) for displaying the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery), which is held based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section 33WB.

The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (normal symbol lamps) that constitute the notification information. In the normal symbol display device 41, for example, the right-side normal symbol lamp flashes (variable display) when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 34. Then, after the normal symbol display device 41 displays the variable display as a performance unit for a predetermined period of time, the variable display is stopped based on the results of the start-going ball support lottery. In other words, the lighting mode (combination of lit normal symbol lamps), which is the output setting when the variable display stops, is associated with various results of the start-going ball support lottery, and the lighting mode when the variable display stops definitively displays the results of the start-going ball support lottery. For example, lighting both the left and right normal symbol lamps indicates a "win," and lighting only the left normal symbol lamp indicates a "lose."

The first special symbol display device 43A is composed of four LEDs (first special symbol lamps) that constitute the notification information. The first special symbol display device 43A switches the display of the first special symbol lamp (first variable display) when a ball enters the first start winning section 33WA.

Then, after the first special symbol display device 43A has performed a special symbol variable game (first variable display) for a predetermined time as a benefit awarded to the player, the first variable display will be stopped based on the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the lighting mode (combination of lit special symbol lamps), which is the output setting content when the first variable display stops, is associated with various results of the win/loss lottery, and the lighting mode when the first variable display stops definitively displays the result of the win/loss lottery, i.e., "jackpot" or "miss." In other words, if the result of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) is a specific jackpot result, the specific variable display, the jackpot variable display, will be performed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a specific jackpot stop mode, which is a specific display result.

The second special symbol display device 43B is composed of four LEDs (second special symbol lamps) that constitute the notification information. The second special symbol display device 43B switches the display of the second special symbol lamp (second variable display) when a ball enters the second start winning section 33WB.

Then, after the second special symbol display device 43B has performed a special symbol variable play (second variable display) for a predetermined time as a benefit awarded to the player, the second variable display will be stopped based on the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the lighting mode (combination of lit special symbol lamps), which is the output setting when the second variable display stops, corresponds to the various results of the win/loss lottery, and the lighting mode when the second variable display stops definitively displays the result of the win/loss lottery, i.e., "jackpot" or "miss." In other words, if the result of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) is a specific jackpot result, the specific variable display, the jackpot variable display, will be performed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a specific jackpot stop mode, which is a specific display result.

Furthermore, the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B also indicate the type of jackpot (whether it is a "15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," or "4R jackpot") depending on the lighting pattern (stop pattern) that they stop. Note that there are multiple stop patterns for the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B that indicate various types of jackpots and misses, and one of these is selected and displayed as a stop.

In addition, the stationary display on the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B is maintained for a specified period of time, and after that period (variation interval) has elapsed, the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, if a predetermined period (stop display confirmation period) has elapsed after the first special pattern display device 43A or second special pattern display device 43B displays a stopped symbol, but the next variable display does not occur (except during the jackpot state described below), the first special pattern display device 43A or second special pattern display device 43B is configured to switch from an illumination mode indicating the result of the win/lose lottery to an illumination mode indicating a standby state in which no variable display is occurring. Alternatively, the illumination mode indicating the result of the win/lose lottery may be maintained as is, as in the jackpot state described below.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, which is a start condition, while the first variable display is being executed, the first variable display corresponding to the ball is reserved and stored, and the reserved first variable display is started after the currently executing first variable display is stopped. Similarly, if a game ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, which is a start condition, while the second variable display is being executed, the reserved second variable display corresponding to the ball is reserved and stored, and the currently executing second variable display is stopped and stored, and the reserved second variable display is started.

In addition, if a game ball passes through the through gate 34 while a variable display is being displayed on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display corresponding to that passage is stored on hold, and after the currently running variable display is stopped, the stored variable display is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, adjacent to the normal symbol display device 41 and the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B are a normal hold display device 44 that indicates that the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is on hold, a first hold display device 46A as first hold display means that can notify or indicate that the first variable display is on hold (that the right to execute the first variable display has been obtained), and a second hold display device 46B as second hold display means that can notify or indicate that the second variable display is on hold (that the right to execute the second variable display has been obtained). In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 43A, the second special symbol display device 43B, the first hold display device 46A, the second hold display device 46B, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 are directly display-controlled by the main control device 261, which serves as the main control unit, as described below.

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps) that constitute the notification information. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to reserve and store up to four display variations of the normal symbol display device 41, which are performed based on the passage of a gaming ball through the through gate 34. For example, if one display variation of the normal symbol display device 41 is reserved, the left normal hold lamp lights up; if two displays are reserved, the left and right normal hold lamps light up; if three displays are reserved, the left normal hold lamp flashes and the right normal hold lamp lights up; and if four displays are reserved, the left and right normal hold lamps flash. Furthermore, if a new gaming ball passes through the through gate 34 during a jackpot state, the display variations for that display may also be reserved.

The first hold display device 46A is composed of two LEDs (first hold lamps) that constitute the notification information. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four first change displays based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning section 33WA. For example, if one first change display is held, the left first hold lamp lights up; if two first change displays are held, both the left and right first hold lamps light up; if three first change displays are held, the left first hold lamp flashes and the right first hold lamp lights up; and if four first change displays are held, both the left and right first hold lamps flash. If multiple first change displays are held and stored, they will be consumed sequentially in the order they were held and stored (starting with the earliest one).

The second hold display device 46B is composed of two LEDs (second hold lamps) that constitute the notification information. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four second variable displays based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning section 33WB. For example, if one second variable display is held, the second hold lamp on the left will light up; if two second variable displays are held, the second hold lamps on the left and right will light up; if three second variable displays are held, the second hold lamp on the left will flash and the second hold lamp on the right will light up; and if four second variable displays are held, the second hold lamps on the left and right will flash. If multiple second variable displays are held and stored, the second variable displays will be consumed sequentially in the order in which they were held and stored (starting with the first one).

Furthermore, if a new game ball enters the start winning section 33WA, 33WB during the jackpot state, the corresponding variable display is also put on hold and not started. The variable display is not executed during the jackpot state, and the variable display starts in a predetermined order after the jackpot state ends. However, in this embodiment, as described below, during the jackpot state, a "right hit" is usually performed, and it is relatively easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33WB located in the right area EB of the play area. Therefore, after the jackpot state ends, the second variable display is basically put on hold and stored.

As described above, basically, the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the first start winning section 33WA and is consumed in the order in which they entered, and the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the second start winning section 33WB and is consumed in the order in which they entered.

However, if the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB are on hold (one or more of the first hold lamps and one or more of the second hold lamps are lit), the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be consumed first. In other words, the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will not be displayed unless all of the second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB have been consumed. For example, if one first hold lamp on the first hold display device 46A is lit, a game ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, and one second hold lamp on the second hold display device 46B lights up, the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will be postponed, and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be displayed first.

The performance display device 42 of the variable display unit 35 is composed of a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display section 42a, and the display content is controlled by the sub-controller 262 and display controller 45, which will be described later. That is, in the performance display device 42, the sub-controller 262 determines the auxiliary display content based on commands from the main controller 261 to correspond to the results displayed on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B, etc., and the display is performed by the display controller 45, which will be described later. Here, the sub-controller 262 and/or display controller 45 make up the performance control section in this embodiment.

The effect display device 42 is configured to be able to perform effect change displays (such as change displays of decorative patterns) as effect displays that match the change displays displayed by the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 2-47(a), the effect display device 42 is provided with three pattern display areas: top, middle, and bottom (top pattern display area, middle pattern display area, bottom pattern display area), and multiple types of decorative patterns (patterns numbered 1 to 9) are displayed (variably displayed) in sequence in each pattern display area, after which the decorative patterns are displayed in a static manner in each pattern display area in order (for example, top pattern display area → bottom pattern display area → middle pattern display area).

Then, when the main control device 261 confirms that a jackpot state has occurred, the first or second special symbol display device 43A, 43B displays a specific display result corresponding to a jackpot, and the effect display device 42 displays decorative symbols in a combination corresponding to the specific display result of a jackpot (for example, the same decorative symbols are displayed in a line on a predetermined pay line in the upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area), and the jackpot state begins.

Also, when decorative symbols are displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot, the preliminary step is, for example, to display the same decorative symbols stopped on a predetermined effective line in the upper and lower symbol display areas. This state, in which the same symbols are displayed stopped on a predetermined effective line in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the middle symbol display area is still displaying a variable pattern, is called a reach state. Of course, just because a reach state has occurred does not necessarily mean that a jackpot state will occur, and there are cases in which the jackpot will not occur.

In this embodiment, after a reach state occurs, a jackpot state occurs when the same decorative pattern as the reach pattern displayed in the upper and lower pattern display areas is displayed stopped on the same active line in the middle pattern display area (when a decorative pattern with the same number as the reach pattern is displayed stopped). However, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot cannot be determined depending on the type of decorative pattern displayed.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 2-5, 2-6, etc. On the rear of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some overlapping front and back, and a back pack unit 203 and other components are also provided.

First, we will explain the rear structure of the gaming board 30. As shown in Figure 2-6, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind is protruding rearward from the rear side of the variable display unit 35 (see Figure 2-4), which is arranged corresponding to the through-hole in the center of the gaming board 30. Also, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the effect display device 42, which is an LCD display device facing forward through the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 are removably attached in a stacked state from front to back.

The effect display device 42 is housed in a storage box (reference number omitted) with an opening formed to expose the LCD display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is fixed to the back side of the frame cover 213. The display control device 45, which provides the output function, is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42. The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material, etc., so that the interior can be seen. Furthermore, an LED control board, etc. that drives the LEDs, etc. that make up the effect unit built into the center frame 47, is arranged within the frame cover 213.

In addition, a back frame set 215 is attached to the back of the game board 30 so as to surround the frame cover 213. The back frame set 215 is a resin molded part that is attached to the back of the game board 30, and is equipped with a recovery passage 75 that forms part of the ball circulation mechanism.

The recovery passage 75 is configured to recover game balls that have won in the various winning sections (general winning section 31A, variable winning device 32A, and start-up winning sections 33WA, 33WB, etc.) and game balls that have been discharged through the outlet 36.

The outlet 75a (left end in Figures 2-4) located at the downstream end of the recovery passage 75 is formed to penetrate the game board 30 and inner frame 12 (resin base 38) from front to back, and opens to the front side of the inner frame 12. When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the outlet 75a of the recovery passage 75 and the inlet 70a of the supply passage 70 are connected, as described above.

With this configuration, game balls launched into the game area as described above, after winning in one of the various winning sections or being discharged through the outlet 36, are collected through the collection passage 75 and returned to the supply passage 70.

In addition, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control unit 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control unit 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215 and can be opened to the rear.

The main control device 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 comprises a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, with the box base and box cover connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless specified traces are left behind. This makes it easy to detect if the board box 263 has been tampered with.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected via cable connectors to the general winning switch 221a, the large winning slot count switch 222, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, and the through gate switch 225, which serve as detection function units. This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221a, etc. and the main control unit 261, and is electrically connected to the main control unit 261 via a cable connector. In contrast, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, which serve as detection function units that detect winning in the start winning units 33WA and 33WB, are connected directly to the main control unit 261 via a connector cable, without going through a relay board.

The detection results from the various ball entry detection switches are input into the main control unit 261. The main control unit 261 then sends an award command (number of virtual prize balls to be awarded) based on the winning status of each winning to the counting management unit 311, and the predetermined number of virtual prize balls are awarded based on the output signal from the counting management unit 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, the back of the game board 30 is also provided with a second board relay board that relays various motors and solenoids to the main control unit 261.

Next, the configuration of the rear pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in Figure 2-5, the rear pack unit 203 has a resin-molded rear pack main body 351, the upper left of which (upper right in Figure 2-5) is provided with an external terminal board 240 that provides the output function. The rear pack unit 203 is also supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (right side in Figure 2-5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward around an opening/closing axis that extends vertically.

The external terminal board 240 is a relay board for externally outputting various information from the main control unit 261 to the hall computer (not shown) of the gaming hall. It is electrically connected to the main control unit 261 and has multiple output terminals (10 in this embodiment) that can output signals according to the gaming status to the outside.

A specified communications cable (in this embodiment, a two-core cable consisting of two core wires) is connected to each output terminal. Each output terminal is composed of a pair of upper and lower core wire insertion sections (numbers omitted), each of which is configured to insert and clamp one core wire. In other words, a pair of upper and lower core wire insertion sections function as a single output terminal.

Meanwhile, the other end of the communication cable is electrically connected to the hall computer via a relay device (not shown). As a result, information (signals) output from a specified output terminal on the external terminal board 240 is input to the hall computer via the communication cable connected to that output terminal. The hall computer then uses the various pieces of information input in this way to grasp the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 that is the output source.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 2-5, the output terminals for outputting information from the main control unit 261 to the hall computer include a terminal (first terminal) for outputting information (jackpot signal 1) that is output only when the current gaming state is in a jackpot state, and a terminal (second terminal) for outputting information (jackpot signal 2) that is output when the current gaming state is either in a jackpot state or a high ball entry state (high support state).

In addition, although not designated by reference numerals for the sake of simplicity, the external terminal board 240 of this embodiment also includes a terminal (third terminal) for outputting notification information (identification signal) indicating that a variable display has been made in the first special pattern display device 43A, a terminal (fourth terminal) for outputting notification information (identification signal) indicating that a variable display has been made in the second special pattern display device 43B, a terminal (fifth terminal) for outputting notification information (identification signal) indicating that a game ball has entered the first start winning section 33WA, and a terminal (fifth terminal) for outputting notification information (identification signal) indicating that a game ball has entered the second start winning section 33WB. A terminal (sixth terminal) for outputting notification information (identification signal) indicating that the inner frame 12 is open, a terminal (seventh terminal) for outputting notification information (identification signal) indicating that the front frame 14 is open, a terminal (eighth terminal) for outputting notification information (identification signal) indicating that an error has been detected, a terminal (ninth terminal) for outputting notification information (identification signal) indicating that a predetermined number of virtual prize balls have been awarded by the counting management device 311, and a terminal (tenth terminal) for outputting notification information (identification signal) indicating that a predetermined number of virtual prize balls have been awarded by the counting management device 311.

Furthermore, it is not necessary for all output terminals on the external terminal board 240 to be connected to the hall computer; which output terminal to obtain information from is determined at the discretion of the amusement hall manager, etc. In other words, the amusement hall manager, etc. can use only the information necessary depending on the type of operation of the amusement hall.

Furthermore, the type of information output from the external terminal board 240 and the number of output terminals for outputting the information are not limited to the configuration exemplified above, and may be configured to output information different from the information (signals) exemplified above depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

The back pack main body 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, with only the bottom open, and is large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover 354 is configured to also cover the top and right sides of the board box 263 (the left side in Figure 2-5). As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is closed, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board-side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered.

The back pack main body 351 is also equipped with a power switch board 382 that draws in main power from the outside. The power switch board 382 is connected to the power circuit 313 and supplies power to the power circuit 313. The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a, which serves as a detection function unit. However, in this embodiment, external power is supplied to the power switch board 382 via the power supply unit 925 of the card unit 900. Of course, this is not a limitation, and external power may be supplied directly to the power switch board 382 without passing through the card unit 900.

Below the rear pack unit 203 (substrate box 263) is a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported on the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in Figure 2-5) and can be opened to the rear. In this embodiment, the rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate entities that can be opened and closed independently, but the rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 may also be formed as a single unit.

As shown in Figure 2-5, the power supply and launch control device 310, counting management device 311, and card unit connection board 314 are removably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a stacked arrangement. The power supply and launch control device 310 includes a launch control circuit 312 and a power supply circuit 313, and is housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

The counting control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (power supply and launch control device 310). The board box 311a housing the counting control device 311 is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 housing the main control device 261 described above, so that evidence that the board box 311a has been opened remains.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in board box 314a and fixed to the back side of board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, allowing the interior to be seen.

The counting management device 311 is also provided with a status recovery switch 321 that protrudes outward from the base box 311a and serves as a detection function. For example, if a specific error state occurs and the status recovery switch 321 is pressed, the device will return to a normal state.

Furthermore, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the circuit board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is maintained, and when power is restored after the power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, when the power is turned off in the normal manner (for example, when the amusement hall closes), the state before the power outage is stored and retained. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, press the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power.

As shown in Figure 2-6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 has a cylinder lock 600a (see Figure 2-1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame 14. By inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, the inner frame 12 can be unlocked, and by rotating it in the other direction, the front frame 14 can be unlocked. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As mentioned above, the right-hand frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 has an extended wall 83 formed on it that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 2-5). This makes it difficult to insert a wire or similar object from the rear side of the outer frame 11 and use the wire or similar object to operate the locking device 600. As a result, defensive performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extended wall 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in Figure 2-5) of the rear pack unit 203 and lower frame set 251 from the rear side, so that when the inner frame 12 is closed, the rear pack unit 203 and lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

As shown in Figure 2-4, a front frame open detection switch 91 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (to the right of the launcher 60) as a detection function unit for detecting the opening of the front frame 14. As shown in Figure 2-5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided on the lower right side of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in Figure 2-5) as a detection function unit for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12. The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have detection units that can be retracted into the switch main body, with the front frame open detection switch 91 being provided with its detection unit facing forward and the inner frame open detection switch 92 being provided with its detection unit facing rearward. When the detection unit is in an ON state protruding from the switch main body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control unit 261. When the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and retracted into the switch main body, it outputs an OFF signal to the main control unit 261. In other words, when the front frame 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14, turning it to the OFF state, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detection part of the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing part 86 integrally formed with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11, turning it to the OFF state, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Figure 2-7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 is equipped with a CPU 501, which is a one-chip microcomputer that serves as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 contains a ROM 502, which serves as storage means for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503, which serves as storage means for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, and each function may be integrated into a separate chip.

RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of the CPU 501's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by the CPU 501 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 503a.

The working area of RAM 503 includes a virtual prize ball buffer, a command transmission buffer, a reception buffer, etc.

The virtual prize ball buffer is a means for temporarily storing the number of virtual prize balls that should be awarded to a winning section when a game ball enters one of the winning sections, such as the general winning section 31A, the variable winning device 32A, or the start-up winning sections 33WA and 33WB. In this embodiment, it is configured as a ring buffer.

Conceptually, a ring buffer is a buffer in which the first and last addresses within the buffer area are connected in a ring shape, and data is written sequentially starting from the first address using two address pointers, a write pointer and a read pointer. When the last address is reached, data is written back to the first address and can be written again. When data is written to a specific address indicated by the write pointer, the value of the write pointer is updated to indicate the next address at a specific timing. Similarly, when data is read from a specific address indicated by the read pointer, the value of the read pointer is updated to indicate the next address at a specific timing. Therefore, each time a gaming ball enters one of the winning sections, the virtual prize ball count corresponding to that winning section is written sequentially to the specific address indicated by the write pointer. Furthermore, the virtual prize ball count information stored in the virtual prize ball buffer is read sequentially from the specific address indicated by the read pointer, and is then erased from the virtual prize ball buffer when it is sent to the counting management device 311 as a virtual prize ball command, as described below.

The command transmission buffer is a means for temporarily storing command data to be sent to each sub-controller, such as the sub-controller 262, and is composed of a ring buffer.

However, in this embodiment, a separate virtual prize ball command transmission buffer is provided for the virtual prize ball commands sent to the counting management device 311, as the output cycle is different from that of other commands. Note that, as will be described later, virtual prize ball commands are commands that instruct the counting management device 311 to award a predetermined number of virtual prize balls corresponding to each of the above winning sections.

The receiving buffer is a means for temporarily storing virtual prize ball count information received from the counting management device 311.

In addition, RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a is backed up.

Backup area 503a is an area that stores the values of the stack pointer, registers, I/O, etc. at the time of power outage (including power outages; the same applies below) so that when power is restored, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off due to a power outage or other reason. Data is written to backup area 503a by the main processing when power is cut off, and conversely, the values written to backup area 503a are restored by the main processing when power is turned on (including power on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies below). Note that when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from power outage monitoring circuit 542 (described below). When a power outage occurs, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501, which has built-in ROM 502 and RAM 503, via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus, a data bus, etc. Connected to the input/output port 505 are the RAM erase switch circuit 543, counting management device 311, sub-controller 262, special symbol display devices 43A and 43B, and normal symbol display device 41, which will be described later. With this configuration, the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control unit 261. Meanwhile, the performance display device 42 is controlled via the sub-controller 262.

For convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input/output port 505 is connected to various electrical components, such as various detection switches that serve as detection function units, such as the general winning switch 221a, the large winning slot count switch 222, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, and the through gate switch 225; various boards, such as the power supply/launch control device 310, the counting management device 311, and the sub-control device 262; information display devices, such as the hold display devices 46A and 46B and the normal hold display device 44; a solenoid that operates the variable winning device 32A; and a solenoid that operates the second start winning unit 33WB. In other words, the main control device 261 is provided with multiple terminals (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminals and the like constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) serving as a sub-control unit comprises a CPU 551, which is an arithmetic unit; a ROM 552, which serves as storage means for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551; a RAM 553, which serves as storage means for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 552 are executed; an input/output port 554; and a bus line 555. The sub-control device 262 also comprises a Bluetooth (hereinafter referred to as "BT") module 1200, as well as various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown).

RAM 553 is provided with a game information storage area for storing various game information (game data). The game information storage area, which serves as a history information storage area, stores game history information such as the number of times a variable display has been executed (number of starts) and the number of jackpots, as well as execution history information indicating that a specific effect such as a premium effect has been executed, and, when a jackpot variable display is executed, execution history information related to the jackpot variable display (such as the type of effect executed in the jackpot variable display, the type of jackpot stop symbol, and the appearance rate and reliability of various customized effects). Of course, the configuration may also be such that the number of times a variable display in which various effects such as a school of fish effect have been executed is stored, not only in the case of a jackpot variable display, but also in the case of a miss variable display.

More specifically, the sub-controller 262 uses its update function to update various counters based on commands sent from the main controller 261, and stores these in the game information storage area of RAM 553.

For example, when the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 261, it adds 1 to the values of the total start counter, individual start counter, and inter-jackpot start counter set in the game information storage area.

The total start counter is used to count the number of times (starts) a variable display has been executed in this pachinko machine 10 from the time the power is turned on until the present time. The individual start counter is used to count the number of times a variable display has been executed in this pachinko machine 10 from the time a specified BT communication connection is established until the present time. The inter-jackpot start counter is used to count the number of times a variable display has been executed in this pachinko machine 10 from the end of the previous jackpot state until the present time.

In addition, when the sub-controller 262 receives an opening command from the main controller 261 indicating the start of a jackpot state, it increments the values of the total jackpot counter, individual jackpot counter, and consecutive jackpot counter set in the game information storage area by 1.

The total jackpot counter is used to count the number of jackpots that have been executed on this pachinko machine 10 from the time the power is turned on until the present time. The individual jackpot counter is used to count the number of jackpots that have been executed on this pachinko machine 10 from the time a specified BT communication connection is established until the present time. The consecutive jackpot counter is used to count the number of consecutive jackpots that have been executed without returning to the normal state from the first jackpot (number of consecutive jackpots). Note that a "first jackpot" refers to a jackpot won in the normal state with a low ball entry state (low support state).

As described below, when a BT communication connection (pairing) is established between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal 2000, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to transmit game information (game history information and execution history information, described below) stored in the game information storage area to the mobile terminal 2000 in response to a request from the player (mobile terminal 2000) or when a predetermined condition is met (when a jackpot or a specific effect is executed). Here, the history information output process in this embodiment may be configured by a process of outputting game information stored in the game information storage area to the mobile terminal 2000.

In addition, game information stored in the game information storage area after the BT communication connection is established will be erased after the BT communication connection is disconnected. On the other hand, the total value and other information stored since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on will remain even after the BT communication connection is disconnected.

In addition, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 is provided with a user-associated area (custom information storage area) for storing various custom information customized by the player, as described below (see Figure 2-107).

The user-related area includes input value storage areas such as a language setting area (language setting flag) for storing custom information related to the language used, a brightness level setting area for storing custom information related to the brightness levels of the illumination units 102-104, a volume level setting area for storing custom information related to the volume level of the speaker SP, and a performance custom information storage area for storing custom information related to various performances.

As described below, when a BT communication connection (pairing) is established between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal 2000, custom information (information regarding customization items) that has been custom-set by the player on the mobile terminal 2000 is output to the pachinko machine 10 from the mobile terminal 2000 automatically or in response to the player's request, etc.

Meanwhile, in the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) that has received this custom information, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays, for example, a list of the received custom information, and performs an input completion display process to display an input completion message, such as "Customization has been entered as shown here," to inform the player that their customization input has been completed. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the contents of the custom information stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553 to the contents of the custom information received as described above.

Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) that receives the customization information may display a confirmation message such as "Are you sure you want to customize with this content?" on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 as an input completion display (input completion display process) to notify the player that their customization input is complete, and the player may then operate the effect button 125, mobile terminal 2000, etc. to give permission, thereby updating the content of the customization information stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553 to the content of the customization information received as described above.

In addition, custom information stored in the user area after a BT communication connection is established may be configured to be erased after the BT communication connection is disconnected or after a predetermined time has passed since the disconnection, unless the player performs a special operation. Alternatively, the custom information may be configured to remain untouched even after the BT communication connection is disconnected, unless the player performs a custom information reset operation, as described below.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 performs output setting processing to perform initialization processing (such as erasing custom information entered by the player or setting default values) for the various storage areas in the user-related area (language setting area, brightness level setting area, volume level setting area, effect custom information storage area, etc.) when certain conditions are met, such as the initial setting processing when the power is turned on, the timing at which the custom setting continuation selection display described below ends (when the next variable display, etc. does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the custom setting continuation selection display started on the effect display device 42), or when a decision operation to reset the custom settings is made in the custom setting continuation selection display.

Here, we will explain some specific examples of the processing performed in this output setting process. Of course, the above output setting process (such as the process of setting default values) is not limited to the examples below, and is performed for all storage areas in the user-associated area.

For example, no matter what language was set in the "Language Setting Area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had customized the language by entering "Chinese" or "English"), once the above output setting process is performed, the default language, "Japanese," will be newly set in the "Language Setting Area."

Furthermore, no matter what brightness level was set in the "brightness level setting area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had customized the brightness level to "2" or "5"), once the above output setting process was performed, the "brightness level setting area" will be newly set to the default value of level "3".

Furthermore, no matter what volume level was set in the "volume level setting area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had customized volume level "1" or volume level "4"), once the above output setting process was performed, the "volume level setting area" will be newly set to the default value of level "3".

Furthermore, no matter what fish school reliability level was set in the "fish school reliability storage area" of the "effect custom information storage area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had input a customized fish school reliability level of "10%" or "90%)), the default value of "50%" will be newly set in the "fish school reliability storage area" once the above output setting process is performed.

Furthermore, no matter what cut-in appearance rate was set in the "Cut-in Appearance Rate Storage Area" of the "Effect Custom Information Storage Area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had input a custom cut-in appearance rate of "0%" or "70%)), the default appearance rate of "60%" will be newly set in the "Cut-in Appearance Rate Storage Area" once the above output setting process is performed.

In addition, instead of executing the custom setting continuation selection display described below, an output setting process may be performed to perform various setting processes (such as erasing custom information entered by the player or setting default values) on the various memory areas in the user-related area when, for example, a demo display starts (when the next variable display does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since a predetermined variable display has been confirmed and stopped on the display device 42) or when the next variable display does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the demo display ended.

The RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 is also provided with a balance storage area and a ball count storage area. When balance information is received from the card unit 900, the corresponding value is updated and stored in the balance storage area as the new balance. When ball count information is received from the counting management device 311, the corresponding value is updated and stored in the ball count storage area as the new ball count. With this configuration, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the current balance and ball count.

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 via the bus line 555. Furthermore, the input/output port 554 is also connected to the display control device 45, speaker SP, effect buttons 125, cross key 126 (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d, and center button 126e), illumination units 102-104, and error indicator lamp 105.

The CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines the performance content based on command signals (e.g., variation pattern commands) sent from the main controller 261, and controls the output of various information to the performance display device 42, speaker SP, illumination units 102-104, etc.

More specifically, the sub-controller 262 causes the display controller 45 to execute display control related to the performance display device 42 based on a command signal transmitted from the main controller 261, and causes the performance display device 42 to output specified image information.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B controlled by the main control device 261 indicate that various winning events have been won, and the effect display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 displays decorative patterns as a changing effect in conjunction with the changing display of special patterns on the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B.

In addition, based on a command signal sent from the main control unit 261 (for example, in synchronization with the above-mentioned display control), the CPU 551 of the sub-control unit 262 reads out predetermined audio data from among the multiple audio data stored in the ROM 552 serving as storage means, converts the audio data into an audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to an amplifier (an amplifier that amplifies audio signals) built into the speaker SP, thereby outputting predetermined audio information from the speaker SP as a variable effect.

Similarly, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 reads out predetermined light-emitting control data from among multiple light-emitting control data (on/off pattern data) stored in the ROM 552, which serves as a storage means, based on a command signal sent from the main controller 261 (for example, in synchronization with the above-mentioned display control), converts the light-emitting control data into a light-emitting control signal, and supplies the light-emitting control signal to a light-emitting control board built into the illumination units 102-104, etc., thereby turning the illumination units 102-104, etc. on/off as a variable effect and outputting predetermined light information.

Furthermore, the sub-control device 262 is provided with a Bluetooth module 1200 (hereinafter referred to as the "machine-side BT module 1200") that constitutes a wireless communication unit for wirelessly communicating with an external communication device outside the pachinko machine 10 (in this embodiment, a mobile terminal 2000 carried by the player) using Bluetooth. The detailed configuration of the machine-side BT module 1200 that constitutes the input unit will be described later.

Now, let's explain Bluetooth. BT is a wireless communication technology (broadly defined as short-range wireless communication technology) that communicates by switching between multiple (e.g., 79) channels set at predetermined intervals (e.g., 1 MHz) within the 2.4 GHz band using a frequency hopping method. Its maximum communication distance is approximately 10 to 100 meters, and its maximum communication speed is approximately 1 to 3 Mbps. In other words, using BT enables larger-capacity, faster data communication than NFC.

BT is an international standard defined as "IEEE 802.15.1" and performs wireless communication in accordance with technical specifications established by the Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG).

The counting management device 311 controls the awarding of virtual prize balls and virtual loan balls, and manages the counting of the number of balls held. The CPU 511, which is a calculation device, is equipped with a ROM 512 as a storage means for storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 as a storage means used as work memory, etc.

Like the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261, the RAM 513 of the counting management device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the CPU 511's internal registers and the return addresses of control programs executed by the CPU 511 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 513a.

RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is backed up. Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the configuration may be such that data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

Backup area 513a is an area that stores the values of the stack pointer, registers, I/O, etc. at the time of power outage so that when power is restored, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was turned off when power is turned back on if the power is turned off due to a power outage or other reason. Writing to this backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when power is turned off, and the values written to backup area 513a are restored by the main processing when power is turned on. Note that, like CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, a power outage signal SK1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of CPU 511 when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When this power outage signal SK1 is input to CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power outage processing.

The working area is provided with an award permission flag that sets permission for the awarding of virtual prize balls by the counting management device 311, a command reception flag that is set when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received, and a command buffer that stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

The award permission flag is a flag that sets whether or not virtual prize balls are awarded. A specific command that allows the awarding of virtual prize balls is sent from the main control device 261, and the flag is turned on when the specific command is received. The flag is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before power was cut off is restored. In this embodiment, the specific commands are an initialization command that instructs the initial process of the RAM 513 of the counting management device 311, a virtual prize ball command that instructs the awarding of virtual prize balls, and a recovery command that is sent when power is restored to the main control device 261.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the counting management device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the grant permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before power was shut off is restored, and it is also turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified storage area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands have been stored in all of the storage area, the buffer returns to the beginning of the storage area and the command is updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on these pointers.

Furthermore, the working area of RAM 513 includes a temporary storage area for the number of virtual prize balls, a temporary storage area for the number of virtual loaned balls, and a storage area for the number of balls held (see Figure 2-8).

The virtual prize ball count temporary storage area is a storage means that sequentially adds up the virtual prize ball counts corresponding to the virtual prize ball commands received from the main control unit 261 and stored in the command reception buffer, and temporarily stores the total virtual prize ball count.

The virtual loaned ball count temporary storage area is a storage means that sequentially adds up the virtual loaned ball counts corresponding to the loan request signal B2 received from the card unit 900 and temporarily stores this as the total virtual loaned ball count. The virtual loaned ball count to be added to the total virtual loaned ball count each time the loan request signal B2 is detected at a low level is received in advance from the card unit 900 and stored in a designated area.

The ball count storage area is a storage means for storing the number of virtual prize balls awarded and the number of virtual loaned balls together as the number of balls held. The number of balls stored in the ball count storage area indicates the number of game balls that the player can use in pinball play, and is periodically updated by the counting management device 311 and output to the sub-control device 262 (ball count storage area in RAM 553) and the card unit operation unit 120 (ball count display unit 123b of the point display unit 123).

The CPU 511, which has the ROM 512 and RAM 513 built in, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, main control unit 261, power supply/launch control unit 310 (launch control circuit 312), card unit connection board 314, etc.

The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the card unit operation unit 120 on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the card unit 900 located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the counting management device 311, and the sub-control device 262, and relays the transmission and reception of various signals between them.

The counting management device 311 is also configured to periodically (e.g., every 2 msec) output a usage permission signal to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310, indicating that the card unit 900 is in a state where it can execute lending control.

The launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310 allows or prohibits the launching device 60 from launching game balls. The launch control circuit 312 is electrically connected to the handle 18, counting management device 311, and main control device 261.

The firing control circuit 312 is also configured to be able to input from the handle 18 a dial position signal from a variable resistor indicating the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotation operation unit 18a, a touch signal from the touch sensor indicating that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b.

Furthermore, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to be able to input a card unit 900 use permission signal (card unit use permission signal) via the counting management device 311. The launch control circuit 312 then outputs a launch status signal to the main control device 261 on the condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, and a card unit use permission signal have been input, and the main control device 261 outputs a launch permission signal and a ball feed signal to the launch control circuit 312 on the condition that a launch status signal has been input. When a launch status signal has been input, the main control device 261 is configured to output a launch permission signal at 0.6 second intervals.

The launch control circuit 312 is also configured to drive the ball delivery device 63 and deliver the gaming ball to the launch position when a ball delivery signal is input. Furthermore, when the launched ball detection switch 94, which can detect whether a gaming ball is present at the launch position, detects that a gaming ball is already present at the launch position, the ball delivery device 63 is not driven (even if a ball delivery signal is received, the gaming ball is not delivered to the launch position).

Furthermore, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) on the condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, a card unit use permission signal, a dial position signal, and a launch permission signal are input. This causes the gaming ball set in the launch position to be launched by the launch device 60 with a strength based on the dial position signal.

The power supply circuit 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each component of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323 as a detection function unit.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control unit 261, counting management unit 311, etc. via a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24-volt AC power supplied from an external source, generates +12V power to drive various switches and motors, +5V power for logic, and backup power for RAM backup, and supplies this +12V power, +5V power, and backup power to the main control unit 261, counting management unit 311, etc. Operating power is supplied to the various switches, motors, etc. via the control devices to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the NMI terminals of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the counting management device 311 when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and if this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the main control unit 261 and the counting management device 311. The output of this power outage signal SK1 causes the main control unit 261 and the counting management device 311 to recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the 5-volt output, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage processing, even after the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage drops below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and counting management device 311 can execute and complete the power outage processing normally.

The RAM clearing switch circuit 543 is a circuit that receives the switch signal from the RAM clearing switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the counting management device 311 depending on the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clearing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clearing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clearing signal SK2 to the main control unit 261 and the counting management device 311. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clearing switch 323 pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAMs 503, 513 of the main control unit 261 and the counting management device 311 are cleared.

The display control device 45 executes the display of varying decorative patterns on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, program ROM 522, work RAM 523, video RAM 524, character ROM 525, video display processor (VDP) 526, input port 527, output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. The CPU 521, program ROM 522, work RAM 523, and VDP 526 are also connected to the input port 527 via bus line 530. The VDP 526 is also connected to an output port 529 via bus line 531, and the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives display commands sent from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received commands, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 526 (generate internal commands for the VDP 526). This allows for display control in the performance display device 42.

The program ROM 522 is a storage means for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and includes, for example, a program storage area and a data table storage area.

The program storage area is a storage area in which various control programs executed by the CPU 521 are stored.

The data table storage area is a memory area that stores display data tables that define the display content to be displayed on the performance display device 42 over time in various display performances executed based on commands from the main control device 261 (e.g., variation pattern commands), and additional data tables that define the display content to be displayed on the performance display device 42 over time in various additional performances (e.g., preview performances) executed by the sub-control device 262 in addition to various display performances executed based on commands from the main control device 261.

The display data table corresponds to an address, which represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a), and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time. Details of the display data table will be provided later.

The additional data table specifies the display content to be displayed over time for additional effects that are added to a display effect based on a command from the main control device 261 and displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a). Like the display data table, it specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time, corresponding to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for which one frame of image is displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a). Details of the additional data table will be given later.

One display data table and one additional data table are prepared for each type of display effect and each type of additional effect. For example, if there are 32 variable effect patterns that can be executed based on the variable effect pattern command from the main control device 261, one table will be prepared for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 display data tables. Display data tables are prepared for, for example, miss variable display effects, various reach effects, re-variation effects, re-lottery effects, demo effects, etc.

Of course, when controlling the display of the performance display device 42, instead of using the display data table and additional data table to perform drawing processing, the additional data table may be omitted. In this case, the display content added on the sub-control device 262 side may be added to the display data table.

The work RAM 523 is a storage means for temporarily storing (setting) various data tables read from the program ROM 522, as well as work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. For example, it has a display data table setting area, an additional data table setting area, a pointer setting area, a drawing list setting area, a drawing target buffer flag setting area, a command buffer, etc.

The display data table setting area is a storage area for setting a display data table corresponding to the effects to be displayed on the effect display device 42.

The additional data table setting area is a memory area for setting additional data tables corresponding to additional effects to be displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the effect display device 42 using the display data table set in the display data table setting area.

Here, we will explain in detail the configuration (drawing content) of each address in the display data table.

As described above, the display data table corresponds to an address, which represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a), and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite, which is the display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, as well as drawing information for displaying each sprite on the performance display device 42, such as the display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information, and storage information for each sprite.

The sprite type is information used to identify the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information used to identify the coordinates on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a) where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information used to specify the magnification ratio relative to the standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is determined by this magnification ratio. If the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when the sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value specifies the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite will be visible through it.

The alpha blending information specifies a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information specifies the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information specifies the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing it.

The storage information indicates the address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored.

For example, in a display data table for variable display, the drawing content for one frame specified for each address is one background image, multiple decorative patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects (character 1, character 2, ...) for each sprite.

Here, with regard to the "background image" that constitutes the performance section, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the performance display device 42, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are kept constant over time, so only the "background type," which is information for specifying the type of background image that is the output setting content, and the storage information are specified.

Background images for variable displays include, for example, background images for various stages corresponding to various game states, and background images for various reach effects, and the "background type" specifies information that specifies which of these will be displayed.

Based on this "background type," the CPU 521 identifies the background image to be displayed as the drawing target, and further identifies the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame over time.

In this embodiment, the display data table describes a case where only the "background type" is specified in addition to the storage information as the drawing content of the background image. However, instead, the "background type" and "position information" indicating which range of the background image corresponding to that "background type" should be displayed may be specified. This "position information" may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the background image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the CPU 521 will identify the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the background image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the "position information" was displayed.

The "position information" may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or display on the performance display device 42) based on this display data table began. In this case, the CPU 521 will determine the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the background image that was displayed when the drawing of the image based on the display data table began and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image, indicated by the "position information," began.

Furthermore, depending on the "background type," the "position information" may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the background image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the performance display device 42) began, or, together with the "background type" and "position information," the type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time since the background image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display data table began) may be specified as the drawing content of the background image. Alternatively, the "position information" may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating the address where the range of the background image to be displayed is stored.

The "decorative symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...)" that make up the performance section have "symbol type offset information" defined as symbol type information for specifying the decorative symbol to be displayed. This offset information represents the difference in the numbers attached to each decorative symbol. The reason offset information is specified rather than directly specifying the type of decorative symbol is because the display of decorative symbols in a variable performance changes depending on the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance and the stopped symbol of the current variable performance, and the "symbol type offset information" from the start of the change until a predetermined time has passed defines the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance. This causes the variable performance to start from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stopping pattern set by the sub-controller 262 is specified based on commands from the main controller 261, etc. This allows the fluctuation performance to stop at the stopping pattern corresponding to the stopping type specified by the sub-controller 262.

In addition, each decorative pattern is assigned a unique number, so the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the sub-controller 262 are managed by the number assigned to the decorative pattern.Furthermore, by representing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to the various decorative patterns, the decorative pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time period during which the "symbol type offset information" is switched from the offset information for the stopped symbols of the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols of the current variable effect is set to be the time during which the decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing state. While the decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing state, they are invisible to the player. Therefore, by switching the "symbol type offset information" from the offset information for the stopped symbols of the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols of the current variable effect during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers in the decorative symbols is interrupted, the player will not be aware of the interruption.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," specifies "Start" information, which indicates the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table specifies "End" information, which indicates the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is specified and the address where the "End" information is specified, drawing content is specified that corresponds to the presentation style to be specified in that display data table.

In response to a command sent from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 selects the display data table to use from multiple display data tables, reads the selected display data table from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area), sets it in the work RAM 523 (display data table setting area), and initializes the value of the table pointer set in the pointer setting area.

Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the update function increments the value of the table pointer by one, and based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area, the next image content to be drawn is identified and a drawing list (described below) is created. The CPU 521 instructs the VDP 526 to draw that image by sending this drawing list to the VDP 526. As a result, as the table pointer is updated, the drawing content is specified in chronological order in the display data table, and the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the performance display device 42.

Next, we will explain in detail the configuration (drawing content) of each address in the additional data table.

As described above, the additional data table specifies the display content to be displayed over time for additional effects that are added to a display effect based on a command from the main control unit 261 and displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a).

Here, "adding to one display performance" means changing the display content of one display performance based on a command from the main control device 261, and includes concepts such as, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one display performance and overlaying another performance on that display performance, changing the color tone of part or all of that display performance, or changing the image displayed in that display performance.

In other words, the additional data table predefines the drawing content required to add and display images that are not normally displayed to a display performance displayed by the display data table selected by the sub-controller 262 based on commands from the main controller 261, the drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of that display performance, and the drawing content required to change and display an image displayed in that display performance.

Here, we will explain the case where the display content for displaying a preview effect that is displayed in addition to the variable effect displayed by the display data table for variable display selected by the sub-controller 262 based on the variable pattern command from the main controller 261 is specified by an additional data table.

Additional data tables are prepared to correspond to preview effects that are added to variable effects, for example. Specifically, additional data tables corresponding to preview effect display modes such as "bubble effects" and "school of fish effects" are stored in the data table storage area.

This additional data table specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is an additional display object to be displayed in one frame of image, and also specifies drawing information for the sprite to be drawn on the performance display device 42, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the sprite type.

On the other hand, if there is no object to be added at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the additional data table will specify null data, which means that there is no object to be added corresponding to that address.

The first address of the additional data table, "0000H," specifies "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the final address of the additional data table specifies "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is specified and the address where the "End" information is specified, drawing content corresponding to the presentation style to be specified in that additional data table is specified.

Based on the display command from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 determines whether there are any additional effects to be displayed in addition to the display effects output to the effect display device 42 using the display data table set in the display data table setting area. If there are any additional effects to be displayed, the CPU 521 reads the additional data table corresponding to that effect mode from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area) and sets the additional data table in the work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area).

For example, when the CPU 521 receives a display command related to a specified preview performance from the sub-control device 262, it selects an additional data table corresponding to the preview mode indicated by the command, reads the selected additional data table from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area), and sets it in the work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area).

In addition, when the CPU 521 sets a display data table in the display data table setting area, it first clears the contents of the additional data table setting area by writing null data, which means that there are no additional objects to be displayed.

Then, each time the table pointer is updated, the CPU 521 creates a drawing list that defines the image drawing instructions for the VDP 526 based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

In addition, if the information specified by the address indicated by the table pointer in the additional data table is "End" information, or if the table pointer points to an address not specified in the additional data table, it is determined that there are no objects to add, and a drawing list is generated based on the various sprites specified in the display data table.

The CPU 521 then sends the generated drawing list to the VDP 526, instructing the VDP 526 to draw the image. As a result, as the table pointer is updated, the drawing content is identified in chronological order in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing content specified in the additional data table is added, so that the image specified in the display data table and additional data table is displayed on the performance display device 42.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the display control device 45 displays another effect image (e.g., a preview effect image) in addition to the effect image (e.g., a variable effect image) to be displayed on the effect display device 42 in response to a command sent from the sub-control device 262, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be added and displayed can be set in the additional data table setting area, so that the other effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed.

If no additional data table is set in the additional data table setting area, null data is set in the additional data table setting area, and the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed as is on the effect display device 42.

For example, if there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of additional effect images to be displayed, and a separate display data table defining images in which the other effect images are overlaid on each original effect image is prepared, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables would have to be prepared. However, by separately defining data tables corresponding to the other effect images as additional data tables, as in this embodiment, only 32 + 5 = 37 types of display and additional data tables need to be prepared, thereby preventing an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area. Therefore, data tables corresponding to a wide variety of effect modes can be stored within the capacity provided in the data table storage area, making it easy to further diversify the effect images.

Furthermore, by defining the other effect images to be displayed as additional data tables, as in this embodiment, even if it is decided to display the other effect images to be displayed after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in work RAM 523 (display data table setting area), the other effect images to be displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed by simply setting the additional data table corresponding to the other effect images separately in work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area) without changing the display data table set in work RAM 523 (display data table setting area).

In addition, since the additional data table is configured to have the same data structure as the display data table, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer can be easily identified from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area while updating the table pointer every time, and a drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily generated from these.

Therefore, even if the sub-controller 262 or the like decides to display another effect in addition to a single display effect performed based on a command from the main controller 261, by specifying the display content of that additional effect in an additional data table, it is possible to easily display a wide variety of effects using a small number of data tables.

The pointer setting area is a storage area for setting a table pointer that specifies the address from which to obtain the corresponding drawing content from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

When the display data table is set in the display data table setting area, the CPU 521 initializes the value of the table pointer, which is update information, to the specific value "0." Then, based on the vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as the "V interrupt signal") sent from the VDP 526 every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, the CPU 521 executes a pointer update process using an update function within the display content setting process of the V interrupt process described below, and the value of the table pointer is incremented by one.

Each time the table pointer is updated in this way, the CPU 521 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area, and creates a drawing list, which will be described later.

As a result, the effects corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table setting area will be displayed on the effect display device 42, and if an additional data table is set in the additional data table setting area, the effects corresponding to that additional data table will be displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the effects corresponding to the display data table.

In addition, the effects displayed on the effect display device 42 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table setting area or the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

The drawing list setting area is a storage area for setting a drawing list that instructs the VDP 526 to draw one frame of an image. The drawing list is generated based on the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

Here, we will explain the composition of the drawing list in detail. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the VDP 526 to draw one frame's worth of images. For example, it defines the drawing information for each sprite, such as the background image to be used in one frame of image as one of the performance elements, the decorative pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...) which is one of the performance elements, the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) which is one of the performance elements, the character (character 1, character 2, ...) which is one of the performance elements, and the hold icon (hold icon 1, hold icon 2, ...) which is one of the performance elements.

As described above, the drawing information for each sprite includes, as storage information, the address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. VDP 526 retrieves the image data for that sprite from the storage area in character ROM 525 specified by that address and transfers it to video RAM 524.

The drawing information for each sprite also includes output settings such as display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The VDP 526 performs scaling on the standard image generated from the image data for that sprite read from the character ROM 525 according to the magnification, rotation according to the rotation angle, translucency according to the translucency value, compositing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction according to the color information, and filtering according to the filter specification information using the method specified by that information, and then draws the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The VDP 526 then loads the drawn image into either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer flag, which will be described later.

The CPU 521 generates drawing information for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area, and the content of other images to be drawn (such as reserved icons), and creates a drawing list by sorting the drawing information by sprite.

The address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where the sprite (display object) data is stored in the drawing information for each sprite is generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and additional data table, or the sprite type identified from the content of other images. In other words, since the storage area in character ROM 525 where the image data for each sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, CPU 521 can instantly identify the address in character ROM 525 where the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the drawing information of the drawing list.

In addition, the CPU 521 copies the other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) of each sprite's drawing information as is, as specified in the display data table and additional data table.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the CPU 521 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from those that should be placed furthest in the background to those that should be placed in the foreground, and sets drawing information for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, drawing information corresponding to the background image is set first, followed by drawing information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: decorative pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), and reserved icon (reserved icon 1, reserved icon 2, ...).

The VDP 526 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order set in the drawing list, which defines the image drawing instructions for each frame, and then overwrites the drawn sprites in the frame buffer of the video RAM 524. Therefore, in one frame of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed in the background, and the last sprite drawn can be placed in the foreground.

The drawing target buffer flag setting area is a storage area for setting a drawing target buffer flag to specify the frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer") in which the image drawn by the VDP 526 is displayed, from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer and second frame buffer) of the video RAM 524 described below.

If the drawing target buffer flag is a specific value of "0", the first frame buffer is designated as the drawing target buffer, and if it is "1", the second frame buffer is designated. Information about this designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the VDP 526 along with the drawing list.

As a result, the VDP 526 executes a drawing process that displays an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, the VDP 526 reads previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers this image information to the performance display device 42 as a video signal, thereby executing an image output process (display process) that displays an image on the performance display device 42.

The drawing target buffer flag is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the VDP 526 along with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". This causes the drawing target buffer to alternate between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer each time a drawing list is sent.

The drawing list is also sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process executed by the CPU 521 is executed, based on a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 526 every 20 msec when the drawing process and output process for one frame of image is completed.

In other words, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image drawing and output processes are executed. 20 msec after the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer to be read and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer.

Then, after another 20 msec, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer to be read and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, by alternately specifying either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, every 20 msec, it is possible to perform the drawing process for one frame's image while continuously outputting one frame's worth of image in 20 msec increments.

The command buffer is a storage means for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-controller 262, and is composed of a ring buffer.

The video RAM 524 is used to display images to be displayed on the performance display device 42, and is equipped with two frame buffers (a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer).

The two frame buffers are each capable of storing one frame of image (one screen's worth of image). Here, one frame of image refers to one screen's worth of image displayed at one update timing in a configuration in which the image displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Specifically, each frame buffer contains a large number of unit areas, each corresponding to a pixel (dot) of the LCD display unit 42a at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area is configured to store data for specifying which color to display. In this embodiment, a full-color system is used, allowing each pixel to be set to 256 levels for each of the colors R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Correspondingly, in each unit area, one byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color. In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least three bytes.

In this way, by adopting a double-buffer system with two frame buffers (first and second frame buffers) in the video RAM 524, the VDP 526 writes a one-frame image created in accordance with instructions from the CPU 521 into either the first or second frame buffer, thereby displaying the one-frame image in that frame buffer. While the image is being displayed in one of the frame buffers, the VDP 526 reads the one-frame image previously displayed in the other frame buffer and outputs the image information to the performance display device 42, thereby executing a process to display the one-frame image on the performance display device 42.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read in order to display the image on the performance display device 42 are alternately designated by the CPU 521 as either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

In other words, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read, and image drawing and output processing is performed. 20 msec after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read.

As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer is read and output to the performance display device 42, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer.

Then, after another 20 msec, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read.

This allows one frame of image that was previously loaded into the second frame buffer to be read out and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is loaded into the first frame buffer.

After that, by alternately specifying the frame buffer that displays one frame's worth of image and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read every 20 msec, either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer, it is possible to perform the drawing process of one frame's worth of image while continuously outputting one frame's worth of image in 20 msec increments.

The character ROM 525 is a storage means for pre-storing image data for various images to be displayed on the performance display device 42, such as various background images and various sprites (decorative patterns, characters, hold icons, etc.), and has a pattern storage area, a character storage area, a hold icon storage area, a background image storage area, etc.

Here, the image data for each sprite includes at least a combination of bitmap data that defines the design, character shape, and pattern, and a color palette table that is referenced when determining the display color for each pixel in the bitmap image. Furthermore, the image data for the background image is stored, for example, as JPEG data, which is compressed still image data.

The pattern storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to the decorative patterns that are displayed in a variable manner on the effect display device 42. In this embodiment, multiple groups of pattern image data corresponding to nine types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" are stored. When generating images related to the pattern variations in the "normal stage effect," for example, image data for one decorative pattern group (nine types of decorative patterns) selected by the player in the effect customization described below from among three decorative pattern groups ("tropical fish group," "near-sea fish group," and "deep-sea fish group"), or one decorative pattern group (nine types of decorative patterns) set as default, is used. In this embodiment, the "tropical fish group" is set as the default decorative pattern group.

The character storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to various characters displayed on the effect display device 42, and in this embodiment, multiple types of character image data corresponding to, for example, main characters are stored. When generating an image for an effect in which a main character appears, for example, from among the four types of main character image data (image data for a "girl character," image data for a "boy character," image data for a "robot character," and image data for a "monster character"), the main character image data selected by the player during effect customization, which will be described later, or the main character image data set as default, will be used. Note that in this embodiment, a "girl character" is set as the main character by default.

The hold icon storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to the hold icons displayed on the effect display device 42. In this embodiment, multiple types of image data corresponding to hold icons are stored, such as the hold icon H461 (see Figure 2-47(a)). When generating an image in which a hold icon appears, one type of hold icon image data selected by the player during effect customization, as described below, or one type of hold icon image data set as default is used from among the image data corresponding to three types of hold icons (icon image data modeled after a life jacket, icon image data modeled after swimming goggles, and icon image data modeled after a seashell). In this embodiment, the hold icon H461 modeled after a life jacket is set as the default hold icon.

The background image storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to various background images displayed on the effect display device 42, and in this embodiment, multiple types of image data corresponding to background images are stored. When generating an image for a "normal stage effect," for example, of the three types of background image data (background image data for the "diving stage," background image data for the "cruising stage," and background image data for the "deep sea stage"), the background image data selected by the player during effect customization, which will be described later, or the background image data set as default, will be used. In this embodiment, the background image for the "diving stage" is set as the default background image.

The background image storage area also stores various screen configuration images that make up the input section, such as the menu screen 3000, language setting screen 3001, volume setting screen 3002, brightness setting screen 3003, custom setting continuation selection screen 8000, and communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000. Of course, a configuration may be adopted in which a portion of the image data stored in character ROM 525 is stored in ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which character ROM 525 is omitted and all of the image data stored in character ROM 525 is stored in ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that operates the liquid crystal drive circuit (LCD driver) that drives and controls the liquid crystal display unit 42a of the performance display device 42. It draws images based on drawing instructions (drawing list) from the CPU 521 and displays the drawn images on the performance display device 42 at a predetermined timing. In this embodiment, the VDP 526 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing.

The VDP 526 sends a V interrupt signal to the CPU 521 every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. The CPU 521 executes V interrupt processing each time it detects this V interrupt signal, instructing the VDP 526 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the VDP 526 executes drawing processing for the next frame of image, and also executes image output processing (display processing) to display the image previously developed by drawing on the performance display device 42.

More specifically, the VDP 526 draws one frame of image and expands the drawn image in either the first or second frame buffer, while outputting the one frame of image previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the performance display device 42, thereby displaying the image on the performance display device 42, which constitutes the output function. The VDP 526 processes the drawing process of this one frame of image and the output process of this one frame of image in parallel within the image display time of one frame on the performance display device 42 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

In this way, the CPU 521 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from the VDP 526 and issues drawing instructions to the VDP 526, so the VDP 526 can receive an image drawing instruction from the CPU 521 at each execution interval (20 msec) of the image drawing and output processing. Therefore, the VDP 526 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing or output processing is complete, preventing the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image or the display of an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer where the currently displayed image is displayed.

Under the above configuration, when the VDP 526 performs drawing processing, it first reads the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 525 based on the storage information contained in the drawing list sent from the CPU 521, and then expands the read image data into a specified frame buffer in the video RAM 524.

In addition, when the VDP 526 performs image output processing to output images constituting the performance section to the performance display device 42, a video signal containing pixel information corresponding to each pixel of the LCD display section 42a of the performance display device 42 is generated based on the image expanded in the first frame buffer or second frame buffer of the video RAM 524, and this video signal is output to the performance display device 42 via the output port 529.

More specifically, the VDP 526 outputs, as video signals, RGB signals consisting of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color information that indicate the color data of each pixel of the LCD display unit 42a, as well as synchronization signals for synchronizing the RGB signals with the LCD display unit 42a to the performance display device 42.

When the VDP 526 outputs video signals for one frame of image (one screen's worth of image) to the performance display device 42, for example, it first outputs video signals to each pixel in the same horizontal line, starting with the pixel in the upper left corner (first row, first column) of the LCD display unit 42a (m x n pixels), and continuing to the pixel in the upper right corner (first row, nth column) of the LCD display unit 42a. After outputting the video signal to the pixel in the upper right corner (first row, nth column), it then outputs video signals to each pixel in the same horizontal line, starting with the pixel in the leftmost part of the second row (second row, first column). In this manner, video signals are output sequentially from the top, from the leftmost pixel to the rightmost pixel, thereby displaying an image across the entire screen of the LCD display unit 42a.

Then, the VDP 526 outputs a V interrupt signal to the CPU 521 at the timing when it outputs a video signal to the last pixel in the bottom right corner of the LCD display unit 42a, causing the CPU 521 to recognize that updating of one frame of image has been completed. In this embodiment, the output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, the same as the update cycle of one frame of image. In other words, in this embodiment, every 20 msec that the V interrupt signal is output, output processing of the video signal for one frame of image is executed to the performance display device 42.

For convenience, we will now explain the card unit 900. The card unit 900 is a device that mainly performs various controls related to the lending and settlement of gaming value (virtual gaming media) equivalent to gaming balls, and is arranged in one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 10.

The card unit 900 has a bill insertion slot 902 into which bills can be inserted, and a card insertion slot 903 into which a membership card (recording medium such as a magnetic card) can be inserted.

Membership cards that can be used with the card unit 900 include specific membership cards and guest membership cards.

A specific membership card is issued to a player who has registered as a member in advance at the amusement hall, and is owned by the player personally. Players who own a specific membership card (specific members) can obtain various benefits, such as being able to find out the ball dispensing status of each pachinko machine 10, by inserting the specific membership card into a designated data management device at the amusement hall.

On the other hand, if a player is not a designated member, they will play using a guest member card borrowed in advance from the gaming hall instead of the designated member card. In principle, the guest member card is intended for use only one day, and the player's personal information will not be managed in connection with the card.

Unless otherwise specified, the specific membership card and guest membership card will hereinafter be collectively referred to as "membership card." Note that the recording medium used in the card unit 900 is not limited to card type, and may also be coin type or stick type.

An available lamp 905 is provided on the top of the card unit 900. This available lamp 905 lights up when a membership card can be inserted into the card insertion slot 903 and goes out when it cannot be inserted.

In addition, a card insertion lamp (loan available lamp) 907 is provided below the card insertion slot 903. The card insertion lamp 907 lights up when a membership card is inserted into the card insertion slot 903 and turns off when no card is inserted.

On the other hand, the card unit operating section 120 for operating the card unit 900 is provided on the upper surface of the bulge 19 of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, and is electrically connected to the card unit 900 via the card unit connection board 314.

Here, we will explain in detail the configuration of the card unit operation unit 120. The card unit operation unit 120 is equipped with a lending button 121, a settlement/return button 122, and a points display unit 123.

The loan button 121 is operated by the player to receive a loan of virtual balls. When this loan button 121 is pressed with a membership card inserted into the card unit 900, virtual balls are loaned out within the amount inserted into the bill slot 902 or the savings data (balance) recorded on the membership card inserted into the card slot 903.

The player then plays pinball games using the virtual loaned balls thus loaned and the virtual prize balls that may be awarded in the pachinko machine 10 as his or her own balls.

The settlement return button 122 is operated when a player requests the return of the membership card inserted into the card unit 900 (settling of balls held).

The point display unit 123 has a balance display unit 123a and a ball holding display unit 123b. The balance display unit 123a is composed of multiple 7-segment LEDs and displays the balance (savings data) stored on the membership card inserted into the card insertion slot 903, or the balance (remaining money) of cash inserted into the bill insertion slot 902.

In this embodiment, for example, the balance (savings data) stored on the membership card or the balance (remaining amount) of cash inserted into the bill insertion slot 902 is displayed as the virtual number of balls that can be loaned out based on that balance. Of course, this is not limited to this, and the balance (savings data) stored on the membership card or the balance (remaining amount) of cash inserted into the bill insertion slot 902 itself may also be displayed. Furthermore, the balance display unit 123a may be configured to simultaneously display both the balance (savings data) stored on the membership card and the balance (remaining amount) of cash inserted into the bill insertion slot 902, or to switch between displaying either one.

The ball display unit 123b is composed of multiple 7-segment LEDs and displays the number of balls (virtual game balls) owned by the player, i.e., the number of game balls that the player can use in pinball games.

Next, the electrical configuration of the card unit 900 will be described in detail. Figure 2-8 is a block diagram showing the electrical connection configuration of the card unit 900, card unit connection board 314, card unit operation unit 120, counting management device 311, and sub-control device 262.

The card unit 900 is equipped with an MPU 910, a one-chip microcomputer that serves as a calculation device. The MPU 910 contains a ROM 911 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 910, a RAM 912 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 911 are executed, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit.

The working area of RAM 912 includes a set loan quantity storage area, a loan amount storage area, a loan request output counter, a request value storage area, etc.

The set loan number storage area is used to store the number of virtual loan balls to be loaned in units of 1 unit (100 yen). This value is set by the loan number setting operation unit 921 of the setting operation unit 920, which will be described later. The value set here is also output to the counting management device 311 and is taken into consideration when loaning virtual loan balls.

The loan amount storage area is used to store the loan amount set by the amount setting operation unit 922 of the setting operation unit 920 (described below), i.e., the maximum number of points that can be debited from a membership card, etc., per operation of the loan button 121.

The loan request output counter is a counter that counts the number of times the loan request signal B2 output to the counting management device 311 is low-level output.

The requested value storage area is used to temporarily store the number of times the loan request signal B2 is output at a low level, as a loan request setting value, which is determined by referencing the loan amount stored in the loan amount storage area and the balance stored on a membership card, etc.

A bus line 914 consisting of an address bus and a data bus is connected to the MPU 910, and the bus line 914 is connected to an input/output port 915.

In addition to the bus line 914, the input/output port 915 is connected to various lamps such as the available lamp 905 and the card inserted lamp 907, as well as a card reader/writer 917, a setting operation unit 920, a card unit connection board 314, and an external relay terminal 926.

The card reader/writer 917 is used to read data from and write data to a membership card inserted into the card insertion slot 903.

The setting operation unit 920 is used to set the virtual loan ball unit price (loan rate and exchange rate) and is equipped with a loan quantity setting operation unit 921 and an amount setting operation unit 922. For example, if 25 balls are set using the loan quantity setting operation unit 921, 25 virtual loan balls will be loaned per unit (100 yen). In addition, by setting a specified amount (e.g., 500 yen) using the amount setting operation unit 922, the maximum amount deducted from a membership card, etc. per operation of the loan button 121 is set to that amount (e.g., 500 yen). The values set here are stored in RAM 912 (set loan quantity storage area and loan target amount storage area).

The card unit 900 also has a power supply unit 925 that supplies power to each component. The power supply unit 925 takes in 24V AC power supplied from an external source, generates various operating power supplies, and supplies them to the MPU 910, card unit operation unit 120, etc. via a power supply path not shown. The power supply unit 925 is also connected to the power switch board 382 (power supply circuit 313) of the pachinko machine 10 via a power supply path not shown, and supplies 24V AC power to this.

In addition, the external relay terminal 926 is connected to the gaming parlor's hall computer, which manages sales, etc., so that it can transmit and receive signals such as sales to the hall computer.

The card unit connection board 314 is equipped with a first relay port 931 to which the counting management device 311 of the pachinko machine 10 is connected, a second relay port 932 to which the card unit operation unit 120 is connected, a third relay port 933 to which the card unit 900 is connected, and a fourth relay port 934 to which the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 is connected. As a result, the card unit connection board 314 is configured to be able to electrically relay between the counting management device 311, the card unit operation unit 120, the card unit 900, and the sub-control device 262.

Between the counting management device 311 and the card unit 900, an initial setting completion signal B0, a loan confirmation signal B1, and a loan request signal B2 are output from the card unit 900 to the counting management device 311, and a connection confirmation signal P0 and a loan response signal P1 are output from the counting management device 311 to the card unit 900. Each of these signals switches the output level of each signal line to high level (H) or low level (L), allowing the other party to recognize various states (various instructions). In addition to these signals, various other signals are also exchanged. For example, signals to notify the set loan number (number of virtual loan balls loaned per unit) are also output from the card unit 900 to the counting management device 311 as needed.

The initial setting completion signal B0 is a signal that causes the pachinko machine 10 (counting management device 311) to recognize that the initial setting of the card unit 900 has been completed. When the power to the card unit 900 is turned on and the initial setting process described below is completed, the initial setting completion signal B0 switches from high level to low level and maintains the low level output.

The connection confirmation signal P0 is a signal that allows the card unit 900 to recognize whether the counting management device 311 is in a state where it can be loaned. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the connection confirmation signal P0 switches from high level to low level, and low level output begins. If the counting management device 311 is in a state where it can be loaned, it remains at low level. On the other hand, if an error condition occurs that makes the counting management device 311 unable to be loaned, the signal goes high level and notifies the card unit 900 of this.

The loan confirmation signal B1 is a signal that allows the counting management device 311 to recognize whether the loan button 121 has been operated and the card unit 900 is in a loaned state.

More specifically, when the lending operation signal Q1, described below, is input to the card unit 900, the card unit 900 enters a lending state, the lending confirmation signal B1 switches from high to low, and low-level output begins. Then, when the lending process is complete, the lending confirmation signal B1 returns to high. In other words, when the lending confirmation signal B1 is high, it indicates that the card unit 900 is in a standby state, and when it is low, it indicates that it is in a lending state.

The loan request signal B2 is a signal that requests the counting management device 311 to loan a virtual loan ball and instructs it to execute the request. More specifically, the falling edge of the loan request signal B2 requests the counting management device 311 to loan a virtual loan ball, and the rising edge of the signal thereafter instructs it to start the loan process of the virtual loan ball.

In this embodiment, one loan request (one low-level output) requests the loan of 100 yen worth of virtual loan balls (e.g., 25 balls). Therefore, if 500 yen worth of virtual loan balls are loaned per operation of the loan button 121, the loan request signal B2 will be output at a low level five times.

When the loan request signal B2 falls from high to low within a predetermined time after the loan confirmation signal B1 changes from high to low, the signal acts as a request signal requesting the loan of a virtual loan ball. On the other hand, when the counting management device 311 responds to the request signal, the signal rises from low to high within a predetermined time, causing the signal to act as an instruction signal instructing the loan of a virtual loan ball.

The loan response signal P1 is a signal that responds to the loan request from the card unit 900 via the loan request signal B2, indicating that the loan process performed in response to the loan execution instruction via the loan request signal B2 has been acknowledged, and that the loan process performed in response to the loan execution instruction via the loan request signal B2 has been completed. More specifically, after the loan request signal B2 falls to low level (loan request), when the virtual loan ball loan operation is actually possible, the loan response signal P1 switches from high level to low level. This signal therefore serves as a request acknowledgement signal that indicates that the loan request has been recognized. On the other hand, after the loan request signal B2 rises to high level (loan execution instruction), when the virtual loan ball loan process is actually completed, the loan response signal P1 switches to high level. This signal therefore serves as a loan completion signal that indicates that the loan process in response to the loan execution instruction has been completed.

Furthermore, between the card unit 900 and the card unit operation unit 120, a lending operation signal Q1 and a returning operation signal Q2 are output from the card unit operation unit 120 to the card unit 900, and a point display signal B3 is output from the card unit 900 to the card unit operation unit 120.

The loan operation signal Q1 is a signal output when the loan button 121 on the card unit operation section 120 is pressed. This requests the card unit 900 to loan a virtual loan ball.

The return operation signal Q2 is a signal that is output when the settlement/return button 122 on the card unit operation section 120 is pressed. This requests the card unit 900 to settle the balls held and return the membership card.

The point display signal B3 is a signal that causes the balance display section 123a of the point display unit 123 to display the balance (savings data) stored on the membership card inserted into the card insertion slot 903, or the balance (remaining amount) of cash inserted into the bill insertion slot 902.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 conducts a lottery using various counter information during play. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2-9, the following are used: a hit/miss random number counter CH1 as a hit/miss random number generating means used in the hit/miss lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot state will occur; a type determination counter CH2 used to determine the type of jackpot (type lottery); a variable selection counter CH3 used to determine whether or not a reach state will occur in the effect display device 42; an initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit/miss random number counter CH1; a first variable type counter CS1 and a second variable type counter CS2 used to determine the variable display time of the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B (effect display device 42); and a normal symbol random number counter CH4 used in the start-going support lottery to determine whether or not the second start-going winning section 33WB will be opened. The variation selection counter CH3 is also used to draw reach patterns when the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 are changed to a missing symbol. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used to select the effect pattern on the effect display device 42 (such as selecting the decorative symbol variation pattern).

Counters CH1, CH2, CH3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CH4 are loop counters that add 1 to the previous value each time they are updated, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching their upper limit. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

RAM 503 has a special variable reserve area that serves as a reserve memory section in which the values of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, and variable selection counter CH3 are stored, and a normal variable reserve area in which the value of the normal pattern random number counter CH4 is stored.

The special variable reserve area includes a first special variable reserve area and a second special variable reserve area, each of which has four reserve areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special variable holding area, the values of the win/loss random number counter CH1, the type determination counter CH2, and the variable selection counter CH3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history in the first start winning section 33WA.

In each reserve area of the second special variable reserve area, the values of the win/loss random number counter CH1, the type determination counter CH2, and the variable selection counter CH3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history in the second start winning section 33WB.

In this embodiment, there is only one execution area for the special variable pending area, and the data stored in the first special variable pending area and the second special variable pending area is shifted to a common execution area when a variable display based on that data is performed.

The normal variable reserve area has four reserve areas (reserve areas 1 to 4) and one execution area. Each reserve area in the normal variable reserve area stores the values of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 in chronological order, according to the history of game balls passing through the through gate 34.

By adopting this configuration, the first variable display on the first special pattern display device 43A, the second variable display on the second special pattern display device 43B, and the variable display on the normal pattern display device 41 can each be held up to four times.

Explaining each counter in more detail, the win/loss random number counter CH1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 599) as the closing value, return to 0, which is the lower limit (i.e., the opening value). Normally, when the win/loss random number counter CH1 goes through one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win/loss random number counter CH1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the win/loss random number counter CH1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once per timer interrupt and repeatedly within the remaining time of normal processing. Meanwhile, the win/loss random number counter CH1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 is stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer. Then, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area).

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) does not change depending on the game mode (either "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"). The number of values of the win/loss random number counter CH1 that result in a jackpot state is three, and the value is "7,207,407." In other words, based on the game ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, there is a 1/200 probability of winning the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery), and the jackpot state occurs.

ROM 502 contains a win/lose determination table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 corresponds to a win.

In this embodiment, there is a first hit/miss determination table corresponding to a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA (a first hit/miss determination table including a jackpot determination common to "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," and "time-saving B mode"), and a second hit/miss determination table corresponding to a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB (a second hit/miss determination table including a jackpot determination common to "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," and "time-saving B mode").

The type determination counter CH2 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 19), return to the lower limit, 0.

ROM 502 contains a type determination table that is referenced when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter CH2 corresponds to. In this embodiment, a first type determination table corresponding to a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and a second type determination table corresponding to a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB are provided.

If the player wins the jackpot in the lottery, the type of jackpot state to be awarded will be determined based on the value of the type determination counter CH2 (a type lottery will be held), and the player will be awarded the determined type of jackpot state.

In this embodiment, if a player wins a jackpot in the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by a ball entering the first start-up winning section 33WA, regardless of the game mode ("normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"), there is a 40% chance that the jackpot will be a "15R jackpot," and a 60% chance that the jackpot will be a "4R jackpot."

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the ball entering the second start-up winning section 33WB, regardless of the game mode ("normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"), there is a 50% chance of a "15R jackpot," a 30% chance of an "8R jackpot," and a 20% chance of a "4R jackpot."

The type determination counter CH2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the type determination counter CH2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the type determination counter CH2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area) of RAM 503.

The variable selection counter CH3 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 238). In this embodiment, the variable selection counter CH3 draws between three possibilities: a "reach before or after miss" in which, after a reach state has occurred for a decorative pattern, the final stopping pattern stops just one symbol before or after the reach pattern; a "reach other than a reach before or after miss" in which, after a reach state has occurred, the final stopping pattern stops anywhere other than before or after the reach pattern; and a "miss (complete miss)" in which no reach state occurs.

ROM 502 contains a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variable selection counter CH3 and various reach patterns.

The variable selection counter CH3 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the variable selection counter CH3 is stored in the variable selection counter buffer. Then, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the variable selection counter CH3 stored in the variable selection counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area) of RAM 503.

Furthermore, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, one of the fluctuation type counters, CS1, is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 255, and after reaching its upper limit (i.e., 255), return to its lower limit of 0. The other fluctuation type counter, CS2, is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 31, and after reaching its upper limit (i.e., 31), return to its lower limit of 0.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the first special pattern display device 43A or second special pattern display device 43B and the general fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display on the effect display device 42 (reach patterns such as normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) are associated by a fluctuation pattern table, so that once the fluctuation time of the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the effect display device 42 is also determined.

For example, the configuration may be such that the fluctuation time is determined based on the first fluctuation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode, which is the output setting content of the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B, is determined by the second fluctuation type counter CS2. For example, when a "15R jackpot" is to be handled, one of the stop display modes corresponding to a "15R jackpot" is determined. Note that the counters used to determine the fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern are not limited to the above configuration, and can be changed as appropriate for each model.

Furthermore, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and are repeatedly updated during the remaining time of the normal processing. In this embodiment, with regard to the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer of RAM 503 are stored in the special fluctuation holding area of RAM 503.

In this way, by obtaining the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 at the timing of the start winning, the first fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display that have been reserved and stored can be known (predicted) before the fluctuation begins, and this information can be used to perform various effects, etc. Furthermore, if a configuration that predicts the fluctuation time and performs an effect is not required, the buffer values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 can be obtained when the effect display device 42 determines the fluctuation pattern when the decorative pattern begins to fluctuate.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variation selection counter CH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and that the values are not synchronized under any circumstances.

The normal symbol random number counter CH4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 29, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 29). The normal symbol random number counter CH4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 is obtained when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 34, which serves as the first ball entry section.

When a winning value is obtained from the normal symbol random number counter CH4, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable value for a predetermined period of time (after the normal symbol lamps that make up the normal symbol display device 41 flash alternately), and then the display stops in a mode (lighting pattern) that corresponds to the winning output setting, and the second start-up winning section 33WB opens in a pattern that corresponds to the game mode at that time.

In this embodiment, in a "low ball entry state," the winning random number values are two: "0" and "1." On the other hand, in a "high ball entry state," the winning random number values are 28: "0 to 27." In other words, in a "low ball entry state," there is a 1/15 probability that the second start entry section 33WB will be open, and in a "high ball entry state," there is a 14/15 probability that the second start entry section 33WB will be open.

ROM 502 contains a support determination table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 corresponds to a win. In this embodiment, a first support determination table corresponding to a "low ball score state" and a second support determination table corresponding to a "high ball score state" are set.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261 will be explained with reference to flowcharts. The processes performed by the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is started when the power is turned on; timer interrupt processing, which is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment); and NMI interrupt processing, which is started when a stop signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then the main processing.

Figure 2-12(a) is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec.

First, in step SH301, the system executes a process to read various winning switches. That is, it reads the status of various switches connected to the main control unit 261 (except for the RAM clear switch 323), determines the status of those switches, and saves the detection information (winning detection information). On the other hand, if there is no detection information, it proceeds directly to the next process.

As mentioned above, when there is detection information from various winning switches, the number of virtual prize balls corresponding to that winning switch is stored in the virtual prize ball buffer. The virtual prize ball number information stored in the virtual prize ball buffer is then sent to the counting management device 311 as a virtual prize ball command. The number of virtual prize balls corresponding to that virtual prize ball command is then awarded to the player as their own balls.

In step SH302, the update function executes the random number initial value update process. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0.

In addition, in step SH303, the update function executes a random number update process. Specifically, the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variable selection counter CH3, and normal pattern random number counter CH4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter CH1, CH2, CH3, and CH4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503.

Then, in step SH305, the second start winning process is executed in response to the game ball entering (winning) the second start winning section 33WB, and in step SH306, the first start winning process is executed in response to the game ball entering (winning) the first start winning section 33WA.

Furthermore, in step SH307, a through gate passing process is executed in response to the passage of the gaming ball through the through gate 34. The following step SH308 executes a launch permission command setting process to perform processes such as sending a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply and launch control device 310. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 has a mode memory area that is referenced when determining the current game mode. The mode memory area stores one of the following values: "11" corresponding to "normal mode," "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode," or "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode."

In response to this, the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 also has a mode memory area that the sub-controller 262 references when determining the game mode. The game mode information set in the main controller 261 is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step SH200) each time the game mode is switched and set.

Next, the second start winning process of step SH305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 2-13. Note that RAM 503 is provided with a second pending counter Nb that counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB.

First, in step SH501, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the second start winning section 33WB based on the detection information from the second start winning switch 224b. If a positive determination is made in step SH501, it is determined in step SH502 whether the value of the second pending counter Nb is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in either step SH501 or SH502, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH502 returns a positive result, proceed to step SH503 and increment the second pending counter Nb by 1.

In the following step SH504, an additive display process is performed on the second hold display device 46B (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number in the second variable display by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right second hold lamps are off, the left second hold lamp is turned on; if the left second hold lamp is on and the right second hold lamp is off, both left and right second hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right second hold lamps are on, the right second hold lamp remains on and the left second hold lamp flashes; and if the left second hold lamp is flashing and the right second hold lamp is on, processing is performed to flash both left and right second hold lamps.

After step SH504, in the processing of step SH505, the values of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variation selection counter CH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 (the values stored in the win/lose random number counter buffer, type determination counter buffer, variation selection counter buffer, and each variation type counter buffer) are stored in the first available holding area in the second special variation holding area (win/lose random number memory area, win type random number memory area, reach random number memory area, and first and second variation type random number memory area). At the same time, the game mode when this second variation display starts is identified based on the values of the variation count counters A and B, described below, and the game mode information is stored in the mode memory area. After step SH505, the processing proceeds to step SH506.

In step SH506, a second win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area corresponds to a jackpot.

Here, details of the second pass/fail determination process in step SH506 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-15(b).

First, in step SH5111, the second win/loss determination table common to all game modes is referenced to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area matches any of the values "7", "207", or "407" corresponding to a jackpot. If a positive determination is made in step SH5111, then in step SH5112 the jackpot expected flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH5111, this processing ends as is.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-13, in step SH507 following step SH506, if it is determined in step SH506 that the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a second type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area.

The second type determination process of step SH507 will now be explained with reference to Figure 2-16(b). In the second type determination process, first in step SH5300, it is determined whether the jackpot expected flag was set to ON in the second hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step SH5300 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH5300 returns a positive result, step SH5301 refers to the second type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area matches the value "0-9" corresponding to a "15R jackpot." If step SH5301 returns a positive result, step SH5302 turns on the 15R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH5301 returns a negative result, step SH5303 refers to the second type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area is "10-15," which corresponds to an "8R jackpot." If step SH5303 returns a positive result, step SH5304 turns on the 8R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH5303 returns a negative result, i.e., if the value of the type determination counter CH2 is between 16 and 19, step SH5305 turns on the 4R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserved area in the second special variable reserved area, and then this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-13, in step SH508 following step SH507, a second fluctuation time determination process is performed to determine the second fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display. Here, if the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "normal mode," the second normal fluctuation time determination table for "normal mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "time-saving A mode," the second shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving A mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Furthermore, if the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "time-saving B mode," the second shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving B mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time determined here is stored in the corresponding holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area. However, the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in that holding area is not erased.

In this embodiment, the second normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode," the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving A mode," and the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving B mode" each have a "jackpot" table and a "miss" table.

In step SH509, which follows step SH508, the start command is set, and then this process is terminated. This start command includes fluctuation information (information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the second hit/miss determination process, the second type determination process, and the second fluctuation time determination process, as well as information indicating whether the fluctuation display was triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, and game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SH200).

Next, the first start winning process of step SH306 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 2-14. RAM 503 is provided with a first pending counter Na, which counts the number of pending first variable displays triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA.

First, in step SH510, whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first start winning section 33WA is determined based on the detection information from the first start winning switch 224a. If the determination in step SH510 is negative, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH510 returns a positive result, step SH511 determines whether the value of the first pending counter Na is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If step SH511 returns a negative result, the process ends. On the other hand, if step SH511 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH512, where the first pending counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the following step SH513, an additive display process is performed on the first hold display device 46A (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number in the first variable display by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are off, the left first hold lamp is turned on; if the left first hold lamp is on and the right first hold lamp is off, both left and right first hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right first hold lamps are on, the right first hold lamp is left on and the left first hold lamp is flashed; and if the left first hold lamp is flashing and the right first hold lamp is on, processing is performed to flash both left and right first hold lamps.

After step SH513, in the processing of step SH514, the values of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variation selection counter CH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 (the values stored in the win/lose random number counter buffer, type determination counter buffer, variation selection counter buffer, and each variation type counter buffer) are stored in the first available holding area of the first special variation holding area (win/lose random number memory area, win type random number memory area, reach random number memory area, and first and second variation type random number memory area). At the same time, the game mode when this first variation display starts is identified based on the values of the variation count counters A and B, described below, and the game mode information is stored in the mode memory area. After step SH514, the processing proceeds to step SH515.

In step SH515, the first win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area corresponds to a jackpot.

Here, details of the first pass/fail determination process in step SH515 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-15(a).

First, in step SH5101, the first win/loss determination table common to all game modes is referenced to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area matches any of the values "7", "207", or "407" corresponding to a jackpot. If a positive determination is made in step SH5101, then in step SH5102 the jackpot expected flag for the corresponding reserve area in the first special variable reserve area is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH5101, this processing ends as is.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-14, in step SH516 following step SH515, if it is determined in step SH515 that the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a first type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area.

The first type determination process of step SH516 will now be explained with reference to Figure 2-16(a). In the first type determination process, step SH5201 first determines whether the expected jackpot flag was set to ON in the first hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the result of step SH5201 is NO, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH5201 returns a positive result, step SH5202 refers to the first type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area matches the value "0-7" corresponding to a "15R jackpot." If step SH5202 returns a positive result, step SH5203 turns on the 15R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the first special variable reserve area, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH5202 returns a negative result, i.e., if the value of the type determination counter CH2 is between 8 and 19, step SH5204 turns on the 4R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserved area in the first special variable reserved area, and then this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-14, in step SH517 following step SH516, if it is determined in step SH515 that the value of the hit/miss random number counter CH1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot (it is a miss), a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the variable selection counter CH3 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area.

The reach determination process of step SH517 will now be explained with reference to Figure 2-17. First, in step SH5401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot expected flag was set in the first hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step SH5401 is affirmative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH5401 returns a negative result, i.e., if a miss occurs, step SH5402 refers to the reach determination table to determine whether the value of the fluctuation selection counter CH3 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either the value "0" or "1" corresponding to a "front or rear miss reach." If step SH5402 returns a positive result, step SH5403 turns on the front or rear flag, indicating the occurrence of a front or rear miss reach, and then terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if step SH5402 returns a negative result, step SH5404 refers to the reach determination table to determine whether the value of the variable selection counter CH3 newly stored in the special variable pending area matches any of the values "2-21" corresponding to a "reach other than a miss before or after." If step SH5404 returns a positive result, step SH5405 turns on the non-reach before or after flag, and then this processing ends.

Also, if step SH5404 returns a negative result, meaning the variable display ends without going through a reach state (a "complete miss"), this process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-14, in step SH518 following step SH517, a first fluctuation time determination process is performed to determine the first fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display. Here, if the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "normal mode," the first normal fluctuation time determination table for "normal mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "time-saving A mode," the first shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving A mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "time-saving B mode," the first shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving B mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time determined here is stored in the corresponding holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area. However, the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in that holding area is not erased.

In this embodiment, the first normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode," the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode," and the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" are provided with tables for "jackpot," "front and rear miss reach," "non-front and rear miss reach," and "complete miss," respectively.

Furthermore, for example, with regard to the fluctuation time determination table for a "complete miss," it is possible to provide fluctuation time determination tables such as "for 1 and 2 reserved items (normal fluctuation time)," "for 3 reserved items (reduced fluctuation time)," and "for 4 reserved items (reduced fluctuation time)," and to change the fluctuation time determination table (fluctuation time) referenced depending on the number of reserved fluctuation displays stored in the first special variable hold area. In this way, when the reserved first fluctuation displays are being executed sequentially, the shortened time for the first fluctuation display for a miss can be set depending on the number of reserved first fluctuation displays scheduled for execution at that time. Here, for example, in a situation where a fluctuation time determination table for "4 reserved items" is referenced when executing a specified fluctuation display, if the fluctuation display corresponds to a variety of wins such as a jackpot, the fluctuation time determination table for "jackpot" may be prioritized.

After step SH518, in step SH519, the start command is set and the process ends. This start command includes fluctuation information (information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the first hit/miss determination process, first type determination process, reach determination process, and first fluctuation time determination process, as well as information indicating whether the fluctuation display was triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, and game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display, which is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SH200).

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start winning section 33WA, 33WB, the value of the hit/miss random number counter CH1, etc. is directly stored in the special variable hold area, and then the hit/miss determination process, etc. is executed, but this configuration is not limited to this. For example, a temporary memory area may be provided to temporarily store the counter values when the value of the hit/miss random number counter CH1, etc. is obtained, and the information stored in the temporary memory area may be stored in the hold area of the corresponding special variable hold area after the hit/miss determination process, etc. is executed.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SH307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 2-18.

In step SH601, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information from the through gate switch 225. If the determination in step SH601 is negative, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH601 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34, step SH602 determines whether the value of the normal hold counter Nd, which counts the number of reserved variable displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the judgment here is negative, this processing ends as is. On the other hand, if step SH602 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if it is confirmed that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34 and the value of the normal hold counter Nd is less than 4, proceed to step SH603 and increment the normal hold counter Nd by 1.

Furthermore, in the following step SH604, an additive display process is performed on the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of one in the hold number displayed in the variable display on the normal pattern display device 41. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are off, the left normal hold lamp is turned on; if the left normal hold lamp is on and the right normal hold lamp is off, both left and right normal hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right normal hold lamps are on, the right normal hold lamp is left on and the left normal hold lamp is flashed; and if the left normal hold lamp is flashing and the right normal hold lamp is on, both left and right normal hold lamps are flashed.

After step SH604, in step SH605, a random number related to the win or loss is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 updated in the random number update process of step SH303 above is stored in the first free memory area in the normal variable pending area of RAM 503. Then, the through gate passing process ends.

Next, the launch permission command setting process in step SH308 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-19.

First, in step SH701, it is determined whether the launch permission flag, which indicates that a launch status signal is being received from the launch control circuit 312, is set to on. The launch status signal is sent from the launch control circuit 312 to the main control unit 261 when the launch control circuit 312 receives a touch signal and a launch switch signal from the handle 18, and a card unit use permission signal from the counting management device 311.

If step SH701 returns a positive result, step SH702 determines whether a launch status signal has been received. If step SH702 returns a negative result, step SH703 turns off the launch permission flag and then terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if step SH702 returns a positive result, step SH704 determines whether the value of the launch timer, which is update information used to measure the interval between launches of game balls, is the specific value "0." If step SH704 returns a negative result, step SH707 uses the update function to subtract 1 from the value of the launch timer, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH704 returns a positive answer, then in step SH705, the main control unit 261 sends a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312. In the following step SH706, the launch permission flag is turned off. After step SH706, this process ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH701, a determination is made in step SH708 as to whether a launch state signal has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SH708, the process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH708, the launch permission flag is set to ON in step SH709.

In the following step SH710, a ball feed signal is sent to the launch control circuit 312. Furthermore, in step SH711, the launch timer is set to "300", which corresponds to 0.6 seconds. This ensures that the game ball is set securely at the launch position by the ball feed device 63 before being launched by the launch device 60. Additionally, while the main control device 261 continues to receive a launch status signal from the launch control circuit 312, a launch permission signal is sent from the main control device 261 at 0.6 second intervals, causing the game ball to be launched by the launch device 60 at 0.6 second intervals. After step SH711, this process ends.

When the launch control circuit 312 receives a launch permission signal from the main control device 261, it determines whether it has received all of the touch signal and launch switch signal from the handle 18, and the card unit use permission signal from the counting management device 311. If a positive determination is made, it drives the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) and performs a launch process to launch the gaming ball.

The launch control circuit 312 also adjusts and controls the launch device 60 with respect to the launch strength (launch speed) of the gaming balls based on the dial position signal. This allows the gaming balls to be launched by the launch device 60 with the adjusted strength.

Furthermore, when the launch control circuit 312 receives a ball feed signal from the main control unit 261, it checks the launched ball detection switch 94, which detects whether a game ball has been set at the launch position on the launch rail 61 where the game ball will be launched by the launch device 60, and if it confirms that a game ball has not been set at the launch position, it drives the ball feed device 63 and performs a ball feed process to set the game ball at the launch position.

Figure 2-12(b) is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control unit 261 at the time of power cut to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261. The CPU 501 then interrupts the ongoing control and begins NMI interrupt processing. In step SH401, the power outage occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the power outage occurrence information setting, and the NMI interrupt processing ends.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the counting management device 311, and this NMI interrupt causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the counting management device 311, causing the CPU 511 to interrupt the control it was currently executing and start the NMI interrupt processing. The details of this are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 2-10. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SH101, initial setting processing is performed when power is turned on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and a wait process is performed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-controllers (sub-controller 262, counting management unit 311, etc.) to become operational. In the following step SH102, RAM access is permitted.

Then, data backup processing is performed on RAM 503 within CPU 501. Specifically, in step SH103, it is determined whether RAM erase switch 323 provided on power supply circuit 313 of power supply/launch control device 310 is pressed (ON). If it is pressed, the process proceeds to step SH112 to clear (erase) the backup data. On the other hand, if RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the process proceeds to the following step SH104, where it is determined whether power outage information is set in backup area 503a of RAM 503. If it is not set, no backup data is stored, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step SH112. If power outage information is set in backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SH105. In the following step SH106, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, i.e., the validity of the backup is determined. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, so in this case too, proceed to step SH112.

In step SH112, an initialization command is sent to initialize the sub-control device 262, counting management device 311, etc. After that, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SH113, etc.). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, if you want to return the machine to its initial state when powering it on, for example, when the hall opens for business, you can turn on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 323 is ON, the system proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SH113, etc.). Similarly, if no power outage information has been set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the system also proceeds to RAM 503 initialization processing (step SH113, etc.). That is, in step SH113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step SH114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step SH111, and the system proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 323 has not been pressed (step SH103: NO), power recovery processing (processing upon recovery from power outage) is executed, provided that power outage information has been set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. That is, in step SH107, the stack pointer is restored to its state before the power outage, and in step SH108, the power outage information is cleared.

In step SH109, a command is sent to return the sub-controller to the gaming state it was in when power was turned off. In step SH110, the used registers are restored from the backup area 503a of RAM 503. Then, in step SH111, interrupt permission is set and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 2-11. In this normal processing, the main game processing is executed. In summary, the processing of steps SH200 to SH211 is executed as periodic processing at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps SH212 and SH213 is executed using the update function in the remaining time.

First, in step SH200, external output processing is performed to send control signals to each device based on the settings of the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B and the settings of the second start-up winning section 33WB, etc., updated in the previous normal processing, and to send output data such as commands to each sub-side control device.

For example, when starting a variable display for a predetermined period on the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B, a variable pattern command is sent to the sub-control device 262 to start a performance such as a variable display of decorative patterns on the performance display device 42. Based on these various commands, the sub-control device 262 determines the display mode of the performance display device 42 (such as the variable time and performance pattern as output setting contents), and instructs the display control device 45 to display this display mode on the performance display device 42.

The variation pattern command contains information that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative symbols, such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach. Meanwhile, the sub-controller 262 stores a table that contains the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. Based on the variation pattern command, the sub-controller 262 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbols, and controls the display controller 45, audio, etc.

However, in this embodiment, the variation pattern command does not include information specifying the type of presentation mode for the super reach or special reach ("Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," or "Marine Reach," which will be described later), and the sub-control device 262 is configured to determine the type of presentation mode as the output setting content for the super reach or special reach based on the variation pattern command.

Here, we will explain the decorative symbol change patterns. A "normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the decorative symbol change display.

A "Super Reach" is a reach pattern in which, while decorative symbols are being displayed in a changing manner (after a reach state has been established), characters and the like are displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols, thereby building a sense of anticipation in the player. As will be described later, this embodiment is configured to be able to execute three types of Super Reach: "Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," and "Marine Reach."

"Special Reach" is a presentation mode that can be derived when there is a high probability of a jackpot occurring (in this embodiment, only when a jackpot occurs). During the display of changing decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative symbols, presentation patterns and characters that differ from those of the Super Reach are displayed, creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

However, in this embodiment, the "Special Reach" is an advanced reach effect that can only be triggered when one of the super reaches, "Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," or "Marine Reach," is triggered. Therefore, in this embodiment, three types of special reaches can be executed: "Special Kuroshio Reach," "Special Coral Reach," and "Special Marine Reach," as described below.

"Complete Miss" is a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol display stops moving without any reach state being reached.

The sub-control device 262 also determines the stopping pattern (combination of stopping patterns) for the decorative pattern changing display on the effect display device 42 based on the change pattern and change time information included in the change pattern command. Information about the stopping pattern determined here is output to the display control device 45, and added to the display data table for the changing display selected as described above. Then, by performing an image drawing process according to the display data table to which information about the stopping pattern has been added, the stopping pattern is displayed as stopped on the effect display device 42 after the change time has elapsed. In other words, if a jackpot is won ("15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," "4R jackpot"), the changing display is displayed as a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern combination) consisting of the same numbers 1 to 9 that are all the same.

A combination of symbols that miss before and after corresponds to a "reach that misses before and after", where after a reach occurs, the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol. A combination of symbols other than a miss before and after corresponds to a "reach that does not miss before and after", where after a reach occurs, the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol. A combination of symbols that miss completely corresponds to a "complete miss", where no reach even occurs.

In addition, the main control device 261 may be configured to set a pattern command specifying one of a jackpot pattern combination, a combination of patterns that are not a front-to-back miss, a combination of patterns that are not a front-to-back miss, or a combination of patterns that are a complete miss, and output this to the sub-control device 262 together with a variation pattern command.

In addition, the external output process of step SH200 also involves processing to externally output various information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 240 in order to grasp the various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10.

For example, if the current gaming state is a jackpot state, jackpot signal 1 (high level signal) is output from the first terminal to the hall computer. Furthermore, if the current gaming state is a jackpot state or a high support state, jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) is output from the second terminal to the hall computer. This allows the hall computer to grasp the start and end of the jackpot state and the start and end of the high support state in the pachinko machine 10 that output the signal.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-11, in step SH201, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

In the following step SH202, the virtual prize ball count signal (virtual prize ball count information) received from the counting management device 311 is read. Next, in step SH203, the abnormality signal received from the counting management device 311 is read.

Then, in step SH205, the second special display control process is executed. In this process, control is performed regarding the second special pattern display device 43B, and the jackpot determination, the variable display settings executed by the second special pattern display device 43B, and the effect display settings executed by the effect display device 42 are also performed. Details of this second special display control process will be described later.

Furthermore, in step SH206, a first special display control process is executed. This process controls the first special pattern display device 43A, determines whether a jackpot has occurred, sets the variable display to be executed by the first special pattern display device 43A, and sets the effect display (such as the variable pattern of decorative patterns) to be executed by the effect display device 42. Details of this first special display control process will be described later.

In step SH207, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this processing, control is performed regarding the variable prize winning device 32A. Details of the variable prize winning device control processing will be described later.

In step SH208, normal display control processing is executed. In this processing, control is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

In step SH209, the start winning section control process is executed. In this process, control is performed on the second start winning section 33WB, which has a blade member 33WBb that opens and closes. Details of this start winning section control process will be described later.

Then, in step SH210, it is determined whether power outage information has been set in the backup area 503a of RAM 503. If power outage information has not been set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step SH211 whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) has passed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already passed, it proceeds to step SH200, and the processing from step SH200 onwards is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps SH212 and SH213).

In other words, in step SH212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SH213, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step SH201 above). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (255 and 31 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

Here, the execution time for each process in steps SH200 to SH210 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the win/lose random number counter CH1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Furthermore, if power outage information is set in backup area 503a of RAM 503 (step SH210: YES), this means that power has been cut off, and the processing from step SH214 onwards is carried out as power outage processing in the event of a power outage. Power outage processing begins with prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing in step SH214, then saving the contents of each register used by CPU 501 to the stack area in step SH215, and storing the value of the stack pointer in backup area 503a in step SH216.

Then, in step SH217, a power-off notification command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (such as the counting management device 311). Then, in step SH218, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 503. Then, in step SH219, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

The processing of step SH210 is executed at the end of a series of processing steps SH200-SH209 corresponding to changes in the game state, or at the end of one cycle of processing steps SH212 and SH213 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, during normal processing by the main control unit 261, power outage information is checked at the end of each processing step, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing step is in progress, making storage easier. Furthermore, when restoring the state before the power outage, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is smaller, making restoration easier and reducing the processing burden on the main control unit 261. Furthermore, because interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step SH214), data at the time of the power outage is prevented from being changed, and the state before the power outage can be reliably stored.

Next, the first special display control process of step SH206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 2-20.

First, in step SH800, it is determined whether the value of the variable interval timer, which is update information for measuring the remaining time of the variable interval (stop display confirmation period) set after the first variable display of the first special pattern display device 43A, is the specific value "0".

If step SH800 returns a negative result, i.e., if the time is within the variable interval period, step SH819 subtracts the value from the variable interval timer, and then the process ends. For example, if the variable interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the variable interval timer is set to 249 (or 250 if step SH819 is performed before step SH800), the update function will subtract 1 from the variable interval timer every 4 msec, and the timer will return to 0 after 1 second.

On the other hand, if step SH800 returns a positive result, i.e., if the interval is not a variable interval, step SH801 refers to the win status memory area (described below) to determine whether the current state is other than a jackpot state.

The jackpot state includes an opening period after the first special pattern display device 43A or second special pattern display device 43B displays a fixed stop in a specific manner corresponding to a jackpot, followed by an opening period until the variable winning device 32A is opened, a round period during which the variable winning device 32A is in an open state, an interval period between round periods during which the variable winning device 32A is in a closed state, and an ending period after the end of the final round until the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B can begin displaying a variable display.

In this embodiment, the hit status memory area stores "0" when in a state other than a jackpot state, and when in a jackpot state, stores "1" during the opening period and interval period, "2" during the round period, and "3" during the ending period. In other words, step SH801 determines whether "0" is stored in the hit status memory area to determine whether the state is other than a jackpot state.

If step SH801 returns a negative result, i.e., if the jackpot state is in progress, this processing is terminated. In this manner, in this embodiment, the first variable display is not executed when the jackpot state is in progress. Furthermore, during the jackpot state (from the start of the opening period to the end of the ending period), the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B maintains a specific stop state (stop display confirmed state) in which a confirmed stop display is displayed in a specific manner corresponding to the jackpot, using a predetermined specific stop function.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH801, the process proceeds to step SH802. In step SH802, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is being performed on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to on. If the special symbol 2 display flag is set to on, the process is determined to be positive. If a positive judgment is made in step SH802, the process is terminated.

If the result of step SH802 is negative, proceed to step SH803, where it is determined whether the second pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, is greater than 0. If the value of the second pending counter Nb is greater than 0, it is determined to be positive. If the result of step SH803 is positive, the process ends.

If the result of step SH803 is negative, step SH804 determines whether the special symbol 1 display flag, which indicates that the first variable display is being performed on the first special symbol display device 43A, is set to on.

If step SH804 returns a negative result, meaning the game is not in a jackpot state, is not showing the first or second variable display, and no second variable display is currently stored in reserve, the program proceeds to step SH805, where it determines whether the first reserved counter Na, which counts the number of reserved first variable displays triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, is greater than 0. This process constitutes the judgment unit in this embodiment.

In other words, if the second special pattern display device 43B is currently displaying a second variable display or if at least one second variable display is stored in reserve, the first special pattern display device 43A is configured not to be able to start a new first variable display.

If step SH805 returns a positive answer, step SH806 is executed to subtract 1 from the first pending counter Na. In the following step SH807, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the first special variable pending area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the first special variable pending area sequentially toward the execution area, with data in each area being shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SH807, in step SH808, a subtraction display process is performed on the first hold display device 46A (first hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of one in the hold number in the first variable display. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are flashing, the left first hold lamp is kept flashing while the right first hold lamp is lit; if the left first hold lamp is flashing and the right first hold lamp is lit, both left and right first hold lamps are lit; if both left and right first hold lamps are lit, the left first hold lamp is kept lit while the right first hold lamp is turned off; and if the left first hold lamp is lit and the right first hold lamp is turned off, both left and right first hold lamps are turned off. After step SH808, in step SH809, the first variable display setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH805, standby display setting processing is performed in step SH811, and then this processing ends.

The standby display setting process of step SH811 involves setting processes to derive a display mode corresponding to a standby state in which no variable display is being performed on the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B (for example, a mode in which only the first or second special pattern lamp from the right in the bottom row is lit), and setting processes for standby display commands to be output to the sub-control device 262.

In other words, in the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B of this embodiment, after the fluctuation stops, for a predetermined period (stop display confirmation period) that is predetermined as a fluctuation interval, a predetermined stop state (stop display confirmation state) in which the stop pattern is displayed as a confirmed stop in a manner that indicates the result of a win/lose lottery (for example, a predetermined manner corresponding to a loss) is maintained by a predetermined maintenance function, but when the predetermined period ends, the display mode is switched to a display mode that indicates a standby state. Of course, it is also possible to configure the predetermined stop state (stop display confirmation state) in which the stop pattern is displayed as a confirmed stop in a manner that indicates the result of a win/lose lottery until the next fluctuation display starts, without entering a standby state, by a predetermined maintenance function.

Here, details of the first variable display setting process in step SH809 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-21.

First, in step SH900, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is "7," which corresponds to a jackpot. This processing constitutes the lottery section in this embodiment. Furthermore, in step SH900, it may also be possible to determine whether the first variable display, which corresponds to a jackpot, is being displayed by determining whether the jackpot expected flag for the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set to on.

If step SH900 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH901, where it is determined whether the 15R jackpot flag has already been set on in the execution area of the special variable pending area. If step SH901 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH903.

In step SH903, a 15R jackpot pattern setting process is performed. The 15R jackpot pattern setting process is a process for causing the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 to execute a variable display and effect display corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area (the same applies to the various pattern setting processes described below). Here, the variable pattern table corresponding to the 15R jackpot is taken into consideration to determine the variable pattern (variable display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc. as output setting contents) of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42, and variable pattern commands are set, etc.

Specifically, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process of step SH903 (the same applies to the various pattern setting processes of steps SH905, SH907, SH909, and SH910 described below), the mode memory area is first checked to determine the game mode. If "11," corresponding to "normal mode," is stored in the mode memory area, the first normal variable time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected as the first variable time determination table to be referenced when setting the first variable time. Furthermore, if "21," corresponding to "time-saving A mode," is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. If "31," corresponding to "time-saving B mode," is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected.

Then, the selected first variable time determination table is referenced, and the first variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area. The determined first variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable reserve area.

Furthermore, a reach pattern is determined based on the first fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern. For example, the first normal fluctuation time determination table for jackpots is referenced, and if the first fluctuation time is determined to be 22 seconds, a normal reach is set; if it is determined to be 30 or 35 seconds, a super reach is set; and if it is determined to be 40 seconds, a special reach is set.

Then, various information including the first variable display, the 15R jackpot, the determined reach pattern, game mode information, and the variable time are set in the variable pattern command. Furthermore, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process, the special chart 1 jackpot variable flag, which indicates that the first variable display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed, is set to ON.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reach pattern (either normal reach, super reach, or special reach) of the effect display device 42 is determined on the main control device 261 side, but in order to reduce the burden on the main control device 261, the main control device 261 may not determine the reach pattern, and the variation pattern command may be configured to include information on whether it is the first variation display or the second variation display, information indicating the variation pattern (information that allows one to determine whether it is a 15R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, a reach that misses before and after, a reach that misses other than before and after, or a complete miss), information indicating the variation time, etc., and the reach pattern of the effect display device 42 may be determined on the sub-control device 262 side.

After step SH903, in step SH911, the special symbol 1 display in progress flag, which indicates that the first variable display is in progress on the first special symbol display device 43A, is set to ON, and in step SH912, a value corresponding to the first variable time, which is a specific period, is set for the special symbol 1 display timer, which measures the remaining time of the first variable display. Thereafter, if the jackpot expected flag is set to ON, the jackpot expected flag is set to OFF in step SH913, and this processing is terminated.

If step SH901 returns a negative result, step SH905 performs a 4R jackpot pattern setting process. Here, the variation pattern table corresponding to the 4R jackpot is referenced to determine the variation patterns (variation display time, stop mode, presentation pattern, etc.) of the first special symbol display device 43A and the presentation display device 42, and variation pattern commands are set, etc. Furthermore, the 4R jackpot pattern setting process sets the special symbol 1 jackpot variation flag to ON, indicating that the first variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed.

After step SH905, in step SH911, the special chart 1 display flag is set to ON, and in step SH912, a value corresponding to the first variable time is set for the special chart 1 display timer. If the jackpot expected flag is then set to ON, in step SH913, the jackpot expected flag is turned OFF, and this processing ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step SH900, step SH906 takes into consideration the execution area of the special variable pending area and determines whether the front and rear flag (see reach judgment process in Figure 2-17) is on. If a positive judgment is made in step SH906, that is, if the "front and rear miss reach" is present, then step SH907 performs the front and rear reach pattern setting process (setting of variable pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH911, SH912, and SH913 are carried out, before terminating this process.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step SH906, step SH908 takes into consideration the execution area of the special variable pending area and determines whether the non-front and rear flag is on. If a positive judgment is made in step SH908, that is, if the "non-front and rear miss reach" is true, step SH909 performs non-front and rear reach pattern setting processing (setting of variable pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH911, SH912, and SH913 are carried out, and this processing ends.

Also, if the result of step SH908 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "complete miss," then step SH910 performs the miss fluctuation pattern setting process (setting the fluctuation pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH911, SH912, and SH913 are carried out, and this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-20, if a positive judgment is made in step SH804, i.e., if the first variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SH812, where the decrement process for the special chart 1 display timer is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special chart 1 display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 6 seconds (6000 msec), the special chart 1 display timer is set to "1500", and is decremented by 1 every 4 msec by the update function.

Next, the process proceeds to step SH813, where the value of the special chart 1 display timer after the subtraction is used to determine whether the specified change time has elapsed. At this time, if the specified change time has elapsed, that is, if the value of the special chart 1 display timer, which is the update information, becomes the specific value "0," step SH813 is judged to be positive.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH813, a switch display setting is made in step SH818 to continue the switch display (variable display) of the first special pattern display device 43A. Based on the settings of the switch display setting, a control signal to switch display is output to the first special pattern display device 43A in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This enables the switch display (variable display) of the first special pattern display device 43A to be performed at the execution timing of the first special display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SH818, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH813, the special symbol 1 display flag is turned off in step SH814, and the special symbol 1 stop display setting is made in step SH815 to display a stop on the first special symbol display device 43A. Based on the settings of this special symbol 1 stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop is output to the first special symbol display device 43A in the external output processing of the next normal processing. In other words, the first special symbol display device 43A will display a stop corresponding to each jackpot type, miss, etc. set in the first variable display setting processing.

Furthermore, after step SH815, in step SH816, a special symbol 1 stop command is set in the sub-control device 262 to cause the effect display device 42 to display a stop. This ensures that the stop timing of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 is synchronized. However, because the stop mode of the effect display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, there is no need to add information regarding the stop mode of the effect display device 42 again. Also, to reiterate, the stop display by the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B is the primary display, and the display of the decorative pattern by the effect display device 42 is merely auxiliary (for performance purposes).

Next, in step SH817, the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process is performed to set the initial winning status and switch game modes, and then this process ends.

Here, the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process in step SH817 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-22.

First, in step SH1001, the execution area of the special variable pending area is referenced to determine whether the special chart 1 jackpot variable flag is set to on.

If the result of step SH1001 is affirmative, the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SH1002, and the jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot state is in progress (the special chart 1 jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred in the first fluctuation display stored in the first special fluctuation pending area) is turned on in step SH1003.

Furthermore, in step SH1004, the round number counter is set to a value corresponding to the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area ("15" corresponding to a 15R jackpot, or "4" corresponding to a 4R jackpot). The round number counter is used to determine the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32A is opened).

In the following step SH1005, a "1" is set in the winning status memory area. Furthermore, in step SH1006, a predetermined value (here, a value of "2000" corresponding to an 8-second opening period) is set in the special variable timer. The special variable timer is used to measure the control times for various controls during the jackpot state (such as the opening and closing control of variable winning device 32A).

Next, in step SH1007, the winning counter is set to "8," which indicates the maximum number of winning balls per round in a jackpot.

The winning counter counts the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32A. During the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 2-12(a)), the value of the winning counter is determined by detecting information from the large winning slot count switch 222 to determine whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32A, and is decremented by one if it is determined that a ball has entered the variable winning device 32A.

Then, in step SH1008, an opening command is set to notify the sub-controller 262 that the jackpot state has begun. The opening command includes information such as the type of win, allowing the sub-controller 262 to grasp the total number of rounds in the win state, etc. (The same applies to the opening commands set in the various processes below.)

In the following step SH1009, the value of the normal mode duration counter (ceiling counter), which is the update information, is reset to the specific value of "0." The normal mode duration counter is a counting means for measuring the duration of "normal mode" (up to 500 variable displays) in which a jackpot state does not occur, and as will be described later, is incremented by 1 by the update function each time a variable display is executed in "normal mode." In step SH1009, upon the occurrence of a jackpot, the value of the normal mode duration counter that has been incremented up to that point is reset to the specific value of "0."

In the following step SH1010, the time-saving B mode activation flag (ceiling activation flag) is turned off. Then, this process ends. The time-saving B mode activation flag is determination information used to determine whether or not "time-saving B mode" has already been activated, and is set on when "time-saving B mode" is activated. In step SH1010, when a jackpot state occurs, the time-saving B mode activation flag that was set on is turned off.

If the answer is negative in step SH1001, then in step SH1013, the variable interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable interval (e.g., 1 second).

When the decorative pattern variable display is executed on the effect display device 42, the decorative pattern variable display is basically displayed statically at the same time as the special pattern variable display device 43A, 43B displays the special pattern variable display statically, and the decorative pattern displayed as a fixed fixed display on the effect display device 42 continues to be displayed statically until the variable interval period ends (until the next variable display starts on the special pattern display device 43A, 43B). Then, when the variable interval period ends and a new variable display is reserved and stored, the special pattern variable display on the special pattern display device 43A, 43B and the decorative pattern variable display on the effect display device 42 start simultaneously. On the other hand, if a new variable display is not reserved and stored even after the variable interval period ends (the next variable display does not start on the special pattern display device 43A, 43B), the decorative pattern displayed as a fixed fixed display continues to be displayed statically on the effect display device 42 for a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds), and then a demonstration effect display (demo effect display) described below is executed.

After step SH1013, in step SH1014, it is determined whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the "Time-saving A mode" is in effect.

If step SH1014 returns a positive answer, step SH1015 subtracts 1 from the value of first fluctuation count counter A. First fluctuation count counter A is used to measure the duration of "time-saving A mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until the upper limit is reached).

In this embodiment, after all types of jackpots have ended, a "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 or 10 variable play times is granted, and therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the first variable play counter A is set to "100" or "10."

In the following step SH1016, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A, which is the update information, is the specific value "0." If the result of step SH1016 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SH1016 is positive, the mode memory area is set to "11," indicating "normal mode," in step SH1017. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches the specific value "100" or "10," the "time-saving A mode," which is the specified game state, ends and the game transitions to "normal mode."

After step SH1017, in step SH1018, a time-saving A mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving A mode"). Then, this process ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH1014, step SH1019 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "Time-saving B mode."

If a positive judgment is made in step SH1019, the value of second fluctuation count counter B is decremented by 1 in step SH1020. Second fluctuation count counter B is used to measure the duration of "time-saving B mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until the upper limit is reached).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the "Time-saving B mode" is granted for a maximum of 200 variable play times, so when the "Time-saving B mode" is activated, the second variable play counter B is initially set to "200."

In the following step SH1021, it is determined whether the value of the second variation counter B, which is the update information, is the specific value "0." If the result of step SH1021 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SH1021 is positive, the mode memory area is set to "11," indicating "normal mode," in step SH1022. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches the specific value of "200 times," the "time-saving B mode," which is the predetermined game state, ends and the game transitions to "normal mode."

After step SH1022, in step SH1023, a time-saving B mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving B mode"), and then this processing ends.

If the answer in step SH1019 is negative, then in step SH1024, it is determined whether "11" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "normal mode." If the answer in step SH1024 is negative, then the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1024 returns a positive answer, step SH1025 increments the value of the normal mode duration counter by 1. Then, step SH1026 determines whether the value of the normal mode duration counter has reached its ceiling value (upper limit).

In this embodiment, the ceiling value is set to 500 times for the variable display, so here we determine whether the value of the normal mode continuation counter is 500 or greater. In other words, we determine whether normal mode has continued for 500 variable display cycles without a jackpot occurring.

If the result of step SH1026 is negative, i.e., if the value of the normal mode continuation counter has not reached the ceiling value (if the number of variable displays is less than 500), this process ends.

If the result of step SH1026 is affirmative, i.e., if the value of the normal mode continuation counter has reached its ceiling value (if the variable display has reached 500 times), then step SH1027 determines whether the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to off.

If the result of step SH1027 is negative, i.e., if "time-saving B mode" has already been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to on, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1027 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the "time-saving B mode" has not yet been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF, step SH1028 sets "31" in the mode storage area, indicating that the mode is the "time-saving B mode." In other words, setting processing is executed to activate the "time-saving B mode."

In the following step SH1029, the upper limit number of times "200" is set for the second fluctuation number counter B, and in step SH1030, a time-saving B mode start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "time-saving B mode," and in step SH1031, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned on. This process then terminates.

Next, the second special display control process (step SH205) of the normal process (see Figure 2-11) will be explained with reference to Figure 2-23.

First, in step SH1600, it is determined whether the value of the variable interval timer, which is update information for measuring the remaining time of the variable interval (stop display confirmation period) set after the second variable display of the second special pattern display device 43B, is the specific value "0".

If step SH1600 returns a negative result, i.e., if the time is within the variable interval period, step SH1619 uses the update function to subtract the value from the variable interval timer, and then the process ends. For example, if the variable interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and the variable interval timer is set to 249 (or 250 if step SH1619 is performed before step SH1600), the variable interval timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec in this process, and becomes 0 after 1 second.

On the other hand, if step SH1600 returns a positive result, i.e., if the interval is not a variable interval, step SH1601 determines whether the value in the win status storage area is "0," i.e., whether the state is other than a jackpot state.

If step SH1601 returns a negative result, i.e., if the jackpot state is in progress, this processing is terminated. As such, in this embodiment, the second variable display is not executed when the jackpot state is in progress. As described above, during the jackpot state (from the start of the opening period to the end of the ending period), the first special pattern display device 43A or the second special pattern display device 43B maintains the specific stop state (confirmed stop display state) displayed as a confirmed stop in a specific manner corresponding to the jackpot by a predetermined specific stop function.

On the other hand, if step SH1601 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH1603, where it is determined whether the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is being performed on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to on.

If step SH1603 returns a negative judgment, meaning the game is not in a jackpot state and is not currently displaying the second variable display, the program proceeds to step SH1604, where it determines whether the second pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, is greater than 0. This processing constitutes the judgment unit in this embodiment. If step SH1604 returns a negative judgment, the program simply ends this processing.

On the other hand, if step SH1604 returns a positive answer, step SH1605 subtracts 1 from the second pending counter Nb. The following step SH1606 executes a process to shift the data stored in the second special variable pending area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the second special variable pending area sequentially toward the execution area, with the data in each area shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SH1606, in step SH1607, a subtraction display process is performed on the second hold display device 46B (second hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of one hold number in the second variable display. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right second hold lamps are flashing, the left second hold lamp is kept flashing while the right second hold lamp is turned on; if the left second hold lamp is flashing and the right second hold lamp is lit, both left and right second hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right second hold lamps are lit, the left second hold lamp is kept lit while the right second hold lamp is turned off; and if the left second hold lamp is lit and the right second hold lamp is turned off, both left and right second hold lamps are turned off. After step SH1607, in step SH1608, a second variable display setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

Here, details of the second variable display setting process in step SH1608 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-24.

First, in step SH1701, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is "7," which corresponds to a jackpot. In addition, in step SH1701, it may also be determined whether the second variable display, which corresponds to a jackpot, is being displayed by determining whether the jackpot expected flag for the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set to on. This processing constitutes the lottery section in this embodiment.

If step SH1701 returns a positive result, step SH1702 sets the special chart 2 jackpot fluctuation flag, which indicates that the second fluctuation display corresponding to a jackpot is being performed, to ON. The following step SH1703 determines whether the 15R jackpot flag is set to ON in the execution area of the special fluctuation pending area. If step SH1703 returns a positive result, step SH1704 performs 15R jackpot pattern setting processing.

If step SH1703 returns a negative result, step SH1705 determines whether the 8R jackpot flag is set to ON. If step SH1705 returns a positive result, step SH1706 performs 8R jackpot pattern setting processing, and if step SH1705 returns a negative result, step SH1707 performs 4R jackpot pattern setting processing.

As with the first variable display setting process described above, the various pattern setting process is a process for executing variable displays and effect displays corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area on the second special symbol display device 43B and effect display device 42. Here, the variable pattern tables corresponding to various wins are taken into consideration to determine the variable patterns (variable display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc. as output setting contents) of the second special symbol display device 43B and effect display device 42, and variable pattern commands are set, etc.

In other words, in each pattern setting process related to step SH1704, step SH1706, and step SH1707, if "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area as the second variable time determination table referenced when setting the second variable time, the second normal variable time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. Also, if "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. If "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected.

Then, the selected second variable time determination table is referenced, and the second variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area. The determined second variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable reserve area.

Then, various information including the fact that it is the second variable display, jackpot type information, game mode information, and variable time are set in the variable pattern command.

In this embodiment, the effect display device 42 is configured not to perform reach effects or the like corresponding to the second variable display. However, as described above, the value of the variable selection counter CH3 is stored in each holding area of the second special variable holding area in accordance with the winning history in the second start winning section 33WB. Therefore, the effect display device 42 may be configured to perform reach effects or the like corresponding to the second variable display, just as in the case corresponding to the first variable display. For example, the player may be configured to decide whether or not to perform reach effects or the like.

After step SH1704, step SH1706, or step SH1707, in step SH1710, the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is in progress on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to ON, and in step SH1711, a value corresponding to the second variable time, which is a specific period, is set to the special symbol 2 display timer, which measures the remaining time of the second variable display. Thereafter, if the jackpot expected flag is set to ON, the jackpot expected flag is set to OFF in step SH1712, and then this processing is terminated.

Also, if the result of step SH1701 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "miss," then step SH1712 performs the miss fluctuation pattern setting process (setting the fluctuation pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH1710, SH1711, and SH1712 are carried out, after which the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-23, if a positive judgment is made in step SH1603, i.e., if the second variable display is in progress, proceed to step SH1609 and perform the decrement process on the special chart 2 display timer.

Next, the process proceeds to step SH1610, where the value of the special chart 2 display timer after the subtraction is used to determine whether the specified change time has elapsed. At this time, if the specified change time has elapsed, that is, if the value of the special chart 2 display timer, which is the update information, becomes the specific value "0", then step SH1610 is judged as positive.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH1610, a switch display setting is made in step SH1615 to continue the switch display (second variable display) of the second special pattern display device 43B. Based on the settings of the switch display setting, a control signal to perform a switch display is output to the second special pattern display device 43B in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This realizes the switch display (variable display) of the second special pattern display device 43B at the execution timing of the second special display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SH1615, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH1610, the special symbol 2 display flag is turned off in step SH1611, and the special symbol 2 stop display setting is made in step SH1612 to display a stop on the second special symbol display device 43B. Based on the settings of this special symbol 2 stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop is output to the second special symbol display device 43B in the external output processing of the next normal processing. In other words, the second special symbol display device 43B will display a stop corresponding to the various jackpots, losses, etc. set in the second variable display setting processing.

Furthermore, after step SH1612, in step SH1613, a special symbol 2 stop command is set to the sub-control device 262, which causes the effect display device 42 to display a stopped image. This ensures that the stop timing of the second special symbol display device 43B and the effect display device 42 is synchronized.

Next, in step SH1614, the special chart 2 discrimination information setting process is performed to set the initial winning status and switch game modes, and then this process ends.

Here, the special chart 2 determination information setting process in step SH1614 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-25. First, in step SH1801, the execution area of the special variation pending area is referenced to determine whether the special chart 2 jackpot variation flag is set to on.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH1801, the special chart 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SH1802, and the jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot state is in progress (the special chart 2 jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred in the second fluctuation display stored in the second special fluctuation pending area) is turned on in step SH1803.

Furthermore, in step SH1804, the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area are referenced, and a value corresponding to the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set in the round number counter.

For example, if the 15R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter is set to "15". If the 8R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter is set to "8". If the 4R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter is set to "4".

In the following step SH1805, a "1" is set in the win status memory area. Furthermore, in step SH1806, a predetermined value (here, a value of "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds) is set in the special variable timer. Next, in step SH1807, the winning counter is set to "8," indicating the maximum number of winning balls per round, which is eight.

Then, in step SH1808, an opening command is set to notify the sub-controller 262 that the jackpot state has begun.

In the following step SH1809, in response to the occurrence of a jackpot state, the value of the normal mode continuation counter that has been incremented up to that point is reset to a specific value of "0," and in step SH1810, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned off. Then, this process ends.

If the answer is negative in step SH1801, then in step SH1813, the variable interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable interval (for example, 1 second).

After step SH1813, in step SH1814, it is determined whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the "Time-saving A mode" is in effect.

If the answer is affirmative in step SH1814, the value of the first fluctuation count counter A is decremented by 1 in step SH1815.

In the following step SH1816, it is determined whether the value of the first fluctuation count counter A, which is the update information, is the specific value "0". If the result of step SH1816 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SH1816 is positive, the mode memory area is set to "11", indicating "normal mode", in step SH1817. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second fluctuation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches the specific value "100" or "10", the "time-saving A mode" ends and the mode transitions to "normal mode".

After step SH1817, in step SH1818, a time-saving A mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving A mode"). Then, this processing ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH1814, step SH1819 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "Time-saving B mode."

If the answer is affirmative in step SH1819, the value of the second fluctuation count counter B is decremented by 1 in step SH1820.

In the following step SH1821, it is determined whether the value of the second variation counter B, which is the update information, is the specific value "0". If the result of step SH1821 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SH1821 is positive, the mode memory area is set to "11", indicating "normal mode", in step SH1822. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches the specific value of "200 times", the "time-saving B mode" ends and the system transitions to "normal mode".

After step SH1822, in step SH1823, a time-saving B mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving B mode"), and then this processing ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH1819, step SH1824 determines whether "11" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "normal mode." If a negative determination is made in step SH1824, the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1824 returns a positive answer, step SH1825 increments the value of the normal mode duration counter by 1. Then, step SH1826 determines whether the value of the normal mode duration counter has reached its ceiling value (upper limit).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the ceiling value is set to 500 times for the number of times the variable display is executed, so here, it is determined whether the value of the normal mode continuation counter is 500 or more. In other words, it is determined whether normal mode has continued for 500 times of variable display without a jackpot state occurring.

If the result of step SH1826 is negative, i.e., if the value of the normal mode continuation counter has not reached the ceiling value (if the number of variable displays is less than 500), this process ends.

If step SH1826 returns a positive result, i.e., the value of the normal mode continuation counter has reached its ceiling value (500 variable display times), step SH1827 determines whether the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF.

If the result of step SH1827 is negative, i.e., if "time-saving B mode" has already been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to on, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1827 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the "time-saving B mode" has not yet been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF, step SH1828 sets "31" in the mode storage area, indicating that the mode is the "time-saving B mode." In other words, setting processing is executed to activate the "time-saving B mode."

In the following step SH1829, the upper limit number of times "200" is set for the second fluctuation number counter B, and in step SH1830, a time-saving B mode start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "time-saving B mode," and in step SH1831, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned on. This processing then terminates.

Next, the variable winning device control process of step SH207 for opening and closing the variable winning device 32A will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 2-26. The special game execution unit in this embodiment is configured with the function of executing this variable winning device control process.

First, in step SH1201, it is determined whether the value set in the hit status memory area is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the state is other than a hit state. If the determination in step SH1201 is affirmative, i.e., if the state is not a hit state, this process ends. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "1" is set in the hit status memory area in the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process or special chart 2 discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, if step SH1201 returns a negative result, meaning the game is currently in a winning state (the winning status memory area is set to one of "1" to "3"), the process moves to step SH1202, where the value of the special variable timer is decremented by 1 using the update function. In the following step SH1203, it is determined whether the value of the special variable timer, which is the update information, is the specific value "0". If step SH1203 returns a positive result, it is determined in step SH1204 whether "1" is set in the winning status memory area.

If step SH1204 returns a positive result, step SH1205 sets the win status memory area to "2." In the following step SH1206, the special variable timer is set to a value corresponding to the opening time of variable winning device 32A. In this embodiment, the value set is "7500," which corresponds to an opening time of 30 seconds.

After step SH1206, step SH1207 performs an opening process to open the variable winning device 32A, and step SH1208 sets a round command to inform the sub-control device 262 that a round is about to begin. Then, this process ends.

Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step SH1204, then in step SH1210 it is determined whether or not "3" is set in the win status memory area. As will be described in more detail below, when all rounds in the jackpot state end and the ending period begins, "3" is set in the win status memory area. If a negative determination is made in step SH1210, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, then in step SH1212 the value of the round number counter, which is update information, is decremented by 1 using the update function. In the following step SH1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is the specific value "0".

If step SH1213 returns a negative result, meaning that there are still rounds to be played (the hit status memory area is set to "2"), the process proceeds to step SH1215, where the hit status memory area is set to "1". Then, in step SH1216, the special variable timer is set to a value of "250", which corresponds to the interval time (1 second).

In the following step SH1217, the winning counter is set to "8". Furthermore, in step SH1218, a closing process is performed to close the variable winning device 32A, and in step SH1219, an interval command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that an interval has begun. Then, this process ends.

Furthermore, if step SH1203 returns a negative judgment, i.e., if there is still time remaining for the variable winning device 32A to remain open or closed (open time or closed time), step SH1225 determines whether the value of the winning counter, which is update information corresponding to the variable winning device 32A in the current jackpot state, is the specific value of "0." As mentioned above, at the start of the jackpot state or the start of an interval, the winning counter is set to an upper limit on the number of winnings per round (a specific value, the specified number of "8"). Then, each time a game ball enters the variable winning device 32A, the update function subtracts 1 from the winning counter.

If step SH1225 returns a negative result, the process ends. On the other hand, if step SH1225 returns a positive result, i.e., if the trigger for ending the round arrives before the set period for the round has elapsed, the process proceeds to step SH1212. As a result, if the maximum number of game balls (8 balls) enters variable winning device 32A during a single round, the round will end promptly at that point, even if the maximum opening period (e.g., 30 seconds) has not yet elapsed.

Also, if step SH1213 returns a positive result, i.e., if all rounds in the jackpot state have been played, the process proceeds to step SH1227, where the win status memory area is set to "3." Then, in step SH1228, the special variable timer is set to the value "2500," which corresponds to the ending time (10 seconds).

After step SH1228, in step SH1229, the prize counter is set to "7." When the process of setting the ending from step SH1227 onward is performed following a positive determination in step SH1225, the prize counter value is set to the specific value "0." If the prize counter value is left at "0" at the start of the ending period, a positive determination will be made in step SH1225 abruptly during the variable prize device control process 4 msec later, preventing the ending period from being completed. For this reason, a temporary value other than "0" ("7" in this example) is entered in the prize counter in step SH1229 to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may also be completed using other methods.

After step SH1229, step SH1230 performs a closing process to close the variable winning device 32A, and then step SH1231 sets an ending command to the sub-control device 262 to inform it that the ending has begun. Then, this process ends.

Also, if step SH1210 returns a positive result, i.e., the ending period has ended and it is time to end the jackpot state, step SH1232 performs the end setting process, and then this process ends.

The termination setting process will now be explained with reference to Figure 2-27. First, in step SH1401, it is determined whether the special chart jackpot flag (either the special chart 1 jackpot flag or the special chart 2 jackpot flag) is set to on. If the determination in step SH1401 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH1401 returns a positive result, step SH1402 stores the value "21" corresponding to "Time-saving A Mode" in the mode storage area. This causes the game to transition to "Time-saving A Mode" after the jackpot state ends.

In the following step SH1403, a time-saving A mode start command is set to the sub-control device 262 to start "time-saving A mode" (transition to "rush stage effect" or "battle stage effect").

In the following step SH1404, the first variable count counter A is set to the upper limit of "100" or "100" for the "Time-saving A mode" corresponding to the jackpot type, and the process proceeds to step SH1405.

In step SH1405, the jackpot flag (special chart 1 jackpot flag or special chart 2 jackpot flag) that is set to ON is turned OFF.

In the following step SH1406, the value "0" is set in the win status memory area, indicating that the state is not a jackpot state. Furthermore, in step SH1407, a jackpot end command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that the jackpot state is ending. Then, this process ends.

Next, the normal display control processing of step SH208 of the normal processing (see Figure 2-11) will be explained with reference to Figure 2-28.

First, in step SH2101, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern interval timer, which is update information used to measure the remaining time of the interval (normal pattern interval) set after the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41, is the specific value "0." If the determination in step SH2101 is negative, i.e., if it is a normal pattern interval, then in step SH2116 the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted using the update function, and then this processing ends. In other words, for example, if the normal pattern interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the normal pattern interval timer is set to "249" (or "250" if step SH2116 is configured to be performed before step SH2101), then in this processing the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if step SH2101 returns a positive result, i.e., if it is not the normal interval period, step SH2102 determines whether the support period flag, which indicates that the second start winning section 33WB (blade member 33WBb) is currently being controlled to open and close, is set to on. If step SH2102 returns a positive result, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2102, a judgment is made in step SH2103 as to whether the normal pattern display flag, which indicates whether a changing display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41, is on. Furthermore, if the normal pattern display flag is on, it is considered that a changing display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH2103, the process proceeds to step SH2104, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nd is greater than 0. If a negative judgment is made in step SH2104, i.e., if no variable displays are held on the normal pattern display device 41, the process terminates. Note that, for example, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2104, the normal pattern display device 41 may perform a standby display setting to derive a display mode corresponding to a standby state in which no variable displays are being displayed. In other words, after the fluctuations have stopped, the normal pattern display device 41 will maintain its stopped mode (in a mode indicating the results of the start-going ball support lottery) for the normal pattern interval period, but may be configured to switch to a display mode indicating a standby state when the normal pattern interval period ends.

On the other hand, if step SH2104 returns a positive answer, step SH2105 subtracts 1 from the normal hold counter Nd. The following step SH2106 executes a process to shift the data stored in the normal variable hold area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in hold areas 1 to 4 of the normal variable hold area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area shifted in the following order: hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Then, in step SH2107, a normal pattern variation setting process is executed to set and start the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41.

The normal symbol variation setting process will now be explained with reference to Figure 2-29. First, in step SH2301, the normal symbol display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol display device 41 is currently displaying a varying normal symbol, is set to ON. In the following step SH2302, the win status memory area is referenced to determine whether "0" is stored, i.e., whether the current state is other than a jackpot state. If step SH2302 returns a positive determination, i.e., if the current state is not a jackpot state, then in step SH2303, it is determined whether a value of "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current state is a high ball entry state (time-saving A mode or time-saving B mode).

If step SH2303 returns a positive result, step SH2304 sets the update information, the normal symbol display timer, to "100" to set the normal symbol variable display time to a specific value of 0.4 seconds. The normal symbol display timer is used to measure the variable display time (remaining time) performed by the normal symbol display device 41.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2302 or step SH2303, that is, if a jackpot state or a high ball entry state is not reached, then in step SH2307, the normal symbol display timer is set to "1500" to set the normal symbol variable display time to a specific value of 6 seconds.

Then, in step SH2305, it is determined whether the normal symbol random number counter CH4 in the execution area of the normal variable pending area is equal to the winning value (0, 1 in the case of a low ball entry state, or 0-27 in the case of a high ball entry state). If the determination in step SH2305 is negative, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH2305 returns a positive result, i.e., if the start-goal-entry support lottery to determine whether or not the second start-goal-entry section 33WB will be opened is won, then in step SH2306, the start-goal-entry support flag, indicating that the start-goal-entry support lottery has been won, is set to ON. After step SH2306, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-28, after step SH2107, in step SH2108, a subtraction display process is performed on the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the reduction of the hold number in the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are flashing, the left normal hold lamp is kept flashing while the right normal hold lamp is lit; if the left normal hold lamp is flashing and the right normal hold lamp is lit, both left and right normal hold lamps are lit; if both left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp is kept lit while the right normal hold lamp is turned off; and if the left normal hold lamp is lit and the right normal hold lamp is turned off, both left and right normal hold lamps are turned off. After step SH2108, this process ends.

Also, if a positive judgment is made in step SH2103, i.e., if the normal pattern display device 41 is displaying a changing pattern, the process proceeds to step SH2109, where the update function is used to perform a process to decrement the normal pattern display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal pattern display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the program proceeds to step SH2110, where it determines whether the count value of the normal symbol display timer is the specific value "0," i.e., whether the variable time has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step SH2110, the normal symbol display flag is turned off in step SH2111, and a normal symbol stop display setting is made in step SH2112 to display a stop on the normal symbol display device 41. In other words, if the start-goal-entry support lottery is won (the goal-entry support flag is set on), both of the pair of normal symbol lamps on the left and right of the normal symbol display device 41 are lit, and if the result is a loss, only the left normal symbol lamp is lit.

Next, proceed to step SH2113 and perform the general map discrimination information setting process. The general map discrimination information setting process is explained below with reference to Figure 2-30.

First, in step SH2401, it is determined whether the above-mentioned goal-winning support flag is set to ON. If the result of step SH2401 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SH2401 is YES, in step SH2402, the normal variable flag is set to ON to determine whether the second start-up winning section 33WB is in the open state.

The following step SH2403 determines whether "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the system is in a high ball entry state (time-saving A mode or time-saving B mode). If a positive determination is made in step SH2403, then in step SH2404, the normal variable timer, which is the updated information, is set to "450" to set the opening time of the second start winning section 33WB to a specific value of 1.8 seconds. The normal variable timer is used to measure the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning section 33WB.

Furthermore, in step SH2405, the opening count counter, which is the updated information, is set to a specific value of "2" to open the second start winning section 33WB twice. The opening count counter counts the number of times (remaining times) that the second start winning section 33WB is to be opened.

On the other hand, if step SH2403 returns a negative result, i.e., if the mode is not "Time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)" or "Time-saving B mode (high ball entry state)," then in step SH2406, the normal variable timer is set to "50" to set the opening time of the second start winning section 33WB to a specific value of 0.2 seconds. In the following step SH2407, the opening count counter is set to "2" to open the second start winning section 33WB twice.

After step SH2405 or step SH2407, in step SH2408, the above-mentioned winning support flag is turned off, and in step SH2409, the above-mentioned support period flag is turned on. Furthermore, in step SH2410, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state, and then this processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-28, after step SH2113, in step SH2114, the normal interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the normal interval period (e.g., 1 second), and then this processing ends.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2110, a switching display setting is made in step SH2115 to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 (a switching display in which a pair of normal symbol lamps on the left and right are alternately lit). Furthermore, based on the settings of the switching display setting, a control signal to perform a switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This realizes the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 at the timing of the normal display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SH2115, this processing ends.

Next, the start-up prize section control processing of step SH209 of the normal processing (see Figure 2-11) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 2-31.

First, in step SH2201, it is determined whether the support period flag is on. If the determination in step SH2201 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SH2201 is positive, the value of the normal variable timer is decremented by 1 in step SH2202.

The next step, SH2203, determines whether the value of the normal variable timer is the specific value "0." If the determination in step SH2203 is negative, i.e., if the period in which the second start winning section 33WB remains open or closed, the start winning section control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH2203 returns a positive result, step SH2204 determines whether the normal variable flag is on. If step SH2204 returns a positive result, i.e., if the second start-up winning section 33WB is currently in the open state and the time has come to change it to the closed state, step SH2205 turns the normal variable flag off. In the following step SH2206, the value of the opening count counter, which is the update information, is decremented by 1 using the update function, and in step SH2207, the second start-up winning section 33WB is set to the closed state.

Then, in step SH2208, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter is the specific value "0." If the determination in step SH2208 is affirmative, in step SH2209, the support period flag is turned off, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH2208 returns a negative result, i.e., if there are remaining times among the multiple times the second start winning section 33WB has been opened, step SH2210 sets the normal variable timer to a value equivalent to the interval time (e.g., "250"), and then this process ends.

Furthermore, if step SH2204 returns a negative judgment, i.e., if the second start winning section 33WB is in an interval period between multiple openings (the second start winning section 33WB is in a closed state) and the timing to end the interval period has arrived, step SH2211 sets the normal variable flag to ON. Furthermore, step SH2212 determines whether "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area. If step SH2212 returns a positive judgment, step SH2213 sets the normal variable timer to a value of "450," which corresponds to an opening time of 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, if step SH2212 returns a negative judgment, step SH2214 sets the normal variable timer to a value of "50," which corresponds to an opening time of 0.2 seconds.

After step SH2213 or step SH2214, in step SH2215, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state. Then, this processing ends. Note that if the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state and a specified number of game balls (for example, four) enter the second start winning section 33WB, the second start winning section 33WB may be configured to immediately close.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, if a game ball passes through the through gate 34 during a special symbol variable play (either the first variable display or the second variable display), the opening control of the second start winning section 33WB (pair of blade members 33WBb) can be executed regardless of whether a special symbol variable play is being executed or not.

Next, we will explain the control executed by the CPU 511 in the counting management device 311. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the reception interrupt processing with reference to Figure 2-32(a), and then explain the main processing with reference to Figure 2-33.

Figure 2-32 (a) is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the counting management device 311. The reception interrupt process is executed as an interrupt when the counting management device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261. When the counting management device 311 confirms that the command sent from the main control device 261 has been received, other processes executed by the CPU 511 within the counting management device 311 are temporarily put on hold, and the reception interrupt process is executed.

When the receive interrupt process is executed, first in step SH3001, the command sent from the main control unit 261 is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513, and in step SH3002, the command receive flag is turned on to record that a command has been sent from the main control unit 261, and this receive interrupt process ends. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a specified storage area, and the storage pointer is updated so that the next received command can be stored in the next storage area.

In this embodiment, the reception process for a command sent from the main control unit 261 is performed by interrupt processing that is executed when the command is received. However, for example, in the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 2-32(b), it may be possible to check whether a command has been received before the command determination process (step SH3201) is performed, and if a command has been received, store the command in the command buffer in RAM 513 and turn on the command reception flag, or proceed to command determination processing if a command has not been received. In such a case, it is possible to check the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals to check whether a command has been received.

Next, the main processing of the counting management device 311 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-33. Figure 2-33 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the counting management device 311, which is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SH3101, initial setting processing is performed when power is turned on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SH3103, RAM access is permitted and in step SH3104 an external interrupt vector is set.

Then, in step SH3106, it is determined whether power outage information has been set in backup area 513a of RAM 513. If power outage information has been set in backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SH3107, and in the following step SH3108, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, i.e., the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether keywords written in a specified area of RAM 513 have been saved correctly.

If power outage information is not set in step SH3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step SH3108, the process proceeds to RAM 513 initialization processing from step SH3115 onwards.

In step SH3115, all areas of RAM 513 are cleared to 0, and in step SH3116, the initial values of RAM 513 are set. Then, in step SH3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SH3114 to enable interrupts.

On the other hand, if power outage information has been set in step SH3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SH3108, processing upon power recovery (processing upon recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, the stack pointer before the power outage is restored in step SH3109, the power outage information is cleared in step SH3110, and the award permission flag that allows the awarding of virtual prize balls is cleared in step SH3111. Also, in step SH3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SH3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SH3114, interrupts are permitted.

After interrupts are permitted in step SH3114, the process in step SH3122 determines whether power failure information has been set in backup area 513a. If power failure information has been set, it means that power has been cut off, and the process in steps SH3123 and subsequent steps is carried out as power failure processing in the event of a power failure. Power failure processing begins with prohibiting interrupt processing in step SH3123, followed by command judgment processing (described later) in the next step SH3124. Subsequently, in step SH3125, the contents of each register used by CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step SH3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in backup area 513a, in step SH3127 a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in backup area 513a, and in step SH3128 RAM access is prohibited, continuing the infinite loop until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, the checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in RAM 513.

Incidentally, the processing of step SH3122 checks for information about the occurrence of a power outage after the processing performed when the power is turned on is completed. Therefore, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513 is smaller than when each processing is in progress, and storage is easier. Furthermore, when returning to the state before the power was turned off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so restoration is easy, and the processing burden on the counting management device 311 can be reduced.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing of the counting management device 311 with reference to the flowchart in Figure 2-32 (b). This timer interrupt processing is initiated periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment).

The timer interrupt process first obtains a command from the main control unit 261 and performs a determination process for that command (step SH3201). This command determination process is explained below with reference to Figure 2-35.

Figure 2-35 is a flowchart showing the command determination process performed by the counting management device 311. In the command determination process (steps SH3124, SH3201), it is first determined in step SH3301 whether the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process described above (see Figure 2-32(a)).

If it is determined in step SH3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control unit 261, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step SH3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from RAM 513 in step SH3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SH3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SH3303, the processing of steps SH3302 to SH3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control of the counting management unit 311.

Steps SH3304 to SH3306 determine the type of command read from RAM 513. Step SH3304 determines whether the command sent from main control unit 261 is an initialization command, step SH3305 determines whether it is a return command, and step SH3306 determines whether it is a virtual prize ball command.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is an initialization command, step SH3307 determines whether the award permission flag is already on. If the award permission flag is off, this means that the main control unit 261 instructed RAM 513 to be initialized when the power was turned on, so step SH3308 clears the working area (area) other than the stack area of RAM 513 to 0, and step SH3309 sets the initial value of RAM 513. Then, step SH3311 turns on the award permission flag, setting permission to award virtual prize balls.

As described above, the main control unit 261 initializes RAM 503 after sending the initialization command, and the counting management device 311 initializes RAM 513 after receiving the initialization command. This means that RAM 503 and RAM 513 are initialized at approximately the same time. Therefore, even if the counting management device 311 receives a command sent from the main control unit 261 due to a difference in initialization timing, RAM 513 is initialized, preventing problems such as an inability to perform control corresponding to the received command. Furthermore, because the award permission flag is turned on after RAM 513 is initialized, the award permission for virtual prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the award permission flag is already on in step SH3307, the command determination process ends without clearing the working area of RAM 513 or initializing RAM 513. In other words, step SH3307 prohibits RAM 513 from being initialized while the award permission flag is set. Note that the initialization command is only sent if the RAM clear switch 323 is on when the power is turned on, so it is not received while the award permission flag is on. In such a case, it is possible that the counting management device 311 has recognized it as an initialization command due to noise or other factors. Therefore, if the working area of RAM 513 is cleared (step SH3308) and the initial value of RAM 513 is set (step SH3309) while the award permission flag is on, problems such as not awarding any remaining virtual prize balls could occur, resulting in losses to the player. However, by preventing RAM 513 from being initialized while the award permission flag is on, losses to the player can be prevented.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a return command (step SH3304: NO, step SH3305: YES), the main control unit 261 and counting management unit 311 will return to the state they were in before the power was cut off, and the award permission flag is turned on in step SH3311 to allow the awarding of virtual prize balls. In other words, if there is information that a power cut has occurred and the main control unit 261 and counting management unit 311 have returned to the state they were in before the power was cut off, the awarding of virtual prize balls will be permitted. When the award permission flag is turned on in the processing of step SH3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer has ended, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a virtual prize ball command (step SH3305: NO, step SH3306: YES), in step SH3310, the received number of virtual prize balls is added to the total number of virtual prize balls (virtual prize ball count temporary storage area) and stored. In step SH3311, the award permission flag is turned on to allow the awarding of virtual prize balls (adding the number of virtual prize balls to the number of balls held). At this time, the counting management unit 311 sequentially reads the virtual prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of virtual prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of virtual prize balls stored in the virtual prize ball count temporary storage area and stores the added value. Because virtual prize balls corresponding to the number of virtual prize balls are awarded based on the virtual prize ball command sent from the main control unit 261, the virtual prize ball command is an award instruction command that instructs the awarding of virtual prize balls. Furthermore, when a virtual prize ball command is received, award permission is immediately set, allowing virtual prize balls to be awarded quickly in response to a winning prize. When the grant permission flag is turned on in step SH3311, processing based on the command stored in the specified memory area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is neither an initialization command (step SH3304: NO), nor a return command (step SH3305: NO), nor a virtual prize ball command (step SH3306: NO), the command determination process ends without turning on the award permission flag.

Now, let's return to the flowchart in Figure 2-32(b). Once the command determination process is complete, in step SH3202, it is determined whether a usage permission signal (low level output of usage permission signal B5) indicating that the card unit 900 is in a state where it can execute lending control has been received via the card unit connection board 314.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH3202, in step SH3203, a usage permission signal (card unit usage permission signal) indicating that the card unit 900 is in a state where it can execute lending control is sent to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310.

After step SH3203, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH3202, lending setting processing is performed in step SH3206.

The lending setting process of step SH3206 will now be explained with reference to Figure 2-34. First, in step SH3501, it is determined whether the lending status flag is set (whether the value of the lending status flag is "1").

The loan status flag is a flag used to determine whether a series of loan controls is in progress. If it is set to "1", it means that loan control is in progress, and if it is set to "0", it means that loan control is not in progress.

If the result here is negative (the value of the lending status flag is "0"), lending control is not in progress, so in step SH3502, it is determined whether both the lending confirmation signal B1 and the lending request signal B2 from the card unit 900 are at a low level, i.e., whether the lending button 121 has been operated, the lending confirmation signal B1 has fallen, and then the lending request signal B2 has gone low (request signal). If the result here is negative, the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SH3502 is affirmative, step SH3511 switches the loan response signal P1 to low level to begin outputting a request acknowledgement signal, and step SH3512 performs a process of adding the number of loaned balls to the temporary loaned ball count storage area.

In the following step SH3513, the loan status flag is set to 1, and then this process ends.

Now, if it is determined in step SH3501 above that the lending status flag is set to "1", it is assumed that lending control is in progress and the process proceeds to step SH3515.

In step SH3515, it is determined whether a request acknowledgement signal is being output (the loan response signal P1 is being output at a low level). If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds to step SH3518.

On the other hand, if step SH3515 returns a positive result, step SH3516 determines whether the value in the temporary storage area for the number of loaned balls is 0. If the result here is a negative result, this process ends.

If step SH3516 returns a positive result, step SH3517 switches the lending response signal P1 to a high level, stops outputting the request acknowledgement signal, and outputs a lending completion signal. Step SH3517 also sets the instruction waiting flag (sets the value of the instruction waiting flag to "1").

The instruction waiting flag is a flag used to determine whether or not the device is waiting for the next low-level output (request signal) of the loan request signal B2. If it is set to "1", it means that the device is in a waiting state, and if it is set to "0", it means that the device is not in a waiting state.

In step SH3518, it is determined whether the instruction waiting flag is set (the value of the instruction waiting flag is "1"). If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds to step SH3523. If the determination here is positive, the process proceeds to step SH3519, where it is determined whether a low-level output (request signal) of the lending request signal B2 has been detected. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds to step SH3523.

On the other hand, if step SH3519 returns a positive judgment, step SH3520 switches the loan response signal P1 to a low level to begin outputting a request acknowledgement signal, step SH3521 adds the number of loaned balls to the loaned ball count temporary storage area, step SH3522 sets the value of the instruction waiting flag to 0, and the process proceeds to step SH3523.

In step SH3523, it is determined whether the lending confirmation signal B1 is a high-level output. If the determination here is negative, the process ends. If the determination is positive, the lending status flag is set to "0" in step SH3524, and the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-32(b), the ball count update process is performed in step SH3207. The function that executes this ball count update process constitutes the update function in this embodiment.

The held ball count update process in step SH3207 first determines whether the above-mentioned award permission flag was turned on in the above-mentioned command determination process. If the award permission flag is turned on, the total number of virtual prize balls temporarily stored in the virtual prize ball count temporary storage area is added to the held ball count storage area, and the value of the virtual prize ball count temporary storage area is cleared to "0". This makes the virtual prize balls won by the player through pinball play available to the player as held balls.

Next, the total number of virtual loaned balls temporarily stored in the virtual loaned ball count temporary storage area is added to the owned ball count storage area, and the value in the virtual loaned ball count temporary storage area is cleared to "0." This makes the virtual loaned balls loaned via the card unit 900 available to the player as owned balls.

Next, when the launched ball detection switch 94 located at the launch position of the launching device 60 detects a game ball to be launched, "1" is subtracted from the number of balls held stored in the number of balls held storage area.

In addition, when a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch 93 provided in the foul ball passage 72, "1" is added to the number of balls held stored in the ball number storage area.

Then, the newly updated value of the number of balls held (ball number information) stored in the ball number storage area is output to the sub-control device 262 (ball number storage area of RAM 553) and the card unit operation unit 120 (ball held display unit 123b of the power display unit 123).

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-32(b), in step SH3208, the status recovery switch 321 is checked, and if it is determined that it has been pressed, status recovery processing is executed. As a result, for example, if a specific error state occurs and the status recovery switch 321 is pressed, a recovery to a normal state is attempted. After that, this timer interrupt processing is terminated.

For convenience, we will now explain each control process executed by the card unit 900. First, we will explain the main process that is started when the card unit 900 is powered on, with reference to Figure 2-45(a).

First, in step SH6001, initial setting processing is performed, such as initializing the values of RAM 912 and setting initial values. Once the initial setting processing is complete, in the following step SH6002, the initial setting completion signal B0 is switched from high level to low level. The low level output of this initial setting completion signal B0 enables the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262, counting management device 311, etc.) to recognize that the initial setting of the card unit 900 has been completed.

Next, the normal processing executed by the card unit 900 will be described with reference to Figure 2-45(b). Step SH6101 is the processing performed when setting the number of virtual loaned balls (number of balls awarded) per unit of time. In this processing, the set loaned number set by the hall staff operating the loaned number setting operation unit 921 of the setting operation unit 920 is set in the set loaned number storage area of RAM 912 and output to the counting management device 311. However, if the set loaned number is not changed using the loaned number setting operation unit 921, this processing is not performed and the process moves directly to the next step.

Step SH6102 is the process performed when setting the loan amount. In this process, the value set by the hall staff member operating the amount setting operation unit 922 is set in the loan amount storage area of RAM 912. However, if the loan amount has not been changed using the amount setting operation unit 922, this process is not performed and the process proceeds directly to the next step.

The usage permission process of step SH6103 is performed when a membership card is inserted into the card insertion slot 903. In this process, when a membership card is inserted into the card insertion slot 903, the card insertion lamp 907 is turned on and the usage permission signal B5 is switched from high to low. The low level output of this usage permission signal B5 enables the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262, counting management device 311) to recognize that the card unit 900 is in a state where it can execute lending control.

The loan instruction process of step SH6104 is executed when there is a balance (when there is savings data remaining on the membership card inserted into the card insertion slot 903, or when there is cash remaining in the bill insertion slot 902) and the player presses the loan button 121. Therefore, if there is no balance or the loan button 121 is not pressed, the process will proceed to the next step without performing this process. Details of the loan instruction process will be described later.

The point display process of step SH6105 is a process of displaying the balance (savings data) stored on the membership card inserted into the card insertion slot 903 (card reader/writer 917) or the balance (remaining amount) of cash inserted into the bill insertion slot 902 on the point display unit 123 (balance display unit 123a) of the card unit operation unit 120.

In this process, the balance (savings data) of the membership card read by the card reader/writer 917, or the balance (remaining amount) of cash inserted into the bill insertion slot 902, is displayed by outputting a points display signal B3 (balance display signal B3a) to the points display unit 123 (balance display unit 123a) of the card unit operation unit 120.

In this embodiment, when both the balance (savings data) on the membership card and the balance (remaining amount) of cash inserted into the bill insertion slot 902 exist (when the balance is not "0"), the information on the balance (savings data) on the membership card takes priority and is output as the frequency display signal B3 (balance display signal B3a). However, it is also possible to configure the information on the balance (remaining amount) of cash inserted into the bill insertion slot 902 to take priority and be output as the frequency display signal B3 (balance display signal B3a).

Of course, if either the balance (savings data) on the membership card or the balance (remaining amount) of cash inserted into the bill insertion slot 902 does not exist (one of the balances is "0"), the balance information for the other balance that does exist (the balance is not "0") will be output as the frequency display signal B3 (balance display signal B3a).

The point display signal B3 (balance display signal B3a) is output to the point display unit 123 (balance display unit 123a) and at the same time to the sub-controller 262. The sub-controller 262 then stores the balance (savings data) of the membership card or the balance (remaining amount) of cash inserted into the bill insertion slot 902 in a balance storage area provided in RAM 553.

However, if no membership card is inserted into the card insertion slot 903, the point display process is not performed and the process moves directly to the next step. Furthermore, if no membership card is inserted, the balance display unit 123a displays "--", indicating that the card is waiting to be inserted. Furthermore, if the balance (savings data) on the membership card is the specific value "0", or if the balance (remaining balance) of the amount inserted into the bill insertion slot 902 is the specific value "0", the balance display unit 123a displays "00".

The settlement and return process of step SH6106 is a settlement process that stores the number of balls held by the player (the number displayed on the ball holding display section 123b) on the membership card, and also a process that ejects the membership card from the card insertion slot 903 and returns it to the player.

Note that if a membership card is not inserted into the card insertion slot 903 or if the settlement/return button 122 is not pressed, this process ends without performing the settlement/return process of step SH6106.

Specifically, in the settlement and return process of step SH6106, when the settlement and return button 122 on the card unit operation unit 120 is pressed while the membership card is inserted into the card insertion slot 903, a return operation signal Q2 is output from the card unit operation unit 120 to the card unit 900.

When the card unit 900 receives the return operation signal Q2, it outputs a settlement signal to the counting management device 311. The counting management device 311 then outputs information (held ball number information) corresponding to the number of balls held at that time (the number of balls displayed on the held ball display section 123b of the point display section 123) stored in the held ball number storage area to the card unit 900, in order to notify the card unit 900 of the number of balls held at that time. The counting management device 311 then initializes the value of the held ball number storage area to the specific value "0".

The card unit 900, which has input the ball count information, converts this ball count information into points at a predetermined exchange rate and adds these converted points to the savings data on the membership card. The card unit then ejects the membership card with the added savings data stored in it from the card insertion slot 903, and turns off the card insertion lamp 907.

The output process of step SH6107 is a process in which, when the balance on the membership card is updated, a point signal indicating the updated point number is output to the hall computer. However, if there is no output information, this process is not performed and the process returns to step SH6101, and the above series of processes are then repeated.

The lending instruction process of step SH6104 will now be explained in detail with reference to Figure 2-46. The lending instruction process is executed when the lending button 121 is pressed by the player, as described above.

First, in step SH6201, the loan amount stored in the loan amount storage area of RAM912 and the balance (savings data) stored on the membership card or the balance (remaining amount) of the amount inserted into the bill insertion slot 902 are referenced to determine the number of times the loan request signal B2 has been output at a low level, and this is set as the loan request setting value in the request value storage area of RAM912. In this embodiment, for example, if there is 500 yen or more remaining on the membership card or inserted amount, the number of outputs is set to "5."

Next, in step SH6202, the low-level output of the lending confirmation signal B1 and lending request signal B2 begins. More specifically, after the low-level output of the lending confirmation signal B1 begins and a predetermined delay time (e.g., 30 msec to 50 msec) has elapsed, the low-level output of the lending request signal B2 begins.

In step SH6203, it is determined whether a request acknowledgement signal (the falling edge of the loan response signal P1) has been received from the counting management device 311. If the determination is negative, in step SH6204 it is determined whether a predetermined time (e.g., 10 msec to 10 s) has elapsed.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH6204, the process returns to step SH6203. Therefore, if no request acknowledgement signal is input, this series of processes will be repeated until the predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH6204, that is, if no request acknowledgement signal is input even after the predetermined time has elapsed, it is assumed that some kind of abnormality has occurred, and the process proceeds to step SH6209.

Now, if a request acknowledgement signal is input and step SH6203 returns a positive result, it means that the loan request has been made successfully, and in step SH6205, the update function performs various update processes, such as subtracting the balance on the membership card or the remaining amount deposited.

Then, in step SH6206, the loan request signal B2 is switched to a high-level output, instructing the counting management device 311 to execute the loan, and incrementing the value of the loan request output counter by 1.

Next, in step SH6207, it is determined whether a lending completion signal (rising edge of lending response signal P1) has been input. If the determination here is negative, the processing of step SH6207 is repeated. In other words, this processing is repeated until a lending completion signal is input. However, although not shown in the figure for convenience, it is also determined here whether a predetermined time has passed, and if a lending completion signal has not been input after the predetermined time has passed, it is assumed that some kind of abnormality has occurred, and this processing is terminated (progressing to step SH6209).

On the other hand, if step SH6207 returns a positive result, i.e., if a lending completion signal has been input, the process proceeds to step SH6208.

In step SH6208, it is determined whether the value of the loan request output counter is the loan request set value (e.g., "5"). If the determination is negative, the process returns to step SH6202. In other words, the above series of processes is repeated until the value of the loan request output counter reaches the loan request set value.

If the value of the loan request output counter reaches the loan request set value and step SH6208 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH6209.

In step SH6209, which follows from steps SH6204 and SH6208, the low-level output of the lending confirmation signal B1 is stopped and switched to a high-level output, and the specified instruction termination process is executed, terminating this process.

Next, the communication that takes place between the pachinko machine 10 (counting management device 311, etc.) and the card unit 900 under the above-mentioned processing procedure, and the flow of the virtual loan ball lending process that is carried out based on that communication, will be explained with reference to the timing chart in Figure 2-49. In this embodiment, an example will be explained in which 25 virtual loan balls are loaned out for every 100 yen, and 500 yen worth of virtual loan balls are granted with a single operation of the loan button 121.

By powering on the card unit 900, it becomes possible to power on the pachinko machine 10, which receives power via it. Then, when power is turned on to the card unit 900 and initial settings are completed, the initial setting completion signal B0 switches from high level to low level. The low level output of this initial setting completion signal B0 enables the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262, counting management device 311) to recognize that the card unit 900 has completed initial settings and is in a standby state.

Then, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the counting management device 311 is ready for lending, the connection confirmation signal P0 switches from high to low (timing TA). If the connection confirmation signal P0 is low and the lending response signal P1 is high, the card unit 900 determines that the counting management device 311 is in a standby state ready for lending, and waits in this state for the insertion of a membership card into the card unit 900.

After that, when a membership card is inserted into the card unit 900, the use permission signal B5 switches from high to low (timing TB). This low level output of the use permission signal B5 enables the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262, counting management device 311) to recognize that the card unit 900 is in a state where it can execute lending control.

At the same time, the card unit 900 outputs a point display signal B3 (balance display signal B3a) to the card unit operation unit 120 and the sub-controller 262, indicating the balance (savings data) on the membership card or the balance (remaining amount) of the amount inserted into the bill insertion slot 902.

Then, when the card unit operation unit 120 receives the point display signal B3 (balance display signal B3a), it displays the balance of the membership card (savings data) or the remaining amount of the inserted amount (remaining balance) on the point display unit 123 (balance display unit 123a).

In addition, when the sub-controller 262 receives the point display signal B3 (balance display signal B3a), it stores the balance of the membership card (savings data) or the balance of the inserted amount (remaining amount) in the balance storage area provided in RAM 553.

After this state is reached, when the lending button 121 is pressed, a lending operation signal Q1 is output from the card unit operation section 120 and input to the card unit 900 via the card unit connection board 314.

This triggers the lending confirmation signal B1 in the card unit 900 to switch from high to low (timing T1). This allows the counting management device 311 to recognize that the card unit 900 has entered a lending state.

At the same time, operation of the lending button 121 and the settlement/return button 122 is prohibited. In other words, while the card unit 900 is in a lending state (while the lending confirmation signal B1 is at a low level), even if the lending button 121 or the settlement/return button 122 is operated, the operation is treated as invalid and no processing is initiated.

After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point (timing T1), the loan request signal B2 switches from high to low (timing T2).

If the loan request signal B2 effectively switches to low level within a specified loan request monitoring time (e.g., 30 msec to 50 msec) from the time the loan confirmation signal B1 falls to low level (timing T1), the counting management device 311 recognizes this and switches the loan response signal P1 from high level to low level, and begins outputting a low level as a request acknowledgement signal (timing T3).

On the other hand, if the loan response signal P1 effectively switches to low level within a specified request acceptance monitoring time (e.g., 10 msec to 10 sec) from the time the loan request signal B2 switches to low level (timing T2), the card unit 900 recognizes this and, after a specified delay time has elapsed, switches the loan request signal B2 from low level to high level, using it as an instruction signal to instruct the counting management device 311 to loan a virtual ball (timing T4). During this delay time (T3 to T4), the card unit 900 subtracts 100 yen from the membership card balance (savings data) or the inserted amount balance (remaining amount).

Then, when the counting management device 311 validly receives this instruction signal (the rising edge of the loan request signal B2) within a specified loan instruction monitoring time (for example, 30 msec to 50 msec), the counting management device 311 executes the loan of 25 virtual loan balls (worth 100 yen).

When the lending process for 25 virtual loan balls is completed, the counting management device 311 switches the loan response signal P1 from low level to high level, which becomes a loan completion signal that notifies the card unit 900 that the loan has been completed (timing T5).

On the other hand, in the card unit 900, if the loan response signal P1 effectively switches to high level (when the loan completion signal is received) within a predetermined loan monitoring time (e.g., 200 msec to 10 sec) from the time the loan request signal B2 switches to high level (timing T4), the next loan request is made after a predetermined delay time (e.g., up to 250 msec). In other words, the loan request signal B2 is again switched from high level to low level, and the next low level output is initiated (timing T6).

In this way, the same process as above is repeated a predetermined number of times. More specifically, each press of the lending button 121 repeats the process a preset number of times (five times in this embodiment). Then, when the card unit 900 receives a lending completion signal (rising edge of lending response signal P1) corresponding to the final (fifth) lending request (timing T7), it confirms that no new signal has been input for a predetermined lending completion monitoring time (for example, a maximum of 250 msec) from this point, and then switches the lending confirmation signal B1 from low to high (timing T8). This ends the lending state in the card unit 900, and it enters a standby state in which it can accept operation of the lending button 121 and the settlement/return button 122.

If there is no specified signal change within the various monitoring times, it is treated as an error. For example, as described above, the card unit 900 monitors whether the loan response signal P1 changes to low level within the request understanding monitoring time (e.g., 10 msec to 10 sec) from the time the loan request signal B2 switches from high level to low level (timing T2) to confirm understanding of the loan request. Normally, this change is detected during this request understanding monitoring time, but if it is not detected, a timeout error is detected once the request understanding monitoring time has elapsed. In other words, if a sufficient monitoring time for a response has been set but this monitoring time has elapsed, it is assumed that some kind of abnormality has occurred. Then, upon detecting an error, the card unit returns the loan confirmation signal B1 to high level and displays a specified error code on the credit display unit 123 of the card unit operation unit 120.

After a predetermined time (e.g., 0 to 12.5 msec) has elapsed, the loan request signal B2 returns to a high level and the device enters a standby state in which it can accept operation of the loan button 121 and the settlement/return button 122. Once the return condition is met by pressing the loan button 121, normal processing can then be performed by operating the loan button 121, etc.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-36. First, in step SH3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked to determine whether the command sent from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, in step SH3902, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. The command buffer of RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261.

The ring buffer has a specified storage area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of that storage area. When commands have been stored in the entire storage area, the storage area returns to the beginning and the commands are updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on these pointers.

In the following step SH3903, a pending information storage process is performed to store the information of the advance command output from the main control unit 261 in a pending information storage area provided in RAM 553 of the sub-control unit 262. As described above, the advance command includes information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, information indicating whether the variable information corresponds to a jackpot, information indicating the type of win, information indicating the type of reach, game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the variable display, and information indicating the variable time.

The pending information storage area of the sub-controller 262 includes a first pending information storage area and a second pending information storage area, each of which has four pending areas (pending areas 1 to 4), as well as one execution area, similar to the special variable pending area of the main controller 261 (a first special variable pending area and a second special variable pending area, each of which has four pending areas, and one execution area).

The first pending information storage area stores information (variation information) related to the variable display, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, reach pattern, game mode information, and the variable display time, in chronological order, in accordance with the reception history of advance commands based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area).

The second pending information storage area stores information (variation information) related to the variable display, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and the variable display time, in chronological order, in accordance with the reception history of advance commands based on the second variable display (information stored in the second special variable pending area).

By adopting this configuration, it is possible to reserve and store change information regarding the first change display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, and change information regarding the second change display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB. As a result, the sub-controller 262 is able to grasp not only the execution area of the special change reserve area of the main controller 261, but also the change information stored in each reserve area of the first special change reserve area and the second special change reserve area.

The pending information storage process will now be explained with reference to Figure 2-39. First, in step SH4101, it is determined whether or not the first command for the first variable display has been received (whether or not the first command for the first variable display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

If a positive judgment is made in step SH4101, in step SH4102, the first variable hold counter NSa, which counts the number of variable information items held and stored in the first hold information storage area, is incremented by one.

In the following step SH4103, the information contained in the initial command, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the reach pattern, the game mode information, and the first variable time information, is stored in the first available reserved area in the first reserved information storage area.

Furthermore, in the following step SH4104, a preview information storage process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, there are cases where related display effects are intentionally derived from multiple consecutive variable displays (so-called "continuous previews" are performed). Here, it is first determined whether the advance performance execution flag described below, which is provided in the above-mentioned user-related area of RAM 553, is set to on. If the advance performance execution flag is set to on, the value of the consecutive preview counter, which determines whether or not to perform consecutive previews, and the value of the preview type counter, which determines the type of consecutive preview, are obtained, and these counter values are stored in the holding area of the first pending information storage area where the variable information was newly stored in the above-mentioned step SH4103.

The continuous warning counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 49, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 49). The continuous warning counter is periodically updated, and each time, the value of the continuous warning counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous warning counter buffer).

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 9, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 9). The notice type counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

As described above, when the advance performance execution flag in the user-related area is set to ON, when variable information is stored in the pending information storage area during the preview information storage process, the values of the consecutive preview counter and the preview type counter stored in the consecutive preview counter buffer and the preview type counter buffer are obtained. Furthermore, each pending area and execution area in the pending information storage area is provided with a consecutive preview flag that is turned ON when it is determined that a consecutive preview will be derived.

In addition, in this embodiment, ROM 552 is provided with a prediction accuracy determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether to make consecutive predictions, and a prediction table that is taken into consideration when determining the type of consecutive predictions as output setting content. Multiple prediction accuracy determination tables and multiple prediction tables are provided, and the prediction accuracy determination table and prediction table to be taken into consideration are selected depending on the variable information.

After step SH4104, in step SH4105, if the advance performance execution flag for the user-associated area is set to on, a continuous preview lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview. The continuous preview lottery process in step SH4105 checks whether or not there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag already set to on. If it is not confirmed that there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag set, and if only variable information corresponding to a complete miss (a miss that does not result in a reach state) is stored in the first reserved area, a continuous preview lottery is performed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag set, a continuous preview lottery is not performed.

In the continuous notice lottery process of step SH4105, if the value of the first variable pending counter NSa is "2" or greater, the system references the notice win/loss determination tables corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (those corresponding to jackpots are more likely to win than those corresponding to misses) based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area to determine whether or not to execute a continuous notice. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a continuous notice, the system references the notice tables corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area to determine the type of continuous notice as an output setting. Additionally, the continuous notice flags are turned on for all pending areas in the first pending information storage area for which variable information is stored. However, the continuous notice flags for the execution areas are not turned on.

After step SH4105, in step SH4106, a hold icon setting process is performed to additionally display one hold icon, which is a specific corresponding display indicating that the first variable display is stored on hold, on the performance display device 42. Here, setting processes are performed to output to the display control device 45 a display control command to additionally set drawing information for drawing the hold icon to the display data table (or additional data table).

As a result, as will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, a hold icon H461 (see Figure 2-47(a)) resembling a "lifebuoy" is displayed on the effect display device 42. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the hold icon corresponding to the second variable display is not displayed. Furthermore, as will be described below, in this embodiment, the type of hold icon can be customized to suit the player's preferences, to a hold icon with a different design from the hold icon H461 resembling a "lifebuoy."

The hold icon H461 may also be derived in a manner that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot for the corresponding first variable display. Hereinafter, this manner of hold icon H461 is also referred to as the "preview hold icon H463." In this embodiment, the preview hold icon H463 (see Figure 2-47(a)) is derived in a manner in which a character (in this embodiment, a whale character) is using a life jacket. Furthermore, multiple types of characters for the preview hold icon H463 (e.g., multiple types of whale characters with different colors) are provided, and the pattern of the preview hold icon H463 is associated with the likelihood of winning (jackpot expectation) for a jackpot state to occur. As a result, the preview hold icon H463 is ranked in terms of jackpot expectation depending on its appearance, and by deriving the preview hold icon H463, the likelihood of a jackpot is suggested (a preview hold preview performance is performed). Although not specifically mentioned in this embodiment, the character of the pre-reading hold icon H463 (a whale character by default) may also be configured to be customizable by the player (for example, to a penguin character).

In addition, when a pre-reading hold icon H463 is derived, the pattern of the pre-reading hold icon H463 may change (a hold change effect may be derived) before the first variable display corresponding to the pre-reading hold icon H463 is consumed. In other words, in the hold icon setting process of step SH4106, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to derive the pre-reading hold icon H463. If the result is a non-win, the pattern of the hold icon H461 is determined to be the default (only a lifebuoy). On the other hand, if the result is a win, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a hold change effect. If the result is a win, the hold change flag for the corresponding hold area is set to on, and the pre-reading hold icon H463 is determined to have two patterns: an upper limit pattern that may ultimately be displayed, and a provisional pattern that has a lower probability of winning (lower rank) than the upper limit pattern and is initially displayed. Note that the provisional pattern may be configured to initially include an option to only display the default hold icon H461. On the other hand, if the result is a non-win, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the pre-reading hold icon H463.

Then, basically, the process is performed such that the hold icon H461 of the determined pattern is displayed to the right of the rightmost hold icon H461 displayed in the hold display area HW3 of the effect display device 42. Also, in this embodiment, in step SH4106, if the pre-read hold icon H463 is derived in the hold display area HW3, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is set to ON.

After step SH4106, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4101, in step SH4107, it is determined whether or not a prior command for the second variable display has been received (whether or not the prior command for the second variable display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

If a positive judgment is made in step SH4107, in step SH4108, the second variable pending counter NSb, which counts the number of second variable information items pending and stored in the second pending information storage area, is incremented by 1.

Then, in step SH4109, information included in the initial command, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, information about the jackpot type, game mode information, and information about the second variable time, is stored in the first available reserved area in the second reserved information storage area. After step SH4109, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4107, this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-36, after step SH3903 or if a negative judgment is made in step SH3901, the process proceeds to step SH3904, where it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has passed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SH3905; on the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step SH3914.

In step SH3905, the update function executes the update process for various counters. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in Figure 2-37, it uses the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO and the top, middle, and bottom symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, which are used to set the losing symbols in the top, middle, and bottom symbol display areas. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured so that the register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, resulting in randomly changing values. The values of these counters are stored appropriately in the counter buffer in RAM 553.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (jackpot symbol) that will be displayed in a stopped state on the effect display device 42 when a jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, nine counter values (0 to 8) are provided for the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. In other words, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 8, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 8).

When a variable pattern command corresponding to a jackpot is received from the main control unit 261, the jackpot symbol combination is determined based on a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols. For example, if the counter value is 0, it will be "1" (double number), and if it is 1, it will be "2" (double number).

This jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is periodically updated by the update function during the counter update process of step SH3905, and is read from the counter buffer in RAM 553 when the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command, as described below. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative pattern counter buffer in RAM 553, but it is also possible to refer to the counter value when a variation pattern command is received, rather than storing it in the buffer.

The top, middle, and bottom pattern counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of symbols that will stop in the top, middle, and bottom pattern display areas when the lottery results in a loss. Since each column displays one of nine decorative symbols, nine counter values (0-8) are prepared for each. The top pattern counter CL determines the symbol that will stop in the top pattern display area, the middle pattern counter CM determines the symbol that will stop in the middle pattern display area, and the bottom pattern counter CR determines the symbol that will stop in the bottom pattern display area.

In this embodiment, the values of each counter CL, CM, CR are randomly updated using the value of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR are stored in either the front or rear miss reach symbol buffer, the front or rear non-miss reach symbol buffer, or the complete miss symbol buffer in RAM 553.

Here, the update process for each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR will be explained in detail. As shown in Figure 2-38, step SH4001 determines whether it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL, and step SH4002 determines whether it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. Note that the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in a single update process using the update function. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR was updated in the previous update process, a positive determination will be made in step SH4001. Also, if the upper symbol counter CL was updated in the previous update process, a positive determination will be made in step SH4002. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (step SH4001 is YES), proceed to step SH4003 and update the upper symbol counter CL. Furthermore, if it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM (step SH4002 is YES), proceed to step SH4004 and update the middle symbol counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (steps SH4001 and SH4002 are both NO), proceed to step SH4005 and update the lower symbol counter CR. When updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SH4003 to SH4005, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted, and the result of this calculation becomes the current value of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

The above CL, CM, and CR update process updates the top, middle, and bottom symbol counters CL, CM, and CR one by one in a single update process, and the update times for each counter value do not overlap. This means that one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every three times the update process is performed using the update function.

Then, in step SH4006, it is determined whether the updated combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a winning symbol combination (a jackpot symbol combination in which the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same as the symbol in the center symbol display area). If a positive determination is made in step SH4006, the process ends without storing the symbol counter combination CL, CM, and CR in RAM 553.

On the other hand, if step SH4006 returns a negative result, step SH4007 determines whether the updated combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a reach symbol combination (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same, and the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are different from the symbol in the center symbol display area). If it is a reach symbol combination (YES in step SH4007), step SH4008 determines whether the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a front-to-back miss symbol combination (a front-to-back miss reach). If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a front-to-back miss symbol combination (YES in step SH4008), step SH4009 is executed, where the current combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the front-to-back miss reach symbol buffer in RAM 553, and this process ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than a front or rear miss (a reach other than a front or rear miss) (step SH4008 is NO), proceed to step SH4010, store the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time in the reach pattern buffer other than a front or rear miss in RAM 553, and end this process.

Also, if the combination is other than a reach pattern (NO in step SH4007), the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of a losing pattern (complete losing pattern), so in step SH4011, the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the complete losing pattern buffer in RAM 553, and this process ends.

Note that the counters updated by the update function in the counter update process of step SH3905 above are not limited to the symbol counters CO, CL, CM, and CR. For example, the counter update process of step SH3905 above updates various counters used when the sub-control device 262 determines various presentation modes as output setting contents, such as the reach presentation selection counter described below.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-36, in step SH3906, the hold process is performed. The hold process is explained below with reference to Figure 2-40.

First, in step SH4201, it is determined whether a variation pattern command for the first variation display has been received (whether the variation pattern command for the first variation display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). If a positive determination is made in step SH4201, the value of the first variation pending counter NSa is decremented by 1 in the processing of step SH4202.

The next step, SH4203, executes a process to shift the data stored in the first pending information storage area. This data shift process shifts the data (including the consecutive preview flag) stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the first pending information storage area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SH4203, in step SH4204, a preview setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect to be used for the continuous preview. The preview setting process in step SH4204 determines whether the continuous preview flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area (see the continuous preview lottery process in step SH4105) is on. If the determination is negative, no continuous preview will be performed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is positive, the process determines whether or not there is a jackpot, and if there is a jackpot, what the type is, and if there is not a jackpot, what the reach pattern is, what the game mode is, etc. based on the variation information in the variation pattern command, and determines the type of continuous preview by referencing the corresponding tables. The continuous preview of the type determined here will be derived at the desired timing when the corresponding variable display is performed.

After step SH4204, in step SH4205, a hold icon shift process is performed to shift the hold icon H461 displayed on the performance display device 42. Each hold area and execution area in the hold information storage area is provided with a hold icon storage area that stores the type of hold icon H461, and information related to the hold icon H461 is also shifted by the data shift process in the hold information storage area described above.

The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon H461 in accordance with the data shift (a process for changing the drawing information related to the hold icon in the display data table), and in the performance display device 42, each time one first variable display is consumed (executed), the hold icon H461 located at the far left is erased, and the hold icon H461 located to the right of it is shifted one position to the left (the display location moves).

In this embodiment, in step SH4205, prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon H461, if there is a hold area where the hold change flag is set to on, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a hold change effect on the pre-read hold icon H463, and if the lottery is won, the pattern of the pre-read hold icon H463 is changed to a higher rank (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern will not be exceeded). In addition, if it is determined that there is no hold area where the hold change flag is set to on, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is turned off. Furthermore, if the pattern of the pre-read hold icon H463 is changed so that the pre-read hold icon H463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is turned off and the hold change flag is turned off.

After step SH4205, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4201, in step SH4206, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command for the second fluctuation display has been received (whether or not a fluctuation pattern command for the second fluctuation display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

On the other hand, if step SH4206 returns a positive answer, step SH4207 decrements the value of the second variable pending counter NSb by 1. In the following step SH4208, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the second pending information storage area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the second pending information storage area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area being shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3. After step SH4208, or if step SH4206 returns a negative answer, this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-36, step SH3907 performs effect display setting processing. Here, various calculation processes, such as generating display commands to be output to the display control device 45, and command output settings are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. In other words, this is where the display format to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, the sub-control device 262 references the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, and stopping pattern, and determines the display pattern for the decorative pattern variation display, etc. Then, it performs control such as outputting the determined information to the display control device 45 as a display command.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to commands from the sub-control device 262, and begins displaying the changing decorative patterns on the effect display device 42. Once a change pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 and display control device 45 cooperate to continue displaying the changing decorative patterns (change in effect display) until the specified change time period corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed.

Furthermore, when starting the effect change display corresponding to the first change display, if the continuous preview flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area is on, the table corresponding to each situation is referenced based on the variation information of the variation pattern command to determine the type of continuous preview to be derived in the effect change display corresponding to the first change display, determine the derivation of a preview effect other than the continuous preview (for example, a school of fish effect or a bubble effect), or perform a display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125, etc. Furthermore, the effect display setting process of step SH3907 also performs processing to control the effects during a jackpot (win display processing).

Here, the variable display setting process performed in the effect display setting process of step SH3907 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-42.

The effect display device 42 of this embodiment basically displays a first effect change display (first change-compatible effect display) corresponding to the first change display of the first special pattern display device 43A, and a second effect change display (second change-compatible effect display) corresponding to the second change display of the second special pattern display device 43B.

First, in step SH4501, it is determined whether a variation pattern command corresponding to the second variation display (hereinafter referred to as the "second variation pattern command") has been received.

For example, the second fluctuation reception flag may be turned on when processing corresponding to the reception of the second fluctuation pattern command is performed during the hold processing (see Figure 2-40), and the second fluctuation reception flag may be turned off when a positive judgment is made in step SH4501. In step SH4501, the second fluctuation reception flag may be checked to determine whether or not the second fluctuation pattern command has been received. Furthermore, the various fluctuation information included in the second fluctuation pattern command may be stored in the execution area of the corresponding hold information storage area, or may be stored in a separate storage area.

If step SH4501 returns a negative result, the process proceeds to step SH4508. On the other hand, if step SH4501 returns a positive result, step SH4503 determines whether "21" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (starting time of fluctuation) game mode is "Time-saving A mode."

If step SH4503 returns a positive judgment, step SH4504 performs a time-saving A second effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (pattern of the second effect variation display) for the "time-saving A mode" based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and the second variation time), and then proceeds to step SH4508. The time-saving A second effect variation display setting process performs display setting processes (such as setting processes for outputting display control commands to the display control device 45 to select display data tables for the corresponding variation display) corresponding to the "rush stage presentation" and "battle stage presentation" related to the "time-saving A mode" shown in Figures 2-48(a) and 2-48(b).

If step SH4503 returns a negative result, step SH4505 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (at the start of the change) game mode is "Time-saving B mode."

If step SH4505 returns a positive judgment, step SH4506 performs a time-saving B second effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (pattern of the second effect variation display) for the "time-saving B mode" based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and second variation time), and then proceeds to step SH4508. The time-saving B second effect variation display setting process performs display setting processing corresponding to the "Lucky Stage Presentation" shown in Figure 2-48(c) (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display).

If step SH4505 returns a negative result, step SH4507 performs a normal second effect variation display setting process to set a "normal mode" effect pattern (pattern of second effect variation display) based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the jackpot type, game mode information, and second variation time), and then proceeds to step SH4508. In the normal second effect variation display setting process, display setting processing corresponding to the "normal stage effect" shown in Figure 2-47(a) is performed (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display).

In step SH4508, it is determined whether a variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display (hereinafter referred to as the "first variation pattern command") has been received.

For example, the first fluctuation reception flag may be turned on when processing corresponding to the reception of the first fluctuation pattern command is performed during the hold processing (see Figure 2-40), and if a positive judgment is made in step SH4508, the first fluctuation reception flag may be turned off. In step SH4508, the first fluctuation reception flag may be checked to determine whether or not the first fluctuation pattern command has been received. Furthermore, the various fluctuation information included in the first fluctuation pattern command may be stored in the execution area of the corresponding hold information storage area, or may be stored in a separate storage area.

If step SH4508 returns a negative result, the process ends. On the other hand, if step SH4508 returns a positive result, step SH4509 determines whether "21" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current game mode (at the start of the change) is "Time-saving A mode."

If step SH4509 returns a positive judgment, step SH4510 performs a time-saving A first effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (first effect variation display pattern) for the "time-saving A mode" based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and first variation time), and then terminates this process. The time-saving A first effect variation display setting process performs display setting processes (such as setting processes for outputting display control commands to the display control device 45 to select display data tables for the corresponding variation displays) corresponding to the "rush stage presentation" and "battle stage presentation" associated with the "time-saving A mode" shown in Figures 2-48(a) and 2-48(b).

If step SH4509 returns a negative result, step SH4511 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (at the start of the change) game mode is "Time-saving B mode."

If step SH4511 returns a positive judgment, step SH4512 performs a time-saving B first effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (first effect variation display pattern) for "time-saving B mode" based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time), and then terminates this process. The time-saving B first effect variation display setting process performs display setting processing corresponding to the "Lucky Stage Presentation" shown in Figure 2-48(c) (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display).

If step SH4511 returns a negative result, step SH4513 performs a normal first effect variation display setting process to set a "normal mode" effect pattern (first effect variation display pattern) based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time), and then terminates this process. In the normal first effect variation display setting process, display setting processing corresponding to the "normal stage effect" shown in Figure 2-47(a) is performed (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display).

Here, we will explain in detail the reach effect setting process performed in the normal first effect variable display setting process corresponding to the "normal stage effect."

As shown in Figure 2-104, first, in step SH45101, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a predetermined fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach effect has been received. If the determination in step SH45101 is negative, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH45101 returns a positive result, step SH45102 determines whether the various reach effects are still at their default settings based on the various information (Kuroshio reach execution flag, Coral reach execution flag, Marine reach execution flag) stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553. Note that the default settings in this embodiment are that all reach execution flags (Kuroshio reach execution flag, Coral reach execution flag, and Marine reach execution flag) are set to "ON."

If step SH45102 returns a positive result (no customization by the player), step SH45103 determines whether the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that involves a special reach.

If step SH45103 returns a positive result, step SH45104 references the first reach effect table (see Figure 2-106) from among the multiple reach effect tables stored in ROM 552 to determine the reach effect mode type for the special reach. After that, display setting processing for the special reach is performed, and this processing ends.

For example, the value of the reach effect selection counter updated by the update function in the counter update process of step SH3905 is obtained within the range of 0 to 30, and it is set to perform a "Special Kuroshio Reach" if it is 0 to 8, a "Special Coral Reach" if it is 9 to 17, and a "Special Marine Reach" if it is 18 to 30.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH45103, a judgment is made in step SH45105 as to whether the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern involving a super reach. If a positive judgment is made in step SH45105, a reach presentation type related to the super reach is determined in step SH45106 by referring to the second reach presentation table (see Figure 2-106). Thereafter, display setting processing related to the super reach is performed, and this processing ends.

For example, the value of the reach effect selection counter mentioned above is obtained, and if it is between 0 and 13, it is set to "Kuroshio Reach", if it is between 14 and 21, it is set to "Coral Reach", and if it is between 22 and 30, it is set to "Marine Reach".

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH45105 (if the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern involving a normal reach), the display is set to perform a "normal reach" in step SH45107, and then this processing is terminated.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step SH45102, i.e., if the player has customized the reach presentation (if at least one of the Kuroshio reach execution flag, the Coral reach execution flag, or the Marine reach execution flag is set to OFF), step SH45108 determines whether the current variation is a variation pattern that accompanies a special reach.

If step SH45108 returns a positive result, step SH45109 determines the type of reach presentation mode by referencing the corresponding reach presentation table (one of the third to ninth reach presentation tables: see Figure 2-106) based on the various information stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553 (Kuroshio reach execution flag, Coral reach execution flag, Marine reach execution flag). Then, display setting processing related to that reach is performed, and this processing ends.

For example, if the Kuroshio Reach Execution Flag is set to "ON", the Coral Reach Execution Flag is set to "OFF", and the Marine Reach Execution Flag is set to "ON", the fourth reach effect table is referenced to determine the reach effect mode type for the special reach.

However, even if the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 261 is a variation pattern command related to a special reach (the same applies to a super reach), if all reach execution flags (Kuroshio reach execution flag, Coral reach execution flag, and Marine reach execution flag) are set to "OFF" through customization by the player, the reach presentation type related to a normal reach will be determined by referring to the 9th reach presentation table.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH45108, then in step SH45110 it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern involving a super reach. If a positive determination is made in step SH45110, then in step SH45109, based on the various information stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553 (Kuroshio reach execution flag, Coral reach execution flag, Marine reach execution flag), the corresponding reach presentation table (any of the third to ninth reach presentation tables) is referenced to determine the reach presentation mode type. Thereafter, display setting processing related to that reach is performed, and this processing ends.

For example, if the Kuroshio Reach Execution Flag is set to "ON", the Coral Reach Execution Flag is set to "OFF", and the Marine Reach Execution Flag is set to "OFF", the Reach Execution Mode Type for the Super Reach is determined by referencing the 8th Reach Execution Table.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH45110 (if the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern involving a normal reach), the display is set to perform a "normal reach" in step SH45111, and then this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the same table is referenced in both jackpot variations and miss variations, but this is not limiting; the configuration may also be such that the proportion of reach effects selected (reach effect table) changes between jackpot variations and miss variations (reach variations with misses before and after, reach variations other than misses before and after, and complete miss variations). Furthermore, even when the default settings are not used (when the player customizes the settings), the proportion of reach effects selected (reach effect table) may also be configured to change between variation patterns that include special reaches and variation patterns that include super reaches.

Next, we will explain in detail the preview effect execution setting process that is performed after the reach effect setting process in the normal first effect variable display setting process corresponding to the "normal stage effect."

As shown in Figure 2-105, first, in step SH45201, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that accompanies a super reach effect (including cases where it develops into a special reach effect). If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH45204.

On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH45201, then in step SH45202 it is determined whether or not a cut-in effect, described below, will be executed for this change. If a positive determination is made here, then in step SH45203, predetermined setting processing (such as setting processing for display commands to be output to the display control device 45) for executing the cut-in effect is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SH45204. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made here, then the process proceeds directly to step SH45204.

In step SH45202, when determining whether or not a cut-in effect will be executed, the sub-control device 262 first takes into consideration the cut-in effect 0% flag and the cut-in effect 100% flag, which are set in advance in a specified area of RAM 553, as described below. If the cut-in effect 0% flag is set to on, a cut-in effect will not be executed, so a negative determination is made in step SH45202 and the process proceeds directly to step SH45204.

On the other hand, if the cut-in effect 100% flag is set to ON, a cut-in effect will be executed, so step SH45202 makes a positive determination and the process proceeds to step SH45203.

Furthermore, if both the cut-in effect 0% flag and the cut-in effect 100% flag are set to off, the sub-control device 262 obtains the updated value of the effect selection random number counter for the cut-in effect lottery that was previously set in a predetermined area of RAM 553 during the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817 described below (for example, in this embodiment, the default setting is a random number counter for an appearance rate of 60%).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect selection random number counter obtained as described above is one of the winning values (e.g., 0 to 99) set in the effect selection table for the cut-in effect lottery set in advance in RAM 553.

If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is a winning value, a positive judgment is made in step SH45202 and the process proceeds to step SH45203. If the value of the effect selection random number counter is not a winning value, a negative judgment is made in step SH45202 and the process proceeds directly to step SH45204.

Now, in step SH45204, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation that will result in a jackpot. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH45207.

On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH45204, then in step SH45205 it is determined whether or not to execute the one-shot announcement effect described below for this change. If a positive determination is made here, then in step SH45206, predetermined setting processing (such as setting processing of the display command to be output to the display control device 45) for executing the one-shot announcement effect is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SH45207. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made here, then the process proceeds directly to step SH45207.

In step SH45205, when determining whether or not to execute the one-shot announcement effect, the sub-controller 262 first takes into consideration the one-shot announcement effect 0% flag and the one-shot announcement effect 100% flag, which are set in advance in a specified area of RAM 553. If the one-shot announcement effect 0% flag is set to on, the one-shot announcement effect will not be executed, so a negative determination is made in step SH45205 and the process proceeds directly to step SH45207.

On the other hand, if the one-shot announcement effect 100% flag is set to ON, the one-shot announcement effect will be executed, so a positive judgment is made in step SH45205 and the process proceeds to step SH45206.

Furthermore, if both the one-shot announcement effect 0% flag and the one-shot announcement effect 100% flag are set to off, the sub-control unit 262 obtains the updated value of the effect selection random number counter for the one-shot announcement effect lottery that was previously set in a predetermined area of RAM 553 during the one-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815 described below (for example, in this embodiment, the default setting is a random number counter with an appearance rate of 40%).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect selection random number counter obtained as described above is one of the winning values (e.g., 0 to 99) set in the effect selection table for the one-shot announcement effect lottery set in advance in RAM 553.

If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is a winning value, a positive judgment is made in step SH45205 and the process proceeds to step SH45206. If the value of the effect selection random number counter is not a winning value, a negative judgment is made in step SH45205 and the process proceeds directly to step SH45207.

Now, in step SH45207, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation will result in the execution of the school of fish effect, which will be described later. If the determination here is affirmative, then in step SH45208, predetermined setting processing (such as setting processing for display commands to be output to the display control device 45) for executing the school of fish effect is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SH45209. On the other hand, if the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH45209.

In step SH45207, when determining whether or not to execute a school of fish effect, the sub-control device 262 first determines whether the current fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, and based on this information, obtains an updated value for the effect selection random number counter for the school of fish effect lottery for a jackpot fluctuation or a losing fluctuation, which was set in advance in a specified area of RAM 553 during the school of fish effect setting process in step SH35809, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% are set as the default settings.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect selection random number counter obtained as described above is one of the winning values in the effect selection table for the school of fish effect lottery, for either a jackpot variation or a loss variation, which has been set in advance in RAM 553.

If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is a winning value, a positive judgment is made in step SH45207 and the process proceeds to step SH45208. If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is not a winning value, a negative judgment is made in step SH45207 and the process proceeds directly to step SH45209.

Now, in step SH45209, it is determined whether or not the bubble effect described below will be executed for this variation. If the determination here is affirmative, then in step SH45210, predetermined setting processing for executing the bubble effect (such as setting processing for display commands to be output to the display control device 45) is performed, and then this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination here is negative, this processing is terminated as is.

In step SH45209, when determining whether or not a bubble effect will be executed, the sub-control device 262 first determines whether the current variation is a jackpot variation, and based on this information, obtains an updated value for the effect selection random number counter for the bubble effect lottery for a jackpot variation or a miss variation, which was previously set in a specified area of RAM 553 in the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 30% are set as the default settings.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect selection random number counter obtained as described above is one of the winning values set in the effect selection table for the bubble effect lottery for jackpot variations or miss variations, which has been set in advance in RAM 553.

If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is a winning value, a positive judgment is made in step SH45209 and the process proceeds to step SH45210. If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is not a winning value, a negative judgment is made in step SH45209 and the process ends.

Next, the winning display processing performed in the effect display setting processing of step SH3907 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-41.

First, in step SH4700, it is determined whether an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot state has been received from the main control unit 261. If a positive determination is made in step SH4700, in step SH4701, a round count counter for counting the number of remaining rounds is set to "15" if the jackpot is a "15R jackpot," "8" if the jackpot is an "8R jackpot," and "4" if the jackpot is a "4R jackpot," based on the jackpot type information contained in the opening command.

Then, in step SH4702, the opening effect (jackpot start effect) as shown in FIG. 2-47(b) is set, and then this processing ends. The opening effect setting process involves, for example, setting the output of a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the jackpot opening effect. This includes, for example, setting the output of specified image data for the effect display device 42, setting the output of specified audio data for the speaker SP, and setting the lighting modes for the various electric lights 102-104. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effect modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding effect is selected by referring to this table and executed.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH4700, a determination is made in step SH4705 as to whether a round command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4705, the effects to be performed during the round are set in step SH4706, and then this processing ends.

When setting various effects during the variable display or jackpot state (e.g., during opening, round, interval, or ending), the sub-control device 262 sets the effects while taking into consideration various information previously stored in user-related areas of RAM 553 (e.g., language setting area, brightness level setting area, volume level setting area, and effect customization information storage area). Alternatively or additionally, when a predetermined condition is met during the variable display or jackpot state (e.g., when the player operates an operation means such as the effect button 125 during the variable display or jackpot state, when a predetermined effect such as a predetermined reach effect or round effect is initiated during the variable display or jackpot state, or within a predetermined time from the start of the variable display or round), the effect display device 42 may display a menu screen 3000 or a predetermined selection display, allowing the user to set language, volume, brightness, or effect customization. Additionally, if the player performs a "volume setting" or "brightness setting" during a variable display or during a jackpot state, and it is stored that a predetermined value has been input into the volume level setting area or brightness level setting area, the performance display device 42 may be configured to display, for a predetermined period of time, an output gauge showing the current volume or brightness output level as an image indicating that the predetermined value has been input by the player.

In this embodiment, the customization input values entered by the player regarding the settings for the various effects output during a jackpot state (such as language settings, volume settings, brightness settings, and effect customization (such as character and jackpot background music settings)) are not reflected in internal controls such as the effect lottery, so customization input is possible even before a jackpot state occurs, and the output settings are output according to the values entered by the player for customization (such as the background music playing order and volume level).

If a negative determination is made in step SH4705, a determination is made in step SH4707 as to whether or not an interval command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4707, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SH4708, and the presentation for the 4-second interval is set in step SH4709, after which this processing ends. The processing for setting the interval presentation includes, for example, setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the interval presentation.

If a negative determination is made in step SH4707, a determination is made in step SH4710 as to whether an ending command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4710, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SH4711, and the ending presentation is set in step SH4712, after which the processing ends. The ending presentation setting processing includes, for example, setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the ending presentation. Note that the ending presentation setting processing may be configured to select and execute one ending presentation pattern from multiple ending presentation patterns.

If the result of step SH4710 is negative, step SH4713 determines whether a jackpot end command has been received. If the result of step SH4713 is negative, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH4713, the jackpot display end process is performed in step SH4714, and this process ends.

The jackpot display end process immediately ends the ending display. Also, when the jackpot state ends, the time-saving A mode start command is received at this time, and based on this command, the start setting process for the "Rush Stage Presentation" or "Battle Stage Presentation" corresponding to the "Time-saving A Mode" is performed.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-36, in step SH3908, a change stop process is executed to stop the change display of the performance display device 42. The change stop process will now be explained with reference to Figure 2-43.

First, in step SH4401, it is determined whether a special chart 2 stop command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4401, it is determined in step SH4405 whether the second effect change display is currently being derived.

If step SH4405 returns a positive judgment, step SH4406 performs processing to stop the second effect variation display. As a result of this processing, the effect display device 42 enters a stopped display confirmation state in which the decorative pattern is displayed as a confirmed stopped pattern. Then, the variation interval period (stop display confirmation period) for the second special pattern display device 43B ends, and the decorative pattern displayed as a confirmed stopped pattern continues to be displayed as a stopped pattern on the effect display device 42 for at least the variation interval period (e.g., 1 second) until a new variation pattern command (first variation pattern command or second variation pattern command) is received from the main control device 261 and the next variation display begins.

In addition, even if the above-mentioned variation interval period (stop display confirmation period) has elapsed after the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop on the performance display device 42, if a new variation pattern command (first variation pattern command or second variation pattern command) is not received from the main control device 261 and the next variable display does not begin, the performance display device 42 will enter a standby state, and as described below, the performance display device 42 will enter a pattern stop standby state in which the decorative pattern continues to be displayed as a fixed stop from the above-mentioned stop display confirmation state.

For this reason, in the second effect variable display stop processing of step SH4406, a value equivalent to the variable interval period (stop display confirmation period) for the second special symbol display device 43B (for example, "500", which corresponds to "1 second") is set for the sub-variable interval timer used to measure the remaining time of the variable interval period (stop display confirmation period) for the effect display device 42. The value of the sub-variable interval timer is then decremented by "1" every predetermined time (2 msec) that the processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in the second effect variation display stop processing of step SH4406, the sub-controller 262 is not configured to output a display control command (confirmation command) to the display controller 45 to stop the variation (confirmation stop display) on the effect display device 42; however, such a display control command (confirmation command) may be output. This more reliably synchronizes the stop timing of the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B and the effect display device 42. However, since the variation stop timing on the effect display device 42 is determined by a display data table set based on the display control command output from the sub-controller 262 to the display controller 45 when the variation display starts, there is no need to output information regarding the variation stop timing on the effect display device 42 again (the same applies when the first effect variation display stop processing of step SH4409, described below, is performed).

After step SH4406, the process proceeds to step SH4410, which will be described later. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH4405, the process proceeds directly to step SH4410.

If step SH4401 returns a negative result, step SH4407 determines whether a special chart 1 stop command has been received. If step SH4407 returns a positive result, step SH4408 determines whether the first effect change display is currently being derived.

If step SH4408 returns a positive judgment, step SH4409 performs processing to stop the first effect variation display. As a result of this processing, the effect display device 42 enters a stopped display confirmation state in which the decorative pattern is displayed as a confirmed stopped pattern. Then, the variation interval period (stop display confirmation period) for the first special pattern display device 43A ends, and the decorative pattern displayed as a confirmed stopped pattern continues to be displayed as a stopped pattern on the effect display device 42 for at least the variation interval period (e.g., 1 second) until a new variation pattern command (first variation pattern command or second variation pattern command) is received from the main control device 261 and the next variation display begins.

In addition, even if the above-mentioned variation interval period (stop display confirmation period) has elapsed after the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop on the performance display device 42, if a new variation pattern command (first variation pattern command or second variation pattern command) is not received from the main control device 261 and the next variable display does not begin, the performance display device 42 will enter a standby state, and as described below, the performance display device 42 will enter a pattern stop standby state in which the decorative pattern continues to be displayed as a fixed stop from the above-mentioned stop display confirmation state.

For this reason, in the first effect variable display stop processing of step SH4409, the sub-variable interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable interval period (stop display confirmation period) for the first special pattern display device 43A (for example, "500", which corresponds to "1 second").

After step SH4409, proceed to step SH4410. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH4408, proceed directly to step SH4410.

After the process of stopping the display of each effect change in step SH4406 or step SH4409, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4407, a judgment is made in step SH4410 as to whether a time-saving A mode end command or a time-saving B mode end command has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step SH4410, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH4410 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the total number of times the first and second variable displays have been executed in "Time-saving A mode" or "Time-saving B mode" reaches a predetermined number, step SH4411 performs processing to change the display performance being performed by the performance display device 42 to "normal stage performance" corresponding to normal mode. Then, this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-36, the lamp setting process in step SH3909 sets the lighting pattern, which is the output setting content of the illumination units 102-104, so that it is synchronized with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42, for example. In other words, the control of the central illumination unit 103, which is related to the one-shot announcement performance, is also performed during this lamp setting process.

At this time, the sub-control device 262 causes the illumination units 102-104 to emit light at a brightness level corresponding to the brightness setting value set in the brightness level setting area of RAM 553. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the brightness level (brightness setting value) of the illumination units 102-104 can be changed to suit the player's preferences. Details of how to adjust this brightness (customization operation) will be described later.

In this embodiment, the brightness setting can be switched to one of five levels, from the minimum level "1" to the maximum level "5." When the power is turned on, a specific default value, level "3," is set. For example, when the brightness setting is set to "1," the light is emitted at 300 cd (candela), when "2" is set, the light is emitted at 450 cd, when "3" is set, the light is emitted at 600 cd, when "4" is set, the light is emitted at 750 cd, and when "5" is set, the light is emitted at 900 cd. Of course, the correspondence between the customizable brightness levels (brightness setting values) and the actual brightness is not limited to these correspondences, and different configurations may be adopted.

In addition, with regard to the illumination of the central illumination unit 103 for the one-shot announcement effect, the illumination effect (flash emission) may be configured to be performed at a predetermined brightness, without changing the brightness regardless of the customized brightness setting value, in order to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 changes the applied voltage, allowing the brightness level, which is the output setting for when each of the illumination units 102-104 is lit or flashing, to be set in multiple stages. However, the method for adjusting the brightness value is not limited to this. For example, the brightness may be adjusted by changing the number of light sources that are turned on among multiple light sources, or by adjusting the on/off times of the light sources.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-36, the audio setting process in step SH3910 performs various settings to control the operation of the speaker SP, such as setting the audio output pattern of the speaker SP to synchronize with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. In addition, if an audio-related command, such as an error notification, is sent from the main control device 261, settings to control this are also performed in step SH3910.

At this time, the sub-control device 262 outputs the sound that constitutes the performance section from the speaker SP at a volume level that corresponds to the volume setting value set in the volume level setting area of RAM 553. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the volume level (volume setting value) of the speaker SP is configured to be changeable to suit the player's preferences. Details of how to adjust the volume (customization operation) will be described later.

In this embodiment, the volume setting can be switched to one of five levels, from the minimum level "1" to the maximum level "5." When the power is turned on, the default level, "3," is set. For example, when the volume setting is set to "1," sound is output at 50 dB; when "2," sound is output at 60 dB; when "3," sound is output at 70 dB; when "4," sound is output at 80 dB; and when "5," sound is output at 90 dB. Of course, the correspondence between the customizable volume level (volume setting) and the actual volume is not limited to these correspondences, and different configurations may be adopted.

In this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 changes the amount of amplification by the amplifier (not shown) built into the speaker SP, making it possible to set the volume level, which is the output setting of the speaker SP, in multiple stages. However, the method of adjusting the volume is not limited to this, and other configurations may also be used.

Step SH3911 performs standby processing. Note that the standby processing of step SH3911 is skipped and not executed while the effect display device 42 is displaying a changing pattern or while a jackpot state (jackpot effect) is being executed. In other words, if a changing display is initiated triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB as a specific input during the standby processing of step SH3911 (the pattern stop standby state, demo effect execution state, or selection screen display state described below), this standby processing will immediately end, and the transition state after the custom setting change will be maintained.

As shown in Figure 2-44, in the standby processing of step SH3911, the sub-control unit 262 first determines in step SH5901 whether or not a standby display command has been received from the main control unit 261. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5903.

On the other hand, if the result of step SH5901 is affirmative, i.e., if it is the start timing of the standby state for the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B (the end timing of the state in which the decorative symbol is fixed to be displayed), then in step SH5902, the value of the standby state flag TF set in RAM 553 is set to "1."

The standby state flag TF is discrimination information that can determine whether the effect display device 42 is in a standby state in which no pattern change display is being performed, and is also discrimination information that can determine what display mode the effect display device 42 is in during this standby state.

The standby state of the effect display device 42 is divided into a pattern stop standby state in which the effect display device 42 is in a standby state with a stopped decorative pattern displayed (the period from the end of the previous stopped display confirmation state until a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has passed since the end of the stopped display confirmation state without any pattern change display); a demonstration effect execution state in which the effect display device 42 is performing a demonstration effect (described below) (the state after a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has passed since the end of the stopped display confirmation state of the decorative pattern); and a selection screen display state in which an interrupt state has occurred and the effect display device 42 is displaying the custom setting continuation selection screen 8000 (see Figure 2-56(b)) described below.

If the standby state is a symbol stop standby state, the value of the standby state flag TF is set to "1". If the standby state is a demo performance execution state, the value of the standby state flag TF is set to "2". If the standby state is a selection screen display state, the value of the standby state flag TF is set to "3".

After step SH5902, in step SH5903, the update function adds "1" to the value of the standby time measurement timer, which is update information for measuring the elapsed time during standby. In other words, the value of the standby time measurement timer is incremented by "1" every predetermined time (2 msec) that this process is executed.

The value of the standby state flag TF and the value of the standby time measurement timer are reset to "0" each time the variable display is started in the various effect variable display setting processes (see the various second effect variable display setting processes of steps SH4504, SH4506, and SH4507 above, and the various first effect variable display setting processes of steps SH4510, SH4512, and SH4513 above).

The next step, SH5904, determines whether the value of the waiting time measurement timer exceeds a specific value (e.g., "7500," which corresponds to 15 seconds) and whether a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed since the previous stop display confirmation state ended.

If the result here is negative, i.e., if the elapsed time in the standby state is less than the predetermined time, the first standby display setting process is performed in step SH5905, and then this process is terminated.

The first standby display setting process involves setting processes such as outputting a specified display control command to the display control device 45 so that the effect display device 42 transitions from the stopped display confirmation state to a pattern stop standby state in which the decorative pattern continues to be displayed in a stopped state. Based on this, the display control device 45 selects a display data table for the pattern stop standby display effect and executes the pattern stop standby display effect for a specified time (e.g., 15 seconds).

On the other hand, if step SH5904 returns a positive result, i.e., if the elapsed time since the start of the standby state is equal to or greater than a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds), step SH5906 determines whether the value of the standby state flag TF is "1." In other words, it determines whether it is time to end the symbol stop standby state.

If step SH5906 returns a positive result, step SH5907 determines whether the player has made any custom changes. In this embodiment, it determines whether any of the various configurable information (performance elements, etc.) stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553 has been custom changed to something different from the default settings.

If step SH5907 returns a negative result, i.e., if no custom changes have been made, step SH5908 sets the value of the standby state flag TF to "2" and then terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if step SH5907 returns a positive result, i.e., if a custom change has been made, step SH5909 sets the value of the standby state flag TF to "3" and then terminates this processing. As a result, if a custom change has been made, the third standby display setting processing described below will be executed when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the standby state. Alternatively, the third standby display setting processing may be executed when the number of balls held or the remaining balance reaches 0, which could be a trigger for the player to end play.

If the result of step SH5906 is negative, step SH5910 determines whether the value of the standby state flag TF is "2." If the result of step SH5910 is positive, the second standby display setting process is performed in step SH5911, and then the process ends.

The second standby display setting process involves setting processes such as outputting a predetermined display control command to the display control device 45 so that a predetermined demonstration effect display (demo effect display) is executed on the effect display device 42. Based on this, the display control device 45 selects a display data table for the demo effect and repeatedly executes the demo effect for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds). In this embodiment, the demo effect display is configured to display, for example, a video of a predetermined period of time that expresses the worldview that is the motif of the pachinko machine 10 on the entire screen of the effect display device 42.

If the result of step SH5910 is negative, step SH5912 determines whether the value of the standby state flag TF is "3." If the result of step SH5912 is positive, the third standby display setting process is performed in step SH5913, and then the process ends.

In the third standby display setting process, the effect display device 42 displays the custom setting continuation selection screen 8000 (see Figure 2-56(b)) as setting mode information, and performs setting processes to output a specified display control command to the display control device 45 to generate an output selection state that allows the player to select whether or not to continue the current changed custom setting state. Based on this, the display control device 45 selects a display data table for the custom setting continuation selection display and executes the custom setting continuation selection display for a specific period (e.g., 10 seconds).

The custom setting continuation selection screen 8000 displays text information such as "Do you want to continue custom settings?" and selection information such as "YES" and "NO." The player then moves the displayed cursor 3100 on the custom setting continuation selection screen 8000 by operating the left button 126c or right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to select "YES" or "NO," and then presses the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126 to confirm whether or not to continue the current custom settings.

Here, by confirming whether or not the player wishes to continue with the custom settings, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display indicating that the player has completed inputting whether or not they wish to continue with the custom settings, such as displaying "Custom settings have been reset" or "Custom settings will continue."

The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the custom setting contents set in the user-associated area of RAM 553 to the contents determined by the player as described above (maintaining the custom setting or changing to the default setting), and executes a specific process, causing the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to return to a standby state (demo effect display). Note that if new cash is inserted as a specific input during the execution period of the custom setting continuation selection display (during the display period of the custom setting continuation selection screen 8000), a start win (prize balls) occurs, or the loan button 121 is pressed to increase the number of balls held, the custom setting continuation selection display (display state of the custom setting continuation selection screen 8000) may be configured to end while maintaining the transition state in which the custom setting was changed, assuming that the player has indicated their intention to continue playing.

Furthermore, if the timing for the custom setting continuation selection display (display state of the custom setting continuation selection screen 8000) to end arrives without the player operating the center button (decision button) 126e of the directional pad 126, the next variable display not starting, or the above-mentioned specific input being made, that is, if a specific period (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed since the custom setting continuation selection display started on the effect display device 42, an output setting process is performed to perform initialization processing (such as erasing custom information entered by the player and setting default values) for each of the various storage areas in the user-related area (language setting area, brightness level setting area, volume level setting area, effect custom information storage area, etc.), and the specific process is executed, causing the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to return to a standby state (demo effect display).

In other words, if the player does not operate the center button (decision button) 126e of the directional pad 126 until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the interrupt state was established and the custom setting continuation selection display was executed, the interrupt state must be established again in order to execute the custom setting continuation selection display again.

Here, instead of performing the above initialization process (deleting custom information entered by the player, setting default values, etc.), a configuration may be adopted in which the custom setting continuation selection display is terminated while maintaining the transition state in which the custom settings have been changed, once a specific period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the custom setting continuation selection display began.

In addition, instead of displaying the custom setting continuation selection screen 8000 (see Figure 2-56(b)), a custom setting notification screen 8100 may be displayed as shown in Figure 2-56(c), for example, to display a custom setting notification as an information output state notifying the user that the device is currently in a transitional custom setting state. The custom setting notification screen 8100 outputs notification information such as "Custom settings have been made" that corresponds to the custom setting state.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 2-36, step SH3912 performs user-responsive processing. User-responsive processing is processing performed at the player's request during the standby state (excluding the custom setting continuation selection display) and other times. Examples of such processing include language setting processing to change the language used for game instructions and specified effects, volume setting processing to adjust the volume of the speaker SP, brightness setting processing to adjust the brightness of the display unit 42a and illumination unit 102 of the effect display device 42, effect customization processing to customize the effects performed by the effect display device 42, and history display processing to display the game history, such as the number of jackpots. However, with regard to "volume setting" and "brightness setting," the values entered by the player are not directly reflected in predetermined internal controls such as effect lottery. Therefore, the player may be able to operate input means (including the mobile terminal 2000), such as the effect button 125 or cross key 126, to customize and input values corresponding to the volume level and brightness level not only during the standby state but also throughout the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display for a predetermined period on the effect display device 42.

Furthermore, as described below, in this embodiment, input setting operations and the like for executing various processes related to the user-responsive processing of step SH3912 (various setting processes such as effect customization) are configured to be executed via the mobile terminal 2000 held by the player, and when data related to various settings is input from the mobile terminal 2000 (when the input data from the mobile terminal 2000 is stored in the user-responsive area of RAM 553), the user-responsive processing performs custom changes to the various setting contents based on the various information set in the user-responsive area of RAM 553.

In step SH3913, external output processing is performed to send control signals to each device based on the settings made in steps SH3905 to SH3912. For example, a display command is sent to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 displays a changing decorative pattern.

After steps SH3905 to SH3913 are executed every 2 msec, or if a negative determination is made in step SH3904, the process proceeds to step SH3914, where it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in RAM 553. Note that power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control unit 261.

If no information about a power outage is stored, the process proceeds to step SH3915, where it is determined whether RAM 553 has been corrupted. If RAM 553 has not been corrupted, the process returns to step SH3901, and normal processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 553 has been corrupted, the process enters an infinite loop to stop subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SH3914 that power failure occurrence information is to be stored, power failure processing is executed in step SH3916. During power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. The stored information about the power failure occurrence is also erased. After the power failure processing is executed, the processing enters an infinite loop.

Next, we will explain how the display mode of the effects on the effect display device 42 changes as the game progresses, along with the flow of the game played by the player. The display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays various display effects corresponding to the current game state (game mode, etc.).

In the normal game mode (a game mode in which the first variable display can be displayed based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA in "normal mode"), the "normal stage display" is displayed on the display device 42.

As shown in Figure 2-47(a), in "normal stage presentation," a variable display area HW1 in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner occupies most of the display unit 42a of the presentation display device 42. In this embodiment, the background image selected by the player in advance during presentation customization, or the default background image (the background image related to the "diving stage"), is displayed on the display unit 42a. In addition, while the symbols are changing, the background music selected by the player in advance during presentation customization, or the default background music during symbol change, is output from the speaker SP.

As described above, in this embodiment, three pattern display areas (top, middle, and bottom) are set in this variable display area HW1, and multiple types of decorative patterns (patterns numbered 1 to 9) are displayed in a scrolling manner in each pattern display area.

Above the variable display area HW1 is an instruction display area HW2 that instructs (recommends) the player on how to launch the game ball, and below the variable display area HW1 is a hold display area HW3 that clearly shows the number of hold variable displays.

In normal game mode, "← Left Hit" is displayed in the instruction display area HW2 to encourage the player to fire the game ball toward the left side of the game area (game area left area EA) (such an action will be referred to as "left hit" hereafter). In response to this, the player plays by "left hitting" (such a game will be referred to as "left hit game" hereafter). Note that "left hit game," in which the game ball is fired toward the first direction, the left side of the game area (game area left area EA), corresponds to the "first game" in this embodiment.

In addition, a hold icon H461 resembling a life jacket is displayed in the hold display area HW3. In this embodiment, the hold display area HW3 is equipped with an execution correspondence area H462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area, and a hold correspondence area H462b corresponding to each hold area of the first hold information storage area, and is capable of displaying up to five hold icons H461. In this embodiment, the hold icon selected in advance by the player during performance customization, or the default set hold icon (the hold icon H461 resembling a life jacket) is displayed on the display unit 42a.

When a player "hits left," most of the game balls are guided by the above-mentioned nails toward the first start winning section 33WA, which is located below the variable display unit 35 (the lower game area ED). Some of these game balls will win in the first start winning section 33WA.

In this embodiment, the second start winning section 33WB and the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the pair of blade members 33WBb are located to the right of the variable display unit 35 (right-side area EB of the game area). In other words, the second start winning section 33WB and the through gate 34 are located in a position that cannot be reached by a game ball that has flowed down the left side of the variable display unit 35 (left-side area EA of the game area). Therefore, if the player continues to "hit left," the pair of blade members 33WBb will not be opened and the game ball will not enter the second start winning section 33WB.

Furthermore, even if a player were to fire a game ball toward the right side of the game area (game area right-hand area EB) in normal game mode (such an action will be referred to as a "right hit" hereinafter), there is almost no chance that the game ball will enter the second start winning section 33WB under the configuration of this embodiment described above. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that, in normal game mode, the player can play more advantageously by playing a "left hit game" rather than by playing a "right hit" (such game will be referred to as a "right hit game" hereinafter). Note that a "right hit game" in which a game ball is fired toward the second direction, the right side of the game area (game area right-hand area EB), corresponds to the "second game" in this embodiment.

When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, multiple types of decorative patterns are displayed in the variable display area HW1 of the effect display device 42, changing in each of the above-mentioned pattern display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" are displayed. The various decorative patterns are displayed in ascending or descending numerical order, scrolling from right to left with a periodicity, thereby forming a series of patterns. Here, in this embodiment, decorative patterns with a design selected in advance by the player during effect customization, or default decorative patterns (decorative patterns related to the "tropical fish group") are displayed on the display unit 42a.

In the upper pattern display area, various decorative patterns are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), while in the middle and lower pattern display areas, various decorative patterns are displayed in ascending order (in order of increasing numbers). After a predetermined time has passed, the varying display stops in the order of upper pattern display area → lower pattern display area → middle pattern display area, and decorative patterns are displayed statically in each pattern display area.

Furthermore, while the pattern is changing, various effects (reach effect, school of fish effect, bubble effect, advance effect, one-shot announcement effect, cut-in effect) selected in advance by the player during effect customization, or various effects set as defaults, may be executed. Furthermore, in reach effects, cut-in effects, etc., a character (main character, sub-character, etc.) selected in advance by the player during effect customization, or a character set as default, may be displayed on the display unit 42a.

If the jackpot lottery is won based on the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, the game will go through a reach state, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination will be displayed frozen on a predetermined jackpot line. In the normal game mode of this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, center, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as five lines). Therefore, when three decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination are displayed frozen on any of the five lines in the top, center, and bottom symbol display areas, the occurrence of a jackpot state is confirmed. In this way, when the jackpot variable display has ended, game status information for the jackpot state corresponding to this variable display, such as text information such as "Jackpot" as shown in Figure 2-47(b), is displayed as notification information on the effect display device 42.

When a jackpot occurs, the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable prize device 32A opens, allowing the game ball to enter the large prize opening 32Aa, and a specified jackpot presentation is initiated on the presentation display device 42. In this embodiment, the jackpot background music selected in advance by the player during presentation customization, or the default jackpot background music, is output from the speaker SP.

However, if the player continues to "hit left," it will be extremely difficult to make the game ball flow down toward the variable winning device 32A and win. Furthermore, when the "Time-saving A mode," which is entered after the jackpot ends regardless of the type of jackpot, begins, there will be no reserved memory of the second variable display based on the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, and the first variable display will begin after the jackpot ends.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, a player is more likely to be placed in a more advantageous gaming state if they win a jackpot with the second variable display than if they win a jackpot with the first variable display. Therefore, if the first variable display is displayed in "Time-saving A mode" after a jackpot has ended, it will be disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2-47(b), when the jackpot effect begins, the instruction display area HW2 displays "Right Hit →" to encourage the player to "hit right." In response, the player switches the game ball launch mode from "left hit" to "right hit" to play a jackpot game, so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right-side area EB of the game area.

If the player hits the ball to the right, many of the balls will be guided by the pegs and flow from the right area EB of the play area through the lower area ED of the play area toward the variable winning device 32A, where they will win. This allows the player to win more balls.

In addition, in the right area EB of the game area, a through gate 34 and a second start-up winning section 33WB are provided along the flow path to the variable winning device 32A. During a jackpot, some game balls will pass through the through gate 34 and enter the second start-up winning section 33WB, which opens upon passing through the gate.

In this embodiment, if the game ball wins the start-entry support lottery, which is held based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the pair of blade members 33WBb will open, allowing the game ball to enter the second start-entry section 33WB.

This means that the second variable display is reserved and stored during the jackpot state, and when the "Time-saving A Mode" begins after the jackpot ends, the second variable display can be started immediately, taking priority over the first variable display.

In this embodiment, if a "15R jackpot" is won by a lottery during "normal mode" based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, after the "15R jackpot" ends, a "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted. When the "time-saving A mode for 100 variable play times" is granted, a "rush stage effect" is displayed on the effect display device 42, as shown in FIG. 2-48(a).

On the other hand, if a "4R jackpot" is won by a lottery during "normal mode" based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, after the "4R jackpot" ends, a "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play rounds is granted. If a "time-saving A mode with 10 variable play rounds" is granted, a "battle stage effect" is displayed on the effect display device 42, as shown in Figure 2-48(b).

Therefore, when a "Rush Stage Effect (15R or 8R jackpot)" is performed, there is a high probability of winning the next jackpot in succession during that period, whereas when a "Battle Stage Effect (4R jackpot)" is performed, there is a low probability of winning the next jackpot in succession during that period.

During the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect," the variable display area HW1 is reduced downwards using a suppression function. Furthermore, in the reduced variable display area HW1, the top, middle, and bottom symbol display areas are replaced with left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes a single line. Various characters and other effects related to the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect" are displayed on the background screen.

For example, in the "Rush Stage Presentation," as shown in Figure 2-48(a), during its duration (a maximum of 100 variable displays are executed), a continuous animation (continuous presentation) of moving through the ocean is generated, and a jackpot is indicated by display modes such as a school of fish passing by, a large creature such as a whale appearing, or a treasure chest being discovered.

Furthermore, in the "Battle Stage Presentation," as shown in Figure 2-48(b), a humanoid character (such as the main character selected by the player in presentation customization) appears and an animation is generated in which the character fights an enemy, and whether or not the player has won the jackpot is indicated by whether or not the character wins or loses the battle.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Presentation" and "Battle Stage Presentation," since the above-mentioned various presentations indicate that a jackpot has been won, the reduced variable display area HW1 may also be omitted, and a restriction function may be used to prevent the decorative symbols from being displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, in the "Rush Stage Presentation" and "Battle Stage Presentation," a configuration may be used in which an output selection state is generated that allows the player to select between a symbol presentation mode in which decorative symbols are displayed and an animation presentation mode in which decorative symbols are not displayed through presentation customization. Of course, the "Rush Stage Presentation" and/or "Battle Stage Presentation" themselves may also be configured to be customizable by the player.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect," in order to allow more game balls to enter the second start winning section 33WB and reserve and store more second variable displays, the instruction display area HW2 displays "Right Hit →," recommending that the player "hit right," just as in the case of a jackpot.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Performance" and "Battle Stage Performance", the suppression function prevents the hold display area HW3 from being set on the performance display device 42, and the hold display (derivation of the hold icon) corresponding to the second hold display device 46B (second variable display) is not performed.

Here, even if a first variable display is stored as reserved, the restriction function prevents the display of the reserved icon corresponding to that first variable display. As described above, if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA while the second variable display is being executed, the first variable display corresponding to that ball is reserved and stored, and an advance command related to the first variable display is sent from the main control unit 261 to the sub-control unit 262, and information related to the first variable display is stored in the first reserved information storage area of the sub-control unit 262. However, during periods such as "Rush Stage Performance," the restriction function prevents the display of the reserved icon corresponding to the first variable display. However, even if the reserved icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed here, if a game ball enters the next first start winning section 33WA, the data in the first reserved information storage area will be updated. Then, when the "Rush Stage Performance" or the like ends and the game returns to "Normal Mode," the reserved icon related to the first variable display stored in the first reserved information storage area at that time will be displayed.

In addition, if a game ball enters the second start-up winning section 33WB during "Time-saving A mode (rush stage effect or battle stage effect)," a win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) is held, and the result is displayed in the variable display area HW1, which has been reduced by the suppression function.

Furthermore, during "Time-saving A Mode (Rush Stage Presentation or Battle Stage Presentation)," while the player is "hitting right," a restriction function prevents most game balls from entering the first start winning section 33WA. Meanwhile, many game balls tend to enter the second start winning section 33WB, which is in a high ball entry state, in a short period of time, causing the number of reserved balls stored in the second variable display to quickly reach its upper limit. For this reason, some players switch the game ball launch mode from "hitting right" to "hitting left" when a second variable display with a relatively long presentation time, such as a reach presentation, begins when the number of reserved balls stored in the second variable display has reached its upper limit, allowing the game ball to enter the first start winning section 33WA during that time. Of course, the first variable display will not start while the second variable display is being executed, but by storing the first variable display in a reserved state during this time, the reserved first variable display will start immediately after the "Time-saving A Mode" ends, preventing an interruption to the presentation.

In addition, for "Rush Stage Effects" and "Battle Stage Effects," a count display area HW4 is set on the effect display device 42 (see Figures 2-48(a) and 2-48(b)). The count display area HW4 clearly shows the number of variable display times (the value of the first variable count counter A) corresponding to the current remaining duration of the "Rush Stage Effects" or "Battle Stage Effects." Therefore, for example, if the value of the first variable count counter A is "83," the count display area HW4 will display "83 times remaining."

Then, each time the first or second variable display (mainly the second variable display) is displayed, its value (the value of the first variable display counter A) is decremented by one. Thereafter, if a jackpot does not occur during the "Time-saving A mode (rush stage effect or battle stage effect)" and the set number of variable displays (the value of the first variable display counter A) reaches 0, and the "Time-saving A mode" ends, the game mode transitions to "normal mode," and the "Rush stage effect" or "Battle stage effect" on the effect display device 42 ends, returning to the "normal stage effect [see Figure 2-47(a)]."

In addition, when the game mode transitions to "normal mode," "Time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)" ends, and "← hit left" is displayed in the instruction display area HW2 to encourage the player to "hit left." This allows the player to change the game mode upon the end of "Time-saving A mode (rush stage effect or battle stage effect)," and the prevention function can prevent malfunctions such as wasting game balls.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the game mode is in "normal mode" as described above, if the value of the normal mode continuation counter (ceiling counter), which is the update information, reaches the ceiling value (specific value) of "500," that is, if the duration of "normal mode" (number of times the variable display is executed) reaches 500 times without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving B mode" is activated as a benefit awarded to the player.

In this embodiment, a "time-saving B mode" with a maximum limit of 200 variable play times is granted. During "time-saving B mode," a "lucky stage effect" is executed on the effect display device 42. Note that when "time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)" is activated, an activation effect may be executed to liven up the game.

As shown in Figure 2-48 (c), in the "Lucky Stage Effect," a variable display area HW1 is set on the effect display device 42, and while the same variable decorative pattern display is basically performed as in "Normal Mode," some display aspects, such as the background display, differ from those in "Normal Mode."

For example, since the game enters "Time-saving B mode (high ball entry state)," the instruction display area HW2 above the variable display area HW1 displays "Hit right →," recommending the player to "hit right," just as in "Time-saving A mode." Meanwhile, the suppression function prevents the hold display area HW3 from being set in the effect display device 42, and no hold display (derivation of the hold icon) is performed.

Of course, instead of this, during the duration of the "Lucky Stage Effect" (the period during which a maximum of 200 variable displays are executed), the variable display area HW1 may be displayed in a reduced size downwards, similar to the "Rush Stage Effect" described above, and an animation (continuous effect) in which various characters are displayed may be generated on the background screen. Furthermore, the "Lucky Stage Effect" may also be configured to be customizable by the player.

In addition, for the "Lucky Stage Effect," a count display area HW4 is set on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 2-48(c)). The count display area HW4 clearly shows the number of variable display times (the value of the second variable display counter B) that corresponds to the current remaining duration of the "Lucky Stage Effect." Therefore, for example, if the value of the second variable display counter B is "155," the count display area HW4 will display "155 times remaining."

Then, each time the first or second variable display (mainly the second variable display) is displayed, its value (the value of the second variable count counter B) is decremented by one. Thereafter, if the set number of variable displays (the value of the second variable count counter B) reaches 0 without a jackpot occurring during "Time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)," and "Time-saving B mode" ends, the game mode transitions to "Normal mode." This ends the "Lucky stage effect" on the effect display device 42, and the game returns to "Normal stage effect [see Figure 2-47(a)]."

In addition, when the "Time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)" ends and the game mode transitions to "normal mode," notification information may be output to notify the player that the "Time-saving B mode" will not occur again as a rescue measure until the next jackpot occurs and the ceiling is reset.

In this embodiment, "ceiling reset" refers to the process of resetting the value of the normal mode continuation counter (ceiling counter) to "0" and turning off the time-saving B mode activation flag (ceiling activation flag).

Next, we will provide a detailed explanation of the various processes (various processes performed in the user-responsive processing of step SH3912) that can be executed during the standby state (excluding the custom setting continuation selection display) when no variable display effects are being executed on the effect display device 42 of the pachinko machine 10.

First, we will explain in detail how the player operates the effect button 125 and cross key 126 to make various settings and changes while looking at the effect display device 42 of the pachinko machine 10.

When a player presses the effect button 125 while the pachinko machine 10 (effect display device 42) is in the standby state (excluding when the custom setting continuation selection display is being displayed), the menu screen 3000 (see Figure 2-54(a)) is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42. The control processing (menu selection processing, etc.) performed by the sub-control device 262 to execute this is as follows:

As shown in Figure 2-50, the menu selection process first determines in step SH5500 whether the menu screen 3000 [see Figure 2-54(a)] is currently being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5504.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH5500, step SH5501 determines whether the current state is a standby state other than the above-mentioned custom setting continuation selection display (standby state flag TF = "3"), i.e., whether the current state is a symbol stop standby state (standby state flag TF = "1") or a demo performance execution state (standby state flag TF = "2"). If a negative determination is made in step SH5501, this process is terminated.

In addition, a determination process is first performed to determine whether or not the current state is standby, and when the menu screen 3000 or the custom setting continuation selection screen 8000 is displayed (the same applies when the language setting screen 3001, which is in a transition state, is displayed), if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, etc. and a specific input such as a variable pattern command is made from the main control unit 261 to the sub-control unit 262, an end function may be provided to forcibly end the display of the menu screen 3000 or the custom setting continuation selection screen 8000, etc.

If a positive determination is made in step SH5501, a determination is made in step SH5502 as to whether the player has operated the effect button 125. If a negative determination is made here, the process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5502, in step SH5503, a menu screen display process is executed to display the menu screen 3000 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the menu screen 3000 on the performance display device 42.

As shown in FIG. 2-54(a), the menu screen 3000 displays multiple types of menu items that can be executed by the player. In this embodiment, five menu items are displayed: "Language Settings," "Volume Settings," "Brightness Settings," "Effect Customization," and "Game History." Of these menu items, the four items excluding "Game History" - "Language Settings," "Volume Settings," "Brightness Settings," and "Effect Customization" - as well as various custom setting items belonging to the subcategory of "Effect Customization" described below (e.g., preview effect settings, etc.) correspond to configurable information (game specifications, etc.) in this embodiment.

Next, in step SH5504, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Language Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5506.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5504, in step SH5505, language setting processing is executed, which is a transition state for setting the language to be used, and then the process proceeds to step SH5506. Details of the language setting processing will be described later.

Next, in step SH5506, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Volume Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5508.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5506, in step SH5507, a volume setting process is executed, which is a transition state in which the volume of the sound output from the speaker SP is set, and then the process proceeds to step SH5508. Details of the volume setting process will be described later.

Next, in step SH5508, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Brightness Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5510.

If step SH5508 returns a positive answer, step SH5509 executes a brightness setting process, which is a transition state for setting the brightness of the light emitted from the illumination units 102-104, and then the process proceeds to step SH5510. Details of the brightness setting process will be described later.

Next, in step SH5510, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Performance Customization" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH5512.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5510, step SH5511 executes the effect customization process, which is a transition state for customizing the effect content, and then the process proceeds to step SH5512. Here, if the effect customization process is executed, the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed on the effect display device 42 [see Figure 2-55 (c)]. Details of the effect customization process will be described later.

Next, in step SH5512, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Game History" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH5514.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5512, in step SH5513, the history display process, which is a transition state for displaying the game history, is executed, and then the process proceeds to step SH5514. When the history display process is executed, the game history screen 3005 is displayed on the effect display device 42 [see Figure 2-56(a)].

Next, in step SH5514, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the menu screen 3000 is displayed. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5516.

If a negative determination is made in step SH5514, a determination is made in step SH5515 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the menu screen 3000 was displayed. If a negative determination is made here, the process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH5515, the process proceeds to step SH5516.

Then, in step SH5516, the display of the menu screen 3000 is terminated, and this processing ends. As a result, if the player presses the effect button 125 while the menu screen 3000 is displayed, or if a predetermined display time has elapsed, the display of the menu screen 3000 is terminated, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 is provided with a reset function that returns to the original screen, such as a demo effect. Due to this reset function, if no operation input is made to select one of the above menu items, such as "Language Settings," while the menu screen 3000 is displayed before a predetermined period of time has elapsed, in order to transition to a state in which the language setting screen 3001, etc. is displayed, it will be necessary to display the menu screen 3000 again.

In this embodiment, the menu screen 3000 disappears from the effect display device 42 (display unit 42a) and returns to the original screen when the effect button 125 is operated or the display time has elapsed. However, alternatively or additionally, the effect display device 42 (display unit 42a) may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo effect, when a game ball is launched or when a game ball enters a predetermined entry means, such as the start entry section 33WA or 33WB, while the menu screen 3000 is displayed (the same applies to when other setting screens belonging to subcategories of the menu screen 3000, such as the language setting screen 3001, are displayed).

With the above configuration, the player can move the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the menu screen 3000 by operating the up button 126a or down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select a menu item, or can confirm the menu item selected with the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126. In this way, when a specific menu item is selected on the menu screen 3000, a screen corresponding to the selected menu item is displayed on the effect display device 42.

For example, when the menu screen 3000, which constitutes the setting mode information, is displayed and the player selects "Language Settings," the language setting screen 3001, which constitutes the input section, is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 2-54 (b)). Furthermore, once the language setting screen 3001 is displayed, a predetermined suppression function prevents other menu items that were previously displayed on the menu screen 3000 from being displayed.

In this embodiment, the language setting screen 3001 displays three language options that the player can choose from: "Japanese," "Chinese," and "ENGLISH." Of course, the language options are not limited to these, and the player may also be able to select a language different from these.

Here, the language setting process in step SH5505 above will be explained with reference to Figure 2-51.

As shown in the figure, the "language setting process" first determines in step SH5600 whether the language setting screen 3001 [see Figure 2-54(b)] is currently being displayed on the performance display device 42. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5602.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH5600, a language setting screen display process is executed in step SH5601 to display the language setting screen 3001 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the language setting screen 3001 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

Next, in step SH5602, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the language setting screen 3001 is displayed. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5604.

If a negative determination is made in step SH5602, a determination is made in step SH5603 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the language setting screen 3001 was displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the output function displays notification information such as "Language setting is finished" in step SH5604, and the display of the language setting screen 3001 is terminated. Then, in the following step SH5605, the screen returns to the menu screen 3000, and this process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5603 above, then in step SH5606, it is determined based on button operation input whether "Japanese" was selected from the language options displayed on the language setting screen 3001 ("Japanese," "Chinese," and "ENGLISH").

If step SH5606 returns a positive result, step SH5607 performs processing to set Japanese as the language used. Specifically, the value of the language setting flag, which is information related to game specifications, is set to a value corresponding to "Japanese" (e.g., "01"). After that, processing proceeds through steps SH5604 and SH5605, and ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5606, in step SH5608, it is determined whether "Chinese" was selected from the language options displayed on the language setting screen 3001 based on button operation input.

If step SH5608 returns a positive result, step SH5609 performs processing to set Chinese as the language used. Specifically, the value of the language setting flag, which is information related to game specifications, is set to a value corresponding to "Chinese" (e.g., "02"). Then, processing proceeds through steps SH5604 and SH5605, and ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5608, in step SH5610, it is determined whether "ENGLISH" was selected from the language options displayed on the language setting screen 3001 based on button operation input.

If step SH5610 returns a positive result, step SH5611 performs processing to set English as the language used. Specifically, the value of the language setting flag, which is information related to game specifications, is set to a value corresponding to "English" (e.g., "03"). After that, processing proceeds through steps SH5604 and SH5605, and terminates. If step SH5610 returns a negative result, processing terminates.

With the above configuration, the player can move the cursor 3100 up or down on the language setting screen 3001 by operating the up button 126a or the down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select a language option, and then confirm the language option selected by the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126. When the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the language, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion message, such as "The language has been set to English," indicating that the player has completed input of the language selected by the player. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the value of the language setting flag set in the language setting area of RAM 553 to a value corresponding to the language selected by the player, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000. However, if the player does not change the language used here from the default language (Japanese), or if the player inputs a language that is the same as the default language, the output setting process will set the language to the same as the default language.

Of course, if the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the language to be used, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo effect, without returning to the menu screen 3000. In other words, if the language setting screen 3001 is temporarily closed, a restriction function may be used to establish a predetermined condition, causing the menu screen 3000 to be displayed again on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, and the language setting screen 3001 may not be displayed unless a language setting is selected.

The sub-control device 262 will generate image data and output audio using the corresponding language data based on the value of the language setting flag selected and set as described above. This allows for the display of Japanese, Chinese, and English versions of variable effects, gameplay explanations, and operation guides.

Now, when the player selects "Volume Setting" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000 while the menu screen 3000 is displayed, the volume setting screen 3002, which constitutes the input section, is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 2-55(a)). Furthermore, when an information output state occurs in which the volume setting screen 3002 is displayed, a predetermined suppression function is activated, and the other menu items that were being displayed on the menu screen 3000 are no longer displayed.

In this embodiment, the volume setting screen 3002 displays five volume levels that the player can select: "1," "2," "3," "4," and "5." Of course, the number of volume levels that the player can select is not limited to this, and other different configurations may be adopted.

Here, the volume setting process in step SH5507 above will be explained with reference to Figure 2-52.

As shown in the figure, the "volume setting process" first determines in step SH5700 whether the volume setting screen 3002 is being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5702.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH5700, step SH5701 performs a volume setting screen display process to display the volume setting screen 3002, and then the process proceeds to step SH5702. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the volume setting screen 3002 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

In the following step SH5702, it is determined whether a volume-up operation has been performed using the right button 126d. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5704.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5702, volume up processing is executed to increase the volume in step SH5703, and then the process proceeds to step SH5704.

In step SH5704, it is determined whether a volume-down operation has been performed using the left button 126c. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5706.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5704, volume down processing is executed to lower the volume in step SH5705, and then the process proceeds to step SH5706.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 temporarily stores the volume level value selected and set by the player in a specified area during the volume up process and volume down process. After the value is confirmed, the volume level value set in the volume level setting area of RAM 553 is updated to the volume level value selected and set as described above, as described below.

Next, in step SH5706, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the volume setting screen 3002 is displayed. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5708.

On the other hand, if the result of step SH5706 is negative, step SH5707 determines whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the volume setting screen 3002 was displayed. If the result of this determination is negative, the process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5707, in step SH5708, the output function displays notification information such as "Volume setting is finished" and the display of the volume setting screen 3002 is terminated, and in the following step SH5609, the screen returns to the menu screen 3000, and this processing is terminated.

With the above configuration, the player can move the cursor 3100 left or right on the volume setting screen 3002 by operating the left button 126c or the right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to select the desired volume level, and then press the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126 to confirm the volume level selected by the cursor 3100. When the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the volume level, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion message, such as "Level 2 has been selected as the volume level." This indicates that the volume level selected by the player has been entered. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the volume level value set in the volume level setting area of RAM 553 to the volume level value selected by the player through the volume up and volume down processes, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000. However, if the player does not change the volume level from the default value, or if the player inputs a value that is the same as the default value, the output setting process will set the volume level to the default value.

As above, when the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the volume level, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo effect, without returning to the menu screen 3000. In other words, if the volume setting screen 3002 is temporarily closed, a restriction function may be used to establish a predetermined condition, causing the menu screen 3000 to be displayed again on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, and the volume setting screen 3002 may not be displayed unless a volume setting is selected.

Now, when the player selects "Brightness Settings" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000, the brightness settings screen 3003, which constitutes the input section, is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 2-55(b)). Furthermore, when an information output state occurs in which the brightness settings screen 3003 is displayed, a predetermined suppression function is activated, and the other menu items that were being displayed on the menu screen 3000 are no longer displayed.

In this embodiment, the brightness setting screen 3003 displays five brightness levels that the player can select: "1," "2," "3," "4," and "5." Of course, the number of brightness levels that the player can select is not limited to this, and other different configurations may be adopted.

Here, the brightness setting process of step SH5509 above will be explained with reference to Figure 2-53.

As shown in the figure, the "brightness setting process" first determines in step SH5800 whether the brightness setting screen 3003 is being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5802.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH5800, step SH5801 performs brightness setting screen display processing to display the brightness setting screen 3003, and then the process proceeds to step SH5802. This processing causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the brightness setting screen 3003 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

Then, in step SH5802, it is determined whether a brightness-up operation has been performed using the right button 126d. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5804.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5802, brightness increase processing is performed to increase the brightness in step SH5803, and then the process proceeds to step SH5804.

In step SH5804, it is determined whether a brightness-down operation has been performed using the left button 126c. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5806.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5804, brightness down processing is performed to reduce the brightness in step SH5805, and then the process proceeds to step SH5806.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 temporarily stores the brightness level value selected and set by the player in a specified area during the brightness increase process and brightness decrease process. Then, after it is confirmed, as described below, the brightness level value set in the brightness level setting area of RAM 553 is updated to the brightness level value selected and set as described above.

Next, in step SH5806, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the brightness setting screen 3003 is displayed. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5808.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SH5806 is negative, then in step SH5807 it is determined whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the brightness setting screen 3003 was displayed. If the determination here is negative, then this processing is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5807, in step SH5808, the output function displays notification information such as "Brightness setting is finished" and the display of the brightness setting screen 3003 is terminated, and in the following step SH5609, the screen returns to the menu screen 3000, and this processing is terminated.

With the above configuration, the player can move the cursor 3100 left or right on the brightness setting screen 3003 by operating the left button 126c or the right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to select the desired brightness level, and then press the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126 to confirm the brightness level selected by the cursor 3100. When the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the brightness level, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion message, such as "Level 5 has been selected as the brightness level." The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the brightness level value set in the brightness level setting area of RAM 553 to the brightness level value determined by the player through the brightness increase and decrease processes, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000. However, if the player does not change the brightness level from the default value, or if the player inputs a value that is the same as the default value, the output setting process will set the same value as the default value.

As above, when the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the brightness level, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo effect, without returning to the menu screen 3000. In other words, if the brightness setting screen 3003 is once closed, a restriction function may be used to establish a predetermined condition, causing the menu screen 3000 to be displayed again on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, and the brightness setting may not be displayed unless a brightness setting is selected.

Now, when the player selects "Effect Customization" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000, the effect customization screen 3004, which constitutes the input section, is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 2-55(c)). Furthermore, when an information output state occurs in which the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed, a predetermined suppression function is activated, and the other menu items that were being displayed on the menu screen 3000 are no longer displayed.

The effect customization screen 3004 displays multiple types of customization items that the player can perform. For example, in this embodiment, four customization items are displayed: "BGM Settings," which changes the music played during a specified effect; "Character Settings," which changes the character displayed during a specified effect; "Background Settings," which changes the background image displayed during a specified effect; and "Preview Effects Settings," which changes the appearance rate of preview effects, etc.

Here, the effect customization process of step SH5511 above will be explained with reference to Figure 2-89.

As shown in the figure, the "effect customization process" first determines in step SH35500 whether the effect customization screen 3004 [see Figure 2-55(c)] is currently being displayed on the effect display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35504.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH35500, a performance customization screen display process is executed in step SH35503 to display the performance customization screen 3004 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the performance customization screen 3004 on the performance display device 42.

Next, in step SH35504, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "BGM Settings" from the multiple customization items displayed on the effect customization screen 3004. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH35506.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35504, in step SH35505, BGM setting processing is executed, which is a transition state in which the music played in a specified effect is changed, and then the process proceeds to step SH35506. Details of the BGM setting processing will be described later.

Next, in step SH35506, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Character Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the effect customization screen 3004. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH35508.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35506, in step SH35507, character setting processing is executed, which is a transition state in which the settings of the character displayed in the specified presentation are changed, and then the process proceeds to step SH35508. Details of the character setting processing will be described later.

Next, in step SH35508, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Background Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the effect customization screen 3004. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH35510.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35508, in step SH35509, background setting processing is executed, which is a transition state in which the background image displayed in a specified effect is changed, and then the process proceeds to step SH35510. Details of the background setting processing will be described later.

Next, in step SH35510, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Preview Effect Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the effect customization screen 3004. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH35514.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35510, in step SH35511, a preview effect setting process is executed, which is a transition state in which the appearance rate and other settings as output settings of the preview effect that constitutes the effect section are changed, and then the process proceeds to step SH35514. Details of the preview effect setting process will be described later.

Next, in step SH35514, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH35516.

If a negative determination is made in step SH35514, step SH35515 determines whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the effect customization screen 3004 was displayed. If a negative determination is made here, this processing ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH35515, the processing proceeds to step SH35516.

Then, in step SH35516, the display of the effect customization screen 3004 is terminated, and this processing is terminated. As a result, if the player presses the effect button 125 while the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed, or if a predetermined display time has elapsed, the display of the effect customization screen 3004 is terminated, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 is equipped with a reset function that returns to the previous screen (menu screen 3000). Due to this reset function, if no operation input is made to select one of the above customization items, such as "BGM Settings," before a predetermined period of time has elapsed while the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed, it will be necessary to display the effect customization screen 3004 again in order to transition to a state where the BGM settings screen 4001, etc. is displayed.

In this embodiment, when the effect button 125 is operated or the display time has elapsed, the effect customization screen 3004 disappears from the effect display device 42 (display unit 42a) and returns to the previous screen (menu screen 3000). However, instead, the display may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo effect.

With the above configuration, the player can move the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the effect customization screen 3004 by operating the up button 126a or down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select a customization item, or can confirm the customization item selected with the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126. In this way, when a specific customization item is selected on the effect customization screen 3004, a screen corresponding to the selected customization item is displayed on the effect display device 42.

For example, when the effect customization screen 3004, which constitutes the setting mode information, is displayed and the player selects "BGM Settings," the BGM setting screen 4001, which constitutes the input section, is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 2-90). Furthermore, when an information output state occurs in which the BGM setting screen 4001 is displayed, a predetermined suppression function prevents other customization items that were displayed on the effect customization screen 3004 from being displayed.

In this embodiment, the BGM setting screen 4001 displays two BGM options that the player can choose from: "BGM during symbol fluctuation" and "BGM during jackpot." Of course, the BGM options are not limited to these, and the player may also be able to select BGM different from these.

Here, when the BGM setting screen 4001, which constitutes the setting mode information, is displayed and the player selects "BGM during symbol change," the BGM setting screen 4002 during symbol change is displayed on the effect display device 42 [see Figure 2-91(a)]. Similarly, when the BGM setting screen 4001 is displayed and the player selects "BGM during jackpot," the BGM setting screen 4003 during jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 42 [see Figure 2-91(b)].

Furthermore, when the BGM setting screen 4002 for symbol fluctuations or the BGM setting screen 4003 for jackpots is displayed, a predetermined suppression function is activated and other customization items that were displayed on the BGM setting screen 4001 are no longer displayed.

A detailed explanation using a flowchart will be omitted, but with the above configuration, the player first moves the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the BGM setting screen 4002 for symbol fluctuations or the BGM setting screen 4003 for jackpots by operating the up button 126a or down button 126b of the cross key 126 to select the item they want to customize (the performance order or performance round as output settings), and then operates the right button 126d to confirm the customization item. Next, for the selected customization item, they operate the up button 126a or down button 126b of the cross key 126 to select a specific song from a list of songs (e.g., songs 1-10), and then confirm the song by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the cross key 126.

Then, by the player confirming the various BGM settings in this manner, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display indicating that the input of the specified customization items (BGM) selected by the player is complete, such as "Song 7 has been selected as the music for rounds 1 through 3 during the jackpot." The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the various BGM information (such as flag values and setting values corresponding to songs, etc.) set in the effect customization information storage area of RAM 553 (see Figure 2-107) to the various BGM information selected by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000. However, if the player does not change the specified BGM information from the default or if the player has entered the same information as the default, the same information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figures, the output setting contents such as "melody," "genre," "tempo," and "instrument played" may be configured to be customizable in more detail as subcategories for each song (BGM). Of course, a setting screen for customizing these subcategories may be displayed on the performance display device 42.

However, increasing the number of customization items in this way would require an enormous amount of time and effort to customize all of the items to suit the player's preferences, and the customization operations required of players when inputting various information into the gaming machine would become complicated and cumbersome. As a result, there is a risk that players would be put off by the customization function.

In this regard, in this embodiment, as will be described later, players can customize their own mobile terminal 2000 in advance, thereby improving convenience. It is also possible to configure the detailed customization items, such as the "melody," "genre," "tempo," and "instrument played," as mentioned above, so that they cannot be customized on the pachinko machine 10 itself, but can only be customized in the app on the mobile terminal 2000.

Next, the character setting process of step SH35507 will be explained with reference to Figure 2-92.

As shown in the figure, the "character setting process" first determines in step SH35600 whether the character setting screen 4004 [see Figure 2-93(a)], which constitutes the input section, is currently being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35602.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH35600, a character setting screen display process is executed in step SH35601 to display the character setting screen 4004 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the character setting screen 4004 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

Next, in step SH35602, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the character setting screen 4004 is displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35604.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35602, a judgment is made in step SH35603 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the character setting screen 4004 was displayed. If a positive judgment is made here, the output function is used in step SH35604 to display notification information such as "Character setting is finished" and the display of the character setting screen 4004 is terminated, and in the following step SH35605 the process returns to the effect customization screen 3004, terminating this processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35603 above, then in step SH35606, it is determined based on button operation input whether a "main character" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the character setting screen 4004 ("main character," "sub-character," "design," and "reserved icon").

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35606, main character setting processing is performed in step SH35607. After that, processing goes through steps SH35604 and SH35605, and ends.

When the main character setting process of step SH35607 is performed, a main character setting screen display process is executed to display the main character setting screen 4005 [see Figure 2-93(b)] on the effect display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the main character setting screen 4005 on the effect display device 42. When an information output state occurs in which the main character setting screen 4005 is displayed, a specified suppression function prevents other customization items that were previously displayed on the character setting screen 4004.

In this embodiment, the main character setting screen 4005 displays four main character options that the player can choose from: "Girl," "Boy," "Robot," and "Monster." Of course, the main character options are not limited to these, and the player may also be able to select a main character different from these.

When the main character setting screen 4005, which constitutes the setting mode information, is displayed, if the player selects, for example, "girl," the girl character setting screen 4006, which constitutes the input section, is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 2-94). Similarly, although not shown, if "boy" is selected, the boy character setting screen is displayed on the effect display device 42; if "robot" is selected, the robot character setting screen is displayed on the effect display device 42; and if "monster" is selected, the monster character setting screen is displayed on the effect display device 42.

Furthermore, when an information output state occurs in which the girl character setting screen 4006, etc. is displayed, a predetermined suppression function will activate and other customization items that were displayed on the main character setting screen 4005 will no longer be displayed.

In this embodiment, the girl character setting screen 4006 etc. generates an output selection state in which character feature options such as "face," "body type," "clothing," and "accessories" are displayed as character feature options that the player can select (see Figure 2-94). The player can then select the type that suits their preference for each of the above character features from multiple types (for example, for "body type," Type 1 (slim), Type 2 (standard), Type 3 (plus), etc.)). Of course, the character feature options are not limited to these, and the player may also be configured to be able to select character features different from these.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, various customization items such as "hairstyle," "eyes," "nose," and "mouth" are provided as subcategory options related to the character characteristic "face" (see Figure 2-107). Of course, this configuration is not limited to this, and the player may be able to customize various other subcategory items. Of course, a configuration may also be adopted in which a settings screen for customizing the subcategory is displayed on the effect display device 42.

Then, by operating the cross key 126, the player confirms the various main character settings. This causes the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to perform an input completion display, such as "A girl has been selected as the main character." This indicates that the input of the specified customization items (main character) selected by the player is complete. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the various character information (such as flag values and setting values corresponding to the main character) set in the effect customization information storage area (see FIG. 2-107) of RAM 553 to the various character information selected by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified character information from the default (in this embodiment, a girl character is set as the default), or if the player has entered the same character information as the default, the same character information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35606, then in step SH35608, it is determined whether a "sub-character" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the character setting screen 4004 based on button operation input.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35608, sub-character setting processing is performed in step SH35609. After that, processing goes through steps SH35604 and SH35605, and ends.

When the sub-character setting process of step SH35609 is performed, a sub-character setting screen display process is executed to display a sub-character setting screen (not shown) constituting the input section on the effect display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the sub-character setting screen on the effect display device 42. Then, when an information output state occurs in which the sub-character setting screen is displayed, a predetermined suppression function operates to prevent other customization items that were displayed on the character setting screen 4004 from being displayed.

In this embodiment, the sub-character setting screen displays four sub-character options that the player can choose from: "dolphin," "manta ray," "whale shark," and "whale." Of course, the sub-character options are not limited to these, and the player may also be able to select a sub-character different from these.

Then, by operating the directional pad 126, the player confirms the sub-character setting. This causes the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to perform an input completion display, such as "A whale shark has been selected as the sub-character." This indicates that the input of the specified customization item (sub-character) selected by the player is complete. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the sub-character information (such as flag values and setting values corresponding to the sub-character, etc.) set in the effect customization information storage area (see FIG. 2-107) of RAM 553 to the sub-character information selected by the player, as described above. The display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 then returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified sub-character information from the default (in this embodiment, a dolphin is set as the default), or if the player has entered the same sub-character information as the default, the output setting process will set the same sub-character information as the default.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35608, then in step SH35610, it is determined whether a "design" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the character setting screen 4004 based on button operation input.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35610, the pattern design setting process is performed in step SH35611. After that, the process goes through steps SH35604 and SH35605, and then ends.

When the pattern design setting process of step SH35611 is performed, a pattern design setting screen display process is executed to display a pattern design setting screen (not shown) that constitutes the input section on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the pattern design setting screen on the performance display device 42. Then, when an information output state occurs in which the pattern design setting screen is displayed, a predetermined suppression function operates to prevent other customization items that were displayed on the character setting screen 4004 from being displayed.

In this embodiment, the design setting screen displays three decorative design groups ("Tropical Fish Group," "Northern Sea Fish Group," and "Deep Sea Fish Group") as design options that players can choose from. Of course, the design options are not limited to these, and players may also be able to select design options that are different from these.

Then, by operating the cross key 126, the player confirms the design setting. This causes the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to perform an input completion display, indicating that the input of the specified customization item (design) selected by the player is complete, such as displaying "The deep-sea fish group has been selected as the design." The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the design information (such as flag values and setting values related to the design) set in the effect customization information storage area (see FIG. 2-107) of RAM 553 to the design information selected by the player, as described above. The display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 then returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified design information from the default (in this embodiment, the "tropical fish group" is set as the default), or if the player has entered the same design information as the default, the same design information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35610, then in step SH35612, it is determined whether the "hold icon" was selected from the multiple options displayed on the character setting screen 4004 based on the button operation input.

If the answer is yes in step SH35612, the hold icon setting process is performed in step SH35613. After that, the process goes through steps SH35604 and SH35605, and then ends. If the answer is no in step SH35612, the process ends.

When the hold icon setting process of step SH35613 is performed, a hold icon setting screen display process is executed to display the hold icon setting screen (not shown) that constitutes the input section on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the hold icon setting screen on the performance display device 42. Then, when an information output state occurs in which the hold icon setting screen is displayed, a specified suppression function operates to prevent other customization items that were displayed on the character setting screen 4004 from being displayed.

In this embodiment, the reserve icon setting screen displays three reserve icon options that the player can choose from: "life jacket," "swimming goggles," and "peacock pearl." Of course, the reserve icon options are not limited to these, and the player may also be able to select a reserve icon different from these.

Then, by operating the directional pad 126, the player confirms the reserved icon setting. This causes the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to perform an input completion display, such as "Akoya pearl has been selected as the reserved icon." This indicates that the input of the specified customization item (reserved icon) selected by the player has been completed. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the reserved icon information (such as flag values and setting values related to the reserved icon) set in the effect customization information storage area of RAM 553 (see FIG. 2-107) to the reserved icon information selected by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified reserved icon information from the default (in this embodiment, a lifebuoy is set as the default), or if the player has entered the same reserved icon information as the default, the same reserved icon information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

Next, the background (stage) setting process of step SH35509 above will be explained with reference to Figure 2-96.

As shown in the figure, the "background setting process" first determines in step SH35700 whether the background setting screen 4008 (see Figure 2-95), which constitutes the input section, is currently being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35702.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH35700, a background setting screen display process is executed in step SH35701 to display the background setting screen 4008 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the background setting screen 4008 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

Next, in step SH35702, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the background setting screen 4008 is displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35704.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35702, a judgment is made in step SH35703 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the background setting screen 4008 was displayed. If a positive judgment is made here, the output function is used in step SH35704 to display notification information such as "Background setting is finished" and the display of the background setting screen 4008 is terminated, and in the following step SH35705 the process returns to the effect customization screen 3004, terminating this processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35703 above, then in step SH35706, it is determined whether or not "Diving Stage" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the background setting screen 4008 ("Diving Stage," "Cruising Stage," "Deep Sea Stage") based on button operation input.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35706, diving stage setting processing is performed in step SH35707. After that, processing proceeds through steps SH35704 and SH35705, and then ends.

When the diving stage setting process of step SH35707 is performed, a setting process is performed to send a display command to the display control device 45 to display a background image related to the "diving stage" on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 as the background image for the variable display effect that constitutes the effect unit. In this embodiment, the background image related to the "diving stage" is set as the default.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35706, in step SH35708, it is determined whether or not "Cruising Stage" was selected from the multiple options displayed on the background setting screen 4008 based on button operation input.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35708, cruising stage setting processing is performed in step SH35709. After that, processing proceeds through steps SH35704 and SH35705, and then ends.

When the cruising stage setting process of step SH35709 is performed, a setting process is performed to send a display command to the display control device 45 to display a background image related to the "cruising stage" on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 as the background image for the variable display performance that constitutes the performance unit.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35708, in step SH35710, it is determined whether or not "Deep Sea Stage" was selected from the multiple options displayed on the background setting screen 4008 based on button operation input.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35710, deep sea stage setting processing is performed in step SH35711. After that, processing is terminated via steps SH35704 and SH35705. If a negative judgment is made in step SH35710, processing is terminated.

When the deep sea stage setting process of step SH35711 is performed, setting process is performed to send a display command to the display control device 45 to display a background image related to the "deep sea stage" on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 as the background image for the variable display performance that constitutes the performance unit.

When the background (stage) is changed as described above, not only may the background image be changed, but the characters that appear and the presentation method may also be changed. The background (stage) may also be changed not only during standby mode, but also during a predetermined period during the changing display (for example, during a predetermined period from the start of the changing display, during so-called high-speed changes), when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when the player presses the presentation button 125). However, in this case, the customization screen as described above may not be displayed, and the background (stage) may be switched sequentially each time the presentation button 125 is pressed.

Next, the preview effect setting process of step SH35511 above will be explained with reference to Figure 2-98.

As shown in the figure, the "preview effect setting process" first determines in step SH35800 whether the preview effect setting screen 4009 (see Figure 2-97), which constitutes the input section of the effect display device 42, is currently being displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35802.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH35800, a preview performance setting screen display process is executed in step SH35801 to display the preview performance setting screen 4009 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the preview performance setting screen 4009 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

Next, in step SH35802, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the preview effect setting screen 4009 is displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35804.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35802, a judgment is made in step SH35803 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the preview effect setting screen 4009 was displayed. If a positive judgment is made here, the output function is used in step SH35804 to display notification information such as "Preview effect setting is ending" and the display of the preview effect setting screen 4009 is terminated, and in the following step SH35805 the process returns to the effect customization screen 3004, terminating this processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35803 above, then in step SH35806, it is determined based on button operation input whether "Super Reach Effect" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009 ["Super Reach Effect (including Special Reach Effect)", "School of Fish Effect", "Bubble Effect", "Starting Effect (Continuous Preview Effect)", "One-Shot Announcement Effect", "Cut-in Effect", "Manufacturer Recommended Pack"].

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35806, the Super Reach effect setting process is performed in step SH35807. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and ends.

When the super reach effect setting process of step SH35807 is performed, first, a super reach effect setting screen display process is executed to display the super reach effect setting screen 4010 (see Figure 2-99), which constitutes the input section, on the effect display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the super reach effect setting screen 4010 on the effect display device 42. Then, when an information output state occurs in which the super reach effect setting screen 4010 is displayed, a specified suppression function operates to prevent other customization items that were displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009 from being displayed.

In this embodiment, the Super Reach effect setting screen 4010 displays three Super Reach effects ("Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," and "Marine Reach") as Super Reach options that the player can choose whether or not to execute.

The player first moves the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the Super Reach effect setting screen 4010 by operating the up button 126a or down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select the item they wish to customize (either "Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," or "Marine Reach"), and then operates the right button 126d to confirm it as a customization item. Next, for the selected customization item, they operate the left button 126c or right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to select whether or not to execute the effect (ON/OFF), and then confirm whether or not to execute the effect by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126.

Then, by the player confirming whether or not to execute each Super Reach effect in this manner, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display, such as "Kuroshio Reach has been set to off," indicating that the input of the specified customization item (whether or not to execute a Super Reach effect) determined by the player is complete. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the various reach effect information (such as flag values and setting values related to the various Super Reach effects) set in the effect customization information storage area (see Figure 2-107) of RAM 553 to the various reach effect information determined by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified reach effect information from the default, or if the player has entered the same information as the default, the same information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

In this embodiment, the default settings are "Kuroshio Reach" set to "ON", "Coral Reach" set to "ON", and "Marine Reach" set to "ON".

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35806, then in step SH35808, it is determined whether or not "School of Fish Effect" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009 based on button operation input.

In this embodiment, the "school of fish effect" is an effect that can occur when the variable effect develops into a super reach effect, and is a preview effect in which a school of fish character (see Figure 2-48(a), Figure 2-48(b), etc.) appears.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35808, the fish school effect setting process is performed in step SH35809. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and ends.

Before explaining the fish school effect setting process in step SH35809, we will first explain the "reliability (likelihood of winning)" in this embodiment. In this embodiment, "reliability" as an output setting for a predetermined preview effect, such as a school of fish effect or bubble effect, that constitutes the effect unit, refers to the probability that a jackpot state will occur when the predetermined preview effect is executed independently.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the fish school reliability is set to 50%, in the long term, the ratio of the fish school effect being executed when a jackpot fluctuation occurs to the ratio of the fish school effect being executed when a loss fluctuation occurs will be set to 1:1.

For example, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to 1/200, so if variable play is performed 20,000 times under normal conditions, there will be 100 jackpots (= 20,000 times / 200) and 19,900 misses (= 20,000 times - 100 times).

Under this configuration, if the school of fish reliability is set to 70%, the school of fish effect will be executed in 70 of the 100 big win fluctuations, and in 30 of the 19,900 losing fluctuations.

Therefore, in this embodiment, if the fish school reliability is set to 70%, the appearance rate of the fish school effect during a jackpot fluctuation is set to 70% (= 70 times/100 times), and the appearance rate of the fish school effect during a miss fluctuation is set to approximately 0.15% (= 30 times/19,900 times) (the same applies to the bubble effect described below).

Of course, this is not a limitation, and the "reliability" of each preview effect may be set taking into account factors such as the probability of a jackpot occurring when multiple preview effects are executed.

In light of this, in this embodiment, when performing the fish school effect setting process of step SH35809, the sub-control device 262 first takes into consideration the fish school reliability information stored in the fish school reliability storage area provided in the user-associated area of RAM 553, i.e., the fish school reliability (reliability 10% to 90%) selected and input by the player.

Then, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter corresponding to the reliability stored here (the school of fish reliability selected by the player) are read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the school of fish effect lottery.

However, in this embodiment, regardless of the reliability stored in the fish school reliability storage area (the fish school reliability selected by the player), ROM 552 only stores a 50% reliability effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the fish school effect lottery.

In other words, regardless of whether the reliability stored in the fish school reliability storage area (the fish school reliability selected by the player) is a value between 10% and 90%, the sub-control device 262 sets a presentation selection table and presentation selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% in a specified area of RAM 553.

More specifically, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% that are taken into consideration when a jackpot occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a 50% appearance rate of the school of fish effect (= 50 times/100 times) are set, and as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% that are taken into consideration when a loss occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a 0.25% appearance rate of the school of fish effect (= 50 times/19,900 times) are set.

Here, a reliability of "50%" constitutes the "specific value," and the "first value" or "second value" may be any value between "10% and 90%" excluding "50%." In other words, regardless of whether the value (reliability) input by the player for customization is a value greater than "50%, such as "70%" or "80%," or a smaller value such as "20%" or "30%, processing corresponding to a reliability of "50%" will be performed.

In this way, by always using only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter regardless of the fish school reliability level selected by the player, the player is given the satisfaction of having freely and actively customized the pachinko machine's 10's effect elements in a detailed and diverse manner to suit their preferences. However, the pachinko machine 10 does not need to pre-store numerous effect selection tables corresponding to all values the player can set (reliability levels of 10% to 90%). This prevents the control processing related to the fish school effect setting process from becoming too complicated and reduces the processing burden on the sub-control device 262. Furthermore, by configuring the system so that players cannot customize the fish school effect by inputting reliability levels of "0%" or "100%," even when only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter (for a reliability level of 50%) is always used, the player is able to perceive the customized input values as if they were reflected in the pachinko machine's 10's internal control, preventing any sense of incongruity regarding the fish school reliability.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 as described above is periodically updated by the update function in the counter update process of step SH3905, and is read out when the sub-control device 262 executes the determination process (process for determining whether to execute the school of fish effect) of step SH45207 described above.

Then, in the fish school effect setting process of step SH35809 described above, the reliability setting process shown in Figure 2-100 is performed. This reliability setting process is similar to the reliability setting process performed in the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811 described below, and so its details will be discussed together later.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35808, then in step SH35810, it is determined whether or not "bubble effect" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009 based on the button operation input.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35810, the bubble effect setting process is performed in step SH35811. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and then ends.

When performing the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811, the sub-controller 262, just as when performing the fish school effect setting process of step SH35809, first takes into consideration the bubble reliability information stored in the bubble reliability memory area provided in the user-associated area of RAM 553, i.e., the bubble reliability selected and input by the player (reliability 10% to 90%).

Then, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter corresponding to the reliability stored here (the bubble reliability selected by the player) are read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the bubble effect lottery.

However, in this embodiment, regardless of the reliability stored in the bubble reliability memory area (the bubble reliability selected by the player), ROM 552 pre-stores only the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 30% as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the bubble effect lottery.

In other words, regardless of whether the reliability stored in the bubble reliability memory area (the bubble reliability selected by the player) is a value between 10% and 90%, the sub-control device 262 sets the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 30% in a specified area of RAM 553.

More specifically, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 30% that are taken into consideration when a jackpot occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a bubble effect appearance rate of 30% (= 30 times out of 100 times) are set, and as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 30% that are taken into consideration when a loss occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a bubble effect appearance rate of approximately 0.15% (= 30 times out of 19,900 times) are set.

Here, a reliability of "30%" constitutes the "specific value," and the "first value" or "second value" may be any value between "10% and 90%" excluding "30%." In other words, regardless of whether the value (reliability) input by the player for customization is a value greater than "30%," such as "70%" or "80%," or a smaller value such as "15%" or "25%," processing corresponding to a reliability of "30%" will be performed.

In this way, by always using only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter regardless of the bubble reliability selected by the player, the player is given the satisfaction of having freely and actively customized the effect elements of the pachinko machine 10 in a detailed and diverse manner to suit their preferences, while the pachinko machine 10 does not need to pre-store numerous effect selection tables corresponding to all values that the player can set (reliability levels of 10% to 90%), thereby suppressing the complexity of the control processing related to the bubble effect setting process and reducing the processing burden on the sub-control device 262. Furthermore, by configuring the system so that players cannot customize bubble effects by inputting reliability levels of "0%" or "100%," even when only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter (for a reliability level of 30%) is always used, the player is able to perceive the input values they customized as being reflected in the specified internal control of the pachinko machine 10, preventing them from feeling any discomfort regarding bubble reliability.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 as described above is periodically updated by the update function in the counter update process of step SH3905, and is read out when the sub-control device 262 executes the determination process (bubble effect execution determination process) of step SH45209 described above.

Then, in the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811 described above, the reliability setting process shown in Figure 2-100 is performed.

Here, we will explain the reliability setting process performed in the fish school effect setting process of step SH35809 and the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811, etc., with reference to Figure 2-100.

As shown in the figure, the reliability setting process first determines in step SH36100 whether the reliability setting screen 4015 [see Figure 2-101(a)] corresponding to a specified effect (fish school effect or bubble effect) is being displayed on the effect display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH36102.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH36100, step SH36101 performs a reliability setting screen display process to display the reliability setting screen 4015 that constitutes the input section, and then the process proceeds to step SH36102. This process causes the sub-controller 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display controller 45, and the display controller 45 controls the display to display the reliability setting screen 4015 on the performance display device 42. When an information output state occurs in which the reliability setting screen 4015 is displayed, a predetermined suppression function prevents other performance setting items that were displayed on the preview performance setting screen 4009 from being displayed.

In addition, the reliability setting screen 4015 in this embodiment displays a gauge (symbol omitted) that allows the player to adjust the reliability, and below it the current selected level value (e.g., 50%) is displayed numerically. In this embodiment, the player can select the reliability in 1% increments between a lower limit of 10% and an upper limit of 90%. Of course, this is not limiting, and other different configurations may also be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the player can select the reliability in 5% increments between a lower limit of 5% and an upper limit of 95%.

In the following step SH36102, it is determined whether a reliability increase operation has been performed by operating the right button 126d of the cross key 126 to move the cursor 3100 to the right and select the desired reliability level. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH36105.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH36102, step SH36103 determines whether the reliability has reached the upper limit (90% in this embodiment). If the reliability has already reached the upper limit, the process proceeds directly to step SH36105.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH36103 (if the upper limit value has not been reached), a reliability increase process is performed in step SH36104 to increase the reliability, and then the process proceeds to step SH36105.

In step SH36105, it is determined whether a reliability down operation has been performed by operating the left button 126c of the cross key 126 to move the cursor 3100 to the left and select the desired reliability level. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH36108.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH36105, step SH36106 determines whether the reliability has reached the lower limit (10% in this embodiment). If the reliability has already reached the lower limit, the process proceeds directly to step SH36108.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH36106 (if the lower limit value has not been reached), a reliability down process is performed in step SH36107 to lower the reliability, and then the process proceeds to step SH36108.

Next, in step SH36108, it is determined whether the effect button 125 or the center button (decision button) 126e of the directional pad 126 was operated while the reliability setting screen 4015 was displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH36110.

On the other hand, if the result of step SH36108 is negative, step SH36109 determines whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the reliability setting screen 4015 was displayed. If the result of this determination is negative, this processing is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH36109, in step SH36110, the output function displays notification information such as "Reliability setting is finished" and the display of the reliability setting screen 4015 is terminated, and in the following step SH36111, the display returns to the preview performance setting screen 4009, and this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, after the reliability increase process of step SH36104 or the reliability decrease process of step SH36107 has been performed, the player can confirm the reliability level selected in the reliability increase process or reliability decrease process by, for example, pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126, as described above.

Once the reliability level corresponding to the specified effect (school of fish effect or bubble effect) is determined, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display, such as "75% reliability has been entered," indicating that the player has completed input of the reliability of the specified effect (school of fish reliability or bubble reliability), as shown in FIG. 2-101(b). The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the reliability information (such as setting values related to school of fish reliability or bubble reliability) set in the effect custom information storage area (school of fish reliability storage area or bubble reliability storage area) of RAM 553 to the reliability information determined by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified reliability information from the default or if the player has entered the same reliability information as the default, the same reliability information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

In this embodiment, the reliability of the effect selection table (the effect selection table set in a predetermined area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table for the specific effect lottery) internally referenced by the sub-control device 262 when determining whether or not a specific effect (school of fish effect or bubble effect) will be executed does not necessarily match the reliability actually entered by the player (the reliability stored in the school of fish reliability memory area or bubble reliability memory area). However, by displaying the input completion display as described above, it is possible to make it appear as if the reliability entered by the player was set as the reliability when determining whether or not a specific effect will be executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, an image containing text information such as "School of fish reliability input value: 75%" may be displayed as notification information in a predetermined position (such as the bottom edge) of the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to prevent the player from forgetting the value they entered.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35810, then in step SH35812, it is determined whether or not "Starting performance (continuous preview performance)" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview performance setting screen 4009 based on button operation input.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35812, the process of setting the initial effect (continuous preview effect) is performed in step SH35813. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and ends.

When the advance performance (continuous preview performance) setting process of step SH35813 is performed, an advance performance setting screen display process is first executed to display the advance performance setting screen (not shown), which constitutes the input section, on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the advance performance setting screen is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45. Then, when an information output state occurs in which the advance performance setting screen is displayed, a specified suppression function operates to prevent other customization items that were displayed on the preview performance setting screen 4009 from being displayed.

Here, on the starting effect setting screen, the player moves the displayed cursor 3100 by operating the left button 126c or the right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to select whether or not to execute the starting effect (ON/OFF), and then confirms whether or not to execute the effect by pressing the center button (decision button) 126e of the directional pad 126.

Then, by the player confirming whether or not to execute the first effect in this manner, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display, such as "First effect has been set to OFF," to indicate that the input of the effect mode (whether or not to execute the first effect) determined by the player is complete. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the first effect information (such as the value of the first effect execution flag) set in the effect customization information storage area of RAM 553 (see FIG. 2-107) to the first effect information determined by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the first effect information from the default or if the player has entered the same information as the default, the same information as the default will be set in the output setting process. In this embodiment, the "first effect (first effect execution flag)" is set to "ON" as the default setting.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35812, then in step SH35814, it is determined whether or not a "single announcement effect" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009 based on button operation input.

In this embodiment, the "one-shot notification effect" is an effect that notifies the player that the current fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation (an effect that notifies the player in advance that a jackpot state will occur). In this embodiment, the one-shot notification effect is a light-emitting effect that causes the central illumination unit 103 to flash.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35814, the one-shot announcement effect setting process is performed in step SH35815. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and ends.

When the single-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815 is performed, the sub-control device 262 first takes into consideration the single-shot announcement appearance rate information stored in the single-shot announcement appearance rate storage area provided in the user-associated area of the RAM 553, i.e., the single-shot announcement appearance rate (appearance rate 0% to 100%) selected and input by the player.

If the one-shot announcement appearance rate is set to "0%", the one-shot announcement effect 0% flag located in a specified area of RAM 553 is set to ON. Also, if the one-shot announcement appearance rate is set to "100%," the one-shot announcement effect 100% flag is set to ON. Note that in the default setting, both the one-shot announcement effect 0% flag and the one-shot announcement effect 100% flag are set to OFF.

On the other hand, if the one-shot announcement appearance rate is set to any value between 1% and 99%, the corresponding effect selection table and effect selection random number counter are read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the one-shot announcement effect lottery.

However, in this embodiment, regardless of the appearance rate stored in the one-shot announcement appearance rate storage area (the one-shot announcement appearance rate selected by the player), ROM 552 only stores an effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for an appearance rate of 40% as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the one-shot announcement effect lottery.

In other words, regardless of whether the appearance rate stored in the one-shot announcement appearance rate storage area (the one-shot announcement appearance rate selected by the player) is a value between 1% and 99%, the sub-control device 262 sets the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for an appearance rate of 40% in a specified area of RAM 553.

Here, the appearance rate of "40%" constitutes the "specific value," and the "first value" or "second value" may be any value between "1% and 99%" excluding "40%." In other words, regardless of whether the value (appearance rate) entered by the player for customization is a value greater than "40%," such as "70%" or "80%," or a smaller value such as "20%" or "30%," processing corresponding to the appearance rate of "40%" will be performed.

In this way, by always using only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter regardless of the one-shot announcement appearance rate selected by the player, the player is given the satisfaction of having freely and actively customized the Pachinko machine's 10's effect elements in a detailed and diverse manner to suit their preferences, while the Pachinko machine 10 does not need to pre-store numerous effect selection tables, etc., corresponding to all values that the player can set (appearance rate 1% to 99%). This prevents the control processing related to the one-shot announcement effect setting process from becoming too complicated and reduces the processing burden on the sub-control device 262.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 is periodically updated by the update function in the counter update process of step SH3905, and is read out at a predetermined timing (such as the determination process of step SH45205 above), such as when the sub-control device 262 receives a variation pattern command.

Then, in the one-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815 described above, the appearance rate setting process shown in Figure 2-102 is performed. This appearance rate setting process is similar to the appearance rate setting process performed in the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817 described below, and so its details will be discussed together later.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35814, then in step SH35816, it is determined whether or not a "cut-in effect" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009 based on button operation input.

In this embodiment, the "cut-in effect" is an effect that can be performed when the variable effect develops into a super reach effect (including when it further develops into a special reach effect), in which the main character or other characters appear by cutting in.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35816, cut-in effect setting processing is performed in step SH35817. After that, processing goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and ends.

When the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817 is performed, the sub-control device 262 first takes into consideration the cut-in appearance rate information stored in the cut-in appearance rate storage area provided in the user-associated area of the RAM 553, i.e., the cut-in appearance rate selected and input by the player (appearance rate 0% to 100%).

If the cut-in appearance rate is set to "0%", the cut-in effect 0% flag located in a specified area of RAM 553 is set to ON. If the cut-in appearance rate is set to "100%," the cut-in effect 100% flag is set to ON. Note that in the default setting, both the cut-in effect 0% flag and the cut-in effect 100% flag are set to OFF.

On the other hand, if the cut-in appearance rate is set to anywhere between 1% and 99%, the corresponding effect selection table and effect selection random number counter are read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the cut-in effect lottery.

However, in this embodiment, regardless of the appearance rate stored in the cut-in appearance rate storage area (the cut-in appearance rate selected by the player), ROM 552 pre-stores only the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a 60% appearance rate as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the cut-in effect lottery.

In other words, regardless of whether the appearance rate stored in the cut-in appearance rate storage area (the cut-in appearance rate selected by the player) is a value between 1% and 99%, the sub-control device 262 sets an effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for an appearance rate of 60% in a specified area of RAM 553.

Here, the appearance rate of "60%" constitutes the "specific value," and the "first value" or "second value" may be any value between "1% and 99%" excluding "60%." In other words, regardless of whether the value (appearance rate) input by the player for customization is a value greater than "60%," such as "70%" or "80%," or a smaller value such as "20%" or "30%," processing corresponding to the appearance rate of "60%" will be performed.

In this way, by always using only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter regardless of the cut-in appearance rate selected by the player, the player is given the satisfaction of having freely and actively customized the Pachinko machine's 10's effect elements in a detailed and diverse manner to suit their preferences, while the Pachinko machine 10 does not need to pre-store numerous effect selection tables corresponding to all values that the player can set (appearance rate 1% to 99%), thereby preventing the control processing related to the cut-in effect setting process from becoming too complicated and reducing the processing burden on the sub-control device 262.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 is periodically updated by the update function in the counter update process of step SH3905, and is read out at a predetermined timing (such as the determination process of step SH45202 above), such as when the sub-control device 262 receives a variation pattern command.

Then, in the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817 described above, the appearance rate setting process shown in Figure 2-102 is performed.

Here, we will explain the appearance rate setting process performed in the one-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815 and the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817, etc., with reference to Figure 2-102.

As shown in the figure, the appearance rate setting process first determines in step SH36200 whether the appearance rate setting screen 4016 [see Figure 2-103(a)] corresponding to a specified effect (one-shot announcement effect or cut-in effect) is being displayed on the effect display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH36202.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH36200, step SH36201 performs an appearance rate setting screen display process to display the appearance rate setting screen 4016 that constitutes the input section, and then the process proceeds to step SH36202. This process causes the sub-controller 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display controller 45, and the display controller 45 controls the display to display the appearance rate setting screen 4016 on the effect display device 42. When an information output state occurs in which the appearance rate setting screen 4016 is displayed, a predetermined suppression function prevents other effect setting items that were displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009 from being displayed.

In addition, the appearance rate setting screen 4016 in this embodiment displays a gauge (symbol omitted) that allows the player to adjust the appearance rate, and below it the current selection level value (e.g., 50%) is displayed numerically. In this embodiment, the player can select the appearance rate in 1% increments between a lower limit of 0% and an upper limit of 100%. Of course, this is not limiting, and other different configurations may also be adopted. For example, the configuration may allow the player to select the appearance rate in 5% increments between a lower limit of 5% and an upper limit of 95%.

In the following step SH36202, it is determined whether an appearance rate increase operation has been performed by operating the right button 126d of the cross key 126 to move the cursor 3100 to the right and select the desired appearance rate level. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH36205.

On the other hand, if step SH36202 returns a positive result, step SH36203 determines whether the occurrence rate has reached the upper limit (100% in this embodiment). If the occurrence rate has already reached the upper limit, the process proceeds directly to step SH36205.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH36203 (if the upper limit has not been reached), an appearance rate increase process is executed in step SH36204 to increase the appearance rate, and then the process proceeds to step SH36205.

In step SH36205, it is determined whether an appearance rate down operation has been performed by operating the left button 126c of the cross key 126 to move the cursor 3100 to the left and select the desired appearance rate level. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH36208.

On the other hand, if step SH36205 returns a positive result, step SH36206 determines whether the occurrence rate has reached the lower limit (0% in this embodiment). If the occurrence rate has already reached the lower limit, the process proceeds directly to step SH36208.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH36206 (if the lower limit has not been reached), an appearance rate reduction process is executed in step SH36207 to reduce the appearance rate, and then the process proceeds to step SH36208.

Next, in step SH36208, it is determined whether the effect button 125 or the center button (decision button) 126e of the directional pad 126 was operated while the appearance rate setting screen 4016 was displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH36210.

On the other hand, if the result of step SH36208 is negative, step SH36209 determines whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the appearance rate setting screen 4016 was displayed. If the result of this determination is negative, this processing is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH36209, in step SH36210, the output function displays notification information such as "Ending appearance rate setting" and ends the display of the appearance rate setting screen 4016, and in the subsequent step SH36211, the display returns to the preview performance setting screen 4009, terminating this processing.

In this embodiment, after the appearance rate increase process of step SH36204 or the appearance rate decrease process of step SH36207 has been performed, the player can confirm the appearance rate level selected in the appearance rate increase process or appearance rate decrease process by, for example, pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126, as described above.

Once the appearance rate level corresponding to the specified effect (sudden announcement effect or cut-in effect) is determined, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display, such as "10% appearance rate has been entered," indicating that the player has completed entering the appearance rate of the specified effect determined by the player, as shown in FIG. 2-103(b). The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the appearance rate information (such as setting values related to the sudden announcement effect appearance rate or cut-in effect appearance rate) set in the effect custom information storage area (sudden announcement appearance rate storage area or cut-in appearance rate storage area) of RAM 553 to the appearance rate information determined by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified appearance rate information from the default or if the player has entered the same appearance rate information as the default, the same appearance rate information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate related to the effect selection table (the effect selection table set in a predetermined area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table for the specific effect lottery) that the sub-control device 262 internally references when determining whether or not to execute a specific effect (such as a one-shot announcement effect or a cut-in effect) does not necessarily match the appearance rate actually entered by the player (the appearance rate stored in the one-shot announcement appearance rate memory area or the cut-in appearance rate memory area). However, by displaying the input completion display as described above, it can be made to appear as if the appearance rate entered by the player was set as the appearance rate when determining whether or not to execute a specific effect. Furthermore, to prevent the player from forgetting the value they entered during the variable display, an image containing text information such as "Cut-in appearance rate input value: 30%" may be displayed as notification information in a predetermined position (such as the top edge) of the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35816, then in step SH35818, it is judged based on button operation input whether a "manufacturer recommended pack" was selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009. Note that a "manufacturer recommended pack" is a comprehensive set of custom information in which various customization items that can be customized by the player are each set to the player's discretion.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35818, the manufacturer recommended pack setting process is performed in step SH35819. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and then ends. If a negative judgment is made in step SH35818, the process ends immediately.

When the manufacturer recommended pack setting process of step SH35819 is performed, first a manufacturer recommended pack setting screen display process is executed to display the manufacturer recommended pack setting screen (not shown) that constitutes the input section on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the manufacturer recommended pack setting screen on the performance display device 42. Then, when an information output state occurs in which the manufacturer recommended pack setting screen is displayed, a specified suppression function operates to prevent other customization items that were displayed on the preview performance setting screen 4009 from being displayed.

In this embodiment, the manufacturer recommended pack setting screen displays three manufacturer recommended packs ("More Schools of Fish Pack," "More Bubbles Pack," and "Balanced Pack") as manufacturer recommended pack options that the player can choose from.

Furthermore, when a player uses the mobile terminal 2000 to perform customization, the configuration may be such that an output selection state is generated that allows the player to select from an even greater variety of manufacturer-recommended packs. For example, if a player finds a manufacturer-recommended pack with presentation settings that the player likes on the website of the pachinko machine 10 manufacturer via the mobile terminal 2000 (dedicated app), the player can download it in advance and easily enjoy playing with the presentation settings of their choice the next time they play, or in the stage before that, without having to set each customization item to their preferred settings one by one.

The player first moves the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the manufacturer recommended pack setting screen using the up button 126a or down button 126b of the cross key 126 to select the manufacturer recommended pack they want to select (either "More Schools of Fish Pack," "More Bubbles Pack," or "Balanced Pack"), and then presses the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the cross key 126 to confirm the execution of the manufacturer recommended pack. Of course, it is also possible to return to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category) without selecting any manufacturer recommended pack.

Then, by the player confirming the execution of the manufacturer-recommended pack in this way, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display, such as "The large school of fish pack has been selected," to indicate that the input of the specified recommended pack selected by the player is complete. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the recommended pack information (such as the value of the recommended pack flag) set in the effect custom information storage area of RAM 553 (see Figure 2-107) to the recommended pack information selected by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen of the previous category). However, if the specified recommended pack information is not changed by the player from the default, or if the player has entered the same information as the default, the same information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

In this embodiment, the default setting is that no manufacturer-recommended packs are set. Furthermore, if any manufacturer-recommended packs (such as a pack with more schools of fish, a pack with more bubbles, or a balanced pack) are set, the contents of that manufacturer-recommended pack take priority, and other custom information, such as the reliability settings for individually set school of fish effects or bubble effects, may be disabled.

As shown in FIG. 2-107, the effect customization information storage area provided in RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 includes a fish school reliability storage area that stores the reliability level of the fish school effect selected by the player, a bubble reliability storage area that stores the reliability level of the bubble effect selected by the player, reach execution flags (Kuroshio reach execution flag, coral reach execution flag, marine reach execution flag) that store whether or not various "super reach effects (including special reach effects)" are executed, a preceding effect execution flag that stores whether or not an "advance effect (continuous preview effect)" is executed, a one-shot announcement appearance rate storage area that stores the appearance rate of a "one-shot announcement effect" when a jackpot fluctuation selected by the player occurs, a cut-in appearance rate storage area that stores the appearance rate of a "cut-in effect" when a "super reach effect (including special reach effect)" selected by the player is executed, and a recommended pack flag that indicates that the player has specified a "manufacturer recommended pack" and its type.

Furthermore, when the player selects "Game History" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000, the game history screen 3005 is displayed on the effect display device 42 [see Figure 2-56(a)]. Furthermore, when an information output state occurs in which the game history screen 3005 is displayed, other menu items that were displayed on the menu screen 3000 are no longer displayed due to the operation of a predetermined suppression function.

In this embodiment, the game history screen 3005 displays game history information (game data), such as a graph showing changes in income and expenditures as the game progresses, the total number of jackpots for that day, the number of initial jackpots, and the current number of starts (number of times the variable display has been executed). Of course, the game history information is not limited to these, and other information may be displayed, such as the number of consecutive jackpots executed without returning to the normal state after the initial jackpot (number of consecutive wins). The screen may also display execution history information related to premium effects and jackpot variable display stored in the game information storage area. This allows the player to perceive the input values customized by the player as if they were reflected in the pachinko machine's 10's internal control, while also understanding how these values were reflected in the jackpot variable display based on the correlation with the actual jackpot variable display. As a result, the player may be surprised or delighted by this discrepancy, further enhancing the player's enjoyment. The history information output process in this embodiment may be configured by outputting game history information and execution history information on the game history screen 3005.

In addition, in this embodiment, input operations and the like for executing various processes related to the user-responsive processing of step SH3912 (various settings such as presentation customization) are configured to be performed via the mobile terminal 2000 held by the player.

However, in cases where there are many items that can be customized by the player, such as effect customization, as in this embodiment, direct input operations to the pachinko machine 10 via the effect buttons 125 and directional pad 126 require a great deal of time and effort to customize the settings between the time the player selects the pachinko machine 10 and the time they start playing. Therefore, this embodiment is designed so that, rather than using the effect buttons 125 or directional pad 126, the player customizes various items in advance using an app on the mobile terminal 2000 and stores them. When starting play on the pachinko machine 10, the player can simply input the customization information stored in the mobile terminal 2000 into the pachinko machine 10, allowing the player to easily customize the pachinko machine 10 to their preferred settings without spending time or effort. This configuration is described in detail below.

First, we will explain the configuration of the communication system for data communication between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal 2000. As shown in Figure 2-57, in this embodiment, the system is configured to enable contactless wireless communication between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal 2000 without the need for a cable connection or the like.

First, we will explain the configuration of the NFC module 1100 (hereinafter referred to as the "machine-side NFC module 1100") provided in the bulge 19 of the pachinko machine 10. Figure 2-58 is a plan view showing the machine-side NFC module 1100, and Figure 2-59 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the machine-side NFC module 1100.

As described above, the base-side NFC module 1100 that constitutes the input unit is used to perform wireless communication with other NFC-compatible devices (mobile terminal 2000 in this embodiment) based on the NFC communication standard, and includes a control unit 1101 that controls NFC communication, an antenna unit 1102 that constitutes the output function and detection unit for sending and receiving radio waves for NFC communication, and a memory 1103 that stores various information.

Also, as shown in Figure 2-58, the upper surface (the portion exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 10) of the cover body 11105 that covers the machine-side NFC module 1100 is provided with a touch area 1105a that constitutes a detection unit over which the player holds (closes or touches) the mobile terminal 2000, which is the detection target. A symbol mark 1106 is attached to the touch area 1105a to let the player know that this is the place where the mobile terminal 2000 should be held.

The control unit 1101, which is the detection function unit, is composed of an IC chip (NFC chip) equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and is electrically connected to the sub-control device 262 and antenna unit 1102. The ROM of the control unit 1101 stores various information required for NFC communication, such as communication programs and authentication programs based on the NFC communication standard.

With this configuration, the control unit 1101 has functions such as a receiving unit that detects the current flowing in the antenna unit 1102 (radio waves received by the antenna unit 1102), a demodulating unit that demodulates the signal supplied from the receiving unit, a decoding unit that decodes the signal supplied from the demodulating unit, an input data processing unit that processes data obtained from the decoding unit, an output data processing unit that processes data to be transmitted externally, an encoding unit that encodes data obtained from the output data processing unit, a transmitting unit that passes a current (carrier wave) to the antenna unit 1102 to radiate electromagnetic waves, and a modulation unit that modulates the current flowing from the transmitting unit to the antenna unit 1102 based on a signal supplied from the encoding unit.

The control unit 1101 then controls the sending and receiving of data via NFC communication, such as receiving radio waves from other NFC-compatible devices and sending radio waves to other NFC-compatible devices via the antenna unit 1102.

The control unit 1101 also controls the reading of information from memory 1103 and the writing of information to memory 1103.

The antenna unit 1102 forms a closed-loop coil, and outputs electromagnetic waves as the current flowing through this coil changes. Furthermore, as the magnetic flux passing through this coil changes, a current flows through the antenna unit 1102. This allows the antenna unit 1102 to receive radio waves from other NFC-compatible devices and to transmit radio waves to other NFC-compatible devices.

As described above, the machine-side NFC module 1100 in this embodiment does not have an internal power source for driving the control unit 1101, and normally operates in passive mode. In other words, when a player holds the mobile terminal 2000 within a specified range (within approximately 10 cm) of the touch area 1105a (antenna unit 1102) of the machine-side NFC module 1100, the antenna unit 1102 receives radio waves output from the mobile terminal 2000, and the control unit 1101 is powered by electromagnetic induction, becoming operational.

However, in this embodiment, the base-side NFC module 1100 is also configured to be operable by power supply from the sub-controller 262 as appropriate, and is capable of rewriting the contents of memory 1103 based on instructions from the sub-controller 262. For example, the sub-controller 262 may be configured to set the value of the usage permission flag set in memory 1103 to "1" when the usage permission state is in effect, as described below, and to set the value to "0" when the usage permission state is not in effect.

Memory 1103, which serves as a storage means, is composed of non-volatile memory such as EEPROM, from which data can be read and written by the control unit 1101.

Memory 1103 stores various information, including BT connection information required for the machine-side BT module 1200 to establish a BT communication connection (pairing) with other BT-compatible devices.

In this embodiment, the BT connection information stored includes the device name of the base-side BT module 1200, the BD address (Bluetooth Device Address) of the base-side BT module 1200, and a password (passkey) for establishing a BT communication connection with the base-side BT module 1200.

The BD address is information used to identify a BT-compatible device and is pre-set for each device.

The password is also information used to authenticate another BT-compatible device when establishing a BT communication connection with that device, and is updated as appropriate based on instructions from the sub-control device 262.

In this embodiment, with the above configuration, when a player holds the mobile terminal 2000 over the machine-side NFC module 1100 (touch area 1105a), power is supplied and the control unit 1101 starts up. If the above usage permission flag is set to on, an NFC communication state occurs, and BT connection information such as the BD address stored in memory 1103 is transmitted to an outside of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the mobile terminal 2000) via radio waves transmitted from the antenna unit 1102. The occurrence of an NFC communication state here corresponds to the establishment of an interrupt state.

Note that the configuration of the base-side NFC module 1100 (the same applies to the terminal-side NFC module 2100 described below) is not limited to the above configuration, and other different configurations may be used. For example, a configuration in which the antenna unit 1102 is integrated with the control unit (NFC chip) 1101, or a configuration in which the antenna unit 1102 is provided separately from the base-side NFC module 1100 may be used.

Next, we will explain in detail the configuration of the machine-side BT module 1200 provided within the sub-controller 262 on the pachinko machine 10 side. Figure 2-60 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the machine-side BT module 1200.

As described above, the base-side BT module 1200 is used to establish a BT communication connection with another BT-compatible device (in this embodiment, the mobile terminal 2000) based on the BT communication standard and to perform wireless communication with the BT-compatible device. It includes a control unit 1201 that controls BT communication, an antenna unit 1202 that functions as an output and detection unit for transmitting and receiving radio waves for BT communication, and a memory 1203 that stores various information.

The control unit 1201 is configured using an IC chip (BT chip) equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and is electrically connected to the antenna unit 1202. The control unit 1201 is also electrically connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, RAM 553, etc. of the sub-control unit 262.

The ROM, which serves as the storage means of the control unit 1201, stores various information necessary for BT communication, such as communication programs and authentication programs based on BT communication standards.

With this configuration, the control unit 1201 has functions such as a receiving unit that detects the current flowing in the antenna unit 1202 (radio waves received by the antenna unit 1202), a demodulating unit that demodulates the signal supplied from the receiving unit, a decoding unit that decodes the signal supplied from the demodulating unit, an input data processing unit that processes data obtained from the decoding unit, an output data processing unit that processes data to be transmitted externally, an encoding unit that encodes data obtained from the output data processing unit, a transmitting unit that sends a current (carrier wave) to the antenna unit 1202 to radiate electromagnetic waves, and a modulation unit that modulates the current flowing from the transmitting unit to the antenna unit 1202 based on the signal supplied from the encoding unit.

The control unit 1201 then controls the sending and receiving of data via BT communication, such as receiving radio waves from other BT-compatible devices and sending radio waves to other BT-compatible devices via the antenna unit 1202.

The control unit 1201 also controls the reading of information from memory 1203 and the writing of information to memory 1203.

In this embodiment, the table-side BT module 1200 is configured to operate using power supplied from the sub-controller 262, and is also capable of rewriting the contents of the memory 1203 based on instructions from the sub-controller 262.

Memory 1203, which serves as a storage means, is composed of non-volatile memory such as EEPROM, from which data can be read and written by the control unit 1201.

Memory 1203 stores various information, including BT connection information required for establishing a BT communication connection with other BT-compatible devices.

In this embodiment, the BT connection information stored includes the device name of the table-side BT module 1200, the BD address of the table-side BT module 1200, and a password for establishing a BT communication connection with the table-side BT module 1200.

As mentioned above, the password is information used to authenticate a BT-compatible device when establishing a BT communication connection (pairing) with another BT-compatible device, and is updated as appropriate based on instructions from the sub-control device 262.

Under the above configuration, when a BT communication connection is established between the base-side BT module 1200 and another BT-compatible device (the terminal-side BT module 2200 on the mobile terminal 2000 side, described below), the base-side BT module 1200 can send and receive various data to and from the terminal-side BT module 2200.

Here, the sub-control device 262 can input and output information (such as flag values and setting values) related to the game specifications (such as language settings) described above, as well as output various data (such as moving image data and still image data related to various effects, audio data related to background music and sound effects, and history data related to game history) stored in its own storage means (ROM 552 and RAM 553) and the storage means of the display control device 45 (program ROM 522, work RAM 523, video RAM 524, character ROM 525) to the mobile terminal 2000. This allows the player to display and play this data using their own mobile terminal 2000.

Note that the configuration of the base-side BT module 1200 (the same applies to the terminal-side BT module 2200 described below) is not limited to the above configuration, and other different configurations may be used. For example, a configuration in which the antenna unit 1202 is integrated with the control unit (BT chip) 1201, or a configuration in which the antenna unit 1202 is provided separately from the base-side BT module 1200, may be used.

Next, we will explain in detail the configuration of the mobile terminal 2000 that is capable of wireless communication with the pachinko machine 10.

The mobile terminal 2000 is a communication device that can be carried by a player, and in this embodiment, a multi-function mobile phone known as a smartphone will be used as an example. Figure 2-61 shows the external appearance of the mobile terminal (smartphone) 2000, where (a) is a front view of the mobile terminal 2000 and (b) is a rear view of the mobile terminal 2000. Figure 2-62 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the mobile terminal 2000.

The mobile terminal 2000 comprises a control unit 2001, memory 2002, display unit 2003, operation unit 2004, camera 2005, microphone 2006, speaker 2007, power supply unit 2008, mobile communication module 2009, wireless LAN communication module 2010, an NFC module (hereinafter referred to as the "terminal-side NFC module") 2100 which is a short-range wireless communication circuit unit, and a BT module (hereinafter referred to as the "terminal-side BT module") 2200 which is a short-range wireless communication circuit unit, and each of these components is electrically connected via a bus line.

The control unit 2001 includes a CPU that controls the overall operation of the mobile terminal 2000, a ROM that serves as storage means for storing control programs and fixed value data for causing the CPU to execute various processes, and a RAM that serves as storage means for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM.

Memory 2002 is composed of a hard disk, non-volatile memory, etc. Memory 2002 stores various data such as still image data, moving image data, and music data, as well as various application programs (hereinafter simply referred to as "apps") for implementing various functions on mobile terminal 2000.

In this embodiment, one such app is a dedicated app stored in memory 2002 that enables two-way wireless communication between the mobile terminal 2000 and the pachinko machine 10. This dedicated app can be downloaded by the player from the website of the pachinko machine 10 manufacturer, etc.

Through this dedicated app, the mobile terminal 2000 can send and receive various information to and from the paired pachinko machine 10, display the game history of the pachinko machine 10, and customize the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, various information (BT connection information, history information, information related to game specifications, image data, etc.) received by the mobile terminal 2000 from the pachinko machine 10 via the dedicated app, as well as information related to game specifications set by the player via the dedicated app (flag values and setting values), are stored in memory 2002.

The display unit 2003 is composed of an LCD display, an organic EL display, or the like, and is configured to be able to display various information such as images, videos, text, icons, and a numeric keypad under the control of the control unit 2001.

The operation unit 2004 is stacked on the display unit 2003 and is composed of a touch panel that can be operated by the player. One example is a capacitance-type touch panel, in which the capacitance of the electrodes changes when the player touches it with their finger or a touch pen, making it possible to detect the contact position of a finger or other object.

Then, button icons, a software keyboard, etc. are displayed on the screen of the display unit 2003, and when the player touches the display on the screen with their finger or the like, a predetermined input operation from the player (for example, a communication operation, a character input operation, a selection/determination operation, etc.) is accepted, and processing associated with the displayed part of the button or the like can be executed.

The camera 2005 has an imaging element such as a CCD or CMOS, and can capture still images and moving images. The image data captured by the camera 2005 is stored in the memory 2002.

The camera 2005 may also be used as an input unit that captures and inputs code information (two-dimensional code information such as a QR code, one-dimensional code information such as a barcode) displayed on a pachinko machine 10, etc., so that the information contained in the code information can be read.

The microphone 2006 is a circuit that converts external input sounds, such as the player's voice, into audio signals (electrical signals). The control unit 2001 can store the audio signals input from the microphone 2006 as audio data in the memory 2002, or output them externally via the mobile communication module 2009, etc., to enable voice communication.

The speaker 2007 can output voice, ringtones, alert sounds, music, etc. under the control of the control unit 2001. The control unit 2001 converts voice data (such as call voice and music data) received via the mobile communication module 2009 or the terminal-side BT module 2200, as well as voice data stored in the memory 2002, into an audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to an amplifier built into the speaker 2007, thereby outputting the specified music or voice from the speaker 2007.

The power supply unit 2008 supplies power to each part of the mobile terminal 2000 and is composed of a rechargeable secondary battery or the like.

The mobile communication module 2009 includes an antenna, CPU, memory, etc. (not shown), and is a communication interface for wireless communication (e.g., in the 1.9 GHz band) with a mobile communication network.

The mobile communication network is composed of base stations, exchanges, gateways, etc., and enables mobile terminals 2000 located within the service area of the base station to connect to, for example, telephone networks or the Internet.

As a result, the control unit 2001 controls the mobile communication module 2009, allowing it to, for example, make voice calls with other telephones and send and receive various data to and from web servers on the Internet via the mobile communication network.

The wireless LAN module 2010 that constitutes the input unit has an antenna, CPU, memory, etc. (not shown), and is an interface for wireless LAN communication that complies with the IEEE 802.11 standard, such as Wi-Fi. Wi-Fi is an international standard certified by the Wi-Fi Alliance for interoperability between wireless LAN devices.

As a result, the control unit 2001 can control the wireless LAN module 2010 to send and receive various data to and from, for example, a web server on the Internet, via a predetermined access point such as a wireless LAN router, which serves as a relay device.

The terminal-side NFC module 2100, which constitutes the input unit, is used for wireless communication with other NFC-compatible devices (in this embodiment, the machine-side NFC module 1100 of the pachinko machine 10) based on the NFC communication standard. It includes a control unit 2101 that controls NFC communication, an antenna unit 2102 that serves as an output function and detection unit for sending and receiving radio waves for NFC communication, and a memory 2103 that stores various information (see Figure 2-59).

As shown in Figure 2-59, the basic configuration of the terminal-side NFC module 2100 (configuration of the control unit 2101, antenna unit 2102, memory 2103, etc.) is the same as the basic configuration of the base-side NFC module 1100 (configuration of the control unit 1101, antenna unit 1102, memory 1103, etc.), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, in this embodiment, the terminal-side NFC module 2100 receives power from the power supply unit 2008 and functions as an initiator.

The terminal-side BT module 2200, which constitutes the input unit, is used for wireless communication with other BT-compatible devices (in this embodiment, the machine-side BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10) based on the BT communication standard, and includes a control unit 2201 that controls BT communication, an antenna unit 2202 that constitutes the output function and detection unit for sending and receiving radio waves for BT communication, and a memory 2203 that stores various information (see Figure 2-60).

As shown in Figure 2-60, the basic configuration of the terminal-side BT module 2200 (configuration of the control unit 2201, antenna unit 2202, memory 2203, etc.) is the same as the basic configuration of the table-side BT module 1200 (configuration of the control unit 1201, antenna unit 1202, memory 1203, etc.), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, we will explain the dedicated app installed on the mobile terminal 2000. When the mobile terminal 2000 (control unit 2001) receives an instruction from the player to launch the dedicated app, it launches the dedicated app.

When the dedicated app is launched, the display unit 2003 displays, as the initial screen, a menu screen similar to the menu screen 3000 (see Figure 2-54(a)) displayed on the performance display device 42 of the pachinko machine 10.

When an information output state occurs in which a menu screen is displayed on the display unit 2003 of the mobile terminal 2000, and one of the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen ("Language Settings," "Volume Settings," "Brightness Settings," "Effect Customization," and "Game History") is selected by touching the operation unit 2004 (touch panel), information related to the selected menu item (such as a language settings screen) is displayed on the display unit 2003, allowing input of information related to the selected menu item.

Specifically, when a player touches and selects "Language Setting," a language setting screen similar to the above-mentioned language setting screen 3001 (see Figure 2-54(b)) is displayed as an input section on the display unit 2003. Then, when the player touches and selects one of the multiple language options ("Japanese," "Chinese," "ENGLISH") displayed on the language setting screen via the operation unit 2004 (touch panel), information related to the selected language (the value of the language setting flag) is stored in memory 2002.

If a BT communication connection (pairing) is in progress, the value of the language setting flag is output to the pachinko machine 10 as information related to game specifications, either immediately or by touching a registration button (not shown). On the other hand, if a non-BT communication connection (non-pairing) is in progress, the value is output after the BT communication connection is established. The pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) then receives this information, stores it in the above-mentioned user response processing, and uses the corresponding language data to perform image data generation processing and audio output processing.

Furthermore, when a player touches and selects "Volume Setting," a volume setting screen similar to the volume setting screen 3002 (see Figure 2-55(a)) is displayed as an input section on the display unit 2003. Then, when the player touches and selects one of the multiple volume levels ("1," "2," "3," "4," "5") displayed on the volume setting screen via the operation unit 2004 (touch panel), information about the selected volume level (volume level value) is stored in memory 2002.

If a BT communication connection (pairing) is in progress, the volume level value is output to the pachinko machine 10 as information related to the game specifications, either immediately or by touching a registration button (not shown). On the other hand, if a non-BT communication connection (non-pairing) is in progress, the volume level value is output after the BT communication connection is established. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) that receives this information, the volume level value set in the volume level setting area of RAM 553 is updated to the volume level value selected and set as described above during the user response processing.

Furthermore, when a player touches and selects "Brightness Setting," a brightness setting screen similar to the brightness setting screen 3003 (see Figure 2-55(b)) is displayed as an input section on the display unit 2003. Then, when the player touches and selects one of the multiple brightness levels ("1," "2," "3," "4," "5") displayed on the brightness setting screen via the operation unit 2004 (touch panel), information about the selected brightness level (brightness level value) is stored in memory 2002.

If a BT communication connection (pairing) is in progress, the brightness level value is output to the pachinko machine 10 as information related to the game specifications, either immediately or by touching a registration button (not shown). On the other hand, if a non-BT communication connection (non-pairing) is in progress, the brightness level value is output after the BT communication connection is established. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) that receives this information, the brightness level value set in the brightness level setting area of RAM 553 is updated to the brightness level value selected and set as described above during the user-responsive processing.

Furthermore, when a player touches and selects "Effect Customization," an effect customization screen similar to the effect customization screen 3004 (see Figure 2-55(c)) is displayed as an input section on the display unit 2003. Then, by touching and selecting one of the multiple customization items ("BGM Settings," "Character Settings," "Background Settings," and "Preview Effect Settings") displayed on the effect customization screen via the operation unit 2004 (touch panel), the player can change the settings for that customization item.

Here, for example, if a player touches and selects "Preview Effects Settings" on the effects customization screen on the display unit 2003, a preview effects setting screen similar to the preview effects setting screen 4009 (see Figure 2-97) described above will be displayed as an input section on the display unit 2003. Then, by touching and selecting one of the multiple customization items displayed on the preview effects setting screen via the operation unit 2004 (touch panel), the player will be able to change the settings for that customization item.

For example, if a player touches and selects "Super Reach Effects" on the preview effect setting screen on the display unit 2003, a Super Reach Effects setting screen similar to the Super Reach Effects setting screen 4010 (see Figure 2-99) will be displayed as an input section on the display unit 2003. Then, by touching and selecting one of the multiple customization items displayed on the Super Reach Effects setting screen via the operation unit 2004 (touch panel), the player will be able to change the settings for that customization item.

Furthermore, when a player touches and selects "School of Fish Effect" or "Bubble Effect" on the preview effect setting screen of the display unit 2003, a reliability setting screen similar to the reliability setting screen 4015 (see Figure 2-101(a)) described above is displayed as an input unit on the display unit 2003. The player can then change the settings related to the reliability of various effects via the operation unit 2004 (touch panel).

Furthermore, when a player touches and selects "One-shot announcement effect" or "Cut-in effect" on the preview effect setting screen on the display unit 2003, an appearance rate setting screen similar to the appearance rate setting screen 4016 (see Figure 2-103(a)) described above is displayed as an input section on the display unit 2003. The player can then change the settings related to the appearance rates of various effects via the operation unit 2004 (touch panel).

Then, information about the customized items whose settings have been changed is stored in memory 2002.

If a BT communication connection (pairing) is in progress, information regarding the customization items is output to the pachinko machine 10 as information regarding game specifications, either immediately or by touching a registration button (not shown). On the other hand, if a non-BT communication connection (non-pairing) is in progress, the information is output after the BT communication connection is established. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) that receives this information, in the above-mentioned user-related processing, the information regarding the customization items set in the user-related area of RAM 553 is updated to information regarding the customization items selected and set as described above.

Furthermore, if a player touches and selects "Game History" during a BT communication connection (pairing), a game history screen similar to the game history screen 3005 (see Figure 2-56(a)) will be displayed on the display unit 2003.

Next, we will explain in detail the wireless communication that takes place between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal 2000.

First, we will explain the process of establishing a BT communication connection (pairing) between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal 2000 using NFC communication, with reference to the drawings.

Figure 2-63 is a flowchart showing the player's operations performed on the mobile terminal 2000 that serves as the initiator, and the flow of the BT connection process executed on the mobile terminal 2000.

Figure 2-64 is a flowchart showing the flow of the BT connection process performed on the target pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262). Figure 2-65 is a sequence diagram showing the exchanges that take place between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal 2000.

In order to establish the BT communication connection, the player uses the mobile terminal 2000 to access the website of the pachinko machine 10 manufacturer in advance and download the dedicated app for the pachinko machine 10 to the mobile terminal 2000. Then, when the player launches the dedicated app on the mobile terminal 2000 while the BT communication connection is not established, the BT connection process is executed periodically.

First, the player inserts the membership card into the card unit 900 as described below, preparing the card unit for play, then launches a dedicated app on the mobile terminal 2000, and with the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side NFC module 2100) emitting a predetermined radio wave, holds the mobile terminal 2000 over the touch area 1105a of the machine-side NFC module 1100 of the pachinko machine 10 (step SH7001).

In response to this, if the machine-side NFC module 1100 (control unit 1101) on the pachinko machine 10 is in a usage-permitted state, as described below, it is activated by electromagnetic induction when an interrupt state occurs in which radio waves are received from the mobile terminal 2000, and outputs the BT connection information (device name, BD address, and password of the machine-side BT module 1200) stored in memory 1103 to the outside via NFC wireless communication via the antenna unit 1102.

Next, the mobile terminal 2000 determines whether the terminal-side NFC module 2100 has acquired (received) the BT connection information output from the base-side NFC module 1100 (step SH7002). Note that here, the terminal-side NFC module 2100 determines whether the BT connection information has been acquired by taking into account a predetermined flag that is set when the terminal-side NFC module 2100 receives the BT connection information. If the determination here is negative, the process ends immediately.

Then, when the BT connection information is acquired (step SH7002: YES), the BT connection information is written to the memory 2203 of the terminal-side BT module 2200, and a BT connection request is made from the terminal-side BT module 2200 to the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200) using the BT connection information (step SH7003 in Figure 2-63).

Typically, a gaming hall is equipped with a large number of gaming machines, and when a mobile terminal 2000 searches for devices capable of BT communication, a large number of gaming machines within the communication range (for example, all gaming machines in the gaming hall) are identified as communication candidates. However, with the system according to this embodiment, BT connection information (device name, BD address, and password of the machine-side BT module 1200) of the gaming machine with which BT communication is desired is obtained through the first stage of communication, NFC communication, making it possible to identify the gaming machine with which BT communication is desired from among the many gaming machines, and to issue a BT connection request to that gaming machine.

In addition, when making a BT connection request, the dedicated app may be configured to ask the player for permission. For example, the display unit 2003 of the mobile terminal 2000 may display "Connection OK," and when the player taps this, the BT connection request may begin.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) periodically executes the BT connection process shown in Figure 2-64 during the above-mentioned user-related processing.

Specifically, the BT connection process periodically monitors signal input from the card unit 900 and the table-side BT module 1200, and first determines whether a usage permission signal (low-level output of usage permission signal B5) indicating that the card unit 900 is in a state where it can execute lending control has been received (step SH8000). If a usage permission signal has been received (step SH8000: YES), the table-side BT module 1200 is considered to be in a usage permission state, and determines whether an external BT connection request has been made to the table-side BT module 1200 (step SH8001). If a negative determination is made in step SH8000 or step SH8001, the process terminates.

As will be the case below, in the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262), when determining whether or not a BT connection request has been made from outside during BT connection processing, if it is determined that a BT connection request has been made, a predetermined connection request flag may be set to on, and thereafter, whether or not a BT connection request has been made may be determined by taking into consideration the connection request flag.

If a BT connection request is received from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) (step SH8001: YES), a BT connection response is sent to the mobile terminal 2000 (step SH8002), a predetermined BT connection flag is set, a BT communication connection is established, and BT communication control is started (step SH8003). This creates a BT communication connection state, which is a transition state in this embodiment.

As with the following, the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) performs a predetermined authentication process when making a BT connection response to the communication partner device. This authentication process complies with the BT standard, so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but in short, the sub-control device 262 determines whether the password received in response to the BT connection request from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) matches the password stored in its own RAM 553, etc., and if the two passwords match, it makes a BT connection response, but if the two passwords do not match, it terminates this process without making a BT connection response.

In addition, under the BT communication standard, if the authentication process is successful, a link key is created and saved, and during the BT communication connection, encrypted communication is carried out using this link key and an encryption key (random number) of a specified bit length. When the BT communication connection (pairing) is terminated, the link key is automatically discarded, so the next time you use the device, you will need to reconnect (pair) via BT communication.

However, to enhance convenience, BT-compatible devices such as the mobile terminal 2000 typically have an automatic connection function that stores the BT connection information (device name, BD address, password, etc.) of BT-compatible devices with which they have previously connected (paired) via BT communication, and automatically establishes a BT communication connection the next time they enter that communication range. Here, a link key may be saved when the BT communication connection (pairing) is terminated, and the saved link key may be read and used the next time a BT communication connection is automatically established.

Meanwhile, after outputting the BT connection request, the mobile terminal 2000 determines whether the terminal-side BT module 2200 has received a BT connection response from the machine-side BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10 (step SH7004 in Figure 2-63).

Here, if the mobile terminal 2000 does not receive a BT connection response from the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200), it executes processing to address the inability to establish a BT connection, such as displaying "Connection failed" on the display unit 2003 of the mobile terminal 2000 (step SH7005 in Figure 2-63), and terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if a BT connection response is received from the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200) (step SH7004: YES), a predetermined BT connection flag is set, a BT communication connection is established, and BT communication control is started (step SH7006 in Figure 2-63).

Next, we will explain the BT communication processing that takes place between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal 2000 when they are in a BT communication connection state (during pairing) with reference to the drawings.

Figure 2-66 is a flowchart showing the BT communication processing performed on the mobile terminal 2000 side during a BT communication connection, and Figure 2-67 is a flowchart showing the BT communication processing performed on the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) side during a BT communication connection.

As shown in Figure 2-66, in the mobile terminal 2000, the control unit 2001 first determines whether or not a BT communication connection is in progress, taking into consideration the BT connection flag (step SH7101). If the determination is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH7101, a judgment is made in step SH7102 as to whether or not predetermined output data (e.g., game history, game specifications, etc.) is stored in the output information storage area of memory 2002. If a negative judgment is made here, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH7102, the output data is transmitted to the machine-side BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10 via the terminal-side BT module 2200, and processing is performed to receive data from the machine-side BT module 1200 (step SH7103).

Next, in step SH7104, the control unit 2001 determines whether the input data received from the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the memory 2203 of the terminal-side BT module 2200. If the determination here is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH7104, the input data is stored in memory 2002 (step SH7105), and this processing ends. This allows the player to view the input data received from the pachinko machine 10 via the dedicated app.

In this embodiment, the mobile terminal 2000 is configured to perform a series of processes to send and receive various types of data via BT communication. However, instead, the data reception process and data transmission process may be performed as separate processes.

Also, as shown in Figure 2-67, in the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262), the sub-control device 262 first determines whether or not a BT communication connection is in progress, taking into consideration the BT connection flag (step SH8101). If a negative determination is made here, the process ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH8101, a judgment is made in step SH8102 as to whether or not predetermined output data (such as game history information) is stored in the game information storage area of RAM 553. If a negative judgment is made here, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH8102, the output data is transmitted to the terminal-side BT module 2200 of the mobile terminal 2000 via the platform-side BT module 1200, and processing is performed to receive data from the terminal-side BT module 2200 (step SH8103).

Next, in step SH8104, the sub-control device 262 determines whether the input data received from the mobile terminal 2000 is stored in the memory 1203 of the machine-side BT module 1200. If the determination is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH8104 returns a positive answer, the input data is stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553, and the process ends. As a result, the sub-control unit 262 changes various settings based on the various information set in the user-associated area of RAM 553 during the user-associated process.

In this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 is configured to perform a series of processes to send and receive various data via BT communication, but instead, the data reception process and data transmission process may be performed as separate processes.

Next, the disconnection process for disconnecting the BT communication connection (pairing) between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal 2000 will be explained with reference to the drawings.

Figure 2-68 is a flowchart showing the BT communication connection disconnection process performed on the mobile terminal 2000 side, and Figure 2-69 is a flowchart showing the BT communication connection disconnection process performed on the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) side.

As shown in Figure 2-68, on the mobile terminal 2000 side, first, in step SH7301, the player operates the dedicated app on the mobile terminal 2000, causing the terminal-side BT module 2200 to issue a BT disconnection request to the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200), and then, in the following step SH7302, the BT connection in progress flag is set to OFF, disconnecting the BT communication.

In response to this, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 periodically monitors the machine-side BT module 1200 during the above-mentioned user response processing, and as shown in Figure 2-69, first in step SH8300, it determines whether or not a BT communication connection is in progress (pairing is in progress) by referring to the BT connection in progress flag. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated.

If the answer is yes in step SH8300, then in step SH8301 it is determined whether a BT disconnection request has been made from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) to the base-side BT module 1200.

If a BT disconnection request is made (step SH8301: YES), the process proceeds to step SH8320 and executes processing to disconnect the BT communication connection, such as by setting the BT connection in progress flag to OFF.

On the other hand, if there is no BT disconnection request (step SH8301: NO), in step SH8302, the ball count storage area of RAM 553 is referenced to determine whether the current number of balls held by the player (the number of balls displayed in the ball count display section 123b) is the specific value "0".

If the result of step SH8302 is negative, i.e., if the player's current number of balls is not "0", this process ends.

If step SH8302 returns a positive result, i.e., if the player's current number of balls is "0," step SH8303 refers to the balance storage area of RAM 553 to determine whether the player's current balance (the balance displayed in the balance display unit 123a) is the specific value "0."

If the result of step SH8303 is negative, i.e., if the player's current balance is not "0", this process ends.

In other words, if new cash is inserted as a specific input during the display period of the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 described below, if a start win (prize ball) occurs, or if the loan button 121 is pressed and the number of balls held is increased, this process (BT communication connection disconnection process) will automatically end, assuming that the player has indicated their intention to continue playing, and the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 will be erased, and the display unit 42a will return to the original screen while the BT communication connection is maintained as a transition state.

If step SH8303 returns a positive result, i.e., if the updated information for the number of balls held becomes the specific value "0" and the updated information for the number of remaining balls becomes the specific value "0", and a specific condition is met that makes it impossible to continue pinball play under the current circumstances, the process moves to step SH8304, where it is determined whether the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 (see Figure 2-108) is being displayed on the effect display device 42. If the result here is a positive result, the process moves directly to step SH8306.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH8304, in step SH8305, a communication disconnection confirmation display process is executed to display the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 on the performance display device 42.

This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45. Based on this, the display control device 45 selects a display data table for displaying a communication disconnection confirmation, and displays the communication disconnection confirmation for a specific period of time (e.g., 10 seconds). As a result, the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 is displayed on the performance display device 42.

As shown in Figure 2-108, the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 displays text information such as "Do you want to continue the communication connection?" and selection information such as "YES" and "NO."

Then, on the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000, the player moves the displayed cursor 3100 by operating the left button 126c or the right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to select "YES" or "NO," and then presses the center button (decision button) 126e of the directional pad 126 to confirm whether to disconnect or continue the BT communication connection.

In other words, the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 constitutes the input section and setting mode information in this embodiment, and the state in which the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 is displayed on the effect display device 42 becomes an output selection state in which the player can select whether to disconnect or continue the BT communication connection.

Next, in step SH8306, it is determined whether the center button (decision button) 126e was operated while the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 was displayed. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH8311.

On the other hand, if the result of step SH8306 is negative, step SH8307 determines whether a specific period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 was displayed. If the result of this determination is positive, the process proceeds to step SH8309; if the result of this determination is negative, the process ends.

In step SH8309, the BT connection flag is set to OFF, and processing is performed to disconnect the BT communication connection. Then, processing proceeds to step SH8310, where processing is performed to end the display of the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000, and this processing is then terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the timing for the communication disconnection confirmation display (display state of the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000) to end arrives without the player pressing the center button (decision button) 126e of the directional pad 126, that is, when a specific period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed since the communication disconnection confirmation display began on the effect display device 42, a specific process is executed to automatically disconnect the BT communication connection.

Now, if the answer is YES in step SH8306, that is, if the center button (decision button) 126e of the cross key 126 is pressed, step SH8311 determines whether "NO" was selected from the multiple options ("YES" or "NO") displayed on the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 based on the button operation input.

If the answer is affirmative in step SH8311, i.e., if "NO (Do not continue)" is selected, the process proceeds to step SH8309, where the BT communication connection is disconnected. Then, the process proceeds to step SH8310, where the display of the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 is terminated, and the process ends.

If the result of step SH8311 is negative, step SH8312 determines whether "YES" was selected from the multiple options ("YES" or "NO") displayed on the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 based on button operation input.

If the result of step SH8312 is affirmative, i.e., if "YES (Continue)" is selected, the process proceeds directly to step SH8310 to maintain the BT communication connection without disconnecting the BT communication connection, and the display termination process for the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 is executed, after which the process ends.

With the above configuration, the player can recognize that a BT communication connection is in progress when ending a ball game, and can perform the process of disconnecting the BT communication connection to the pachinko machine 10 without forgetting.

In addition, instead of displaying the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 (see Figure 2-108) as an output selection state when a specific condition that makes it impossible to continue pinball play is met (when the number of balls held becomes "0" and the balance becomes "0") and asking the player whether to disconnect or continue the BT communication connection, as in the above configuration, when the specific condition is met, a communication connection notification screen 9100 may be output that prominently displays notification information such as "communication connected," as shown in Figure 2-109(b), thereby executing a communication connection notification display as an information output state that notifies the player that the BT communication connection is currently in a transition state.

As with the case where the communication disconnection confirmation display is executed, this allows the player to recognize that a BT communication connection is still active when ending ball play, and allows the player to remember to disconnect the BT communication connection to the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the disconnection processing procedure that is performed when a specific condition is met in which the number of balls held and the balance become "0" and it is currently impossible to continue pinball play, and the disconnection processing procedure that is performed when a BT disconnection request is made from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) to the machine-side BT module 1200 are integrated, but this is not limiting, and the two disconnection processing procedures may also be configured separately.

Furthermore, if the mobile terminal 2000 is turned off, or if the player (mobile terminal 2000) moves beyond the BT communication range of the pachinko machine 10 and radio waves from the mobile terminal 2000 are no longer detected, and it is determined that BT communication is not possible, the sub-control device 262 may be configured to consider that a BT disconnection request has been made, and perform the same processing as when the above-mentioned BT disconnection request has been made, thereby disconnecting BT communication.

As mentioned above, pachinko machines, which are a type of gaming machine known in the art, are machines in which game balls are fired into a play area.

In a pachinko machine, a game ball is fired toward the game area, and when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, a variable display of the pattern is executed on a predetermined display means, and if the result of the variable display is a predetermined result, a predetermined winning state occurs.

Amusement machines such as pachinko machines offer a variety of entertainment options to players (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A).

For example, in conjunction with the changing display of the symbols, a predetermined display effect is performed by a predetermined effect display means. Furthermore, in recent years, gaming machines have become available that allow players to customize various settings (volume, brightness, etc.) and various effect elements (display effect modes, etc.) to suit their preferences.

As an example, customization could involve the player selecting a character from multiple characters to appear in the effects, or selecting the appearance rate of preview effects that suggest a specific game state (such as a reach state or a jackpot state) in advance.

However, with conventional gaming machines, there was a desire for further improvements in convenience and entertainment for players.

For example, in the past, when inputting various information into a gaming machine or outputting various information from a gaming machine, the operations required of the player were complex and cumbersome. As a result, players sometimes avoided these operations.

In particular, the more items and options that players can customize are divided into smaller groups and set in order to accommodate the diverse preferences of many players, the more likely it is that the amount of time and effort required to customize a gaming machine from the time a player selects a gaming machine at an amusement parlor until they start playing on that gaming machine will become enormous if direct input operations are performed on the gaming machine using a specified input operation means (such as a cross key) as in the past.

Furthermore, when a player moves from a given gaming machine to another gaming machine of the same type at an amusement hall to play a new game, or when they move to another amusement hall to play on the same gaming machine, or when they return to the amusement hall on a different day to play on the same gaming machine, every time the player changes gaming machines they play, even if the customization details are the same on the new gaming machine of the same type, they must repeat the same customization process from scratch over and over again, which is extremely cumbersome.

Ultimately, this could lead to players being reluctant to use the customization function, and players may not use it at all. For this reason, there is a need to further improve convenience for players.

As mentioned above, conventional customization functions required players to manually input each element into the gaming machine before starting play, making them unsuitable for detailed customization of numerous presentation elements.

In response to this, by adopting a system that allows communication between a mobile device carried by a player and a gaming machine, it may be possible to customize the gaming machine using the mobile device without using the input operation means (such as a cross key) on the gaming machine itself.

For example, wireless communication technology such as Bluetooth could be used to connect a mobile device such as a smartphone carried by a player to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, allowing various information related to the game to be sent and received between the two (for example, output of history information and input of customization information).

This means that, for example, a player can meticulously customize the presentation elements of a specific type of gaming machine in advance using an app on their mobile device and store the customization information. When they actually start playing on that specific type of gaming machine at an amusement parlor, they can send the customization information stored on their mobile device to the gaming machine, which will then configure the customization settings based on that data.

By adopting this method, once a player has performed the customization settings, they no longer need to go through the tedious customization process described above every time they start playing on a gaming machine at an amusement parlor. Instead, they can customize the gaming machine's presentation elements to their preferred settings in an extremely simple and short amount of time. As a result, convenience for players can be significantly improved.

However, if the presentation elements of a gaming machine were customizable in detail (if the items and options that a player can customize were divided into many smaller options and many settings were possible), the processing on the gaming machine would become more complex, which could significantly increase the processing load on the gaming machine.

If a performance element where the appearance of a predetermined preview performance is determined by lottery using a predetermined performance selection table and a performance selection random number counter, etc., at a predetermined appearance rate, were configured so that the player could customize the appearance rate in 1% increments between 1% and 99%, the gaming machine would need to store 99 performance selection tables corresponding to each appearance rate ("performance selection table for 1% appearance rate," "performance selection table for 2% appearance rate," ... "performance selection table for 99% appearance rate") in advance in storage means, and would need to read these out from storage means as appropriate in response to player customization.

Furthermore, when establishing a communication connection (pairing) with a communication partner device using a communication method that requires authentication processing using a password, such as the above-mentioned Bluetooth, the player must first identify the communication partner device and enter a password, which is a very complicated and time-consuming process.

In particular, in gaming halls where pachinko and other gaming machines are installed, many gaming machines are installed close together, so users must find the gaming machine they want to play on from the many gaming machines (Bluetooth-enabled devices) listed as candidates on the mobile device's display screen and establish a communication connection (pairing), which can be time-consuming.

If the process of establishing a communication connection is this complicated, players may be put off using wireless communication and may not use it at all. For this reason, there is a need to improve convenience for players.

In addition, in the past, if a specific player made changes to the settings of a specific gaming machine (for example, by connecting a mobile terminal to a gaming machine), and the player finished playing on the gaming machine and then left the gaming machine without restoring the changed settings to their original state (default settings), the changed settings would remain on the gaming machine (for example, with the communication connection not disconnected), and the next player to play on the gaming machine would have to play in this state, which could reduce the player's interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that allows users to conveniently change or cancel settings on the gaming machine, thereby improving convenience and interest for players.

In contrast to this, specifically, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention (the first invention of the present application) is
a winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on the determination by a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
A variable display means for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the winning/losing lottery;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific game state after the end of a specific variable display that displays a specific display result that is executed when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a specific result;
A performance execution means for performing a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements during the variable display for the predetermined period;
and input means electrically connected to the effect execution means, and capable of allowing a player to input a predetermined value to the effect execution means.
This gaming machine is
a detection means that, in a predetermined input-enabled state, enters a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection target approaches or abuts on a predetermined detection unit within a predetermined distance;
an information output means capable of executing a predetermined output when the detection means reaches at least the predetermined detection state;
Numerical information update means for updating predetermined numerical information according to the progress of a predetermined game state;
When a predetermined output condition is established, the information output means outputs a plurality of pieces of information stored in a predetermined storage unit and corresponding to the input of the predetermined information to the performance execution means;
When the predetermined numerical information is updated to a specific numerical value based on the update by the numerical information update means after the input of the predetermined information is executed and a specific state occurs, a specific output state that outputs identification information corresponding to the specific state can be generated.
It is possible to conveniently change or cancel settings on the gaming machine, which in turn improves convenience and interest for players.

More specifically, in this application, for example, a gaming machine according to the present invention (first invention of this application) is
a jackpot lottery unit (main control device 261) that executes a jackpot lottery based on whether a predetermined lottery condition is met through a determination process that determines whether the predetermined lottery condition is met;
Special symbol display devices 43A, 43B that execute a symbol variation display for a predetermined period based on the result of the jackpot lottery;
a jackpot game execution unit (main control device 261) that executes a jackpot game after the jackpot variable display that displays the jackpot result in a static manner when the result of the jackpot lottery is a winning result has ended;
A sub-control device 262 that performs a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements (performance display device 42, speaker SP, illuminations 102 to 104) during the pattern variable display for the predetermined period;
a machine-side BT module 1200 electrically connected to the sub-controller 262 and capable of wireless communication input by a player to the sub-controller 262;
This pachinko machine 10 is
a base-side NFC module 1100 (control unit 1101) that enters a current receiving state when a predetermined mobile terminal 2000 approaches or touches a touch area 1105a (antenna unit 1102) within a predetermined distance in an NFC reception permitted state (an NFC reception enabled state in a Bluetooth non-connected state);
an antenna unit 1102 that can execute a predetermined output when a control unit 1101 of the base-side NFC module 1100 is at least in a current receiving state;
a sub-controller 262 capable of updating the number of remaining balls (balance number storage area and number of balls held storage area) according to the progress of the pinball game in which game balls are shot;
When an NFC communication state is established, the antenna unit 1102 of the base-side NFC module 1100 is configured to output a plurality of pieces of BT connection information (the device name, BD address, and password of the base-side BT module 1200) that are information stored in a predetermined memory 1103 and correspond to an input of a Bluetooth connection request to the sub-control device 262 (base-side BT module 1200),
By configuring the pachinko machine 10 to be characterized in that it is configured to display a communication connection notification (see Figure 2-109 (b)) to notify the player that the BT communication connection state (pairing state) is in effect when the number of remaining balls (both "number of balls held" and "number of remaining balls") becomes "0" based on an update of the sub-control device 262 (balance number storage area and number of balls held storage area) after the input of a BT connection request is executed and a BT communication connection state (pairing state) is generated,
It is possible to conveniently change or cancel settings on the gaming machine, which in turn improves convenience and interest for players.

To describe the effects of the present invention (the first invention of the present application) more specifically, for example, the present invention (the first invention of the present application) includes a machine-side NFC module 1100 that communicates with the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side NFC module 2100), which is the communication partner device, using NFC communication, which is a first wireless communication method, and a machine-side BT module 1200 that communicates with the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200), which is the communication partner device, using BT communication, which is a second wireless communication method. This allows a player to obtain BT connection information necessary to establish a BT communication connection (pairing) via NFC communication simply by bringing their own mobile terminal 2000 close to the specified touch area 1105a (antenna section 1102), and to establish a BT communication connection between the mobile terminal 2000 and the pachinko machine 10 based on the BT connection information.

As a result, the player does not need to specify the pachinko machine 10 on which he or she will play from the many pachinko machines 10 (machine-side BT modules 1200) listed as BT connection candidates on the display unit 2003 of the mobile terminal 2000, nor does he or she need to enter the password required to establish a BT communication connection (pairing), so BT communication can be started quickly and easily without going through complicated procedures.

As a result, various information can be input to and output from gaming machines efficiently, reducing the burden on players associated with BT communication connections and significantly improving convenience for players. Ultimately, this encourages players to actively use BT communication, making it possible to provide players with a variety of services and significantly increasing player enjoyment.

In addition, according to this invention (the first invention of the present application), if the number of remaining balls (both "number of balls held" and "number remaining") becomes "0" after a BT communication connection state (pairing state) is established, a communication connection notification display (see Figure 2-109(b)) is displayed to notify the player that a BT communication connection state has been established. This allows the player to conveniently cancel the BT communication connection state, etc., without forgetting that a BT communication connection state has been established.

In addition, similarly to the first invention, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention (the second invention of the present application)
a winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on the determination by the determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
A variable display means for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the winning/losing lottery;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific game state after the end of a specific variable display that displays a specific display result that is executed when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a specific result;
A performance execution means for performing a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements during the variable display for the predetermined period;
and input means electrically connected to the effect execution means, and capable of allowing a player to input a predetermined value to the effect execution means.
This gaming machine is
a detection means that, in a predetermined input-enabled state, enters a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection target approaches or abuts on a predetermined detection unit within a predetermined distance;
an information output means capable of executing a predetermined output when the detection means reaches at least the predetermined detection state;
Numerical information update means for updating predetermined numerical information according to the progress of a predetermined game state;
When a predetermined output condition is established, the information output means outputs a plurality of pieces of information stored in a predetermined storage unit and corresponding to the input of the predetermined information to the performance execution means;
When the predetermined numerical information is updated to a specific numerical value based on the update by the numerical information update means after the input of the predetermined information is executed and a specific state occurs, a selectable state is generated in which selectable information that allows the player to select whether or not to continue the specific state is output.
It is possible to conveniently change or cancel settings on the gaming machine, which in turn improves convenience and interest for players.

More specifically, in the present application, for example, a gaming machine according to the present invention (the second invention of the present application) is
a jackpot lottery unit (main control device 261) that executes a jackpot lottery based on whether a predetermined lottery condition is met through a determination process that determines whether the predetermined lottery condition is met;
Special symbol display devices 43A, 43B that execute a symbol variation display for a predetermined period based on the result of the jackpot lottery;
a jackpot game execution unit (main control device 261) that executes a jackpot game after the jackpot variable display that displays the jackpot result in a static manner when the result of the jackpot lottery is a winning result has ended;
A sub-control device 262 that performs a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements (performance display device 42, speaker SP, illuminations 102 to 104) during the pattern variable display for the predetermined period;
a machine-side BT module 1200 electrically connected to the sub-controller 262 and capable of wireless communication input by a player to the sub-controller 262;
This pachinko machine 10 is
a base-side NFC module 1100 (control unit 1101) that enters a current receiving state when a predetermined mobile terminal 2000 approaches or touches a touch area 1105a (antenna unit 1102) within a predetermined distance in an NFC reception permitted state (an NFC reception enabled state in a Bluetooth non-connected state);
an antenna unit 1102 that can execute a predetermined output when a control unit 1101 of the base-side NFC module 1100 is at least in a current receiving state;
a sub-controller 262 capable of updating the number of remaining balls (balance number storage area and number of balls held storage area) according to the progress of the pinball game in which game balls are shot;
When the NFC communication state is established, the antenna unit 1102 of the base-side NFC module 1100 is configured to output a plurality of pieces of BT connection information (the device name, BD address, and password of the base-side BT module 1200) that is information stored in a predetermined memory 1103 and corresponds to an input of a BT connection request to the sub-control device 262 (base-side BT module 1200),
By configuring the pachinko machine 10 to be characterized in that it is configured to display a communication disconnection confirmation display (see Figure 2-108) that allows the user to choose whether or not to continue the BT communication connection state (pairing state) when the number of remaining balls (both "number of balls held" and "number of remaining balls") becomes "0" based on an update of the sub-control device 262 (balance number storage area and number of balls held storage area) after the input of a BT connection request is executed and a BT communication connection state (pairing state) is generated,
It is possible to conveniently change or cancel settings on the gaming machine, which in turn improves convenience and interest for players.

To describe the effects of the present invention (the second invention of the present application) more specifically, for example, the present invention (the second invention of the present application) includes a machine-side NFC module 1100 that communicates with the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side NFC module 2100), which is the communication partner device, using NFC communication, which is a first wireless communication method, and a machine-side BT module 1200 that communicates with the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200), which is the communication partner device, using BT communication, which is a second wireless communication method.By doing so, a player can obtain the BT connection information necessary to establish a BT communication connection (pairing) via NFC communication simply by bringing their own mobile terminal 2000 close to the specified touch area 1105a (antenna section 1102), and can establish a BT communication connection between the mobile terminal 2000 and the pachinko machine 10 based on the BT connection information.

As a result, the player does not need to specify the pachinko machine 10 on which he or she will play from the many pachinko machines 10 (machine-side BT modules 1200) listed as BT connection candidates on the display unit 2003 of the mobile terminal 2000, nor does he or she need to enter the password required to establish a BT communication connection (pairing), so BT communication can be started quickly and easily without going through complicated procedures.

As a result, various information can be input to and output from gaming machines efficiently, reducing the burden on players associated with BT communication connections and significantly improving convenience for players. Ultimately, this encourages players to actively use BT communication, making it possible to provide players with a variety of services and significantly increasing player enjoyment.

In addition, according to this invention (the second invention of the present application), if the number of remaining balls (both "number of balls held" and "number of remaining balls") becomes "0" after a BT communication connection state (pairing state) has occurred, a communication disconnection confirmation display (see Figure 2-108) is displayed, allowing the player to choose whether or not to continue the BT communication connection state. This allows the player to conveniently cancel the BT communication connection state without forgetting that a BT communication connection state has occurred.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments, or some or all of them may be applied in any combination to the above-described embodiments. It is also possible to combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments in any combination.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is a first type gaming machine in which, when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery (variable symbol game) based on a ball entering a predetermined starting ball entry means (e.g., first starting ball entry section 33WA or second starting ball entry section 33WB), a jackpot state (direct hit jackpot) occurs in which a predetermined variable ball entry means (e.g., variable ball entry device 32A) opens and closes.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be implemented as other types of pachinko machines that award predetermined profit games (award profits), different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment.

Here, "profit games (awarded profits)" are games that bring profits to the player, and may be any type that can realize the gist of this invention. For example, prize ball games in which prize balls are paid out (including the awarding of virtual prize balls) when a game ball fired by a player in a pinball game lands in a predetermined ball entry means; prize ball games in which prize balls are paid out (including the awarding of virtual prize balls) when a game ball fired by a player in a pinball game lands in a variable ball entry means that is ready for entry based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions; lottery games in which a predetermined lottery is held when a game ball fired by a player in a pinball game lands in a predetermined ball entry means; and game balls fired by a player in a pinball game. Examples include action games in which a predetermined moving means (such as a movable device or variable ball entry means) operates when a ball enters a predetermined ball entry means; performance games in which a predetermined performance means (such as a display means or light-emitting means) is executed when a game ball fired by a player in a pinball game enters a predetermined ball entry means; variable games in which a pattern is displayed variably on a predetermined display means when a game ball fired by a player in a pinball game enters a predetermined ball entry means; and games that combine any of these various types of games.

(a-1) For example, this may be implemented as a second type of gaming machine that is equipped with a variable ball entry means that opens when a small jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery (variable symbol game) based on a ball entering a predetermined starting ball entry means, and in which a gaming ball that enters the variable ball entry means enters a specific ball entry section (for example, a V entry port) to trigger a jackpot state (V entry jackpot).

(a-2) It may also be implemented as a third type of gaming machine (for example, a so-called one-type/two-type hybrid machine) that combines the functions of the first type of gaming machine and the second type of gaming machine.

More specifically, the third type of gaming machine (a pachinko machine known as a type 1/type 2 mixed machine) may, for example, comprise a first starting ball entry means for aiming by shooting a gaming ball into the left area of the gaming area (a left hit), a first display device for displaying a first variable display based on the gaming ball entering the first starting ball entry means, a first holding means capable of holding the first variable display a predetermined number of times, a second starting ball entry means for aiming by shooting a gaming ball into the right area of the gaming area (a right hit), a second display device for displaying a second variable display based on the gaming ball entering the second starting ball entry means, a second holding means capable of holding the second variable display a predetermined number of times, and a display device for displaying ... It is equipped with an opening/closing member that changes between an open state allowing a ball to be entered and a closed state preventing a ball from entering. A jackpot lottery is held based on a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means or the second starting ball entry means, and if a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a jackpot state advantageous to the player can be generated. It is also configured to hold a small jackpot lottery based on a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means, and if a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a small jackpot state in which a predetermined variable entry device opens can be generated. If a game ball that enters the variable entry device enters a specific ball entry means (V entry port), a jackpot state can be generated.

Generally, in such pachinko machines, in the normal state (low support state) where it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means, the gameplay is such that the player hits with the left to get the game ball to enter the first start ball entry means in an attempt to reach the jackpot state. On the other hand, in the high support state that can be achieved after the jackpot state ends and where it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means, the gameplay is such that the player hits with the right to get the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means in an attempt to reach the small jackpot state, and then to get the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means (V entry port) within the opened variable entry device in an attempt to reach the jackpot state.

(a-3) Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a predetermined number of game balls sealed inside are circulated and used for pinball play, and instead of lending out real game balls (loan balls) or paying out real game balls (prize balls), a game value equivalent to the real game balls is converted into a numerical value and awarded to the player, which is a so-called sealed-in pachinko machine 10.

In addition to this, the game machine may be implemented as a type that uses actual game balls supplied from the island equipment in the game hall as "loan balls" or "prize balls," and pays out a predetermined number of prize balls depending on the game balls entering the various prize holes (first start hole, second start hole, big prize hole, etc.) provided on the game board.

Such gaming machines are configured to have, for example, a launching means (launching device, etc.) that launches gaming balls, a gaming area to which the launched gaming balls are guided, a ball entry means (winning slot, etc.) located within the gaming area, a payout means (payout device, etc.) that pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls as prize balls based on the entry of gaming balls into the ball entry means, and a storage means (upper tray, etc.) that can store gaming balls paid out from the payout means and guide them to the launching means.

In addition, gaming machines that dispense actual gaming balls may be equipped with a detection means that can detect the presence or absence of gaming balls in a storage means (upper tray, etc.) that can store gaming balls, and when gaming balls are present in the storage means (upper tray, etc.), the machine-side NFC module 1100 and/or the machine-side BT module 1200 may be configured to be in an enabled state.

Furthermore, when the number of game balls in the storage means (upper tray, etc.) reaches "0," the display device 42 may be configured to display a communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 (see Figure 2-108), as in the above embodiment.

However, in an enclosed pachinko machine 10, game balls cannot be directly replenished into the storage means (top tray, etc.) as is the case with gaming machines that dispense actual game balls that the player can touch, so the configuration according to the above embodiment is particularly effective.

(a-4) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in gaming machines that dispense actual gaming balls, individual counters (counters for each machine) may be installed in one-to-one correspondence with the gaming machine. In such a configuration, at least some of the functions of the individual counters and at least some of the functions of the card unit 900 may be integrated.

(a-5) The configuration of the card unit 900 is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, instead of or in addition to a configuration that allows cash to be inserted, it may be configured to allow virtual balls to be loaned using a magnetic card (prepaid card) or the like.

In addition, the card slot 903 (card reader/writer 917) may be equipped with an input means for inputting a PIN number or the like when a membership card is inserted, thereby enabling identity verification.

(a-6) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when a membership card is not inserted into the card insertion slot 903 (card reader/writer 917) of the card unit 900, the receipt of banknotes into the bill insertion slot 902 and the operation of the loan button 121 are not permitted, and the loan of virtual loan balls is prohibited. In other words, when a membership card is not inserted, not only cannot virtual loan balls be loaned based on the savings data stored on the membership card, but virtual loan balls cannot be loaned based on cash either. Therefore, in the above embodiment, in order to play pinball games on a pachinko machine 10 using game balls, it is necessary to insert a membership card into the card unit 900 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10.

Alternatively, the card unit 900 may be configured to accept bills through the bill slot 902 and allow virtual balls to be loaned using a magnetic card (prepaid card) or the like, even when a membership card is not inserted.

(a-7) The pachinko machine 10 and the card unit 900 may be integrated into a gaming machine, i.e., an enclosed pachinko machine equipped with a card insertion slot and a bill insertion slot.

(a-8) The winning probabilities for various lotteries related to the pachinko machine 10 (such as software lottery processes or lotteries using mechanical mechanisms) are set appropriately for each model, and any value can be used. It goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate, as described below.

(a-9) In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as an arrange ball machine, similar mahjong ball machines, and various other gaming machines (pinball gaming machines).

Furthermore, gaming machines other than pinball gaming machines can also be implemented as slot machines, which are reel-type gaming machines that use medals or coins as gaming media, or gaming machines that combine pachinko machines and slot machines (for example, reel-type gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming media). In reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines, predetermined lottery conditions are met when a starting lever or other starting operation is performed with gaming media inserted.

(b) The configurations related to the various wins (big wins and small wins) as special game states, such as the number of rounds, opening time, and game mode awarded after completion, are not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

The "specific gaming state (special gaming state)" may be anything that is executed after the completion of a specific variable display that displays a specific display result when the result of the win/lose lottery is a specific result, and as long as it can achieve the gist of the present invention, it may be anything, such as a small win state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, or a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state or small win state (more specifically, a jackpot state in which an advantageous state is granted after completion, a jackpot state in which an advantageous state is not granted after completion, a jackpot state in which a high probability state is granted in which the probability of a determination to transition to a special gaming state by a predetermined lottery means after completion is higher than in the normal gaming state, or a jackpot state in which a high probability state is not granted after completion).

(b-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the allocation of the jackpot type awarded in the win/lose lottery is different when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and when the gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB. However, the ratio is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and different allocation ratios may also be used.

In addition, the allocation ratio of the jackpot type awarded when the winning lottery is decided may be the same when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and when the gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB.

(b-2) For example, in the above embodiment, "15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," and "4R jackpot" are set as "jackpots," but this is not limited to these, and other jackpot states with different numbers of rounds may also be configured to occur.

Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that can only generate one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15R jackpot), rather than a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states as a "jackpot."

(c) The configuration of the game mode (such as the award period and configuration content) is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

Here, the game mode may be any type, such as a game state that bestows a predetermined advantageous state on the player (for example, a time-saving state), a game state that increases the probability of winning in the lottery process that determines whether or not a special game state will occur (for example, a high-probability state), a game state that makes it easier for game balls to enter a predetermined ball entry means (for example, a high-ball entry state), a game state that increases the probability of winning in the lottery process that determines whether or not to open the opening/closing member that can open and close the predetermined ball entry means (for example, a high-ball entry state), or a game state that shortens the execution time of the variable display of patterns (for example, a time-saving state).

(c-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 switches between starting ball-scoring support states ("high ball-scoring state" or "low ball-scoring state"), but instead of or in addition to this, it may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that switches between lottery modes ("high probability mode" or "low probability mode").

More specifically, the present invention may be implemented as a pachinko machine of the type in which the lottery mode can be changed between a low probability mode in which the probability of winning the "jackpot" is a first probability (e.g., 1/300), and a high probability mode in which the probability of winning the "jackpot" is a second probability (e.g., 1/30) that is higher than the first probability.

(c-2) In the above embodiment, the "Time-saving A Mode (high ball entry state)" is always granted after the end of a "jackpot" regardless of the type of jackpot. However, this is not limited to this, and the "Time-saving A Mode (high ball entry state)" may not be granted depending on the type of jackpot.

(c-3) In the above embodiment, the "time-saving B mode (ceiling time-saving mode)" is configured to be activated when the number of times a variable game (miss variable game) is executed on the special symbol display device 43A, 43B (mainly the first special symbol display device 43A) reaches a predetermined upper limit (the so-called ceiling) of 500 times without a predetermined jackpot state occurring during "normal mode."

Furthermore, if the number of variable games (miss variable games) executed on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B (mainly the second special symbol display device 43B) during "Time-saving B Mode" reaches a predetermined upper limit of 200 times without the occurrence of a predetermined jackpot state, "Time-saving B Mode" ends and the game transitions to "Normal Mode."

The conditions for activating and terminating "Time-saving B Mode" are not limited to those described in the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted. Furthermore, the gaming machine may be configured so that "Time-saving B Mode" is not activated.

(d) The configuration on the surface of the game board 30 (such as the arrangement of the variable winning device 32A, first start winning section 33WA, second start winning section 33WB, through gate 34, variable display unit 35, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(d-1) For example, in the above embodiment, a through gate 34 is provided in the right area EB of the game area to the right of the variable display unit 35, and a second start-up winning section 33WB is provided downstream of the through gate 34.

However, the second start winning section 33WB may be located in the lower area ED of the play area, or the variable winning device 32A may be located in the right area EB of the play area.

(d-2) In the above embodiment, in normal mode, the game ball is fired in the first direction, toward the left side of the game area (left side game area EA), to play the first game, which is a left-handed game; and in the event of a jackpot or in time-saving mode, the game ball is fired in the second direction, toward the right side of the game area (right side game area EB), to play the second game, which is a right-handed game.

In addition to this, the configuration of the game board 30 may be changed so that "right-hand play" is performed in normal mode, and "left-hand play" is performed when a jackpot is hit or in time-saving mode.

(e) The "variable display means" may be anything that displays a variable display for a predetermined period based on the results of the winning/losing lottery, as long as it is capable of realizing the purpose of the present invention. For example, in the above embodiment, it includes special symbol display devices 43A, 43B equipped with multiple LEDs (special symbol lamps), and a performance display device 42 equipped with an LCD display unit.

(e-1) This is not a limitation, and for example, if the gaming board 30 is constructed based on a transparent plate that is a translucent material, a display means may be arranged at a rear position of the gaming board 30 instead of the effect display device 42.

Specifically, the configuration may include a display device with a display screen that covers almost the entire back side of the playing area or almost the entire back side of the playing board 30.

(e-2) The type of display means is not limited to the above embodiment. It is also possible to use electrical display devices such as displays made of three-color light-emitting diodes (three-color LEDs), dot matrix display devices, segment display devices (7-segment display devices), and organic EL display devices, as well as mechanical reel display devices such as reels, drums, and belts.

(f) The performance unit (performance element) is not limited to the performance display device 42 and other components described above, but may have other configurations. For example, the performance unit may include a movable prop that performs a specified performance, or its operational output.

Alternatively, a second performance display device may be provided in addition to the performance display device 42. The second performance display device may then display the menu screen 3000 and other information, allowing various settings to be configured.

(g) The configuration of the input means is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted as long as they allow the player to make specified inputs to the performance execution means such as the sub-control device 262.

For example, instead of an NFC module capable of input via NFC communication as in the above embodiment, a Bluetooth module capable of input via Bluetooth communication, a wireless LAN module capable of input via wireless LAN (including Wi-Fi) communication, a button switch that the player can press to input, or a touch sensor that the player can touch to input may be used.

More specifically, instead of an NFC module, for example, when a player presses a specified button switch as input means or touches a specified touch sensor as input means, the sub-control device 262 or the like detects this, and a two-dimensional code such as a QR code containing BT connection information is displayed on a display means (a dedicated display unit may be provided) such as the effect display device 42 as information output means, and the player can then capture an image of the two-dimensional code via a dedicated app on the mobile terminal 2000, causing the mobile terminal 2000 to request a BT connection.

In addition, instead of an NFC module, a sensor (such as a distance sensor) may be provided as an input means capable of non-contact detection of the player's hand or the mobile terminal 2000 approaching the glass unit 137 of the front frame 14. When the player switches the mobile terminal 2000 to photography mode and brings it close to the glass unit 137, a two-dimensional code such as a QR code containing BT connection information is displayed on the performance display device 42, which serves as information output means. When the player captures an image of the two-dimensional code via the mobile terminal 2000, a BT connection request may be made from the mobile terminal 2000.

(h) In the above embodiment, the standby state is a non-changing state in which the specified change display is not being performed, but this is not limited to this, and other different states may also be the standby state.

For example, this may be a state where a predetermined period of time has passed since a predetermined variable display stopped (such as when a demo screen is being displayed), or a state where the player is not touching an operating means such as a handle.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the effect display device 42 is in a standby state where no effects such as variable display are being performed (except when the custom setting continuation selection screen 8000 is being displayed), the player can press the effect button 125 to create a user-responsive interrupt state, and processing is performed to customize the effect content to suit the player's preferences.

In addition to this, the configuration may be such that the player can customize and input values for the output mode of a specific effect section (for example, the reliability of the fish school effect) by operating an input means (including the mobile terminal 2000) such as the effect button 125 or cross key 126 during the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display for a specified period on the effect display device 42.

If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to perform specific internal controls (such as controls related to the reliability and appearance rate of specific effects performed during the variable display) based on customization input values actually entered by the player, the values related to the specific internal controls cannot be changed midway through the variable display for a specific period.

In contrast, with the present invention, the input values entered by the player for customization are not directly reflected in specific internal controls, so as with the above configuration, customization input by the player can be permitted even during a specified period of variable display. As a result, players can enjoy the customization function without being subject to time restrictions regarding customization input.

(i) The specified detection target is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be any other target that can be detected by the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262). For example, it may be a part of the player's body, such as a hand or finger, an object held by the player (e.g., an IC card), or a detectable member displaceably mounted on the gaming machine (such as the movable contact of a button switch).

More specifically, for example, in the above embodiment, a smartphone is used as the mobile terminal 2000 to be detected, but this is not limited to this. Other mobile terminals (mobile devices) having a first communication means (e.g., an NFC module) for short-range wireless communication and a second communication means (e.g., a BT module) that is faster and has a longer communication distance than the first communication means, such as mobile phones, smart watches, tablet terminals, notebook computers, PDAs (Personal Digital Assistants), portable game consoles, eyeglass-type wearable computers, wireless earphones, wireless headphones, VR (Virtual Reality) glasses, VR goggles, etc. may also be used.

Furthermore, by utilizing the various wireless communication functions (e.g., NFC module or BT module) of a portable device with audio output functionality, such as wireless earphones, audio data related to background music, sound effects, etc. can be received in real time from a pachinko machine 10 paired with the portable device, and audio output effects can be generated on the portable device side instead of or in addition to audio output effects from the speaker SP on the pachinko machine 10 side.

With this configuration, even in a noisy environment with many gaming machines in operation, such as an amusement hall, players can concentrate on their own game and enjoy it without being disturbed by surrounding noise. Furthermore, players can quickly and easily pair the pachinko machine 10 with a portable device such as wireless earphones without having to go through complicated procedures such as entering a password, which is very convenient.

In addition, the mobile terminal may be configured to execute a second audio output effect that is different from the first audio output effect, in conjunction with the first audio output effect from the speaker SP on the paired pachinko machine 10. This can further increase the player's interest.

(j) The configuration of the detection means is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted as long as the predetermined detection state is reached when a predetermined detection target approaches or abuts within a predetermined distance from a predetermined detection unit in a predetermined input-enabled state.

For example, instead of an NFC chip that can detect a predetermined radio wave when a detection target approaches or touches a predetermined antenna that serves as the detection unit, a touch panel that can detect changes in pressure or capacitance when a detection target approaches or touches a predetermined electrode that serves as the detection unit, a switch that turns on when a detection target approaches or touches a contact point that serves as the detection unit, a light-shielding sensor that can detect a predetermined light (including reflected light emitted from a predetermined light-emitting element) when a detection target approaches or touches a light-receiving element that serves as the detection unit, or a human presence sensor that can detect a predetermined temperature change when a detection target approaches or touches an infrared sensor that serves as the detection unit, etc. may be used.

More specifically, for example, when a player holds his/her hand in front of the performance display device 42 of the pachinko machine 10 in a permitted state, if a predetermined sensor detects this and a predetermined detection state is reached, a BT connection request (including BT connection information) is output from the machine-side BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10 to the terminal-side BT module 2200 of the mobile terminal 2000, and in response to this, a BT connection response is sent from the terminal-side BT module 2200 of the mobile terminal 2000 to the machine-side BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10.

(k) The configuration of the information output means is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be configured in any other way as long as it is capable of executing a predetermined output when the detection means reaches at least a predetermined detection state, and is configured to output multiple pieces of information stored in a predetermined memory unit that correspond to the input of predetermined information to the performance execution means when a predetermined output condition is met.

For example, instead of an antenna and/or its control means that transmits multiple pieces of information via radio waves, it may be possible to use a display means and/or its control means that displays an image containing multiple pieces of information (including code information such as a QR code), a speaker and/or its control means that outputs multiple pieces of information via sound waves, or a light emitting means and/or its control means that outputs multiple pieces of information via light (including infrared light).

More specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which data is sent and received using IrDA (infrared communication standard) with a mobile terminal 2000 placed in a predetermined position. However, with the BT communication method, unlike IrDA, there is no need to face the ports (infrared emitter and infrared receiver) when sending and receiving data, and communication is possible even if there is an obstruction between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal 2000.

(l) The multiple pieces of information output by the information output means are not limited to those in the above embodiment, and may be any information related to the performance execution means stored in a specified storage unit, and other configurations may also be adopted.

For example, instead of BT connection information (BT module device name, BD address, password), code information such as a QR code (two-dimensional code), command information, text information, image information, audio information, etc. may be used.

More specifically, for example, when a player holds their hand in front of the effect display device 42 of the pachinko machine 10 in a permitted state, and a specified sensor detects this and a specified input state occurs, the effect display device 42 displays and outputs text information such as "Please place your mobile device on NFC." In response, when the player places the mobile device 2000 on the touch area 1105a of the machine-side NFC module 1100 of the pachinko machine 10, the sub-control device 262 detects a signal from the machine-side NFC module 1100 and sends and receives various data via NFC communication.

(m) The multiple pieces of information corresponding to the input of specified information may be any type of information, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, such as device name information, address information, password, instruction information (command information) for issuing specified instructions, code information, response information for issuing specified responses, request information for issuing specified requests, selection information for issuing specified selections, permission information for requesting specified permission, text information for conveying specified content, image information for displaying specified images, audio information for executing specified audio output, drawing information for executing specified drawing processing, and performance information for executing specified performances.

(n) Information relating to specific configurable information that can be customized (such as game specifications and the output mode of effect elements) may be anything, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, such as information relating to language setting information (a flag value relating to a language type setting flag), information relating to volume setting information (a level value relating to volume level information), information relating to brightness setting information (a level value relating to brightness level information), or information relating to effect setting information (an on/off value relating to an effect execution flag or a numerical value relating to effect appearance rate information).

(o) The configuration for inputting specified information is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, instead of a Bluetooth module capable of input/output via Bluetooth communication as in the above embodiment, other communication modules may be used, such as an NFC module capable of input/output via NFC communication, an IrDA module capable of input/output via infrared communication, or a wireless LAN module capable of input/output via wireless LAN (including Wi-Fi) communication.

More specifically, Wi-Fi Direct (registered trademark) may be used, which allows devices with wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) functionality to communicate one-to-one at high speeds without the need for an access point. Wi-Fi Direct uses connection information (pairing information) such as an SSID (Service Set Identifier), MAC address (Media Access Control Address), and password.

(p) The configuration related to the BT connection processing on the mobile terminal 2000 side is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the mobile terminal 2000 is configured to make a BT connection request to the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200) based on the BT connection information acquired from the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side NFC module 1100), and if there is no BT connection response from the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200) (step SH7004: NO in Figure 2-63), it determines that the connection has failed and terminates the BT connection process.

In addition to this, even if the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) makes a BT connection request to the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200), if there is no BT connection response from the pachinko machine 10 to the mobile terminal 2000, the value of a predetermined measurement timer may be incremented, and if the value of the measurement timer exceeds a predetermined response waiting time (e.g., 5 seconds), the connection may be deemed to have failed and the BT connection process may be terminated.

Similarly, even if the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) makes a BT connection request to the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200), if there is no BT connection response from the pachinko machine 10 to the mobile terminal 2000, the value of a predetermined number of times counter is incremented, and if the value of the number of times counter exceeds a predetermined number of retries (e.g., 50 times), the connection may be deemed to have failed and the BT connection process may be terminated.

In other words, the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) may be configured to make a BT connection request multiple times within a specified period of time.

(q) The configuration for BT connection processing on the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) side is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, if an NFC communication state is established on the pachinko machine 10 side but no BT connection request input is detected for a predetermined period of time, it is highly likely that some kind of abnormality has occurred on the mobile terminal 2000 (for example, BT communication has been prohibited), and in such cases, it is necessary to ask the player for confirmation.

In response to this, for example, after the machine-side NFC module 1100 on the pachinko machine 10 is activated and transmits BT connection information to the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side NFC module 2100), the sub-control device 262 measures time using a predetermined measurement timer, and if a BT connection request is not made from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) to the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200) before a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed, the NFC communication that transmitted the above-mentioned BT connection information may be invalidated, and the machine-side NFC module 1100 may be requested to be activated again to transmit the BT connection information (such as by having the player bring the mobile terminal 2000 close to the machine-side NFC module 1100).

In other words, to generate a BT communication connection state as a transition state, it is necessary to generate an NFC communication state as an interrupt state again. Therefore, in this embodiment, the function that performs this processing corresponds to the configuration that requires the interrupt state to be established again.

(r) Also, as shown in Figure 2-70, the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) periodically monitors the signal input from the card unit 900 and the machine-side BT module 1200 (steps SH8400, SH8401), and if it receives a use permission signal from the card unit 900 (step SH8400: YES), it considers the machine-side BT module 1200 to be in a use permission state and determines whether there is a BT connection request from the external mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) to the machine-side BT module 1200, If a BT connection request is received from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) (step SH8401: YES), a BT connection response is sent to the mobile terminal 2000 (step SH8402), a BT communication connection is established, and the BT connection information (device name, BD address, and password of the base-side BT module 1200) stored in memory 1103 of the base-side NFC module 1100 is rewritten to invalid information (step SH8403), and BT communication control is started (step SH8404).

Under normal circumstances, the base-side NFC module 1100 automatically outputs the BT connection information stored in memory 1103 when an NFC-compatible device approaches, without being controlled by the sub-controller 262. Therefore, if a mobile terminal other than the currently connected mobile terminal 2000 approaches the base-side NFC module 1100 and obtains valid BT connection information (such as a password), a new BT connection request will be output from the other mobile terminal to the base-side BT module 1200 and authenticated, which could result in the BT communication connection of the previously connected mobile terminal 2000 being disconnected or multiple mobile terminals being connected at the same time, which could cause problems.

In response to this, a BT connection information rewrite process such as that of step SH8403 above is performed as a suppression function, so that valid BT connection information is not output to other devices (mobile terminals) while a BT communication connection with a specific BT-compatible device (mobile terminal 2000) is in progress. Even if another device (mobile terminal) acquires BT connection information (invalid BT connection information) and outputs a new BT connection request, this information is authenticated by the base-side BT module 1200, preventing problems such as the BT communication connection of the previously connected mobile terminal 2000 being disconnected.

(s) Also, as shown in FIG. 2-71, the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) periodically monitors the signal input from the card unit 900 and the machine-side BT module 1200 (steps SH8500, SH8501). If a usage permission signal is received from the card unit 900 (step SH8500: YES), the machine-side BT module 1200 is deemed to be in a usage permission state, and the machine-side BT module 1200 is notified of the external mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 220 0), and if a BT connection request has been received from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) (step SH8501: YES), a BT connection response is sent to the mobile terminal 2000 (step SH8502), establishing a BT communication connection, and outputting a predetermined signal to a predetermined terminal (pin) electrically connected to the base-side NFC module 1100 (step SH8503), and starting BT communication control (step SH8504).

As described above, by outputting a specified signal to a specified terminal, a circuit configuration can be realized in which the power received by the antenna unit 1102 in the base-side NFC module 1100 is passed to ground (GND). As a result, the base-side NFC module 1100 does not start up, and information stored in memory 1103 cannot be output. Of course, this configuration is not limited to this, and other configurations that prevent information output using hardware circuit configurations rather than software control may also be used. This configuration constitutes the suppression function in this embodiment.

(t) Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2-72, the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) may be configured to periodically monitor the signal input from the card unit 900 and the machine-side BT module 1200, first referencing the BT connection flag to determine whether or not a BT communication connection is already in progress (step SH8600), and if a positive determination is made here (step SH8600: YES), then terminate this processing. This makes it possible to prevent problems such as multiple BT-compatible devices being connected at the same time. Therefore, the function that performs this processing constitutes the prevention function in this embodiment.

If no BT-compatible device is currently connected via BT communication (step SH8600: NO), it is determined whether a usage permission signal has been received from the card unit 900 (step SH8601). If a usage permission signal has been received (step SH8601: YES), the base-side BT module 1200 is considered to be in a usage permission state, and it is determined whether a BT connection request has been made to the base-side BT module 1200 from the external mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) (step SH8602). If a BT connection request has been made (step SH8602: YES), a BT connection response is sent to the mobile terminal 2000 (step SH8603), a BT communication connection is established, and BT communication control is started (step SH8604).

(u) Of course, the configuration is not limited to the above, and since it is conceivable that information sharing may be required between close friends, etc., a configuration may be adopted in which multiple mobile terminals 2000 (terminal-side BT modules 2200) can be multiplexed and connected to a single pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200).

For example, as shown in FIG. 2-73, the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) periodically monitors the signal input from the card unit 900 and the machine-side BT module 1200 (steps SH8700, SH8701). If a use permission signal is received from the card unit 900 (step SH8700: YES), the machine-side BT module 1200 is deemed to be in a use permission state, and the machine-side BT module 1200 is determined to have received a BT connection request from an external mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200). If a BT connection request is received from a specific mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200), If so (step SH8701: YES), it is determined whether the number of BT-compatible devices currently connected to the base-side BT module 1200 via BT communication (number of connections) exceeds a preset upper limit of connections (number of possible BT communication connections) (step SH8702). If the number of connections exceeds the upper limit (step SH8702: YES), the processing ends without permitting the BT communication connection; if the number of connections does not exceed the upper limit (step SH8702: NO), a BT connection response is sent to the mobile terminal 2000 (step SH8703), a BT communication connection is established, and BT communication control is started (step SH8704).

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple pachinko machines 10 (machine-side BT modules 1200) can be multiplexed and connected to one mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200).

(v) Furthermore, when a specific pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200 of the sub-control device 262) and a first mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) are already connected via BT communication, if a new second mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side NFC module 2100) comes close to the machine-side NFC module 1100, the specific pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200 of the sub-control device 262) may be configured to disconnect the currently connected BT communication connection with the first mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) and establish a new BT communication connection with the second mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200).

For example, as shown in FIG. 2-74, the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) periodically monitors the signal input from the card unit 900 and the machine-side NFC module 1100 (steps SH8801, SH8802), and if it receives a usage permission signal from the card unit 900 (step SH8801: YES), it considers the machine-side NFC module 1100 to be in a usage permission state and determines whether the machine-side NFC module 1100 is in an on state (step When the base NFC module 1100 receives radio waves from a specific mobile terminal 2000 (terminal BT module 2200) and turns on (step SH8802: YES), it checks the BT connection flag to determine whether or not it is already connected to another BT compatible device via BT communication (step SH8803). If the result is affirmative (step SH8803: YES), it turns off the BT connection flag and disconnects the BT communication (step SH8804).

When the base-side NFC module 1100 is turned on (step SH8802: YES), the BT connection information stored in memory 1103 is output externally via NFC wireless communication via the antenna unit 1102.

If the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) requests a BT connection from the base-side BT module 1200 (step SH8805: YES), the base-side BT module 1200 sends a BT connection response to the mobile terminal 2000 (step SH8806), establishing a BT communication connection. The base-side NFC module 1100 also rewrites the BT connection information (device name, BD address, and password of the base-side BT module 1200) stored in memory 1103 to invalid information (step SH8807), and starts BT communication control (step SH8808).

(w) Furthermore, as in the example shown in Figure 2-74 above, when a specific pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200 of the sub-control device 262) and a first mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) are already connected via BT communication, if a new second mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side NFC module 2100) comes close to the machine-side NFC module 1100, the specific pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200 of the sub-control device 262) will disconnect the BT communication connection with the currently connected first mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) and establish a new BT communication connection with the In a configuration capable of BT communication connection with the second mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200), it is possible to suddenly switch over as described above without any notification to the first mobile terminal 2000 that is already connected via BT communication. However, it is also conceivable that the player possessing the first mobile terminal 2000 may simply leave the pachinko machine 10 for a short break, for example, and not have finished playing, and during that time another player possessing a second mobile terminal 2000 may bring the second mobile terminal 2000 close to the pachinko machine 10 in order to start playing on that pachinko machine 10.

In response to this, for example, as shown in FIG. 2-75, the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) periodically monitors the signal input from the card unit 900 and the machine-side BT module 1200 (steps SH8900, SH8901), and if it receives a use permission signal from the card unit 900 (step SH8900: YES), it considers the machine-side BT module 1200 to be in a use permission state, and sends a command to the machine-side BT module 1200 to connect to the external mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200 ) and if a BT connection request has been received from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) (step SH8901: YES), the BT connection flag is taken into consideration to determine whether a BT communication connection is already in progress with another BT-compatible device (step SH8902). If a negative determination is made here (step SH8902: NO), a BT connection response is sent to the mobile terminal 2000, a BT communication connection is established, and BT communication control is started (step SH8903).

On the other hand, if a BT communication connection with another BT-compatible device is already in progress (step SH8902: YES), a disconnection confirmation signal is sent to the other BT-compatible device (step SH8904). Here, the function of sending the disconnection confirmation signal may constitute the output function in this embodiment.

In response to this, other BT-compatible devices that receive the disconnection confirmation signal are configured to display a message on their display screens, using the dedicated app, asking the player to confirm that they want to disconnect the BT communication connection, such as "Are you sure you want to disconnect the pairing?" As a result, problems between players can be avoided.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) uses its update function to execute a timer update process that increments the value of a predetermined disconnection timer (step SH8905), and determines whether the value of the disconnection timer has reached a predetermined upper limit, i.e., whether the predetermined disconnection waiting time has elapsed (step SH8906).

Then, when the disconnection waiting time has elapsed (step SH8906: YES), the disconnection timer is reset and the BT connection flag is set to OFF, thereby disconnecting the BT communication connection with other BT-compatible devices (step SH8907).

Then, a BT connection response is sent to the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) that has newly requested a connection, a BT communication connection is established, and BT communication control is started (step SH8908).

(x) The configuration related to the BT communication processing performed on the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) side during a BT communication connection is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(x-1) For example, a configuration may be adopted in which BT communication is executed between the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) and the portable terminal 2000 when the portable terminal 2000 is held over the touch area 1105a of the machine-side NFC module 1100.

For example, as shown in Figure 2-76, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 periodically monitors the machine-side NFC module 1100 during the above user-response processing, and determines whether the machine-side NFC module 1100 is operating (detecting the terminal-side NFC module 2100) (step SH11001). If it is operating (step SH11001: YES), it refers to the BT connection flag and determines whether BT communication is connected (step SH11002). If a negative determination is made here, the processing ends.

If BT communication is currently connected (step SH11002: YES), the system determines whether predetermined output data (such as game history information) is stored in the game information storage area of RAM 553 (step SH11003). If the determination is negative, the system terminates this process.

On the other hand, if there is output data to be sent in the game information storage area (step SH11003: YES), the output data is sent to the terminal-side BT module 2200 of the mobile terminal 2000 via the machine-side BT module 1200, and processing is performed to receive data from the terminal-side BT module 2200 (step SH11004).

Next, the sub-control device 262 determines whether the input data received from the mobile terminal 2000 is stored in the memory 1203 of the machine-side BT module 1200 (step SH11005). If the determination here is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if there is input data (step SH11005: YES), the input data is stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553 (step SH11006), and this processing ends.

(x-2) Alternatively, the configuration may be such that BT communication is performed between the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) and the mobile terminal 2000 when the amount of data stored in a specified buffer reaches or exceeds a predetermined value.

For example, as shown in Figure 2-77, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not a BT communication connection is in progress by referring to the BT connection flag (step SH12001). If a negative determination is made here, the process ends.

If BT communication is currently connected (step SH12001: YES), it is determined whether or not specified output data is stored in the game information storage area of RAM 553 (step SH12002). If the determination here is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is output data to be sent in the game information storage area (step SH12002: YES), that output data is stored in a specified buffer (step SH12003).

Next, it is determined whether the amount of data stored in the buffer has reached a predetermined value or more (step SH12004). If it has reached the predetermined value or more (step SH12004: YES), the data stored in the buffer is transmitted via the platform-side BT module 1200 to the terminal-side BT module 2200 of the mobile terminal 2000, and data is received from the terminal-side BT module 2200 (step SH12005).

(x-3) Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the portable terminal 2000 is held over the touch area 1105a of the machine-side NFC module 1100, the amount of data stored in a specified buffer exceeds a predetermined value, BT communication is executed between the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) and the portable terminal 2000.

For example, as shown in Figure 2-78, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 periodically monitors the machine-side NFC module 1100 during the above user-response processing, and determines whether the machine-side NFC module 1100 is operating (detecting the terminal-side NFC module 2100) (step SH13001). If it is operating (step SH13001: YES), it determines whether BT communication is connected, taking into account the BT connection flag (step SH13002). If a negative determination is made here, the processing ends.

If BT communication is currently connected (step SH13002: YES), it is determined whether predetermined output data (such as game history information) is stored in the game information storage area of RAM 553 (step SH13003). If the determination here is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is output data to be sent in the game information storage area (step SH13003: YES), that output data is stored in a specified buffer (step SH13004).

Next, it is determined whether the amount of data stored in the buffer has reached a predetermined value or more (step SH13005). If it has reached the predetermined value or more (step SH13005: YES), the data stored in the buffer is transmitted via the platform-side BT module 1200 to the terminal-side BT module 2200 of the mobile terminal 2000, and data is received from the terminal-side BT module 2200 (step SH13006).

(x-4) Data may be transmitted based on a transmission request from the player (mobile terminal 2000).

For example, as shown in Figure 2-79, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not a BT communication connection is in progress by referring to the BT connection flag (step SH14001). If a negative determination is made here, the process ends.

If BT communication is currently connected (step SH14001: YES), it is determined whether or not specified output data is stored in the game information storage area of RAM 553 (step SH14002). If the determination here is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is output data to be sent in the game information storage area (step SH14002: YES), that output data is stored in a specified buffer (step SH14003).

Next, it is determined whether a data transmission request has been received from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) (step SH14004). If a data transmission request has been received (step SH14004: YES), the data stored in the buffer is transmitted to the terminal-side BT module 2200 of the mobile terminal 2000 via the platform-side BT module 1200, and processing is performed to receive data from the terminal-side BT module 2200 (step SH14005).

(x-5) A configuration combining the various processes described above may also be used. For example, as shown in FIG. 2-80, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 periodically monitors the machine-side NFC module 1100 during the above user-response process, and determines whether the machine-side NFC module 1100 is operating (detecting the terminal-side NFC module 2100) (step SH15001). If it is operating (step SH15001: YES), it determines whether BT communication is connected, taking into account the BT connection flag (step SH15002). If a negative determination is made here, the process terminates.

If BT communication is currently connected (step SH15002: YES), it is determined whether predetermined output data (such as game history information) is stored in the game information storage area of RAM 553 (step SH15003). If the determination here is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is output data to be sent in the game information storage area (step SH15003: YES), that output data is stored in a specified buffer (step SH15004).

Next, it is determined whether a data transmission request has been received from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) (step SH15005). If a data transmission request has been received (step SH15005: YES), the data stored in the buffer is transmitted to the terminal-side BT module 2200 of the mobile terminal 2000 via the platform-side BT module 1200, and processing is performed to receive data from the terminal-side BT module 2200 (step SH15006).

(y) The configuration for the BT communication connection disconnection process performed on the mobile terminal 2000 side and the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) side is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(y-1) For example, as shown in FIG. 2-81, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to periodically monitor the machine-side BT module 1200 during the above-mentioned user response processing (step SH20001), and when a BT disconnection request is made from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) to the machine-side BT module 1200 (step SH20001: YES), determine whether output data to be transmitted (e.g., game history information) is stored in the game information storage area of RAM 553 (step SH20002) rather than immediately disconnecting BT communication.

If the result here is positive (step SH20002: YES), the output data is sent to the terminal-side BT module 2200 of the mobile terminal 2000 via the platform-side BT module 1200 (step SH20003).

Then, when all output data to be transmitted from the game information storage area of RAM 553 has been exhausted (step SH20002: NO), the BT connection flag is set to OFF and BT communication is disconnected (step SH20004).

(y-2) In response to this, on the mobile terminal 2000 side, for example, as shown in FIG. 2-82, after the player operates the dedicated app on the mobile terminal 2000 to send a BT disconnection request from the terminal-side BT module 2200 to the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200) (step SH21001), rather than immediately disconnecting the BT communication, the control unit 2001 may determine whether the input data received from the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the memory 2203 of the terminal-side BT module 2200 (step SH21002).

If the answer is affirmative (step SH21002: YES), the input data is stored in memory 2002 (step SH21003). Then, when all input data to be received from memory 2203 of the terminal-side BT module 2200 is gone (step SH21002: NO), the BT connection flag is set to OFF and BT communication is disconnected (step SH9104).

(y-3) Furthermore, in correspondence with the configuration in which the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 performs the BT connection information rewrite process shown in FIG. 2-70 above, for example, as shown in FIG. 2-83, the user response process may periodically monitor the machine-side BT module 1200 (step SH22001), and if the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) issues a BT disconnection request to the machine-side BT module 1200 (step SH22001: YES), after disconnecting the BT communication (step SH22002), the invalid BT connection information (machine-side BT module 1200 device name, BD address, password) stored in the memory 1103 of the machine-side NFC module 1100 may be rewritten to valid information (step SH22003).

(y-4) Furthermore, in a configuration (e.g., a configuration with a holder section) in which the mobile terminal 2000 can be placed on the touch area 1105a of the machine-side NFC module 1100, and the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side NFC module 2100) is always placed in close proximity to or in contact with the machine-side NFC module 1100 (always on state), for example, as shown in FIG. 2-84, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to periodically monitor the machine-side NFC module 1100 during the above-mentioned user response processing, determine whether the machine-side NFC module 1100 is in the off state (step SH23001), and if it is in the off state (step SH23001: YES), disconnect BT communication (step SH23002).

Here, the base-side NFC module 1100 may be turned off when the mobile terminal 2000 moves a predetermined distance or more away from the touch area 1105a of the base-side NFC module 1100, or when the power to the mobile terminal 2000 is turned off.

(y-5) Conversely, if the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side NFC module 2100) is not always placed in close proximity or contact with the touch area 1105a of the machine-side NFC module 1100 (always in an off state), the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to periodically monitor the machine-side NFC module 1100 and disconnect BT communication when the machine-side NFC module 1100 is turned on.

In other words, when BT communication is connected, the player may hold the mobile terminal 2000 over the touch area 1105a of the machine-side NFC module 1100, causing the BT communication to be disconnected.

(y-6) Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2-85, for example, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to periodically monitor whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, i.e., whether the power supply to the sub-control device 262 itself has stopped, during the above-mentioned user response processing (step SH24001), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state (step SH24001: YES), disconnect BT communication (step SH24002).

In addition, the configuration may be such that BT communication is terminated when the power is turned off on the mobile terminal 2000 side, or when the player (mobile terminal 2000) moves beyond the BT communication range of the pachinko machine 10 and radio waves from the mobile terminal 2000 are no longer detected.

(y-7) Here, for example, if a player is playing at a specific pachinko machine 10 with the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal 2000 connected via BT communication, and then moves to an adjacent pachinko machine 10 and continues playing there without disconnecting the BT communication connection, the BT communication connection will remain undisconnected.

In such cases, depending on the configuration, another player attempting to play a new game on the specified pachinko machine 10 may be unable to establish a BT communication connection with that specified pachinko machine 10, which could significantly reduce the player's interest.

In contrast, an NFC module for the amusement hall manager may be provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 (a position where players cannot bring the mobile terminal 2000, etc., close to the machine), separate from the machine-side NFC module 1100.

In a configuration in which the administrator NFC module is electrically connected to the sub-control device 262, as shown in Figure 2-86, for example, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 may periodically monitor the administrator NFC module during the above-mentioned user response processing (step SH25001), and with the amusement hall manager opening the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10, hold a specified NFC-compatible device (including an IC card, etc.) over the administrator NFC module on the back of the pachinko machine 10 to determine whether the administrator NFC module has been activated and is in the ON state (step SH25002).If the administrator NFC module is in the ON state (step SH25002: YES), the BT communication may be disconnected (step SH25003).

Here, holding a specific NFC-compatible device (including an IC card, etc.) over the administrator NFC module corresponds to the specific condition being met in this embodiment, and the function that forcibly disconnects BT communication based on this constitutes the termination function.

If the administrator NFC module does not turn on (step SH25002: NO), the base-side BT module 1200 is monitored (step SH25004), as in the process shown in Figure 2-83 above. If the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) requests the base-side BT module 1200 to disconnect the BT (step SH25004: YES), the BT communication is disconnected (step SH25005), and then the invalid BT connection information (device name, BD address, and password of the base-side BT module 1200) stored in the memory 1103 of the base-side NFC module 1100 is rewritten to valid information (step SH25006).

In addition, as a termination function, instead of the above-mentioned NFC module for the administrator, a BT communication disconnection button for the amusement hall administrator may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and by operating the BT communication disconnection button, specific conditions may be met, allowing the BT communication connection to be forcibly disconnected.

(y-8) Furthermore, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to set a predetermined measurement timer when a BT communication connection is established between the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200) and the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) and periodically increment the value of the measurement timer. In this configuration, the sub-control device 262 may periodically determine whether the value of the measurement timer has exceeded a predetermined valid connection time (e.g., two hours) during the above-mentioned user response processing (step SH26001), for example, as shown in FIG. 2-87, and if the valid connection time has been exceeded (step SH26001: YES), disconnect the BT communication (step SH26002).

(y-9) Generally, BT-compatible devices such as the mobile terminal 2000 have an automatic connection function that stores the BT connection information (device name, BD address, password, etc.) of BT-compatible devices with which they have previously connected (paired) via BT communication, and automatically establishes a BT communication connection the next time they enter the communication range.

For this reason, even if a player disconnects the BT communication connection with a specific pachinko machine 10 after connecting (pairing) the mobile terminal 2000 via BT communication with the pachinko machine 10 and playing the game, there is a risk that the automatic connection function of the mobile terminal 2000 may automatically establish a BT communication connection with the pachinko machine 10 if the player simply passes by the pachinko machine 10, even if the player had no intention of establishing a BT communication connection with the pachinko machine 10.

As mentioned above, amusement halls typically have a large number and a wide variety of gaming machines. Players choose which machine to play based on their gaming circumstances (e.g., available time, available funds, interest, etc.). Therefore, as a player's gaming circumstances change, the gaming machine they play on within the amusement hall also changes. In other words, players do not necessarily play on a single gaming machine for an extended period of time; they may move seats as needed and play on different gaming machines multiple times. In such situations, there may be many gaming machines within the amusement hall that have already been connected via BT communication. In such cases, various problems may arise, such as a multiple connection state where a player's mobile device automatically connects to multiple gaming machines that have previously been connected via BT communication with the mobile device, or a situation where a new player attempting to play on a specific gaming machine is unable to connect via BT communication to the specific gaming machine. These problems could potentially result in the automatic connection function, which would otherwise improve convenience, becoming a disadvantage.

To prevent such problems, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 2-88, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 periodically monitors the machine-side BT module 1200 during the above user response process, and determines whether or not a BT disconnection request has been made from the mobile terminal 2000 (terminal-side BT module 2200) to the machine-side BT module 1200 (step SH27001). If a BT disconnection request has been made (step SH27001: YES), the BT communication is disconnected (step SH27002), and then the machine-side BT module 1200 The password for the BT communication connection stored in the memory 1203 of the base-side NFC module 1100 (e.g., "AB12345") may be changed to a new, separate password (e.g., "CD56789") (step SH27003), and the password for the base-side BT module 1200 stored in the memory 1103 of the base-side NFC module 1100 (e.g., "AB12345") may be changed to the new, separate password (e.g., "CD56789") (step SH27004).

In other words, when BT communication is terminated as described above, the restriction function in this embodiment may be configured by a setting function that restricts the next BT communication connection (pairing) from occurring if the password does not match a new, different password as a predetermined condition.

(z) In addition, configurations other than those described above may be adopted.

(z-1) For example, to enable players or hall managers to check whether an unmanned pachinko machine 10 is connected to BT communication, while the machine is connected to BT communication (during pairing), identification information HW5 such as "connected to communication" may be displayed on a display means such as the effect display device 42, as shown in Figure 2-109(a).

(z-2) The configurations related to the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter selected when executing various effects are not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may also be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, in relation to the school of fish effect, under a configuration in which the player can customize the school of fish reliability between 10% and 90%, regardless of whether the player selects a school of fish reliability between 10% and 90% (i.e., whether the player selects a school of fish reliability of 25%, a school of fish reliability of 50%, or a school of fish reliability of 75%), the sub-control device 262 is configured to set a performance selection table and performance selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% in a specified area of RAM 553.

In such cases, on the surface, the system is configured to generate an output selection state that can be customized by the player and whose reliability can be selected, but in reality, no matter what value is input, the effect selection table and/or effect selection random number counter set in a specified area of RAM 553 and referenced during control will always be set to the same effect selection table and/or effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% that is pre-stored in ROM 552.

As a result, with this configuration, changing the reliability of the school of fish effect at any time will not affect the effect itself, making it possible for players to customize the reliability of the school of fish effect at any time during the changing display. As a result, players can enjoy the customization function without being subject to the time restrictions imposed on customization inputs in the past.

Even in cases where only one type of effect selection table and/or effect selection random number counter is provided, the player must be able to perceive the customized input values as if they were reflected in the pachinko machine's 10 internal control. Therefore, in the above embodiment, even in such cases, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion message, such as "75% confidence has been entered," to indicate that the input of the fish school reliability determined by the player has been completed. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the reliability information (such as a setting value related to the fish school reliability) set in the effect customization information storage area (fish school reliability storage area) of RAM 553 to the reliability information determined by the player as described above.

However, in a configuration such as the above embodiment, where only one type of effect selection table and/or effect selection random number counter is provided for a specific reliability (e.g., 50%) or specific appearance rate (e.g., 40%), regardless of the predetermined reliability (e.g., 10% to 90%) or predetermined appearance rate (e.g., 1% to 99%) selected by the player from a wide range of options, the difference from the predetermined reliability, etc. selected by the player may become too large, resulting in unnatural game effects that are far removed from the effects desired by the player.

In contrast, multiple effect selection tables and/or effect selection random number counters may be provided in accordance with the reliability, etc. selected by the player. This will be explained in more detail below with specific examples.

(z-2-1) In the above embodiment, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the school of fish effect lottery, which are set in connection with the execution of the school of fish effect setting process in step SH35809, are stored in advance in ROM 552 in advance. These are effect selection tables and effect selection random number counters for a reliability of 50%, and are set and used in RAM 553 regardless of the reliability selected by the player.

Alternatively, in connection with the execution of the school of fish effect setting process in step SH35809 above, a predetermined effect selection table and/or effect selection random number counter corresponding to the reliability selected by the player may be selected from multiple effect selection tables and/or effect selection random number counters for the school of fish effect lottery stored in ROM 552, and this may be set in RAM 553 and used.

In other words, when performing the fish school effect setting process of step SH35809 above, the sub-control device 262 may be configured to change the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter to be set depending on the reliability stored in the fish school reliability memory area (the fish school reliability selected by the player).

For example, when performing the fish school effect setting process of step SH35809, the sub-control device 262 first takes into consideration the fish school reliability information stored in the fish school reliability storage area provided in the user-associated area of the RAM 553, i.e., the fish school reliability selected and input by the player (reliability 10% to 90%).

Then, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter corresponding to the reliability stored here (the school of fish reliability selected by the player) are read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the school of fish effect lottery.

For example, if the reliability stored in the fish school reliability storage area (the fish school reliability selected by the player) is "10% to 30%," the sub-control device 262 sets a presentation selection table and presentation selection random number counter for a reliability of 20% in a specified area of RAM 553. Here, a reliability of "20%" constitutes the "specific value," and the "first value" or "second value" may be constituted by any value between "10% and 30%" excluding "20%." In other words, regardless of whether the value (reliability) customized and input by the player is a value greater than "20%," such as "30%" or "25%," or a smaller value such as "15%" or "10%," processing corresponding to a reliability of "20%" will be performed.

More specifically, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 20% that are taken into consideration when a jackpot occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a 20% appearance rate of the school of fish effect (= 20 times/100 times) are set, and as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 20% that are taken into consideration when a loss occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a 0.4% appearance rate of the school of fish effect (= 80 times/19,900 times) are set.

Furthermore, if the reliability stored in the fish school reliability storage area is "31% to 50%," the sub-control device 262 sets an effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 40% in a specified area of RAM 553. Here, a reliability of "40%" constitutes the "specific value," and the "first value" or "second value" may be constituted by any value between "31% and 50%" excluding "40%." In other words, regardless of whether the value (reliability) customized and input by the player is, for example, a value greater than "40%" such as "50%" or "45%," or a smaller value such as "35%" or "31%," processing corresponding to a reliability of "40%" will be performed.

More specifically, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 40% that are taken into consideration when a jackpot occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a 40% appearance rate of the school of fish effect (= 40 times out of 100 times) are set, and as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 40% that are taken into consideration when a loss occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a 0.3% appearance rate of the school of fish effect (= 60 times out of 19,900 times) are set.

Furthermore, if the reliability stored in the fish school reliability storage area is "51% to 70%," the sub-control device 262 sets a presentation selection table and presentation selection random number counter for a reliability of 60% in a specified area of RAM 553. Here, the reliability of "60%" constitutes the "specific value," and the "first value" or "second value" may be constituted by any value between "51% and 70%" excluding "60%." In other words, regardless of whether the value (reliability) customized and input by the player is, for example, a value greater than "60%" such as "70%" or "65%," or a smaller value such as "55%" or "51%, processing corresponding to a reliability of "60%" will be performed.

More specifically, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 60% that are taken into consideration when a jackpot occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a 60% appearance rate of the school of fish effect (= 60 times out of 100 times) are set, and as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 60% that are taken into consideration when a loss occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a 0.2% appearance rate of the school of fish effect (= 40 times out of 19,900 times) are set.

Furthermore, if the reliability stored in the fish school reliability storage area is "71% to 90%," the sub-control device 262 sets an effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 80% in a specified area of RAM 553. Here, a reliability of "80%" constitutes the "specific value," and any other value from "71% to 90%" excluding "80%" may constitute the "first value" or "second value." In other words, regardless of whether the value (reliability) customized and input by the player is a value greater than "80%, such as "90%" or "85%," or a smaller value such as "75%" or "71%," processing corresponding to a reliability of "80%" will be performed.

More specifically, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for an 80% reliability level to be taken into consideration when a jackpot occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with an 80% appearance rate of the school of fish effect (= 80 times out of 100 times) are set, and as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for an 80% reliability level to be taken into consideration when a loss occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with an appearance rate of the school of fish effect of approximately 0.1% (= 20 times out of 19,900 times) are set.

In this embodiment, when determining whether or not a school of fish effect will be executed, one effect selection table and one effect selection random number counter (one for when a jackpot fluctuation occurs and one for when a loss fluctuation occurs) are prepared for each of the above-mentioned various reliability levels (20%, 40%, 60%, and 80% reliability). However, it is also possible to configure a system in which, for example, one effect selection table with a different number of winning values is prepared for each of the above-mentioned various reliability levels, and one effect selection random number counter common to all of the above-mentioned reliability levels is prepared. Alternatively, it is also possible to configure a system in which one effect selection table common to all of the above-mentioned reliability levels is prepared, and one effect selection random number counter with a different number of counter values is prepared for each of the above-mentioned reliability levels.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 as described above is periodically updated by the update function in the counter update process of step SH3905 above, and is read out when the sub-control device 262 executes the determination process of step SH45207 described above (process for determining whether to execute the school of fish effect).

(z-2-2) In the above embodiment, only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the bubble effect lottery, which are set in connection with the execution of the bubble effect setting process in step SH35811, is stored in advance in ROM 552: an effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 30%, and this is set and used in RAM 553 regardless of the reliability selected by the player.

Alternatively, in connection with the execution of the bubble effect setting process in step SH35811 above, a predetermined effect selection table and/or effect selection random number counter corresponding to the reliability selected by the player may be selected from multiple effect selection tables and/or effect selection random number counters for bubble effect lottery stored in ROM 552, and this may be set in RAM 553 and used.

In other words, when performing the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811 above, the sub-control device 262 may be configured to change the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter to be set depending on the reliability stored in the bubble reliability memory area (the bubble reliability selected by the player).

For example, when performing the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811, the sub-controller 262 first takes into consideration the bubble reliability information stored in the bubble reliability storage area provided in the user-associated area of the RAM 553, i.e., the bubble reliability selected and input by the player (reliability 10% to 90%).

Then, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter corresponding to the reliability stored here (the bubble reliability selected by the player) are read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the bubble effect lottery.

For example, if the reliability stored in the bubble reliability memory area (the bubble reliability selected by the player) is "10% to 40%," the sub-control device 262 sets an effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 25% in a specified area of RAM 553. Here, the reliability of "25%" constitutes the "specific value," and the "first value" or "second value" may be constituted by any value between "10% and 40%" excluding "25%." In other words, regardless of whether the value (reliability) customized and input by the player is, for example, a value greater than "25%" such as "40%" or "30%," or a smaller value such as "20%" or "10%, processing corresponding to a reliability of "20%" will be performed.

More specifically, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 25% that are taken into consideration when a jackpot occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a bubble effect appearance rate of 25% (= 25 times/100 times) are set, and as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 25% that are taken into consideration when a loss occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a bubble effect appearance rate of approximately 0.37% (= 75 times/19,900 times) are set.

Furthermore, if the reliability stored in the bubble reliability memory area is "41% to 60%," the sub-control device 262 sets an effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% in a specified area of RAM 553. Here, a reliability of "50%" constitutes the "specific value," and any other value from "41% to 60%" excluding "50%" may constitute the "first value" or "second value." In other words, regardless of whether the value (reliability) customized and input by the player is, for example, a value greater than "50%" such as "60%" or "55%," or a smaller value such as "45%" or "41%," processing corresponding to a reliability of "50%" will be performed.

More specifically, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% that are taken into consideration when a jackpot occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a bubble effect appearance rate of 50% (= 50 times out of 100 times) are set, and as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% that are taken into consideration when a loss occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a bubble effect appearance rate of approximately 0.25% (= 50 times out of 19,900 times) are set.

Furthermore, if the reliability stored in the bubble reliability memory area is "61% to 90%," the sub-control device 262 sets an effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 75% in a specified area of RAM 553. Here, the reliability of "75%" constitutes the "specific value," and the "first value" or "second value" may be constituted by any value other than "75%" from "61% to 90%." In other words, regardless of whether the value (reliability) customized and input by the player is, for example, a value greater than "75%" such as "90%" or "80%," or a smaller value such as "70%" or "61%, processing corresponding to a reliability of "75%" will be performed.

More specifically, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 75% that are taken into consideration when a jackpot occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a bubble effect appearance rate of 75% (= 75 times/100 times) are set, and as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 75% that are taken into consideration when a loss occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a bubble effect appearance rate of approximately 0.1% (= 25 times/19,900 times) are set.

In this embodiment, when determining whether or not a bubble effect will be executed, one effect selection table and one effect selection random number counter (one for when a jackpot fluctuation occurs and one for when a miss fluctuation occurs) are prepared for each of the above-mentioned various reliability levels (25%, 50%, and 75% reliability). However, it is also possible to configure the system so that, for example, one effect selection table with a different number of winning values is prepared for each of the above-mentioned various reliability levels, and one effect selection random number counter common to all of the above-mentioned reliability levels is prepared. Conversely, it is also possible to configure the system so that one effect selection table common to all of the above-mentioned reliability levels is prepared, and one effect selection random number counter with a different number of counter values is prepared for each of the above-mentioned reliability levels.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 as described above is periodically updated by the update function in the counter update process of step SH3905 above, and is read out when the sub-control unit 262 executes the determination process (bubble effect execution determination process) of step SH45209 described above.

(z-2-3) In the above embodiment, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the one-shot announcement effect lottery that are set in connection with the execution of the one-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815, only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for an appearance rate of 40% is stored in advance in ROM 552, and this is set and used in RAM 553 regardless of the appearance rate selected by the player.

Alternatively, in connection with the execution of the one-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815 above, a predetermined effect selection table and/or effect selection random number counter corresponding to the appearance rate selected by the player may be selected from multiple effect selection tables and/or effect selection random number counters for one-shot announcement effect lottery stored in ROM 552, and this may be set in RAM 553 and used.

In other words, when performing the one-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815 above, the sub-control device 262 may be configured to change the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter to be set depending on the difference in the appearance rate stored in the one-shot announcement appearance rate storage area (the appearance rate selected by the player).

For example, when performing the one-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815 above, if the one-shot announcement appearance rate stored in the one-shot announcement appearance rate storage area is set to any value between 1% and 99%, the sub-control device 262 reads out the corresponding effect selection table and effect selection random number counter from ROM 552 and sets them in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the one-shot announcement effect lottery.

Here, in relation to the one-shot announcement effect, for example, one effect selection table with winning values of "0-99" is prepared as the effect selection table, and multiple effect selection random number counters corresponding to predetermined appearance rates (10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%) are prepared. Alternatively, for example, multiple effect selection tables with different winning values corresponding to predetermined appearance rates may be prepared as effect selection tables, and a single common effect selection random number counter may be prepared.

More specifically, in this embodiment, a "random number counter for a 10% occurrence rate (counter value 0-999)," a "random number counter for a 20% occurrence rate (counter value 0-499)," ..., a "random number counter for a 90% occurrence rate (counter value 0-89)," etc. are prepared. Then, of these multiple effect selection random number counters, the effect selection random number counter for the occurrence rate (e.g., 50%) closest to the occurrence rate selected by the player (e.g., 47%) is determined to be the effect selection random number counter to be set in RAM 553.

In the default setting, of the multiple effect selection random number counters, the random number counter with a 50% appearance rate (counter value 0 to 199) is read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 is periodically updated by the update function in the counter update process of step SH3905 above, and is read out at a predetermined timing (such as the determination process of step SH45205 above), such as when the sub-control device 262 receives a variation pattern command.

(z-2-4) In the above embodiment, only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a 60% appearance rate is stored in advance in ROM 552 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the cut-in effect lottery that are set in connection with the execution of the cut-in effect setting process in step SH35817. This is set in RAM 553 and used regardless of the appearance rate selected by the player.

Alternatively, in connection with the execution of the cut-in effect setting process in step SH35817 above, a predetermined effect selection table and/or effect selection random number counter corresponding to the appearance rate selected by the player may be selected from multiple effect selection tables and/or effect selection random number counters for cut-in effect lottery stored in ROM 552, and this may be set in RAM 553 and used.

In other words, when performing the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817 above, the sub-control device 262 may be configured to change the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter to be set depending on the appearance rate stored in the cut-in appearance rate storage area (the appearance rate selected by the player).

For example, when performing the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817 above, if the cut-in appearance rate stored in the cut-in appearance rate storage area is set to any value between 1% and 99%, the sub-control device 262 reads out the corresponding effect selection table and effect selection random number counter from ROM 552 and sets them in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the cut-in effect lottery.

Here, in relation to the cut-in effect, for example, one effect selection table with winning values of "0-99" is prepared as the effect selection table, and multiple effect selection random number counters corresponding to predetermined appearance rates (10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 90%) are prepared. Alternatively, for example, multiple effect selection tables with different winning values corresponding to predetermined appearance rates may be prepared as the effect selection table, and a single common effect selection random number counter may be prepared.

More specifically, in this embodiment, a "random number counter for a 10% occurrence rate (counter value 0-999)," a "random number counter for a 30% occurrence rate (counter value 0-333)," ..., a "random number counter for a 90% occurrence rate (counter value 0-89)," etc. are prepared. Then, of these multiple effect selection random number counters, the effect selection random number counter for the occurrence rate (e.g., 70%) closest to the occurrence rate selected by the player (e.g., 62%) is determined to be the effect selection random number counter to be set in RAM 553.

In the default setting, of the multiple effect selection random number counters, the random number counter with a 50% appearance rate (counter value 0 to 199) is read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 is periodically updated by the update function in the counter update process of step SH3905 above, and is read out at a predetermined timing (for example, the determination process of step SH45202 above), such as when the sub-control device 262 receives a variation pattern command.

(z-3) In the various embodiments described in (z-2) above, for example, when performing the fish school effect setting process of step SH35809 above, the sub-control device 262 is configured to determine the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter to be set depending on whether the fish school reliability selected by the player is within a predetermined range. For example, if the reliability stored in the fish school reliability memory area (fish school reliability selected by the player) is "10% to 30%", the sub-control device 262 sets an effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 20% in a predetermined area of RAM 553. (The same applies to the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811, etc.)

Alternatively, of the effect selection tables and effect selection random number counters prepared corresponding to multiple reliability levels, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the reliability level closest to the reliability level selected by the player may be determined as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter to be set (the same applies to the occurrence rate of one-shot announcement effects, cut-in effects, etc.).

For example, if the reliability selected by the player is, say, 32%, of the effect selection tables and effect selection random number counters prepared corresponding to multiple reliability levels of 20%, 50%, and 70%, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the closest reliability level of 20% would be determined as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter to be set; and if the reliability selected by the player is, say, 38%, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the closest reliability level of 50% would be determined as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter to be set.

(z-4) In the above embodiment, when customizing the reliability, appearance rate, volume level, brightness level, etc., of various effects, a single numerical value (e.g., appearance rate 10%, volume level "3": 70 dB, etc.) is set as the selection value. This is not limited to this, and a predetermined range including multiple numerical values may be configured to be customizable as a single option. For example, an output selection state may be generated in which one of three appearance rate options (1-10%), (11-20%), and (21-30%) can be selected, or one of four volume level options (50-59 dB), (60-69 dB), (70-79 dB), and (80-89 dB) can be selected. By providing a certain degree of flexibility for the selected value in this way, it is possible to add a certain degree of intensity and randomness to the various effects when they are performed. This ultimately broadens the range of effects and increases the player's interest.

(z-5) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the contents of the custom information stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553 (which may be only the information customized by the player) may be configured to be displayed on a specified display device (effect display device 42 or other display device) continuously or at specified times.

For example, when a school of fish effect appears, the school of fish reliability stored in the school of fish reliability memory area (the school of fish reliability selected and input by the player) may be displayed on the effect display device 42, etc.

In addition, if the player operates a specified operation means such as the effect button 125 at a specified timing, such as while the variable display is being executed, the contents of the custom information stored in the user-associated area (such as "Fish school reliability: 50%" or "Volume level: 3") may be displayed.

In addition, a sub-LCD display device may be provided separate from the effect display device 42, and the contents of the custom information stored in the user-associated area may be displayed on the sub-LCD display device either continuously or in response to a specified operation by the player.

(z-6) The content and number of customization items that players can change (customize) are not limited to those described in the above embodiment and can be set as appropriate.

For example, with regard to the output mode of light from light-emitting means such as illumination units 102-104, the brightness level may be customizable separately for each light-emitting means, or the light color may be customizable. Furthermore, with regard to the output mode of sound from speakers SP, etc., the volume level may be customizable for each range (for example, low and high frequencies).

(z-7) In the above embodiment, when the update information "Number of balls held" becomes the specific value "0" and the update information "Number of remaining balls" becomes the specific value "0", and a specific condition is met in which it is currently impossible to continue playing pinball games, the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 and the communication connection notification screen 9100 are displayed to notify the player that the BT communication connection is in a transition state.

In addition to this, the "balance" may not be the subject of judgment, but only the "number of balls in possession (the number of game balls that the player can use in pinball play)." If the updated information "number of balls in possession" becomes a specific value of "0," it is assumed that a specific condition that makes it impossible to continue pinball play has been met, and a communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 or the like is displayed to let the player know that the BT communication connection is in a transition state.

(z-8) As described above, the system is configured to determine whether a specific condition that makes it impossible to continue pinball play has been met by determining whether the update information "Number of balls held (number of virtual gaming media)" reaches the specific value "0" and/or whether the update information "Balance (number of virtual gaming media or remaining amount)" reaches the specific value "0 (0 yen)." However, the system is not limited to this, and it may also be configured to determine whether the specific condition has been met by measuring time.

Considering that game balls are fired at 0.6 second intervals, if a player has 100 balls remaining, they will run out of balls in 60 seconds unless a virtual prize ball is awarded based on a starting win or other reason in pinball play. In light of this, for example, the time obtained by multiplying the current number of balls held (e.g., 500) by the firing interval (0.6 seconds) can be set in a specified timer, which is update information, and this timer is decremented while game balls are continuously fired. If the timer value reaches a specific value of "0," it is determined that a specific condition has been met that makes it impossible to continue pinball play.

(z-9) In the above configuration, the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000, etc. is displayed as soon as the number of balls held or the timer value reaches "0." However, this is not limited to this, and the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000, etc. may be displayed after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed after the number of balls held or the timer value reaches "0."

Also, the communication disconnection confirmation screen 9000 may be configured to be displayed when the number of balls held reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 3 seconds before) before it reaches "0," or when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 10 balls remaining) before it reaches "0."

(z-10) In the above configuration, when a usage permission signal (low level output of usage permission signal B5) is received from the card unit 900, the base-side NFC module 1100 and the base-side BT module 1200 are configured to be in a usage permission state.

This is not a limitation, and the base-side NFC module 1100 and/or the base-side BT module 1200 may be configured to always be in an enabled state.

[Note]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above-described embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional Issue FH. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which game balls are fired into a play area.

In a pachinko machine, a game ball is fired toward the game area, and when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, a variable display of the pattern is executed on a predetermined display means, and if the result of the variable display is a predetermined result, a predetermined winning state occurs.

Amusement machines such as pachinko machines offer a variety of entertainment options to players (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A).

For example, in conjunction with the changing display of the symbols, a predetermined display effect is performed by a predetermined effect display means. Furthermore, in recent years, gaming machines have become available that allow players to customize various settings (volume, brightness, etc.) and various effect elements (display effect modes, etc.) to suit their preferences.

As an example, customization could involve the player selecting a character from multiple characters to appear in the effects, or selecting the appearance rate of preview effects that suggest a specific game state (such as a reach state or a jackpot state) in advance.

However, with conventional gaming machines, there was a desire for further improvements in convenience and entertainment for players.

For example, in the past, when inputting various information into a gaming machine or outputting various information from a gaming machine, the operations required of the player were complex and cumbersome. As a result, players sometimes avoided these operations.

In particular, the more items and options that players can customize are divided into smaller groups and set in order to accommodate the diverse preferences of many players, the more likely it is that the amount of time and effort required to customize a gaming machine from the time a player selects a gaming machine at an amusement parlor until they start playing on that gaming machine will become enormous if direct input operations are performed on the gaming machine using a specified input operation means (such as a cross key) as in the past.

Furthermore, when a player moves from a given gaming machine to another gaming machine of the same type at an amusement hall to play a new game, or when they move to another amusement hall to play on the same gaming machine, or when they return to the amusement hall on a different day to play on the same gaming machine, every time the player changes gaming machines they play, even if the customization details are the same on the new gaming machine of the same type, they must repeat the same customization process from scratch over and over again, which is extremely cumbersome.

Ultimately, this could lead to players being reluctant to use the customization function, and players may not use it at all. For this reason, there is a need to further improve convenience for players.

As mentioned above, conventional customization functions required players to manually input each element into the gaming machine before starting play, making them unsuitable for detailed customization of numerous presentation elements.

In response to this, by adopting a system that allows communication between a mobile device carried by a player and a gaming machine, it may be possible to customize the gaming machine using the mobile device without using the input operation means (such as a cross key) on the gaming machine itself.

For example, wireless communication technology such as Bluetooth could be used to connect a mobile device such as a smartphone carried by a player to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, allowing various information related to the game to be sent and received between the two (for example, output of history information and input of customization information).

This means that, for example, a player can meticulously customize the presentation elements of a specific type of gaming machine in advance using an app on their mobile device and store the customization information. When they actually start playing on that specific type of gaming machine at an amusement parlor, they can send the customization information stored on their mobile device to the gaming machine, which will then configure the customization settings based on that data.

By adopting this method, once a player has performed the customization settings, they no longer need to go through the tedious customization process described above every time they start playing on a gaming machine at an amusement parlor. Instead, they can customize the gaming machine's presentation elements to their preferred settings in an extremely simple and short amount of time. As a result, convenience for players can be significantly improved.

However, if the presentation elements of a gaming machine were customizable in detail (if the items and options that a player can customize were divided into many smaller options and many settings were possible), the processing on the gaming machine would become more complex, which could significantly increase the processing load on the gaming machine.

If a performance element where the appearance of a predetermined preview performance is determined by lottery using a predetermined performance selection table and a performance selection random number counter, etc., at a predetermined appearance rate, were configured so that the player could customize the appearance rate in 1% increments between 1% and 99%, the gaming machine would need to store 99 performance selection tables corresponding to each appearance rate ("performance selection table for 1% appearance rate," "performance selection table for 2% appearance rate," ... "performance selection table for 99% appearance rate") in advance in storage means, and would need to read these out from storage means as appropriate in response to player customization.

Furthermore, when establishing a communication connection (pairing) with a communication partner device using a communication method that requires authentication processing using a password, such as the above-mentioned Bluetooth, the player must first identify the communication partner device and enter a password, which is a very complicated and time-consuming process.

In particular, in gaming halls where pachinko and other gaming machines are installed, many gaming machines are installed close together, so users must find the gaming machine they want to play on from the many gaming machines (Bluetooth-enabled devices) listed as candidates on the mobile device's display screen and establish a communication connection (pairing), which can be time-consuming.

If the process of establishing a communication connection is this complicated, players may be put off using wireless communication and may not use it at all. For this reason, there is a need to improve convenience for players.

In addition, in the past, if a specific player made changes to the settings of a specific gaming machine (for example, by connecting a mobile terminal to a gaming machine), and the player finished playing on the gaming machine and then left the gaming machine without restoring the changed settings to their original state (default settings), the changed settings would remain on the gaming machine (for example, with the communication connection not disconnected), and the next player to play on the gaming machine would have to play in this state, which could reduce the player's interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to enable convenient settings changes and cancellations on gaming machines, thereby improving convenience and interest for players.

Means FH1. A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on the determination by a determination means for determining whether a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
A variable display means for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the winning/losing lottery;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific game state after the end of a specific variable display that displays a specific display result that is executed when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a specific result;
A performance execution means for performing a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements during the variable display for the predetermined period;
and input means electrically connected to the effect execution means, and capable of allowing a player to input a predetermined value to the effect execution means.
This gaming machine is
a detection means that, in a predetermined input enabled state, enters a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection target approaches or abuts on a predetermined detection unit within a predetermined distance;
an information output means capable of executing a predetermined output when the detection means reaches at least the predetermined detection state;
Numerical information update means for updating predetermined numerical information according to the progress of a predetermined game state;
When a predetermined output condition is established, the information output means outputs a plurality of pieces of information stored in a predetermined storage unit and corresponding to the input of the predetermined information to the performance execution means;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to generate a specific output state that outputs identification information corresponding to the specific state when the specified numerical information is updated to a specific value based on the update by the numerical information update means after the input of the specified information is executed and a specific state occurs.

Using the above-mentioned means FH1, a player can obtain information stored in the memory unit (e.g., information necessary to establish a BT communication connection) and generate a specific state (e.g., a BT communication connection state) based on that information simply by bringing a specified detection target (e.g., a mobile terminal) close to a specified detection unit (e.g., the antenna unit of an NFC module) and establishing a specified output condition (e.g., an NFC communication state).

This means that players do not need to identify the communication partner device or enter a password in advance, allowing them to quickly and easily input and output information related to specified configurable information (such as game specifications and presentation elements) without having to go through complicated procedures.

As a result, settings on gaming machines can be changed efficiently, reducing the burden on players and significantly improving convenience for players.

Ultimately, this will encourage players to actively use the gaming machine's functions, making it possible to provide players with a variety of services and significantly increasing player interest.

On the other hand, in certain gaming machines such as sealed pachinko machines, if certain numerical information (e.g., the number of balls a player has) that is updated as a certain game state (e.g., pinball play) progresses reaches a specific value (e.g., 0), the player who was playing on the gaming machine may simply end play on the gaming machine.

In such a case, with the above configuration, when a gaming machine is in a special state (for example, a BT communication connection state), it is possible that the player will forget that the special state has occurred and leave the gaming machine without restoring the special state to its original state. In this case, the next player to play on the gaming machine will have to play with the special state still remaining, which could reduce the player's interest.

In contrast, this means FH1 is configured to generate a specific output state (for example, a state in which notification information is displayed informing the player that a BT communication connection is in progress) that outputs identification information corresponding to the specific state when predetermined numerical information is updated to a specific value (for example, when the number of balls held by the player becomes 0) after a specific state (for example, a BT communication connection state) has occurred.

This allows players to conveniently cancel settings on the gaming machine without forgetting that a specific state has occurred.

Means FH2. A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on the judgment by a judgment means for judging whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
A variable display means for displaying a variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the winning/losing lottery;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific game state after the end of a specific variable display that displays a specific display result that is executed when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a specific result;
A performance execution means for performing a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements during the variable display for the predetermined period;
and input means electrically connected to the effect execution means, and capable of allowing a player to input a predetermined value to the effect execution means.
This gaming machine is
a detection means that, in a predetermined input-enabled state, enters a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection target approaches or abuts on a predetermined detection unit within a predetermined distance;
an information output means capable of executing a predetermined output when the detection means reaches at least the predetermined detection state;
Numerical information update means for updating predetermined numerical information according to the progress of a predetermined game state;
When a predetermined output condition is established, the information output means outputs a plurality of pieces of information stored in a predetermined storage unit and corresponding to the input of the predetermined information to the performance execution means;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to generate a selectable state in which, when the input of the specified information is executed and a specific state occurs, the specified numerical information is updated to a specific value based on the update by the numerical information update means, selectable information is output that allows the player to choose whether or not to continue the specific state.

Means FH2 described above achieves the same effect as means FH1 described above. In other words, means FH2 allows a player to obtain information stored in the memory unit (e.g., information necessary to establish a BT communication connection) and generate a specific state (e.g., a BT communication connection state) based on that information simply by bringing a specified detection target (e.g., a mobile terminal) close to a specified detection unit (e.g., the antenna unit of an NFC module) and establishing a specified output condition (e.g., an NFC communication state).

This means that players do not need to identify the communication partner device or enter a password in advance, allowing them to quickly and easily input and output information related to specified configurable information (such as game specifications and presentation elements) without having to go through complicated procedures.

As a result, settings on gaming machines can be changed efficiently, reducing the burden on players and significantly improving convenience for players.

Ultimately, this will encourage players to actively use the gaming machine's functions, making it possible to provide players with a variety of services and significantly increasing player interest.

On the other hand, as mentioned above, in certain gaming machines such as sealed pachinko machines, if predetermined numerical information (e.g., the number of balls a player has) that is updated as a certain game state (e.g., pinball play) progresses reaches a specific value (e.g., 0), the player who was playing on the gaming machine may simply end play on the gaming machine.

In such a case, with the above configuration, when a gaming machine is in a special state (for example, a BT communication connection state), it is possible that the player will forget that the special state has occurred and leave the gaming machine without restoring the special state to its original state. In this case, the next player to play on the gaming machine will have to play with the special state still remaining, which could reduce the player's interest.

In contrast, this means FH2 is configured to generate a selectable state (for example, a state in which a selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select whether or not to continue the BT communication connection) that outputs selectable information that allows the player to select whether or not to continue the specific state when the predetermined numerical information is updated to a specific numerical value (for example, when the player's number of balls reaches 0) after a specific state (for example, a BT communication connection state) has occurred.

This allows players to conveniently cancel settings on the gaming machine without forgetting that a specific state was set.

Means FH3. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in means FH1 or means FH2, characterized in that it is equipped with a suppression means for suppressing the output of the plurality of pieces of information that were output when the specified output condition was met when the specific state occurred.

As described above, when a detection target (e.g., a mobile terminal) approaches a detection means (e.g., an NFC module), multiple pieces of information (e.g., BT connection information) stored in the memory unit are automatically output to the outside. If a detection target other than the currently connected detection target approaches the detection means and acquires the multiple pieces of information stored in the memory unit, there is a risk that the specific state with the detection target that was previously in a specific state (e.g., a BT communication connection state) will be lost, or that multiple specific states will occur between multiple undesired detection targets.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means FH3, by providing the suppression means, when a specific state (e.g., a BT communication connection state) occurs, multiple pieces of information (e.g., BT connection information) stored in the memory unit are not output to other detection targets (e.g., a mobile terminal). This makes it possible to prevent problems such as the specific state with a detection target that is already in a specific state (e.g., a BT communication connection state) disappearing, or the specific state occurring multiple times between multiple unwanted detection targets.

Means FH4. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means FH1 to FH3, characterized in that if input of the specified information is not detected until a specified period of time has elapsed since the specified output condition was met, it is necessary to meet the specified output condition again in order to generate the specific state.

If a specific output condition (for example, an NFC communication state) is met on the gaming machine side, but no specific information (for example, a BT connection request) is detected for a specific period of time, it is highly likely that some kind of abnormality has occurred on the player side (the object of detection) (for example, BT communication has been prohibited), and in such cases, it is necessary to ask the player side for confirmation.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means FH4, by having the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to allow the player to check whether any abnormalities have occurred, thereby improving convenience for the player.

Means FH5. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any one of means FH1 to FH4, characterized in that when the specific state occurs, the specific state is terminated based on the establishment of a specific condition.

If a player is playing on a specific gaming machine while a specific state (for example, a BT communication connection state) is occurring, and then moves to an adjacent gaming machine to play there without ending the specific state, the specific state will remain unended.

In such cases, depending on the configuration, another player attempting to play a new game on the specified gaming machine may not be able to trigger the specific state on that machine, which could significantly reduce the player's interest.

In response to this, means FH5 can suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem by forcibly ending a specific state when a specific condition is met (such as operating a specific button).

Means FH6. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any one of means FH1 to FH5, characterized in that when the specific state ends, it is configured so that the specific state will not automatically occur if predetermined conditions are not met.

Note that the "predetermined condition" requires that at least the above-mentioned predetermined output condition (e.g., NFC communication state) be met.

BT-compatible devices such as mobile terminals generally have an automatic connection function that stores the BT connection information (device name, BD address, password, etc.) of BT-compatible devices that have previously connected (paired) via BT communication, and automatically establishes a BT communication connection the next time the device comes within range of that device.

For example, if a player causes a specific state on a specific gaming machine (for example, by connecting a mobile device via BT communication) and then ends the specific state on the gaming machine (for example, by disconnecting the BT communication), there is a risk that the player may cause the specific state to occur on the gaming machine simply by passing near the gaming machine, even if the player did not intend to cause the specific state on the gaming machine (for example, by connecting the mobile device via BT communication).

In response to this, as in means FH6 above, by providing a function (e.g., a function to change the password) that restricts the occurrence of the next specific state (e.g., BT communication connection state) when terminating a specific state (e.g., BT communication connection state) if a predetermined condition is not met (e.g., the new password does not match), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means FH7. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any one of means FH1 to FH6, characterized in that when a specific input occurs in the specific output state or the selectable state, the output of the specific output state or the selectable state is terminated.

The specific output state (for example, the display state of the "Connection in progress" screen) or the selectable state (for example, the display state of the "Continue connection?" screen) is a state that is output when, in the specific state (for example, the BT connection state), the predetermined numerical information reaches a specific value (for example, the number of remaining balls reaches 0), making it essentially impossible to continue playing. However, according to means FH7, if, in the specific output state or the selectable state, there is a specific input (for example, operating the loan button or placing a game ball in the start winning slot) whether or not the player intends to do so, the state in which it is impossible to continue playing is overcome, and in such a case, the specific output state or the selectable state is automatically terminated.

In this way, with the above-mentioned feature FH7, the player can return to their original game without having to perform a separate operation to cancel the output of the specific output state or the selectable state. As a result, the player can concentrate on the pinball game, improving convenience for the player.

Means FH8. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means FH1 to FH7, characterized in that when a specific period of time has elapsed in the specific output state or the selectable state, the output of the specific output state or the selectable state is terminated and a specific process is executed.

As mentioned above, the specific output state (for example, the display state of the "Connection in progress" screen) or the selectable state (for example, the display state of the "Continue connection?" screen) is a state that is output when, in the specific state (for example, the BT connection state), the predetermined numerical information reaches a specific value (for example, the number of remaining balls reaches 0), making it essentially impossible to continue playing. In other words, if a specific period of time (for example, 3 minutes) has passed in this state without any action being taken, it is considered that the player has left the gaming machine without performing any operation to cancel the specific output state or selectable state.

In such cases, it is preferable to automatically terminate the output of the specific output state (e.g., the display state of the "Connection in progress" screen) or the selectable state (e.g., the display state of the "Continue connection?" screen), and execute a specific process (e.g., a communication disconnection process), as in the configuration related to means FH8.

Means FH9. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any one of means FH1 to FH8, characterized in that if a specific input (e.g., a starting winning) occurs in the specific output state or the selectable state, the specific state is continued.

As described above, the specific output state (for example, the display state of the "Connection in progress" screen) or the selectable state (for example, the display state of the "Continue connection?" screen) is a state that is output when, in the specific state (for example, the BT connection state), the predetermined numerical information reaches a specific value (for example, the number of remaining balls reaches 0), making it essentially impossible to continue playing. However, according to means FH9, if, in the specific output state or the selectable state, there is a specific input (for example, the operation of the loan button or the entry of a game ball into the start winning slot) either by the player's will or regardless of the player's will, the state in which it is impossible to continue playing will be overcome, and in such a case the specific state (for example, the BT connection state) will automatically continue.

As a result, with the above-mentioned means FH9, the player does not need to perform any additional operations such as resetting a specific state (for example, the BT communication connection state), and can continue playing the game as intended. As a result, the player can concentrate on the pinball game, improving convenience for the player.

Below is the basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine). A more detailed example of this is "a pinball gaming machine equipped with an operating means (a gaming ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (a launching solenoid, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a gaming area into which the launched gaming balls are guided, and various ball entry means (a general entry port, a variable entry device, an operating port, etc.) arranged within the gaming area."

(b) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a reel-type gaming machine (such as a slot machine that uses medals or the like as gaming media, or a gaming machine with slot machine specifications that uses gaming balls as gaming media). A more detailed example of this is "a reel-type gaming machine equipped with variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that displays a variable display (specifically, the rotation of a reel or the like) of an identification information sequence (a pattern sequence; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or belt with patterns) consisting of multiple identification information (patterns) and then stops and displays the identification information sequence, and configured so that the variation of the identification information (patterns) begins upon operation of a start operating means (specifically, a start lever), the variation of the identification information (patterns) is stopped upon operation of a stop operating means (specifically, a stop button), and gaming value is awarded on the condition that the identification information aligned on the pay line at the time of the stop is a specific identification information."

Third Embodiment
A pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with those in the first and second embodiments (such as the same components and the same processing content) may be described using the same component names and the same reference numerals.

One type of gaming machine known is a pachinko machine, in which a game is played by firing a gaming ball into a gaming area (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A).

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines output sounds corresponding to various games. The sounds are controlled by the audio control unit of the gaming machine.

When connecting the audio control unit to an external audio output unit to output audio in an optimal manner, audio output control that is highly convenient for players is desired.

The technical concept described in the third embodiment has been devised to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that allows for audio output control that is highly convenient for players.

In order to achieve the above object, the technical idea described in the third embodiment is as follows:
a winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on the determination by a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific variable display to display a specific variable display result when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a specific result, and then executing a specific game state;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance execution means for performing a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements at least during the specific variable display,
The performance execution means
an information output means capable of controlling an output amount by the performance execution means and capable of outputting specific information at a predetermined output amount to a predetermined connection target outside the performance execution means connected thereto;
This gaming machine is
A plurality of target information corresponding to a plurality of predetermined detection targets in at least the performance execution means and correspondence information corresponding to input of request information to the performance execution means are configured to be able to be displayed on a predetermined display means;
When detecting input of the predetermined request information to the performance execution means, information capable of identifying the predetermined detection target that is the detection target is stored;
after the information is stored, the output amount can be switched so that a specific state in which the specific information is output at an output amount that is smaller than the output amount at the time when the input of the predetermined request information is detected is executed,
The gist of the invention is that it is configured so that predetermined information can be input from the predetermined detection target corresponding to the information connected to the performance execution means after the specific state is executed.

The technical concept described in the third embodiment above allows for audio output control that is highly convenient for players.

The specific configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described in detail below. As shown in Figure 3-3 and other figures, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of this outer frame 11 so that it can be opened and closed. However, for the sake of convenience, Figure 3-3 omits the game components (nails, accessories, etc.) arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame 14, and other elements.

As shown in Figures 3-6 and elsewhere, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made from wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made from extruded aluminum alloy material. These frame components 11a-11d are assembled together into a rectangular frame shape using detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left-side frame component 11c, respectively (see Figure 3-1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, allowing the inner frame 12 to open and close. The inner frame 12 and other components are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

The right-side frame component 11d has an extending wall 83 that protrudes from near its rear widthwise end toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see Figure 3-6) provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 3-5). In addition, as shown in Figure 3-3, the front side of the extending wall 83 is provided with a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 that engage with the locking member of the locking device 600. Furthermore, the lower receiving portion 85 has a pressing portion 86 that protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 and abuts against the inner frame opening detection switch 92 (described below).

A resin decorative panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. A rib 88 that protrudes upward is integrally formed on the innermost part of the top surface of the decorative panel 87. This reduces the likelihood of a gap forming between the decorative panel and the inner frame 12.

As shown in Figure 3-3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward around this opening/closing axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly oval window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

A front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened forward around an opening and closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The front frame 14 may also be configured so that it can be opened and closed directly by the outer frame 11, rather than via the inner frame 12.

The front frame 14, like the inner frame 12, has a rectangular outer shape, and when closed, covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12. A roughly oval window 101 is formed in the center of the front frame 14. This makes it possible to view the game board 30 (play area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. Details of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in Figure 3-1, etc., a lower tray 15 serving as a ball receiving tray is provided at the center of the lower bottom of the front side of the front frame 14, and gaming balls discharged from the lower payout outlet 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. In addition, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging gaming balls from the lower tray 15 is provided on the front side of the lower tray 15.

A game ball launch handle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "handle") 18 is provided to the right of the lower tray 15, protruding toward the front. The handle 18 is equipped with a rotation operation unit 18a that can be rotated by the player, a touch sensor (not shown) that can detect when the player's hand touches the handle 18, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of operation of the rotation operation unit 18a. With this configuration, when the rotation operation unit 18a is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by the launch device 60, described below, with a launch strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation operation.

The handle 18 is also provided with a stop lever 18b that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the rotation control unit 18a. When the stop lever 18b is pressed to the on state, the launching of game balls by the launching device 60 is prohibited, even if the handle 18 is being held. This means that the rotation control unit 18a can be rotated while prohibiting the launching of game balls, or the launching of game balls can be temporarily stopped while the handle 18 is being held.

As shown in Figure 3-2, an upper tray 19 capable of storing game balls is provided above the lower tray 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls paid out from the upper payout opening 17 and guides them toward the launching device 60 while aligning them in a line. When the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls that are paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray connecting passage 71 and the lower payout opening 16, which will be described later.

A lending switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display unit 124 are provided on the upper right surface of the front edge of the upper tray 19. Typically, in amusement halls, a CR unit (not shown) is located on the left side of the pachinko machine 10. When the lending switch 121 is operated with a gaming card with a balance inserted into the CR unit, lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to the operation. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted into the CR unit. The balance display unit 124 also displays the balance of the card inserted into the CR unit.

In addition, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper right surface of the front edge of the upper tray 19. The ball removal button 123 is configured to be retractable and is always biased upward by a biasing means (not shown). With this configuration, when the ball removal button 123 is pressed, the space between the upper tray 19 and the lower tray 15 is opened, and game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided to the lower tray 15. In other words, by operating the ball removal button 123, the player can transfer game balls from the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time.

Furthermore, a first operation unit 125 and a second operation unit 126, which can be operated by the player, are provided on the upper surface of the center of the front edge of the upper tray 19.

The first operation unit 125 is primarily used for presentation purposes. In this embodiment, the first operation unit 125 is a contact-type unit equipped with a button section that can move in the direction of pressure when pressed by the player (for example, by pressing downwards), and an operation detection switch that turns to a predetermined ON state and outputs a predetermined detection signal when the button section, having moved a predetermined amount, approaches or abuts a predetermined distance against a predetermined detection section. Of course, the configuration of the first operation unit 125 is not limited to this, and other different configurations may also be used.

When the first operation unit 125 (hereinafter referred to as the "effect button 125") is pressed by the player, a predetermined detection signal, which is a predetermined input by the player, is input from the operation detection switch to the sub-control device 262 described below.

As a result, for example, when a player presses the effect button 125 during a specified period while a variable display is being executed (during an effect) on the effect display device 42 (described below), a specified effect will be executed on the effect display device 42.

In addition, when the effect display device 42 is in a standby state (waiting for customers) and no effects such as variable displays are being performed, a user-responsive interrupt state can be generated by the player pressing the effect button 125 with a finger or the like, which will cause the effect display device 42 to display the game history, as described below, or a menu screen 3000 (see Figure 3-54) for customizing the effect content to suit the player's preferences.

On the other hand, the second operation unit 126 is primarily used by the player to perform various setting operations, etc. In this embodiment, an operation means known as a cross key or the like is used as the second operation unit 126.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 3-49, the second operation unit 126 (hereinafter referred to as the "cross key 126") consists of five operation buttons: an up button 126a, a down button 126b, a left button 126c, a right button 126d, and a center button 126e.

Each of the buttons 126a-126e on the cross key 126 is a contact-type button that can move in the direction of pressure when pressed by the player (for example, by pressing downwards), and includes an operation detection switch that turns on when the button moves a predetermined amount and comes within a predetermined distance of or into contact with a predetermined detection unit, thereby outputting a predetermined detection signal.

Of course, the configuration of the operation unit that allows the player to input operations is not limited to the first operation unit 125 or the second operation unit 126, and other different types may be used. For example, the operation unit may be a touch panel that allows the player to input operations by touch, a jog dial that allows the player to input operations by rotation, or a slide lever that allows the player to input operations by sliding. Furthermore, the installation location is not limited to the front edge of the upper tray 19, and may be anywhere that the player can operate.

When the player presses any of the buttons 126a to 126e on the cross key 126, a predetermined detection signal representing a predetermined input by the player is input from each of the operation detection switches to the sub-control device 262, which will be described later.

As a result, for example, when a menu screen 3000 (see Figure 3-54) or the like is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 as described below, the player can use their finger or other object to press the buttons 126a to 126d of the directional pad 126 to move the cursor 3100 displayed on the menu screen 3000 or the like in any direction, up, down, left, or right, or can confirm the item selected by the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button 126e.

The display unit 42a (menu screen 3000, etc.) of the effect display device 42 displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) corresponding to the input of operation information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) on the directional pad 126 to move the cursor 3100, and the operation of the decision button (center button 126e).

Here, the icon 5001 corresponding to the selection button and the icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button are each made up of multiple icons (icon components), and as a whole, they resemble the cross key 126.

Specifically, the icon 5001 corresponding to the select button and the icon 5002 corresponding to the enter button are each composed of a triangular icon (icon component) corresponding to the up button 126a, a triangular icon (icon component) corresponding to the down button 126b, a triangular icon (icon component) corresponding to the left button 126c, a triangular icon (icon component) corresponding to the right button 126d, and a round icon (icon component) corresponding to the center button 126e.

Under this configuration, the icons 5001 for selection buttons displayed on the menu screen 3000 and various setting screens described below (such as the language setting screen 3001, volume setting screen 3002, brightness setting screen 3003, and effect customization screen 3004) are configured so that only the icons (icon components) corresponding to the specific selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d, and center button 126e) used by the player for selection operations on that screen and detected by the sub-control device 262 (for example, the up button 126a and down button 126b on the menu screen 3000) are displayed in a specific, highly saturated manner to selectively stand out, while the icons (icon components) corresponding to the other buttons (for example, the left button 126c, right button 126d, and center button 126e on the menu screen 3000) are displayed in a less saturated manner to make them less noticeable.

Note that the display mode of the selection button icon 5001 on the language setting screen 3001 and the effect customization screen 3004 is the same as the display mode of the selection button icon 5001 on the menu screen 3000 described above.

Furthermore, the icons 5002 for the decision buttons displayed on the various screens (menu screen 3000, language setting screen 3001, volume setting screen 3002, brightness setting screen 3003, effect customization screen 3004) are configured so that only the icon (icon component) corresponding to the decision button (center button 126e) of the cross key 126 (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d, center button 126e) that the player uses for the decision operation on that screen and that is the target of detection by the sub-control device 262 is displayed in a specific, highly saturated manner so as to be selectively noticeable, while the icons (icon component) corresponding to the other buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) are displayed in a low-saturation manner so as not to stand out.

In this way, in an interrupt state in which the menu screen 3000 is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, when input of specified operation information corresponding to the multiple pieces of information displayed and output on the menu screen 3000 (menu items such as "language settings," "volume settings," "brightness settings," and "effect customization," described below), i.e., when a selection operation of a menu item (e.g., "language settings") using the directional pad 126 is detected, information (e.g., various language options) related to the specified game specifications (e.g., "language settings") is displayed and output on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, making it possible to input information related to the game specifications (e.g., a selection operation of a specified language using the directional pad 126) and output that information (e.g., various output processes based on the selected language).

In addition, various decorative lights (decorative lamps) are provided on the front frame 14 and the game board 30. The light emission patterns of these lights are controlled and changed in response to changes in the game state, etc., and serve to enhance the dramatic effects during play.

For example, the front frame 14 has a frame illumination section 102 around the periphery of the window section 101. Error indicator lamps 105 that light up in the event of a specific error are also provided on both sides of the frame illumination section 102.

The gaming board 30 also has a central illumination section 103 located around the periphery of the center frame 47 (described below), and side illumination sections 104 located at the left and right lower parts of the gaming area. These illumination sections 102-104 incorporate light sources such as LEDs and a light emission control board that drives and controls the light sources. The central illumination section 103 is used for the one-shot announcement effects (described below).

Note that if the brightness of the light output from each illumination unit 102-104 is high, the presentation effect will be enhanced, but the player may find it too dazzling. On the other hand, if the brightness of the light is low, the glare can be reduced, but the presentation effect may be reduced.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured to allow the brightness of the light output from each of the illumination units 102-104 to be adjusted to suit the player's preferences, in order to provide a gaming environment suited to each player. Details of how this brightness is adjusted will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-1, speakers SP are provided in the upper left and right corners of the front frame 14 (see Figure 3-3, etc.). The speakers SP output various sounds such as sound effects and background music according to various game states and presentations.

Note that if the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker SP is high, the presentation effect will be enhanced, but it may be perceived as noisy by the player. On the other hand, if the volume of the sound is low, the noise level can be reduced, but the presentation effect may be reduced.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured to allow the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker SP to be adjusted to suit the player's preferences, in order to provide a gaming environment that suits each player. Details of how to adjust the volume will be described later.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of rectangular glass panes attached separately to the front and rear, but rather is round overall and is attached as an assembly.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to Figures 3-4. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 behind the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge abutting the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, approximately the center of the front of the game board 30, which forms the play area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 in the resin base 38.

In addition, a launching device 60 as a launching means and a launching rail 61 that guides the game balls immediately after they are launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39. In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device is used as the launching device 60. Furthermore, a ball feeding device 63 is provided above the launching device 60 to guide the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the launch position of the launching device 60.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (play area) will be explained with reference to Figures 3-4. A rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which guides game balls launched from the launching device 60 to the top of the game board 30. As a result, game balls launched in response to the rotation of the handle 18 are guided into the play area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 via the launch rail 61 and rail 50. The rail 50 consists of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in Figure 3-4). This prevents a game ball that has been guided from the rail 50 into the play area from returning back into the rail 50. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip of the outer rail component 52 (upper right in Figure 3-4). This ensures that a game ball launched with more than a predetermined force will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned, for example, toward the approximate center of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the gaming board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the gaming board 30. Therefore, the playing area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 in the resin base 38. However, because a gaming ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 before passing through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the playing area.

The game area is equipped with a general winning section 31A, a variable winning device 32A as a ball entry means (variable ball entry means), a first start winning section 33WA as a start means (first start winning means), a second start winning section 33WB as a start means (second start winning means), a through gate 34 as a start means (trigger start winning means), a variable display unit 35, etc. These are explained in detail below.

A variable display unit 35 is located approximately in the center of the play area. A first start-up winning section 33WA is located in the play area lower area ED, which is located below the variable display unit 35 within the play area.

The variable display unit 35 is provided with a display device 42 that performs various display effects, and a center frame 47 that surrounds the display device 42. The center frame 47 has a frame shape with an opening in its center, through which the display section 42a of the display device 42 can be seen.

A stage portion 770, on which the game ball can roll, is provided on the upper surface of the lower edge of the center frame 47. A guide groove 774 that slopes gently downward toward the front is formed in the center of the stage portion 770. As shown in Figure 3-4, when the center frame 47 is placed on the game board 30, the guide groove 774 is located directly above the first start winning portion 33WA.

A ball passage (warp flow path) 775 is formed inside the left edge of the center frame 47 to allow game balls to pass through. The entrance of the ball passage 775 opens to the left side of the center of the left edge of the center frame 47 (towards the game board 30 surface). Meanwhile, the exit of the ball passage 775 opens to the right side of the lower end of the left edge of the center frame 47 (towards the stage portion 770). This ball passage 775 can guide game balls flowing down the game board 30 surface in the game area left-side area EA, which is located to the left of the variable display unit 35 within the game area, onto the stage portion 770 within the center frame 47.

A game ball guided onto the stage portion 770 via the ball passage 775 or the like rolls on the stage portion 770, then either falls from the front edge of the stage portion 770 onto the surface of the game board 30, or is ejected onto the surface of the game board 30 via the guide groove 774. Of these, game balls ejected via the guide groove 774 have a relatively high probability of landing in the first start winning section 33WA.

The first start winning section 33WA is located in the lower area ED of the play area, protruding forward from the front of the game board 30, with a winning opening (first start winning opening) above it through which game balls can always enter. In addition, a first start winning switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the first start winning section 33WA, which can detect game balls that enter through the first start winning opening.

Under this configuration, when a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and the first start winning switch 224a detects the gaming ball and turns on, a lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot will be generated (jackpot lottery) is held, and a changing pattern is displayed on the first special pattern display device 43A, which will be described later. When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and the first start winning switch 224a detects the gaming ball and turns on, the start condition is met, and based on this, a changing pattern is displayed on the first special pattern display device 43A.

A variable winning device 32A is located below the first starting winning section 33WA in the lower area ED of the play area.

The variable prize winning device 32A is equipped with a large prize winning opening 32Aa through which game balls can enter, a large prize winning opening shutter 32Ab as an opening/closing member that opens and closes the large prize winning opening 32Aa, a large prize winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the large prize winning opening shutter 32Ab to open and close, and a large prize winning opening count switch 222 that can detect game balls that have entered the large prize winning opening 32Aa.

Under this configuration, the variable winning device 32A is normally in a closed state in which the large prize opening shutter 32Ab closes the large prize opening 32Aa from above and below, preventing game balls flowing down the lower game area ED from entering the large prize opening 32Aa. Furthermore, in this closed state, game balls can flow down in front of the large prize opening shutter 32Ab.

On the other hand, when a jackpot occurs, the variable winning device 32A tilts forward with the large winning opening shutter 32Ab pivoting around its lower edge, opening the game ball flowing down the lower area ED of the game area to enter the large winning opening 32Aa.

In the lower area ED of the play area, in the left-hand region, located to the left of the first start-up winning unit 33WA and the variable winning device 32A, multiple general winning units 31A are arranged along the periphery of the play area. The general winning units 31A are arranged to protrude forward from the front of the play board 30, with a winning opening (general winning opening) above them through which game balls can always enter. Additionally, a left general winning switch 221a is provided in a position corresponding to the general winning unit 31A, which can detect game balls entering through the general winning opening.

In addition, a through gate 34 is provided in the right-side area EB of the gaming area, located to the right of the variable display unit 35, and a second start-up winning section 33WB is provided downstream of the through gate 34.

The through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area to pass through one by one, and has a through gate switch 225 that can detect game balls passing through it.

When a gaming ball passes through the through gate 34 (when the through gate switch 225 detects the gaming ball and turns on), a start-up winning support lottery is held to determine whether the second start-up winning section 33WB will be opened, as described below, and a variable display is displayed on the normal pattern display device 41, described below, to indicate the result of the start-up winning support lottery. Here, if the start-up winning support lottery is won, the second start-up winning section 33WB will be opened for a specified period of time after the variable display ends.

The second start-up winning section 33WB is a variable winning device that changes state between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter.

In more detail, the second start winning section 33WB comprises a second start winning opening 33WBa through which a game ball can enter, a pair of left and right blade members 33WBb that act as opening and closing members provided on the left and right sides of the second start winning opening 33WBa, a start winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the pair of blade members 33WBb to open and close, and a second start winning switch 224b that can detect a game ball that has entered the second start winning opening 33WBa.

The pair of blade members 33WBb are each rotatably supported on a shaft and are normally maintained in a closed position (closed state) close to each other. In addition, an entry prevention member 145 is provided directly above the second start winning section 33WB to prevent game balls from entering between the pair of blade members 33WBb in the closed state. As a result, under normal circumstances, the second start winning section 33WB is in a closed state, preventing game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area from entering the second start winning opening 33WBa.

On the other hand, as described below, when a predetermined opening condition is met, the pair of blade members 33WBb rotate and displace so that their tips move away from each other, entering the open position (open state). This creates a gap between the entry prevention member 145 and the tip of each blade member 33WBb through which game balls can pass, and the second start winning section 33WB enters an open state that allows game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area to enter the second start winning port 33WBa.

Under this configuration, when a gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, which is in the open state, and the second start winning switch 224b detects the gaming ball and turns on, a lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot will be generated (jackpot lottery) is held, and a changing pattern is displayed on the second special pattern display device 43B, which will be described later. When a gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB and the second start winning switch 224b detects the gaming ball and turns on, the start condition is met, and based on this, a changing pattern is displayed on the second special pattern display device 43B.

For ease of explanation, the fluctuating display for a predetermined period triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will be referred to as the "first fluctuating display," and the fluctuating display for a predetermined period triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be referred to as the "second fluctuating display." Furthermore, the fluctuating time of the first fluctuating display will be referred to as the "first fluctuating time," and the fluctuating time of the second fluctuating display will be referred to as the "second fluctuating time."

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) one of the various winning sections, such as the general winning section 31A, variable winning device 32A, or start-up winning sections 33WA and 33WB, it is detected by various winning switches, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15.

In this embodiment, 10 game balls (prize balls) are paid out when the ball lands in the general prize section 31A, 15 when the ball lands in the variable prize device 32A (large prize opening 32Aa), 3 when the ball lands in the first start prize section 33WA, and 3 when the ball lands in the second start prize section 33WB.

In addition, the gaming board 30 is provided with an outlet 36 corresponding to the bottom of the gaming area (the lower gaming area area ED), and gaming balls that do not win in the general winning section 31A or other winning sections are discharged through this outlet 36 to the outside of the gaming area (the back side of the gaming board 30). The gaming board 30 is also equipped with numerous nails, windmills, and other components to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the gaming balls fall.

Next, we will explain the various game states in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. First, we will explain the types of jackpots in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "15-round jackpot," "8-round jackpot," and "4-round jackpot."

Hereinafter, a "15-round jackpot" will be referred to as a "15R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "15RS" in the drawings. Similarly, an "8-round jackpot" will be referred to as an "8R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "8RS" in the drawings. Furthermore, a "4-round jackpot" will be referred to as a "4R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "4RS" in the drawings.

In the "15R jackpot" state, the jackpot opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Note that the "jackpot opening operation" refers to the opening and closing operation that occurs after the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable prize winning device 32A is switched from a closed state to an open state, until the shutter returns to the closed state after the specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed or the specified number of eight game balls has entered the variable prize winning device 32A (same below).

In an "8R jackpot" state, the jackpot release action is repeated eight times (8 rounds), and in a "4R jackpot" state, the jackpot release action is repeated four times (4 rounds).

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot awarded in the win/lose lottery differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB. If the win/lose lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first start winning section 33WA is won, the jackpot is assigned to either a "15R jackpot" or a "4R jackpot" (except during the time-saving B mode, described below). Also, if the win/lose lottery triggered by the game ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is won, the jackpot is assigned to either a "15R jackpot," an "8R jackpot," or a "4R jackpot."

Next, we will explain the start ball entry support state for the second start ball entry section 33WB. In this embodiment, the start ball entry support state is switched between a "high ball entry state (high support state)" in which the blade members 33WBb of the second start ball entry section 33WB are opened relatively frequently, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB, and a "low ball entry state (low support state)" in which the blade members 33WBb are opened less frequently than in the "high ball entry state," making it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB.

The "high ball entry state" may be defined as (1) a state in which the variable display time of the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the "low ball entry state," (2) a state in which the opening time (prescribed time) of the second start entry section 33WB is longer than in the "low ball entry state," (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can enter per opening of the second start entry section 33WB is greater than in the "low ball entry state," (4) a state in which the second start entry section 33WB is opened more times per winning of the start entry support lottery than in the "low ball entry state," or (5) a state in which the probability of winning the start entry support lottery is higher than in the "low ball entry state." The "high ball entry state" in this embodiment employs the above configurations (1), (2), and (5). Of course, the "high ball entry state" is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) through (5), or any combination of configurations (1) through (5), may be employed.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the start ball entry support lottery is won, the second start ball entry section 33WB opens twice over a predetermined period of 0.2 seconds in the "low ball entry state," and twice over a predetermined period of 1.8 seconds in the "high ball entry state." This makes it easier for game balls to frequently enter the second start ball entry section 33WB in the "high ball entry state."

Next, we will explain the various game states (various game modes) when the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display changes.

In this embodiment, the game mode is configured to switch between three modes: "Normal mode," which is the normal game mode; "Variable time reduction mode with starting ball entry support (hereinafter referred to as "Time reduction A mode")," which can be entered after the end of a jackpot state; and "Variable time reduction mode with starting ball entry support (hereinafter referred to as "Time reduction B mode")," which can be activated if a predetermined period of time has passed without a jackpot state occurring.

In "normal mode," the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display changes at normal times in a "normal change state," and the starting goal support state becomes a "low goal state."

In "Time-saving A Mode" and "Time-saving B Mode," the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display changes for a shorter time than normal, resulting in a "change time reduction state," and the starting goal support state becomes a "high goal state." Furthermore, the "normal change state" and "change time reduction state" can be switched by changing the change time determination table, as described below.

"Time-saving A mode" is a game mode that can be entered after the end of a jackpot state. In this embodiment, regardless of whether a "15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," or "4R jackpot" occurs, a predetermined period of "Time-saving A mode" can be granted after the end of that jackpot state. Specifically, after the end of a "15R jackpot" or "8R jackpot," "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted, and after the end of a "4R jackpot," "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play times is granted.

When the start conditions for "Time-saving A Mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a low ball entry state (non-assisted state) corresponding to "Normal Mode" to a high ball entry state (assisted state) corresponding to "Time-saving A Mode," as described below.

Then, if the number of times that variable play (miss variable play) is executed on the special symbol display device 43A, 43B (mainly the second special symbol display device 43B) during "Time-saving A Mode" reaches the upper limit of 100 times or 10 times without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving A Mode" ends and the game transitions to "Normal Mode."

When the termination conditions for "Time-saving A Mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a high ball entry state (auxiliary state) corresponding to "Time-saving A Mode" to a low ball entry state (non-auxiliary state) corresponding to "Normal Mode."

In addition, "Time-saving B mode (ceiling time-saving mode)" is a game mode that can be activated when the number of times a variable game (miss variable game) executed on the special symbol display device 43A, 43B (mainly the first special symbol display device 43A) has been executed without a jackpot occurring during "normal mode" reaches a predetermined upper limit (the so-called ceiling) of 500 times.

When the start conditions for "Time-saving B mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a low ball entry state (non-assisted state) corresponding to "normal mode" to a high ball entry state (assisted state) corresponding to "Time-saving B mode," as described below.

Then, if the number of variable games (miss variable games) executed on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B (mainly the second special symbol display device 43B) during "Time-saving B Mode" reaches a predetermined upper limit of 200 times without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving B Mode" ends and the game transitions to "Normal Mode."

When the termination conditions for "Time-saving B mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a high ball entry state (auxiliary state) corresponding to "Time-saving B mode" to a low ball entry state (non-auxiliary state) corresponding to "normal mode."

However, in this embodiment, once "Time-saving B Mode" is activated and ends without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving B Mode" will not be activated again unless a new jackpot occurs or data is cleared from RAM 503 of the main control unit 261.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in "normal mode," the start ball entry support state for the second start ball entry section 33WB does not become a "high ball entry state," but becomes a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB, so essentially, balls do not enter the second start ball entry section 33WB.

In addition, as will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, the effect display device 42 displays various effects corresponding to the current game state (game mode). For example, there is a "normal stage effect" that is displayed when the ball enters the first start winning section 33WA in "normal mode," a "rush stage effect" that is displayed when "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted, a "battle stage effect" that is displayed when "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play times is granted, and a "lucky stage effect" that is displayed when "time-saving B mode" with a maximum of 200 variable play times is granted.

As shown in Figure 3-4, on the outer right upper corner of the gaming area, the following devices are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10: a normal pattern display device 41 serving as a variable display device (normal pattern variable display device) for displaying the results of the start-entry support lottery held based on the passage of the gaming ball through the through gate 34; a first special pattern display device 43A serving as a variable display device (first special pattern variable display device) for displaying the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) held based on the ball entering the first start-entry winning section 33WA; and a second special pattern display device 43B serving as a variable display device (second special pattern variable display device) for displaying the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) held based on the ball entering the second start-entry winning section 33WB.

The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (normal symbol lamps). When a gaming ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol lamp on the right side of the normal symbol display device 41 flashes (variable display), for example. After the variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined period of time, the variable display is stopped based on the results of the start-going ball support lottery. In other words, the lighting state (combination of lit normal symbol lamps) when the variable display stops corresponds to the various results of the start-going ball support lottery, and the lighting state when the variable display stops definitively displays the results of the start-going ball support lottery. For example, lighting both the left and right normal symbol lamps indicates a "win," and lighting only the left normal symbol lamp indicates a "lose."

The first special symbol display device 43A is composed of four LEDs (first special symbol lamps). When a ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, the first special symbol display device 43A switches the display of the first special symbol lamp (first variable display).

Then, after the special symbol variable play (first variable display) has been performed for a predetermined time on the first special symbol display device 43A, the first variable display will be stopped based on the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the lighting mode (combination of lit special symbol lamps) when the first variable display stops corresponds to the various results of the win/loss lottery, and the lighting mode when the first variable display stops definitively displays the result of the win/loss lottery, i.e., "jackpot" or "miss." In other words, if the result of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) is a jackpot, the jackpot variable display will be performed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a jackpot stopped mode.

The second special symbol display device 43B is composed of four LEDs (second special symbol lamps). When a ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, the second special symbol display device 43B switches the display of the second special symbol lamp (second variable display).

Then, after the special symbol variable play (second variable display) has been performed for a predetermined time on the second special symbol display device 43B, the second variable display will be stopped based on the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the lighting mode (combination of lit special symbol lamps) when the second variable display stops corresponds to the various results of the win/loss lottery, and the lighting mode when the second variable display stops definitively displays the result of the win/loss lottery, i.e., "jackpot" or "miss." In other words, if the result of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) is a jackpot, the jackpot variable display will be performed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a jackpot stopped mode.

Furthermore, the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B also indicate the type of jackpot (whether it is a "15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," or "4R jackpot") depending on the lighting pattern (stop pattern) that they stop. Note that there are multiple stop patterns for the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B that indicate various types of jackpots and misses, and one of these is selected and displayed as a stop.

In addition, the stationary display on the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B is maintained for a specified period of time, and after that period (variation interval) has elapsed, the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, if the next variable display does not occur even after a specified time has elapsed after the first special pattern display device 43A or the second special pattern display device 43B has displayed a stopped display, the first special pattern display device 43A or the second special pattern display device 43B is configured to switch from an illumination mode indicating the result of the win/lose lottery to an illumination mode indicating a standby state in which no variable display is being performed. This is not a limitation, and the illumination mode indicating the result of the win/lose lottery may also be maintained as is.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, which is a start condition, while the first variable display is being executed, the first variable display corresponding to the ball is reserved and stored, and the reserved first variable display is started after the currently executing first variable display is stopped. Similarly, if a game ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, which is a start condition, while the second variable display is being executed, the reserved second variable display corresponding to the ball is reserved and stored, and the currently executing second variable display is stopped and stored, and the reserved second variable display is started.

In addition, if a game ball passes through the through gate 34 while a variable display is being displayed on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display corresponding to that passage is stored on hold, and after the currently running variable display is stopped, the stored variable display is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, adjacent to the normal symbol display device 41 and the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B are a normal hold display device 44 that indicates that the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held and stored, a first hold display device 46A that can notify or indicate that the first variable display is held and stored (the right to execute the first variable display has been obtained), and a second hold display device 46B that can notify or indicate that the second variable display is held and stored (the right to execute the second variable display has been obtained). In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 43A, the second special symbol display device 43B, the first hold display device 46A, the second hold display device 46B, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 are directly display-controlled by the main control device 261, which serves as the main control unit, as described below.

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to reserve and store up to four display variations of the normal symbol display device 41, which are performed based on the passage of a gaming ball through the through gate 34. For example, if one display variation of the normal symbol display device 41 is reserved, the normal hold lamp on the left will light up; if two displays are reserved, the normal hold lamps on the left and right will light up; if three displays are reserved, the normal hold lamp on the left will flash and the normal hold lamp on the right will light up; and if four displays are reserved, the normal hold lamps on the left and right will flash. Furthermore, if a new gaming ball passes through the through gate 34 during a jackpot state, the display variations for that display may also be reserved.

The first hold display device 46A is composed of two LEDs (first hold lamps). In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four first change displays based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning section 33WA. For example, if one first change display is held, the first hold lamp on the left will light up; if two first change displays are held, both the left and right first hold lamps will light up; if three first change displays are held, the left first hold lamp will flash and the right first hold lamp will light up; and if four first change displays are held, both the left and right first hold lamps will flash. If multiple first change displays are held and stored, they will be consumed sequentially in the order they were held and stored (starting with the earliest one).

The second hold display device 46B is composed of two LEDs (second hold lamps). In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four second variable displays based on the entry of game balls into the second start winning section 33WB. For example, if one second variable display is held, the second hold lamp on the left will light up; if two second variable displays are held, the second hold lamps on the left and right will light up; if three second variable displays are held, the second hold lamp on the left will flash and the second hold lamp on the right will light up; and if four second variable displays are held, the second hold lamps on the left and right will flash. If multiple second variable displays are held and stored, the second variable displays will be consumed sequentially in the order in which they were held and stored (starting with the first one).

Furthermore, if a new game ball enters the start winning section 33WA, 33WB during the jackpot state, the corresponding variable display is also put on hold and not started. The variable display is not executed during the jackpot state, and the variable display starts in a predetermined order after the jackpot state ends. However, in this embodiment, as described below, during the jackpot state, a "right hit" is usually performed, and it is relatively easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33WB located in the right area EB of the play area. Therefore, after the jackpot state ends, the second variable display is basically put on hold and stored.

As described above, basically, the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the first start winning section 33WA and is consumed in the order in which they entered, and the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the second start winning section 33WB and is consumed in the order in which they entered.

However, if the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB are on hold (one or more of the first hold lamps and one or more of the second hold lamps are lit), the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be consumed first. In other words, the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will not be displayed unless all of the second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB have been consumed. For example, if one first hold lamp on the first hold display device 46A is lit, a game ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, and one second hold lamp on the second hold display device 46B lights up, the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will be postponed, and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be displayed first.

The performance display device 42 of the variable display unit 35 is composed of a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display section 42a, and the display content is controlled by the sub-control device 262 and display control device 45, which will be described later. In other words, in the performance display device 42, the sub-control device 262 determines the auxiliary display content based on commands from the main control device 261 to correspond to the results displayed on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B, etc., and the content is displayed by the display control device 45, which will be described later.

The effect display device 42 is configured to be able to display effect variations (such as varying decorative patterns) in accordance with the variations displayed by the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 3-44, the effect display device 42 is provided with three pattern display areas: top, middle, and bottom (top pattern display area, middle pattern display area, bottom pattern display area), and multiple types of decorative patterns (patterns numbered 1 to 9) are displayed (variably displayed) in sequence in each pattern display area, after which the decorative patterns are displayed in a static manner in each pattern display area (for example, in the order of top pattern display area → bottom pattern display area → middle pattern display area).

Then, when the main control device 261 confirms that a jackpot state has occurred, a display corresponding to the jackpot is made on the first or second special symbol display device 43A, 43B, and decorative symbols are displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot on the effect display device 42 (for example, the same decorative symbols are displayed in a line on a predetermined pay line in the upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area), and the jackpot state begins.

Also, when decorative symbols are displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot, the preliminary step is, for example, to display the same decorative symbols stopped on a predetermined effective line in the upper and lower symbol display areas. This state, in which the same symbols are displayed stopped on a predetermined effective line in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the middle symbol display area is still displaying a variable pattern, is called a reach state. Of course, just because a reach state has occurred does not necessarily mean that a jackpot state will occur, and there are cases in which the jackpot will not occur.

In this embodiment, after a reach state occurs, a jackpot state occurs when the same decorative pattern as the reach pattern displayed in the upper and lower pattern display areas is displayed stopped on the same active line in the middle pattern display area (when a decorative pattern with the same number as the reach pattern is displayed stopped). However, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot cannot be determined depending on the type of decorative pattern displayed.

As shown in Figure 3-3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray connecting passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 (described below) to the lower payout outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray connecting passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19. Furthermore, there is a predetermined gap between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame 14 is formed with a foul ball passage 72 that guides game balls that fall through the gap to the lower tray 15. As a result, if a game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and travels back up the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72.

Furthermore, a launched ball passage 74 is provided which connects the upper tray 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and guides game balls stored in the upper tray 19 to the ball feeding device 63. In addition, a communication hole (not shown) which connects with the lower tray communication passage 71 is formed in the launched ball passage 74, and a first shutter (not shown) which opens and closes the communication hole is provided. The first shutter is normally biased by a biasing means (not shown) towards a closed position which closes the communication hole. Furthermore, the first shutter is linked to the ball removal button 123, and is configured to displace to an open position which opens the communication hole when the ball removal button 123 is pressed.

As shown in Figure 3-2, the lower tray 15 is formed with an outlet 15a that allows game balls stored in the lower tray 15 to be discharged outside the pachinko machine 10, and is provided with a second shutter 15b that opens and closes the outlet 15a. The second shutter 15b is normally biased toward a closed position that closes the outlet 15a by a biasing means (not shown). Furthermore, the second shutter 15b is configured to work in conjunction with the ball removal lever 25, and is configured to displace to an open position that opens the outlet 15a when the ball removal lever 25 is slid to the left, for example.

The symbol 67 in Figures 3-3 and 3-4 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by the payout mechanism 352 (described later) to the front of the inner frame 12, and is divided into a passage leading to the upper tray connecting passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray connecting passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Furthermore, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67. When the front frame 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, almost completely closing the outlet of the dispensing passage 67.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end of the entrance side of the lower tray connecting passage 71. The entrance (ball inlet) of the lower tray connecting passage 71 and the entrance (ball inlet) of the upper tray connecting passage 73 are located adjacent to each other. Furthermore, when the front frame 14 is closed, the entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance, allowing game balls to pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray connecting passage 73 are full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow toward the lower tray connecting passage 71 (overflowing into the entrance side of the lower tray connecting passage 71), and are paid out through the lower tray connecting passage 71 to the lower tray 15.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray connecting passage 71. The presence of this full detection switch makes it possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and game balls are stuck in the lower tray connecting passage 71). In this embodiment, based on the full detection switch continuously detecting game balls for a predetermined period of time, an error notification is controlled to inform the player that the lower tray 15 is full using a display or sound on the performance display device 42. Furthermore, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray connecting passage 71 is resolved and game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are not detected continuously for a predetermined period of time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 3-5, 3-6, etc. On the rear of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some parts overlapping front to back, and furthermore, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) that supplies game balls and a resin protective cover are attached. The payout mechanism and protective cover are integrated into one unit, and as the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as the back pack, this unit will be referred to here as the "back pack unit 203."

First, we will explain the rear structure of the gaming board 30. As shown in Figure 3-6, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided protruding rearward on the rear side of the variable display unit 35 (see Figure 3-4), which is arranged corresponding to the through-hole in the center of the gaming board 30. Also, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the effect display device 42, which is an LCD display device facing forward through the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 are removably attached in a stacked state in the front and rear.

The effect display device 42 is housed in a storage box (reference numeral omitted) with an opening formed to expose the LCD display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is fixed to the back side of the frame cover 213. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42. The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and is fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material, etc., so that the interiors can be seen. An LED control board, etc. that drives the LEDs, etc. built into the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning section 31A, variable winning device 32A, and start winning sections 33WA, 33WB from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won in the various winning sections. The game balls recovered by this ball recovery mechanism are guided to the discharge passage section 217, described below, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control unit 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control unit 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215 and can be opened to the rear.

The main control device 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 comprises a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, with the box base and box cover connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless specified traces are left behind. This makes it easy to detect if the board box 263 has been tampered with.

Although not shown in the figures, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221a, the large winning slot count switch 222, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221a, etc. and the main control unit 261, and is electrically connected to the main control unit 261 via a cable connector. In contrast, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, which detect winning in the start winning sections 33WA and 33WB, are connected directly to the main control unit 261 via a connector cable, without going through a relay board.

The detection results from the various ball entry detection switches are input into the main control unit 261. The main control unit 261 then sends a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) based on the winning status at each time to the payout control unit 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the output signal from the payout control unit 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, the back of the game board 30 is also provided with a second board relay board that relays various motors and solenoids to the main control unit 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in Figure 3-5, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit consisting of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (right side in Figure 3-5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward around an opening/closing axis extending vertically. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left side (upper right side in Figure 3-5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is a relay board for externally outputting various information from the main control unit 261 to the hall computer (not shown) of the gaming hall. It is electrically connected to the main control unit 261 and has multiple output terminals (10 in this embodiment) that can output signals according to the gaming status to the outside.

A specified communications cable (in this embodiment, a two-core cable consisting of two core wires) is connected to each output terminal. Each output terminal is composed of a pair of upper and lower core wire insertion sections (numbers omitted), each of which is configured to insert and clamp one core wire. In other words, a pair of upper and lower core wire insertion sections function as a single output terminal.

Meanwhile, the other end of the communication cable is electrically connected to the hall computer via a relay device (not shown). As a result, information (signals) output from a specified output terminal on the external terminal board 240 is input to the hall computer via the communication cable connected to that output terminal. The hall computer then uses the various pieces of information input in this way to grasp the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 that is the output source.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 3-5, the output terminals for outputting information from the main control unit 261 to the hall computer include a terminal (first terminal) for outputting information (jackpot signal 1) that is output only when the current gaming state is in a jackpot state, and a terminal (second terminal) for outputting information (jackpot signal 2) that is output when the current gaming state is either in a jackpot state or a high ball entry state (high support state).

In addition, although not designated by reference numerals for the sake of simplicity, the external terminal board 240 of this embodiment also includes a terminal (third terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a variable display has been made in the first special pattern display device 43A, a terminal (fourth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a variable display has been made in the second special pattern display device 43B, a terminal (fifth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a game ball has entered the first start winning section 33WA, and information (identification signal) indicating that a game ball has entered the second start winning section 33WB. a terminal (sixth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that the inner frame 12 is open; a terminal (seventh terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that the front frame 14 is open; a terminal (ninth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that various errors (winning error, no tank ball error, payout error, etc.) have been detected; and a terminal (tenth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls have been paid out from the payout control device 311.

Furthermore, it is not necessary for all output terminals on the external terminal board 240 to be connected to the hall computer; which output terminal to obtain information from is determined at the discretion of the amusement hall manager, etc. In other words, the amusement hall manager, etc. can use only the information necessary depending on the type of operation of the amusement hall.

Furthermore, the type of information output from the external terminal board 240 and the number of output terminals for outputting the information are not limited to the configuration exemplified above, and may be configured to output information different from the information (signals) exemplified above depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape. The left and right sides and top of the protective cover portion 354 are closed, with only the bottom surface open, and is large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to also cover the top and right portions of the board box 263 (the left side portion in Figure 3-5). As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is closed, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board-side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered.

The payout mechanism 352 is arranged to bypass the protective cover 354. Above the protective cover 354, a tank 355 with an opening at the top is provided, and this tank 355 is continuously replenished with gaming balls supplied from the island facilities of the gaming hall. Connected below the tank 355 is a tank rail 356, which has, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently slopes downstream, and a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of gaming balls are appropriately paid out using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The gaming balls paid out by the payout device 358 are then supplied to the upper tray 19, etc.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 also includes a dispensing relay board 381 that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, as well as a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. The power switch board 382 is supplied with main power, for example, 24V AC, via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

Below the rear pack unit 203 (base box 263) is a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported on the left side of the inner frame 12 (the right side in Figure 3-5) and can be opened to the rear. As shown in Figure 3-6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage 217 into which game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a discharge chute (not shown) is formed at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage 217 for discharging game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, game balls that win in each winning section, such as the general winning section 31A, are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the rear frame set 215 and then discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage 217, and game balls that do not win in any winning section are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are constructed as separate units that can be opened and closed independently, but the rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 may also be formed as a single unit.

Also, as shown in Figure 3-5, the power supply/launch control device 310, payout control device 311, and CR unit connection board 314 are removably attached in a stacked front-to-back position to the back side of the lower frame set 251. The power supply/launch control device 310 includes a launch control circuit 312 and a power supply circuit 313, and is housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

The dispensing control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 housing the main control device 261 described above, so that evidence that the board box 311a has been opened will remain.

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in board box 314a and fixed to the back side of board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, allowing the interior to be seen.

The dispensing control device 311 is also provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the base box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a dispensing error, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor will rotate forward and reverse, clearing the ball jam (returning to normal operation).

Furthermore, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the circuit board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is maintained, and when power is restored after the power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, when the power is turned off in the normal manner (for example, when the amusement hall closes), the state before the power outage is stored and retained. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, press the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power.

As shown in Figure 3-6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 has a cylinder lock 600a (see Figure 3-1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame 14. By inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, the inner frame 12 can be unlocked, and by rotating it in the other direction, the front frame 14 can be unlocked. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As mentioned above, the right-hand frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 has an extended wall 83 formed on it that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 3-5). This makes it difficult to insert a wire or similar object from the rear side of the outer frame 11 and use the wire or similar object to operate the locking device 600. As a result, defensive performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extended wall 83 is configured to cover the right end (left end in Figure 3-5) of the rear pack unit 203 and lower frame set 251 from the rear side, preventing the rear pack unit 203 and lower frame set 251 from being opened when the inner frame 12 is closed.

As shown in Figure 3-4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (to the right of the launcher 60), and as shown in Figure 3-5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in Figure 3-5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can be retracted into the switch main body, with the front frame open detection switch 91 being arranged so that its detection unit faces forward and the inner frame open detection switch 92 being arranged so that its detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in the ON state protruding from the switch main body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control unit 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and retracted into the switch main body, it outputs an OFF signal to the main control unit 261. In other words, when the front frame 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14, turning it to the OFF state, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detection part of the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing part 86 integrally formed with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11, turning it to the OFF state, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Figure 3-7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 is equipped with a CPU 501, which is a one-chip microcomputer that serves as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 contains a ROM 502, which is a memory unit that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503, which is a memory unit that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, and each function may be integrated into a separate chip.

RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of the CPU 501's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by the CPU 501 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 503a.

In addition, RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a is backed up.

Backup area 503a is an area that stores the values of the stack pointer, registers, I/O, etc. at the time of power outage (including power outages; the same applies below) so that when power is restored, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off due to a power outage or other reason. Data is written to backup area 503a by the main processing when power is cut off, and conversely, the values written to backup area 503a are restored by the main processing when power is turned on (including power on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies below). Note that when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from power outage monitoring circuit 542 (described below). When a power outage occurs, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501, which has built-in ROM 502 and RAM 503, via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus, a data bus, etc. The input/output port 505 is also connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, special symbol display devices 43A and 43B, and normal symbol display device 41, which will be described later. With this configuration, the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

For convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input/output port 505 is connected to various detection switches such as the general winning switch 221a, the large winning slot count switch 222, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, and the through gate switch 225; various boards such as the power supply/launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the sub-control device 262; information display devices such as the hold display devices 46A and 46B and the normal hold display device 44; a solenoid that operates the variable winning device 32A; and a solenoid that operates the second start winning unit 33WB. In other words, the main control device 261 is provided with multiple terminals (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminals and the like constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551, which is an arithmetic unit; a ROM 552, which is a memory unit that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551; a RAM 553, which is a memory unit that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 552 are executed; an input/output port 554; a bus line 555; and various circuits, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown).

RAM 553 is provided with a game information storage area for storing various game information (game data). The game information storage area stores game history information such as the number of times a variable display has been executed (number of starts) and the number of jackpots, as well as execution history information indicating that a specific effect such as a premium effect has been executed, and when a jackpot variable display has been executed, execution history information related to the jackpot variable display (such as the type of effect executed in the jackpot variable display and the type of jackpot stop symbol). Of course, the configuration may also store the number of times a variable display has been executed in which various effects such as a school of fish effect have been executed, not only in the case of a jackpot variable display but also in the case of a miss variable display.

More specifically, the sub-controller 262 updates various counters based on commands sent from the main controller 261, and stores these in the game status information storage area of RAM 553.

For example, when the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 261, it increments the values of the total start counter and the inter-jackpot start counter set in the game information storage area by 1.

The total start counter counts the number of times (starts) the variable display has been executed in this pachinko machine 10 from the time the power was turned on until the present time. The inter-jackpot start counter counts the number of times the variable display has been executed in this pachinko machine 10 from the end of the previous jackpot state until the present time.

In addition, when the sub-controller 262 receives an opening command from the main controller 261 indicating the start of a jackpot state, it increments the values of the total jackpot counter and consecutive jackpot counter set in the game information storage area by one.

The total jackpot counter counts the number of jackpots that have been executed on this pachinko machine 10 from the time the power was turned on until the present time. The consecutive jackpot counter counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have been executed without returning to the normal state from the first jackpot (number of consecutive wins). Note that a "first jackpot" refers to a jackpot won in the normal state with a low ball entry state (low support state).

In addition, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 is provided with a user-associated area (custom information storage area) for storing various custom information customized by the player, as described below.

The user-related area includes input value storage areas such as a language setting area (language setting flag) for storing custom information related to the language used, a brightness level setting area for storing custom information related to the brightness levels of the illumination units 102-104, a volume level setting area for storing custom information related to the output level (volume level) of the sound output from the speaker SP, and a performance custom information storage area for storing custom information related to various performances.

The sub-control device 262 also performs output setting processing to make various settings (such as erasing custom information entered by the player or setting default values) for the various storage areas of the user-related area (language setting area, brightness level setting area, volume level setting area, effect custom information storage area, etc.) during initial setting processing when the power is turned on, and at the timing of the end of the demo screen display described below (when the next variable display has not started even after a predetermined time has passed since the demo screen display started on the effect display device 42), etc.

Here, we will explain some specific examples of the processing performed in this output setting process. Of course, the above output setting process (such as the process of setting default values) is not limited to the examples below, and is performed for all storage areas in the user-associated area.

For example, no matter what language was set in the "Language Setting Area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had customized the language by entering "Chinese" or "English"), once the above output setting process is performed, the default language, "Japanese," will be newly set in the "Language Setting Area."

Furthermore, no matter what brightness level was set in the "brightness level setting area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had customized the brightness level to "2" or "5"), once the above output setting process was performed, the "brightness level setting area" will be newly set to the default value of level "3".

Furthermore, no matter what volume level was set in the "volume level setting area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had customized volume level "1" or volume level "4"), once the above output setting process was performed, the "volume level setting area" will be newly set to the default value of level "3".

In addition to or instead of the above configuration, an output setting process may be performed to perform various settings (such as erasing custom information entered by the player or setting default values) for the various memory areas in the user-related area when a demo screen display starts (when the next variable display does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since a predetermined variable display has been confirmed and stopped on the performance display device 42) or when the next variable display does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the demo screen display ended.

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 via the bus line 555. Furthermore, the input/output port 554 is also connected to the display control device 45, speaker SP, effect buttons 125, cross key 126 (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d, and center button 126e), illumination units 102-104, and error indicator lamp 105.

The CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines the performance content based on command signals (e.g., variation pattern commands) sent from the main controller 261, and controls the output of various information and signals to the performance display device 42, speaker SP, illumination units 102-104, etc.

More specifically, the sub-controller 262 causes the display controller 45 to execute display control related to the performance display device 42 based on a command signal transmitted from the main controller 261, and causes the performance display device 42 to output specified image information.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B controlled by the main control device 261 indicate that various winning events have been won, and the effect display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 displays decorative patterns in accordance with the changing display of special patterns on the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B.

In addition, based on a command signal sent from the main control unit 261 (for example, in synchronization with the above-mentioned display control), the CPU 551 of the sub-control unit 262 reads out predetermined audio data from among the multiple audio data stored in the ROM 552 and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553, converts the audio data into an audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to an amplifier (an amplifier that amplifies audio signals) built into the speaker SP, thereby outputting audio from the speaker SP.

Similarly, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 reads out predetermined light-emitting control data from among multiple light-emitting control data (on/off pattern data) stored in the ROM 552 based on a command signal sent from the main controller 261 (for example, in synchronization with the above-mentioned display control), converts the light-emitting control data into a light-emitting control signal, and supplies the light-emitting control signal to a light-emitting control board built into the illumination units 102-104, etc., thereby turning the illumination units 102-104, etc., on/off.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls using the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is a calculation device, is equipped with a ROM 512, which is a memory unit that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513, which is a memory unit used as a work memory, etc.

Like the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261, the RAM 513 of the dispensing control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the CPU 511 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 513a.

RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is backed up. Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the configuration may be such that data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

Backup area 513a is an area that stores the values of the stack pointer, registers, I/O, etc. at the time of power outage so that when power is restored, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was turned off when power is turned back on if the power is turned off due to a power outage or other reason. Writing to this backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when power is turned off, and the values written to backup area 513a are restored by the main processing when power is turned on. Note that, like CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, a power outage signal SK1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of CPU 511 when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When this power outage signal SK1 is input to CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power outage processing.

The working area is provided with a payout permission flag that sets permission for the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag that is set when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received, and a command buffer that stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out prize balls. A specific command that allows the payout of prize balls is sent from the main control unit 261, and is turned on when the specific command is received, and is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before power was cut off is restored. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initial process of the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a payout restoration command that is sent when power is restored to the main control unit 261.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the dispensing control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the dispensing permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before power was cut off is restored, and it is also turned off when the received command is identified by the command identification process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified storage area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands have been stored in all of the storage area, the buffer returns to the beginning of the storage area and the command is updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on these pointers.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, main control unit 261, power supply/launch control unit 310 (launch control circuit 312), payout device 358, CR unit connection board 314, etc.

The CR unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball dispensing operation unit (dispensing switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the CR unit (card reader unit, ball dispensing unit) located to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, and the payout control device 311. When information regarding the player's ball dispensing operation to the ball dispensing operation unit or the CR unit is input to the CR unit, and the game value balance is stored on a card, which is a recording medium inserted into the CR unit, the balance on the card is deducted and a payout request signal for the number of game balls corresponding to the deducted value is output to the payout control device 311. Note that the recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to card type, and may be coin type or stick type.

In addition, the payout control device 311 is configured to periodically (e.g., every 2 msec) output a CR unit connection signal to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310, indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected.

The launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310 permits or prohibits the launch of gaming balls by the launch device 60. The handle 18, payout control device 311, and main control device 261 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312. The launch control circuit 312 is also configured to be able to input from the handle 18 a dial position signal from the variable resistor indicating the rotational operation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation operation unit 18a, a touch signal from the touch sensor indicating that the player is touching the handle 18, and a launch switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b. The launch control circuit 312 is also configured to be able to input from the payout control device 311 a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the CR unit.

The launch control circuit 312 outputs a launch status signal to the main control device 261 on the condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, and a CR unit connection signal have been input, and the main control device 261 outputs a launch permission signal and a ball feed signal to the launch control circuit 312 on the condition that a launch status signal has been input. When a launch status signal has been input, the main control device 261 outputs a launch permission signal at 0.6 second intervals.

Furthermore, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball delivery device 63 and send the gaming ball to the launch position when a ball delivery signal is input. Furthermore, when a preparation ball detection sensor provided in the ball delivery device 63, which is capable of detecting whether or not a gaming ball is present at the launch position, detects that a gaming ball is already present at the launch position, the ball delivery device 63 is not driven (even if a ball delivery signal is received, the gaming ball is not sent to the launch position).

Furthermore, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) on the condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, a CR unit connection signal, a dial position signal, and a launch permission signal are input. This causes the gaming ball set in the launch position to be launched by the launch device 60 with a strength based on the dial position signal.

The power supply circuit 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each component of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control unit 261, dispensing control unit 311, etc. via a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24-volt AC power supplied from an external source, generates +12V power to drive various switches and motors, +5V power for logic, and backup power for RAM backup, and supplies these +12V power, +5V power, and backup power to the main control unit 261, dispensing control unit 311, etc. Operating power is supplied to the various switches, motors, etc. via the control devices to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the NMI terminals of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control unit 311 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and if this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and perform power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the 5-volt output, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage processing, even after the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage drops below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and dispensing control unit 311 can execute and complete the power outage processing normally.

The RAM clearing switch circuit 543 is a circuit that receives the switch signal of the RAM clearing switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 depending on the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clearing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clearing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clearing signal SK2 to the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clearing switch 323 pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAMs 503, 513 of the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311 are cleared.

The display control device 45 executes the display of varying decorative patterns on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, program ROM 522, work RAM 523, video RAM 524, character ROM 525, video display processor (VDP) 526, input port 527, output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. The CPU 521, program ROM 522, work RAM 523, and VDP 526 are also connected to the input port 527 via bus line 530. The VDP 526 is also connected to an output port 529 via bus line 531, and the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives display commands sent from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received commands, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 526 (generate internal commands for the VDP 526). This allows for display control in the performance display device 42.

The program ROM 522 is a storage unit that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and includes, for example, a program storage area and a data table storage area.

The program storage area is a storage area in which various control programs executed by the CPU 521 are stored.

The data table storage area is a memory area that stores display data tables that define the display content to be displayed on the performance display device 42 over time in various display performances executed based on commands from the main control device 261 (e.g., variation pattern commands), and additional data tables that define the display content to be displayed on the performance display device 42 over time in various additional performances (e.g., preview performances) executed by the sub-control device 262 in addition to various display performances executed based on commands from the main control device 261.

The display data table corresponds to an address, which represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a), and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time. Details of the display data table will be provided later.

The additional data table specifies the display content to be displayed over time for additional effects that are added to a display effect based on a command from the main control device 261 and displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a). Like the display data table, it specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time, corresponding to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for which one frame of image is displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a). Details of the additional data table will be given later.

One display data table and one additional data table are prepared for each type of display effect and each type of additional effect. For example, if there are 32 variable effect patterns that can be executed based on the variable effect pattern command from the main control device 261, one table will be prepared for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 display data tables. Display data tables are prepared for, for example, miss variable display effects, various reach effects, re-variation effects, re-lottery effects, demo effects, etc.

Of course, when controlling the display of the performance display device 42, instead of using the display data table and additional data table to perform drawing processing, the additional data table may be omitted. In this case, the display content added on the sub-control device 262 side may be added to the display data table.

The work RAM 523 is a storage unit for temporarily storing (setting) various data tables read from the program ROM 522, as well as work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. For example, it has a display data table setting area, an additional data table setting area, a pointer setting area, a drawing list setting area, a drawing target buffer flag setting area, a command buffer, etc.

The display data table setting area is a storage area for setting a display data table corresponding to the effects to be displayed on the effect display device 42.

The additional data table setting area is a memory area for setting additional data tables corresponding to additional effects to be displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the effect display device 42 using the display data table set in the display data table setting area.

Here, we will explain in detail the configuration (drawing content) of each address in the display data table.

As described above, the display data table corresponds to an address, which represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a), and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite, which is the display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, as well as drawing information for displaying each sprite on the performance display device 42, such as the display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information, and storage information for each sprite.

The sprite type is information used to identify the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information used to identify the coordinates on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a) where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information used to specify the magnification ratio relative to the standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is determined by this magnification ratio. If the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when the sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value specifies the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite will be visible through it.

The alpha blending information specifies a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information specifies the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information specifies the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing it.

The storage information indicates the address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored.

For example, in a display data table for variable display, the drawing content for one frame specified for each address is one background image, multiple decorative patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects (character 1, character 2, ...) for each sprite.

Here, with regard to the "background image," the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the performance display device 42, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information remain constant over time, so only the "background type," which is information for identifying the type of background image, and the storage information are specified.

Background images for variable displays include, for example, background images for various stages corresponding to various game states, and background images for various reach effects, and the "background type" specifies information that specifies which of these will be displayed.

Based on this "background type," the CPU 521 identifies the background image to be displayed as the drawing target, and further identifies the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame over time.

In this embodiment, the display data table describes a case where only the "background type" is specified in addition to the storage information as the drawing content of the background image. However, instead, the "background type" and "position information" indicating which range of the background image corresponding to that "background type" should be displayed may be specified. This "position information" may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the background image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the CPU 521 will identify the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the background image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the "position information" was displayed.

The "position information" may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or display on the performance display device 42) based on this display data table began. In this case, the CPU 521 will determine the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the background image that was displayed when the drawing of the image based on the display data table began and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image, indicated by the "position information," began.

Furthermore, depending on the "background type," the "position information" may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the background image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the performance display device 42) began, or, together with the "background type" and "position information," the type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time since the background image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display data table began) may be specified as the drawing content of the background image. Alternatively, the "position information" may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating the address where the range of the background image to be displayed is stored.

For "decorative symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...)," "symbol type offset information" is specified as symbol type information for specifying the decorative symbol to be displayed. This offset information represents the difference in the numbers attached to each decorative symbol. The reason offset information is specified rather than directly specifying the type of decorative symbol is because the display of decorative symbols in a variable effect changes depending on the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect and the stopped symbol of the current variable effect. The "symbol type offset information" from the start of the variable effect until a predetermined time has elapsed specifies the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect. This causes the variable effect to start from the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stopping pattern set by the sub-controller 262 is specified based on commands from the main controller 261, etc. This allows the fluctuation performance to stop at the stopping pattern corresponding to the stopping type specified by the sub-controller 262.

In addition, each decorative pattern is assigned a unique number, so the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the sub-controller 262 are managed by the number assigned to the decorative pattern.Furthermore, by representing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to the various decorative patterns, the decorative pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time period during which the "symbol type offset information" is switched from the offset information for the stopped symbols of the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols of the current variable effect is set to be the time during which the decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing state. While the decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing state, they are invisible to the player. Therefore, by switching the "symbol type offset information" from the offset information for the stopped symbols of the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols of the current variable effect during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers in the decorative symbols is interrupted, the player will not be aware of the interruption.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," specifies "Start" information, which indicates the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table specifies "End" information, which indicates the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is specified and the address where the "End" information is specified, drawing content is specified that corresponds to the presentation style to be specified in that display data table.

In response to a command sent from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 selects the display data table to use from multiple display data tables, reads the selected display data table from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area), sets it in the work RAM 523 (display data table setting area), and initializes the value of the table pointer set in the pointer setting area.

Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the value of the table pointer is incremented by one, and the next image content to be drawn is identified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area, and a drawing list (described below) is created. The CPU 521 instructs the VDP 526 to draw that image by sending this drawing list to the VDP 526. As a result, as the table pointer is updated, the drawing content is identified in chronological order specified in the display data table, and the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the performance display device 42.

Next, we will explain in detail the configuration (drawing content) of each address in the additional data table.

As described above, the additional data table specifies the display content to be displayed over time for additional effects that are added to a display effect based on a command from the main control unit 261 and displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a).

Here, "adding to one display performance" means changing the display content of one display performance based on a command from the main control device 261, and includes concepts such as, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one display performance and overlaying another performance on that display performance, changing the color tone of part or all of that display performance, or changing the image displayed in that display performance.

In other words, the additional data table predefines the drawing content required to add and display images that are not normally displayed to a display performance displayed by the display data table selected by the sub-controller 262 based on commands from the main controller 261, the drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of that display performance, and the drawing content required to change and display an image displayed in that display performance.

Here, we will explain the case where the display content for displaying a preview effect that is displayed in addition to the variable effect displayed by the display data table for variable display selected by the sub-controller 262 based on the variable pattern command from the main controller 261 is specified by an additional data table.

Additional data tables are prepared to correspond to preview effects that are added to variable effects, for example. Specifically, additional data tables corresponding to "school of fish effects," which are one display mode of preview effects, are stored in the data table storage area.

This additional data table specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is an additional display object to be displayed in one frame of image, and also specifies drawing information for the sprite to be drawn on the performance display device 42, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the sprite type.

On the other hand, if there is no object to be added at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the additional data table will specify null data, which means that there is no object to be added corresponding to that address.

The first address of the additional data table, "0000H," specifies "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the final address of the additional data table specifies "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is specified and the address where the "End" information is specified, drawing content corresponding to the presentation style to be specified in that additional data table is specified.

Based on the display command from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 determines whether there are any additional effects to be displayed in addition to the display effects output to the effect display device 42 using the display data table set in the display data table setting area. If there are any additional effects to be displayed, the CPU 521 reads the additional data table corresponding to that effect mode from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area) and sets the additional data table in the work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area).

For example, when the CPU 521 receives a display command related to a specified preview performance from the sub-control device 262, it selects an additional data table corresponding to the preview mode indicated by the command, reads the selected additional data table from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area), and sets it in the work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area).

In addition, when the CPU 521 sets a display data table in the display data table setting area, it first clears the contents of the additional data table setting area by writing null data, which means that there are no additional objects to be displayed.

Then, each time the table pointer is updated, the CPU 521 creates a drawing list that defines the image drawing instructions for the VDP 526 based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

In addition, if the information specified by the address indicated by the table pointer in the additional data table is "End" information, or if the table pointer points to an address not specified in the additional data table, it is determined that there are no objects to add, and a drawing list is generated based on the various sprites specified in the display data table.

The CPU 521 then sends the generated drawing list to the VDP 526, instructing the VDP 526 to draw the image. As a result, as the table pointer is updated, the drawing content is identified in chronological order in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing content specified in the additional data table is added, so that the image specified in the display data table and additional data table is displayed on the performance display device 42.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the display control device 45 displays another effect image (e.g., a preview effect image) in addition to the effect image (e.g., a variable effect image) to be displayed on the effect display device 42 in response to a command sent from the sub-control device 262, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be added and displayed can be set in the additional data table setting area, so that the other effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed.

If no additional data table is set in the additional data table setting area, null data is set in the additional data table setting area, and the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed as is on the effect display device 42.

For example, if there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of additional effect images to be displayed, and a separate display data table defining images in which the other effect images are overlaid on each original effect image is prepared, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables would have to be prepared. However, by separately defining data tables corresponding to the other effect images as additional data tables, as in this embodiment, only 32 + 5 = 37 types of display and additional data tables need to be prepared, thereby preventing an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area. Therefore, data tables corresponding to a wide variety of effect modes can be stored within the capacity provided in the data table storage area, making it easy to further diversify the effect images.

Furthermore, by defining the other effect images to be displayed as additional data tables, as in this embodiment, even if it is decided to display the other effect images to be displayed after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in work RAM 523 (display data table setting area), the other effect images to be displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed by simply setting the additional data table corresponding to the other effect images separately in work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area) without changing the display data table set in work RAM 523 (display data table setting area).

In addition, since the additional data table is configured to have the same data structure as the display data table, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer can be easily identified from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area while updating the table pointer every time, and a drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily generated from these.

Therefore, even if the sub-controller 262 or the like decides to display another effect in addition to a single display effect performed based on a command from the main controller 261, by specifying the display content of that additional effect in an additional data table, it is possible to easily display a wide variety of effects using a small number of data tables.

The pointer setting area is a storage area for setting a table pointer that specifies the address from which to obtain the corresponding drawing content from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

When the display data table is set in the display data table setting area, the CPU 521 initializes the value of the table pointer to "0." Then, based on the vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as the "V interrupt signal") sent from the VDP 526 every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process is performed as part of the display content setting process of the V interrupt process (described below) executed by the CPU 521, and the value of the table pointer is incremented by one.

Each time the table pointer is updated in this way, the CPU 521 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area, and creates a drawing list, which will be described later.

As a result, the effects corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table setting area will be displayed on the effect display device 42, and if an additional data table is set in the additional data table setting area, the effects corresponding to that additional data table will be displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the effects corresponding to the display data table.

In addition, the effects displayed on the effect display device 42 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table setting area or the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

The drawing list setting area is a storage area for setting a drawing list that instructs the VDP 526 to draw one frame of an image. The drawing list is generated based on the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

Here, we will explain the composition of the drawing list in detail. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the VDP 526 to draw one frame's worth of images. For example, it defines the drawing information for each sprite, such as the background image, decorative pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), and reserved icon (reserved icon 1, reserved icon 2, ...) used in one frame of image.

As described above, the drawing information for each sprite includes, as storage information, the address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. VDP 526 retrieves the image data for that sprite from the storage area in character ROM 525 specified by that address and transfers it to video RAM 524.

The drawing information for each sprite also includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The VDP 526 performs scaling on the standard image generated from the image data for that sprite read from the character ROM 525 according to the magnification ratio, rotation according to the rotation angle, translucency according to the translucency value, compositing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction according to the color information, and filtering according to the filter specification information using the method specified by that information, and then draws the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The VDP 526 then expands the drawn image into either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer flag, which will be described later.

The CPU 521 generates drawing information for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area, and the content of other images to be drawn (such as reserved icons), and creates a drawing list by sorting the drawing information by sprite.

The address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where the sprite (display object) data is stored in the drawing information for each sprite is generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and additional data table, or the sprite type identified from the content of other images. In other words, since the storage area in character ROM 525 where the image data for each sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, CPU 521 can instantly identify the address in character ROM 525 where the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the drawing information of the drawing list.

In addition, the CPU 521 copies the other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) of each sprite's drawing information as is, as specified in the display data table and additional data table.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the CPU 521 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from those that should be placed furthest in the background to those that should be placed in the foreground, and sets drawing information for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, drawing information corresponding to the background image is set first, followed by drawing information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: decorative pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), and reserved icon (reserved icon 1, reserved icon 2, ...).

The VDP 526 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order set in the drawing list, which defines the image drawing instructions for each frame, and then overwrites the drawn sprites in the frame buffer of the video RAM 524. Therefore, in one frame of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed in the background, and the last sprite drawn can be placed in the foreground.

The drawing target buffer flag setting area is a storage area for setting a drawing target buffer flag to specify the frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer") in which the image drawn by the VDP 526 is displayed, from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer and second frame buffer) of the video RAM 524 described below.

If the drawing target buffer flag is "0", the first frame buffer is designated as the drawing target buffer, and if it is "1", the second frame buffer is designated. Information about this designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the VDP 526 along with the drawing list.

As a result, the VDP 526 executes a drawing process that displays an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, the VDP 526 reads previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers this image information to the performance display device 42 as a video signal, thereby executing an image output process (display process) that displays an image on the performance display device 42.

The drawing target buffer flag is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the VDP 526 along with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". This causes the drawing target buffer to alternate between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer each time a drawing list is sent.

The drawing list is also sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process executed by the CPU 521 is executed, based on a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 526 every 20 msec when the drawing process and output process for one frame of image is completed.

In other words, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image drawing and output processes are executed. 20 msec after the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer to be read and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer.

Then, after another 20 msec, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer to be read and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, by alternately specifying either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, every 20 msec, it is possible to perform the drawing process for one frame's image while continuously outputting one frame's worth of image in 20 msec increments.

The command buffer is a storage area for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-controller 262, and is composed of a ring buffer.

The video RAM 524 is used to display images to be displayed on the performance display device 42, and is equipped with two frame buffers (a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer).

The two frame buffers are each capable of storing one frame of image (one screen's worth of image). Here, one frame of image refers to one screen's worth of image displayed at one update timing in a configuration in which the image displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Specifically, each frame buffer contains a large number of unit areas, each corresponding to a pixel (dot) of the LCD display unit 42a at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area is configured to store data for specifying which color to display. In this embodiment, a full-color system is used, allowing each pixel to be set to 256 levels for each of the colors R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Correspondingly, in each unit area, one byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color. In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least three bytes.

In this way, by adopting a double-buffer system with two frame buffers (first and second frame buffers) in the video RAM 524, the VDP 526 writes a one-frame image created in accordance with instructions from the CPU 521 into either the first or second frame buffer, thereby displaying the one-frame image in that frame buffer. While the image is being displayed in one of the frame buffers, the VDP 526 reads the one-frame image previously displayed in the other frame buffer and outputs the image information to the performance display device 42, thereby executing a process to display the one-frame image on the performance display device 42.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read in order to display the image on the performance display device 42 are alternately designated by the CPU 521 as either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

In other words, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read, and image drawing and output processing is performed. 20 msec after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read.

As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer is read and output to the performance display device 42, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer.

Then, after another 20 msec, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read.

This allows one frame of image that was previously loaded into the second frame buffer to be read out and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is loaded into the first frame buffer.

After that, by alternately specifying the frame buffer that displays one frame's worth of image and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read every 20 msec, either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer, it is possible to perform the drawing process of one frame's worth of image while continuously outputting one frame's worth of image in 20 msec increments.

The character ROM 525 is a memory unit that pre-stores image data for various images to be displayed on the performance display device 42, such as various background images and various sprites (decorative patterns, characters, hold icons, etc.), and has a pattern storage area, a character storage area, a hold icon storage area, a background image storage area, etc.

Here, the image data for each sprite includes at least a combination of bitmap data that defines the design, character shape, and pattern, and a color palette table that is referenced when determining the display color for each pixel in the bitmap image. Furthermore, the image data for the background image is stored, for example, as JPEG data, which is compressed still image data.

The pattern storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to the decorative patterns that are displayed in a variable manner on the effect display device 42. In this embodiment, multiple groups of pattern image data corresponding to nine types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" are stored. When generating images related to the pattern variations in the "normal stage effect," for example, image data for one decorative pattern group (nine types of decorative patterns) selected by the player in the effect customization described below from among three decorative pattern groups ("tropical fish group," "near-sea fish group," and "deep-sea fish group"), or one decorative pattern group (nine types of decorative patterns) set as default, is used. In this embodiment, the "tropical fish group" is set as the default decorative pattern group.

The character storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to various characters displayed on the effect display device 42, and in this embodiment, multiple types of character image data corresponding to, for example, main characters are stored. When generating an image for an effect in which a main character appears, for example, from among the four types of main character image data (image data for a "girl character," image data for a "boy character," image data for a "robot character," and image data for a "monster character"), the main character image data selected by the player during effect customization, which will be described later, or the main character image data set as default, will be used. Note that in this embodiment, a "girl character" is set as the main character by default.

The hold icon storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to the hold icons displayed on the effect display device 42. In this embodiment, multiple types of image data corresponding to hold icons are stored, such as the hold icon H461 (see Figure 3-44, etc.). When generating an image in which a hold icon appears, one type of hold icon image data selected by the player during effect customization, as described below, or one type of hold icon image data set as default is used from among the image data corresponding to three types of hold icons (icon image data modeled after a life jacket, icon image data modeled after swimming goggles, and icon image data modeled after a seashell). In this embodiment, the hold icon H461 modeled after a life jacket is set as the default hold icon.

The background image storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to various background images displayed on the effect display device 42, and in this embodiment, multiple types of image data corresponding to background images are stored. When generating an image for a "normal stage effect," for example, of the three types of background image data (background image data for the "diving stage," background image data for the "cruising stage," and background image data for the "deep sea stage"), the background image data selected by the player during effect customization, which will be described later, or the background image data set as default, will be used. In this embodiment, the background image for the "diving stage" is set as the default background image.

The background image storage area also stores various screen configuration images that make up, for example, the menu screen 3000, language setting screen 3001, volume setting screen 3002, and brightness setting screen 3003. Of course, a configuration may be adopted in which a portion of the image data stored in character ROM 525 is stored in ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which character ROM 525 is omitted and all of the image data stored in character ROM 525 is stored in ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that operates the liquid crystal drive circuit (LCD driver) that drives and controls the liquid crystal display unit 42a of the performance display device 42. It draws images based on drawing instructions (drawing list) from the CPU 521 and displays the drawn images on the performance display device 42 at a predetermined timing. In this embodiment, the VDP 526 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing.

The VDP 526 sends a V interrupt signal to the CPU 521 every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. The CPU 521 executes V interrupt processing each time it detects this V interrupt signal, instructing the VDP 526 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the VDP 526 executes drawing processing for the next frame of image, and also executes image output processing (display processing) to display the image previously developed by drawing on the performance display device 42.

More specifically, the VDP 526 draws one frame of image and expands the drawn image in either the first or second frame buffer, while outputting the one frame of image previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the effect display device 42, thereby displaying the image on the display unit 42a. The VDP 526 processes the drawing process of this one frame of image and the output process of this one frame of image in parallel within the image display time of one frame on the effect display device 42 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

In this way, the CPU 521 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from the VDP 526 and issues drawing instructions to the VDP 526, so the VDP 526 can receive an image drawing instruction from the CPU 521 at each execution interval (20 msec) of the image drawing and output processing. Therefore, the VDP 526 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing or output processing is complete, preventing the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image or the display of an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer where the currently displayed image is displayed.

Under the above configuration, when the VDP 526 performs drawing processing, it first reads the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 525 based on the storage information contained in the drawing list sent from the CPU 521, and then expands the read image data into a specified frame buffer in the video RAM 524.

In addition, when the VDP 526 performs image output processing to output an image to the performance display device 42, a video signal containing pixel information corresponding to each pixel of the LCD display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 is generated based on the image expanded in the first frame buffer or second frame buffer of the video RAM 524, and this video signal is output to the performance display device 42 via the output port 529.

More specifically, the VDP 526 outputs, as video signals, RGB signals consisting of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color information that indicate the color data of each pixel of the LCD display unit 42a, as well as synchronization signals for synchronizing the RGB signals with the LCD display unit 42a to the performance display device 42.

When the VDP 526 outputs video signals for one frame of image (one screen's worth of image) to the performance display device 42, for example, it first outputs video signals to each pixel in the same horizontal line, starting with the pixel in the upper left corner (first row, first column) of the LCD display unit 42a (m x n pixels), and continuing to the pixel in the upper right corner (first row, nth column) of the LCD display unit 42a. After outputting the video signal to the pixel in the upper right corner (first row, nth column), it then outputs video signals to each pixel in the same horizontal line, starting with the pixel in the leftmost part of the second row (second row, first column). In this manner, video signals are output sequentially from the top, from the leftmost pixel to the rightmost pixel, thereby displaying an image across the entire screen of the LCD display unit 42a.

Then, the VDP 526 outputs a V interrupt signal to the CPU 521 at the timing when it outputs a video signal to the last pixel in the bottom right corner of the LCD display unit 42a, causing the CPU 521 to recognize that updating of one frame of image has been completed. In this embodiment, the output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, the same as the update cycle of one frame of image. In other words, in this embodiment, every 20 msec that the V interrupt signal is output, output processing of the video signal for one frame of image is executed to the performance display device 42.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 conducts a lottery using various counter information during play. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3-8, the following are used: a hit/miss random number counter CH1 as a hit/miss random number generating means used in the hit/miss lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot state will occur; a type determination counter CH2 used to determine the type of jackpot (type lottery); a variable selection counter CH3 used to determine whether or not a reach state will occur in the effect display device 42; an initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit/miss random number counter CH1; a first variable type counter CS1 and a second variable type counter CS2 used to determine the variable display time of the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B (effect display device 42); and a normal symbol random number counter CH4 used in the start-going support lottery to determine whether or not the second start-going winning section 33WB will be opened. The variation selection counter CH3 is also used to draw reach patterns when the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 are changed to a missing symbol. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used to select the effect pattern on the effect display device 42 (such as selecting the decorative symbol variation pattern).

Counters CH1, CH2, CH3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CH4 are loop counters that add 1 to the previous value each time they are updated, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching their upper limit. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

RAM 503 has a special variable reserve area where the values of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, and variable selection counter CH3 are stored, and a normal variable reserve area where the value of the normal pattern random number counter CH4 is stored.

The special variable reserve area includes a first special variable reserve area and a second special variable reserve area, each of which has four reserve areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special variable holding area, the values of the win/loss random number counter CH1, the type determination counter CH2, and the variable selection counter CH3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history in the first start winning section 33WA.

In each reserve area of the second special variable reserve area, the values of the win/loss random number counter CH1, the type determination counter CH2, and the variable selection counter CH3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history in the second start winning section 33WB.

In this embodiment, there is only one execution area for the special variable pending area, and the data stored in the first special variable pending area and the second special variable pending area is shifted to a common execution area when a variable display based on that data is performed.

The normal variable reserve area has four reserve areas (reserve areas 1 to 4) and one execution area. Each reserve area in the normal variable reserve area stores the values of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 in chronological order, according to the history of game balls passing through the through gate 34.

By adopting this configuration, the first variable display on the first special pattern display device 43A, the second variable display on the second special pattern display device 43B, and the variable display on the normal pattern display device 41 can each be held up to four times.

Explaining each counter in more detail, the win/loss random number counter CH1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 599) as the closing value, return to 0, which is the lower limit (i.e., the opening value). Normally, when the win/loss random number counter CH1 goes through one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win/loss random number counter CH1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the win/loss random number counter CH1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once per timer interrupt and repeatedly within the remaining time of normal processing. Meanwhile, the win/loss random number counter CH1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 is stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer. Then, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area).

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) does not change depending on the game mode (either "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"). The number of values of the win/loss random number counter CH1 that result in a jackpot state is three, and the value is "7,207,407." In other words, based on the game ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, there is a 1/200 probability of winning the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery), and the jackpot state occurs.

ROM 502 contains a win/lose determination table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 corresponds to a win.

In this embodiment, there is a first hit/miss determination table corresponding to a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA (a first hit/miss determination table including a jackpot determination common to "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," and "time-saving B mode"), and a second hit/miss determination table corresponding to a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB (a second hit/miss determination table including a jackpot determination common to "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," and "time-saving B mode").

The type determination counter CH2 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 19), return to the lower limit, 0.

ROM 502 contains a type determination table that is referenced when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter CH2 corresponds to. In this embodiment, a first type determination table corresponding to a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and a second type determination table corresponding to a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB are provided.

If the player wins the jackpot in the lottery, the type of jackpot state to be awarded will be determined based on the value of the type determination counter CH2 (a type lottery will be held), and the player will be awarded the determined type of jackpot state.

In this embodiment, if a player wins a jackpot in the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by a ball entering the first start-up winning section 33WA, regardless of the game mode ("normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"), there is a 40% chance that the jackpot will be a "15R jackpot," and a 60% chance that the jackpot will be a "4R jackpot."

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the ball entering the second start-up winning section 33WB, regardless of the game mode ("normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"), there is a 50% chance of a "15R jackpot," a 30% chance of an "8R jackpot," and a 20% chance of a "4R jackpot."

The type determination counter CH2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the type determination counter CH2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the type determination counter CH2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area) of RAM 503.

The variable selection counter CH3 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 238). In this embodiment, the variable selection counter CH3 draws between three possibilities: a "reach before or after miss" in which, after a reach state has occurred for a decorative pattern, the final stopping pattern stops just one symbol before or after the reach pattern; a "reach other than a reach before or after miss" in which, after a reach state has occurred, the final stopping pattern stops anywhere other than before or after the reach pattern; and a "miss (complete miss)" in which no reach state occurs.

ROM 502 contains a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variable selection counter CH3 and various reach patterns.

The variable selection counter CH3 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the variable selection counter CH3 is stored in the variable selection counter buffer. Then, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the variable selection counter CH3 stored in the variable selection counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area) of RAM 503.

Furthermore, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, one of the fluctuation type counters, CS1, is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 255, and after reaching its upper limit (i.e., 255), return to its lower limit of 0. The other fluctuation type counter, CS2, is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 31, and after reaching its upper limit (i.e., 31), return to its lower limit of 0.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the first special pattern display device 43A or second special pattern display device 43B and the general fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display on the effect display device 42 (reach patterns such as normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) are associated by a fluctuation pattern table, so that once the fluctuation time of the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the effect display device 42 is also determined.

For example, the variation time may be determined based on the first variation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B may be determined by the second variation type counter CS2. For example, when a "15R jackpot" is to be handled, one of the stop display modes corresponding to a "15R jackpot" is determined. Note that the counters used to determine the variation time and variation pattern are not limited to the above configuration, and can be changed as appropriate for each model.

Furthermore, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and are repeatedly updated during the remaining time of the normal processing. In this embodiment, with regard to the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer of RAM 503 are stored in the special fluctuation holding area of RAM 503.

In this way, by obtaining the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 at the timing of the start winning, the first fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display that have been reserved and stored can be known (predicted) before the fluctuation begins, and this information can be used to perform various effects, etc. Furthermore, if a configuration that predicts the fluctuation time and performs an effect is not required, the buffer values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 can be obtained when the effect display device 42 determines the fluctuation pattern when the decorative pattern begins to fluctuate.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variation selection counter CH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and that the values are not synchronized under any circumstances.

The normal symbol random number counter CH4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 29, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 29). The normal symbol random number counter CH4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 is obtained when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 34, which serves as the first ball entry section.

When a winning value is obtained from the normal symbol random number counter CH4, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable value for a predetermined period of time (after the normal symbol lamps that make up the normal symbol display device 41 flash alternately), and then the display is stopped in a manner (lighting pattern) that corresponds to the win, and the second start-up winning section 33WB is opened in a pattern that corresponds to the game mode at that time.

In this embodiment, in a "low ball entry state," the winning random number values are two: "0" and "1." On the other hand, in a "high ball entry state," the winning random number values are 28: "0 to 27." In other words, in a "low ball entry state," there is a 1/15 probability that the second start entry section 33WB will be open, and in a "high ball entry state," there is a 14/15 probability that the second start entry section 33WB will be open.

ROM 502 contains a support determination table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 corresponds to a win. In this embodiment, a first support determination table corresponding to a "low ball score state" and a second support determination table corresponding to a "high ball score state" are set.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261 will be explained with reference to flowcharts. The processes performed by the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is started when the power is turned on; timer interrupt processing, which is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment); and NMI interrupt processing, which is started when a stop signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then the main processing.

Figure 3-11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step SH301, the process of reading the various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main control unit 261 (except for the RAM erase switch 323) is read, and the state of the switch is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Furthermore, when there is detection information from any of the various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is incremented. Furthermore, in the external output processing of the normal processing described below, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and prize balls are awarded (game balls are paid out) based on the prize ball command. Furthermore, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step SH302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SH303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variable selection counter CH3, and normal pattern random number counter CH4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter CH1, CH2, CH3, and CH4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503.

Then, in step SH305, the second start winning process is executed in response to the game ball entering (winning) the second start winning section 33WB, and in step SH306, the first start winning process is executed in response to the game ball entering (winning) the first start winning section 33WA.

Furthermore, in step SH307, a through gate passing process is executed in response to the passage of the gaming ball through the through gate 34. The following step SH308 executes a launch permission command setting process to perform processes such as sending a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply and launch control device 310. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 has a mode memory area that is referenced when determining the current game mode. The mode memory area stores one of the following values: "11" corresponding to "normal mode," "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode," or "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode."

In response to this, the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 also has a mode memory area that the sub-controller 262 references when determining the game mode. The game mode information set in the main controller 261 is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step SH200) each time the game mode is switched and set.

Next, the second start winning process of step SH305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 3-13. Note that RAM 503 is provided with a second pending counter Nb that counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB.

First, in step SH501, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the second start winning section 33WB based on the detection information from the second start winning switch 224b. If a positive determination is made in step SH501, it is determined in step SH502 whether the value of the second pending counter Nb is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in either step SH501 or SH502, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH502 returns a positive result, proceed to step SH503 and increment the second hold counter Nb by 1.

In the following step SH504, an additive display process is performed on the second hold display device 46B (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number in the second variable display by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right second hold lamps are off, the left second hold lamp is turned on; if the left second hold lamp is on and the right second hold lamp is off, both left and right second hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right second hold lamps are on, the right second hold lamp remains on and the left second hold lamp flashes; and if the left second hold lamp is flashing and the right second hold lamp is on, processing is performed to flash both left and right second hold lamps.

After step SH504, in the processing of step SH505, the values of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variation selection counter CH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 (the values stored in the win/lose random number counter buffer, type determination counter buffer, variation selection counter buffer, and each variation type counter buffer) are stored in the first available holding area in the second special variation holding area (win/lose random number memory area, win type random number memory area, reach random number memory area, and first and second variation type random number memory area). At the same time, the game mode when this second variation display starts is identified based on the values of the variation count counters A and B, described below, and the game mode information is stored in the mode memory area. After step SH505, the processing proceeds to step SH506.

In step SH506, a second win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area corresponds to a jackpot.

Here, details of the second pass/fail determination process in step SH506 will be explained with reference to Figure 3-15(b).

First, in step SH5111, the second win/loss determination table common to all game modes is referenced to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area matches any of the values "7", "207", or "407" corresponding to a jackpot. If a positive determination is made in step SH5111, then in step SH5112 the jackpot expected flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH5111, this processing ends as is.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-13, in step SH507 following step SH506, if it is determined in step SH506 that the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a second type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area.

The second type determination process of step SH507 will now be explained with reference to Figure 3-16(b). In the second type determination process, first, in step SH5300, it is determined whether the jackpot expected flag was set to ON in the second hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step SH5300 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH5300 returns a positive result, step SH5301 refers to the second type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area matches the value "0-9" corresponding to a "15R jackpot." If step SH5301 returns a positive result, step SH5302 turns on the 15R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH5301 returns a negative result, step SH5303 refers to the second type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area is "10-15," which corresponds to an "8R jackpot." If step SH5303 returns a positive result, step SH5304 turns on the 8R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH5303 returns a negative result, i.e., if the value of the type determination counter CH2 is between 16 and 19, step SH5305 turns on the 4R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserved area in the second special variable reserved area, and then this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-13, in step SH508 following step SH507, a second fluctuation time determination process is performed to determine the second fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display. Here, if the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "normal mode," the second normal fluctuation time determination table for "normal mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "time-saving A mode," the second shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving A mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Furthermore, if the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "time-saving B mode," the second shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving B mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time determined here is stored in the corresponding holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area. However, the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in that holding area is not erased here.

In this embodiment, the second normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode," the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving A mode," and the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving B mode" each have a "jackpot" table and a "miss" table.

In step SH509, which follows step SH508, a start command is set, and then this process ends. This start command includes fluctuation information (information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the second win/loss determination process, the second type determination process, and the second fluctuation time determination process, as well as information indicating whether the fluctuation display was triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, and game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SH200).

Next, the first start winning process of step SH306 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 3-14. RAM 503 is provided with a first pending counter Na, which counts the number of pending first variable displays triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA.

First, in step SH510, whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first start winning section 33WA is determined based on the detection information from the first start winning switch 224a. If the determination in step SH510 is negative, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH510 returns a positive result, step SH511 determines whether the value of the first pending counter Na is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If step SH511 returns a negative result, the process ends. On the other hand, if step SH511 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH512, where the first pending counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the following step SH513, an additive display process is performed on the first hold display device 46A (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number in the first variable display by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are off, the left first hold lamp is turned on; if the left first hold lamp is on and the right first hold lamp is off, both left and right first hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right first hold lamps are on, the right first hold lamp is left on and the left first hold lamp is flashed; and if the left first hold lamp is flashing and the right first hold lamp is on, processing is performed to flash both left and right first hold lamps.

After step SH513, in the processing of step SH514, the values of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variation selection counter CH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 (the values stored in the win/lose random number counter buffer, type determination counter buffer, variation selection counter buffer, and each variation type counter buffer) are stored in the first available holding area of the first special variation holding area (win/lose random number memory area, win type random number memory area, reach random number memory area, and first and second variation type random number memory area). At the same time, the game mode when this first variation display starts is identified based on the values of the variation count counters A and B, described below, and the game mode information is stored in the mode memory area. After step SH514, the processing proceeds to step SH515.

In step SH515, the first win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area corresponds to a jackpot.

Here, details of the first pass/fail determination process in step SH515 will be explained with reference to Figure 3-15(a).

First, in step SH5101, the first win/loss determination table common to all game modes is referenced to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area matches any of the values "7", "207", or "407" corresponding to a jackpot. If a positive determination is made in step SH5101, then in step SH5102 the jackpot expected flag for the corresponding reserve area in the first special variable reserve area is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH5101, this processing ends as is.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-14, in step SH516 following step SH515, if it is determined in step SH515 that the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a first type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area.

The first type determination process of step SH516 will now be explained with reference to Figure 3-16(a). In the first type determination process, step SH5201 first determines whether the jackpot expected flag was set to ON in the first hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step SH5201 is negative, this process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH5201 returns a positive result, step SH5202 refers to the first type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area matches the value "0-7" corresponding to a "15R jackpot." If step SH5202 returns a positive result, step SH5203 turns on the 15R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the first special variable reserve area, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH5202 returns a negative result, i.e., if the value of the type determination counter CH2 is between 8 and 19, step SH5204 turns on the 4R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserved area in the first special variable reserved area, and then this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-14, in step SH517 following step SH516, if it is determined in step SH515 that the value of the hit/miss random number counter CH1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot (a miss), a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the variable selection counter CH3 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area.

The reach determination process of step SH517 will now be explained with reference to Figure 3-17. First, in step SH5401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot expected flag was set in the first hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step SH5401 is affirmative, this process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH5401 returns a negative result, i.e., if a miss occurs, step SH5402 refers to the reach determination table to determine whether the value of the fluctuation selection counter CH3 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either the value "0" or "1" corresponding to a "front or rear miss reach." If step SH5402 returns a positive result, step SH5403 turns on the front or rear flag, indicating the occurrence of a front or rear miss reach, and then terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if step SH5402 returns a negative result, step SH5404 refers to the reach determination table to determine whether the value of the variable selection counter CH3 newly stored in the special variable pending area matches any of the values "2-21" corresponding to a "reach other than a miss before or after." If step SH5404 returns a positive result, step SH5405 turns on the non-reach before or after flag, and then this processing ends.

Also, if step SH5404 returns a negative result, meaning the variable display ends without going through a reach state (a "complete miss"), this process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-14, in step SH518 following step SH517, a first fluctuation time determination process is performed to determine the first fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display. Here, if the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "normal mode," the first normal fluctuation time determination table for "normal mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "time-saving A mode," the first shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving A mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "time-saving B mode," the first shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving B mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time determined here is stored in the corresponding holding area among the first special fluctuation holding areas. However, the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in this holding area is not erased.

In this embodiment, the first normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode," the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode," and the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" are provided with tables for "jackpot," "front and rear miss reach," "non-front and rear miss reach," and "complete miss," respectively.

Furthermore, for example, with regard to the fluctuation time determination table for a "complete miss," it is possible to provide fluctuation time determination tables such as "for 1 and 2 reserved items (normal fluctuation time)," "for 3 reserved items (reduced fluctuation time)," and "for 4 reserved items (reduced fluctuation time)," and to change the fluctuation time determination table (fluctuation time) referenced depending on the number of reserved fluctuation displays stored in the first special variable hold area. In this way, when the reserved first fluctuation displays are being executed sequentially, the shortened time for the first fluctuation display for a miss can be set depending on the number of reserved first fluctuation displays scheduled for execution at that time. Here, for example, in a situation where a fluctuation time determination table for "4 reserved items" is referenced when executing a specified fluctuation display, if the fluctuation display corresponds to a variety of wins such as a jackpot, the fluctuation time determination table for "jackpot" may be prioritized.

After step SH518, in step SH519, the start command is set and the process ends. This start command includes fluctuation information (information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the first win/loss determination process, first type determination process, reach determination process, and first fluctuation time determination process, as well as information indicating whether the fluctuation display was triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, and game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display, which is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SH200).

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start winning section 33WA, 33WB, the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1, etc. is directly stored in the special variable hold area, and then the win/lose determination process, etc. is executed, but this configuration is not limited to this. For example, a temporary memory area may be provided to temporarily store the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1, etc. when it is obtained, and the information stored in the temporary memory area may be stored in the hold area of the corresponding special variable hold area after the win/lose determination process, etc. is executed.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SH307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 3-18.

In step SH601, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information from the through gate switch 225. If the determination in step SH601 is negative, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH601 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34, step SH602 determines whether the value of the normal hold counter Nd, which counts the number of reserved variable displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the judgment here is negative, this processing ends as is. On the other hand, if step SH602 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if it is confirmed that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34 and the value of the normal hold counter Nd is less than 4, proceed to step SH603 and increment the normal hold counter Nd by 1.

Furthermore, in the following step SH604, an additive display process is performed on the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of one in the hold number displayed in the variable display on the normal pattern display device 41. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are off, the left normal hold lamp is turned on; if the left normal hold lamp is on and the right normal hold lamp is off, both left and right normal hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right normal hold lamps are on, the right normal hold lamp is left on and the left normal hold lamp is flashed; and if the left normal hold lamp is flashing and the right normal hold lamp is on, both left and right normal hold lamps are flashed.

After step SH604, in step SH605, a random number related to the win or loss is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 updated in the random number update process of step SH303 above is stored in the first free memory area in the normal variable pending area of RAM 503. Then, the through gate passing process ends.

Next, the launch permission command setting process in step SH308 will be explained with reference to Figure 3-19.

First, in step SH701, it is determined whether the firing permission flag, which indicates that a firing status signal is being received from the firing control circuit 312, is set to on. The firing status signal is sent from the firing control circuit 312 to the main control unit 261 when the firing control circuit 312 receives a touch signal from the handle 18, a firing switch signal, and a CR unit connection signal from the payout control device 311.

If step SH701 returns a positive result, step SH702 determines whether a launch status signal has been received. If step SH702 returns a negative result, step SH703 turns off the launch permission flag and then terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if step SH702 returns a positive result, step SH704 determines whether the value of the launch timer used to measure the interval between launches of game balls is "0." If step SH704 returns a negative result, step SH707 subtracts 1 from the value of the launch timer, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH704 returns a positive answer, then in step SH705, the main control unit 261 sends a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312. In the following step SH706, the launch permission flag is turned off. After step SH706, this process ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH701, a determination is made in step SH708 as to whether a launch state signal has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SH708, the process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH708, the launch permission flag is set to ON in step SH709.

In the following step SH710, a ball feed signal is sent to the launch control circuit 312. Furthermore, in step SH711, the launch timer is set to "300", which corresponds to 0.6 seconds. This ensures that the game ball is set securely at the launch position by the ball feed device 63 before being launched by the launch device 60. Additionally, while the main control device 261 continues to receive a launch status signal from the launch control circuit 312, a launch permission signal is sent from the main control device 261 at 0.6 second intervals, causing the game ball to be launched by the launch device 60 at 0.6 second intervals. After step SH711, this process ends.

When the launch control circuit 312 receives a launch permission signal from the main control unit 261, it determines whether it has received all of the touch signal, launch switch signal, and CR unit connection signal from the handle 18 and payout control unit 311, and if a positive determination is made, it drives the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) and performs a launch process to launch the gaming ball. The launch control circuit 312 also controls the launch device 60 to adjust the launch strength (launch speed) of the gaming ball based on the dial position signal. This allows the gaming ball to be launched by the launch device 60 with the adjusted strength.

In addition, when the launch control circuit 312 receives a ball feed signal from the main control unit 261, it checks the preparation ball detection sensor, which detects whether a game ball has been set at the launch position on the launch rail 61 where the game ball will be launched by the launch device 60, and if it confirms that a game ball has not been set at the launch position, it drives the ball feed device 63 and performs a ball feed process to set the game ball at the launch position.

Figure 3-12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control unit 261 at the time of power cut to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261. The CPU 501 then interrupts the ongoing control and begins NMI interrupt processing. In step SH401, the power outage occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the power outage occurrence information setting, and the NMI interrupt processing ends.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311, and this NMI interrupt causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, causing the CPU 511 to interrupt the control it was currently executing and start the NMI interrupt processing. The details of this processing are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 3-9. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SH101, initial setting processing is performed when power is turned on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and a wait process is performed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-controllers (sub-controller 262, dispensing controller 311, etc.) to become operational. In the following step SH102, RAM access is permitted.

Then, data backup processing is performed on RAM 503 within CPU 501. Specifically, in step SH103, it is determined whether RAM erase switch 323 provided on power supply circuit 313 of power supply/launch control device 310 is pressed (ON). If it is pressed, the process proceeds to step SH112 to clear (erase) the backup data. On the other hand, if RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the process proceeds to the following step SH104, where it is determined whether power outage information is set in backup area 503a of RAM 503. If it is not set, no backup data is stored, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step SH112. If power outage information is set in backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SH105. In the following step SH106, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, i.e., the validity of the backup is determined. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, so in this case too, proceed to step SH112.

In step SH112, an initialization command is sent to initialize the sub-controller 262, dispensing controller 311, etc. After that, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SH113, etc.). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, if you want to return the machine to its initial state when powering it on, for example, when the hall opens for business, you can turn on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 323 is ON, the system proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SH113, etc.). Similarly, if no power outage information has been set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the system also proceeds to RAM 503 initialization processing (step SH113, etc.). That is, in step SH113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step SH114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step SH111, and the system proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 323 has not been pressed (step SH103: NO), power recovery processing (processing upon recovery from power outage) is executed, provided that power outage information has been set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. That is, in step SH107, the stack pointer is restored to its state before the power outage, and in step SH108, the power outage information is cleared.

In step SH109, a command is sent to return the sub-controller to the gaming state it was in when power was turned off. In step SH110, the used registers are restored from the backup area 503a of RAM 503. Then, in step SH111, interrupt permission is set and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 3-10. In this normal processing, the main game processing is executed. In summary, the processing of steps SH200 to SH211 is executed as periodic processing at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps SH212 and SH213 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step SH200, external output processing is performed to send control signals to each device based on the settings of the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B and the settings of the second start-up winning section 33WB, etc., updated in the previous normal processing, and to send output data such as commands to each sub-side control device.

For example, when starting a variable display for a predetermined period on the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B, a variable pattern command is sent to the sub-control device 262 to start a performance such as a variable display of decorative patterns on the performance display device 42. The sub-control device 262, which has input the variable pattern command, determines the display mode (variation time, performance pattern, etc.) of the performance display device 42 based on the various commands, and issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to display that display mode on the performance display device 42.

The variation pattern command contains information that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative symbols, such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach. Meanwhile, the sub-controller 262 stores a table that contains the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. Based on the variation pattern command, the sub-controller 262 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbols, and controls the display controller 45, audio, etc.

However, in this embodiment, the variation pattern command does not include information specifying the type of presentation mode for super reaches or special reaches ("Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," or "Marine Reach," which will be described later), and the sub-control device 262 is configured to determine the type of presentation mode for super reaches or special reaches based on the variation pattern command.

Here, we will explain the decorative symbol change patterns. A "normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the decorative symbol change display.

A "Super Reach" is a reach pattern in which, while decorative symbols are being displayed in a changing manner (after a reach state has been established), characters and the like are displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols, thereby building a sense of anticipation in the player. As will be described later, this embodiment is configured to be able to execute three types of Super Reach: "Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," and "Marine Reach."

"Special Reach" is a presentation mode that can be derived when there is a high probability of a jackpot occurring (in this embodiment, only when a jackpot occurs). During the display of changing decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative symbols, presentation patterns and characters that differ from those of the Super Reach are displayed, creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

However, in this embodiment, the "Special Reach" is an advanced reach effect that can only be triggered when one of the super reaches, "Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," or "Marine Reach," is triggered. Therefore, in this embodiment, three types of special reaches can be executed: "Special Kuroshio Reach," "Special Coral Reach," and "Special Marine Reach," as described below.

"Complete miss" is a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol display stops moving without any reach state being reached.

The sub-control device 262 also determines the stopping pattern (combination of stopping patterns) for the decorative pattern changing display on the effect display device 42 based on the change pattern and change time information included in the change pattern command. Information about the stopping pattern determined here is output to the display control device 45, and added to the display data table for the changing display selected as described above. Then, by performing an image drawing process according to the display data table to which information about the stopping pattern has been added, the stopping pattern is displayed as stopped on the effect display device 42 after the change time has elapsed. In other words, if a jackpot is won ("15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," "4R jackpot"), the changing display is displayed as a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern combination) consisting of the same numbers 1 to 9 that are all the same.

A combination of symbols that miss before and after corresponds to a "reach that misses before and after", where after a reach occurs, the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol. A combination of symbols other than a miss before and after corresponds to a "reach that does not miss before and after", where after a reach occurs, the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol. A combination of symbols that miss completely corresponds to a "complete miss", where no reach even occurs.

In addition, the main control device 261 may be configured to set a pattern command specifying one of a jackpot pattern combination, a combination of patterns that are not a front-to-back miss, a combination of patterns that are not a front-to-back miss, or a combination of patterns that are a complete miss, and output this to the sub-control device 262 together with a variation pattern command.

In addition, the external output process of step SH200 also involves processing to externally output various information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 240 in order to grasp the various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10.

For example, if the current gaming state is a jackpot state, jackpot signal 1 (high level signal) is output from the first terminal to the hall computer. Furthermore, if the current gaming state is a jackpot state or a high support state, jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) is output from the second terminal to the hall computer. This allows the hall computer to grasp the start and end of the jackpot state and the start and end of the high support state in the pachinko machine 10 that output the signal.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-10, in step SH201, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

In the following step SH202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SH203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Then, in step SH205, the second special display control process is executed. In this process, control is performed regarding the second special pattern display device 43B, and the jackpot determination, the variable display settings executed by the second special pattern display device 43B, and the effect display settings executed by the effect display device 42 are also performed. Details of this second special display control process will be described later.

Furthermore, in step SH206, a first special display control process is executed. This process controls the first special pattern display device 43A, determines whether a jackpot has occurred, sets the variable display to be executed by the first special pattern display device 43A, and sets the effect display (such as the variable pattern of decorative patterns) to be executed by the effect display device 42. Details of this first special display control process will be described later.

In step SH207, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this processing, control is performed regarding the variable prize winning device 32A. Details of the variable prize winning device control processing will be described later.

In step SH208, normal display control processing is executed. In this processing, control is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

In step SH209, the start winning section control process is executed. In this process, control is performed on the second start winning section 33WB, which has a blade member 33WBb that opens and closes. Details of this start winning section control process will be described later.

Then, in step SH210, it is determined whether power outage information has been set in the backup area 503a of RAM 503. If power outage information has not been set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step SH211 whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) has passed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already passed, it proceeds to step SH200, and the processing from step SH200 onwards is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps SH212 and SH213).

In other words, in step SH212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SH213, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step SH201 above). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (255 and 31 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

Here, the execution time for each process in steps SH200 to SH210 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the win/lose random number counter CH1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Furthermore, if power outage information is set in backup area 503a of RAM 503 (step SH210: YES), this means that power has been cut off, and the processing from step SH214 onwards is carried out as power outage processing in the event of a power outage. Power outage processing begins with prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing in step SH214, then saving the contents of each register used by CPU 501 to the stack area in step SH215, and storing the value of the stack pointer in backup area 503a in step SH216.

Then, in step SH217, a power-off notification command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (such as the dispensing control device 311). Then, in step SH218, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 503. Then, in step SH219, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

The processing of step SH210 is executed at the end of a series of processing steps SH200-SH209 corresponding to changes in the game state, or at the end of one cycle of processing steps SH212 and SH213 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, during normal processing by the main control unit 261, power outage information is checked at the end of each processing step, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing step is in progress, making storage easier. Furthermore, when restoring the state before the power outage, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is smaller, making restoration easier and reducing the processing burden on the main control unit 261. Furthermore, because interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step SH214), data at the time of the power outage is prevented from being changed, and the state before the power outage can be reliably stored.

Next, the first special display control process of step SH206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 3-20.

First, in step SH800, it is determined whether the value of the variable interval timer, which measures the remaining time of the variable interval set after the first variable display of the first special pattern display device 43A, is "0."

If step SH800 returns a negative result, i.e., if the time is within the variable interval period, step SH819 subtracts the value from the variable interval timer, and then the process ends. For example, if the variable interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the variable interval timer is set to 249 (or 250 if step SH819 is performed before step SH800), the variable interval timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec in this process, and becomes 0 after 1 second.

On the other hand, if step SH800 returns a positive result, i.e., if the interval is not a variable interval, step SH801 refers to the win status memory area, which will be described in detail later, and determines whether the current state is other than a jackpot state.

The jackpot state includes an opening period from when the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B displays a stop display in a predetermined manner corresponding to a jackpot until the variable winning device 32A opens, a round period during which the variable winning device 32A is in an open state, an interval period between round periods during which the variable winning device 32A is in a closed state, and an ending period after the final round until the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B can begin displaying a variable display.

In this embodiment, the hit status memory area stores "0" when in a state other than a jackpot state, and when in a jackpot state, stores "1" during the opening period and interval period, "2" during the round period, and "3" during the ending period. In other words, step SH801 determines whether or not a jackpot state is in progress by determining whether or not "0" is stored in the hit status memory area.

If step SH801 returns a negative result, i.e., if the jackpot state is in progress, this process ends. In this manner, in this embodiment, the first variable display is not executed when the jackpot state is in progress.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH801, the process proceeds to step SH802. In step SH802, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is being performed on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to on. If the special symbol 2 display flag is set to on, the process is determined to be positive. If a positive judgment is made in step SH802, the process is terminated.

If the result of step SH802 is negative, proceed to step SH803, where it is determined whether the second pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, is greater than 0. If the value of the second pending counter Nb is greater than 0, it is determined to be positive. If the result of step SH803 is positive, the process ends.

If the result of step SH803 is negative, step SH804 determines whether the special symbol 1 display flag, which indicates that the first variable display is being performed on the first special symbol display device 43A, is set to on.

If step SH804 returns a negative result, i.e., the game is not in a jackpot state, and the first or second variable display is not in progress, and no second variable display is stored in reserve, the program proceeds to step SH805, where it is determined whether the first reserved counter Na, which counts the number of reserved first variable displays triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, is greater than 0.

In other words, if the second special pattern display device 43B is currently displaying a second variable display or if at least one second variable display is stored in reserve, the first special pattern display device 43A is configured not to be able to start a new first variable display.

If step SH805 returns a positive answer, step SH806 is executed to subtract 1 from the first pending counter Na. In the following step SH807, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the first special variable pending area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the first special variable pending area sequentially toward the execution area, with data in each area being shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SH807, in step SH808, a subtraction display process is performed on the first hold display device 46A (first hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of one in the hold number in the first variable display. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are flashing, the left first hold lamp is kept flashing while the right first hold lamp is lit; if the left first hold lamp is flashing and the right first hold lamp is lit, both left and right first hold lamps are lit; if both left and right first hold lamps are lit, the left first hold lamp is kept lit while the right first hold lamp is turned off; and if the left first hold lamp is lit and the right first hold lamp is turned off, both left and right first hold lamps are turned off. After step SH808, in step SH809, the first variable display setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH805, in step SH811, standby display settings (such as setting a standby display command to be output to the sub-control device 262) are made to derive a display mode corresponding to a standby state in which no change display is being performed in the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B (for example, a mode in which only the first or second special pattern lamp from the right in the bottom row is lit), and then this processing is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, after the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B stop fluctuation, their stopped state will be maintained (in a state showing the result of the win/lose lottery) for the fluctuation interval, but when the fluctuation interval ends, they will switch to a display state indicating that they are in a fluctuation standby state.

The display modes indicating that the effect display device 42 is in a waiting state for change include a first waiting display mode and a second waiting display mode. Upon receiving a waiting display command, the sub-control device 262 first sets the effect display device 42 to the first waiting display mode, in which the brightness is maintained and the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern changing display is maintained almost unchanged, and may be configured to set a value corresponding to a predetermined time (e.g., a value corresponding to 30 seconds) to a waiting time measurement timer that measures the time since the first waiting display mode was derived. Furthermore, when the value of the waiting time measurement timer is decremented every predetermined time and reaches "0," the effect display device 42 may be configured to dim the brightness and switch to the second waiting display mode, in which the display mode is simplified (e.g., no decorative pattern is displayed).

Here, details of the first variable display setting process in step SH809 will be explained with reference to Figure 3-21.

First, in step SH900, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is "7," which corresponds to a jackpot. In addition, in step SH900, it may also be determined whether the first variable display, which corresponds to a jackpot, is being displayed by determining whether the jackpot expected flag in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set to on.

If step SH900 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH901, where it is determined whether the 15R jackpot flag has already been set on in the execution area of the special variable pending area. If step SH901 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH903.

In step SH903, a 15R jackpot pattern setting process is performed. The 15R jackpot pattern setting process is a process for causing the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 to execute a variable display and effect display corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area (the same applies to the various pattern setting processes described below). Here, the variable pattern table corresponding to the 15R jackpot is taken into consideration to determine the variable pattern (variable display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42, and variable pattern commands are set, etc.

Specifically, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process of step SH903 (the same applies to the various pattern setting processes of steps SH905, SH907, SH909, and SH910 described below), the mode memory area is first checked to determine the game mode. If "11," corresponding to "normal mode," is stored in the mode memory area, the first normal variable time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected as the first variable time determination table to be referenced when setting the first variable time. Furthermore, if "21," corresponding to "time-saving A mode," is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. If "31," corresponding to "time-saving B mode," is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected.

Then, the selected first variable time determination table is referenced, and the first variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area. The determined first variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable reserve area.

Furthermore, a reach pattern is determined based on the first fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern. For example, the first normal fluctuation time determination table for jackpots is referenced, and if the first fluctuation time is determined to be 22 seconds, a normal reach is set; if it is determined to be 30 or 35 seconds, a super reach is set; and if it is determined to be 40 seconds, a special reach is set.

Then, various information including the first variable display, the 15R jackpot, the determined reach pattern, game mode information, and the variable time are set in the variable pattern command. Furthermore, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process, the special chart 1 jackpot variable flag, which indicates that the first variable display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed, is set to ON.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reach pattern (either normal reach, super reach, or special reach) of the effect display device 42 is determined on the main control device 261 side, but in order to reduce the burden on the main control device 261, the main control device 261 may not determine the reach pattern, and the variation pattern command may be configured to include information on whether it is the first variation display or the second variation display, information indicating the variation pattern (information that allows one to determine whether it is a 15R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, a reach that misses before and after, a reach that misses other than before and after, or a complete miss), information indicating the variation time, etc., and the reach pattern of the effect display device 42 may be determined on the sub-control device 262 side.

After step SH903, in step SH911, the special symbol 1 display in progress flag, which indicates that the first variable display is in progress on the first special symbol display device 43A, is set to ON, and in step SH912, a value corresponding to the first variable time is set for the special symbol 1 display timer, which measures the remaining time of the first variable display. If the jackpot expected flag is then set to ON, in step SH913, the jackpot expected flag is set to OFF, and this processing is terminated.

If step SH901 returns a negative result, step SH905 performs a 4R jackpot pattern setting process. Here, the variation pattern table corresponding to the 4R jackpot is referenced to determine the variation patterns (variation display time, stop mode, presentation pattern, etc.) of the first special symbol display device 43A and the presentation display device 42, and variation pattern commands are set, etc. Furthermore, the 4R jackpot pattern setting process sets the special symbol 1 jackpot variation flag to ON, indicating that the first variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed.

After step SH905, in step SH911, the special chart 1 display flag is set to ON, and in step SH912, a value corresponding to the first variable time is set for the special chart 1 display timer. If the jackpot expected flag is then set to ON, in step SH913, the jackpot expected flag is turned OFF, and this processing ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step SH900, step SH906 takes into consideration the execution area of the special variable pending area and determines whether the front and rear flag (see reach judgment process in Figure 3-17) is on. If a positive judgment is made in step SH906, that is, if the "front and rear miss reach" is present, then step SH907 performs the front and rear reach pattern setting process (setting of variable pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH911, SH912, and SH913 are carried out, before terminating this process.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step SH906, step SH908 takes into consideration the execution area of the special variable pending area and determines whether the non-front and rear flag is on. If a positive judgment is made in step SH908, that is, if the "non-front and rear miss reach" is true, step SH909 performs non-front and rear reach pattern setting processing (setting of variable pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH911, SH912, and SH913 are carried out, and this processing ends.

Also, if the result of step SH908 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "complete miss," then step SH910 performs the miss fluctuation pattern setting process (setting the fluctuation pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH911, SH912, and SH913 are carried out, and this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-20, if a positive judgment is made in step SH804, i.e., if the first variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SH812, where the decrement process for the special chart 1 display timer is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special chart 1 display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 6 seconds (6000 msec), the special chart 1 display timer is set to "1500", and is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

Next, the process proceeds to step SH813, where the value of the special chart 1 display timer after the above subtraction is used to determine whether the specified change time has elapsed. At this time, if the specified change time has elapsed, i.e., if the value of the special chart 1 display timer becomes "0," a positive judgment is made in step SH813.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH813, a switch display setting is made in step SH818 to continue the switch display (variable display) of the first special pattern display device 43A. Based on the settings of the switch display setting, a control signal to switch display is output to the first special pattern display device 43A in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This enables the switch display (variable display) of the first special pattern display device 43A to be performed at the execution timing of the first special display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SH818, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH813, the special symbol 1 display flag is turned off in step SH814, and the special symbol 1 stop display setting is made in step SH815 to display a stop on the first special symbol display device 43A. Based on the settings of this special symbol 1 stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop is output to the first special symbol display device 43A in the external output processing of the next normal processing. In other words, the first special symbol display device 43A will display a stop corresponding to each jackpot type, miss, etc. set in the first variable display setting processing.

Furthermore, after step SH815, in step SH816, a special symbol 1 stop command is set in the sub-control device 262 to cause the effect display device 42 to display a stop. This ensures that the stop timing of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 is synchronized. However, because the stop mode of the effect display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, there is no need to add information regarding the stop mode of the effect display device 42 again. Also, to reiterate, the stop display by the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B is the primary display, and the display of the decorative pattern by the effect display device 42 is merely auxiliary (for performance purposes).

Next, in step SH817, the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process is performed to set the initial winning status and switch game modes, and then this process ends.

Here, the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process in step SH817 will be explained with reference to Figure 3-22.

First, in step SH1001, the execution area of the special variable pending area is referenced to determine whether the special chart 1 jackpot variable flag is set to on.

If the result of step SH1001 is affirmative, the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SH1002, and the jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot state is in progress (the special chart 1 jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred in the first fluctuation display stored in the first special fluctuation pending area) is turned on in step SH1003.

Furthermore, in step SH1004, the round number counter is set to a value corresponding to the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area ("15" corresponding to a 15R jackpot, or "4" corresponding to a 4R jackpot). The round number counter is used to determine the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32A is opened).

In the following step SH1005, a "1" is set in the winning status memory area. Furthermore, in step SH1006, a predetermined value (here, a value of "2000" corresponding to an 8-second opening period) is set in the special variable timer. The special variable timer is used to measure the control times for various controls during the jackpot state (such as the opening and closing control of variable winning device 32A).

Next, in step SH1007, the winning counter is set to "8," which indicates the maximum number of winning balls per round in a jackpot.

The winning counter counts the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32A. During the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 3-11), the value of the winning counter is determined based on the detection information of the large winning slot count switch 222 to determine whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32A, and is decremented by one if it is determined that a ball has entered the variable winning device 32A.

Then, in step SH1008, an opening command is set to notify the sub-controller 262 that the jackpot state has begun. The opening command includes information such as the type of win, allowing the sub-controller 262 to grasp the total number of rounds in the win state, etc. (The same applies to the opening commands set in the various processes below.)

In the following step SH1009, the value of the normal mode duration counter (ceiling counter) is reset to "0". The normal mode duration counter is a counting means for measuring the duration of "normal mode" (up to 500 variable displays) without the occurrence of a jackpot, and as described below, is incremented by one each time a variable display is executed in "normal mode". In step SH1009, upon the occurrence of a jackpot, the value of the normal mode duration counter that has been incremented up to that point is reset to "0".

In the following step SH1010, the time-saving B mode activation flag (ceiling activation flag) is turned off. Then, this process ends. The time-saving B mode activation flag is determination information used to determine whether or not "time-saving B mode" has already been activated, and is set on when "time-saving B mode" is activated. In step SH1010, when a jackpot state occurs, the time-saving B mode activation flag that was set on is turned off.

If the answer is negative in step SH1001, then in step SH1013, the variable interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable interval (e.g., 1 second).

When the decorative pattern variable display is executed on the effect display device 42, the decorative pattern variable display is basically displayed as a static display at the timing of the static display of the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B, and the statically displayed decorative pattern continues to be displayed until the variable interval ends (until the next variable display on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B begins). Then, when the variable interval ends and the variable display is reserved and stored, the variable display on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B and the variable display on the effect display device 42 begin simultaneously. On the other hand, when the variable interval ends and the variable display is not reserved and stored, the static pattern on the effect display device 42 continues to be displayed for a while, and then the display switches to a standby display for play.

After step SH1013, in step SH1014, it is determined whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the "Time-saving A mode" is in effect.

If step SH1014 returns a positive answer, step SH1015 subtracts 1 from the value of first fluctuation count counter A. First fluctuation count counter A is used to measure the duration of "time-saving A mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until the upper limit is reached).

In this embodiment, after all types of jackpots have ended, a "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 or 10 variable play times is granted, and therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the first variable play counter A is set to "100" or "10."

In the following step SH1016, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0." If the determination in step SH1016 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SH1016 is positive, "11," indicating "normal mode," is set in the mode memory area in step SH1017. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "100" or "10," the "time-saving A mode" ends and the system transitions to "normal mode."

After step SH1017, in step SH1018, a time-saving A mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving A mode"). Then, this process ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step SH1014, step SH1019 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether "Time-saving B mode" is in effect.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH1019, the value of second fluctuation count counter B is decremented by 1 in step SH1020. Second fluctuation count counter B is used to measure the duration of "time-saving B mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until the upper limit is reached).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the "Time-saving B mode" is granted for a maximum of 200 variable play times, so when the "Time-saving B mode" is activated, the second variable play counter B is initially set to "200."

In the following step SH1021, it is determined whether the value of the second variation counter B is "0." If the determination in step SH1021 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SH1021 is positive, "11," indicating "normal mode," is set in the mode memory area in step SH1022. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "200 times," the "time-saving B mode" ends and the system transitions to "normal mode."

After step SH1022, in step SH1023, a time-saving B mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving B mode"), and then this processing ends.

If the answer in step SH1019 is negative, then in step SH1024, it is determined whether "11" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "normal mode." If the answer in step SH1024 is negative, then the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1024 returns a positive answer, step SH1025 increments the value of the normal mode duration counter by 1. Then, step SH1026 determines whether the value of the normal mode duration counter has reached its ceiling value (upper limit).

In this embodiment, the ceiling value is set to 500 times for the variable display, so here we determine whether the value of the normal mode continuation counter is 500 or greater. In other words, we determine whether normal mode has continued for 500 variable display cycles without a jackpot occurring.

If the result of step SH1026 is negative, i.e., if the value of the normal mode continuation counter has not reached the ceiling value (if the number of variable displays is less than 500), this process ends.

If the result of step SH1026 is affirmative, i.e., if the value of the normal mode continuation counter has reached its ceiling value (if the variable display has reached 500 times), then step SH1027 determines whether the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to off.

If the result of step SH1027 is negative, i.e., if "time-saving B mode" has already been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to on, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1027 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the "time-saving B mode" has not yet been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF, step SH1028 sets "31" in the mode storage area, indicating that the mode is the "time-saving B mode." In other words, setting processing is executed to activate the "time-saving B mode."

In the following step SH1029, the upper limit number of times "200" is set for the second fluctuation number counter B, and in step SH1030, a time-saving B mode start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "time-saving B mode," and in step SH1031, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned on. This process then terminates.

Next, the second special display control process (step SH205) of the normal process (see Figure 3-10) will be explained with reference to Figure 3-23. Note that in this embodiment, the second special symbol display device 43B is configured so that the variation interval of the second variable display is not set. Of course, it is also possible to configure it so that the variation interval of the second variable display is set.

First, in step SH1601, it is determined whether the value in the win status storage area is "0," i.e., whether the game is in a state other than a jackpot state. If the determination in step SH1601 is negative, i.e., if the game is in a jackpot state, this processing ends. In this way, in this embodiment, the second variable display is not executed if the game is in a jackpot state.

On the other hand, if step SH1601 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH1603, where it is determined whether the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is being performed on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to on.

If step SH1603 returns a negative result, meaning the game is not in a jackpot state and is not currently displaying the second variable display, proceed to step SH1604 to determine whether the second pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, is greater than 0. If step SH1604 returns a negative result, the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1604 returns a positive answer, step SH1605 subtracts 1 from the second pending counter Nb. The following step SH1606 executes a process to shift the data stored in the second special variable pending area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the second special variable pending area sequentially toward the execution area, with the data in each area shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SH1606, in step SH1607, a subtraction display process is performed on the second hold display device 46B (second hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of one hold number in the second variable display. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right second hold lamps are flashing, the left second hold lamp is kept flashing while the right second hold lamp is turned on; if the left second hold lamp is flashing and the right second hold lamp is lit, both left and right second hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right second hold lamps are lit, the left second hold lamp is kept lit while the right second hold lamp is turned off; and if the left second hold lamp is lit and the right second hold lamp is turned off, both left and right second hold lamps are turned off. After step SH1607, in step SH1608, a second variable display setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

Here, details of the second variable display setting process in step SH1608 will be explained with reference to Figure 3-24.

First, in step SH1701, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is "7," which corresponds to a jackpot. In addition, in step SH1701, it may also be determined whether the second variable display, which corresponds to a jackpot, is being displayed by determining whether the jackpot expected flag for the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set to on.

If step SH1701 returns a positive result, step SH1702 sets the special chart 2 jackpot fluctuation flag, which indicates that the second fluctuation display corresponding to a jackpot is being performed, to ON. The following step SH1703 determines whether the 15R jackpot flag is set to ON in the execution area of the special fluctuation pending area. If step SH1703 returns a positive result, step SH1704 performs 15R jackpot pattern setting processing.

If step SH1703 returns a negative result, step SH1705 determines whether the 8R jackpot flag is set to ON. If step SH1705 returns a positive result, step SH1706 performs 8R jackpot pattern setting processing, and if step SH1705 returns a negative result, step SH1707 performs 4R jackpot pattern setting processing.

As with the first variable display setting process described above, the various pattern setting process is a process for executing variable displays and effect displays corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area on the second special symbol display device 43B and effect display device 42. Here, the variable pattern tables corresponding to various wins are taken into consideration to determine the variable patterns (variable display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) of the second special symbol display device 43B and effect display device 42, and variable pattern commands are set, etc.

In other words, in each pattern setting process related to step SH1704, step SH1706, and step SH1707, if "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area as the second variable time determination table referenced when setting the second variable time, the second normal variable time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. Also, if "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. If "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected.

Then, the selected second variable time determination table is referenced, and the second variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area. The determined second variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable reserve area.

Then, various information including the fact that it is the second variable display, jackpot type information, game mode information, and variable time are set in the variable pattern command.

In this embodiment, the effect display device 42 is configured not to perform reach effects or the like corresponding to the second variable display. However, as described above, the value of the variable selection counter CH3 is stored in each holding area of the second special variable holding area in accordance with the winning history in the second start winning section 33WB. Therefore, the effect display device 42 may be configured to perform reach effects or the like corresponding to the second variable display, just as in the case corresponding to the first variable display. For example, the player may be configured to decide whether or not to perform reach effects or the like.

After step SH1704, step SH1706, or step SH1707, in step SH1710, the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is in progress on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to ON, and in step SH1711, a value corresponding to the second variable time is set for the special symbol 2 display timer, which measures the remaining time of the second variable display. Thereafter, if the jackpot expected flag is set to ON, the jackpot expected flag is set to OFF in step SH1712, and this processing is terminated.

Also, if the result of step SH1701 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "miss," then step SH1712 performs the miss fluctuation pattern setting process (setting the fluctuation pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH1710, SH1711, and SH1712 are carried out, and this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-23, if a positive judgment is made in step SH1603, i.e., if the second variable display is in progress, proceed to step SH1609 and perform the decrement process on the special chart 2 display timer.

Next, the process proceeds to step SH1610, where the value of the special chart 2 display timer after the above subtraction is used to determine whether the specified change time has elapsed. At this time, if the specified change time has elapsed, i.e., the value of the special chart 2 display timer becomes "0," a positive judgment is made in step SH1610.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH1610, a switch display setting is made in step SH1615 to continue the switch display (second variable display) of the second special pattern display device 43B. Based on the settings of the switch display setting, a control signal to perform a switch display is output to the second special pattern display device 43B in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This realizes the switch display (variable display) of the second special pattern display device 43B at the execution timing of the second special display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SH1615, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH1610, the special symbol 2 display flag is turned off in step SH1611, and the special symbol 2 stop display setting is made in step SH1612 to display a stop on the second special symbol display device 43B. Based on the settings of this special symbol 2 stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop is output to the second special symbol display device 43B in the external output processing of the next normal processing. In other words, the second special symbol display device 43B will display a stop corresponding to the various jackpots, losses, etc. set in the second variable display setting processing.

Furthermore, after step SH1612, in step SH1613, a special symbol 2 stop command is set to the sub-control device 262, which causes the effect display device 42 to display a stopped image. This ensures that the stop timing of the second special symbol display device 43B and the effect display device 42 is synchronized.

Next, in step SH1614, the special chart 2 discrimination information setting process is performed to set the initial winning status and switch game modes, and then this process ends.

Here, the special chart 2 determination information setting process in step SH1614 will be explained with reference to Figure 3-25. First, in step SH1801, the execution area of the special variation pending area is referenced to determine whether the special chart 2 jackpot variation flag is set to on.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH1801, the special chart 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SH1802, and the jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot state is in progress (the special chart 2 jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred in the second fluctuation display stored in the second special fluctuation pending area) is turned on in step SH1803.

Furthermore, in step SH1804, the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area are referenced, and a value corresponding to the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set in the round number counter.

For example, if the 15R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter is set to "15". If the 8R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter is set to "8". If the 4R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter is set to "4".

In the following step SH1805, a "1" is set in the win status memory area. Furthermore, in step SH1806, a predetermined value (here, a value of "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds) is set in the special variable timer. Next, in step SH1807, the winning counter is set to "8," indicating the maximum number of winning balls per round, which is eight.

Then, in step SH1808, an opening command is set to notify the sub-controller 262 that the jackpot state has begun.

In the following step SH1809, in response to the occurrence of a jackpot, the value of the normal mode continuation counter that has been incremented up to that point is reset to "0," and in step SH1810, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned off. Then, this processing ends.

If the answer is negative in step SH1801, step SH1814 determines whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "Time-saving A mode."

If the answer is affirmative in step SH1814, the value of the first fluctuation count counter A is decremented by 1 in step SH1815.

In the following step SH1816, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0." If the determination in step SH1816 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SH1816 is positive, "11," indicating "normal mode," is set in the mode memory area in step SH1817. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "100" or "10," the "time-saving A mode" ends and the system transitions to "normal mode."

After step SH1817, in step SH1818, a time-saving A mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving A mode"). Then, this processing ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH1814, step SH1819 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "Time-saving B mode."

If the answer is affirmative in step SH1819, the value of the second fluctuation count counter B is decremented by 1 in step SH1820.

In the following step SH1821, it is determined whether the value of the second variation counter B is "0." If the determination in step SH1821 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SH1821 is positive, "11," indicating "normal mode," is set in the mode memory area in step SH1822. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "200 times," the "time-saving B mode" ends and the system transitions to "normal mode."

After step SH1822, in step SH1823, a time-saving B mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving B mode"), and then this processing ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH1819, step SH1824 determines whether "11" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "normal mode." If a negative determination is made in step SH1824, the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1824 returns a positive answer, step SH1825 increments the value of the normal mode duration counter by 1. Then, step SH1826 determines whether the value of the normal mode duration counter has reached its ceiling value (upper limit).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the ceiling value is set to 500 times for the number of times the variable display is executed, so here, it is determined whether the value of the normal mode continuation counter is 500 or more. In other words, it is determined whether normal mode has continued for 500 times of variable display without a jackpot state occurring.

If the result of step SH1826 is negative, i.e., if the value of the normal mode continuation counter has not reached the ceiling value (if the number of variable displays is less than 500), this process ends.

If step SH1826 returns a positive result, i.e., the value of the normal mode continuation counter has reached its ceiling value (500 variable display times), step SH1827 determines whether the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF.

If the result of step SH1827 is negative, i.e., if "time-saving B mode" has already been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to on, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1827 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the "time-saving B mode" has not yet been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF, step SH1828 sets "31" in the mode storage area, indicating that the mode is the "time-saving B mode." In other words, setting processing is executed to activate the "time-saving B mode."

In the following step SH1829, the upper limit number of times "200" is set for the second fluctuation number counter B, and in step SH1830, a time-saving B mode start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "time-saving B mode," and in step SH1831, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned on. This process then terminates.

Next, the variable winning device control process of step SH207 for opening and closing the variable winning device 32A will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 3-26.

First, in step SH1201, it is determined whether the value set in the hit status memory area is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the state is other than a hit state. If the determination in step SH1201 is affirmative, i.e., if the state is not a hit state, this process ends. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "1" is set in the hit status memory area in the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process or special chart 2 discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, if step SH1201 returns a negative determination, i.e., if the game is in a winning state (if the winning status memory area is set to any of "1" to "3"), the process proceeds to step SH1202, where the value of the special variable timer is decremented by 1. In the following step SH1203, it is determined whether the value of the special variable timer is "0". If step SH1203 returns a positive determination, it is determined in step SH1204 whether "1" is set in the winning status memory area.

If step SH1204 returns a positive result, step SH1205 sets the win status memory area to "2." In the following step SH1206, the special variable timer is set to a value corresponding to the opening time of variable winning device 32A. In this embodiment, the value set is "7500," which corresponds to an opening time of 30 seconds.

After step SH1206, step SH1207 performs an opening process to open the variable winning device 32A, and step SH1208 sets a round command to inform the sub-control device 262 that a round is about to begin. Then, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SH1204, then in step SH1210 it is determined whether or not "3" is set in the win status memory area. As will be described in more detail below, when all rounds in the jackpot state end and the ending period begins, "3" is set in the win status memory area. If a negative determination is made in step SH1210, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, then in step SH1212 the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1. In the following step SH1213 it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0".

If step SH1213 returns a negative result, meaning that there are still rounds to be played (the hit status memory area is set to "2"), the process proceeds to step SH1215, where the hit status memory area is set to "1". Then, in step SH1216, the special variable timer is set to a value of "250", which corresponds to the interval time (1 second).

In the following step SH1217, the winning counter is set to "8". Furthermore, in step SH1218, a closing process is performed to close the variable winning device 32A, and in step SH1219, an interval command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that an interval has begun. Then, this process ends.

Furthermore, if step SH1203 returns a negative judgment, i.e., if there is still time remaining for the variable winning device 32A to remain open or closed (open time or closed time), step SH1225 determines whether the value of the winning counter corresponding to the variable winning device 32A in the current jackpot state is "0." As mentioned above, the winning counter is set to an upper limit of the number of winnings per round (a specified number of "8") at the start of the jackpot state or the start of an interval. The winning counter is then decremented by one each time a game ball enters the variable winning device 32A.

If step SH1225 returns a negative result, the process ends. On the other hand, if step SH1225 returns a positive result, i.e., if the trigger for ending the round arrives before the set period for the round has elapsed, the process proceeds to step SH1212. As a result, if the maximum number of game balls (8 balls) enters variable winning device 32A during a single round, the round will end promptly at that point, even if the maximum opening period (e.g., 30 seconds) has not yet elapsed.

Also, if step SH1213 returns a positive result, i.e., if all rounds in the jackpot state have been played, the process proceeds to step SH1227, where the win status memory area is set to "3." Then, in step SH1228, the special variable timer is set to the value "2500," which corresponds to the ending time (10 seconds).

After step SH1228, in step SH1229, the prize counter is set to "7." Note that when the process of setting the ending from step SH1227 onwards is carried out following a positive determination in step SH1225, the prize counter value is set to "0." If the prize counter value is left at "0" at the start of the ending period, a positive determination will be made abruptly in step SH1225 during the variable prize device control process 4 msec later, preventing the ending period from being completed. For this reason, a temporary value other than "0" ("7" in this example) is entered in the prize counter in step SH1229 to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may also be completed using a different method.

After step SH1229, step SH1230 performs a closing process to close the variable winning device 32A, and then step SH1231 sets an ending command to the sub-control device 262 to inform it that the ending has begun. Then, this process ends.

Also, if step SH1210 returns a positive result, i.e., the ending period has ended and it is time to end the jackpot state, step SH1232 performs the end setting process, and then this process ends.

The termination setting process will now be explained with reference to Figure 3-27. First, in step SH1401, it is determined whether the special chart jackpot flag (either the special chart 1 jackpot flag or the special chart 2 jackpot flag) is set to on. If the determination in step SH1401 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH1401 returns a positive result, step SH1402 stores the value "21" corresponding to "Time-saving A Mode" in the mode storage area. This causes the game to transition to "Time-saving A Mode" after the jackpot state ends.

In the following step SH1403, a time-saving A mode start command is set to the sub-control device 262 to start "time-saving A mode" (transition to "rush stage effect" or "battle stage effect").

In the following step SH1404, the first variable count counter A is set to the upper limit of "100" or "10" for the "Time-saving A mode" corresponding to the jackpot type, and the process proceeds to step SH1405.

In step SH1405, the jackpot flag (special chart 1 jackpot flag or special chart 2 jackpot flag) that is set to ON is turned OFF.

In the following step SH1406, the value "0" is set in the win status memory area, indicating that the state is not a jackpot state. Furthermore, in step SH1407, a jackpot end command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that the jackpot state is ending. Then, this process ends.

Next, the normal display control processing of step SH208 of the normal processing (see Figure 3-10) will be explained with reference to Figure 3-28.

First, in step SH2101, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern interval timer, which measures the remaining time of the interval (normal pattern interval) set after the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41, is "0." If the determination in step SH2101 is negative, i.e., if it is a normal pattern interval, then in step SH2116 the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted, and then this processing ends. In other words, for example, if the normal pattern interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the normal pattern interval timer is set to "249" (or "250" if step SH2116 is configured to be performed before step SH2101), then in this processing the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and after 1 second it becomes "0."

On the other hand, if step SH2101 returns a positive result, i.e., if it is not the normal interval period, step SH2102 determines whether the support period flag, which indicates that the second start winning section 33WB (blade member 33WBb) is currently being controlled to open and close, is set to on. If step SH2102 returns a positive result, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2102, a judgment is made in step SH2103 as to whether the normal pattern display flag, which indicates whether a changing display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41, is on. Furthermore, if the normal pattern display flag is on, it is considered that a changing display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH2103, the process proceeds to step SH2104, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nd is greater than 0. If a negative judgment is made in step SH2104, i.e., if no variable display is held on the normal pattern display device 41, the process ends. Note that, for example, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2104, the normal pattern display device 41 may perform a standby display setting to derive a display mode corresponding to a variable standby state in which no variable display is being performed. In other words, after the variable display stops, the normal pattern display device 41 will maintain its stopped mode (in a mode indicating the result of the start-going ball support lottery) for the normal pattern interval period, but may be configured to switch to a display mode indicating a variable standby state when the normal pattern interval period ends.

On the other hand, if step SH2104 returns a positive answer, step SH2105 subtracts 1 from the normal hold counter Nd. The following step SH2106 executes a process to shift the data stored in the normal variable hold area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in hold areas 1 to 4 of the normal variable hold area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area shifted in the following order: hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Then, in step SH2107, a normal pattern variation setting process is executed to set and start the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41.

The normal symbol variation setting process will now be explained with reference to Figure 3-29. First, in step SH2301, the normal symbol display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol display device 41 is currently displaying a varying normal symbol, is set to ON. In the following step SH2302, the win status memory area is referenced to determine whether "0" is stored, i.e., whether the current state is other than a jackpot state. If step SH2302 returns a positive determination, i.e., if the current state is not a jackpot state, then in step SH2303, it is determined whether a value of "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current state is a high ball entry state (time-saving A mode or time-saving B mode).

If step SH2303 returns a positive result, step SH2304 sets the normal symbol display timer to "100" to set the normal symbol variable display time to 0.4 seconds. The normal symbol display timer is used to measure the variable display time (remaining time) performed by the normal symbol display device 41.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2302 or step SH2303, that is, if a jackpot state or a high ball entry state is not reached, then in step SH2307, the normal symbol display timer is set to "1500" to set the normal symbol variable display time to 6 seconds.

Then, in step SH2305, it is determined whether the normal symbol random number counter CH4 in the execution area of the normal variable pending area is equal to the winning value (0, 1 in the case of a low ball entry state, or 0-27 in the case of a high ball entry state). If the determination in step SH2305 is negative, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH2305 returns a positive result, i.e., if the start-goal-entry support lottery to determine whether or not the second start-goal-entry section 33WB will be opened is won, then in step SH2306, the start-goal-entry support flag, indicating that the start-goal-entry support lottery has been won, is set to ON. After step SH2306, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-28, after step SH2107, in step SH2108, a subtraction display process is performed on the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the reduction of the hold number in the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are flashing, the left normal hold lamp is kept flashing while the right normal hold lamp is lit; if the left normal hold lamp is flashing and the right normal hold lamp is lit, both left and right normal hold lamps are lit; if both left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp is kept lit while the right normal hold lamp is turned off; and if the left normal hold lamp is lit and the right normal hold lamp is turned off, both left and right normal hold lamps are turned off. After step SH2108, this process ends.

Also, if a positive judgment is made in step SH2103, i.e., if the normal pattern display device 41 is displaying a changing pattern, the process proceeds to step SH2109, where a process is performed to decrement the normal pattern display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal pattern display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the program proceeds to step SH2110, where it determines whether the count value of the normal symbol display timer is "0," i.e., whether the variable time has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step SH2110, the normal symbol display flag is turned off in step SH2111, and a normal symbol stop display setting is made in step SH2112 to display a stop on the normal symbol display device 41. In other words, if the start-goal-entry support lottery is won (the goal-entry support flag is set on), both of the pair of normal symbol lamps on the left and right of the normal symbol display device 41 are lit, and if the result is a loss, only the left normal symbol lamp is lit.

Next, proceed to step SH2113 and perform the general map discrimination information setting process. The general map discrimination information setting process is explained here with reference to Figure 3-30.

First, in step SH2401, it is determined whether the above-mentioned goal-winning support flag is set to ON. If the result of step SH2401 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SH2401 is YES, in step SH2402, the normal variable flag is set to ON to determine whether the second start-up winning section 33WB is in the open state.

The following step SH2403 determines whether "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the high ball entry state (time-saving A mode or time-saving B mode) is in effect. If a positive determination is made in step SH2403, then in step SH2404, the normal variable timer is set to "450" to set the opening time of the second start winning section 33WB to 1.8 seconds. The normal variable timer is used to measure the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning section 33WB.

Furthermore, in step SH2405, the opening count counter is set to "2" to open the second start winning section 33WB twice. The opening count counter counts the number of times (remaining times) that the second start winning section 33WB is to be opened.

On the other hand, if step SH2403 returns a negative result, i.e., if the mode is not "Time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)" or "Time-saving B mode (high ball entry state)," then in step SH2406, the normal variable timer is set to "50" to set the opening time of the second start winning section 33WB to 0.2 seconds. In the following step SH2407, the opening count counter is set to "2" to open the second start winning section 33WB twice.

After step SH2405 or step SH2407, in step SH2408, the above-mentioned winning support flag is turned off, and in step SH2409, the above-mentioned support period flag is turned on. Furthermore, in step SH2410, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state, and then this processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-28, after step SH2113, in step SH2114, the normal interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the normal interval period (e.g., 1 second), and then this processing ends.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2110, a switching display setting is made in step SH2115 to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 (a switching display in which a pair of normal symbol lamps on the left and right are alternately lit). Furthermore, based on the settings of the switching display setting, a control signal to perform a switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This realizes the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 at the timing of the normal display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SH2115, this processing ends.

Next, the start-up prize section control processing of step SH209 of the normal processing (see Figure 3-10) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 3-31.

First, in step SH2201, it is determined whether the support period flag is on. If the determination in step SH2201 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SH2201 is positive, the value of the normal variable timer is decremented by 1 in step SH2202.

The next step, SH2203, determines whether the value of the normal variable timer is "0." If the result of step SH2203 is negative, meaning that the second start winning section 33WB is still in the open or closed state, the start winning section control process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH2203 returns a positive result, step SH2204 determines whether the normal variable flag is on. If step SH2204 returns a positive result, i.e., if the second start winning section 33WB is currently in the open state and the time has come to change it to the closed state, step SH2205 turns the normal variable flag off. In the following step SH2206, the value of the opening count counter is decremented by 1, and in step SH2207, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the closed state.

Then, in step SH2208, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter is "0." If the determination in step SH2208 is affirmative, in step SH2209, the support period flag is turned off, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH2208 returns a negative result, i.e., if there are remaining times among the multiple times the second start winning section 33WB has been opened, step SH2210 sets the normal variable timer to a value equivalent to the interval time (e.g., "250"), and then this process ends.

Furthermore, if step SH2204 returns a negative judgment, i.e., if the second start winning section 33WB is in an interval period between multiple openings (the second start winning section 33WB is in a closed state) and the timing to end the interval period has arrived, step SH2211 sets the normal variable flag to ON. Furthermore, step SH2212 determines whether "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area. If step SH2212 returns a positive judgment, step SH2213 sets the normal variable timer to a value of "450," which corresponds to an opening time of 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, if step SH2212 returns a negative judgment, step SH2214 sets the normal variable timer to a value of "50," which corresponds to an opening time of 0.2 seconds.

After step SH2213 or step SH2214, in step SH2215, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state. Then, this processing ends. Note that if the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state and a specified number of game balls (for example, four) enter the second start winning section 33WB, the second start winning section 33WB may be configured to immediately close.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, if a game ball passes through the through gate 34 during a special symbol variable play (either the first variable display or the second variable display), the opening control of the second start winning section 33WB (pair of blade members 33WBb) can be executed regardless of whether a special symbol variable play is being executed or not.

Next, we will explain the dispensing control executed by the CPU 511 in the dispensing control device 311. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the reception interrupt processing with reference to Figure 3-32, and then explain the main processing with reference to Figure 3-33.

Figure 3-32 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing executed by the dispensing control device 311. The reception interrupt processing is a process that is executed by interrupting when the dispensing control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261. When the dispensing control device 311 confirms that the command sent from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 within the dispensing control device 311 is temporarily put on hold, and the reception interrupt processing is executed.

When the receive interrupt process is executed, first in step SH3001, the command sent from the main control unit 261 is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513, and in step SH3002, the command receive flag is turned on to record that a command has been sent from the main control unit 261, and this receive interrupt process ends. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a specified storage area, and the storage pointer is updated so that the next received command can be stored in the next storage area.

In this embodiment, the reception process for a command sent from the main control unit 261 is performed by interrupt processing that is executed when the command is received. However, for example, in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 3-34, it may be possible to check whether a command has been received before the command determination process (step SH3201) is performed, and if a command has been received, store the command in the command buffer in RAM 513 and turn on the command reception flag, or proceed to command determination processing if a command has not been received. In such a case, it is possible to check the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals to check whether a command has been received.

Next, the main processing of the dispensing control device 311 will be explained with reference to Figure 3-33. Figure 3-33 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device 311, which is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SH3101, initial setting processing is performed when power is turned on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SH3103, RAM access is permitted and in step SH3104 an external interrupt vector is set.

Then, in step SH3106, it is determined whether power outage information has been set in backup area 513a of RAM 513. If power outage information has been set in backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SH3107, and in the following step SH3108, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, i.e., the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether keywords written in a specified area of RAM 513 have been saved correctly.

If power outage information is not set in step SH3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step SH3108, the process proceeds to RAM 513 initialization processing from step SH3115 onwards.

In step SH3115, all areas of RAM 513 are cleared to 0, and in step SH3116, the initial values of RAM 513 are set. Then, in step SH3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SH3114 to enable interrupts.

On the other hand, if power outage information has been set in step SH3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SH3108, processing upon power recovery (processing upon recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, the stack pointer before the power outage is restored in step SH3109, the power outage information is cleared in step SH3110, and the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared in step SH3111. Also, in step SH3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SH3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SH3114, interrupts are permitted.

After interrupts are permitted in step SH3114, the process in step SH3122 determines whether power failure information has been set in backup area 513a. If power failure information has been set, it means that power has been cut off, and the processes in steps SH3123 and after are performed as power failure processing in the event of a power failure. Power failure processing begins with prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing in step SH3123, followed by the command determination process described below in the next step SH3124. Subsequently, in step SH3125, the contents of each register used by CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step SH3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in backup area 513a, in step SH3127 a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in backup area 513a, and in step SH3128 RAM access is prohibited, continuing the infinite loop until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, the checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in RAM 513.

In addition, since the processing of step SH3122 checks for information about the occurrence of a power outage after the processing performed when the power is turned on is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513 is smaller than when each processing is in progress, and storage is easier. Also, when returning to the state before the power was turned off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so restoration is easy, and the processing burden on the dispensing control device 311 can be reduced.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing of the dispensing control device 311 with reference to the flowchart in Figure 3-34. This timer interrupt processing is initiated periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment).

The timer interrupt process first obtains a command from the main control unit 261 and performs a command discrimination process (step SH3201). This command discrimination process is explained below with reference to Figure 3-35.

Figure 3-35 is a flowchart showing the command discrimination process performed by the dispensing control device 311. In the command discrimination process (steps SH3124, SH3201), it is first determined in step SH3301 whether the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process described above (see Figure 3-32).

If it is determined in step SH3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control unit 261, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step SH3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from RAM 513 in step SH3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SH3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SH3303, the processing of steps SH3302 to SH3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control of the dispensing control unit 311.

The type of command read from RAM 513 is determined in steps SH3304 to SH3306. In step SH3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, in step SH3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step SH3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, step SH3307 determines whether the payout permission flag is already on. If the payout permission flag is off, this means that the main control unit 261 instructed RAM 513 to be initialized when the power was turned on, so step SH3308 clears the working area (area) other than the stack area of RAM 513 to 0, and step SH3309 sets the initial value of RAM 513. Then, step SH3311 turns on the payout permission flag, and permission to pay out prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control unit 261 initializes RAM 503 after sending the payout initialization command, and the payout control unit 311 initializes RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which RAM 503 and RAM 513 are initialized is approximately the same. Therefore, even if the payout control unit 311 receives a command sent from the main control unit 261 due to a difference in initialization timing, it is possible to prevent problems such as RAM 513 being initialized and not being able to perform control corresponding to the received command. Furthermore, since the payout permission flag is turned on after RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already on in step SH3307, the command discrimination process ends without clearing the working area of RAM 513 or initializing RAM 513. In other words, step SH3307 prohibits RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Note that the payout initialization command is only sent if the RAM clear switch 323 is on when the power is turned on, so it is not received while the payout permission flag is on. In such a case, it is possible that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to noise or other factors. Therefore, if the working area of RAM 513 is cleared (step SH3308) and the initial value of RAM 513 is set (step SH3309) while the payout permission flag is on, problems such as the failure to pay out remaining balls could occur, resulting in losses to the player. However, by preventing RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, losses to the player can be prevented.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout restoration command (step SH3304: NO, step SH3305: YES), the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 will return to the state they were in before the power was cut off, and the payout permission flag is turned on in step SH3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. In other words, if there is information that a power outage has occurred and the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 have returned to the state they were in before the power was cut off, the payout of prize balls will be permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step SH3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer has ended, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a prize ball command (step SH3305: NO, step SH3306: YES), in step SH3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored, and in step SH3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control unit 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a specified buffer area and stores it. Since prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command sent from the main control unit 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of prize balls. Furthermore, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, allowing prize balls to be paid out early in response to a win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in step SH3311, processing based on the command stored in the specified memory area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step SH3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step SH3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step SH3306: NO), the command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Now, let's return to the flowchart in Figure 3-34. Once the command determination process is complete, in step SH3202, it is determined whether a CR unit connection signal indicating electrical connection with the CR unit has been received from the CR unit connection board 314. If a positive determination is made in step SH3202, in step SH3203, a CR unit connection signal indicating electrical connection with the CR unit is sent to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply and launch control device 310.

After step SH3203, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH3202, step SH3204 determines whether the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command judgment process. If the payout permission flag has not been turned on, this process is terminated. In other words, it is possible to prevent prize balls from being paid out before a command is sent from the main control unit 261.

On the other hand, if step SH3204 returns a positive result, step SH3205 checks the status return switch 321, and if it determines that the status return operation should begin, the status return operation is executed. With this process, if the status return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor will rotate forward and reverse, clearing the ball jam (returning to normal operation).

Then, in step SH3206, the lower tray 15 is set to full or the lower tray full/unfull state is set according to changes in its state. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal from the full detection switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray full/unfull state is set. Also, in step SH3207, the tank bulb is set to no (out of bulb) or the tank bulb is unfull state (bulb present) according to changes in its state. That is, the tank bulb is set to no (out of bulb) based on the detection signal from the tank bulb switch, and when the tank bulb is no longer empty, the tank bulb is set to no (out of bulb) state.

Then, in step SH3208, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be reported, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be reported, it is reported.

Next, the payout control process for prize balls and loan balls is executed. In detail, the payout number setting process is performed in step SH3209, the motor control status acquisition process is performed in step SH3210, and the motor drive process is performed in step SH3211.

In step SH3212, the state return switch 321 is checked to ensure that the ball removal is not impossible and that the ball removal operation has not started, and the payout motor is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the following step SH3213, the vibrator is controlled (vibration motor control) on the condition that the ball is jammed. Then, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be explained with reference to Figure 3-36. First, in step SH3900, the process of reading various operation detection switches is executed. That is, the status of the various operation detection switches connected to the sub-controller 262 (the operation detection switches related to the effect button 125 and the up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d, and center button 126e of the directional pad 126) is read, and the status of these switches is determined and the operation detection information is saved in a specified area of RAM 553. On the other hand, if there is no operation detection information, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

In step SH3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, in step SH3902, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. The command buffer of RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261.

The ring buffer has a specified storage area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of that storage area. When commands have been stored in the entire storage area, the storage area returns to the beginning and the commands are updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on these pointers.

In the following step SH3903, a pending information storage process is performed to store the information of the advance command output from the main control unit 261 in a pending information storage area provided in RAM 553 of the sub-control unit 262. As described above, the advance command includes information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, information indicating whether the variable information corresponds to a jackpot, information indicating the type of win, information indicating the type of reach, game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the variable display, and information indicating the variable time.

The pending information storage area of the sub-controller 262 includes a first pending information storage area and a second pending information storage area, each of which has four pending areas (pending areas 1 to 4), as well as one execution area, similar to the special variable pending area of the main controller 261 (a first special variable pending area and a second special variable pending area, each of which has four pending areas, and one execution area).

The first pending information storage area stores information (variation information) related to the variable display, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, reach pattern, game mode information, and the variable display time, in chronological order, in accordance with the reception history of advance commands based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area).

The second pending information storage area stores information (variation information) related to the variable display, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and the variable display time, in chronological order, in accordance with the reception history of advance commands based on the second variable display (information stored in the second special variable pending area).

By adopting this configuration, it is possible to reserve and store change information regarding the first change display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, and change information regarding the second change display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB. As a result, the sub-controller 262 is able to grasp not only the execution area of the special change reserve area of the main controller 261, but also the change information stored in each reserve area of the first special change reserve area and the second special change reserve area.

The pending information storage process will now be explained with reference to Figure 3-39. First, in step SH4101, it is determined whether or not the first command for the first variable display has been received (whether or not the first command for the first variable display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

If a positive judgment is made in step SH4101, in step SH4102, the first variable hold counter NSa, which counts the number of variable information items held and stored in the first hold information storage area, is incremented by one.

In the following step SH4103, the information contained in the initial command, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the reach pattern, the game mode information, and the first variable time information, is stored in the first available reserved area in the first reserved information storage area.

Furthermore, in the following step SH4104, a preview information storage process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, there are cases where related display effects are intentionally derived from multiple consecutive variable displays (so-called "continuous previews" are performed). Here, it is first determined whether the advance performance execution flag described below, which is provided in the above-mentioned user-related area of RAM 553, is set to on. If the advance performance execution flag is set to on, the value of the consecutive preview counter, which determines whether or not to perform consecutive previews, and the value of the preview type counter, which determines the type of consecutive preview, are obtained, and these counter values are stored in the holding area of the first pending information storage area where the variable information was newly stored in the above-mentioned step SH4103.

The continuous warning counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 49, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 49). The continuous warning counter is periodically updated, and each time, the value of the continuous warning counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous warning counter buffer).

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 9, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 9). The notice type counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

As described above, when the advance performance execution flag in the user-related area is set to ON, when variable information is stored in the pending information storage area during the preview information storage process, the values of the consecutive preview counter and the preview type counter stored in the consecutive preview counter buffer and the preview type counter buffer are obtained. Furthermore, each pending area and execution area in the pending information storage area is provided with a consecutive preview flag that is turned ON when it is determined that a consecutive preview will be derived.

In addition, in this embodiment, ROM 552 is provided with a prediction accuracy determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether to make consecutive predictions, and a prediction table that is taken into consideration when determining the type of consecutive predictions. Multiple prediction accuracy determination tables and prediction tables are provided, and the prediction accuracy determination table and prediction table to be taken into consideration are selected depending on the variable information.

After step SH4104, in step SH4105, if the advance performance execution flag for the user-associated area is set to on, a continuous preview lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview. The continuous preview lottery process in step SH4105 checks whether or not there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag already set to on. If it is not confirmed that there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag set, and if only variable information corresponding to a complete miss (a miss that does not result in a reach state) is stored in the first reserved area, a continuous preview lottery is performed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag set, a continuous preview lottery is not performed.

In the continuous preview lottery process of step SH4105, if the value of the first variable pending counter NSa is "2" or greater, the system references the preview win/loss determination table corresponding to each jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (those corresponding to jackpots are more likely to win than those corresponding to misses) based on the value of the continuous preview counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a continuous preview, the system references the preview table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode based on the value of the preview type counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area to determine the type of continuous preview. In addition, the continuous preview flag is turned on for all pending areas in the first pending information storage area where variable information is stored. However, the continuous preview flag for the execution area is not turned on.

After step SH4105, in step SH4106, a hold icon setting process is performed to additionally display one hold icon indicating that the first variable display is held and stored on the performance display device 42. Here, setting processes are performed to output to the display control device 45 a display control command to additionally set drawing information for drawing the hold icon to the display data table (or additional data table).

As a result, as will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, a hold icon H461 (see Figure 3-44, etc.) resembling a "lifebuoy" is displayed on the effect display device 42. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the hold icon corresponding to the second variable display is not displayed. Furthermore, as will be described below, in this embodiment, the type of hold icon can be customized to suit the player's preferences, to a hold icon with a different design from the hold icon H461 resembling a "lifebuoy."

The hold icon H461 may also be derived in a manner that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot for the corresponding first variable display. Hereinafter, this manner of hold icon H461 is also referred to as the "preview hold icon H463." In this embodiment, the preview hold icon H463 (see Figure 3-44, etc.) is derived in a manner in which a character (in this embodiment, a whale character) is using a life jacket. Furthermore, multiple types of characters for the preview hold icon H463 (e.g., multiple types of whale characters with different colors) are provided, and the pattern of the preview hold icon H463 is associated with the likelihood of winning (jackpot expectation) for a jackpot state to occur. As a result, the preview hold icon H463 is ranked in terms of jackpot expectation depending on its appearance, and by deriving the preview hold icon H463, the likelihood of a jackpot is suggested (a preview hold preview performance is performed). Although not specifically mentioned in this embodiment, the character of the pre-reading hold icon H463 (a whale character by default) may also be configured to be customizable by the player (for example, to a penguin character).

In addition, when a pre-reading hold icon H463 is derived, the pattern of the pre-reading hold icon H463 may change (a hold change effect may be derived) before the first variable display corresponding to the pre-reading hold icon H463 is consumed. In other words, in the hold icon setting process of step SH4106, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to derive the pre-reading hold icon H463. If the result is a non-win, the pattern of the hold icon H461 is determined to be the default (only a lifebuoy). On the other hand, if the result is a win, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a hold change effect. If the result is a win, the hold change flag for the corresponding hold area is set to on, and the pre-reading hold icon H463 is determined to have two patterns: an upper limit pattern that may ultimately be displayed, and a provisional pattern that has a lower probability of winning (lower rank) than the upper limit pattern and is initially displayed. Note that the provisional pattern may be configured to initially include an option to only display the default hold icon H461. On the other hand, if the result is a non-win, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the pre-reading hold icon H463.

Then, basically, the process is performed such that the hold icon H461 of the determined pattern is displayed to the right of the rightmost hold icon H461 displayed in the hold display area HW3 of the effect display device 42. Also, in this embodiment, in step SH4106, if the pre-read hold icon H463 is derived in the hold display area HW3, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is set to ON.

After step SH4106, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4101, in step SH4107, it is determined whether or not a prior command for the second variable display has been received (whether or not the prior command for the second variable display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

If a positive judgment is made in step SH4107, in step SH4108, the second variable pending counter NSb, which counts the number of second variable information items pending and stored in the second pending information storage area, is incremented by 1.

Then, in step SH4109, information included in the initial command, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, information about the jackpot type, game mode information, and information about the second variable time, is stored in the first available reserved area in the second reserved information storage area. After step SH4109, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4107, this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-36, after step SH3903 or if a negative judgment is made in step SH3901, the process proceeds to step SH3904, where it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has passed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SH3905; on the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step SH3914.

In step SH3905, various counters are updated. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in Figure 3-37, it uses the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO and the top, middle, and bottom symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, which are used to set the losing symbols in the top, middle, and bottom symbol display areas. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured so that the register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, resulting in randomly changing values. The values of these counters are stored appropriately in the counter buffer in RAM 553.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (jackpot symbol) that will be displayed in a stopped state on the effect display device 42 when a jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, nine counter values (0 to 8) are provided for the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. In other words, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 8, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 8).

When a variable pattern command corresponding to a jackpot is received from the main control unit 261, the jackpot symbol combination is determined based on a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols. For example, if the counter value is 0, it will be "1" (double number), and if it is 1, it will be "2" (double number).

This jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated by the counter update process of step SH3905, and is read from the counter buffer in RAM 553 when the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command, as described below. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer in RAM 553, but it is also possible to refer to the counter value when a variation pattern command is received, rather than storing it in a buffer.

The top, middle, and bottom pattern counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of symbols that will stop in the top, middle, and bottom pattern display areas when the lottery results in a loss. Since each column displays one of nine decorative symbols, nine counter values (0-8) are prepared for each. The top pattern counter CL determines the symbol that will stop in the top pattern display area, the middle pattern counter CM determines the symbol that will stop in the middle pattern display area, and the bottom pattern counter CR determines the symbol that will stop in the bottom pattern display area.

In this embodiment, the values of each counter CL, CM, CR are randomly updated using the value of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR are stored in either the front or rear miss reach symbol buffer, the front or rear non-miss reach symbol buffer, or the complete miss symbol buffer in RAM 553.

Here, the update process for each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR will be explained in detail. As shown in Figure 3-38, step SH4001 determines whether it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL, and step SH4002 determines whether it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. Note that the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in each update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR was updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment will be made in step SH4001. Also, if the upper symbol counter CL was updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment will be made in step SH4002. Then, if it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (step SH4001 is YES), proceed to step SH4003 and update the upper symbol counter CL. Furthermore, if it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM (step SH4002 is YES), proceed to step SH4004 and update the middle symbol counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (steps SH4001 and SH4002 are both NO), proceed to step SH4005 and update the lower symbol counter CR. When updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SH4003 to SH4005, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted, and the result of this calculation becomes the current value of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above CL, CM, and CR update process, the top, middle, and bottom symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in a single update process, and the update times for each counter value do not overlap. This means that one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every three times the update process is performed.

Then, in step SH4006, it is determined whether the updated combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a winning symbol combination (a jackpot symbol combination in which the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same as the symbol in the center symbol display area). If a positive determination is made in step SH4006, the process ends without storing the symbol counter combination CL, CM, and CR in RAM 553.

On the other hand, if step SH4006 returns a negative result, step SH4007 determines whether the updated combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a reach symbol combination (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same, and the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are different from the symbol in the center symbol display area). If it is a reach symbol combination (YES in step SH4007), step SH4008 determines whether the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a front-to-back miss symbol combination (a front-to-back miss reach). If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a front-to-back miss symbol combination (YES in step SH4008), step SH4009 is executed, where the current combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the front-to-back miss reach symbol buffer in RAM 553, and this process ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than a front or rear miss (a reach other than a front or rear miss) (step SH4008 is NO), proceed to step SH4010, store the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time in the reach pattern buffer other than a front or rear miss in RAM 553, and end this process.

Also, if the combination is other than a reach pattern (NO in step SH4007), the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of a losing pattern (complete losing pattern), so in step SH4011, the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the complete losing pattern buffer in RAM 553, and this process ends.

Note that the counters updated in the counter update process of step SH3905 above are not limited to the symbol counters CO, CL, CM, and CR. For example, the counter update process of step SH3905 above also updates various counters used by the sub-control device 262 when determining various presentation modes, such as the reach presentation selection counter described below.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-36, in step SH3906, the hold process is performed. The hold process is explained below with reference to Figure 3-40.

First, in step SH4201, it is determined whether a variation pattern command for the first variation display has been received (whether the variation pattern command for the first variation display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). If a positive determination is made in step SH4201, the value of the first variation pending counter NSa is decremented by 1 in the processing of step SH4202.

The next step, SH4203, executes a process to shift the data stored in the first pending information storage area. This data shift process shifts the data (including the consecutive preview flag) stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the first pending information storage area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SH4203, in step SH4204, a preview setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect to be used for the continuous preview. The preview setting process in step SH4204 determines whether the continuous preview flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area (see the continuous preview lottery process in step SH4105) is on. If the determination is negative, no continuous preview will be performed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is positive, the process determines whether or not there is a jackpot, and if there is a jackpot, what the type is, and if there is not a jackpot, what the reach pattern is, what the game mode is, etc. based on the variation information in the variation pattern command, and determines the type of continuous preview by referencing the corresponding tables. The continuous preview of the type determined here will be derived at the desired timing when the corresponding variable display is performed.

After step SH4204, in step SH4205, a hold icon shift process is performed to shift the hold icon H461 displayed on the performance display device 42. Each hold area and execution area in the hold information storage area is provided with a hold icon storage area that stores the type of hold icon H461, and information related to the hold icon H461 is also shifted by the data shift process in the hold information storage area described above.

The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon H461 in accordance with the data shift (a process for changing the drawing information related to the hold icon in the display data table), and in the performance display device 42, each time one first variable display is consumed (executed), the hold icon H461 located at the far left is erased, and the hold icon H461 located to the right of it is shifted one position to the left (the display location moves).

In this embodiment, in step SH4205, prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon H461, if there is a hold area where the hold change flag is set to on, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a hold change effect on the pre-read hold icon H463, and if the lottery is won, the pattern of the pre-read hold icon H463 is changed to a higher rank (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern will not be exceeded). In addition, if it is determined that there is no hold area where the hold change flag is set to on, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is turned off. Furthermore, if the pattern of the pre-read hold icon H463 is changed so that the pre-read hold icon H463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is turned off and the hold change flag is turned off.

After step SH4205, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4201, in step SH4206, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command for the second fluctuation display has been received (whether or not a fluctuation pattern command for the second fluctuation display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

On the other hand, if step SH4206 returns a positive answer, step SH4207 decrements the value of the second variable pending counter NSb by 1. In the following step SH4208, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the second pending information storage area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the second pending information storage area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area being shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3. After step SH4208, or if step SH4206 returns a negative answer, this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-36, step SH3907 performs effect display setting processing. Here, various calculation processes, such as generating display commands to be output to the display control device 45, and command output settings are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. In other words, this is where the display format to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, the sub-control device 262 references the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, and stopping pattern, and determines the display pattern for the decorative pattern variation display, etc. Then, it performs control such as outputting the determined information to the display control device 45 as a display command.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to commands from the sub-control device 262, and begins displaying the changing decorative patterns on the effect display device 42. Once a change pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 and display control device 45 cooperate to continue displaying the changing decorative patterns (change in effect display) until the specified change time period corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed.

Furthermore, when starting the effect change display corresponding to the first change display, if the continuous preview flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area is on, the table corresponding to each situation is referenced based on the variation information of the variation pattern command to determine the type of continuous preview to be derived in the effect change display corresponding to the first change display, determine the derivation of a preview effect other than the continuous preview (for example, a school of fish effect), or perform a display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125, etc. Furthermore, the effect display setting process of step SH3907 also performs processing to control the effects during a jackpot (win display processing).

Here, the variable display setting process performed in the effect display setting process of step SH3907 will be explained with reference to Figure 3-42.

The effect display device 42 of this embodiment basically displays a first effect change display (first change-compatible effect display) corresponding to the first change display of the first special pattern display device 43A, and a second effect change display (second change-compatible effect display) corresponding to the second change display of the second special pattern display device 43B.

First, in step SH4501, it is determined whether a variation pattern command corresponding to the second variation display (hereinafter referred to as the "second variation pattern command") has been received.

For example, the second fluctuation reception flag may be turned on when processing corresponding to the reception of the second fluctuation pattern command is performed during the hold processing (see Figure 3-40), and the second fluctuation reception flag may be turned off when a positive judgment is made in step SH4501. In step SH4501, the second fluctuation reception flag may be checked to determine whether or not the second fluctuation pattern command has been received. Furthermore, the various fluctuation information included in the second fluctuation pattern command may be stored in the execution area of the corresponding hold information storage area, or may be stored in a separate storage area.

If step SH4501 returns a negative result, the process proceeds to step SH4508. On the other hand, if step SH4501 returns a positive result, step SH4503 determines whether "21" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (starting time of fluctuation) game mode is "Time-saving A mode."

If step SH4503 returns a positive judgment, step SH4504 performs a time-saving A second effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (pattern of the second effect variation display) for the "time-saving A mode" based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and second variation time), and then proceeds to step SH4508. The time-saving A second effect variation display setting process performs display setting processes (such as setting processes for outputting display control commands to the display control device 45 to select display data tables for the corresponding variation display) corresponding to the "rush stage presentation" and "battle stage presentation" related to the "time-saving A mode" shown in Figures 3-46 and 3-47.

If step SH4503 returns a negative result, step SH4505 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (at the start of the change) game mode is "Time-saving B mode."

If step SH4505 returns a positive judgment, step SH4506 performs a time-saving B second effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (pattern of the second effect variation display) for the "time-saving B mode" based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and second variation time), and then proceeds to step SH4508. The time-saving B second effect variation display setting process performs display setting processing corresponding to the "Lucky Stage Presentation" shown in Figure 3-48 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display).

If step SH4505 returns a negative judgment, step SH4507 performs a normal second effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern for "normal mode" (a pattern for the second effect variation display) based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and second variation time), and then proceeds to step SH4508. In the normal second effect variation display setting process, display setting processing corresponding to the "normal stage presentation" shown in Figure 3-44 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display) is performed.

In step SH4508, it is determined whether a variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display (hereinafter referred to as the "first variation pattern command") has been received.

For example, the first fluctuation reception flag may be turned on when processing corresponding to the reception of the first fluctuation pattern command is performed during the hold processing (see Figure 3-40), and if a positive judgment is made in step SH4508, the first fluctuation reception flag may be turned off. In step SH4508, the first fluctuation reception flag may be checked to determine whether or not the first fluctuation pattern command has been received. Furthermore, the various fluctuation information included in the first fluctuation pattern command may be stored in the execution area of the corresponding hold information storage area, or may be stored in a separate storage area.

If step SH4508 returns a negative result, the process ends. On the other hand, if step SH4508 returns a positive result, step SH4509 determines whether "21" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current game mode (at the start of the change) is "Time-saving A mode."

If step SH4509 returns a positive judgment, step SH4510 performs a time-saving A first effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (first effect variation display pattern) for the "time-saving A mode" based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time), and then terminates this process. The time-saving A first effect variation display setting process performs display setting processes (such as setting processes for outputting display control commands to the display control device 45 to select display data tables for the corresponding variation displays) corresponding to the "rush stage presentation" and "battle stage presentation" related to the "time-saving A mode" shown in Figures 3-46 and 3-47.

If step SH4509 returns a negative result, step SH4511 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (at the start of the change) game mode is "Time-saving B mode."

If step SH4511 returns a positive judgment, step SH4512 performs a time-saving B first effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (first effect variation display pattern) for "time-saving B mode" based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time), and then terminates this process. The time-saving B first effect variation display setting process performs display setting processing corresponding to the "Lucky Stage Presentation" shown in Figure 3-48 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display).

If step SH4511 returns a negative result, step SH4513 performs a normal first effect variation display setting process to set a "normal mode" effect pattern (first effect variation display pattern) based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time), and then terminates this process. In the normal first effect variation display setting process, display setting processing corresponding to the "normal stage effect" shown in Figure 3-44 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display) is performed.

Next, the winning display processing performed in the effect display setting processing of step SH3907 will be explained with reference to Figure 3-41.

First, in step SH4700, it is determined whether an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot state has been received from the main control unit 261. If a positive determination is made in step SH4700, in step SH4701, a round count counter for counting the number of remaining rounds is set to "15" if the jackpot is a "15R jackpot," "8" if the jackpot is an "8R jackpot," and "4" if the jackpot is a "4R jackpot," based on the jackpot type information contained in the opening command.

Then, in step SH4702, the opening effect (jackpot start effect) as shown in FIG. 3-45 is set, and then this processing ends. The opening effect setting process involves, for example, setting the output of a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the jackpot opening effect. This includes, for example, setting the output of specified image data for the effect display device 42, setting the output of specified audio data for the speaker SP, and setting the lighting modes for the various electric lights 102-104. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effect modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding effect is selected by referring to this table and executed.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH4700, a determination is made in step SH4705 as to whether a round command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4705, the effects to be performed during the round are set in step SH4706, and then this processing ends.

When setting various effects during the variable display or jackpot state (e.g., during opening, round, interval, or ending), the sub-control device 262 sets the effects while taking into consideration various information previously stored in user-related areas of RAM 553 (e.g., language setting area, brightness level setting area, volume level setting area, and effect customization information storage area). Alternatively or additionally, when a predetermined condition is met during the variable display or jackpot state (e.g., when the player operates an operation means such as the effect button 125 during the variable display or jackpot state, when a predetermined effect such as a predetermined reach effect or round effect is initiated during the variable display or jackpot state, or within a predetermined time from the start of the variable display or round), the effect display device 42 may display a menu screen 3000 or a predetermined selection display, allowing the user to set language, volume, brightness, or effect customization. Additionally, if the player performs a "volume setting" or "brightness setting" during a variable display or during a jackpot state, and it is stored that a predetermined output level value has been input into the volume level setting area or brightness level setting area, the performance display device 42 may be configured to display an output gauge showing the current volume or brightness output level for a predetermined period of time as information indicating that the predetermined output level has been input by the player.

In this embodiment, the customization input values entered by the player regarding the settings for the various effects output during a jackpot state (such as language settings, volume settings, brightness settings, and effect customization (character and jackpot background music settings, etc.)) are not reflected in internal controls such as the effect lottery, so customization input is possible even before a jackpot state occurs, and the content is output according to the values entered by the player for customization (such as the background music playing order and volume level).

If a negative determination is made in step SH4705, a determination is made in step SH4707 as to whether or not an interval command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4707, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SH4708, and the presentation for the 4-second interval is set in step SH4709, after which this processing ends. The processing for setting the interval presentation includes, for example, setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the interval presentation.

If a negative determination is made in step SH4707, a determination is made in step SH4710 as to whether an ending command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4710, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SH4711, and the ending presentation is set in step SH4712, after which the processing ends. The ending presentation setting processing includes, for example, setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the ending presentation. Note that the ending presentation setting processing may be configured to select and execute one ending presentation pattern from multiple ending presentation patterns.

If the result of step SH4710 is negative, step SH4713 determines whether a jackpot end command has been received. If the result of step SH4713 is negative, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH4713, the jackpot display end process is performed in step SH4714, and this process ends.

The jackpot display end process immediately ends the ending display. Also, when the jackpot state ends, the time-saving A mode start command is received at this time, and based on this command, the start setting process for the "Rush Stage Presentation" or "Battle Stage Presentation" corresponding to the "Time-saving A Mode" is performed.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-36, in step SH3908, a change stop process is executed to stop the change display of the performance display device 42. The change stop process will now be explained with reference to Figure 3-43.

First, in step SH4401, it is determined whether a special chart 2 stop command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4401, it is determined in step SH4405 whether the second effect change display is currently being derived. If a positive determination is made in step SH4405, processing is performed in step SH4406 to stop the second effect change display. After step SH4406, the process proceeds to step SH4410, which will be described later. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH4405, the process proceeds directly to step SH4410.

Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step SH4401, a determination is made in step SH4407 as to whether a special chart 1 stop command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4407, a determination is made in step SH4408 as to whether the first effect change display is currently being derived. If a positive determination is made in step SH4408, a process is performed in step SH4409 to stop the first effect change display. After step SH4409, the process proceeds to step SH4410. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH4408, the process proceeds directly to step SH4410.

After the process of stopping the display of each effect change in step SH4406 or step SH4409, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4407, a judgment is made in step SH4410 as to whether a time-saving A mode end command or a time-saving B mode end command has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step SH4410, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH4410 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the total number of times the first and second variable displays have been executed in "Time-saving A mode" or "Time-saving B mode" reaches a predetermined number, step SH4411 performs processing to change the display performance being performed by the performance display device 42 to "normal stage performance" corresponding to normal mode. Then, this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-36, the lamp setting process in step SH3909 sets the lighting patterns of the illumination units 102-104 so that they are synchronized with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42, for example. In other words, the lamp setting process is also configured to control the central illumination unit 103, which is related to the one-shot announcement performance.

At this time, the sub-control device 262 causes the illumination units 102-104 to emit light at a brightness level corresponding to the brightness setting value set in the brightness level setting area of RAM 553. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the brightness level (brightness setting value) of the illumination units 102-104 can be changed to suit the player's preferences. Details of how to adjust this brightness (customization operation) will be described later.

In this embodiment, the brightness setting can be switched to one of five levels, from a minimum level of "1" to a maximum level of "5," with level "3" being set as the default when the power is turned on. For example, when the brightness setting is set to "1," the light is emitted at 300 cd (candela), when "2" it is set to 450 cd, when "3" it is set to 600 cd, when "4" it is set to 750 cd, and when "5" it is set to 900 cd. Of course, the correspondence between the customizable brightness levels (brightness setting values) and the actual brightness is not limited to these correspondences, and different configurations may be adopted.

In addition, with regard to the illumination of the central illumination unit 103 for the one-shot announcement effect, the illumination effect (flash emission) may be configured to be performed at a predetermined brightness, without changing the brightness regardless of the customized brightness setting value, in order to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 changes the applied voltage, making it possible to set the brightness level of each of the illumination units 102-104 in multiple stages when it is lit or flashing. However, the method for adjusting the brightness value is not limited to this. For example, the brightness may be adjusted by changing the number of light sources that are turned on among multiple light sources, or by adjusting the on/off times of the light sources.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 3-36, the audio setting process in step SH3910 performs various settings to drive and control the speakers SP, etc., such as setting the output pattern of the audio output from the speakers SP, etc. so that it is synchronized with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. In addition, if audio-related commands, such as an error notification, are sent from the main control device 261, settings to control these commands are also performed in step SH3910.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 controls the audio output from the speaker SP at a volume level corresponding to the volume level information set in the volume level setting area of the RAM 553. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the volume level of the speaker SP is configured to be changeable to suit the player's preferences. Details of how to adjust the volume (customization operation) will be described later.

In this embodiment, the volume level can be set to one of five levels, from the minimum level "1" to the maximum level "5," and the default level is "3" when the power is turned on. For example, when the volume level is set to "1," sound is output at 50 dB, when "2" is set, sound is output at 60 dB, when "3" is set, sound is output at 70 dB, when "4" is set, sound is output at 80 dB, and sound is output at "5" when "5" is set. Of course, the correspondence between the customizable volume levels and the actual sound volume is not limited to these correspondences, and different configurations may be adopted.

In step SH3911, standby processing is performed. In standby processing, the sub-control device 262 first determines whether the standby flag set in RAM 553 is on. The standby flag is determination information used to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state (waiting for customers), and is set to on when a predetermined variable display has been confirmed and stopped in the performance display device 42 and no new variable display is pending in the execution area of the pending information storage area.

Furthermore, if the next variable display does not start even after a predetermined time (e.g., three minutes) has elapsed since a predetermined variable display was confirmed and stopped on the effect display device 42, or if the player has not played for a predetermined period of time after completing various setting processes such as the effect customization process described below, the effect display device 42 performs a setting process to execute a predetermined demonstration effect display (demo screen display). In this embodiment, the demo screen display is configured to display, for example, a video of a predetermined duration that expresses the worldview that is the motif of the pachinko machine 10 on the entire screen of the effect display device 42.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the timing for the demo screen display to end arrives (when the next variable display has not started even after a predetermined time has passed since the demo screen display began on the effect display device 42), output setting processing is performed to perform various settings (such as erasing custom information entered by the player or setting default values) for the various storage areas of the user-related area (language setting area, brightness level setting area, volume level setting area, effect custom information storage area, etc.).

Step SH3912 performs user-responsive processing. User-responsive processing is processing performed at the player's request, such as during the standby state. Examples of such processing include language setting processing to change the language used for game instructions and specific effects, volume setting processing to adjust the output level (volume level) of the audio output from the speaker PS, brightness setting processing to adjust the brightness of the display unit 42a and illumination unit 102 of the effect display device 42, effect customization processing to customize the effects performed by the effect display device 42, and history display processing to display the game history, such as the number of jackpots. However, with regard to "volume setting" and "brightness setting," the values entered by the player are not directly reflected in specific internal controls such as effect lottery. Therefore, the player may be able to operate the effect button 125, cross key 126, or other operating means to customize and input values corresponding to the volume level and brightness level not only during the standby state but also throughout the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display for a specific period on the effect display device 42.

In step SH3913, external output processing is performed to send control signals to each device based on the settings made in steps SH3905 to SH3912. For example, a display command is sent to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 displays a changing decorative pattern.

After steps SH3905 to SH3913 are executed every 2 msec, or if a negative determination is made in step SH3904, the process proceeds to step SH3914, where it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in RAM 553. Note that power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control unit 261.

If no information about a power outage is stored, the process proceeds to step SH3915, where it is determined whether RAM 553 has been corrupted. If RAM 553 has not been corrupted, the process returns to step SH3901, and normal processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 553 has been corrupted, the process enters an infinite loop to stop subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SH3914 that power failure occurrence information is to be stored, power failure processing is executed in step SH3916. During power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. The stored information about the power failure occurrence is also erased. After the power failure processing is executed, the processing enters an infinite loop.

Next, we will explain how the display mode of the effects on the effect display device 42 changes as the game progresses, along with the flow of the game played by the player. The display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays various display effects corresponding to the current game state (game mode, etc.).

In the normal game mode (a game mode in which the first variable display can be displayed based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA in "normal mode"), the "normal stage display" is displayed on the display device 42.

As shown in Figure 3-44, in "normal stage presentation," a variable display area HW1 in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner occupies most of the display unit 42a of the presentation display device 42. In this embodiment, the background image selected by the player in advance during presentation customization, or the default background image (the background image related to the "diving stage"), is displayed on the display unit 42a. In addition, while the symbols are changing, the background music selected by the player in advance during presentation customization, or the default background music during symbol change, is output from the speaker SP.

As described above, in this embodiment, three pattern display areas (top, middle, and bottom) are set in this variable display area HW1, and multiple types of decorative patterns (patterns numbered 1 to 9) are displayed in a scrolling manner in each pattern display area.

Above the variable display area HW1 is an instruction display area HW2 that instructs (recommends) the player on how to launch the game ball, and below the variable display area HW1 is a hold display area HW3 that clearly shows the number of hold variable displays.

In normal game mode, the instruction display area HW2 displays "← Left Hit" to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area (left side game area area EA) (such action will be referred to as "left hit" hereafter). In response, the player will play by "left hitting" (such gameplay will be referred to as "left hit game" hereafter).

In addition, a hold icon H461 resembling a life jacket is displayed in the hold display area HW3. In this embodiment, the hold display area HW3 is equipped with an execution correspondence area H462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area, and a hold correspondence area H462b corresponding to each hold area of the first hold information storage area, and is capable of displaying up to five hold icons H461. In this embodiment, the hold icon selected in advance by the player during performance customization, or the default set hold icon (the hold icon H461 resembling a life jacket) is displayed on the display unit 42a.

When a player "hits left," most of the game balls are guided by the above-mentioned nails toward the first start winning section 33WA, which is located below the variable display unit 35 (the lower game area ED). Some of these game balls will win in the first start winning section 33WA.

In this embodiment, the second start winning section 33WB and the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the pair of blade members 33WBb are located to the right of the variable display unit 35 (right-side area EB of the game area). In other words, the second start winning section 33WB and the through gate 34 are located in a position that cannot be reached by a game ball that has flowed down the left side of the variable display unit 35 (left-side area EA of the game area). Therefore, if the player continues to "hit left," the pair of blade members 33WBb will not be opened and the game ball will not enter the second start winning section 33WB.

Furthermore, even if a player were to fire a game ball toward the right side of the game area (the right side game area EB) in normal game mode (such an action will be referred to as a "right hit" hereinafter), with the configuration of this embodiment described above, there is almost no chance that the game ball will enter the second start winning section 33WB. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that in normal game mode, the player can play more advantageously by "left hit play" than by "right hit" (such play will be referred to as "right hit play" hereinafter).

When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, multiple types of decorative patterns are displayed in the variable display area HW1 of the effect display device 42, changing in each of the above-mentioned pattern display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" are displayed. The various decorative patterns are displayed in ascending or descending numerical order, scrolling from right to left with a periodicity, thereby forming a series of patterns. Here, in this embodiment, decorative patterns with a design selected in advance by the player during effect customization, or default decorative patterns (decorative patterns related to the "tropical fish group") are displayed on the display unit 42a.

In the upper pattern display area, various decorative patterns are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), while in the middle and lower pattern display areas, various decorative patterns are displayed in ascending order (in order of increasing numbers). After a predetermined time has passed, the varying display stops in the order of upper pattern display area → lower pattern display area → middle pattern display area, and decorative patterns are displayed statically in each pattern display area.

Furthermore, while the pattern is changing, various effects (such as reach effects, school of fish effects, one-shot announcement effects, and cut-in effects) selected in advance by the player during effect customization, or various effects set as defaults, may be executed. Furthermore, in reach effects and cut-in effects, characters (such as main characters and sub-characters) selected in advance by the player during effect customization, or characters set as defaults, may be displayed on the display unit 42a.

If the jackpot lottery is won based on the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, the game will go through a reach state, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination will be displayed frozen on a predetermined jackpot line. In the normal game mode of this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, center, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as five lines). Therefore, when three decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination are displayed frozen on any of the five lines in the top, center, and bottom symbol display areas, the occurrence of a jackpot state is confirmed. In this way, when the jackpot variable display has ended, game status information for the jackpot state corresponding to this variable display, such as text information such as "Jackpot" as shown in Figure 3-45, is displayed on the effect display device 42.

When a jackpot occurs, the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable prize device 32A opens, allowing the game ball to enter the large prize opening 32Aa, and a specified jackpot presentation is initiated on the presentation display device 42. In this embodiment, the jackpot background music selected in advance by the player during presentation customization, or the default jackpot background music, is output from the speaker SP.

However, if the player continues to "hit left," it will be extremely difficult to make the game ball flow down toward the variable winning device 32A and win. Furthermore, when the "Time-saving A mode," which is entered after the jackpot ends regardless of the type of jackpot, begins, there will be no reserved memory of the second variable display based on the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, and the first variable display will begin after the jackpot ends.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, a player is more likely to be placed in a more advantageous gaming state if they win a jackpot with the second variable display than if they win a jackpot with the first variable display. Therefore, if the first variable display is displayed in "Time-saving A mode" after a jackpot has ended, it will be disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3-45, when the jackpot effect begins, the instruction display area HW2 displays "Right Hit →" to encourage the player to "hit right." In response, the player switches the game ball launch mode from "left hit" to "right hit" to play a jackpot game so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right-side area EB of the game area.

If the player hits the ball to the right, many of the balls will be guided by the pegs and flow from the right area EB of the play area through the lower area ED of the play area toward the variable winning device 32A, where they will win. This allows the player to win more balls.

In addition, in the right area EB of the game area, a through gate 34 and a second start-up winning section 33WB are provided along the flow path to the variable winning device 32A. During a jackpot, some game balls will pass through the through gate 34 and enter the second start-up winning section 33WB, which opens upon passing through the gate.

In this embodiment, if the game ball wins the start-entry support lottery, which is held based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the pair of blade members 33WBb will open, allowing the game ball to enter the second start-entry section 33WB.

This means that the second variable display is reserved and stored during the jackpot state, and when the "Time-saving A Mode" begins after the jackpot ends, the second variable display can be started immediately, taking priority over the first variable display.

In this embodiment, if a "15R jackpot" is won by a lottery during "normal mode" based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, after the "15R jackpot" ends, a "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted. When the "time-saving A mode for 100 variable play times" is granted, a "rush stage effect" is displayed on the effect display device 42, as shown in FIG. 3-46.

On the other hand, if a "4R jackpot" is won by a lottery during "normal mode" based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, after the "4R jackpot" ends, a "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play rounds is granted. If a "time-saving A mode with 10 variable play rounds" is granted, a "battle stage effect" is displayed on the effect display device 42, as shown in FIG. 3-47.

Therefore, when a "Rush Stage Effect (15R or 8R jackpot)" is performed, there is a high probability of winning the next jackpot in succession during that period, whereas when a "Battle Stage Effect (4R jackpot)" is performed, there is a low probability of winning the next jackpot in succession during that period.

In the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect," the variable display area HW1 is displayed in a reduced size downwards. Furthermore, in the reduced variable display area HW1, the top, middle, and bottom symbol display areas are replaced with left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes a single line. Various characters and other effects related to the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect" are displayed on the background screen.

For example, in the "Rush Stage Presentation," as shown in Figure 3-46, during its duration (a maximum of 100 variable displays are executed), a continuous animation (continuous presentation) of moving through the ocean is generated, and the player is informed of a jackpot win, etc., through display modes such as a school of fish passing by, a large creature such as a whale appearing, or a treasure chest being discovered.

In addition, in the "Battle Stage Presentation," as shown in Figure 3-47, a humanoid character (such as the main character selected by the player in presentation customization) appears and an animation is generated in which the character fights an enemy, and whether or not the player wins the battle indicates whether or not they have won the jackpot.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Presentation" and "Battle Stage Presentation," since the above-mentioned various presentations indicate that a jackpot has been won, the reduced variable display area HW1 may also be omitted, and decorative symbols may not be displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, in the "Rush Stage Presentation" and "Battle Stage Presentation," the player may be able to select between a symbol presentation mode in which decorative symbols are displayed and an animation presentation mode in which decorative symbols are not displayed by customizing the presentation. Of course, the "Rush Stage Presentation" and/or "Battle Stage Presentation" themselves may also be configured to be customizable by the player.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect," in order to allow more game balls to enter the second start winning section 33WB and reserve and store more second variable displays, the instruction display area HW2 displays "Right Hit →," recommending that the player "hit right," just as in the case of a jackpot.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect," the hold display area HW3 is not set on the effect display device 42, and the hold display (derivation of the hold icon) corresponding to the second hold display device 46B (second variable display) is not performed.

Here, even if a first variable display stored in reserve exists, the reserve icon corresponding to that first variable display is not displayed. As described above, if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA while the second variable display is being executed, the first variable display corresponding to that ball is reserved and stored, and an advance command related to the first variable display is sent from the main control unit 261 to the sub-control unit 262, and information related to the first variable display is stored in the first reserve information storage area of the sub-control unit 262. However, during periods such as the "Rush Stage Performance," the reserve icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed. However, even if the reserve icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed here, if a game ball enters the next first start winning section 33WA, the data in the first reserve information storage area will be updated. Then, when the "Rush Stage Performance" or the like ends and the game returns to "Normal Mode," the reserve icon related to the first variable display stored in the first reserve information storage area at that time will be displayed.

In addition, if a game ball enters the second start-up winning section 33WB during "Time-saving A Mode (Rush Stage Presentation or Battle Stage Presentation)," a winning/losing lottery (jackpot lottery) is held, and the result is displayed in the reduced variable display area HW1.

Furthermore, during the "Time-saving A Mode (Rush Stage Presentation or Battle Stage Presentation)," while the player is "hitting right," game balls rarely enter the first start winning section 33WA. However, many game balls tend to enter the second start winning section 33WB, which is in a high ball entry state, in a short period of time, and the number of reserved balls stored in the second variable display tends to quickly reach its upper limit. For this reason, some players switch the game ball launch mode from "hitting right" to "hitting left" when a second variable display with a relatively long presentation time, such as a reach presentation, begins when the number of reserved balls stored in the second variable display has reached its upper limit, and during that time, they allow the game ball to enter the first start winning section 33WA. Of course, the first variable display will not start while the second variable display is being executed, but by storing the first variable display in a reserved state during this time, the reserved first variable display will start immediately after the "Time-saving A Mode" ends, preventing an interruption to the presentation.

In addition, for "Rush Stage Effects" and "Battle Stage Effects," a count display area HW4 is set on the effect display device 42 (see Figures 3-46 and 3-47). The count display area HW4 clearly shows the number of variable display times (the value of the first variable count counter A) corresponding to the current remaining duration of the "Rush Stage Effects" or "Battle Stage Effects." Therefore, for example, if the value of the first variable count counter A is "83," the count display area HW4 will display "83 times remaining."

Then, each time the first or second variable display (mainly the second variable display) is displayed, its value (the value of the first variable count counter A) is decremented by one. Thereafter, during the "Time-saving A mode (rush stage effect or battle stage effect)," if a jackpot does not occur and the set number of variable displays (the value of the first variable count counter A) reaches 0, the "Time-saving A mode" ends, the game mode transitions to "normal mode," and the "Rush stage effect" or "Battle stage effect" on the effect display device 42 ends, returning to the "normal stage effect (see Figure 3-44)."

In addition, when the game mode transitions to "normal mode," "Time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)" ends, and "← hit left" is displayed in the instruction display area HW2 to encourage the player to "hit left." This allows the player to change the game mode upon the end of "Time-saving A mode (rush stage effect or battle stage effect)," preventing the occurrence of problems such as wasting game balls.

In this embodiment, when the game mode is "normal mode" as described above, if the value of the normal mode continuation counter (ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value of "500," that is, if the duration of "normal mode" (number of times the variable display is executed) reaches 500 without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving B mode" is activated as a benefit awarded to the player.

In this embodiment, a "time-saving B mode" with a maximum limit of 200 variable play times is granted. During "time-saving B mode," a "lucky stage effect" is executed on the effect display device 42. Note that when "time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)" is activated, an activation effect may be executed to liven up the game.

As shown in Figure 3-48, in the "Lucky Stage Effect," a variable display area HW1 is set on the effect display device 42, and basically the same variable decorative pattern display is performed as in "Normal Mode," but some display aspects, such as the background display, differ from those in "Normal Mode."

For example, since the game enters "Time-saving B mode (high ball entry state)," the instruction display area HW2 above the variable display area HW1 displays "Hit right →," recommending that the player "hit right," just as in "Time-saving A mode." Meanwhile, the hold display area HW3 is not set in the effect display device 42, and no hold display (derivation of the hold icon) is performed.

Of course, instead of this, during the duration of the "Lucky Stage Effect" (the period during which a maximum of 200 variable displays are executed), the variable display area HW1 may be displayed in a reduced size downwards, similar to the "Rush Stage Effect" described above, and an animation (continuous effect) in which various characters are displayed may be generated on the background screen. Furthermore, the "Lucky Stage Effect" may also be configured to be customizable by the player.

In addition, for the "Lucky Stage Effect," a count display area HW4 is set on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 3-48). The count display area HW4 clearly shows the number of variable display times (the value of the second variable display counter B) that corresponds to the remaining duration of the "Lucky Stage Effect" at the current time. Therefore, for example, if the value of the second variable display counter B is "155," the count display area HW4 will display "155 times remaining."

Then, each time the first or second variable display (mainly the second variable display) is displayed once, its value (the value of the second variable count counter B) is decremented by one. After that, if the set number of variable displays (the value of the second variable count counter B) reaches 0 without a jackpot occurring during "Time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)," and "Time-saving B mode" ends, the game mode transitions to "Normal mode." This ends the "Lucky stage effect" on the effect display device 42, and the game returns to "Normal stage effect (see Figure 3-44)."

Furthermore, when the "Time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)" ends and the game mode transitions to "normal mode," a notification may be sent to inform the player that the "Time-saving B mode" will not occur again as a rescue measure until the next jackpot occurs and the ceiling is reset.

In this embodiment, "ceiling reset" refers to the process of resetting the value of the normal mode continuation counter (ceiling counter) to "0" and turning off the time-saving B mode activation flag (ceiling activation flag).

Next, we will provide a detailed explanation of the various processes that can be executed while the pachinko machine 10 (effect display device 42) is in standby mode, i.e., during the period when the effect display device 42 is not executing effects such as variable displays (various processes performed in the user response processing of step SH3912 above).

First, we will explain in detail how the player operates the effect button 125 and cross key 126 to make various settings and changes while looking at the effect display device 42 of the pachinko machine 10.

When a player presses the effect button 125 while the pachinko machine 10 (effect display device 42) is in standby mode, the menu screen 3000 (see Figure 3-54) is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42. The control processing (menu selection processing, etc.) performed by the sub-control device 262 to execute this is as follows:

As shown in Figure 3-50, the menu selection process first determines in step SH5500 whether the menu screen 3000 (see Figure 3-54) is currently being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5504.

On the other hand, if the answer is negative in step SH5500, then step SH5501 determines whether the machine is currently in a standby state (waiting for a customer). If the answer is negative in step SH5501, then this process ends.

In addition, a determination process is first performed to determine whether the game is currently in standby mode, and when the menu screen 3000 is displayed (the same applies when the language setting screen 3001, etc. is displayed), if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, etc. and a specific input such as a variation pattern command is made from the main control unit 261 to the sub-control unit 262, the display of the menu screen 3000, etc. may be forcibly terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step SH5501, a determination is made in step SH5502 as to whether the player has operated the effect button 125. If a negative determination is made here, the process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5502, in step SH5503, a menu screen display process is executed to display the menu screen 3000 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the menu screen 3000 on the performance display device 42.

As shown in Figure 3-54, the menu screen 3000 displays multiple types of menu items that can be executed by the player. In this embodiment, five menu items are displayed: "Language Settings," "Volume Settings," "Brightness Settings," "Effect Customization," and "Game History." Of these menu items, the four items "Language Settings," "Volume Settings," "Brightness Settings," and "Effect Customization" excluding "Game History," as well as various custom setting items belonging to subcategories of "Effect Customization" (such as preview effect settings), constitute the game specifications in this embodiment.

Next, in step SH5504, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Language Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH5506.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5504, language setting processing is executed in step SH5505 to set the language to be used, and then the process proceeds to step SH5506. Details of the language setting processing will be described later.

Next, in step SH5506, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Volume Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5508.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5506, in step SH5507, a volume setting process is executed to set the output level (output volume level) of the sound output from the speaker SP, etc., and then the process proceeds to step SH5508. Details of the volume setting process will be described later.

Next, in step SH5508, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Brightness Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5510.

If step SH5508 returns a positive answer, step SH5509 executes a brightness setting process to set the brightness of the light emitted from the illumination units 102-104, and then the process proceeds to step SH5510. Details of the brightness setting process will be described later.

Next, in step SH5510, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Performance Customization" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH5512.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5510, step SH5511 executes a performance customization process to customize the performance content, and then the process proceeds to step SH5512. If the performance customization process is executed here, the performance customization screen 3004 is displayed on the performance display device 42 (see Figure 3-58). Details of the performance customization process will be described later.

Next, in step SH5512, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Game History" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH5514.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5512, a history display process is executed in step SH5513 to display the game history, and then the process proceeds to step SH5514. When the history display process is executed, the game history screen 3005 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 3-59).

Next, in step SH5514, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the menu screen 3000 is displayed. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5516.

If a negative determination is made in step SH5514, a determination is made in step SH5515 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the menu screen 3000 was displayed. If a negative determination is made here, the process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH5515, the process proceeds to step SH5516.

Then, in step SH5516, the display of the menu screen 3000 is terminated, and this processing is terminated. As a result, if the player presses the effect button 125 while the menu screen 3000 is displayed, or if a predetermined display time has elapsed, the display of the menu screen 3000 is terminated, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the original screen, such as the demo screen. With this function, if no operation input is made to select one of the above menu items, such as "Language Settings," before the predetermined time has elapsed while the menu screen 3000 is displayed, it is necessary to display the menu screen 3000 again in order to transition to a state where the language setting screen 3001, etc., is displayed.

In this embodiment, the menu screen 3000 disappears from the effect display device 42 (display unit 42a) and returns to the original screen when the effect button 125 is operated or the display time has elapsed. However, alternatively or additionally, the effect display device 42 (display unit 42a) may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo screen, when a game ball is launched or when a game ball enters a predetermined entry means, such as the start entry section 33WA or 33WB, while the menu screen 3000 is displayed (the same applies to when other setting screens belonging to subcategories of the menu screen 3000, such as the language setting screen 3001, are displayed).

With the above configuration, the player can move the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the menu screen 3000 by operating the up button 126a or down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select a menu item, or can confirm the menu item selected with the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126. In this way, when a specific menu item is selected on the menu screen 3000, a screen corresponding to the selected menu item is displayed on the effect display device 42.

For example, when the menu screen 3000 is displayed and the player selects "Language Settings," the language setting screen 3001 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 3-55). When the language setting screen 3001 is displayed, the menu screen 3000 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the language setting screen 3001 displays three language options that the player can choose from: "Japanese," "Chinese," and "ENGLISH." Of course, the language options are not limited to these, and the player may also be able to select a language different from these.

The language setting screen 3001 also displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) that correspond to the input of operation information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and the operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Here, the language setting process in step SH5505 above will be explained with reference to Figure 3-51.

As shown in the figure, the "language setting process" first determines in step SH5600 whether the language setting screen 3001 (see Figure 3-55) is currently being displayed on the performance display device 42. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5602.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH5600, a language setting screen display process is executed in step SH5601 to display the language setting screen 3001 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the language setting screen 3001 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

Next, in step SH5602, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the language setting screen 3001 is displayed, based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the effect button 125. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5604.

If a negative determination is made in step SH5602, a determination is made in step SH5603 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the language setting screen 3001 was displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the display of the language setting screen 3001, such as "End language setting," is terminated in step SH5604, and the screen returns to the menu screen 3000 in the following step SH5605, terminating this processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5603, then in step SH5606, it is determined whether "Japanese" has been selected from the language options displayed on the language setting screen 3001 ("Japanese," "Chinese," and "ENGLISH"), based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches.

If step SH5606 returns a positive result, step SH5607 performs processing to set Japanese as the language used. Specifically, the value of the language setting flag, which is information related to game specifications, is set to a value corresponding to "Japanese" (e.g., "01"). After that, processing proceeds through steps SH5604 and SH5605, and ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5606, in step SH5608, it is determined whether "Chinese" was selected from the language options displayed on the language setting screen 3001, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If step SH5608 returns a positive result, step SH5609 performs processing to set Chinese as the language used. Specifically, the value of the language setting flag, which is information related to game specifications, is set to a value corresponding to "Chinese" (e.g., "02"). Then, processing proceeds through steps SH5604 and SH5605, and ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5608, in step SH5610, it is determined whether "ENGLISH" was selected from the language options displayed on the language setting screen 3001, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If step SH5610 returns a positive result, step SH5611 performs processing to set English as the language used. Specifically, the value of the language setting flag, which is information related to game specifications, is set to a value corresponding to "English" (e.g., "03"). After that, processing proceeds through steps SH5604 and SH5605, and terminates. If step SH5610 returns a negative result, processing terminates.

With the above configuration, the player can move the cursor 3100 up or down on the language setting screen 3001 by operating the up button 126a or the down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select a language option, and then confirm the language option selected by the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126. When the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the language, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion message, such as "The language has been set to English," indicating that the player has completed input of the language selected by the player. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the value of the language setting flag set in the language setting area of RAM 553 to a value corresponding to the language selected by the player, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000. However, if the player does not change the language used here from the default language (Japanese), or if the player inputs a language that is the same as the default language, the output setting process will set the language to the same as the default language.

Of course, if the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the language to be used, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo screen, without returning to the menu screen 3000.

The sub-control device 262 will generate image data and output audio using the corresponding language data based on the value of the language setting flag selected and set as described above. This allows for the display of Japanese, Chinese, and English versions of variable effects, gameplay explanations, and operation guides.

Now, when the menu screen 3000 is displayed and the player selects "Volume Settings" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000, the volume settings screen 3002 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 3-56). When the volume settings screen 3002 is displayed, the menu screen 3000 is hidden. If the volume is adjustable, when connecting the sub-control device 262 to the speaker SP to output sound in a suitable manner, sound output control can be performed in a way that is highly convenient for the player.

In this embodiment, the volume setting screen 3002 displays five volume levels that the player can select: "1," "2," "3," "4," and "5." Of course, the number of volume levels that the player can select is not limited to this, and other different configurations may be adopted.

The volume setting screen 3002 also displays a cursor 3100 for specifying one volume level from the multiple volume levels displayed, as well as various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection button and icon 5002 corresponding to the selection button) corresponding to input of operation information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., operation of the selection buttons (left button 126c, right button 126d) of the cross key 126 by the player to move the cursor 3100, or operation of the decision button (center button 126e) of the cross key 126 by the player to set the volume level specified by the cursor 3100 as the output volume level.

In the selection button icons 5001 displayed on the volume setting screen 3002, only the icons (icon components) corresponding to the specific selection buttons (left button 126c and right button 126d) of the directional pad 126 (upper button 126a, lower button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d, and center button 126e) that the player uses for selection operations on that screen and that are the target of detection by the sub-control device 262 are displayed in a specific, highly saturated, and easily identifiable manner to selectively stand out, while the icons (icon components) corresponding to the other buttons (upper button 126a, lower button 126b, and center button 126e) are displayed in a low-saturation, difficult-to-identify manner to make them less noticeable (the same applies to the brightness setting screen 3003 described below).

The above-mentioned specific display only needs to be displayed in an easily identifiable manner to enhance player identifiability, and may be configured to be selectively displayed in a manner different from the above-mentioned specific manner. For example, of the cross key 126 (upper button 126a, lower button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d, center button 126e), only icons corresponding to predetermined selection buttons (left button 126c and right button 126d) that are the target of detection by the sub-control device 262 may be displayed, while icons corresponding to the other buttons (upper button 126a, lower button 126b, center button 126e) may not be displayed.

If icons (icon components) corresponding to all buttons 126a-126e of the directional pad 126 were displayed in a specific manner (specific display) on the effect display device 42, the player would have to personally select the necessary icons corresponding to the buttons they need to operate from a large number of icons, including unnecessary icons, which would be extremely inconvenient for the player. In contrast, by selectively and specifically displaying only the icons corresponding to the buttons required for volume setting (left button 126c and right button 126d) as described above, the distinctiveness is increased, and convenience for the player is also improved.

In addition, when the volume setting screen 3002 is displayed on the effect display device 42, the cursor 3100 indicates the volume level out of the five volume levels ("1," "2," "3," "4," "5") that corresponds to the current volume level (the volume level set in the volume level setting area at that time). This allows the player to understand the volume level that is set at that time.

For example, if the default value, level "3," is set in the volume level setting area, the cursor 3100 will point to volume level "3" on the volume setting screen 3002, as shown in Figure 3-56.

If the volume setting screen 3002 is displayed with the maximum volume level currently set to "5," the volume setting screen 3002 will display a cursor 3100 indicating the maximum volume level "5" and multiple icons corresponding to the left button 126c and right button 126d for volume switching operations, and if audio is output in this case, it will be output at maximum volume.

It is desirable that the output volume of audio data from the pachinko machine 10 (speaker SP), which is controlled by the audio output control of the sub-control device 262, can be set more precisely depending on the situation. As described above, when multiple icons corresponding to the left button 126c and right button 126d for volume switching operation are displayed on the effect display device 42, maximum volume provides good audibility and is highly convenient.

Here, the volume setting process of step SH5507 above will be explained with reference to Figure 3-52.

As shown in the figure, the "volume setting process" first determines in step SH5720 whether the volume setting screen 3002 is being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5722.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH5720, step SH5721 performs a volume setting screen display process to display the volume setting screen 3002, and then the process proceeds to step SH5722. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the volume setting screen 3002 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

In the following step SH5722, it is determined whether a volume up operation using the right button 126d and a confirmation operation using the center button 126e have been performed, based on operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the right button 126d and operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the center button 126e. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH5724. Here, the confirmation operation using the center button 126e may be omitted, and the operation to increase the volume may be completed only by the volume up operation using the right button 126d. In other words, the output volume level may be determined simply by operating the right button 126d to move the cursor 3100 and select the desired volume level.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5722, volume up processing is executed to increase the volume in step SH5723, and then the process proceeds to step SH5724.

In the volume-up process, the sub-control device 262 performs an output setting process that updates the volume level value set in the volume level setting area of RAM 553 to the volume level value selected and determined by the player as described above.

The volume-down state can be ended based on a specific volume switching operation (volume-up operation) performed on the pachinko machine 10 from outside the pachinko machine 10. It is desirable that the amount of audio data output (output volume) from the pachinko machine 10 (speaker SP), which is controlled by the audio output control of the sub-control device 262, can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if the volume-down state could be ended by executing volume-up processing when a volume-up operation is input to the pachinko machine 10.

In step SH5724, it is determined whether a volume down operation using the left button 126c and a confirmation operation using the center button 126e have been performed, based on operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the left button 126c and operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the center button 126e. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH5726. Note that the confirmation operation using the center button 126e may be omitted here, and the operation to lower the volume may be completed only by the volume down operation using the left button 126c. In other words, the output volume level may be determined simply by operating the left button 126c to move the cursor 3100 and select the desired volume level.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5724, volume down processing is executed to lower the volume in step SH5725, and then the process proceeds to step SH5726.

In the volume down process, the sub-control device 262 performs an output setting process to update the volume level value set in the volume level setting area of RAM 553 to the volume level value selected and determined by the player as described above.

In this embodiment, when the player performs a volume-down operation once (presses the left button 126c once), the volume is reduced, and the volume setting screen 3002 displays the volume level indicated by the cursor 3100 as being one level lower. For example, when the cursor 3100 is pointing to the maximum volume level "5" and a volume-down operation is performed once (the left button 126c is pressed once), the cursor 3100 will point to volume level "4," that is, an output volume that is lower than the highest output volume (volume level 5) and higher than the lowest output volume (e.g., volume level 1).

If you want to lower the volume, performing a single volume down operation (pressing the left button 126c once) would change the volume to the lowest volume level of "1," which could result in the output volume being too low. However, by making it possible to change the output volume to a level halfway between the lowest and highest output volumes rather than lowering it to the lowest volume level, convenience is improved by being able to change the volume to an appropriate level.

As mentioned above, it is desirable that the output volume (output volume) of audio data from the pachinko machine 10 (speaker SP), which is controlled by the audio output control of the sub-control device 262, can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if, when a volume-down operation is input to the pachinko machine 10, audio data could be output at an output volume intermediate between the lowest output volume (volume level "1") and the highest output volume (volume level "5") (for example, volume levels "2," "3," or "4").

However, if the current volume level is set to volume level "2," one level higher than the minimum level "1," and the cursor 3100 on the volume setting screen 3002 is pointing to volume level "2," performing a single volume-down operation (pressing the left button 126c once) causes the sub-control device 262 to execute a volume-down process that lowers the volume level by one level, resulting in a volume-down state. As a result, on the volume setting screen 3002, the cursor 3100 will be pointing to volume level "1," i.e., the lowest output volume, and if audio is output in this case, it will be output at the lowest volume.

It is desirable that the amount of audio data output (output volume) from the pachinko machine 10 (speaker SP), which is controlled by the audio output control of the sub-control device 262, can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if the configuration could be changed to the smallest amount of audio data output (output volume) when a volume-down operation is input to the pachinko machine 10, as described above.

Next, in step SH5726, based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the effect button 125, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the volume setting screen 3002 is displayed. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5728.

On the other hand, if the result of step SH5726 is negative, step SH5727 determines whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the volume setting screen 3002 was displayed. If the result of this determination is negative, the process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5727, step SH5728 displays a message such as "Volume setting completed" and the volume setting screen 3002 is terminated, and in the following step SH5729, the screen returns to the menu screen 3000, terminating this processing.

With the above configuration, the player can operate the left button 126c or right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to move the cursor 3100 left or right on the volume setting screen 3002 to select the desired volume level, and then press the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126 to confirm the volume level selected with the cursor 3100. However, if the player does not change the volume level from the default value or if the player has entered a value that is the same as the default value, the same value as the default value will be set in the output setting process.

In this way, when the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the volume level, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion message, such as "Level 2 has been selected as the volume level," to indicate that the input of the volume level determined by the player has been completed.

In this embodiment, while the volume setting screen 3002 is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, that is, until the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (until the effect button 125 is operated or until a predetermined display time has elapsed), even after the volume up state has been implemented by the volume up process or the volume down state has been implemented by the volume down process (after the center button 126e for the confirm operation has been pressed), the sub-control device 262 is configured to be able to input predetermined operation information from the right button 126d for the volume up operation or the left button 126c for the volume down operation (the right button 126d and the left button 126c are configured so that they are not disabled), and the volume up process or the volume down process can be executed multiple times.

In addition to this, when the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the volume level, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo effect, without returning to the menu screen 3000.

Of course, even after returning to the menu screen 3000 or demo performance screen, it is possible to perform the volume up or down process multiple times by displaying the volume setting screen 3002 again.

Now, when the player selects "Brightness Settings" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000, the brightness settings screen 3003 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 3-57). When the brightness settings screen 3003 is displayed, the menu screen 3000 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the brightness setting screen 3003 displays five brightness levels that the player can select: "1," "2," "3," "4," and "5." Of course, the number of brightness levels that the player can select is not limited to this, and other different configurations may be adopted.

The brightness setting screen 3003 also displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) that correspond to the input of operation information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and the operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Here, the brightness setting process of step SH5509 above will be explained with reference to Figure 3-53.

As shown in the figure, the "brightness setting process" first determines in step SH5800 whether the brightness setting screen 3003 is being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5802.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH5800, step SH5801 performs brightness setting screen display processing to display the brightness setting screen 3003, and then the process proceeds to step SH5802. This processing causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the brightness setting screen 3003 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

In the following step SH5802, it is determined whether a brightness increase operation has been performed with the right button 126d based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the right button 126d. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5804.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5802, brightness increase processing is performed to increase the brightness in step SH5803, and then the process proceeds to step SH5804.

In step SH5804, it is determined whether a brightness-down operation has been performed with the left button 126c based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the left button 126c. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5806.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5804, brightness down processing is performed to reduce the brightness in step SH5805, and then the process proceeds to step SH5806.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 temporarily stores the brightness level value selected and set by the player in a specified area during the brightness increase process and brightness decrease process. Then, after it is confirmed, as described below, the brightness level value set in the brightness level setting area of RAM 553 is updated to the brightness level value selected and set as described above.

Next, in step SH5806, based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the effect button 125, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the brightness setting screen 3003 is displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5808.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SH5806 is negative, then in step SH5807 it is determined whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the brightness setting screen 3003 was displayed. If the determination here is negative, then this processing is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5807, step SH5808 displays a message such as "Brightness setting completed" and the display of the brightness setting screen 3003 is terminated, and in the following step SH5609, the screen returns to the menu screen 3000, and this processing is terminated.

With the above configuration, the player can move the cursor 3100 left or right on the brightness setting screen 3003 by operating the left button 126c or the right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to select the desired brightness level, and then press the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126 to confirm the brightness level selected by the cursor 3100. When the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the brightness level, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion message, such as "Level 5 has been selected as the brightness level." The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the brightness level value set in the brightness level setting area of RAM 553 to the brightness level value determined by the player through the brightness increase and decrease processes, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000. However, if the player does not change the brightness level from the default value, or if the player inputs a value that is the same as the default value, the output setting process will set the same value as the default value.

Here, when the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the brightness level, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo screen, without returning to the menu screen 3000.

Now, when the player selects "Effect Customization" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000, the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 3-58). When the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed, the menu screen 3000 is hidden.

The effect customization screen 3004 displays multiple types of customization items that the player can perform. For example, in this embodiment, four customization items are displayed: "BGM Settings," which changes the music played during a specified effect; "Character Settings," which changes the character displayed during a specified effect; "Background Settings," which changes the background image displayed during a specified effect; and "Preview Effects Settings," which changes the appearance rate of preview effects, etc.

The effect customization screen 3004 displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) that correspond to the input of operation information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and the operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Furthermore, when the player selects "Game History" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000, the game history screen 3005 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 3-59). Note that when the game history screen 3005 is displayed, the menu screen 3000 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the gaming history screen 3005 displays gaming history information (gaming data), such as a graph showing changes in income and expenditures as the game progresses, the total number of jackpots for that day, the number of first jackpots, and the current number of starts (number of times the variable display has been executed). Of course, the gaming history information is not limited to these, and other information may be displayed, such as the number of consecutive jackpots that have been executed without returning to the normal state after the first jackpot (number of consecutive wins). It may also be configured to display execution history information related to premium effects and variable jackpot displays stored in the gaming information storage area.

The following technical features can be extracted from the example implementation of the third embodiment described above.

One type of gaming machine known is a pachinko machine, in which a game is played by firing a gaming ball into a gaming area (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A).

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines output sounds corresponding to various games. The sounds are controlled by the audio control unit of the gaming machine.

When connecting the audio control unit to an external audio output unit to output audio in an optimal manner, audio output control that is highly convenient for players is desired.

Means KA1. A jackpot lottery processing unit (a function of the main control device 261 that performs the jackpot determination process of steps SH900 and SH1701, etc.) that executes a jackpot lottery based on the determination that the predetermined lottery conditions are met through a determination process (step SH805, the reserved number determination process of step SH1604, etc.) that determines whether the predetermined lottery conditions are met,
A jackpot game control unit (a function of the main control unit 261 that controls the jackpot game, etc.) that displays the jackpot display result by executing a special symbol variation display on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B, etc. when the result of the jackpot lottery is a winning result, and then executes the jackpot game;
A sub-controller 262 that performs a variable effect using a plurality of effect elements (display effect by the effect display device 42, sound effect by the speaker SP, light effect by the illuminations 102 to 104) during the variable special symbol display on at least the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B, etc., and
The sub-control device 262 is
The sub-control device 262 is provided with an audio output control means (audio output control function) that can control the output volume and output audio data to a predetermined speaker SP outside the connected sub-control device 262 at a predetermined output volume (the output volume that is set at that time),
This pachinko machine 10 is
A plurality of icons (icon components corresponding to the left and right buttons 126c and 126d of the icon 5001 imitating the cross key 126) corresponding to at least a plurality of predetermined detection targets in the sub-control device 262 (the left button 126c and the right button 126d of the cross key 126 that are designated for volume switching operations) and a volume display (volume level indicated by the cursor 3100) corresponding to input of operation information based on the volume switching operation to the sub-control device 262 are configured to be able to be displayed on a predetermined performance display device 42,
When detecting input of operation information based on a predetermined volume switching operation (volume down operation) to the sub-control device 262 (determining the state of the operation detection switch related to the left button 126c for the volume down operation in the reading process of step SH3900), operation detection information capable of identifying the left button 126c that is the detection target (operation detection information related to the left button 126c) is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 553,
After the operation detection information (operation detection information related to the left button 126c) is stored, the output volume can be switched so as to execute a volume-down state (a state in which the volume level is lowered by at least one level) in which audio data is output at an output volume lower than the output volume at the time when input of operation information based on the predetermined volume switching operation (volume-down operation) was detected,
The pachinko machine 10 is characterized in that it is configured so that predetermined operation information can be input from the left button 126c for volume down operation after the volume down state is executed (so that the left button 126c is not disabled).

The above-mentioned means KA1 allows for audio output control that is highly convenient for the player when connecting the sub-control device 262 to the speaker SP to output audio in a suitable manner.

Means KA2. The audio output control means is configured to be able to switch the output volume between at least three levels (for example, five levels),
This pachinko machine 10 is
The pachinko machine 10 described in means KA1 is characterized in that when multiple icons (icon components corresponding to the left and right buttons 126c, 126d) for volume switching operation are displayed on the performance display device 42, they are configured to output the highest output volume (for example, volume level 5) as the specified output volume (the output volume set at that time).

It is desirable that the output volume of audio data from the pachinko machine 10 (speaker SP), which is controlled by the audio output control of the sub-control device 262, can be set more precisely depending on the situation. When multiple icons corresponding to the left button 126c and right button 126d for volume switching operation are displayed on the performance display device 42, as in means KA2 above, the maximum volume makes it easy to hear and highly convenient.

Means KA3. The audio output control means is configured to be able to switch the output volume between at least three levels (for example, five levels),
This pachinko machine 10 is
A pachinko machine 10 described in means KA1 or KA2, characterized in that when the volume down state is executed, it is configured to output audio data at the lowest output volume (e.g., volume level 1).

It is desirable that the output volume (output volume) of audio data from the pachinko machine 10 (speaker SP), which is controlled by the audio output control of the sub-control device 262, can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if, as in means KA3 above, audio data could be output at the lowest output volume when a volume-down operation is input to the pachinko machine 10.

Means KA4. The audio output control means is configured to be able to switch the output volume between at least three levels (for example, five levels),
This pachinko machine 10 is
A pachinko machine 10 described in either means KA1 or means KA2, characterized in that when the volume down state is executed, it is configured to output audio data at an output volume (e.g., volume level 3) that is lower than the highest output volume (e.g., volume level 5) and higher than the lowest output volume (e.g., volume level 1).

It is desirable that the output volume (output volume) of audio data from the pachinko machine 10 (speaker SP), which is controlled by the audio output control of the sub-control device 262, can be set more precisely depending on the situation. It would be highly convenient if, as in means KA4 above, when a volume-down operation is input to the pachinko machine 10, audio data could be output at an output volume intermediate between the lowest and highest output volumes.

Means KA5. The audio output control means is configured to be able to switch the output volume between at least three levels (for example, five levels),
This pachinko machine 10 is
A pachinko machine 10 described in any of means KA1 to KA4, characterized in that it is configured so that the output volume can be set from the highest output volume (e.g., volume level 5) as the specified output volume (the output volume set at that time) to an output volume (e.g., volume level 4) that is lower than the highest output volume (e.g., volume level 5) and higher than the lowest output volume (e.g., volume level 1) based on a specified volume switching operation (volume down operation) to the pachinko machine 10 from outside the pachinko machine 10.

It is desirable that the output volume of audio data (output volume) from the pachinko machine 10 (speaker SP), which is controlled by the audio output control of the sub-control device 262, can be set more precisely depending on the situation. As with means KA5 above, when a volume-down operation is input to the pachinko machine 10, it would be highly convenient if the output volume of audio data (output volume) could be set from the highest output volume to an output volume that is lower than the highest output volume and higher than the lowest output volume.

Means KA6. The pachinko machine 10 includes:
A pachinko machine 10 described in any one of means KA1 to KA5, characterized in that it is configured to be able to selectively display icon components (icon components corresponding to each button 126a to 126e of the icon 5001 imitating the cross key 126) corresponding to multiple types of buttons 126a to 126e that are to be detected (such as each button 126a to 126e of the cross key 126 connected to the sub-control device 262) that correspond to at least the left button 126c and the right button 126d that are to be the specified detection targets for the output of audio data.

If the sub-control device 262 were to display on the effect display device 42 icon components corresponding to all of the buttons 126a-126e of the cross key 126, the player would have to select the necessary icon components from a huge number of icon components, including unnecessary ones, which could significantly reduce convenience for the player. In contrast, convenience can be improved by selectively displaying the icon components corresponding to the necessary buttons in a specific manner (for example, displaying them in a highly saturated manner), as in means KA6 above.

Means KA7. The pachinko machine 10 includes:
A pachinko machine 10 described in any of means KA1 to KA7, characterized in that when icons corresponding to the plurality of buttons are displayed on the performance display device 42, icons corresponding to a predetermined number of the left button 126c and right button 126d that are the predetermined detection targets can be selectively and specifically displayed.

If the sub-control device 262 were to display icons corresponding to multiple buttons 126a-126e on the effect display device 42, the player would have to select the necessary icons from a huge number of icons, including unnecessary ones, which could significantly reduce convenience for the player. In contrast, convenience can be improved by selectively displaying (for example, in a highly saturated manner) icons corresponding to a predetermined number of volume switching buttons (left button 126c and right button 126d), as in means KA7 above.

Means KA8. The pachinko machine 10 includes:
A pachinko machine 10 described in any one of means KA1 to KA7, characterized in that it is configured to be able to terminate the volume down state based on a specific volume switching operation (volume up operation) to the pachinko machine 10 from outside the pachinko machine 10.

It is desirable that the output volume of audio data from the pachinko machine 10 (speaker SP), which is controlled by the audio output control of the sub-control device 262, can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if the volume-down state could be terminated when a volume-up operation is input to the pachinko machine 10, as in means KA8 above.

The following group of inventions can be extracted from the technical features of the third embodiment described above.

Means KB1. A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on the determination by a determination means for determining whether a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific variable display to display a specific variable display result when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a specific result, and then executing a specific game state;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance execution means for performing a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements at least during the specific variable display,
The performance execution means
an information output means capable of controlling an output amount by the performance execution means and capable of outputting specific information at a predetermined output amount to a predetermined connection target outside the performance execution means connected thereto;
This gaming machine is
A plurality of target information corresponding to a plurality of predetermined detection targets in at least the performance execution means and correspondence information corresponding to input of request information to the performance execution means are configured to be able to be displayed on a predetermined display means;
When detecting input of the predetermined request information to the performance execution means, information capable of identifying the predetermined detection target that is the detection target is stored;
after the information is stored, the output amount can be switched so that a specific state in which the specific information is output at an output amount that is smaller than the output amount at the time when the input of the predetermined request information is detected is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to allow input of specified information from the specified detection target corresponding to the information connected to the performance execution means after the specific state is executed.

By using the above-mentioned means KB1, when the effect execution means (audio control unit) is connected to a specified connection target (external audio output unit) to output audio in a suitable manner, audio output control can be performed in a manner that is highly convenient for the player.

Means KB2. The information output means is configured to be able to switch the output amount in at least three stages,
This gaming machine is
The gaming machine described in means KB1 is characterized in that when the multiple target information corresponding to the multiple specified detection targets is displayed on the specified display means, it is configured to output the largest output amount as the specified output amount.

It is desirable that the amount of information output from the gaming machine controlled by the information output means can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if the largest amount of information could be output when multiple pieces of target information corresponding to multiple specified detection targets are displayed on the display means, as in means KB2 above.

Means KB3. The information output means is configured to be able to switch the output amount in at least three stages,
This gaming machine is
The gaming machine described in means KB1 or KB2 is configured so that when the specific state is executed, the specific information can be output with the smallest output amount.

It is desirable that the amount of information output from the gaming machine controlled by the information output means can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if the smallest amount of information could be output when a specific request is input to the gaming machine, as in means KB3 above.

Means KB4. The information output means is configured to be able to switch the output amount in at least three stages,
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means KB1 to KB3, characterized in that when the specific state is executed, the specific information can be output at an output amount that is less than the largest output amount and greater than the smallest output amount.

It is desirable that the amount of information output from the gaming machine controlled by the information output means can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if, as with means KB4 above, an amount of information can be output that is intermediate between the minimum and maximum amounts when a specified request is input to the gaming machine.

Means KB5. The information output means is configured to be able to switch the output amount in at least three stages;
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any one of means KB1 to KB4, characterized in that the output amount can be set from the highest output amount as the predetermined output amount to an output amount that is smaller than the highest output amount and larger than the smallest output amount based on a predetermined operation to the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine.

It is desirable that the amount of information output from the gaming machine controlled by the information output means can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if, as with means KB5 above, an amount of information can be output that is intermediate between the minimum and maximum amounts when a specified operation is input to the gaming machine.

Means KB6. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means KB1 to KB5, characterized in that it is configured to selectively display target information corresponding to at least the specified detection target regarding the output of the specific information from target information corresponding to multiple types of detection targets.

If the effect execution means displays information corresponding to all detection targets on the display means, the player would have to sort through the vast amount of information they need, including unnecessary information, which could significantly reduce convenience for the player. In contrast, selectively displaying the necessary detection targets, as in means KB6 above, increases convenience.

Means KB7. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means KB1 to KB6, characterized in that when the multiple target information is displayed on the specified display means, the target information corresponding to a predetermined number of the predetermined detection targets can be selectively displayed.

If the effect execution means displays information corresponding to multiple detection targets on the display means, the player would have to sort through the vast amount of information that contains unnecessary information, which could significantly reduce convenience for the player. In contrast, convenience is improved by selectively displaying target information corresponding to a predetermined number of predetermined detection targets, as in the above-mentioned means KB7.

Means KB8. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any one of means KB1 to KB7, characterized in that the specific state can be ended based on a specific operation to the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine.

It is desirable that the amount of information output from the gaming machine controlled by the information output means can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if a specific state could be ended when a specific operation is input to the gaming machine, as in means KB8 above.

Fourth Embodiment
A pachinko gaming machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with those of the first to third embodiments (such as the same components and the same processing contents) may be described using the same component names and the same reference numerals.

One type of gaming machine known is a pachinko machine, in which a game is played by firing a gaming ball into a gaming area (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A).

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines output sounds corresponding to various games. The sounds are controlled by the audio control unit of the gaming machine.

When connecting the audio control unit to an external audio output unit to output audio in an optimal manner, audio output control that is highly convenient for players is desired.

More specifically, for example, when wireless earphones for a player playing on a gaming machine are targeted as an external audio output unit connected to the audio control unit, it is desirable to be able to search for, display, select, and pair with the device to be connected, as well as to perform appropriate control after connection.

More specifically, there is a need for suitable control over switching between the output level (output radio wave strength) of radio waves output from a gaming machine when searching for a device to connect to, and the output level (output radio wave strength) of radio waves output from a gaming machine after connection.

The technical concept described in the fourth embodiment has been devised to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that allows for audio output control that is highly convenient for players.

In order to achieve the above object, the technical idea described in the fourth embodiment is as follows:
a lottery unit that executes a winning/losing lottery based on the determination by a determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
A special game execution unit that executes a special variable display to display a special variable display result when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a special lottery result, and then executes a special game state;
A gaming machine comprising: a performance control unit that performs a variable performance using a plurality of performance functions at least during the special variable display;
The performance control unit
The output level can be controlled by the performance control unit, and an output control unit is provided which can output output information at a predetermined output level to a predetermined connected device outside the connected performance control unit,
This gaming machine is
A plurality of pieces of terminal information corresponding to a plurality of predetermined terminal devices in at least the performance control unit and instruction confirmation information corresponding to input of instruction information to the performance control unit are configured to be able to be displayed on a predetermined display unit;
When detecting input of predetermined instruction information to the performance control unit, identification information capable of identifying the predetermined terminal device that is the detection target is stored,
after the identification information is stored, the output level can be switched so as to execute a low output state in which the output information is output at an output level lower than the output level at the time when the input of the predetermined instruction information was detected,
The gist of the invention is that it is configured so that predetermined operation information can be input from the predetermined terminal device corresponding to the identification information connected to the performance control unit after the low output state is executed.

The technical concept described in the fourth embodiment above allows for audio output control that is highly convenient for players.

The specific configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below. As shown in Figure 4-3 and other figures, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of this outer frame 11 so that it can be opened and closed. However, for the sake of convenience, Figure 4-3 omits the game components (nails, accessories, etc.) arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame 14, and other elements.

As shown in Figures 4-6, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made from wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made from extruded aluminum alloy material. These frame components 11a-11d are assembled together into a rectangular frame shape using detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left-side frame component 11c, respectively (see Figure 4-1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, allowing the inner frame 12 to open and close. The inner frame 12 and other components are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

The right-side frame component 11d has an extending wall 83 that protrudes from near its rear widthwise end toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see Figure 4-6) provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 4-5). In addition, as shown in Figure 4-3, the front side of the extending wall 83 is provided with a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 that engage with the locking member of the locking device 600. Furthermore, the lower receiving portion 85 has a pressing portion 86 that protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 and abuts against the inner frame opening detection switch 92 (described below).

A resin decorative panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. A rib 88 that protrudes upward is integrally formed on the innermost part of the top surface of the decorative panel 87. This reduces the likelihood of a gap forming between the decorative panel and the inner frame 12.

As shown in Figure 4-3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward around this opening/closing axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly oval window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

A front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened forward around an opening and closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The front frame 14 may also be configured so that it can be opened and closed directly by the outer frame 11, rather than via the inner frame 12.

The front frame 14, like the inner frame 12, has a rectangular outer shape, and when closed, covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12. A roughly oval window 101 is formed in the center of the front frame 14. This makes it possible to view the game board 30 (play area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. Details of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in Figure 4-1, etc., a lower tray 15 serving as a ball receiving tray is provided at the center of the lower part of the front side of the front frame 14, and gaming balls discharged from the lower payout outlet 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. In addition, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging gaming balls from the lower tray 15 is provided on the front side of the lower tray 15.

A game ball launch handle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "handle") 18 is provided to the right of the lower tray 15, protruding toward the front. The handle 18 is equipped with a rotation operation unit 18a that can be rotated by the player, a touch sensor (not shown) that can detect when the player's hand touches the handle 18, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of operation of the rotation operation unit 18a. With this configuration, when the rotation operation unit 18a is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by the launch device 60, described below, with a launch strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation operation.

The handle 18 is also provided with a stop lever 18b that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the rotation control unit 18a. When the stop lever 18b is pressed to the on state, the launching of game balls by the launching device 60 is prohibited, even if the handle 18 is being held. This means that the rotation control unit 18a can be rotated while prohibiting the launching of game balls, or the launching of game balls can be temporarily stopped while the handle 18 is being held.

As shown in Figure 4-2, an upper tray 19 capable of storing game balls is provided above the lower tray 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls paid out from the upper payout opening 17 and guides them toward the launching device 60 while aligning them in a line. When the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls that are paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray connecting passage 71 and the lower payout opening 16, which will be described later.

A lending switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display unit 124 are provided on the upper right surface of the front edge of the upper tray 19. Typically, in amusement halls, a CR unit (not shown) is located on the left side of the pachinko machine 10. When the lending switch 121 is operated with a gaming card with a balance inserted into the CR unit, lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to the operation. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted into the CR unit. The balance display unit 124 also displays the balance of the card inserted into the CR unit.

In addition, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper right surface of the front edge of the upper tray 19. The ball removal button 123 is configured to be retractable and is always biased upward by a biasing means (not shown). With this configuration, when the ball removal button 123 is pressed, the space between the upper tray 19 and the lower tray 15 is opened, and game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided to the lower tray 15. In other words, by operating the ball removal button 123, the player can transfer game balls from the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time.

Furthermore, a first operation unit 125 and a second operation unit 126, which can be operated by the player, are provided on the upper surface of the center of the front edge of the upper tray 19.

The first operation unit 125 is primarily used for presentation purposes. In this embodiment, the first operation unit 125 is a contact-type unit equipped with a button section that can move in the direction of pressure when pressed by the player (for example, by pressing downwards), and an operation detection switch that turns to a predetermined ON state and outputs a predetermined detection signal when the button section, having moved a predetermined amount, approaches or abuts a predetermined distance against a predetermined detection section. Of course, the configuration of the first operation unit 125 is not limited to this, and other different configurations may also be used.

When the first operation unit 125 (hereinafter referred to as the "effect button 125") is pressed by the player, a predetermined detection signal, which is a predetermined input by the player, is input from the operation detection switch to the sub-control device 262 described below.

As a result, for example, when a player presses the effect button 125 during a specified period while a variable display is being executed (during an effect) on the effect display device 42 (described below), a specified effect will be executed on the effect display device 42 as an effect function.

In addition, when the effect display device 42 is in a standby state (waiting for customers) and no effects such as variable displays are being performed, a user-responsive interrupt state can be generated by the player pressing the effect button 125 with a finger or the like, which will cause the effect display device 42 to display the game history, as described below, or a menu screen 3000 (see Figure 4-66) for customizing the effect content to suit the player's preferences.

On the other hand, the second operation unit 126 is primarily used by the player to perform various setting operations, etc. In this embodiment, an operation means known as a cross key or the like is used as the second operation unit 126.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 4-49, the second operation unit 126 (hereinafter referred to as the "cross key 126") consists of five operation buttons: an up button 126a, a down button 126b, a left button 126c, a right button 126d, and a center button 126e.

Each of the buttons 126a-126e on the cross key 126 is a contact-type button that can move in the direction of pressure when pressed by the player (for example, by pressing downwards), and includes an operation detection switch that turns on when the button moves a predetermined amount and comes within a predetermined distance of or into contact with a predetermined detection unit, thereby outputting a predetermined detection signal.

Of course, the configuration of the operation unit that allows the player to input operations is not limited to the first operation unit 125 or the second operation unit 126, and other different types may be used. For example, the operation unit may be a touch panel that allows the player to input operations by touch, a jog dial that allows the player to input operations by rotation, or a slide lever that allows the player to input operations by sliding. Furthermore, the installation location is not limited to the front edge of the upper tray 19, and may be anywhere that the player can operate.

When the player presses any of the buttons 126a to 126e on the cross key 126, a predetermined detection signal representing a predetermined input by the player is input from each of the operation detection switches to the sub-control device 262, which will be described later.

As a result, for example, when a menu screen 3000 (see Figure 4-66) or the like is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 as described below, the player can use their finger or other object to press the buttons 126a to 126d of the directional pad 126 to move the cursor 3100 displayed on the menu screen 3000 or the like in any direction, up, down, left, or right, or can confirm the item selected by the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button 126e.

In addition, the display unit 42a (menu screen 3000, etc.) of the effect display device 42 displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

In this way, in an interrupt state in which the menu screen 3000 is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, when input of specified operation information corresponding to the multiple pieces of information displayed and output on the menu screen 3000 (menu items such as "Language Settings," "Audio Output Settings," "Brightness Settings," and "Effect Customization," described below), i.e., when a selection operation of a menu item (e.g., "Language Settings") using the directional pad 126 is detected, information (e.g., various language options) related to the specified game specifications (e.g., "Language Settings") is displayed and output on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, making it possible to input information related to the game specifications (e.g., a selection operation of a specified language using the directional pad 126) and output that information (e.g., various output processes based on the selected language).

In addition, various decorative lights (decorative lamps) are provided on the front frame 14 and the game board 30 for presentation purposes. These lights change and control the light emission pattern in response to changes in the game state, enhancing the presentation effect during play.

For example, the front frame 14 has a frame illumination section 102 around the periphery of the window section 101. Error indicator lamps 105 that light up in the event of a specific error are also provided on both sides of the frame illumination section 102.

The gaming board 30 also has a central illumination section 103 located around the periphery of the center frame 47 (described below), and side illumination sections 104 located at the left and right lower parts of the gaming area. These illumination sections 102-104 incorporate light sources such as LEDs and a light emission control board that drives and controls the light sources. The central illumination section 103 is used for the one-shot announcement effects (described below).

Note that if the brightness of the light output from each illumination unit 102-104 is high, the presentation effect will be enhanced, but the player may find it too dazzling. On the other hand, if the brightness of the light is low, the glare can be reduced, but the presentation effect may be reduced.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured to allow the brightness of the light output from each of the illumination units 102-104 to be adjusted to suit the player's preferences, in order to provide a gaming environment suited to each player. Details of how this brightness is adjusted will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-1, speakers SP, which have a presentation function, are provided in the upper left and right corners of the front frame 14 (see Figure 4-3, etc.). The speakers SP output various sounds such as sound effects and background music according to various game states and presentations.

Note that if the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker SP is high, the presentation effect will be enhanced, but it may be perceived as noisy by the player. On the other hand, if the volume of the sound is low, the noise level can be reduced, but the presentation effect may be reduced.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured to allow the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker SP to be adjusted to suit the player's preferences, in order to provide a gaming environment that suits each player. Details of how to adjust the volume will be described later.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of rectangular glass panes attached separately to the front and rear, but rather is round overall and is attached as an assembly.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to Figure 4-4. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 behind the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge abutting the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, approximately the center of the front of the game board 30, which forms the play area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 in the resin base 38.

In addition, a launching device 60 as a launching means and a launching rail 61 that guides the game balls immediately after they are launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39. In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device is used as the launching device 60. Furthermore, a ball feeding device 63 is provided above the launching device 60 to guide the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the launch position of the launching device 60.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (play area) will be explained with reference to Figure 4-4. A rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which guides game balls launched from the launching device 60 to the top of the game board 30. As a result, game balls launched in response to the rotation of the handle 18 are guided into the play area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 via the launch rail 61 and rail 50. The rail 50 consists of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in Figure 4-4). This prevents a game ball that has been guided from the rail 50 into the play area from returning back into the rail 50. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip of the outer rail component 52 (upper right in Figure 4-4). This ensures that a game ball launched with more than a predetermined force will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned, for example, toward the approximate center of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the gaming board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the gaming board 30. Therefore, the playing area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 in the resin base 38. However, because a gaming ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 before passing through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the playing area.

The game area is equipped with a general winning section 31A, a variable winning device 32A as a ball entry means (variable ball entry means), a first start winning section 33WA as a start means (first start winning means), a second start winning section 33WB as a start means (second start winning means), a through gate 34 as a start means (trigger start winning means), a variable display unit 35, etc. These are explained in detail below.

A variable display unit 35 is located approximately in the center of the play area. A first start-up winning section 33WA is located in the play area lower area ED, which is located below the variable display unit 35 within the play area.

The variable display unit 35 is provided with a display device 42 that performs various display effects, and a center frame 47 that surrounds the display device 42. The center frame 47 has a frame shape with an opening in its center, through which the display section 42a of the display device 42 can be seen.

A stage portion 770, on which the game ball can roll, is provided on the upper surface of the lower edge of the center frame 47. A guide groove 774 that slopes gently downward toward the front is formed in the center of the stage portion 770. As shown in Figure 4-4, when the center frame 47 is placed on the game board 30, the guide groove 774 is located directly above the first start winning portion 33WA.

A ball passage (warp flow path) 775 is formed inside the left edge of the center frame 47 to allow game balls to pass through. The entrance of the ball passage 775 opens to the left side of the center of the left edge of the center frame 47 (towards the game board 30 surface). Meanwhile, the exit of the ball passage 775 opens to the right side of the lower end of the left edge of the center frame 47 (towards the stage portion 770). This ball passage 775 can guide game balls flowing down the game board 30 surface in the game area left-side area EA, which is located to the left of the variable display unit 35 within the game area, onto the stage portion 770 within the center frame 47.

A game ball guided onto the stage portion 770 via the ball passage 775 or the like rolls on the stage portion 770, then either falls from the front edge of the stage portion 770 onto the surface of the game board 30, or is ejected onto the surface of the game board 30 via the guide groove 774. Of these, game balls ejected via the guide groove 774 have a relatively high probability of landing in the first start winning section 33WA.

The first start winning section 33WA is located in the lower area ED of the play area, protruding forward from the front of the game board 30, with a winning opening (first start winning opening) above it through which game balls can always enter. In addition, a first start winning switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the first start winning section 33WA, which can detect game balls that enter through the first start winning opening.

Under this configuration, when a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and the first start winning switch 224a detects the gaming ball and turns on, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot state will be generated as a special gaming state (jackpot lottery), and a changing pattern is displayed on the first special pattern display device 43A, which will be described later. When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and the first start winning switch 224a detects the gaming ball and turns on, the start condition is met, and based on this, a changing pattern is displayed on the first special pattern display device 43A.

A variable winning device 32A is located below the first starting winning section 33WA in the lower area ED of the play area.

The variable prize winning device 32A is equipped with a large prize winning opening 32Aa through which game balls can enter, a large prize winning opening shutter 32Ab as an opening/closing member that opens and closes the large prize winning opening 32Aa, a large prize winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the large prize winning opening shutter 32Ab to open and close, and a large prize winning opening count switch 222 that can detect game balls that have entered the large prize winning opening 32Aa.

Under this configuration, the variable winning device 32A is normally in a closed state in which the large prize opening shutter 32Ab closes the large prize opening 32Aa from above and below, preventing game balls flowing down the lower game area ED from entering the large prize opening 32Aa. Furthermore, in this closed state, game balls can flow down in front of the large prize opening shutter 32Ab.

On the other hand, when a jackpot occurs, the variable winning device 32A tilts forward with the large winning opening shutter 32Ab pivoting around its lower edge, opening the game ball flowing down the lower area ED of the game area to enter the large winning opening 32Aa.

In the lower area ED of the play area, in the left-hand region, located to the left of the first start-up winning unit 33WA and the variable winning device 32A, multiple general winning units 31A are arranged along the periphery of the play area. The general winning units 31A are arranged to protrude forward from the front of the play board 30, with a winning opening (general winning opening) above them through which game balls can always enter. Additionally, a left general winning switch 221a is provided in a position corresponding to the general winning unit 31A, which can detect game balls entering through the general winning opening.

In addition, a through gate 34 is provided in the right-side area EB of the gaming area, located to the right of the variable display unit 35, and a second start-up winning section 33WB is provided downstream of the through gate 34.

The through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area to pass through one by one, and has a through gate switch 225 that can detect game balls passing through it.

When a gaming ball passes through the through gate 34 (when the through gate switch 225 detects the gaming ball and turns on), a start-up winning support lottery is held to determine whether the second start-up winning section 33WB will be opened, as described below, and a variable display is displayed on the normal pattern display device 41, described below, to indicate the result of the start-up winning support lottery. Here, if the start-up winning support lottery is won, the second start-up winning section 33WB will be opened for a specified period of time after the variable display ends.

The second start-up winning section 33WB is a variable winning device that changes state between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter.

In more detail, the second start winning section 33WB comprises a second start winning opening 33WBa through which a game ball can enter, a pair of left and right blade members 33WBb that act as opening and closing members provided on the left and right sides of the second start winning opening 33WBa, a start winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the pair of blade members 33WBb to open and close, and a second start winning switch 224b that can detect a game ball that has entered the second start winning opening 33WBa.

The pair of blade members 33WBb are each rotatably supported on a shaft and are normally maintained in a closed position (closed state) close to each other. In addition, an entry prevention member 145 is provided directly above the second start winning section 33WB to prevent game balls from entering between the pair of blade members 33WBb in the closed state. As a result, under normal circumstances, the second start winning section 33WB is in a closed state, preventing game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area from entering the second start winning opening 33WBa.

On the other hand, as described below, when a predetermined opening condition is met, the pair of blade members 33WBb rotate and displace so that their tips move away from each other, entering the open position (open state). This creates a gap between the entry prevention member 145 and the tip of each blade member 33WBb through which game balls can pass, and the second start winning section 33WB enters an open state that allows game balls flowing down the right area EB of the game area to enter the second start winning port 33WBa.

Under this configuration, when a gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, which is in the open state, and the second start winning switch 224b detects the gaming ball and turns on, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot state will be generated as a special gaming state (jackpot lottery), and the second special symbol display device 43B, described below, displays a changing symbol. When a gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB and the second start winning switch 224b detects the gaming ball and turns on, the start condition is met, and based on this, the second special symbol display device 43B displays a changing symbol.

For ease of explanation, the fluctuating display for a predetermined period triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will be referred to as the "first fluctuating display," and the fluctuating display for a predetermined period triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be referred to as the "second fluctuating display." Furthermore, the fluctuating time of the first fluctuating display will be referred to as the "first fluctuating time," and the fluctuating time of the second fluctuating display will be referred to as the "second fluctuating time."

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) one of the various winning sections, such as the general winning section 31A, variable winning device 32A, or start-up winning sections 33WA and 33WB, it is detected by various winning switches, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15.

In this embodiment, 10 game balls (prize balls) are paid out when the ball lands in the general prize section 31A, 15 when the ball lands in the variable prize device 32A (large prize opening 32Aa), 3 when the ball lands in the first start prize section 33WA, and 3 when the ball lands in the second start prize section 33WB.

In addition, the gaming board 30 is provided with an outlet 36 corresponding to the bottom of the gaming area (the lower gaming area area ED), and gaming balls that do not win in the general winning section 31A or other winning sections are discharged through this outlet 36 to the outside of the gaming area (the back side of the gaming board 30). The gaming board 30 is also equipped with numerous nails, windmills, and other components to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the gaming balls fall.

Next, we will explain the various game states in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. First, we will explain the types of jackpots in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "15-round jackpot," "8-round jackpot," and "4-round jackpot."

Hereinafter, a "15-round jackpot" will be referred to as a "15R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "15RS" in the drawings. Similarly, an "8-round jackpot" will be referred to as an "8R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "8RS" in the drawings. Furthermore, a "4-round jackpot" will be referred to as a "4R jackpot" and will be abbreviated to "4RS" in the drawings.

In the "15R jackpot" state, the jackpot opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Note that the "jackpot opening operation" refers to the opening and closing operation that occurs after the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable prize winning device 32A is switched from a closed state to an open state, until the shutter returns to the closed state after the specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed or the specified number of eight game balls has entered the variable prize winning device 32A (same below).

In an "8R jackpot" state, the jackpot release action is repeated eight times (8 rounds), and in a "4R jackpot" state, the jackpot release action is repeated four times (4 rounds).

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot awarded in the win/lose lottery differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB. If the win/lose lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first start winning section 33WA is won, the jackpot is assigned to either a "15R jackpot" or a "4R jackpot" (except during the time-saving B mode, described below). Also, if the win/lose lottery triggered by the game ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is won, the jackpot is assigned to either a "15R jackpot," an "8R jackpot," or a "4R jackpot."

Next, we will explain the start ball entry support state for the second start ball entry section 33WB. In this embodiment, the start ball entry support state is switched between a "high ball entry state (high support state)" in which the blade members 33WBb of the second start ball entry section 33WB are opened relatively frequently, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB, and a "low ball entry state (low support state)" in which the blade members 33WBb are opened less frequently than in the "high ball entry state," making it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB.

The "high ball entry state" may be defined as (1) a state in which the variable display time of the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the "low ball entry state," (2) a state in which the opening time (prescribed time) of the second start entry section 33WB is longer than in the "low ball entry state," (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can enter per opening of the second start entry section 33WB is greater than in the "low ball entry state," (4) a state in which the second start entry section 33WB is opened more times per winning of the start entry support lottery than in the "low ball entry state," or (5) a state in which the probability of winning the start entry support lottery is higher than in the "low ball entry state." The "high ball entry state" in this embodiment employs the above configurations (1), (2), and (5). Of course, the "high ball entry state" is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) through (5), or any combination of configurations (1) through (5), may be employed.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the start ball entry support lottery is won, the second start ball entry section 33WB opens twice over a predetermined period of 0.2 seconds in the "low ball entry state," and twice over a predetermined period of 1.8 seconds in the "high ball entry state." This makes it easier for game balls to frequently enter the second start ball entry section 33WB in the "high ball entry state."

Next, we will explain the various game states (various game modes) when the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display changes.

In this embodiment, the game mode is configured to switch between three modes: "Normal mode," which is the normal game mode; "Variable time reduction mode with starting ball entry support (hereinafter referred to as "Time reduction A mode")," which can be entered after the end of a jackpot state; and "Variable time reduction mode with starting ball entry support (hereinafter referred to as "Time reduction B mode")," which can be activated if a predetermined period of time has passed without a jackpot state occurring.

In "normal mode," the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display changes at normal times in a "normal change state," and the starting goal support state becomes a "low goal state."

In "Time-saving A Mode" and "Time-saving B Mode," the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display changes for a shorter time than normal, resulting in a "change time reduction state," and the starting goal support state becomes a "high goal state." Furthermore, the "normal change state" and "change time reduction state" can be switched by changing the change time determination table, as described below.

"Time-saving A mode" is a game mode that can be entered after the end of a jackpot state. In this embodiment, regardless of whether a "15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," or "4R jackpot" occurs, a predetermined period of "Time-saving A mode" can be granted after the end of that jackpot state. Specifically, after the end of a "15R jackpot" or "8R jackpot," "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted, and after the end of a "4R jackpot," "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play times is granted.

When the start conditions for "Time-saving A Mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a low ball entry state (non-assisted state) corresponding to "Normal Mode" to a high ball entry state (assisted state) corresponding to "Time-saving A Mode," as described below.

Then, if the number of times that variable play (miss variable play) is executed on the special symbol display device 43A, 43B (mainly the second special symbol display device 43B) during "Time-saving A Mode" reaches the upper limit of 100 times or 10 times without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving A Mode" ends and the game transitions to "Normal Mode."

When the termination conditions for "Time-saving A Mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a high ball entry state (auxiliary state) corresponding to "Time-saving A Mode" to a low ball entry state (non-auxiliary state) corresponding to "Normal Mode."

In addition, "Time-saving B mode (ceiling time-saving mode)" is a game mode that can be activated when the number of times a variable game (miss variable game) executed on the special symbol display device 43A, 43B (mainly the first special symbol display device 43A) has been executed without a jackpot occurring during "normal mode" reaches a predetermined upper limit (the so-called ceiling) of 500 times.

When the start conditions for "Time-saving B mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a low ball entry state (non-assisted state) corresponding to "normal mode" to a high ball entry state (assisted state) corresponding to "Time-saving B mode," as described below.

Then, if the number of variable games (miss variable games) executed on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B (mainly the second special symbol display device 43B) during "Time-saving B Mode" reaches a predetermined upper limit of 200 times without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving B Mode" ends and the game transitions to "Normal Mode."

When the termination conditions for "Time-saving B mode" are met, the control state for the blade members 33WBb of the second starting winning section 33WB is switched from a high ball entry state (auxiliary state) corresponding to "Time-saving B mode" to a low ball entry state (non-auxiliary state) corresponding to "normal mode."

However, in this embodiment, once "Time-saving B Mode" is activated and ends without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving B Mode" will not be activated again unless a new jackpot occurs or data is cleared from RAM 503 of the main control unit 261.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in "normal mode," the start ball entry support state for the second start ball entry section 33WB does not become a "high ball entry state," but becomes a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry section 33WB, so essentially, balls do not enter the second start ball entry section 33WB.

In addition, as will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, the effect display device 42 displays various effects corresponding to the current game state (game mode). For example, there is a "normal stage effect" that is displayed when the ball enters the first start winning section 33WA in "normal mode," a "rush stage effect" that is displayed when "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted, a "battle stage effect" that is displayed when "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play times is granted, and a "lucky stage effect" that is displayed when "time-saving B mode" with a maximum of 200 variable play times is granted.

As shown in Figure 4-4, on the outer right upper corner of the playing area, the following devices are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10: a normal pattern display device 41 as a variable display device (normal pattern variable display device) for displaying the results of the start ball entry support lottery, which is held based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34; a first special pattern display device 43A as a variable display device (first special pattern variable display device) for displaying the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) held based on the ball entering the first start ball entry section 33WA; and a second special pattern display device 43B as a variable display device (second special pattern variable display device) for displaying the results of the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) held based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section 33WB.

The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (normal symbol lamps). When a gaming ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol lamp on the right side of the normal symbol display device 41 flashes (variable display), for example. After the variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined period of time, the variable display is stopped based on the results of the start-going ball support lottery. In other words, the lighting state (combination of lit normal symbol lamps) when the variable display stops corresponds to the various results of the start-going ball support lottery, and the lighting state when the variable display stops definitively displays the results of the start-going ball support lottery. For example, lighting both the left and right normal symbol lamps indicates a "win," and lighting only the left normal symbol lamp indicates a "lose."

The first special symbol display device 43A is composed of four LEDs (first special symbol lamps). When a ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, the first special symbol display device 43A switches the display of the first special symbol lamp (first variable display).

Then, after the special symbol variable play (first variable display) has been performed for a predetermined time on the first special symbol display device 43A, the first variable display will be stopped based on the results of the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the lighting mode (combination of lit special symbol lamps) when the first variable display stops corresponds to the various results of the win/lose lottery, and the lighting mode when the first variable display stops definitively displays the result of the win/lose lottery, i.e., "jackpot" or "miss." In other words, if the result of the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) is a jackpot winning result, which is the special lottery result, the jackpot variable display, which is the special variable display, will be performed for a predetermined time and then will be stopped and displayed in the jackpot stopped mode, which is the special variable display result.

The second special symbol display device 43B is composed of four LEDs (second special symbol lamps). When a ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, the second special symbol display device 43B switches the display of the second special symbol lamp (second variable display).

Then, after the special symbol variable play (second variable display) has been performed for a predetermined time on the second special symbol display device 43B, the second variable display will be stopped based on the results of the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the lighting mode (combination of lit special symbol lamps) when the second variable display has stopped corresponds to the various results of the win/lose lottery, and the lighting mode when the second variable display has stopped definitively displays the result of the win/lose lottery, i.e., "jackpot" or "miss." In other words, if the result of the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) is a jackpot win result, which is the special lottery result, the jackpot variable display, which is the special variable display, will be performed for a predetermined time and then will be stopped and displayed in the jackpot stop mode, which is the special variable display result.

Furthermore, the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B also indicate the type of jackpot (whether it is a "15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," or "4R jackpot") depending on the lighting pattern (stop pattern) that they stop. Note that there are multiple stop patterns for the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B that indicate various types of jackpots and misses, and one of these is selected and displayed as a stop.

In addition, the stationary display on the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B is maintained for a specified period of time, and after that period (variation interval) has elapsed, the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, if the next variable display does not occur even after a specified time has elapsed after the first special pattern display device 43A or the second special pattern display device 43B has displayed a stopped display, the first special pattern display device 43A or the second special pattern display device 43B is configured to switch from an illumination mode indicating the result of the win/lose lottery to an illumination mode indicating a standby state in which no variable display is being performed. This is not a limitation, and the illumination mode indicating the result of the win/lose lottery may also be maintained as is.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, which is a start condition, while the first variable display is being executed, the first variable display corresponding to the ball is reserved and stored, and the reserved first variable display is started after the currently executing first variable display is stopped. Similarly, if a game ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, which is a start condition, while the second variable display is being executed, the reserved second variable display corresponding to the ball is reserved and stored, and the currently executing second variable display is stopped and stored, and the reserved second variable display is started.

In addition, if a game ball passes through the through gate 34 while a variable display is being displayed on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display corresponding to that passage is stored on hold, and after the currently running variable display is stopped, the stored variable display is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, adjacent to the normal symbol display device 41 and the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B are a normal hold display device 44 that indicates that the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held and stored, a first hold display device 46A that can notify or indicate that the first variable display is held and stored (the right to execute the first variable display has been obtained), and a second hold display device 46B that can notify or indicate that the second variable display is held and stored (the right to execute the second variable display has been obtained). In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 43A, the second special symbol display device 43B, the first hold display device 46A, the second hold display device 46B, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 are directly display-controlled by the main control device 261, which serves as the main control unit, as described below.

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to reserve and store up to four display variations of the normal symbol display device 41, which are performed based on the passage of a gaming ball through the through gate 34. For example, if one display variation of the normal symbol display device 41 is reserved, the normal hold lamp on the left will light up; if two displays are reserved, the normal hold lamps on the left and right will light up; if three displays are reserved, the normal hold lamp on the left will flash and the normal hold lamp on the right will light up; and if four displays are reserved, the normal hold lamps on the left and right will flash. Furthermore, if a new gaming ball passes through the through gate 34 during a jackpot state, the display variations for that display may also be reserved.

The first hold display device 46A is composed of two LEDs (first hold lamps). In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four first change displays based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning section 33WA. For example, if one first change display is held, the first hold lamp on the left will light up; if two first change displays are held, both the left and right first hold lamps will light up; if three first change displays are held, the left first hold lamp will flash and the right first hold lamp will light up; and if four first change displays are held, both the left and right first hold lamps will flash. If multiple first change displays are held and stored, they will be consumed sequentially in the order they were held and stored (starting with the earliest one).

The second hold display device 46B is composed of two LEDs (second hold lamps). In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four second variable displays based on the entry of game balls into the second start winning section 33WB. For example, if one second variable display is held, the second hold lamp on the left will light up; if two second variable displays are held, the second hold lamps on the left and right will light up; if three second variable displays are held, the second hold lamp on the left will flash and the second hold lamp on the right will light up; and if four second variable displays are held, the second hold lamps on the left and right will flash. If multiple second variable displays are held and stored, the second variable displays will be consumed sequentially in the order in which they were held and stored (starting with the first one).

Furthermore, if a new game ball enters the start winning section 33WA, 33WB during the jackpot state, the corresponding variable display is also put on hold and not started. The variable display is not executed during the jackpot state, and the variable display starts in a predetermined order after the jackpot state ends. However, in this embodiment, as described below, during the jackpot state, a "right hit" is usually performed, and it is relatively easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33WB located in the right area EB of the play area. Therefore, after the jackpot state ends, the second variable display is basically put on hold and stored.

As described above, basically, the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the first start winning section 33WA and is consumed in the order in which they entered, and the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the second start winning section 33WB and is consumed in the order in which they entered.

However, if the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB are on hold (one or more of the first hold lamps and one or more of the second hold lamps are lit), the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be consumed first. In other words, the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will not be displayed unless all of the second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB have been consumed. For example, if one first hold lamp on the first hold display device 46A is lit, a game ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, and one second hold lamp on the second hold display device 46B lights up, the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will be postponed, and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be displayed first.

The performance display device 42 of the variable display unit 35 is composed of a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display section 42a, and the display content is controlled by the sub-controller 262 and display controller 45, which will be described later. That is, in the performance display device 42, the auxiliary display content is determined by the sub-controller 262 based on commands from the main controller 261 to correspond to the results displayed on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B, etc., and is displayed by the display controller 45, which will be described later.

The effect display device 42 is configured to be able to display effect variations (such as varying decorative patterns) in accordance with the variations displayed by the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 4-44, the effect display device 42 is provided with three pattern display areas: top, middle, and bottom (top pattern display area, middle pattern display area, bottom pattern display area), and multiple types of decorative patterns (patterns numbered 1 to 9) are displayed (variably displayed) in succession in each pattern display area, after which the decorative patterns are displayed in a static manner for each pattern display area in order (for example, top pattern display area → bottom pattern display area → middle pattern display area).

Then, when the main control device 261 confirms that a jackpot state has occurred, the first or second special symbol display device 43A, 43B displays a display corresponding to the jackpot, which is the special lottery result, and the effect display device 42 displays decorative symbols in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, which is the special variable display result (for example, the same decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a line on a predetermined active line in the upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area), and the jackpot state begins.

Also, when decorative symbols are displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot, the preliminary step is, for example, to display the same decorative symbols stopped on a predetermined effective line in the upper and lower symbol display areas. This state, in which the same symbols are displayed stopped on a predetermined effective line in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the middle symbol display area is still displaying a variable pattern, is called a reach state. Of course, just because a reach state has occurred does not necessarily mean that a jackpot state will occur, and there are cases in which the jackpot will not occur.

In this embodiment, after a reach state occurs, a jackpot state occurs when the same decorative pattern as the reach pattern displayed in the upper and lower pattern display areas is displayed stopped on the same active line in the middle pattern display area (when a decorative pattern with the same number as the reach pattern is displayed stopped). However, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot cannot be determined depending on the type of decorative pattern displayed.

As shown in Figure 4-3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray connecting passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 (described below) to the lower payout outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray connecting passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19. Furthermore, there is a predetermined gap between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame 14 is formed with a foul ball passage 72 that guides game balls that fall through the gap to the lower tray 15. As a result, if a game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and travels back up the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72.

Furthermore, a launched ball passage 74 is provided which connects the upper tray 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and guides game balls stored in the upper tray 19 to the ball feeding device 63. In addition, a communication hole (not shown) which connects with the lower tray communication passage 71 is formed in the launched ball passage 74, and a first shutter (not shown) which opens and closes the communication hole is provided. The first shutter is normally biased by a biasing means (not shown) towards a closed position which closes the communication hole. Furthermore, the first shutter is linked to the ball removal button 123, and is configured to displace to an open position which opens the communication hole when the ball removal button 123 is pressed.

As shown in Figure 4-2, the lower tray 15 is formed with an outlet 15a that allows game balls stored in the lower tray 15 to be discharged outside the pachinko machine 10, and is provided with a second shutter 15b that opens and closes the outlet 15a. The second shutter 15b is normally biased toward a closed position that closes the outlet 15a by a biasing means (not shown). Furthermore, the second shutter 15b is configured to move in conjunction with the ball removal lever 25, and is configured to displace to an open position that opens the outlet 15a when the ball removal lever 25 is slid to the left, for example.

Reference numeral 67 in Figures 4-3 and 4-4 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by the payout mechanism 352 (described later) to the front of the inner frame 12, and is divided into a passage leading to the upper tray connecting passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray connecting passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Furthermore, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67. When the front frame 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, almost completely closing the outlet of the dispensing passage 67.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end of the entrance side of the lower tray connecting passage 71. The entrance (ball inlet) of the lower tray connecting passage 71 and the entrance (ball inlet) of the upper tray connecting passage 73 are located adjacent to each other. Furthermore, when the front frame 14 is closed, the entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance, allowing game balls to pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray connecting passage 73 are full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow toward the lower tray connecting passage 71 (overflowing into the entrance side of the lower tray connecting passage 71), and are paid out through the lower tray connecting passage 71 to the lower tray 15.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray connecting passage 71. The presence of this full detection switch makes it possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and game balls are stuck in the lower tray connecting passage 71). In this embodiment, based on the full detection switch continuously detecting game balls for a predetermined period of time, an error notification is controlled to inform the player that the lower tray 15 is full using a display or sound on the performance display device 42. Furthermore, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray connecting passage 71 is resolved and game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are not detected continuously for a predetermined period of time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 4-5, 4-6, etc. On the rear of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some parts overlapping front to back, and furthermore, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) that supplies game balls, a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. The payout mechanism and protective cover are integrated into one unit, and as the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as the back pack, this unit will be referred to here as the "back pack unit 203."

First, we will explain the rear structure of the gaming board 30. As shown in Figure 4-6, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided protruding rearward on the rear side of the variable display unit 35 (see Figure 4-4), which is arranged corresponding to the through-hole in the center of the gaming board 30. Also, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the performance display device 42, which is an LCD display device facing forward through the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 are removably attached in a stacked state in the front and rear.

The effect display device 42 is housed in a storage box (reference numeral omitted) with an opening formed to expose the LCD display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is fixed to the back side of the frame cover 213. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42. The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and is fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material, etc., so that the interiors can be seen. An LED control board, etc. that drives the LEDs, etc. built into the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning section 31A, variable winning device 32A, and start winning sections 33WA, 33WB from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won in the various winning sections. The game balls recovered by this ball recovery mechanism are guided to the discharge passage section 217, described below, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control unit 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control unit 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215 and can be opened to the rear.

The main control device 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 comprises a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, with the box base and box cover connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless specified traces are left behind. This makes it easy to detect if the board box 263 has been tampered with.

Although not shown in the figures, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221a, the large winning slot count switch 222, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221a, etc. and the main control unit 261, and is electrically connected to the main control unit 261 via a cable connector. In contrast, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, which detect winning in the start winning sections 33WA and 33WB, are connected directly to the main control unit 261 via a connector cable, without going through a relay board.

The detection results from the various ball entry detection switches are input into the main control unit 261. The main control unit 261 then sends a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) based on the winning status at each time to the payout control unit 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the output signal from the payout control unit 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, the back of the game board 30 is also provided with a second board relay board that relays various motors and solenoids to the main control unit 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in Figure 4-5, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit consisting of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (right side in Figure 4-5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward around an opening/closing axis extending vertically. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left side (upper right side in Figure 4-5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is a relay board for externally outputting various information from the main control unit 261 to the hall computer (not shown) of the gaming hall. It is electrically connected to the main control unit 261 and has multiple output terminals (10 in this embodiment) that can output signals according to the gaming status to the outside.

A specified communications cable (in this embodiment, a two-core cable consisting of two core wires) is connected to each output terminal. Each output terminal is composed of a pair of upper and lower core wire insertion sections (numbers omitted), each of which is configured to insert and clamp one core wire. In other words, a pair of upper and lower core wire insertion sections function as a single output terminal.

Meanwhile, the other end of the communication cable is electrically connected to the hall computer via a relay device (not shown). As a result, information (signals) output from a specified output terminal on the external terminal board 240 is input to the hall computer via the communication cable connected to that output terminal. The hall computer then uses the various pieces of information input in this way to grasp the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 that is the output source.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 4-5, the output terminals for outputting information from the main control device 261 to the hall computer include a terminal (first terminal) for outputting information (jackpot signal 1) that is output only when the current gaming state is in a jackpot state, and a terminal (second terminal) for outputting information (jackpot signal 2) that is output when the current gaming state is either in a jackpot state or a high ball entry state (high support state).

In addition, although not designated by reference numerals for the sake of simplicity, the external terminal board 240 of this embodiment also includes a terminal (third terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a variable display has been made in the first special pattern display device 43A, a terminal (fourth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a variable display has been made in the second special pattern display device 43B, a terminal (fifth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a game ball has entered the first start winning section 33WA, and information (identification signal) indicating that a game ball has entered the second start winning section 33WB. a terminal (sixth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that the inner frame 12 is open; a terminal (seventh terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that the front frame 14 is open; a terminal (ninth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that various errors (winning error, no tank ball error, payout error, etc.) have been detected; and a terminal (tenth terminal) for outputting information (identification signal) indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls have been paid out from the payout control device 311.

Furthermore, it is not necessary for all output terminals on the external terminal board 240 to be connected to the hall computer; which output terminal to obtain information from is determined at the discretion of the amusement hall manager, etc. In other words, the amusement hall manager, etc. can use only the information necessary depending on the type of operation of the amusement hall.

Furthermore, the type of information output from the external terminal board 240 and the number of output terminals for outputting the information are not limited to the configuration exemplified above, and may be configured to output information different from the information (signals) exemplified above depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

The back pack 351 is molded as a single unit from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, with only the bottom open, and is large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to also cover the top and right sides of the board box 263 (the left side in Figures 4-5). As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is closed, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board-side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered.

The payout mechanism 352 is arranged to bypass the protective cover 354. Above the protective cover 354, a tank 355 with an opening at the top is provided, and this tank 355 is continuously replenished with gaming balls supplied from the island facilities of the gaming hall. Connected below the tank 355 is a tank rail 356, which has, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently slopes downstream, and a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of gaming balls are appropriately paid out using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The gaming balls paid out by the payout device 358 are then supplied to the upper tray 19, etc.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 also includes a dispensing relay board 381 that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, as well as a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. Main power, for example, 24V AC, is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

Below the rear pack unit 203 (base box 263), a lower frame set 251 is provided, pivoted on the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in Figure 4-5) and openable to the rear. As shown in Figure 4-6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage 217 into which game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a discharge chute (not shown) is formed at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage 217 for discharging game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, game balls that win in each winning section, such as the general winning section 31A, are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the rear frame set 215 and then discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage 217, and game balls that do not win in any winning section are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are constructed as separate units that can be opened and closed independently, but the rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 may also be formed as a single unit.

Also, as shown in Figures 4-5, the power supply/launch control device 310, payout control device 311, and CR unit connection board 314 are removably attached in a stacked front-to-back position to the back side of the lower frame set 251. The power supply/launch control device 310 includes a launch control circuit 312 and a power supply circuit 313, and is housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

The dispensing control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 housing the main control device 261 described above, so that evidence that the board box 311a has been opened will remain.

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in board box 314a and fixed to the back side of board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, allowing the interior to be seen.

The dispensing control device 311 is also provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the base box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a dispensing error, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor will rotate forward and reverse, clearing the ball jam (returning to normal operation).

Furthermore, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the circuit board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is maintained, and when power is restored after the power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, when the power is turned off in the normal manner (for example, when the amusement hall closes), the state before the power outage is stored and retained. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, press the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power.

As shown in Figure 4-6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 has a cylinder lock 600a (see Figure 4-1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame 14. By inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, the inner frame 12 can be unlocked, and by rotating it in the other direction, the front frame 14 can be unlocked. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As mentioned above, the right-hand frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 has an extended wall 83 formed on it that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see Figures 4-5). This makes it difficult to insert a wire or similar object from the rear side of the outer frame 11 and use the wire or similar object to operate the locking device 600. As a result, defensive performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extended wall 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in Figures 4-5) of the rear pack unit 203 and lower frame set 251 from the rear side, preventing the rear pack unit 203 and lower frame set 251 from being opened when the inner frame 12 is closed.

As shown in Figure 4-4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (to the right of the launcher 60), and as shown in Figure 4-5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in Figure 4-5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can be retracted into the switch main body, with the front frame open detection switch 91 being arranged so that its detection unit faces forward and the inner frame open detection switch 92 being arranged so that its detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in an ON state protruding from the switch main body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control unit 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and retracted into the switch main body, it outputs an OFF signal to the main control unit 261. In other words, when the front frame 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14, turning it to the OFF state, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detection part of the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing part 86 integrally formed with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11, turning it to the OFF state, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Figures 4-7 are block diagrams showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 is equipped with a CPU 501, a one-chip microcomputer that serves as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 contains a ROM 502, which is a memory unit that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503, which is a memory unit that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, and each function may be integrated into a separate chip.

RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of the CPU 501's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by the CPU 501 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 503a.

In addition, RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a is backed up.

Backup area 503a is an area that stores the values of the stack pointer, registers, I/O, etc. at the time of power outage (including power outages; the same applies below) so that when power is restored, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off due to a power outage or other reason. Data is written to backup area 503a by the main processing when power is cut off, and conversely, the values written to backup area 503a are restored by the main processing when power is turned on (including power on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies below). Note that when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from power outage monitoring circuit 542 (described below). When a power outage occurs, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501, which has built-in ROM 502 and RAM 503, via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus, a data bus, etc. The input/output port 505 is also connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, special symbol display devices 43A and 43B, and normal symbol display device 41, which will be described later. With this configuration, the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

For convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input/output port 505 is connected to various detection switches such as the general winning switch 221a, the large winning slot count switch 222, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, and the through gate switch 225; various boards such as the power supply/launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the sub-control device 262; information display devices such as the hold display devices 46A and 46B and the normal hold display device 44; a solenoid that operates the variable winning device 32A; and a solenoid that operates the second start winning unit 33WB. In other words, the main control device 261 is provided with multiple terminals (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminals and the like constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) serving as the performance control unit comprises a CPU 551, which is an arithmetic unit; a ROM 552, which is a memory unit that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551; a RAM 553, which is a memory unit that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 552 are executed; an input/output port 554; and a bus line 555. The sub-control device 262 also comprises a Bluetooth module 1200 for wireless communication with the outside world using Bluetooth (registered trademark), as well as various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, timer circuit, and data transmission/reception circuit (not shown).

RAM 553 is provided with a game information storage area for storing various game information (game data). The game information storage area stores game history information such as the number of times a variable display has been executed (number of starts) and the number of jackpots, as well as execution history information indicating that a specific effect such as a premium effect has been executed, and when a jackpot variable display is executed, execution history information related to the jackpot variable display (such as the type of effect executed in the jackpot variable display, the type of jackpot stop symbol, and the appearance rate and reliability of various customized effects) is stored. Of course, the configuration may also store the number of times a variable display in which various effects such as a school of fish effect have been executed, not only in the case of a jackpot variable display but also in the case of a miss variable display.

More specifically, the sub-controller 262 updates various counters based on commands sent from the main controller 261, and stores these in the game status information storage area of RAM 553.

For example, when the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 261, it increments the values of the total start counter and the inter-jackpot start counter set in the game information storage area by 1.

The total start counter counts the number of times (starts) the variable display has been executed in this pachinko machine 10 from the time the power was turned on until the present time. The inter-jackpot start counter counts the number of times the variable display has been executed in this pachinko machine 10 from the end of the previous jackpot state until the present time.

In addition, when the sub-controller 262 receives an opening command from the main controller 261 indicating the start of a jackpot state, it increments the values of the total jackpot counter and consecutive jackpot counter set in the game information storage area by one.

The total jackpot counter counts the number of jackpots that have been executed on this pachinko machine 10 from the time the power was turned on until the present time. The consecutive jackpot counter counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have been executed without returning to the normal state from the first jackpot (number of consecutive wins). Note that a "first jackpot" refers to a jackpot won in the normal state with a low ball entry state (low support state).

In addition, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 is provided with a user-associated area (custom information storage area) for storing various custom information customized by the player, as described below (see Figure 4-65).

The user-related area includes input value storage areas such as a language setting area (language setting flag) for storing custom information related to the language used, a brightness level setting area for storing custom information related to the brightness levels of the illumination units 102-104, an audio setting area for storing custom information related to the audio output from the speaker SP and the wireless earphones (hereinafter simply referred to as "earphones") 2500 described below (a volume level setting area for storing volume level information, an output device setting area for storing output device information), and a performance custom information storage area for storing custom information related to various performances.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 performs output setting processing to make various settings (such as erasing custom information entered by the player or setting default values) for the various storage areas of the user-related area (language setting area, brightness level setting area, audio setting area, effect custom information storage area, etc.) during initial setting processing when the power is turned on, and at the timing of the end of the demo screen display described below (when the next variable display has not started even after a predetermined time has passed since the demo screen display started on the effect display device 42), etc.

Here, we will explain some specific examples of the processing performed in this output setting process. Of course, the above output setting process (such as the process of setting default values) is not limited to the examples below, and is performed for all storage areas in the user-associated area.

For example, no matter what language was set in the "Language Setting Area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had customized the language by entering "Chinese" or "English"), once the above output setting process is performed, the default language, "Japanese," will be newly set in the "Language Setting Area."

Furthermore, no matter what brightness level was set in the "brightness level setting area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had customized the brightness level to "2" or "5"), once the above output setting process was performed, the "brightness level setting area" will be newly set to the default value of level "3".

Furthermore, no matter what volume level was set in the "volume level setting area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had customized volume level "1" or volume level "4"), once the above output setting process was performed, the "volume level setting area" will be newly set to the default value of level "3".

Furthermore, no matter what fish school reliability level was set in the "fish school reliability storage area" of the "effect custom information storage area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had input a customized fish school reliability level of "10%" or "90%)), the default value of "50%" will be newly set in the "fish school reliability storage area" once the above output setting process is performed.

Furthermore, no matter what cut-in appearance rate was set in the "Cut-in Appearance Rate Storage Area" of the "Effect Custom Information Storage Area" before the above output setting process was performed (for example, even if the player had input a custom cut-in appearance rate of "0%" or "70%)), the default appearance rate of "60%" will be newly set in the "Cut-in Appearance Rate Storage Area" once the above output setting process is performed.

In addition to or instead of the above configuration, an output setting process may be performed to perform various settings (such as erasing custom information entered by the player or setting default values) for the various memory areas in the user-related area when a demo screen display starts (when the next variable display does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since a predetermined variable display has been confirmed and stopped on the performance display device 42) or when the next variable display does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the demo screen display ended.

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 via the bus line 555. Furthermore, the input/output port 554 is also connected to the display control device 45, speaker SP, effect buttons 125, cross key 126 (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d, and center button 126e), illumination units 102-104, and error indicator lamp 105.

The CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines the performance content based on command signals (e.g., variation pattern commands) sent from the main controller 261, and controls the output of various information and signals to the performance display device 42, speaker SP, illumination units 102-104, etc.

More specifically, the sub-controller 262 causes the display controller 45 to execute display control related to the performance display device 42 based on a command signal transmitted from the main controller 261, and causes the performance display device 42 to output specified image information.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B controlled by the main control device 261 indicate that various winning combinations have been won, and the effect display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 displays decorative patterns as one of the variable effects in conjunction with the variable display of special patterns on the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B.

In addition, based on a command signal sent from the main control unit 261 (for example, in synchronization with the above-mentioned display control), the CPU 551 of the sub-control unit 262 reads out predetermined audio data from among multiple pieces of audio data stored as output information in the ROM 552 into a predetermined area of the RAM 553, converts the audio data into an audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to an amplifier (an amplifier that amplifies audio signals) built into the speaker SP, thereby outputting audio from the speaker SP as one of the variable effects.

Similarly, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 reads predetermined light-emitting control data from among multiple light-emitting control data (on/off pattern data) stored in the ROM 552 based on a command signal sent from the main controller 261 (for example, in synchronization with the above-mentioned display control), converts the light-emitting control data into a light-emitting control signal, and supplies the light-emitting control signal to a light-emitting control board built into the illumination units 102-104, etc., thereby turning the illumination units 102-104, etc., on/off as one of the variable effects.

Furthermore, the sub-control device 262 is provided with a Bluetooth module 1200 (hereinafter referred to as the "machine-side BT module 1200") that uses Bluetooth (hereinafter referred to as "BT") to communicate wirelessly with devices external to the pachinko machine 10 (in this embodiment, earphones 2500 held by the player). The detailed configuration of the machine-side BT module 1200, which serves as the output control unit, will be described later.

Here, we will briefly explain Bluetooth. Bluetooth is a wireless communication technology (broadly defined as short-range wireless communication technology) that uses a frequency hopping method to switch between multiple (e.g., 79) channels set at predetermined intervals (e.g., 1 MHz) within the 2.4 GHz band. Its maximum communication distance is approximately 10 to 100 meters, and its maximum communication speed is approximately 1 to 3 Mbps. In other words, the use of Bluetooth enables high-capacity, high-speed data communication.

BT is an international standard defined as "IEEE 802.15.1" and performs wireless communication in accordance with technical specifications established by the Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG).

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls using the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is a calculation device, is equipped with a ROM 512, which is a memory unit that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513, which is a memory unit used as a work memory, etc.

Like the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261, the RAM 513 of the dispensing control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the CPU 511 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 513a.

RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is backed up. Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the configuration may be such that data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

Backup area 513a is an area that stores the values of the stack pointer, registers, I/O, etc. at the time of power outage so that when power is restored, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was turned off when power is turned back on if the power is turned off due to a power outage or other reason. Writing to this backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when power is turned off, and the values written to backup area 513a are restored by the main processing when power is turned on. Note that, like CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, a power outage signal SK1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of CPU 511 when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When this power outage signal SK1 is input to CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power outage processing.

The working area is provided with a payout permission flag that sets permission for the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag that is set when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received, and a command buffer that stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out prize balls. A specific command that allows the payout of prize balls is sent from the main control unit 261, and is turned on when the specific command is received, and is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before power was cut off is restored. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initial process of the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a payout restoration command that is sent when power is restored to the main control unit 261.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the dispensing control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the dispensing permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before power was cut off is restored, and it is also turned off when the received command is identified by the command identification process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified storage area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands have been stored in all of the storage area, the buffer returns to the beginning of the storage area and the command is updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on these pointers.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, main control unit 261, power supply/launch control unit 310 (launch control circuit 312), payout device 358, CR unit connection board 314, etc.

The CR unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball dispensing operation unit (dispensing switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the CR unit (card reader unit, ball dispensing unit) located to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, and the payout control device 311. When information regarding the player's ball dispensing operation to the ball dispensing operation unit or the CR unit is input to the CR unit, and the game value balance is stored on a card, which is a recording medium inserted into the CR unit, the balance on the card is deducted and a payout request signal for the number of game balls corresponding to the deducted value is output to the payout control device 311. Note that the recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to card type, and may be coin type or stick type.

In addition, the payout control device 311 is configured to periodically (e.g., every 2 msec) output a CR unit connection signal to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310, indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected.

The launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310 permits or prohibits the launch of gaming balls by the launch device 60. The handle 18, payout control device 311, and main control device 261 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312. The launch control circuit 312 is also configured to be able to input from the handle 18 a dial position signal from the variable resistor indicating the rotational operation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation operation unit 18a, a touch signal from the touch sensor indicating that the player is touching the handle 18, and a launch switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b. The launch control circuit 312 is also configured to be able to input from the payout control device 311 a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the CR unit.

The launch control circuit 312 outputs a launch status signal to the main control device 261 on the condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, and a CR unit connection signal have been input, and the main control device 261 outputs a launch permission signal and a ball feed signal to the launch control circuit 312 on the condition that a launch status signal has been input. When a launch status signal has been input, the main control device 261 outputs a launch permission signal at 0.6 second intervals.

Furthermore, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball delivery device 63 and send the gaming ball to the launch position when a ball delivery signal is input. Furthermore, when a preparation ball detection sensor provided in the ball delivery device 63, which is capable of detecting whether or not a gaming ball is present at the launch position, detects that a gaming ball is already present at the launch position, the ball delivery device 63 is not driven (even if a ball delivery signal is received, the gaming ball is not sent to the launch position).

Furthermore, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) on the condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, a CR unit connection signal, a dial position signal, and a launch permission signal are input. This causes the gaming ball set in the launch position to be launched by the launch device 60 with a strength based on the dial position signal.

The power supply circuit 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each component of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control unit 261, dispensing control unit 311, etc. via a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24-volt AC power supplied from an external source, generates +12V power to drive various switches and motors, +5V power for logic, and backup power for RAM backup, and supplies these +12V power, +5V power, and backup power to the main control unit 261, dispensing control unit 311, etc. Operating power is supplied to the various switches, motors, etc. via the control devices to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the NMI terminals of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control unit 311 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and if this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and perform power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the 5-volt output, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage processing, even after the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage drops below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and dispensing control unit 311 can execute and complete the power outage processing normally.

The RAM clearing switch circuit 543 is a circuit that receives the switch signal of the RAM clearing switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 depending on the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clearing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clearing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clearing signal SK2 to the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clearing switch 323 pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAMs 503, 513 of the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311 are cleared.

The display control device 45 executes the display of varying decorative patterns on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, program ROM 522, work RAM 523, video RAM 524, character ROM 525, video display processor (VDP) 526, input port 527, output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. The CPU 521, program ROM 522, work RAM 523, and VDP 526 are also connected to the input port 527 via bus line 530. The VDP 526 is also connected to an output port 529 via bus line 531, and the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives display commands sent from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received commands, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 526 (generate internal commands for the VDP 526). This allows for display control in the performance display device 42.

The program ROM 522 is a storage unit that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and includes, for example, a program storage area and a data table storage area.

The program storage area is a storage area in which various control programs executed by the CPU 521 are stored.

The data table storage area is a memory area that stores display data tables that define the display content to be displayed on the performance display device 42 over time in various display performances executed based on commands from the main control device 261 (e.g., variation pattern commands), and additional data tables that define the display content to be displayed on the performance display device 42 over time in various additional performances (e.g., preview performances) executed by the sub-control device 262 in addition to various display performances executed based on commands from the main control device 261.

The display data table corresponds to an address, which represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a), and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time. Details of the display data table will be provided later.

The additional data table specifies the display content to be displayed over time for additional effects that are added to a display effect based on a command from the main control device 261 and displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a). Like the display data table, it specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time, corresponding to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for which one frame of image is displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a). Details of the additional data table will be given later.

One display data table and one additional data table are prepared for each type of display effect and each type of additional effect. For example, if there are 32 variable effect patterns that can be executed based on the variable effect pattern command from the main control device 261, one table will be prepared for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 display data tables. Display data tables are prepared for, for example, miss variable display effects, various reach effects, re-variation effects, re-lottery effects, demo effects, etc.

Of course, when controlling the display of the performance display device 42, instead of using the display data table and additional data table to perform drawing processing, the additional data table may be omitted. In this case, the display content added on the sub-control device 262 side may be added to the display data table.

The work RAM 523 is a storage unit for temporarily storing (setting) various data tables read from the program ROM 522, as well as work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. For example, it has a display data table setting area, an additional data table setting area, a pointer setting area, a drawing list setting area, a drawing target buffer flag setting area, a command buffer, etc.

The display data table setting area is a storage area for setting a display data table corresponding to the effects to be displayed on the effect display device 42.

The additional data table setting area is a memory area for setting additional data tables corresponding to additional effects to be displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the effect display device 42 using the display data table set in the display data table setting area.

Here, we will explain in detail the configuration (drawing content) of each address in the display data table.

As described above, the display data table corresponds to an address, which represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a), and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite, which is the display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, as well as drawing information for displaying each sprite on the performance display device 42, such as the display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information, and storage information for each sprite.

The sprite type is information used to identify the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information used to identify the coordinates on the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a) where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information used to specify the magnification ratio relative to the standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is determined by this magnification ratio. If the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when the sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value specifies the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite will be visible through it.

The alpha blending information specifies a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information specifies the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information specifies the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing it.

The storage information indicates the address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored.

For example, in a display data table for variable display, the drawing content for one frame specified for each address is one background image, multiple decorative patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects (character 1, character 2, ...) for each sprite.

Here, with regard to the "background image," the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the performance display device 42, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information remain constant over time, so only the "background type," which is information for identifying the type of background image, and the storage information are specified.

Background images for variable displays include, for example, background images for various stages corresponding to various game states, and background images for various reach effects, and the "background type" specifies information that specifies which of these will be displayed.

Based on this "background type," the CPU 521 identifies the background image to be displayed as the drawing target, and further identifies the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame over time.

In this embodiment, the display data table describes a case where only the "background type" is specified in addition to the storage information as the drawing content of the background image. However, instead, the "background type" and "position information" indicating which range of the background image corresponding to that "background type" should be displayed may be specified. This "position information" may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the background image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the CPU 521 will identify the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the background image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the "position information" was displayed.

The "position information" may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or display on the performance display device 42) based on this display data table began. In this case, the CPU 521 will determine the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the background image that was displayed when the drawing of the image based on the display data table began and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image, indicated by the "position information," began.

Furthermore, depending on the "background type," the "position information" may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the background image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the performance display device 42) began, or, together with the "background type" and "position information," the type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time since the background image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display data table began) may be specified as the drawing content of the background image. Alternatively, the "position information" may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating the address where the range of the background image to be displayed is stored.

For "decorative symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...)," "symbol type offset information" is specified as symbol type information for specifying the decorative symbol to be displayed. This offset information represents the difference in the numbers attached to each decorative symbol. The reason offset information is specified rather than directly specifying the type of decorative symbol is because the display of decorative symbols in a variable effect changes depending on the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect and the stopped symbol of the current variable effect. The "symbol type offset information" from the start of the variable effect until a predetermined time has elapsed specifies the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect. This causes the variable effect to start from the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stopping pattern set by the sub-controller 262 is specified based on commands from the main controller 261, etc. This allows the fluctuation performance to stop at the stopping pattern corresponding to the stopping type specified by the sub-controller 262.

In addition, each decorative pattern is assigned a unique number, so the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the sub-controller 262 are managed by the number assigned to the decorative pattern.Furthermore, by representing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to the various decorative patterns, the decorative pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time period during which the "symbol type offset information" is switched from the offset information for the stopped symbols of the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols of the current variable effect is set to be the time during which the decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing state. While the decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing state, they are invisible to the player. Therefore, by switching the "symbol type offset information" from the offset information for the stopped symbols of the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols of the current variable effect during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers in the decorative symbols is interrupted, the player will not be aware of the interruption.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," specifies "Start" information, which indicates the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table specifies "End" information, which indicates the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is specified and the address where the "End" information is specified, drawing content is specified that corresponds to the presentation style to be specified in that display data table.

In response to a command sent from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 selects the display data table to use from multiple display data tables, reads the selected display data table from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area), sets it in the work RAM 523 (display data table setting area), and initializes the value of the table pointer set in the pointer setting area.

Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the value of the table pointer is incremented by one, and the next image content to be drawn is identified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area, and a drawing list (described below) is created. The CPU 521 instructs the VDP 526 to draw that image by sending this drawing list to the VDP 526. As a result, as the table pointer is updated, the drawing content is identified in chronological order specified in the display data table, and the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the performance display device 42.

Next, we will explain in detail the configuration (drawing content) of each address in the additional data table.

As described above, the additional data table specifies the display content to be displayed over time for additional effects that are added to a display effect based on a command from the main control unit 261 and displayed on the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display unit 42a).

Here, "adding to one display performance" means changing the display content of one display performance based on a command from the main control device 261, and includes concepts such as, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one display performance and overlaying another performance on that display performance, changing the color tone of part or all of that display performance, or changing the image displayed in that display performance.

In other words, the additional data table predefines the drawing content required to add and display images that are not normally displayed to a display performance displayed by the display data table selected by the sub-controller 262 based on commands from the main controller 261, the drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of that display performance, and the drawing content required to change and display an image displayed in that display performance.

Here, we will explain the case where the display content for displaying a preview effect that is displayed in addition to the variable effect displayed by the display data table for variable display selected by the sub-controller 262 based on the variable pattern command from the main controller 261 is specified by an additional data table.

Additional data tables are prepared to correspond to preview effects that are added to variable effects, for example. Specifically, additional data tables corresponding to preview effect display modes such as "bubble effects" and "school of fish effects" are stored in the data table storage area.

This additional data table specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is an additional display object to be displayed in one frame of image, and also specifies drawing information for the sprite to be drawn on the performance display device 42, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the sprite type.

On the other hand, if there is no object to be added at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the additional data table will specify null data, which means that there is no object to be added corresponding to that address.

The first address of the additional data table, "0000H," specifies "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the final address of the additional data table specifies "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is specified and the address where the "End" information is specified, drawing content corresponding to the presentation style to be specified in that additional data table is specified.

Based on the display command from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 determines whether there are any additional effects to be displayed in addition to the display effects output to the effect display device 42 using the display data table set in the display data table setting area. If there are any additional effects to be displayed, the CPU 521 reads the additional data table corresponding to that effect mode from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area) and sets the additional data table in the work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area).

For example, when the CPU 521 receives a display command related to a specified preview performance from the sub-control device 262, it selects an additional data table corresponding to the preview mode indicated by the command, reads the selected additional data table from the program ROM 522 (data table storage area), and sets it in the work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area).

In addition, when the CPU 521 sets a display data table in the display data table setting area, it first clears the contents of the additional data table setting area by writing null data, which means that there are no additional objects to be displayed.

Then, each time the table pointer is updated, the CPU 521 creates a drawing list that defines the image drawing instructions for the VDP 526 based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

In addition, if the information specified by the address indicated by the table pointer in the additional data table is "End" information, or if the table pointer points to an address not specified in the additional data table, it is determined that there are no objects to add, and a drawing list is generated based on the various sprites specified in the display data table.

The CPU 521 then sends the generated drawing list to the VDP 526, instructing the VDP 526 to draw the image. As a result, as the table pointer is updated, the drawing content is identified in chronological order in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing content specified in the additional data table is added, so that the image specified in the display data table and additional data table is displayed on the performance display device 42.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the display control device 45 displays another effect image (e.g., a preview effect image) in addition to the effect image (e.g., a variable effect image) to be displayed on the effect display device 42 in response to a command sent from the sub-control device 262, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be added and displayed can be set in the additional data table setting area, so that the other effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed.

If no additional data table is set in the additional data table setting area, null data is set in the additional data table setting area, and the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed as is on the effect display device 42.

For example, if there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of additional effect images to be displayed, and a separate display data table defining images in which the other effect images are overlaid on each original effect image is prepared, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables would have to be prepared. However, by separately defining data tables corresponding to the other effect images as additional data tables, as in this embodiment, only 32 + 5 = 37 types of display and additional data tables need to be prepared, thereby preventing an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area. Therefore, data tables corresponding to a wide variety of effect modes can be stored within the capacity provided in the data table storage area, making it easy to further diversify the effect images.

Furthermore, by defining the other effect images to be displayed as additional data tables, as in this embodiment, even if it is decided to display the other effect images to be displayed after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in work RAM 523 (display data table setting area), the other effect images to be displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed by simply setting the additional data table corresponding to the other effect images separately in work RAM 523 (additional data table setting area) without changing the display data table set in work RAM 523 (display data table setting area).

In addition, since the additional data table is configured to have the same data structure as the display data table, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer can be easily identified from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area while updating the table pointer every time, and a drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily generated from these.

Therefore, even if the sub-controller 262 or the like decides to display another effect in addition to a single display effect performed based on a command from the main controller 261, by specifying the display content of that additional effect in an additional data table, it is possible to easily display a wide variety of effects using a small number of data tables.

The pointer setting area is a storage area for setting a table pointer that specifies the address from which to obtain the corresponding drawing content from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

When the display data table is set in the display data table setting area, the CPU 521 initializes the value of the table pointer to "0." Then, based on the vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as the "V interrupt signal") sent from the VDP 526 every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process is performed as part of the display content setting process of the V interrupt process (described below) executed by the CPU 521, and the value of the table pointer is incremented by one.

Each time the table pointer is updated in this way, the CPU 521 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer from the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area, and creates a drawing list, which will be described later.

As a result, the effects corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table setting area will be displayed on the effect display device 42, and if an additional data table is set in the additional data table setting area, the effects corresponding to that additional data table will be displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the effects corresponding to the display data table.

In addition, the effects displayed on the effect display device 42 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table setting area or the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

The drawing list setting area is a storage area for setting a drawing list that instructs the VDP 526 to draw one frame of an image. The drawing list is generated based on the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area.

Here, we will explain the composition of the drawing list in detail. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the VDP 526 to draw one frame's worth of images. For example, it defines the drawing information for each sprite, such as the background image, decorative pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), and reserved icon (reserved icon 1, reserved icon 2, ...) used in one frame of image.

As described above, the drawing information for each sprite includes, as storage information, the address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. VDP 526 retrieves the image data for that sprite from the storage area in character ROM 525 specified by that address and transfers it to video RAM 524.

The drawing information for each sprite also includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The VDP 526 performs scaling on the standard image generated from the image data for that sprite read from the character ROM 525 according to the magnification ratio, rotation according to the rotation angle, translucency according to the translucency value, compositing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction according to the color information, and filtering according to the filter specification information using the method specified by that information, and then draws the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The VDP 526 then expands the drawn image into either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer flag, which will be described later.

The CPU 521 generates drawing information for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the table pointer in the display data table set in the display data table setting area and the additional data table set in the additional data table setting area, and the content of other images to be drawn (such as reserved icons), and creates a drawing list by sorting the drawing information by sprite.

The address of the storage area in character ROM 525 where the sprite (display object) data is stored in the drawing information for each sprite is generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and additional data table, or the sprite type identified from the content of other images. In other words, since the storage area in character ROM 525 where the image data for each sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, CPU 521 can instantly identify the address in character ROM 525 where the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the drawing information of the drawing list.

In addition, the CPU 521 copies the other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) of each sprite's drawing information as is, as specified in the display data table and additional data table.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the CPU 521 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from those that should be placed furthest in the background to those that should be placed in the foreground, and sets drawing information for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, drawing information corresponding to the background image is set first, followed by drawing information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: decorative pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), and reserved icon (reserved icon 1, reserved icon 2, ...).

The VDP 526 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order set in the drawing list, which defines the image drawing instructions for each frame, and then overwrites the drawn sprites in the frame buffer of the video RAM 524. Therefore, in one frame of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed in the background, and the last sprite drawn can be placed in the foreground.

The drawing target buffer flag setting area is a storage area for setting a drawing target buffer flag to specify the frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer") in which the image drawn by the VDP 526 is displayed, from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer and second frame buffer) of the video RAM 524 described below.

If the drawing target buffer flag is "0", the first frame buffer is designated as the drawing target buffer, and if it is "1", the second frame buffer is designated. Information about this designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the VDP 526 along with the drawing list.

As a result, the VDP 526 executes a drawing process that displays an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, the VDP 526 reads previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers this image information to the performance display device 42 as a video signal, thereby executing an image output process (display process) that displays an image on the performance display device 42.

The drawing target buffer flag is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the VDP 526 along with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". This causes the drawing target buffer to alternate between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer each time a drawing list is sent.

The drawing list is also sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process executed by the CPU 521 is executed, based on a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 526 every 20 msec when the drawing process and output process for one frame of image is completed.

In other words, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image drawing and output processes are executed. 20 msec after the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer to be read and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer.

Then, after another 20 msec, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer to be read and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, by alternately specifying either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, every 20 msec, it is possible to perform the drawing process for one frame's image while continuously outputting one frame's worth of image in 20 msec increments.

The command buffer is a storage area for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-controller 262, and is composed of a ring buffer.

The video RAM 524 is used to display images to be displayed on the performance display device 42, and is equipped with two frame buffers (a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer).

The two frame buffers are each capable of storing one frame of image (one screen's worth of image). Here, one frame of image refers to one screen's worth of image displayed at one update timing in a configuration in which the image displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Specifically, each frame buffer contains a large number of unit areas, each corresponding to a pixel (dot) of the LCD display unit 42a at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area is configured to store data for specifying which color to display. In this embodiment, a full-color system is used, allowing each pixel to be set to 256 levels for each of the colors R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Correspondingly, in each unit area, one byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color. In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least three bytes.

In this way, by adopting a double-buffer system with two frame buffers (first and second frame buffers) in the video RAM 524, the VDP 526 writes a one-frame image created in accordance with instructions from the CPU 521 into either the first or second frame buffer, thereby displaying the one-frame image in that frame buffer. While the image is being displayed in one of the frame buffers, the VDP 526 reads the one-frame image previously displayed in the other frame buffer and outputs the image information to the performance display device 42, thereby executing a process to display the one-frame image on the performance display device 42.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read in order to display the image on the performance display device 42 are alternately designated by the CPU 521 as either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

In other words, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read, and image drawing and output processing is performed. 20 msec after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read.

As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer is read and output to the performance display device 42, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer.

Then, after another 20 msec, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read.

This allows one frame of image that was previously loaded into the second frame buffer to be read out and displayed on the performance display device 42, while a new image is loaded into the first frame buffer.

After that, by alternately specifying the frame buffer that displays one frame's worth of image and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is read every 20 msec, either the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer, it is possible to perform the drawing process of one frame's worth of image while continuously outputting one frame's worth of image in 20 msec increments.

The character ROM 525 is a memory unit that pre-stores image data for various images to be displayed on the performance display device 42, such as various background images and various sprites (decorative patterns, characters, hold icons, etc.), and has a pattern storage area, a character storage area, a hold icon storage area, a background image storage area, etc.

Here, the image data for each sprite includes at least a combination of bitmap data that defines the design, character shape, and pattern, and a color palette table that is referenced when determining the display color for each pixel in the bitmap image. Furthermore, the image data for the background image is stored, for example, as JPEG data, which is compressed still image data.

The pattern storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to the decorative patterns that are displayed in a variable manner on the effect display device 42. In this embodiment, multiple groups of pattern image data corresponding to nine types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" are stored. When generating images related to the pattern variations in the "normal stage effect," for example, image data for one decorative pattern group (nine types of decorative patterns) selected by the player in the effect customization described below from among three decorative pattern groups ("tropical fish group," "near-sea fish group," and "deep-sea fish group"), or one decorative pattern group (nine types of decorative patterns) set as default, is used. In this embodiment, the "tropical fish group" is set as the default decorative pattern group.

The character storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to various characters displayed on the effect display device 42, and in this embodiment, multiple types of character image data corresponding to, for example, main characters are stored. When generating an image for an effect in which a main character appears, for example, from among the four types of main character image data (image data for a "girl character," image data for a "boy character," image data for a "robot character," and image data for a "monster character"), the main character image data selected by the player during effect customization, which will be described later, or the main character image data set as default, will be used. Note that in this embodiment, a "girl character" is set as the main character by default.

The hold icon storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to the hold icons displayed on the effect display device 42. In this embodiment, multiple types of image data corresponding to hold icons are stored, such as the hold icon H461 (see Figure 4-44, etc.). When generating an image in which a hold icon appears, one type of hold icon image data selected by the player during effect customization, as described below, or one type of hold icon image data set as default is used from among the image data corresponding to three types of hold icons (icon image data imitating a "lifebuoy," icon image data imitating "swimming goggles," and icon image data imitating "seashells"). In this embodiment, the hold icon H461 imitating a "lifebuoy" is set as the default hold icon.

The background image storage area is a memory area that stores image data corresponding to various background images displayed on the effect display device 42, and in this embodiment, multiple types of image data corresponding to background images are stored. When generating an image for a "normal stage effect," for example, of the three types of background image data (background image data for the "diving stage," background image data for the "cruising stage," and background image data for the "deep sea stage"), the background image data selected by the player during effect customization, which will be described later, or the background image data set as default, will be used. In this embodiment, the background image for the "diving stage" is set as the default background image.

The background image storage area also stores various screen configuration images that make up, for example, the menu screen 3000, language setting screen 3001, audio output setting screen 3002, and brightness setting screen 3003. Of course, a configuration may be adopted in which a portion of the image data stored in character ROM 525 is stored in ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which character ROM 525 is omitted and all of the image data stored in character ROM 525 is stored in ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that operates the liquid crystal drive circuit (LCD driver) that drives and controls the liquid crystal display unit 42a of the performance display device 42. It draws images based on drawing instructions (drawing list) from the CPU 521 and displays the drawn images on the performance display device 42 at a predetermined timing. In this embodiment, the VDP 526 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing.

The VDP 526 sends a V interrupt signal to the CPU 521 every 20 msec when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. The CPU 521 executes V interrupt processing each time it detects this V interrupt signal, instructing the VDP 526 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the VDP 526 executes drawing processing for the next frame of image, and also executes image output processing (display processing) to display the image previously developed by drawing on the performance display device 42.

More specifically, the VDP 526 draws one frame of image and expands the drawn image in either the first or second frame buffer, while outputting the one frame of image previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the effect display device 42, thereby displaying the image on the display unit 42a. The VDP 526 processes the drawing process of this one frame of image and the output process of this one frame of image in parallel within the image display time of one frame on the effect display device 42 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

In this way, the CPU 521 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from the VDP 526 and issues drawing instructions to the VDP 526, so the VDP 526 can receive an image drawing instruction from the CPU 521 at each execution interval (20 msec) of the image drawing and output processing. Therefore, the VDP 526 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing or output processing is complete, preventing the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image or the display of an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer where the currently displayed image is displayed.

Under the above configuration, when the VDP 526 performs drawing processing, it first reads the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 525 based on the storage information contained in the drawing list sent from the CPU 521, and then expands the read image data into a specified frame buffer in the video RAM 524.

In addition, when the VDP 526 performs image output processing to output an image to the performance display device 42, a video signal containing pixel information corresponding to each pixel of the LCD display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 is generated based on the image expanded in the first frame buffer or second frame buffer of the video RAM 524, and this video signal is output to the performance display device 42 via the output port 529.

More specifically, the VDP 526 outputs, as video signals, RGB signals consisting of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color information that indicate the color data of each pixel of the LCD display unit 42a, as well as synchronization signals for synchronizing the RGB signals with the LCD display unit 42a to the performance display device 42.

When the VDP 526 outputs video signals for one frame of image (one screen's worth of image) to the performance display device 42, for example, it first outputs video signals to each pixel in the same horizontal line, starting with the pixel in the upper left corner (first row, first column) of the LCD display unit 42a (m x n pixels), and continuing to the pixel in the upper right corner (first row, nth column) of the LCD display unit 42a. After outputting the video signal to the pixel in the upper right corner (first row, nth column), it then outputs video signals to each pixel in the same horizontal line, starting with the pixel in the leftmost part of the second row (second row, first column). In this manner, video signals are output sequentially from the top, from the leftmost pixel to the rightmost pixel, thereby displaying an image across the entire screen of the LCD display unit 42a.

Then, the VDP 526 outputs a V interrupt signal to the CPU 521 at the timing when it outputs a video signal to the last pixel in the bottom right corner of the LCD display unit 42a, causing the CPU 521 to recognize that updating of one frame of image has been completed. In this embodiment, the output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, the same as the update cycle of one frame of image. In other words, in this embodiment, every 20 msec that the V interrupt signal is output, output processing of the video signal for one frame of image is executed to the performance display device 42.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 conducts a lottery using various counter information during play. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4-8, the following are used: a hit/miss random number counter CH1 as a hit/miss random number generating means used in the hit/miss lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot state will occur; a type determination counter CH2 used to determine the type of jackpot (type lottery); a variable selection counter CH3 used to determine whether or not a reach state will occur in the effect display device 42; an initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit/miss random number counter CH1; a first variable type counter CS1 and a second variable type counter CS2 used to determine the variable display time of the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B (effect display device 42); and a normal symbol random number counter CH4 used in the start-going support lottery to determine whether or not the second start-going winning section 33WB will be opened. The variation selection counter CH3 is also used to draw reach patterns when the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 are changed to a missing symbol. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used to select the effect pattern on the effect display device 42 (such as selecting the decorative symbol variation pattern).

Counters CH1, CH2, CH3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CH4 are loop counters that add 1 to the previous value each time they are updated, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching their upper limit. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

RAM 503 has a special variable reserve area where the values of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, and variable selection counter CH3 are stored, and a normal variable reserve area where the value of the normal pattern random number counter CH4 is stored.

The special variable reserve area includes a first special variable reserve area and a second special variable reserve area, each of which has four reserve areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special variable holding area, the values of the win/loss random number counter CH1, the type determination counter CH2, and the variable selection counter CH3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history in the first start winning section 33WA.

In each reserve area of the second special variable reserve area, the values of the win/loss random number counter CH1, the type determination counter CH2, and the variable selection counter CH3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history in the second start winning section 33WB.

In this embodiment, there is only one execution area for the special variable pending area, and the data stored in the first special variable pending area and the second special variable pending area is shifted to a common execution area when a variable display based on that data is performed.

The normal variable reserve area has four reserve areas (reserve areas 1 to 4) and one execution area. Each reserve area in the normal variable reserve area stores the values of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 in chronological order, according to the history of game balls passing through the through gate 34.

By adopting this configuration, the first variable display on the first special pattern display device 43A, the second variable display on the second special pattern display device 43B, and the variable display on the normal pattern display device 41 can each be held up to four times.

Explaining each counter in more detail, the win/loss random number counter CH1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 599) as the closing value, return to 0, which is the lower limit (i.e., the opening value). Normally, when the win/loss random number counter CH1 goes through one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win/loss random number counter CH1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the win/loss random number counter CH1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once per timer interrupt and repeatedly within the remaining time of normal processing. Meanwhile, the win/loss random number counter CH1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 is stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer. Then, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area).

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) does not change depending on the game mode (either "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"). The number of values of the win/loss random number counter CH1 that result in a jackpot state is three, and the value is "7,207,407." In other words, based on the game ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, there is a 1/200 probability of winning the win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery), and the jackpot state occurs.

ROM 502 contains a win/lose determination table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 corresponds to a win.

In this embodiment, there is a first hit/miss determination table corresponding to a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA (a first hit/miss determination table including a jackpot determination common to "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," and "time-saving B mode"), and a second hit/miss determination table corresponding to a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB (a second hit/miss determination table including a jackpot determination common to "normal mode," "time-saving A mode," and "time-saving B mode").

The type determination counter CH2 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 19), return to the lower limit, 0.

ROM 502 contains a type determination table that is referenced when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter CH2 corresponds to. In this embodiment, a first type determination table corresponding to a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and a second type determination table corresponding to a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB are provided.

If the player wins the jackpot in the lottery, the type of jackpot state to be awarded will be determined based on the value of the type determination counter CH2 (a type lottery will be held), and the player will be awarded the determined type of jackpot state.

In this embodiment, if a player wins a jackpot in the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by a ball entering the first start-up winning section 33WA, regardless of the game mode ("normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"), there is a 40% chance that the jackpot will be a "15R jackpot," and a 60% chance that the jackpot will be a "4R jackpot."

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the ball entering the second start-up winning section 33WB, regardless of the game mode ("normal mode," "time-saving A mode," or "time-saving B mode"), there is a 50% chance of a "15R jackpot," a 30% chance of an "8R jackpot," and a 20% chance of a "4R jackpot."

The type determination counter CH2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the type determination counter CH2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the type determination counter CH2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area) of RAM 503.

The variable selection counter CH3 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 238). In this embodiment, the variable selection counter CH3 draws between three possibilities: a "reach before or after miss" in which, after a reach state has occurred for a decorative pattern, the final stopping pattern stops just one symbol before or after the reach pattern; a "reach other than a reach before or after miss" in which, after a reach state has occurred, the final stopping pattern stops anywhere other than before or after the reach pattern; and a "miss (complete miss)" in which no reach state occurs.

ROM 502 contains a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variable selection counter CH3 and various reach patterns.

The variable selection counter CH3 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the variable selection counter CH3 is stored in the variable selection counter buffer. Then, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the variable selection counter CH3 stored in the variable selection counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area) of RAM 503.

Furthermore, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, one of the fluctuation type counters, CS1, is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 255, and after reaching its upper limit (i.e., 255), return to its lower limit of 0. The other fluctuation type counter, CS2, is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 31, and after reaching its upper limit (i.e., 31), return to its lower limit of 0.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the first special pattern display device 43A or second special pattern display device 43B and the general fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display on the effect display device 42 (reach patterns such as normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) are associated by a fluctuation pattern table, so that once the fluctuation time of the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the effect display device 42 is also determined.

For example, the variation time may be determined based on the first variation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B may be determined by the second variation type counter CS2. For example, when a "15R jackpot" is to be handled, one of the stop display modes corresponding to a "15R jackpot" is determined. Note that the counters used to determine the variation time and variation pattern are not limited to the above configuration, and can be changed as appropriate for each model.

Furthermore, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and are repeatedly updated during the remaining time of the normal processing. In this embodiment, with regard to the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer of RAM 503 are stored in the special fluctuation holding area of RAM 503.

In this way, by obtaining the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 at the timing of the start winning, the first fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display that have been reserved and stored can be known (predicted) before the fluctuation begins, and this information can be used to perform various effects, etc. Furthermore, if a configuration that predicts the fluctuation time and performs an effect is not required, the buffer values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 can be obtained when the effect display device 42 determines the fluctuation pattern when the decorative pattern begins to fluctuate.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variation selection counter CH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and that the values are not synchronized under any circumstances.

The normal symbol random number counter CH4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 29, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 29). The normal symbol random number counter CH4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 is obtained when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 34, which serves as the first ball entry section.

When a winning value is obtained from the normal symbol random number counter CH4, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable value for a predetermined period of time (after the normal symbol lamps that make up the normal symbol display device 41 flash alternately), and then the display is stopped in a manner (lighting pattern) that corresponds to the win, and the second start-up winning section 33WB is opened in a pattern that corresponds to the game mode at that time.

In this embodiment, in a "low ball entry state," the winning random number values are two: "0" and "1." On the other hand, in a "high ball entry state," the winning random number values are 28: "0 to 27." In other words, in a "low ball entry state," there is a 1/15 probability that the second start entry section 33WB will be open, and in a "high ball entry state," there is a 14/15 probability that the second start entry section 33WB will be open.

ROM 502 contains a support determination table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 corresponds to a win. In this embodiment, a first support determination table corresponding to a "low ball score state" and a second support determination table corresponding to a "high ball score state" are set.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261 will be explained with reference to flowcharts. The processes performed by the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is started when the power is turned on; timer interrupt processing, which is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment); and NMI interrupt processing, which is started when a stop signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then the main processing.

Figure 4-11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step SH301, the process of reading the various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main control unit 261 (except for the RAM erase switch 323) is read, and the state of the switch is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Furthermore, when there is detection information from any of the various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is incremented. Furthermore, in the external output processing of the normal processing described below, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and prize balls are awarded (game balls are paid out) based on the prize ball command. Furthermore, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step SH302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SH303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variable selection counter CH3, and normal pattern random number counter CH4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter CH1, CH2, CH3, and CH4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503.

Then, in step SH305, the second start winning process is executed in response to the game ball entering (winning) the second start winning section 33WB, and in step SH306, the first start winning process is executed in response to the game ball entering (winning) the first start winning section 33WA.

Furthermore, in step SH307, a through gate passing process is executed in response to the passage of the gaming ball through the through gate 34. The following step SH308 executes a launch permission command setting process to perform processes such as sending a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply and launch control device 310. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 has a mode memory area that is referenced when determining the current game mode. The mode memory area stores one of the following values: "11" corresponding to "normal mode," "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode," or "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode."

In response to this, the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 also has a mode memory area that the sub-controller 262 references when determining the game mode. The game mode information set in the main controller 261 is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step SH200) each time the game mode is switched and set.

Next, the second start winning process of step SH305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 4-13. Note that RAM 503 is provided with a second pending counter Nb that counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB.

First, in step SH501, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the second start winning section 33WB based on the detection information from the second start winning switch 224b. If a positive determination is made in step SH501, it is determined in step SH502 whether the value of the second pending counter Nb is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in either step SH501 or SH502, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH502 returns a positive result, proceed to step SH503 and increment the second pending counter Nb by 1.

In the following step SH504, an additive display process is performed on the second hold display device 46B (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number in the second variable display by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right second hold lamps are off, the left second hold lamp is turned on; if the left second hold lamp is on and the right second hold lamp is off, both left and right second hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right second hold lamps are on, the right second hold lamp remains on and the left second hold lamp flashes; and if the left second hold lamp is flashing and the right second hold lamp is on, processing is performed to flash both left and right second hold lamps.

After step SH504, in the processing of step SH505, the values of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variation selection counter CH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 (the values stored in the win/lose random number counter buffer, type determination counter buffer, variation selection counter buffer, and each variation type counter buffer) are stored in the first available holding area in the second special variation holding area (win/lose random number memory area, win type random number memory area, reach random number memory area, and first and second variation type random number memory area). At the same time, the game mode when this second variation display starts is identified based on the values of the variation count counters A and B, described below, and the game mode information is stored in the mode memory area. After step SH505, the processing proceeds to step SH506.

In step SH506, a second win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area corresponds to a jackpot.

Here, details of the second pass/fail determination process in step SH506 will be explained with reference to Figure 4-15(b).

First, in step SH5111, the second win/loss determination table common to all game modes is referenced to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area matches any of the values "7", "207", or "407" corresponding to a jackpot. If a positive determination is made in step SH5111, then in step SH5112 the jackpot expected flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH5111, this processing ends as is.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-13, in step SH507 following step SH506, if it is determined in step SH506 that the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a second type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area.

The second type determination process of step SH507 will now be explained with reference to Figure 4-16(b). In the second type determination process, first in step SH5300, it is determined whether the jackpot expected flag was set to ON in the second hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step SH5300 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH5300 returns a positive result, step SH5301 refers to the second type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area matches the value "0-9" corresponding to a "15R jackpot." If step SH5301 returns a positive result, step SH5302 turns on the 15R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH5301 returns a negative result, step SH5303 refers to the second type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area is "10-15," which corresponds to an "8R jackpot." If step SH5303 returns a positive result, step SH5304 turns on the 8R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH5303 returns a negative result, i.e., if the value of the type determination counter CH2 is between 16 and 19, step SH5305 turns on the 4R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserved area in the second special variable reserved area, and then this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-13, in step SH508 following step SH507, a second fluctuation time determination process is performed to determine the second fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display. Here, if the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "normal mode," the second normal fluctuation time determination table for "normal mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "time-saving A mode," the second shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving A mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Furthermore, if the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "time-saving B mode," the second shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving B mode" is referenced, and the second fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time determined here is stored in the corresponding holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area. However, the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in that holding area is not erased.

In this embodiment, the second normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode," the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving A mode," and the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving B mode" each have a "jackpot" table and a "miss" table.

In step SH509, which follows step SH508, a start command is set, and then this process ends. This start command includes fluctuation information (information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the second win/loss determination process, the second type determination process, and the second fluctuation time determination process, as well as information indicating whether the fluctuation display was triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, and game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation display, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SH200).

Next, the first start winning process of step SH306 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 4-14. RAM 503 is provided with a first pending counter Na, which counts the number of pending first variable displays triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA.

First, in step SH510, whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first start winning section 33WA is determined based on the detection information from the first start winning switch 224a. If the determination in step SH510 is negative, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH510 returns a positive result, step SH511 determines whether the value of the first pending counter Na is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If step SH511 returns a negative result, the process ends. On the other hand, if step SH511 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH512, where the first pending counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the following step SH513, an additive display process is performed on the first hold display device 46A (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number in the first variable display by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are off, the left first hold lamp is turned on; if the left first hold lamp is on and the right first hold lamp is off, both left and right first hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right first hold lamps are on, the right first hold lamp is left on and the left first hold lamp is flashed; and if the left first hold lamp is flashing and the right first hold lamp is on, processing is performed to flash both left and right first hold lamps.

After step SH513, in the processing of step SH514, the values of the win/lose random number counter CH1, type determination counter CH2, variation selection counter CH3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2 (the values stored in the win/lose random number counter buffer, type determination counter buffer, variation selection counter buffer, and each variation type counter buffer) are stored in the first available holding area of the first special variation holding area (win/lose random number memory area, win type random number memory area, reach random number memory area, and first and second variation type random number memory area). At the same time, the game mode when this first variation display starts is identified based on the values of the variation count counters A and B, described below, and the game mode information is stored in the mode memory area. After step SH514, the processing proceeds to step SH515.

In step SH515, the first win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area corresponds to a jackpot.

Here, details of the first pass/fail determination process in step SH515 will be explained with reference to Figure 4-15(a).

First, in step SH5101, the first win/loss determination table common to all game modes is referenced to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CH1 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area matches any of the values "7", "207", or "407" corresponding to a jackpot. If a positive determination is made in step SH5101, then in step SH5102 the jackpot expected flag for the corresponding reserve area in the first special variable reserve area is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH5101, this processing ends as is.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-14, in step SH516 following step SH515, if it is determined in step SH515 that the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a first type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area.

The first type determination process of step SH516 will now be explained with reference to Figure 4-16(a). In the first type determination process, step SH5201 first determines whether the jackpot expected flag was set to ON in the first hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the result of step SH5201 is NO, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH5201 returns a positive result, step SH5202 refers to the first type determination table to determine whether the value of the type determination counter CH2 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area matches the value "0-7" corresponding to a "15R jackpot." If step SH5202 returns a positive result, step SH5203 turns on the 15R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserve area in the first special variable reserve area, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH5202 returns a negative result, i.e., if the value of the type determination counter CH2 is between 8 and 19, step SH5204 turns on the 4R jackpot flag for the corresponding reserved area in the first special variable reserved area, and then this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-14, in step SH517 following step SH516, if it is determined in step SH515 that the value of the hit/miss random number counter CH1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot (a miss), a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the variable selection counter CH3 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area.

The reach determination process of step SH517 will now be explained with reference to Figure 4-17. First, in step SH5401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot expected flag was set in the first hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step SH5401 is affirmative, this process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH5401 returns a negative result, i.e., if a miss occurs, step SH5402 refers to the reach determination table to determine whether the value of the fluctuation selection counter CH3 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either the value "0" or "1" corresponding to a "front or rear miss reach." If step SH5402 returns a positive result, step SH5403 turns on the front or rear flag, indicating the occurrence of a front or rear miss reach, and then terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if step SH5402 returns a negative result, step SH5404 refers to the reach determination table to determine whether the value of the variable selection counter CH3 newly stored in the special variable pending area matches any of the values "2-21" corresponding to a "reach other than a miss before or after." If step SH5404 returns a positive result, step SH5405 turns on the non-reach before or after flag, and then this processing ends.

Also, if step SH5404 returns a negative result, meaning the variable display ends without going through a reach state (a "complete miss"), this process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-14, in step SH518 following step SH517, a first fluctuation time determination process is performed to determine the first fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display. Here, if the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "normal mode," the first normal fluctuation time determination table for "normal mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "time-saving A mode," the first shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving A mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. If the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "time-saving B mode," the first shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving B mode" is referenced, and the first fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time determined here is stored in the corresponding holding area among the first special fluctuation holding areas. However, the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in this holding area is not erased.

In this embodiment, the first normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode," the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode," and the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" are provided with tables for "jackpot," "front and rear miss reach," "non-front and rear miss reach," and "complete miss," respectively.

Furthermore, for example, with regard to the fluctuation time determination table for a "complete miss," it is possible to provide fluctuation time determination tables such as "for 1 and 2 reserved items (normal fluctuation time)," "for 3 reserved items (reduced fluctuation time)," and "for 4 reserved items (reduced fluctuation time)," and to change the fluctuation time determination table (fluctuation time) referenced depending on the number of reserved fluctuation displays stored in the first special variable hold area. In this way, when the reserved first fluctuation displays are being executed sequentially, the shortened time for the first fluctuation display for a miss can be set depending on the number of reserved first fluctuation displays scheduled for execution at that time. Here, for example, in a situation where a fluctuation time determination table for "4 reserved items" is referenced when executing a specified fluctuation display, if the fluctuation display corresponds to a variety of wins such as a jackpot, the fluctuation time determination table for "jackpot" may be prioritized.

After step SH518, in step SH519, the start command is set and the process ends. This start command includes fluctuation information (information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the first win/loss determination process, first type determination process, reach determination process, and first fluctuation time determination process, as well as information indicating whether the fluctuation display was triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, and game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation display, which is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SH200).

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start winning section 33WA, 33WB, the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1, etc. is directly stored in the special variable hold area, and then the win/lose determination process, etc. is executed, but this configuration is not limited to this. For example, a temporary memory area may be provided to temporarily store the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1, etc. when it is obtained, and the information stored in the temporary memory area may be stored in the hold area of the corresponding special variable hold area after the win/lose determination process, etc. is executed.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SH307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 4-18.

In step SH601, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information from the through gate switch 225. If the determination in step SH601 is negative, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH601 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34, step SH602 determines whether the value of the normal hold counter Nd, which counts the number of reserved variable displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the judgment here is negative, this processing ends as is. On the other hand, if step SH602 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if it is confirmed that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34 and the value of the normal hold counter Nd is less than 4, proceed to step SH603 and increment the normal hold counter Nd by 1.

Furthermore, in the following step SH604, an additive display process is performed on the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of one in the hold number displayed in the variable display on the normal pattern display device 41. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are off, the left normal hold lamp is turned on; if the left normal hold lamp is on and the right normal hold lamp is off, both left and right normal hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right normal hold lamps are on, the right normal hold lamp is left on and the left normal hold lamp is flashed; and if the left normal hold lamp is flashing and the right normal hold lamp is on, both left and right normal hold lamps are flashed.

After step SH604, in step SH605, a random number related to the win or loss is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CH4 updated in the random number update process of step SH303 above is stored in the first free memory area in the normal variable pending area of RAM 503. Then, the through gate passing process ends.

Next, the launch permission command setting process in step SH308 will be explained with reference to Figure 4-19.

First, in step SH701, it is determined whether the firing permission flag, which indicates that a firing status signal is being received from the firing control circuit 312, is set to on. The firing status signal is sent from the firing control circuit 312 to the main control unit 261 when the firing control circuit 312 receives a touch signal from the handle 18, a firing switch signal, and a CR unit connection signal from the payout control device 311.

If step SH701 returns a positive result, step SH702 determines whether a launch status signal has been received. If step SH702 returns a negative result, step SH703 turns off the launch permission flag and then terminates this processing.

On the other hand, if step SH702 returns a positive result, step SH704 determines whether the value of the launch timer used to measure the interval between launches of game balls is "0." If step SH704 returns a negative result, step SH707 subtracts 1 from the value of the launch timer, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH704 returns a positive answer, then in step SH705, the main control unit 261 sends a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312. In the following step SH706, the launch permission flag is turned off. After step SH706, this process ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH701, a determination is made in step SH708 as to whether a launch state signal has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SH708, the process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH708, the launch permission flag is set to ON in step SH709.

In the following step SH710, a ball feed signal is sent to the launch control circuit 312. Furthermore, in step SH711, the launch timer is set to "300", which corresponds to 0.6 seconds. This ensures that the game ball is set securely at the launch position by the ball feed device 63 before being launched by the launch device 60. Additionally, while the main control device 261 continues to receive a launch status signal from the launch control circuit 312, a launch permission signal is sent from the main control device 261 at 0.6 second intervals, causing the game ball to be launched by the launch device 60 at 0.6 second intervals. After step SH711, this process ends.

When the launch control circuit 312 receives a launch permission signal from the main control unit 261, it determines whether it has received all of the touch signal, launch switch signal, and CR unit connection signal from the handle 18 and payout control unit 311, and if a positive determination is made, it drives the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) and performs a launch process to launch the gaming ball. The launch control circuit 312 also controls the launch device 60 to adjust the launch strength (launch speed) of the gaming ball based on the dial position signal. This allows the gaming ball to be launched by the launch device 60 with the adjusted strength.

In addition, when the launch control circuit 312 receives a ball feed signal from the main control unit 261, it checks the preparation ball detection sensor, which detects whether a game ball has been set at the launch position on the launch rail 61 where the game ball will be launched by the launch device 60, and if it confirms that a game ball has not been set at the launch position, it drives the ball feed device 63 and performs a ball feed process to set the game ball at the launch position.

Figure 4-12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control unit 261 at the time of power cut to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261. The CPU 501 then interrupts the ongoing control and begins NMI interrupt processing. In step SH401, the power outage occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the power outage occurrence information setting, and the NMI interrupt processing ends.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311, and this NMI interrupt causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, causing the CPU 511 to interrupt the control it was currently executing and start the NMI interrupt processing. The details of this processing are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 4-9. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SH101, initial setting processing is performed when power is turned on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and a wait process is performed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-controllers (sub-controller 262, dispensing controller 311, etc.) to become operational. In the following step SH102, RAM access is permitted.

Then, data backup processing is performed on RAM 503 within CPU 501. Specifically, in step SH103, it is determined whether RAM erase switch 323 provided on power supply circuit 313 of power supply/launch control device 310 is pressed (ON). If it is pressed, the process proceeds to step SH112 to clear (erase) the backup data. On the other hand, if RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the process proceeds to the following step SH104, where it is determined whether power outage information is set in backup area 503a of RAM 503. If it is not set, no backup data is stored, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step SH112. If power outage information is set in backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SH105. In the following step SH106, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, i.e., the validity of the backup is determined. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, so in this case too, proceed to step SH112.

In step SH112, an initialization command is sent to initialize the sub-controller 262, dispensing controller 311, etc. After that, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SH113, etc.). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, if you want to return the machine to its initial state when powering it on, for example, when the hall opens for business, you can turn on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 323 is ON, the system proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SH113, etc.). Similarly, if no power outage information has been set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the system also proceeds to RAM 503 initialization processing (step SH113, etc.). That is, in step SH113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step SH114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step SH111, and the system proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 323 has not been pressed (step SH103: NO), power recovery processing (processing upon recovery from power outage) is executed, provided that power outage information has been set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. That is, in step SH107, the stack pointer is restored to its state before the power outage, and in step SH108, the power outage information is cleared.

In step SH109, a command is sent to return the sub-controller to the gaming state it was in when power was turned off. In step SH110, the used registers are restored from the backup area 503a of RAM 503. Then, in step SH111, interrupt permission is set and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 4-10. In this normal processing, the main game processing is executed. In summary, the processing of steps SH200 to SH211 is executed as periodic processing at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps SH212 and SH213 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step SH200, external output processing is performed to send control signals to each device based on the settings of the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B and the settings of the second start-up winning section 33WB, etc., updated in the previous normal processing, and to send output data such as commands to each sub-side control device.

For example, when starting a variable display for a predetermined period on the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B, a variable pattern command is sent to the sub-control device 262 to start a performance such as a variable display of decorative patterns on the performance display device 42. The sub-control device 262, which has input the variable pattern command, determines the display mode (variation time, performance pattern, etc.) of the performance display device 42 based on the various commands, and issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to display that display mode on the performance display device 42.

The variation pattern command contains information that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative symbols, such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach. Meanwhile, the sub-controller 262 stores a table that contains the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. Based on the variation pattern command, the sub-controller 262 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbols, and controls the display controller 45, audio, etc.

However, in this embodiment, the variation pattern command does not include information specifying the type of presentation mode for super reaches or special reaches ("Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," or "Marine Reach," which will be described later), and the sub-control device 262 is configured to determine the type of presentation mode for super reaches or special reaches based on the variation pattern command.

Here, we will explain the decorative symbol change patterns. A "normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the decorative symbol change display.

A "Super Reach" is a reach pattern in which, while decorative symbols are being displayed in a changing manner (after a reach state has been established), characters and the like are displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols, thereby building a sense of anticipation in the player. As will be described later, this embodiment is configured to be able to execute three types of Super Reach: "Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," and "Marine Reach."

"Special Reach" is a presentation mode that can be derived when there is a high probability of a jackpot occurring (in this embodiment, only when a jackpot occurs). During the display of changing decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative symbols, presentation patterns and characters that differ from those of the Super Reach are displayed, creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

However, in this embodiment, the "Special Reach" is an advanced reach effect that can only be triggered when one of the super reaches, "Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," or "Marine Reach," is triggered. Therefore, in this embodiment, three types of special reaches can be executed: "Special Kuroshio Reach," "Special Coral Reach," and "Special Marine Reach," as described below.

"Complete Miss" is a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol display stops moving without any reach state being reached.

The sub-control device 262 also determines the stopping pattern (combination of stopping patterns) for the decorative pattern changing display on the effect display device 42 based on the change pattern and change time information included in the change pattern command. Information about the stopping pattern determined here is output to the display control device 45, and added to the display data table for the changing display selected as described above. Then, by performing an image drawing process according to the display data table to which information about the stopping pattern has been added, the stopping pattern is displayed as stopped on the effect display device 42 after the change time has elapsed. In other words, if a jackpot is won ("15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," "4R jackpot"), the changing display is displayed as a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern combination) consisting of the same numbers 1 to 9 that are all the same.

A combination of symbols that miss before and after corresponds to a "reach that misses before and after", where after a reach occurs, the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol. A combination of symbols other than a miss before and after corresponds to a "reach that does not miss before and after", where after a reach occurs, the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol. A combination of symbols that miss completely corresponds to a "complete miss", where no reach even occurs.

In addition, the main control device 261 may be configured to set a pattern command specifying one of a jackpot pattern combination, a combination of patterns that are not a front-to-back miss, a combination of patterns that are not a front-to-back miss, or a combination of patterns that are a complete miss, and output this to the sub-control device 262 together with a variation pattern command.

In addition, the external output process of step SH200 also involves processing to externally output various information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 240 in order to grasp the various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10.

For example, if the current gaming state is a jackpot state, jackpot signal 1 (high level signal) is output from the first terminal to the hall computer. Furthermore, if the current gaming state is a jackpot state or a high support state, jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) is output from the second terminal to the hall computer. This allows the hall computer to grasp the start and end of the jackpot state and the start and end of the high support state in the pachinko machine 10 that output the signal.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-10, in step SH201, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

In the following step SH202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SH203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Then, in step SH205, the second special display control process is executed. In this process, control is performed regarding the second special pattern display device 43B, and the jackpot determination, the variable display settings executed by the second special pattern display device 43B, and the effect display settings executed by the effect display device 42 are also performed. Details of this second special display control process will be described later.

Furthermore, in step SH206, a first special display control process is executed. This process controls the first special pattern display device 43A, determines whether a jackpot has occurred, sets the variable display to be executed by the first special pattern display device 43A, and sets the effect display (such as the variable pattern of decorative patterns) to be executed by the effect display device 42. Details of this first special display control process will be described later.

In step SH207, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this processing, control is performed regarding the variable prize winning device 32A. Details of the variable prize winning device control processing will be described later.

In step SH208, normal display control processing is executed. In this processing, control is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

In step SH209, the start winning section control process is executed. In this process, control is performed on the second start winning section 33WB, which has a blade member 33WBb that opens and closes. Details of this start winning section control process will be described later.

Then, in step SH210, it is determined whether power outage information has been set in the backup area 503a of RAM 503. If power outage information has not been set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step SH211 whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) has passed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already passed, it proceeds to step SH200, and the processing from step SH200 onwards is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps SH212 and SH213).

In other words, in step SH212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SH213, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step SH201 above). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (255 and 31 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

Here, the execution time for each process in steps SH200 to SH210 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the win/lose random number counter CH1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Furthermore, if power outage information is set in backup area 503a of RAM 503 (step SH210: YES), this means that power has been cut off, and the processing from step SH214 onwards is carried out as power outage processing in the event of a power outage. Power outage processing begins with prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing in step SH214, then saving the contents of each register used by CPU 501 to the stack area in step SH215, and storing the value of the stack pointer in backup area 503a in step SH216.

Then, in step SH217, a power-off notification command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (such as the dispensing control device 311). Then, in step SH218, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 503. Then, in step SH219, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

The processing of step SH210 is executed at the end of a series of processing steps SH200-SH209 corresponding to changes in the game state, or at the end of one cycle of processing steps SH212 and SH213 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, during normal processing by the main control unit 261, power outage information is checked at the end of each processing step, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing step is in progress, making storage easier. Furthermore, when restoring the state before the power outage, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is smaller, making restoration easier and reducing the processing burden on the main control unit 261. Furthermore, because interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step SH214), data at the time of the power outage is prevented from being changed, and the state before the power outage can be reliably stored.

Next, the first special display control process of step SH206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 4-20.

First, in step SH800, it is determined whether the value of the variable interval timer, which measures the remaining time of the variable interval set after the first variable display of the first special pattern display device 43A, is "0."

If step SH800 returns a negative result, i.e., if the time is within the variable interval period, step SH819 subtracts the value from the variable interval timer, and then the process ends. For example, if the variable interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the variable interval timer is set to 249 (or 250 if step SH819 is performed before step SH800), the variable interval timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec in this process, and becomes 0 after 1 second.

On the other hand, if step SH800 returns a positive result, i.e., if the interval is not a variable interval, step SH801 refers to the win status memory area, which will be described in detail later, and determines whether the current state is other than a jackpot state.

The jackpot state includes an opening period from when the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B displays a stop display in a predetermined manner corresponding to a jackpot until the variable winning device 32A opens, a round period during which the variable winning device 32A is in an open state, an interval period between round periods during which the variable winning device 32A is in a closed state, and an ending period after the final round until the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B can begin displaying a variable display.

In this embodiment, the hit status memory area stores "0" when in a state other than a jackpot state, and when in a jackpot state, stores "1" during the opening period and interval period, "2" during the round period, and "3" during the ending period. In other words, step SH801 determines whether or not a jackpot state is in progress by determining whether or not "0" is stored in the hit status memory area.

If step SH801 returns a negative result, i.e., if the jackpot state is in progress, this process ends. In this manner, in this embodiment, the first variable display is not executed when the jackpot state is in progress.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH801, the process proceeds to step SH802. In step SH802, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is being performed on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to on. If the special symbol 2 display flag is set to on, the process is determined to be positive. If a positive judgment is made in step SH802, the process is terminated.

If the result of step SH802 is negative, proceed to step SH803, where it is determined whether the second pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, is greater than 0. If the value of the second pending counter Nb is greater than 0, it is determined to be positive. If the result of step SH803 is positive, the process ends.

If the result of step SH803 is negative, step SH804 determines whether the special symbol 1 display flag, which indicates that the first variable display is being performed on the first special symbol display device 43A, is set to on.

If step SH804 returns a negative result, meaning the game is not in a jackpot state, is not showing the first or second variable display, and no second variable display is currently stored in reserve, the program proceeds to step SH805, where it determines whether the first reserved counter Na, which counts the number of reserved first variable displays triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, is greater than 0. This process constitutes the judgment unit in this embodiment.

In other words, if the second special pattern display device 43B is currently displaying a second variable display or if at least one second variable display is stored in reserve, the first special pattern display device 43A is configured not to be able to start a new first variable display.

If step SH805 returns a positive answer, step SH806 is executed to subtract 1 from the first pending counter Na. In the following step SH807, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the first special variable pending area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the first special variable pending area sequentially toward the execution area, with data in each area being shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SH807, in step SH808, a subtraction display process is performed on the first hold display device 46A (first hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of one in the hold number in the first variable display. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are flashing, the left first hold lamp is kept flashing while the right first hold lamp is lit; if the left first hold lamp is flashing and the right first hold lamp is lit, both left and right first hold lamps are lit; if both left and right first hold lamps are lit, the left first hold lamp is kept lit while the right first hold lamp is turned off; and if the left first hold lamp is lit and the right first hold lamp is turned off, both left and right first hold lamps are turned off. After step SH808, in step SH809, the first variable display setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH805, in step SH811, standby display settings (such as setting a standby display command to be output to the sub-control device 262) are made to derive a display mode corresponding to a standby state in which no change display is being performed in the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B (for example, a mode in which only the first or second special pattern lamp from the right in the bottom row is lit), and then this processing is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, after the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B stop fluctuation, their stopped state will be maintained (in a state showing the result of the win/lose lottery) for the fluctuation interval, but when the fluctuation interval ends, they will switch to a display state indicating that they are in a fluctuation standby state.

The display modes indicating that the effect display device 42 is in a waiting state for change include a first waiting display mode and a second waiting display mode. Upon receiving a waiting display command, the sub-control device 262 first sets the effect display device 42 to the first waiting display mode, in which the brightness is maintained and the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern changing display is maintained almost unchanged, and may be configured to set a value corresponding to a predetermined time (e.g., a value corresponding to 30 seconds) to a waiting time measurement timer that measures the time since the first waiting display mode was derived. Furthermore, when the value of the waiting time measurement timer is decremented every predetermined time and reaches "0," the effect display device 42 may be configured to dim the brightness and switch to the second waiting display mode, in which the display mode is simplified (e.g., no decorative pattern is displayed).

Here, details of the first variable display setting process in step SH809 will be explained with reference to Figure 4-21.

First, in step SH900, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is "7," which corresponds to a jackpot. This processing constitutes the lottery section in this embodiment. Furthermore, in step SH900, it may also be possible to determine whether the first variable display, which corresponds to a jackpot, is being displayed by determining whether the jackpot expected flag for the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set to on.

If step SH900 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH901, where it is determined whether the 15R jackpot flag has already been set on in the execution area of the special variable pending area. If step SH901 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH903.

In step SH903, a 15R jackpot pattern setting process is performed. The 15R jackpot pattern setting process is a process for causing the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 to execute a variable display and effect display corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area (the same applies to the various pattern setting processes described below). Here, the variable pattern table corresponding to the 15R jackpot is taken into consideration to determine the variable pattern (variable display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42, and variable pattern commands are set, etc.

Specifically, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process of step SH903 (the same applies to the various pattern setting processes of steps SH905, SH907, SH909, and SH910 described below), the mode memory area is first checked to determine the game mode. If "11," corresponding to "normal mode," is stored in the mode memory area, the first normal variable time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected as the first variable time determination table to be referenced when setting the first variable time. Furthermore, if "21," corresponding to "time-saving A mode," is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. If "31," corresponding to "time-saving B mode," is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected.

Then, the selected first variable time determination table is referenced, and the first variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area. The determined first variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable reserve area.

Furthermore, a reach pattern is determined based on the first fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern. For example, the first normal fluctuation time determination table for jackpots is referenced, and if the first fluctuation time is determined to be 22 seconds, a normal reach is set; if it is determined to be 30 or 35 seconds, a super reach is set; and if it is determined to be 40 seconds, a special reach is set.

Then, various information including the first variable display, the 15R jackpot, the determined reach pattern, game mode information, and the variable time are set in the variable pattern command. Furthermore, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process, the special chart 1 jackpot variable flag, which indicates that the first variable display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed, is set to ON.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reach pattern (either normal reach, super reach, or special reach) of the effect display device 42 is determined on the main control device 261 side, but in order to reduce the burden on the main control device 261, the main control device 261 may not determine the reach pattern, and the variation pattern command may be configured to include information on whether it is the first variation display or the second variation display, information indicating the variation pattern (information that allows one to determine whether it is a 15R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, a reach that misses before and after, a reach that misses other than before and after, or a complete miss), information indicating the variation time, etc., and the reach pattern of the effect display device 42 may be determined on the sub-control device 262 side.

After step SH903, in step SH911, the special symbol 1 display in progress flag, which indicates that the first variable display is in progress on the first special symbol display device 43A, is set to ON, and in step SH912, a value corresponding to the first variable time is set for the special symbol 1 display timer, which measures the remaining time of the first variable display. If the jackpot expected flag is then set to ON, in step SH913, the jackpot expected flag is set to OFF, and this processing is terminated.

If step SH901 returns a negative result, step SH905 performs a 4R jackpot pattern setting process. Here, the variation pattern table corresponding to the 4R jackpot is referenced to determine the variation patterns (variation display time, stop mode, presentation pattern, etc.) of the first special symbol display device 43A and the presentation display device 42, and variation pattern commands are set, etc. Furthermore, the 4R jackpot pattern setting process sets the special symbol 1 jackpot variation flag to ON, indicating that the first variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed.

After step SH905, in step SH911, the special chart 1 display flag is set to ON, and in step SH912, a value corresponding to the first variable time is set for the special chart 1 display timer. If the jackpot expected flag is then set to ON, in step SH913, the jackpot expected flag is turned OFF, and this processing ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step SH900, step SH906 takes into consideration the execution area of the special variable pending area and determines whether the front and rear flag (see reach judgment process in Figure 4-17) is on. If a positive judgment is made in step SH906, that is, if the "front and rear miss reach" is present, then step SH907 performs the front and rear reach pattern setting process (setting of variable pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH911, SH912, and SH913 are carried out, before terminating this process.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step SH906, step SH908 takes into consideration the execution area of the special variable pending area and determines whether the non-front and rear flag is on. If a positive judgment is made in step SH908, that is, if the "non-front and rear miss reach" is true, step SH909 performs non-front and rear reach pattern setting processing (setting of variable pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH911, SH912, and SH913 are carried out, and this processing ends.

Also, if the result of step SH908 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "complete miss," then step SH910 performs the miss fluctuation pattern setting process (setting the fluctuation pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH911, SH912, and SH913 are carried out, and this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-20, if a positive judgment is made in step SH804, i.e., if the first variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SH812, where the decrement process for the special chart 1 display timer is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special chart 1 display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 6 seconds (6000 msec), the special chart 1 display timer is set to "1500", and is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

Next, the process proceeds to step SH813, where the value of the special chart 1 display timer after the above subtraction is used to determine whether the specified change time has elapsed. At this time, if the specified change time has elapsed, i.e., if the value of the special chart 1 display timer becomes "0," a positive judgment is made in step SH813.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH813, a switch display setting is made in step SH818 to continue the switch display (variable display) of the first special pattern display device 43A. Based on the settings of the switch display setting, a control signal to switch display is output to the first special pattern display device 43A in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This enables the switch display (variable display) of the first special pattern display device 43A to be performed at the execution timing of the first special display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SH818, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH813, the special symbol 1 display flag is turned off in step SH814, and the special symbol 1 stop display setting is made in step SH815 to display a stop on the first special symbol display device 43A. Based on the settings of this special symbol 1 stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop is output to the first special symbol display device 43A in the external output processing of the next normal processing. In other words, the first special symbol display device 43A will display a stop corresponding to each jackpot type, miss, etc. set in the first variable display setting processing.

Furthermore, after step SH815, in step SH816, a special symbol 1 stop command is set in the sub-control device 262 to cause the effect display device 42 to display a stop. This ensures that the stop timing of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 is synchronized. However, because the stop mode of the effect display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, there is no need to add information regarding the stop mode of the effect display device 42 again. Also, to reiterate, the stop display by the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B is the primary display, and the display of the decorative pattern by the effect display device 42 is merely auxiliary (for performance purposes).

Next, in step SH817, the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process is performed to set the initial winning status and switch game modes, and then this process ends.

Here, the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process in step SH817 will be explained with reference to Figure 4-22.

First, in step SH1001, the execution area of the special variable pending area is referenced to determine whether the special chart 1 jackpot variable flag is set to on.

If the result of step SH1001 is affirmative, the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SH1002, and the jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot state is in progress (the special chart 1 jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred in the first fluctuation display stored in the first special fluctuation pending area) is turned on in step SH1003.

Furthermore, in step SH1004, the round number counter is set to a value corresponding to the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area ("15" corresponding to a 15R jackpot, or "4" corresponding to a 4R jackpot). The round number counter is used to determine the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32A is opened).

In the following step SH1005, a "1" is set in the winning status memory area. Furthermore, in step SH1006, a predetermined value (here, a value of "2000" corresponding to an 8-second opening period) is set in the special variable timer. The special variable timer is used to measure the control times for various controls during the jackpot state (such as the opening and closing control of variable winning device 32A).

Next, in step SH1007, the winning counter is set to "8," which indicates the maximum number of winning balls per round in a jackpot.

The winning counter counts the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32A. During the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 4-11), the value of the winning counter is determined based on the detection information from the large winning slot count switch 222 to determine whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32A, and is decremented by one if it is determined that a ball has entered the variable winning device 32A.

Then, in step SH1008, an opening command is set to notify the sub-controller 262 that the jackpot state has begun. The opening command includes information such as the type of win, allowing the sub-controller 262 to grasp the total number of rounds in the win state, etc. (The same applies to the opening commands set in the various processes below.)

In the following step SH1009, the value of the normal mode duration counter (ceiling counter) is reset to "0". The normal mode duration counter is a counting means for measuring the duration of "normal mode" (up to 500 variable displays) without the occurrence of a jackpot, and as described below, is incremented by one each time a variable display is executed in "normal mode". In step SH1009, upon the occurrence of a jackpot, the value of the normal mode duration counter that has been incremented up to that point is reset to "0".

In the following step SH1010, the time-saving B mode activation flag (ceiling activation flag) is turned off. Then, this process ends. The time-saving B mode activation flag is determination information used to determine whether or not "time-saving B mode" has already been activated, and is set on when "time-saving B mode" is activated. In step SH1010, when a jackpot state occurs, the time-saving B mode activation flag that was set on is turned off.

If the answer is negative in step SH1001, then in step SH1013, the variable interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable interval (e.g., 1 second).

When the decorative pattern variable display is executed on the effect display device 42, the decorative pattern variable display is basically displayed as a static display at the timing of the static display of the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B, and the statically displayed decorative pattern continues to be displayed until the variable interval ends (until the next variable display on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B begins). Then, when the variable interval ends and the variable display is reserved and stored, the variable display on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B and the variable display on the effect display device 42 begin simultaneously. On the other hand, when the variable interval ends and the variable display is not reserved and stored, the static pattern on the effect display device 42 continues to be displayed for a while, and then the display switches to a standby display for play.

After step SH1013, in step SH1014, it is determined whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the "Time-saving A mode" is in effect.

If step SH1014 returns a positive answer, step SH1015 subtracts 1 from the value of first fluctuation count counter A. First fluctuation count counter A is used to measure the duration of "time-saving A mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until the upper limit is reached).

In this embodiment, after all types of jackpots have ended, a "Time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 or 10 variable play times is granted, and therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the first variable play counter A is set to "100" or "10."

In the following step SH1016, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0." If the determination in step SH1016 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SH1016 is positive, "11," indicating "normal mode," is set in the mode memory area in step SH1017. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "100" or "10," the "time-saving A mode" ends and the system transitions to "normal mode."

After step SH1017, in step SH1018, a time-saving A mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving A mode"). Then, this process ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH1014, step SH1019 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "Time-saving B mode."

If a positive judgment is made in step SH1019, the value of second fluctuation count counter B is decremented by 1 in step SH1020. Second fluctuation count counter B is used to measure the duration of "time-saving B mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until the upper limit is reached).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the "Time-saving B mode" is granted for a maximum of 200 variable play times, so when the "Time-saving B mode" is activated, the second variable play counter B is initially set to "200."

In the following step SH1021, it is determined whether the value of the second variation counter B is "0." If the determination in step SH1021 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SH1021 is positive, "11," indicating "normal mode," is set in the mode memory area in step SH1022. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "200 times," the "time-saving B mode" ends and the system transitions to "normal mode."

After step SH1022, in step SH1023, a time-saving B mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving B mode"), and then this processing ends.

If the answer in step SH1019 is negative, then in step SH1024, it is determined whether "11" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "normal mode." If the answer in step SH1024 is negative, then the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1024 returns a positive answer, step SH1025 increments the value of the normal mode duration counter by 1. Then, step SH1026 determines whether the value of the normal mode duration counter has reached its ceiling value (upper limit).

In this embodiment, the ceiling value is set to 500 times for the variable display, so here we determine whether the value of the normal mode continuation counter is 500 or greater. In other words, we determine whether normal mode has continued for 500 variable display cycles without a jackpot occurring.

If the result of step SH1026 is negative, i.e., if the value of the normal mode continuation counter has not reached the ceiling value (if the number of variable displays is less than 500), this process ends.

If the result of step SH1026 is affirmative, i.e., if the value of the normal mode continuation counter has reached its ceiling value (if the variable display has reached 500 times), then step SH1027 determines whether the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to off.

If the result of step SH1027 is negative, i.e., if "time-saving B mode" has already been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to on, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1027 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the "time-saving B mode" has not yet been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF, step SH1028 sets "31" in the mode storage area, indicating that the mode is the "time-saving B mode." In other words, setting processing is executed to activate the "time-saving B mode."

In the following step SH1029, the upper limit number of times "200" is set for the second fluctuation number counter B, and in step SH1030, a time-saving B mode start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "time-saving B mode," and in step SH1031, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned on. This process then terminates.

Next, the second special display control process (step SH205) of the normal process (see Figure 4-10) will be explained with reference to Figure 4-23. Note that in this embodiment, the second special symbol display device 43B is configured so that the variation interval of the second variable display is not set. Of course, it may also be configured so that the variation interval of the second variable display is set.

First, in step SH1601, it is determined whether the value in the win status storage area is "0," i.e., whether the game is in a state other than a jackpot state. If the determination in step SH1601 is negative, i.e., if the game is in a jackpot state, this processing ends. In this way, in this embodiment, the second variable display is not executed if the game is in a jackpot state.

On the other hand, if step SH1601 returns a positive result, the process proceeds to step SH1603, where it is determined whether the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is being performed on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to on.

If step SH1603 returns a negative judgment, meaning the game is not in a jackpot state and is not currently displaying the second variable display, the program proceeds to step SH1604, where it determines whether the second pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, is greater than 0. This processing constitutes the judgment unit in this embodiment. If step SH1604 returns a negative judgment, the program simply ends this processing.

On the other hand, if step SH1604 returns a positive answer, step SH1605 subtracts 1 from the second pending counter Nb. The following step SH1606 executes a process to shift the data stored in the second special variable pending area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the second special variable pending area sequentially toward the execution area, with the data in each area shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SH1606, in step SH1607, a subtraction display process is performed on the second hold display device 46B (second hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of one hold number in the second variable display. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right second hold lamps are flashing, the left second hold lamp is kept flashing while the right second hold lamp is turned on; if the left second hold lamp is flashing and the right second hold lamp is lit, both left and right second hold lamps are turned on; if both left and right second hold lamps are lit, the left second hold lamp is kept lit while the right second hold lamp is turned off; and if the left second hold lamp is lit and the right second hold lamp is turned off, both left and right second hold lamps are turned off. After step SH1607, in step SH1608, a second variable display setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

Here, details of the second variable display setting process in step SH1608 will be explained with reference to Figure 4-24.

First, in step SH1701, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CH1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is "7," which corresponds to a jackpot. In addition, in step SH1701, it may also be determined whether the second variable display, which corresponds to a jackpot, is being displayed by determining whether the jackpot expected flag for the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set to on. This processing constitutes the lottery section in this embodiment.

If step SH1701 returns a positive result, step SH1702 sets the special chart 2 jackpot fluctuation flag, which indicates that the second fluctuation display corresponding to a jackpot is being performed, to ON. The following step SH1703 determines whether the 15R jackpot flag is set to ON in the execution area of the special fluctuation pending area. If step SH1703 returns a positive result, step SH1704 performs 15R jackpot pattern setting processing.

If step SH1703 returns a negative result, step SH1705 determines whether the 8R jackpot flag is set to ON. If step SH1705 returns a positive result, step SH1706 performs 8R jackpot pattern setting processing, and if step SH1705 returns a negative result, step SH1707 performs 4R jackpot pattern setting processing.

As with the first variable display setting process described above, the various pattern setting process is a process for executing variable displays and effect displays corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area on the second special symbol display device 43B and effect display device 42. Here, the variable pattern tables corresponding to various wins are taken into consideration to determine the variable patterns (variable display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) of the second special symbol display device 43B and effect display device 42, and variable pattern commands are set, etc.

In other words, in each pattern setting process related to step SH1704, step SH1706, and step SH1707, if "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area as the second variable time determination table referenced when setting the second variable time, the second normal variable time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. Also, if "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected. If "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" corresponding to that pattern setting process is selected.

Then, the selected second variable time determination table is referenced, and the second variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area. The determined second variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable reserve area.

Then, various information including the fact that it is the second variable display, jackpot type information, game mode information, and variable time are set in the variable pattern command.

In this embodiment, the effect display device 42 is configured not to perform reach effects or the like corresponding to the second variable display. However, as described above, the value of the variable selection counter CH3 is stored in each holding area of the second special variable holding area in accordance with the winning history in the second start winning section 33WB. Therefore, the effect display device 42 may be configured to perform reach effects or the like corresponding to the second variable display, just as in the case corresponding to the first variable display. For example, the player may be configured to decide whether or not to perform reach effects or the like.

After step SH1704, step SH1706, or step SH1707, in step SH1710, the special symbol 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is in progress on the second special symbol display device 43B, is set to ON, and in step SH1711, a value corresponding to the second variable time is set for the special symbol 2 display timer, which measures the remaining time of the second variable display. Thereafter, if the jackpot expected flag is set to ON, the jackpot expected flag is set to OFF in step SH1712, and this processing is terminated.

Also, if the result of step SH1701 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "miss," then step SH1712 performs the miss fluctuation pattern setting process (setting the fluctuation pattern command, etc.), and then, as described above, steps SH1710, SH1711, and SH1712 are carried out, after which the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-23, if a positive judgment is made in step SH1603, i.e., if the second variable display is in progress, proceed to step SH1609 and perform the decrement process on the special chart 2 display timer.

Next, the process proceeds to step SH1610, where the value of the special chart 2 display timer after the above subtraction is used to determine whether the specified change time has elapsed. At this time, if the specified change time has elapsed, i.e., the value of the special chart 2 display timer becomes "0," a positive judgment is made in step SH1610.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH1610, a switch display setting is made in step SH1615 to continue the switch display (second variable display) of the second special pattern display device 43B. Based on the settings of the switch display setting, a control signal to perform a switch display is output to the second special pattern display device 43B in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This realizes the switch display (variable display) of the second special pattern display device 43B at the execution timing of the second special display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SH1615, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH1610, the special symbol 2 display flag is turned off in step SH1611, and the special symbol 2 stop display setting is made in step SH1612 to display a stop on the second special symbol display device 43B. Based on the settings of this special symbol 2 stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop is output to the second special symbol display device 43B in the external output processing of the next normal processing. In other words, the second special symbol display device 43B will display a stop corresponding to the various jackpots, losses, etc. set in the second variable display setting processing.

Furthermore, after step SH1612, in step SH1613, a special symbol 2 stop command is set to the sub-control device 262, which causes the effect display device 42 to display a stopped image. This ensures that the stop timing of the second special symbol display device 43B and the effect display device 42 is synchronized.

Next, in step SH1614, the special chart 2 discrimination information setting process is performed to set the initial winning status and switch game modes, and then this process ends.

Here, the special chart 2 determination information setting process in step SH1614 will be explained with reference to Figure 4-25. First, in step SH1801, the execution area of the special variation pending area is referenced to determine whether the special chart 2 jackpot variation flag is set to on.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH1801, the special chart 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SH1802, and the jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot state is in progress (the special chart 2 jackpot in progress flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred in the second fluctuation display stored in the second special fluctuation pending area) is turned on in step SH1803.

Furthermore, in step SH1804, the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area are referenced, and a value corresponding to the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set in the round number counter.

For example, if the 15R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter is set to "15". If the 8R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter is set to "8". If the 4R jackpot flag is set to on, the round number counter is set to "4".

In the following step SH1805, a "1" is set in the win status memory area. Furthermore, in step SH1806, a predetermined value (here, a value of "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds) is set in the special variable timer. Next, in step SH1807, the winning counter is set to "8," indicating the maximum number of winning balls per round, which is eight.

Then, in step SH1808, an opening command is set to notify the sub-controller 262 that the jackpot state has begun.

In the following step SH1809, in response to the occurrence of a jackpot, the value of the normal mode continuation counter that has been incremented up to that point is reset to "0," and in step SH1810, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned off. Then, this processing ends.

If the answer is negative in step SH1801, step SH1814 determines whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "Time-saving A mode."

If the answer is affirmative in step SH1814, the value of the first fluctuation count counter A is decremented by 1 in step SH1815.

In the following step SH1816, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0." If the determination in step SH1816 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SH1816 is positive, "11," indicating "normal mode," is set in the mode memory area in step SH1817. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "100" or "10," the "time-saving A mode" ends and the system transitions to "normal mode."

After step SH1817, in step SH1818, a time-saving A mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving A mode"). Then, this processing ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH1814, step SH1819 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "Time-saving B mode."

If the answer is affirmative in step SH1819, the value of the second fluctuation count counter B is decremented by 1 in step SH1820.

In the following step SH1821, it is determined whether the value of the second variation counter B is "0." If the determination in step SH1821 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SH1821 is positive, "11," indicating "normal mode," is set in the mode memory area in step SH1822. In other words, when the total number of times the first and second variation displays have been executed on the first special pattern display device 43A and second special pattern display device 43B reaches "200 times," the "time-saving B mode" ends and the system transitions to "normal mode."

After step SH1822, in step SH1823, a time-saving B mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving B mode"), and then this processing ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH1819, step SH1824 determines whether "11" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "normal mode." If a negative determination is made in step SH1824, the process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1824 returns a positive answer, step SH1825 increments the value of the normal mode duration counter by 1. Then, step SH1826 determines whether the value of the normal mode duration counter has reached its ceiling value (upper limit).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the ceiling value is set to 500 times for the number of times the variable display is executed, so here, it is determined whether the value of the normal mode continuation counter is 500 or more. In other words, it is determined whether normal mode has continued for 500 times of variable display without a jackpot state occurring.

If the result of step SH1826 is negative, i.e., if the value of the normal mode continuation counter has not reached the ceiling value (if the number of variable displays is less than 500), this process ends.

If step SH1826 returns a positive result, i.e., the value of the normal mode continuation counter has reached its ceiling value (500 variable display times), step SH1827 determines whether the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF.

If the result of step SH1827 is negative, i.e., if "time-saving B mode" has already been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to on, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH1827 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the "time-saving B mode" has not yet been activated and the time-saving B mode activation flag is set to OFF, step SH1828 sets "31" in the mode storage area, indicating that the mode is the "time-saving B mode." In other words, setting processing is executed to activate the "time-saving B mode."

In the following step SH1829, the upper limit number of times "200" is set for the second fluctuation number counter B, and in step SH1830, a time-saving B mode start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the transition to "time-saving B mode," and in step SH1831, the time-saving B mode activation flag is turned on. This processing then terminates.

Next, the variable winning device control process of step SH207 for opening and closing the variable winning device 32A will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 4-26. The special game execution unit in this embodiment is configured with the function of executing this variable winning device control process.

First, in step SH1201, it is determined whether the value set in the hit status memory area is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the state is other than a hit state. If the determination in step SH1201 is affirmative, i.e., if the state is not a hit state, this process ends. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "1" is set in the hit status memory area in the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process or special chart 2 discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, if step SH1201 returns a negative determination, i.e., if the game is in a winning state (if the winning status memory area is set to any of "1" to "3"), the process proceeds to step SH1202, where the value of the special variable timer is decremented by 1. In the following step SH1203, it is determined whether the value of the special variable timer is "0". If step SH1203 returns a positive determination, it is determined in step SH1204 whether "1" is set in the winning status memory area.

If step SH1204 returns a positive result, step SH1205 sets the win status memory area to "2." In the following step SH1206, the special variable timer is set to a value corresponding to the opening time of variable winning device 32A. In this embodiment, the value set is "7500," which corresponds to an opening time of 30 seconds.

After step SH1206, step SH1207 performs an opening process to open the variable winning device 32A, and step SH1208 sets a round command to inform the sub-control device 262 that a round is about to begin. Then, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SH1204, then in step SH1210 it is determined whether or not "3" is set in the win status memory area. As will be described in more detail below, when all rounds in the jackpot state end and the ending period begins, "3" is set in the win status memory area. If a negative determination is made in step SH1210, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, then in step SH1212 the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1. In the following step SH1213 it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0".

If step SH1213 returns a negative result, meaning that there are still rounds to be played (the hit status memory area is set to "2"), the process proceeds to step SH1215, where the hit status memory area is set to "1". Then, in step SH1216, the special variable timer is set to a value of "250", which corresponds to the interval time (1 second).

In the following step SH1217, the winning counter is set to "8". Furthermore, in step SH1218, a closing process is performed to close the variable winning device 32A, and in step SH1219, an interval command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that an interval has begun. Then, this process ends.

Furthermore, if step SH1203 returns a negative judgment, i.e., if there is still time remaining for the variable winning device 32A to remain open or closed (open time or closed time), step SH1225 determines whether the value of the winning counter corresponding to the variable winning device 32A in the current jackpot state is "0." As mentioned above, the winning counter is set to an upper limit of the number of winnings per round (a specified number of "8") at the start of the jackpot state or the start of an interval. The winning counter is then decremented by one each time a game ball enters the variable winning device 32A.

If step SH1225 returns a negative result, the process ends. On the other hand, if step SH1225 returns a positive result, i.e., if the trigger for ending the round arrives before the set period for the round has elapsed, the process proceeds to step SH1212. As a result, if the maximum number of game balls (8 balls) enters variable winning device 32A during a single round, the round will end promptly at that point, even if the maximum opening period (e.g., 30 seconds) has not yet elapsed.

Also, if step SH1213 returns a positive result, i.e., if all rounds in the jackpot state have been played, the process proceeds to step SH1227, where the win status memory area is set to "3." Then, in step SH1228, the special variable timer is set to the value "2500," which corresponds to the ending time (10 seconds).

After step SH1228, in step SH1229, the prize counter is set to "7." Note that when the process of setting the ending from step SH1227 onwards is carried out following a positive determination in step SH1225, the prize counter value is set to "0." If the prize counter value is left at "0" at the start of the ending period, a positive determination will be made abruptly in step SH1225 during the variable prize device control process 4 msec later, preventing the ending period from being completed. For this reason, a temporary value other than "0" ("7" in this example) is entered in the prize counter in step SH1229 to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may also be completed using a different method.

After step SH1229, step SH1230 performs a closing process to close the variable winning device 32A, and then step SH1231 sets an ending command to the sub-control device 262 to inform it that the ending has begun. Then, this process ends.

Also, if step SH1210 returns a positive result, i.e., the ending period has ended and it is time to end the jackpot state, step SH1232 performs the end setting process, and then this process ends.

The termination setting process will now be explained with reference to Figure 4-27. First, in step SH1401, it is determined whether the special chart jackpot flag (either the special chart 1 jackpot flag or the special chart 2 jackpot flag) is set to on. If the determination in step SH1401 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH1401 returns a positive result, step SH1402 stores the value "21" corresponding to "Time-saving A Mode" in the mode storage area. This causes the game to transition to "Time-saving A Mode" after the jackpot state ends.

In the following step SH1403, a time-saving A mode start command is set to the sub-control device 262 to start "time-saving A mode" (transition to "rush stage effect" or "battle stage effect").

In the following step SH1404, the first variable count counter A is set to the upper limit of "100" or "10" for the "Time-saving A mode" corresponding to the jackpot type, and the process proceeds to step SH1405.

In step SH1405, the jackpot flag (special chart 1 jackpot flag or special chart 2 jackpot flag) that is set to ON is turned OFF.

In the following step SH1406, the value "0" is set in the win status memory area, indicating that the state is not a jackpot state. Furthermore, in step SH1407, a jackpot end command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that the jackpot state is ending. Then, this process ends.

Next, the normal display control processing of step SH208 of the normal processing (see Figure 4-10) will be explained with reference to Figure 4-28.

First, in step SH2101, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern interval timer, which measures the remaining time of the interval (normal pattern interval) set after the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41, is "0." If the determination in step SH2101 is negative, i.e., if it is a normal pattern interval, then in step SH2116 the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted, and then this processing ends. In other words, for example, if the normal pattern interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the normal pattern interval timer is set to "249" (or "250" if step SH2116 is configured to be performed before step SH2101), then in this processing the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and after 1 second it becomes "0."

On the other hand, if step SH2101 returns a positive result, i.e., if it is not the normal interval period, step SH2102 determines whether the support period flag, which indicates that the second start winning section 33WB (blade member 33WBb) is currently being controlled to open and close, is set to on. If step SH2102 returns a positive result, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2102, a judgment is made in step SH2103 as to whether the normal pattern display flag, which indicates whether a changing display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41, is on. Furthermore, if the normal pattern display flag is on, it is considered that a changing display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH2103, the process proceeds to step SH2104, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nd is greater than 0. If a negative judgment is made in step SH2104, i.e., if no variable display is held on the normal pattern display device 41, the process ends. Note that, for example, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2104, the normal pattern display device 41 may perform a standby display setting to derive a display mode corresponding to a variable standby state in which no variable display is being performed. In other words, after the variable display stops, the normal pattern display device 41 will maintain its stopped mode (in a mode indicating the result of the start-going ball support lottery) for the normal pattern interval period, but may be configured to switch to a display mode indicating a variable standby state when the normal pattern interval period ends.

On the other hand, if step SH2104 returns a positive answer, step SH2105 subtracts 1 from the normal hold counter Nd. The following step SH2106 executes a process to shift the data stored in the normal variable hold area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in hold areas 1 to 4 of the normal variable hold area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area shifted in the following order: hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Then, in step SH2107, a normal pattern variation setting process is executed to set and start the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41.

The normal symbol variation setting process will now be explained with reference to Figure 4-29. First, in step SH2301, the normal symbol display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol display device 41 is currently displaying a varying normal symbol, is set to ON. In the following step SH2302, the win status memory area is referenced to determine whether "0" is stored, i.e., whether the current state is other than a jackpot state. If step SH2302 returns a positive determination, i.e., if the current state is not a jackpot state, then in step SH2303, it is determined whether a value of "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current state is a high ball winning state (time-saving A mode or time-saving B mode).

If step SH2303 returns a positive result, step SH2304 sets the normal symbol display timer to "100" to set the normal symbol variable display time to 0.4 seconds. The normal symbol display timer is used to measure the variable display time (remaining time) performed by the normal symbol display device 41.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2302 or step SH2303, that is, if a jackpot state or a high ball entry state is not reached, then in step SH2307, the normal symbol display timer is set to "1500" to set the normal symbol variable display time to 6 seconds.

Then, in step SH2305, it is determined whether the normal symbol random number counter CH4 in the execution area of the normal variable pending area is equal to the winning value (0, 1 in the case of a low ball entry state, or 0-27 in the case of a high ball entry state). If the determination in step SH2305 is negative, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH2305 returns a positive result, i.e., if the start-goal-entry support lottery to determine whether or not the second start-goal-entry section 33WB will be opened is won, then in step SH2306, the start-goal-entry support flag, indicating that the start-goal-entry support lottery has been won, is set to ON. After step SH2306, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-28, after step SH2107, in step SH2108, a subtraction display process is performed on the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the reduction of the hold number in the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are flashing, the left normal hold lamp is kept flashing while the right normal hold lamp is lit; if the left normal hold lamp is flashing and the right normal hold lamp is lit, both left and right normal hold lamps are lit; if both left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp is kept lit while the right normal hold lamp is turned off; and if the left normal hold lamp is lit and the right normal hold lamp is turned off, both left and right normal hold lamps are turned off. After step SH2108, this process ends.

Also, if a positive judgment is made in step SH2103, i.e., if the normal pattern display device 41 is displaying a changing pattern, the process proceeds to step SH2109, where a process is performed to decrement the normal pattern display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal pattern display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the program proceeds to step SH2110, where it determines whether the count value of the normal symbol display timer is "0," i.e., whether the variable time has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step SH2110, the normal symbol display flag is turned off in step SH2111, and a normal symbol stop display setting is made in step SH2112 to display a stop on the normal symbol display device 41. In other words, if the start-goal-entry support lottery is won (the goal-entry support flag is set on), both of the pair of normal symbol lamps on the left and right of the normal symbol display device 41 are lit, and if the result is a loss, only the left normal symbol lamp is lit.

Next, proceed to step SH2113 and perform the general map discrimination information setting process. The general map discrimination information setting process is explained here with reference to Figure 4-30.

First, in step SH2401, it is determined whether the above-mentioned goal-winning support flag is set to ON. If the result of step SH2401 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SH2401 is YES, in step SH2402, the normal variable flag is set to ON to determine whether the second start-up winning section 33WB is in the open state.

The following step SH2403 determines whether "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the high ball entry state (time-saving A mode or time-saving B mode) is in effect. If a positive determination is made in step SH2403, then in step SH2404, the normal variable timer is set to "450" to set the opening time of the second start winning section 33WB to 1.8 seconds. The normal variable timer is used to measure the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning section 33WB.

Furthermore, in step SH2405, the opening count counter is set to "2" to open the second start winning section 33WB twice. The opening count counter counts the number of times (remaining times) that the second start winning section 33WB is to be opened.

On the other hand, if step SH2403 returns a negative result, i.e., if the mode is not "Time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)" or "Time-saving B mode (high ball entry state)," then in step SH2406, the normal variable timer is set to "50" to set the opening time of the second start winning section 33WB to 0.2 seconds. In the following step SH2407, the opening count counter is set to "2" to open the second start winning section 33WB twice.

After step SH2405 or step SH2407, in step SH2408, the above-mentioned winning support flag is turned off, and in step SH2409, the above-mentioned support period flag is turned on. Furthermore, in step SH2410, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state, and then this processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-28, after step SH2113, in step SH2114, the normal interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the normal interval period (e.g., 1 second), and then this processing ends.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step SH2110, a switching display setting is made in step SH2115 to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 (a switching display in which a pair of normal symbol lamps on the left and right are alternately lit). Furthermore, based on the settings of the switching display setting, a control signal to perform a switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing of the next normal processing. This realizes the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 at the timing of the normal display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step SH2115, this processing ends.

Next, the start-up prize section control processing of step SH209 of the normal processing (see Figure 4-10) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 4-31.

First, in step SH2201, it is determined whether the support period flag is on. If the determination in step SH2201 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SH2201 is positive, the value of the normal variable timer is decremented by 1 in step SH2202.

The next step, SH2203, determines whether the value of the normal variable timer is "0." If the result of step SH2203 is negative, meaning that the second start winning section 33WB is still in the open or closed state, the start winning section control process ends.

On the other hand, if step SH2203 returns a positive result, step SH2204 determines whether the normal variable flag is on. If step SH2204 returns a positive result, i.e., if the second start winning section 33WB is currently in the open state and the time has come to change it to the closed state, step SH2205 turns the normal variable flag off. In the following step SH2206, the value of the opening count counter is decremented by 1, and in step SH2207, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the closed state.

Then, in step SH2208, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter is "0." If the determination in step SH2208 is affirmative, in step SH2209, the support period flag is turned off, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if step SH2208 returns a negative result, i.e., if there are remaining times among the multiple times the second start winning section 33WB has been opened, step SH2210 sets the normal variable timer to a value equivalent to the interval time (e.g., "250"), and then this process ends.

Furthermore, if step SH2204 returns a negative judgment, i.e., if the second start winning section 33WB is in an interval period between multiple openings (the second start winning section 33WB is in a closed state) and the timing to end the interval period has arrived, step SH2211 sets the normal variable flag to ON. Furthermore, step SH2212 determines whether "21" or "31" is stored in the mode memory area. If step SH2212 returns a positive judgment, step SH2213 sets the normal variable timer to a value of "450," which corresponds to an opening time of 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, if step SH2212 returns a negative judgment, step SH2214 sets the normal variable timer to a value of "50," which corresponds to an opening time of 0.2 seconds.

After step SH2213 or step SH2214, in step SH2215, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state. Then, this processing ends. Note that if the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state and a specified number of game balls (for example, four) enter the second start winning section 33WB, the second start winning section 33WB may be configured to immediately close.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, if a game ball passes through the through gate 34 during a special symbol variable play (either the first variable display or the second variable display), the opening control of the second start winning section 33WB (pair of blade members 33WBb) can be executed regardless of whether a special symbol variable play is being executed or not.

Next, we will explain the dispensing control executed by the CPU 511 in the dispensing control device 311. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the reception interrupt processing with reference to Figure 4-32, and then explain the main processing with reference to Figure 4-33.

Figure 4-32 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing executed by the dispensing control device 311. The reception interrupt processing is a process that is executed by interrupting when the dispensing control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261. When the dispensing control device 311 confirms that the command sent from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 within the dispensing control device 311 is temporarily put on hold, and the reception interrupt processing is executed.

When the receive interrupt process is executed, first in step SH3001, the command sent from the main control unit 261 is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513, and in step SH3002, the command receive flag is turned on to record that a command has been sent from the main control unit 261, and this receive interrupt process ends. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a specified storage area, and the storage pointer is updated so that the next received command can be stored in the next storage area.

In this embodiment, the reception process for a command sent from the main control unit 261 is performed by interrupt processing that is executed when the command is received. However, for example, in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4-34, it may be possible to check whether a command has been received before the command determination process (step SH3201) is performed, and if a command has been received, store the command in the command buffer in RAM 513 and turn on the command reception flag, or proceed to command determination processing if a command has not been received. In such a case, it is possible to check the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals to check whether a command has been received.

Next, the main processing of the dispensing control device 311 will be explained with reference to Figure 4-33. Figure 4-33 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device 311, which is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SH3101, initial setting processing is performed when power is turned on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SH3103, RAM access is permitted and in step SH3104 an external interrupt vector is set.

Then, in step SH3106, it is determined whether power outage information has been set in backup area 513a of RAM 513. If power outage information has been set in backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SH3107, and in the following step SH3108, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, i.e., the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether keywords written in a specified area of RAM 513 have been saved correctly.

If power outage information is not set in step SH3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step SH3108, the process proceeds to RAM 513 initialization processing from step SH3115 onwards.

In step SH3115, all areas of RAM 513 are cleared to 0, and in step SH3116, the initial values of RAM 513 are set. Then, in step SH3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SH3114 to enable interrupts.

On the other hand, if power outage information has been set in step SH3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SH3108, processing upon power recovery (processing upon recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, the stack pointer before the power outage is restored in step SH3109, the power outage information is cleared in step SH3110, and the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared in step SH3111. Also, in step SH3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SH3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SH3114, interrupts are permitted.

After interrupts are permitted in step SH3114, the process in step SH3122 determines whether power failure information has been set in backup area 513a. If power failure information has been set, it means that power has been cut off, and the processes in steps SH3123 and after are performed as power failure processing in the event of a power failure. Power failure processing begins with prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing in step SH3123, followed by the command determination process described below in the next step SH3124. Subsequently, in step SH3125, the contents of each register used by CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step SH3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in backup area 513a, in step SH3127 a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in backup area 513a, and in step SH3128 RAM access is prohibited, continuing the infinite loop until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, the checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in RAM 513.

In addition, since the processing of step SH3122 checks for information about the occurrence of a power outage after the processing performed when the power is turned on is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513 is smaller than when each processing is in progress, and storage is easier. Also, when returning to the state before the power was turned off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so restoration is easy, and the processing burden on the dispensing control device 311 can be reduced.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing of the dispensing control device 311 with reference to the flowchart in Figure 4-34. This timer interrupt processing is initiated periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment).

The timer interrupt process first obtains a command from the main control unit 261 and performs a command discrimination process (step SH3201). This command discrimination process is explained below with reference to Figure 4-35.

Figure 4-35 is a flowchart showing the command discrimination process performed by the dispensing control device 311. In the command discrimination process (steps SH3124, SH3201), it is first determined in step SH3301 whether the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process described above (see Figure 4-32).

If it is determined in step SH3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control unit 261, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step SH3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from RAM 513 in step SH3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SH3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SH3303, the processing of steps SH3302 to SH3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control of the dispensing control unit 311.

The type of command read from RAM 513 is determined in steps SH3304 to SH3306. In step SH3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, in step SH3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step SH3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, step SH3307 determines whether the payout permission flag is already on. If the payout permission flag is off, this means that the main control unit 261 instructed RAM 513 to be initialized when the power was turned on, so step SH3308 clears the working area (area) other than the stack area of RAM 513 to 0, and step SH3309 sets the initial value of RAM 513. Then, step SH3311 turns on the payout permission flag, and permission to pay out prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control unit 261 initializes RAM 503 after sending the payout initialization command, and the payout control unit 311 initializes RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which RAM 503 and RAM 513 are initialized is approximately the same. Therefore, even if the payout control unit 311 receives a command sent from the main control unit 261 due to a difference in initialization timing, it is possible to prevent problems such as RAM 513 being initialized and not being able to perform control corresponding to the received command. Furthermore, since the payout permission flag is turned on after RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already on in step SH3307, the command discrimination process ends without clearing the working area of RAM 513 or initializing RAM 513. In other words, step SH3307 prohibits RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Note that the payout initialization command is only sent if the RAM clear switch 323 is on when the power is turned on, so it is not received while the payout permission flag is on. In such a case, it is possible that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to noise or other factors. Therefore, if the working area of RAM 513 is cleared (step SH3308) and the initial value of RAM 513 is set (step SH3309) while the payout permission flag is on, problems such as the failure to pay out remaining balls could occur, resulting in losses to the player. However, by preventing RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, losses to the player can be prevented.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout restoration command (step SH3304: NO, step SH3305: YES), the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 will return to the state they were in before the power was cut off, and the payout permission flag is turned on in step SH3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. In other words, if there is information that a power outage has occurred and the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 have returned to the state they were in before the power was cut off, the payout of prize balls will be permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step SH3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer has ended, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a prize ball command (step SH3305: NO, step SH3306: YES), in step SH3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored, and in step SH3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control unit 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a specified buffer area and stores it. Since prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command sent from the main control unit 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of prize balls. Furthermore, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, allowing prize balls to be paid out early in response to a win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in step SH3311, processing based on the command stored in the specified memory area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step SH3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step SH3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step SH3306: NO), the command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Now, let's return to the flowchart in Figure 4-34. Once the command determination process is complete, in step SH3202, it is determined whether a CR unit connection signal indicating electrical connection with the CR unit has been received from the CR unit connection board 314. If a positive determination is made in step SH3202, in step SH3203, a CR unit connection signal indicating electrical connection with the CR unit is sent to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply and launch control device 310.

After step SH3203, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH3202, step SH3204 determines whether the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command judgment process. If the payout permission flag has not been turned on, this process is terminated. In other words, it is possible to prevent prize balls from being paid out before a command is sent from the main control unit 261.

On the other hand, if step SH3204 returns a positive result, step SH3205 checks the status return switch 321, and if it determines that the status return operation should begin, the status return operation is executed. With this process, if the status return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor will rotate forward and reverse, clearing the ball jam (returning to normal operation).

Then, in step SH3206, the lower tray 15 is set to full or the lower tray full/unfull state is set according to changes in its state. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal from the full detection switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set; when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray full/unfull state is set. Also, in step SH3207, the tank bulb is set to no (out of bulb) or the tank bulb is unfull state (bulb present) according to changes in its state. That is, the tank bulb is set to no (out of bulb) based on the detection signal from the tank bulb absence switch, and when the tank bulb is no longer empty, the tank bulb is set to no (out of bulb) state.

Then, in step SH3208, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be reported, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be reported, it is reported.

Next, the payout control process for prize balls and loan balls is executed. In detail, the payout number setting process is performed in step SH3209, the motor control status acquisition process is performed in step SH3210, and the motor drive process is performed in step SH3211.

In step SH3212, the state return switch 321 is checked to ensure that the ball removal is not impossible and that the ball removal operation has not started, and the payout motor is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the following step SH3213, the vibrator is controlled (vibration motor control) on the condition that the ball is jammed. Then, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be explained with reference to Figure 4-36. First, in step SH3900, the process of reading various operation detection switches is executed. That is, the status of the various operation detection switches connected to the sub-controller 262 (the operation detection switches related to the effect button 125 and the up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d, and center button 126e of the directional pad 126) is read, and the status of these switches is determined and the operation detection information is saved in a specified area of RAM 553. On the other hand, if there is no operation detection information, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

In step SH3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, in step SH3902, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. The command buffer of RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261.

The ring buffer has a specified storage area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of that storage area. When commands have been stored in the entire storage area, the storage area returns to the beginning and the commands are updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on these pointers.

In the following step SH3903, a pending information storage process is performed to store the information of the advance command output from the main control unit 261 in a pending information storage area provided in RAM 553 of the sub-control unit 262. As described above, the advance command includes information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, information indicating whether the variable information corresponds to a jackpot, information indicating the type of win, information indicating the type of reach, game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the variable display, and information indicating the variable time.

The pending information storage area of the sub-controller 262 includes a first pending information storage area and a second pending information storage area, each of which has four pending areas (pending areas 1 to 4), as well as one execution area, similar to the special variable pending area of the main controller 261 (a first special variable pending area and a second special variable pending area, each of which has four pending areas, and one execution area).

The first pending information storage area stores information (variation information) related to the variable display, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, reach pattern, game mode information, and the variable display time, in chronological order, in accordance with the reception history of advance commands based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area).

The second pending information storage area stores information (variation information) related to the variable display, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and the variable display time, in chronological order, in accordance with the reception history of advance commands based on the second variable display (information stored in the second special variable pending area).

By adopting this configuration, it is possible to reserve and store change information regarding the first change display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, and change information regarding the second change display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB. As a result, the sub-controller 262 is able to grasp not only the execution area of the special change reserve area of the main controller 261, but also the change information stored in each reserve area of the first special change reserve area and the second special change reserve area.

The pending information storage process will now be explained with reference to Figure 4-39. First, in step SH4101, it is determined whether or not the first command for the first variable display has been received (whether or not the first command for the first variable display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

If a positive judgment is made in step SH4101, in step SH4102, the first variable hold counter NSa, which counts the number of variable information items held and stored in the first hold information storage area, is incremented by one.

In the following step SH4103, the information contained in the initial command, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the reach pattern, the game mode information, and the first variable time information, is stored in the first available reserved area in the first reserved information storage area.

Furthermore, in the following step SH4104, a preview information storage process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, there are cases where related display effects are intentionally derived from multiple consecutive variable displays (so-called "continuous previews" are performed). Here, it is first determined whether the advance performance execution flag described below, which is provided in the above-mentioned user-related area of RAM 553, is set to on. If the advance performance execution flag is set to on, the value of the consecutive preview counter, which determines whether or not to perform consecutive previews, and the value of the preview type counter, which determines the type of consecutive preview, are obtained, and these counter values are stored in the holding area of the first pending information storage area where the variable information was newly stored in the above-mentioned step SH4103.

The continuous warning counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 49, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 49). The continuous warning counter is periodically updated, and each time, the value of the continuous warning counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous warning counter buffer).

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 9, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 9). The notice type counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

As described above, when the advance performance execution flag in the user-related area is set to ON, when variable information is stored in the pending information storage area during the preview information storage process, the values of the consecutive preview counter and the preview type counter stored in the consecutive preview counter buffer and the preview type counter buffer are obtained. Furthermore, each pending area and execution area in the pending information storage area is provided with a consecutive preview flag that is turned ON when it is determined that a consecutive preview will be derived.

In addition, in this embodiment, ROM 552 is provided with a prediction accuracy determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether to make consecutive predictions, and a prediction table that is taken into consideration when determining the type of consecutive predictions. Multiple prediction accuracy determination tables and prediction tables are provided, and the prediction accuracy determination table and prediction table to be taken into consideration are selected depending on the variable information.

After step SH4104, in step SH4105, if the advance performance execution flag for the user-associated area is set to on, a continuous preview lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview. The continuous preview lottery process in step SH4105 checks whether or not there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag already set to on. If it is not confirmed that there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag set, and if only variable information corresponding to a complete miss (a miss that does not result in a reach state) is stored in the first reserved area, a continuous preview lottery is performed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag set, a continuous preview lottery is not performed.

In the continuous preview lottery process of step SH4105, if the value of the first variable pending counter NSa is "2" or greater, the system references the preview win/loss determination table corresponding to each jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (those corresponding to jackpots are more likely to win than those corresponding to misses) based on the value of the continuous preview counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a continuous preview, the system references the preview table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode based on the value of the preview type counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area to determine the type of continuous preview. In addition, the continuous preview flag is turned on for all pending areas in the first pending information storage area where variable information is stored. However, the continuous preview flag for the execution area is not turned on.

After step SH4105, in step SH4106, a hold icon setting process is performed to additionally display one hold icon indicating that the first variable display is held and stored on the performance display device 42. Here, setting processes are performed to output to the display control device 45 a display control command to additionally set drawing information for drawing the hold icon to the display data table (or additional data table).

As a result, as will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, a hold icon H461 (see Figure 4-44, etc.) resembling a "lifebuoy" is displayed on the effect display device 42. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the hold icon corresponding to the second variable display is not displayed. Furthermore, as will be described below, in this embodiment, the type of hold icon can be customized to suit the player's preferences, to a hold icon with a different design from the hold icon H461 resembling a "lifebuoy."

The hold icon H461 may also be derived in a manner that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot for the corresponding first variable display. Hereinafter, this type of hold icon H461 is also referred to as the "preview hold icon H463." In this embodiment, the preview hold icon H463 (see Figure 4-44, etc.) is derived in a manner in which a character (in this embodiment, a whale character) is using a life jacket. Furthermore, multiple types of characters for the preview hold icon H463 (e.g., multiple types of whale characters with different colors) are provided, and the pattern of the preview hold icon H463 is associated with the likelihood of winning (jackpot expectation) for a jackpot state to occur. As a result, the preview hold icon H463 is ranked in terms of jackpot expectation depending on its appearance, and by deriving the preview hold icon H463, the likelihood of a jackpot is suggested (a preview hold preview performance is performed). Although not specifically mentioned in this embodiment, the character of the pre-reading hold icon H463 (a whale character by default) may also be configured to be customizable by the player (for example, to a penguin character).

In addition, when a pre-reading hold icon H463 is derived, the pattern of the pre-reading hold icon H463 may change (a hold change effect may be derived) before the first variable display corresponding to the pre-reading hold icon H463 is consumed. In other words, in the hold icon setting process of step SH4106, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to derive the pre-reading hold icon H463. If the result is a non-win, the pattern of the hold icon H461 is determined to be the default (only a lifebuoy). On the other hand, if the result is a win, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a hold change effect. If the result is a win, the hold change flag for the corresponding hold area is set to on, and the pre-reading hold icon H463 is determined to have two patterns: an upper limit pattern that may ultimately be displayed, and a provisional pattern that has a lower probability of winning (lower rank) than the upper limit pattern and is initially displayed. Note that the provisional pattern may be configured to initially include an option to only display the default hold icon H461. On the other hand, if the result is a non-win, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the pre-reading hold icon H463.

Then, basically, the process is performed such that the hold icon H461 of the determined pattern is displayed to the right of the rightmost hold icon H461 displayed in the hold display area HW3 of the effect display device 42. Also, in this embodiment, in step SH4106, if the pre-read hold icon H463 is derived in the hold display area HW3, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is set to ON.

After step SH4106, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4101, in step SH4107, it is determined whether or not a prior command for the second variable display has been received (whether or not the prior command for the second variable display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

If a positive judgment is made in step SH4107, in step SH4108, the second variable pending counter NSb, which counts the number of second variable information items pending and stored in the second pending information storage area, is incremented by 1.

Then, in step SH4109, information included in the initial command, such as whether or not it is a jackpot, information about the jackpot type, game mode information, and information about the second variable time, is stored in the first available reserved area in the second reserved information storage area. After step SH4109, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4107, this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-36, after step SH3903 or if a negative judgment is made in step SH3901, the process proceeds to step SH3904, where it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step SH3905; on the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step SH3914.

In step SH3905, various counters are updated. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in Figure 4-37, it uses the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO and the top, middle, and bottom symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, which are used to set the losing symbols in the top, middle, and bottom symbol display areas. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured so that the register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, resulting in randomly changing values. The values of these counters are stored appropriately in the counter buffer in RAM 553.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (jackpot symbol) that will be displayed in a stopped state on the effect display device 42 when a jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, nine counter values (0 to 8) are provided for the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. In other words, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 8, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 8).

When a variable pattern command corresponding to a jackpot is received from the main control unit 261, the jackpot symbol combination is determined based on a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols. For example, if the counter value is 0, it will be "1" (double number), and if it is 1, it will be "2" (double number).

This jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated by the counter update process of step SH3905, and is read from the counter buffer in RAM 553 when the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command, as described below. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer in RAM 553, but it is also possible to refer to the counter value when a variation pattern command is received, rather than storing it in a buffer.

The top, middle, and bottom pattern counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of symbols that will stop in the top, middle, and bottom pattern display areas when the lottery results in a loss. Since each column displays one of nine decorative symbols, nine counter values (0-8) are prepared for each. The top pattern counter CL determines the symbol that will stop in the top pattern display area, the middle pattern counter CM determines the symbol that will stop in the middle pattern display area, and the bottom pattern counter CR determines the symbol that will stop in the bottom pattern display area.

In this embodiment, the values of each counter CL, CM, CR are randomly updated using the value of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR are stored in either the front or rear miss reach symbol buffer, the front or rear non-miss reach symbol buffer, or the complete miss symbol buffer in RAM 553.

Here, the update process for each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR will be explained in detail. As shown in Figure 4-38, step SH4001 determines whether it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL, and step SH4002 determines whether it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. Note that the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in each update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR was updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment will be made in step SH4001. Also, if the upper symbol counter CL was updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment will be made in step SH4002. Then, if it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (step SH4001 is YES), proceed to step SH4003 and update the upper symbol counter CL. Furthermore, if it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM (step SH4002 is YES), proceed to step SH4004 and update the middle symbol counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (steps SH4001 and SH4002 are both NO), proceed to step SH4005 and update the lower symbol counter CR. When updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SH4003 to SH4005, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted, and the result of this calculation becomes the current value of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above CL, CM, and CR update process, the top, middle, and bottom symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in a single update process, and the update times for each counter value do not overlap. This means that one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every three times the update process is performed.

Then, in step SH4006, it is determined whether the updated combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a winning symbol combination (a jackpot symbol combination in which the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same as the symbol in the center symbol display area). If a positive determination is made in step SH4006, the process ends without storing the symbol counter combination CL, CM, and CR in RAM 553.

On the other hand, if step SH4006 returns a negative result, step SH4007 determines whether the updated combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a reach symbol combination (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same, and the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are different from the symbol in the center symbol display area). If it is a reach symbol combination (YES in step SH4007), step SH4008 determines whether the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a front-to-back miss symbol combination (a front-to-back miss reach). If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a front-to-back miss symbol combination (YES in step SH4008), step SH4009 is executed, where the current combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the front-to-back miss reach symbol buffer in RAM 553, and this process ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than a front or rear miss (a reach other than a front or rear miss) (step SH4008 is NO), proceed to step SH4010, store the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time in the reach pattern buffer other than a front or rear miss in RAM 553, and end this process.

Also, if the combination is other than a reach pattern (NO in step SH4007), the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of a losing pattern (complete losing pattern), so in step SH4011, the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the complete losing pattern buffer in RAM 553, and this process ends.

Note that the counters updated in the counter update process of step SH3905 above are not limited to the symbol counters CO, CL, CM, and CR. For example, the counter update process of step SH3905 above also updates various counters used by the sub-control device 262 when determining various presentation modes, such as the reach presentation selection counter described below.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-36, in step SH3906, the hold process is performed. The hold process is explained below with reference to Figure 4-40.

First, in step SH4201, it is determined whether a variation pattern command for the first variation display has been received (whether the variation pattern command for the first variation display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). If a positive determination is made in step SH4201, the value of the first variation pending counter NSa is decremented by 1 in the processing of step SH4202.

The next step, SH4203, executes a process to shift the data stored in the first pending information storage area. This data shift process shifts the data (including the consecutive preview flag) stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the first pending information storage area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3.

After step SH4203, in step SH4204, a preview setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect to be used for the continuous preview. The preview setting process in step SH4204 determines whether the continuous preview flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area (see the continuous preview lottery process in step SH4105) is on. If the determination is negative, no continuous preview will be performed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is positive, the process determines whether or not there is a jackpot, and if there is a jackpot, what the type is, and if there is not a jackpot, what the reach pattern is, what the game mode is, etc. based on the variation information in the variation pattern command, and determines the type of continuous preview by referencing the corresponding tables. The continuous preview of the type determined here will be derived at the desired timing when the corresponding variable display is performed.

After step SH4204, in step SH4205, a hold icon shift process is performed to shift the hold icon H461 displayed on the performance display device 42. Each hold area and execution area in the hold information storage area is provided with a hold icon storage area that stores the type of hold icon H461, and information related to the hold icon H461 is also shifted by the data shift process in the hold information storage area described above.

The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon H461 in accordance with the data shift (a process for changing the drawing information related to the hold icon in the display data table), and in the performance display device 42, each time one first variable display is consumed (executed), the hold icon H461 located at the far left is erased, and the hold icon H461 located to the right of it is shifted one position to the left (the display location moves).

In this embodiment, in step SH4205, prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon H461, if there is a hold area where the hold change flag is set to on, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a hold change effect on the pre-read hold icon H463, and if the lottery is won, the pattern of the pre-read hold icon H463 is changed to a higher rank (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern will not be exceeded). In addition, if it is determined that there is no hold area where the hold change flag is set to on, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is turned off. Furthermore, if the pattern of the pre-read hold icon H463 is changed so that the pre-read hold icon H463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the pre-read hold effect in progress flag is turned off and the hold change flag is turned off.

After step SH4205, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4201, in step SH4206, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command for the second fluctuation display has been received (whether or not a fluctuation pattern command for the second fluctuation display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553).

On the other hand, if step SH4206 returns a positive answer, step SH4207 decrements the value of the second variable pending counter NSb by 1. In the following step SH4208, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the second pending information storage area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in pending areas 1 to 4 of the second pending information storage area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area being shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3. After step SH4208, or if step SH4206 returns a negative answer, this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-36, in step SH3907, the effect display setting process is performed. Here, various calculation processes, such as generating display commands to be output to the display control device 45, and command output settings are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. In other words, this is where the display format to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, the sub-control device 262 references the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, and stopping pattern, and determines the display pattern of the decorative pattern variation display, etc. Then, it performs control such as outputting the determined items to the display control device 45 as display commands.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to commands from the sub-control device 262, and begins displaying the changing decorative patterns on the effect display device 42. Once a change pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 and display control device 45 cooperate to continue displaying the changing decorative patterns (change in effect display) until the specified change time period corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed.

Furthermore, when starting the effect change display corresponding to the first change display, if the continuous preview flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area is on, the table corresponding to each situation is referenced based on the variation information of the variation pattern command to determine the type of continuous preview to be derived in the effect change display corresponding to the first change display, determine the derivation of a preview effect other than the continuous preview (for example, a school of fish effect or a bubble effect), or perform a display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125, etc. Furthermore, the effect display setting process of step SH3907 also performs processing to control the effects during a jackpot (win display processing).

Here, the variable display setting process performed in the effect display setting process of step SH3907 will be explained with reference to Figure 4-42.

The effect display device 42 of this embodiment basically displays a first effect change display (first change-compatible effect display) corresponding to the first change display of the first special pattern display device 43A, and a second effect change display (second change-compatible effect display) corresponding to the second change display of the second special pattern display device 43B.

First, in step SH4501, it is determined whether a variation pattern command corresponding to the second variation display (hereinafter referred to as the "second variation pattern command") has been received.

For example, the second fluctuation reception flag may be turned on when processing corresponding to the reception of the second fluctuation pattern command is performed during the hold processing (see Figure 4-40), and the second fluctuation reception flag may be turned off when a positive judgment is made in step SH4501. In step SH4501, the second fluctuation reception flag may be checked to determine whether or not the second fluctuation pattern command has been received. Furthermore, the various fluctuation information included in the second fluctuation pattern command may be stored in the execution area of the corresponding hold information storage area, or may be stored in a separate storage area.

If step SH4501 returns a negative result, the process proceeds to step SH4508. On the other hand, if step SH4501 returns a positive result, step SH4503 determines whether "21" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (starting time of fluctuation) game mode is "Time-saving A mode."

If step SH4503 returns a positive judgment, step SH4504 performs a time-saving A second effect variation display setting process to set an effect pattern (a pattern for the second effect variation display) for the "time-saving A mode" based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and the second variation time), and then proceeds to step SH4508. The time-saving A second effect variation display setting process performs display setting processes (such as setting processes for outputting display control commands to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display) corresponding to the "rush stage effect" and "battle stage effect" associated with the "time-saving A mode" shown in Figures 4-46 and 4-47.

If step SH4503 returns a negative result, step SH4505 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (at the start of the change) game mode is "Time-saving B mode."

If step SH4505 returns a positive judgment, step SH4506 performs a time-saving B second effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (pattern of the second effect variation display) for the "time-saving B mode" based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and second variation time), and then proceeds to step SH4508. The time-saving B second effect variation display setting process performs display setting processing corresponding to the "Lucky Stage Presentation" shown in Figure 4-48 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display).

If step SH4505 returns a negative judgment, step SH4507 performs a normal second effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern for "normal mode" (a pattern for the second effect variation display) based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and second variation time), and then proceeds to step SH4508. In the normal second effect variation display setting process, display setting processing corresponding to the "normal stage presentation" shown in Figure 4-44 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display) is performed.

In step SH4508, it is determined whether a variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display (hereinafter referred to as the "first variation pattern command") has been received.

For example, the first fluctuation reception flag may be turned on when processing corresponding to the reception of the first fluctuation pattern command is performed during the hold processing (see Figure 4-40), and if a positive judgment is made in step SH4508, the first fluctuation reception flag may be turned off. In step SH4508, the first fluctuation reception flag may be checked to determine whether or not the first fluctuation pattern command has been received. Furthermore, the various fluctuation information included in the first fluctuation pattern command may be stored in the execution area of the corresponding hold information storage area, or may be stored in a separate storage area.

If step SH4508 returns a negative result, the process ends. On the other hand, if step SH4508 returns a positive result, step SH4509 determines whether "21" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current game mode (at the start of the change) is "Time-saving A mode."

If step SH4509 returns a positive judgment, step SH4510 performs a time-saving A first effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (first effect variation display pattern) for the "time-saving A mode" based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and the first variation time), and then terminates this process. The time-saving A first effect variation display setting process performs display setting processes (such as setting processes for outputting display control commands to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display) corresponding to the "rush stage presentation" and "battle stage presentation" related to the "time-saving A mode" shown in Figures 4-46 and 4-47.

If step SH4509 returns a negative result, step SH4511 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (at the start of the change) game mode is "Time-saving B mode."

If step SH4511 returns a positive judgment, step SH4512 performs a time-saving B first effect variation display setting process to set a presentation pattern (first effect variation display pattern) for "time-saving B mode" based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time), and then terminates this process. The time-saving B first effect variation display setting process performs display setting processing corresponding to the "Lucky Stage Presentation" shown in Figure 4-48 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display).

If step SH4511 returns a negative result, step SH4513 performs a normal first effect variation display setting process to set a "normal mode" effect pattern (first effect variation display pattern) based on various information included in the first variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time), and then terminates this process. In the normal first effect variation display setting process, display setting processing corresponding to the "normal stage effect" shown in Figure 4-44 (such as setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the corresponding variation display) is performed.

Here, we will explain in detail the reach effect setting process performed in the normal first effect variable display setting process corresponding to the "normal stage effect."

As shown in Figure 4-62, first, in step SH45101, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a predetermined fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach effect has been received. If the determination in step SH45101 is negative, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH45101 returns a positive result, step SH45102 determines whether the various reach effects are still at their default settings based on the various information (Kuroshio reach execution flag, Coral reach execution flag, Marine reach execution flag) stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553. Note that the default settings in this embodiment are that all reach execution flags (Kuroshio reach execution flag, Coral reach execution flag, and Marine reach execution flag) are set to "ON."

If step SH45102 returns a positive result (no customization by the player), step SH45103 determines whether the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that involves a special reach.

If step SH45103 returns a positive result, step SH45104 references the first reach effect table (see Figure 4-64) from among the multiple reach effect tables stored in ROM 552 to determine the reach effect mode type for the special reach. Then, display setting processing for the special reach is performed, and this processing ends.

For example, the value of the reach effect selection counter updated in the counter update process of step SH3905 is obtained within the range of 0 to 30, and if it is between 0 and 8, a "Special Kuroshio Reach" is performed, if it is between 9 and 17, a "Special Coral Reach" is performed, and if it is between 18 and 30, a "Special Marine Reach" is performed.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH45103, a judgment is made in step SH45105 as to whether the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern involving a super reach. If a positive judgment is made in step SH45105, a reach presentation type related to the super reach is determined in step SH45106 by referring to the second reach presentation table (see Figure 4-64). Thereafter, display setting processing related to the super reach is performed, and this processing ends.

For example, the value of the reach effect selection counter mentioned above is obtained, and if it is between 0 and 13, it is set to "Kuroshio Reach", if it is between 14 and 21, it is set to "Coral Reach", and if it is between 22 and 30, it is set to "Marine Reach".

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH45105 (if the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern involving a normal reach), the display is set to perform a "normal reach" in step SH45107, and then this processing is terminated.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step SH45102, i.e., if the player has customized the reach presentation (if at least one of the Kuroshio reach execution flag, the Coral reach execution flag, or the Marine reach execution flag is set to OFF), step SH45108 determines whether the current variation is a variation pattern that accompanies a special reach.

If step SH45108 returns a positive result, step SH45109 determines the type of reach presentation mode by referencing the corresponding reach presentation table (one of the third to ninth reach presentation tables: see Figure 4-64) based on the various information stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553 (Kuroshio reach execution flag, Coral reach execution flag, Marine reach execution flag). Then, display setting processing related to that reach is performed, and this processing ends.

For example, if the Kuroshio Reach Execution Flag is set to "ON", the Coral Reach Execution Flag is set to "OFF", and the Marine Reach Execution Flag is set to "ON", the fourth reach effect table is referenced to determine the reach effect mode type for the special reach.

However, even if the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 261 is a variation pattern command related to a special reach (the same applies to a super reach), if all reach execution flags (Kuroshio reach execution flag, Coral reach execution flag, and Marine reach execution flag) are set to "OFF" through customization by the player, the reach presentation type related to a normal reach will be determined by referring to the 9th reach presentation table.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH45108, then in step SH45110 it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern involving a super reach. If a positive determination is made in step SH45110, then in step SH45109, based on the various information stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553 (Kuroshio reach execution flag, Coral reach execution flag, Marine reach execution flag), the corresponding reach presentation table (any of the third to ninth reach presentation tables) is referenced to determine the reach presentation mode type. Thereafter, display setting processing related to that reach is performed, and this processing ends.

For example, if the Kuroshio Reach Execution Flag is set to "ON", the Coral Reach Execution Flag is set to "OFF", and the Marine Reach Execution Flag is set to "OFF", the Reach Execution Mode Type for the Super Reach is determined by referencing the 8th Reach Execution Table.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH45110 (if the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern involving a normal reach), the display is set to perform a "normal reach" in step SH45111, and then this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the same table is referenced in both jackpot variations and miss variations, but this is not limiting; the configuration may also be such that the proportion of reach effects selected (reach effect table) changes between jackpot variations and miss variations (reach variations with misses before and after, reach variations other than misses before and after, and complete miss variations). Furthermore, even when the default settings are not used (when the player customizes the settings), the proportion of reach effects selected (reach effect table) may also be configured to change between variation patterns that include special reaches and variation patterns that include super reaches.

Next, we will explain in detail the preview effect execution setting process that is performed after the reach effect setting process in the normal first effect variable display setting process corresponding to the "normal stage effect."

As shown in Figure 4-63, first, in step SH45201, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that accompanies a super reach effect (including cases where it develops into a special reach effect). If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH45204.

On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH45201, then in step SH45202 it is determined whether or not a cut-in effect, described below, will be executed for this change. If a positive determination is made here, then in step SH45203, predetermined setting processing (such as setting processing for display commands to be output to the display control device 45) for executing the cut-in effect is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SH45204. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made here, then the process proceeds directly to step SH45204.

In step SH45202, when determining whether or not a cut-in effect will be executed, the sub-control device 262 first takes into consideration the cut-in effect 0% flag and the cut-in effect 100% flag, which are set in advance in a specified area of RAM 553, as described below. If the cut-in effect 0% flag is set to on, a cut-in effect will not be executed, so a negative determination is made in step SH45202 and the process proceeds directly to step SH45204.

On the other hand, if the cut-in effect 100% flag is set to ON, a cut-in effect will be executed, so step SH45202 makes a positive determination and the process proceeds to step SH45203.

Furthermore, if both the cut-in effect 0% flag and the cut-in effect 100% flag are set to off, the sub-control device 262 obtains the updated value of the effect selection random number counter for the cut-in effect lottery that was previously set in a predetermined area of RAM 553 during the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817 described below (for example, in this embodiment, the default setting is a random number counter for an appearance rate of 60%).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect selection random number counter obtained as described above is one of the winning values (e.g., 0 to 99) set in the effect selection table for the cut-in effect lottery set in advance in RAM 553.

If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is a winning value, a positive judgment is made in step SH45202 and the process proceeds to step SH45203. If the value of the effect selection random number counter is not a winning value, a negative judgment is made in step SH45202 and the process proceeds directly to step SH45204.

Now, in step SH45204, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation that will result in a jackpot. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH45207.

On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH45204, then in step SH45205 it is determined whether or not to execute the one-shot announcement effect described below for this change. If a positive determination is made here, then in step SH45206, predetermined setting processing (such as setting processing of the display command to be output to the display control device 45) for executing the one-shot announcement effect is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SH45207. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made here, then the process proceeds directly to step SH45207.

In step SH45205, when determining whether or not to execute the one-shot announcement effect, the sub-controller 262 first takes into consideration the one-shot announcement effect 0% flag and the one-shot announcement effect 100% flag, which are set in advance in a specified area of RAM 553. If the one-shot announcement effect 0% flag is set to on, the one-shot announcement effect will not be executed, so a negative determination is made in step SH45205 and the process proceeds directly to step SH45207.

On the other hand, if the one-shot announcement effect 100% flag is set to ON, the one-shot announcement effect will be executed, so a positive judgment is made in step SH45205 and the process proceeds to step SH45206.

Furthermore, if both the one-shot announcement effect 0% flag and the one-shot announcement effect 100% flag are set to off, the sub-control unit 262 obtains the updated value of the effect selection random number counter for the one-shot announcement effect lottery that was previously set in a predetermined area of RAM 553 during the one-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815 described below (for example, in this embodiment, the default setting is a random number counter with an appearance rate of 40%).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect selection random number counter obtained as described above is one of the winning values (e.g., 0 to 99) set in the effect selection table for the one-shot announcement effect lottery set in advance in RAM 553.

If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is a winning value, a positive judgment is made in step SH45205 and the process proceeds to step SH45206. If the value of the effect selection random number counter is not a winning value, a negative judgment is made in step SH45205 and the process proceeds directly to step SH45207.

Now, in step SH45207, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation will result in the execution of the school of fish effect, which will be described later. If the determination here is affirmative, then in step SH45208, predetermined setting processing (such as setting processing for display commands to be output to the display control device 45) for executing the school of fish effect is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SH45209. On the other hand, if the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH45209.

In step SH45207, when determining whether or not to execute a school of fish effect, the sub-control device 262 first determines whether the current fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, and based on this information, obtains an updated value for the effect selection random number counter for the school of fish effect lottery for a jackpot fluctuation or a losing fluctuation, which was set in advance in a specified area of RAM 553 during the school of fish effect setting process in step SH35809, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% are set as the default settings.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect selection random number counter obtained as described above is one of the winning values in the effect selection table for the school of fish effect lottery, for either a jackpot variation or a loss variation, which has been set in advance in RAM 553.

If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is a winning value, a positive judgment is made in step SH45207 and the process proceeds to step SH45208. If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is not a winning value, a negative judgment is made in step SH45207 and the process proceeds directly to step SH45209.

Now, in step SH45209, it is determined whether or not the bubble effect described below will be executed for this variation. If the determination here is affirmative, then in step SH45210, predetermined setting processing for executing the bubble effect (such as setting processing for display commands to be output to the display control device 45) is performed, and then this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination here is negative, this processing is terminated as is.

In step SH45209, when determining whether or not a bubble effect will be executed, the sub-control device 262 first determines whether the current variation is a jackpot variation, and based on this information, obtains an updated value for the effect selection random number counter for the bubble effect lottery for a jackpot variation or a miss variation, which was previously set in a specified area of RAM 553 in the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 30% are set as the default settings.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect selection random number counter obtained as described above is one of the winning values set in the effect selection table for the bubble effect lottery for jackpot variations or miss variations, which has been set in advance in RAM 553.

If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is a winning value, a positive judgment is made in step SH45209 and the process proceeds to step SH45210. If the acquired value of the effect selection random number counter is not a winning value, a negative judgment is made in step SH45209 and the process ends.

Next, the winning display processing performed in the effect display setting processing of step SH3907 will be explained with reference to Figure 4-41.

First, in step SH4700, it is determined whether an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot state has been received from the main control unit 261. If a positive determination is made in step SH4700, in step SH4701, a round count counter for counting the number of remaining rounds is set to "15" if the jackpot is a "15R jackpot," "8" if the jackpot is an "8R jackpot," and "4" if the jackpot is a "4R jackpot," based on the jackpot type information contained in the opening command.

Then, in step SH4702, the opening effect (jackpot start effect) as shown in FIG. 4-45 is set, and then this processing ends. The opening effect setting process involves, for example, setting the output of a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the jackpot opening effect. This includes, for example, setting the output of specified image data for the effect display device 42, setting the output of specified audio data for the speaker SP, and setting the lighting modes for the various electric lights 102-104. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effect modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding effect is selected by referring to this table and executed.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SH4700, a determination is made in step SH4705 as to whether a round command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4705, the effects to be performed during the round are set in step SH4706, and then this processing ends.

When setting various effects during the variable display or jackpot state (e.g., during opening, round, interval, or ending), the sub-control device 262 sets the effects while taking into consideration various information previously stored in user-related areas of RAM 553 (e.g., language setting area, brightness level setting area, audio setting area, and effect customization information storage area). Alternatively or additionally, when a predetermined condition is met during the variable display or jackpot state (e.g., when the player operates an operation means such as the effect button 125 during the variable display or jackpot state, when a predetermined effect such as a predetermined reach effect or round effect is initiated during the variable display or jackpot state, or within a predetermined time from the start of the variable display or round), the effect display device 42 may display a menu screen 3000 or a predetermined selection display, allowing the user to set language, audio output, brightness, effect customization, etc. Additionally, if the player performs "audio output settings" or "brightness settings" during a variable display or during a jackpot state, and it is stored that a predetermined output level value has been input into the volume level setting area or brightness level setting area, the performance display device 42 may be configured to display an output gauge showing the current volume or brightness output level for a predetermined period of time as information indicating that the predetermined output level has been input by the player.

In this embodiment, the customization input values entered by the player regarding the settings for the various effects output during a jackpot state (such as language settings, audio output settings, brightness settings, and effect customization (character and jackpot background music settings, etc.)) are not reflected in internal controls such as the effect lottery, so customization input is possible even before a jackpot state occurs, and the content is output according to the values entered by the player for customization (such as the background music playing order and volume level).

If a negative determination is made in step SH4705, a determination is made in step SH4707 as to whether or not an interval command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4707, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SH4708, and the presentation for the 4-second interval is set in step SH4709, after which this processing ends. The processing for setting the interval presentation includes, for example, setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the interval presentation.

If a negative determination is made in step SH4707, a determination is made in step SH4710 as to whether an ending command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4710, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SH4711, and the ending presentation is set in step SH4712, after which the processing ends. The ending presentation setting processing includes, for example, setting processing for outputting a display control command to the display control device 45 to select a display data table for the ending presentation. Note that the ending presentation setting processing may be configured to select and execute one ending presentation pattern from multiple ending presentation patterns.

If the result of step SH4710 is negative, step SH4713 determines whether a jackpot end command has been received. If the result of step SH4713 is negative, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH4713, the jackpot display end process is performed in step SH4714, and this process ends.

The jackpot display end process immediately ends the ending display. Also, when the jackpot state ends, the time-saving A mode start command is received at this time, and based on this command, the start setting process for the "Rush Stage Presentation" or "Battle Stage Presentation" corresponding to the "Time-saving A Mode" is performed.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-36, in step SH3908, a change stop process is executed to stop the change display of the performance display device 42. The change stop process will now be explained with reference to Figure 4-43.

First, in step SH4401, it is determined whether a special chart 2 stop command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4401, it is determined in step SH4405 whether the second effect change display is currently being derived. If a positive determination is made in step SH4405, processing is performed in step SH4406 to stop the second effect change display. After step SH4406, the process proceeds to step SH4410, which will be described later. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH4405, the process proceeds directly to step SH4410.

Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step SH4401, a determination is made in step SH4407 as to whether a special chart 1 stop command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SH4407, a determination is made in step SH4408 as to whether the first effect change display is currently being derived. If a positive determination is made in step SH4408, a process is performed in step SH4409 to stop the first effect change display. After step SH4409, the process proceeds to step SH4410. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SH4408, the process proceeds directly to step SH4410.

After the process of stopping the display of each effect change in step SH4406 or step SH4409, or if a negative judgment is made in step SH4407, a judgment is made in step SH4410 as to whether a time-saving A mode end command or a time-saving B mode end command has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step SH4410, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if step SH4410 returns a positive judgment, i.e., if the total number of times the first and second variable displays have been executed in "Time-saving A mode" or "Time-saving B mode" reaches a predetermined number, step SH4411 performs processing to change the display performance being performed by the performance display device 42 to "normal stage performance" corresponding to normal mode. Then, this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-36, the lamp setting process in step SH3909 sets the lighting patterns of the illumination units 102-104 so that they are synchronized with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42, for example. In other words, the lamp setting process is also configured to control the central illumination unit 103, which is related to the one-shot announcement performance.

At this time, the sub-control device 262 causes the illumination units 102-104 to emit light at a brightness level corresponding to the brightness setting value set in the brightness level setting area of RAM 553. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the brightness level (brightness setting value) of the illumination units 102-104 can be changed to suit the player's preferences. Details of how to adjust this brightness (customization operation) will be described later.

In this embodiment, the brightness setting can be switched to one of five levels, from a minimum level of "1" to a maximum level of "5," with level "3" being set as the default when the power is turned on. For example, when the brightness setting is set to "1," the light is emitted at 300 cd (candela), when "2" it is set to 450 cd, when "3" it is set to 600 cd, when "4" it is set to 750 cd, and when "5" it is set to 900 cd. Of course, the correspondence between the customizable brightness levels (brightness setting values) and the actual brightness is not limited to these correspondences, and different configurations may be adopted.

In addition, with regard to the illumination of the central illumination unit 103 for the one-shot announcement effect, the illumination effect (flash emission) may be configured to be performed at a predetermined brightness, without changing the brightness regardless of the customized brightness setting value, in order to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 changes the applied voltage, making it possible to set the brightness level of each of the illumination units 102-104 in multiple stages when it is lit or flashing. However, the method for adjusting the brightness value is not limited to this. For example, the brightness may be adjusted by changing the number of light sources that are turned on among multiple light sources, or by adjusting the on/off times of the light sources.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4-36, the audio setting process in step SH3910 performs various settings to drive and control the speakers SP, etc., such as setting the output pattern of the audio output from the speakers SP, etc. so that it is synchronized with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. In addition, if audio-related commands, such as an error notification, are sent from the main control device 261, settings to control these commands are also performed in step SH3910.

At this time, the sub-control device 262 switches the output device settings so that audio can be output from a specific audio output device (speaker SP or earphones 2500) according to the output device information set in the audio setting area (output device setting area) of RAM 553.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 controls the audio output from a specified audio output device (speaker SP or earphones 2500) at a volume level corresponding to the volume level information set in the audio setting area (volume level setting area) of RAM 553. As described above, in this embodiment, the volume level of the specified audio output device (speaker SP or earphones 2500) is configured to be changeable to suit the player's preferences. Details of how to adjust the volume (customization operation) will be described later.

In this embodiment, the volume level can be set to one of five levels, from the minimum level "1" to the maximum level "5," and the default level is "3" when the power is turned on. For example, when the volume level is set to "1," sound is output at 50 dB, when "2" is set, sound is output at 60 dB, when "3" is set, sound is output at 70 dB, when "4" is set, sound is output at 80 dB, and sound is output at "5" when "5" is set. Of course, the correspondence between the customizable volume levels and the actual sound volume is not limited to these correspondences, and different configurations may be adopted.

In step SH3911, standby processing is performed. In standby processing, the sub-control device 262 first determines whether the standby flag set in RAM 553 is on. The standby flag is determination information used to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state (waiting for customers), and is set to on when a predetermined variable display has been confirmed and stopped in the performance display device 42 and no new variable display is pending in the execution area of the pending information storage area.

Furthermore, if the next variable display does not start even after a predetermined time (e.g., three minutes) has elapsed since a predetermined variable display was confirmed and stopped on the effect display device 42, or if the player has not played for a predetermined period of time after completing various setting processes such as the effect customization process described below, the effect display device 42 performs a setting process to execute a predetermined demonstration effect display (demo screen display). In this embodiment, the demo screen display is configured to display, for example, a video of a predetermined duration that expresses the worldview that is the motif of the pachinko machine 10 on the entire screen of the effect display device 42.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the timing for the demo screen display to end arrives (when the next variable display has not started even after a predetermined time has passed since the demo screen display began on the effect display device 42), output setting processing is performed to make various settings (such as erasing custom information entered by the player or setting default values) for the various storage areas of the user-related area (language setting area, brightness level setting area, audio setting area, effect custom information storage area, etc.).

Step SH3912 performs user-responsive processing. User-responsive processing is processing performed in response to a player's request, such as during the standby state. Examples of such processing include language setting processing to change the language used for game instructions and specific effects, audio output setting processing to adjust the type of audio output device and the output level (volume level) of the audio output device, brightness setting processing to adjust the brightness of the display unit 42a and illumination unit 102 of the effect display device 42, effect customization processing to customize the effects performed by the effect display device 42, and history display processing to display the game history, such as the number of jackpots. However, with regard to "audio output settings" and "brightness settings," the values entered by the player are not directly reflected in specific internal controls such as effect lottery. Therefore, the player may be able to operate the effect buttons 125, cross key 126, or other operating means to customize values corresponding to the volume level and brightness level not only during the standby state but also throughout the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display for a specific period on the effect display device 42.

Furthermore, as described below, if information (e.g., volume level information) stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553 is changed based on input data from earphone 2500 (operation of earphone 2500), etc., the user-associated processing performs custom changes to various settings (e.g., volume level changes) based on the information (e.g., volume level information) set in the user-associated area of RAM 553.

In step SH3913, external output processing is performed to send control signals to each device based on the settings made in steps SH3905 to SH3912. For example, a display command is sent to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 displays a changing decorative pattern.

After steps SH3905 to SH3913 are executed every 2 msec, or if a negative determination is made in step SH3904, the process proceeds to step SH3914, where it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in RAM 553. Note that power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control unit 261.

If no information about a power outage is stored, the process proceeds to step SH3915, where it is determined whether RAM 553 has been corrupted. If RAM 553 has not been corrupted, the process returns to step SH3901, and normal processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 553 has been corrupted, the process enters an infinite loop to stop subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SH3914 that power failure occurrence information is to be stored, power failure processing is executed in step SH3916. During power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. The stored information about the power failure occurrence is also erased. After the power failure processing is executed, the processing enters an infinite loop.

Next, we will explain how the display mode of the effects on the effect display device 42 changes as the game progresses, along with the flow of the game played by the player. The display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays various display effects corresponding to the current game state (game mode, etc.).

In the normal game mode (a game mode in which the first variable display can be displayed based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA in "normal mode"), the "normal stage display" is displayed on the display device 42.

As shown in Figure 4-44, in "normal stage presentation," a variable display area HW1 in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is set up over most of the display section 42a of the presentation display device 42. In this embodiment, the background image selected by the player in advance during presentation customization, or the default background image (the background image related to the "diving stage"), is displayed on the display section 42a. Additionally, while the symbols are changing, the background music selected by the player in advance during presentation customization, or the default background music during symbol change, is output from the speaker SP (or earphones 2500).

As described above, in this embodiment, three pattern display areas (top, middle, and bottom) are set in this variable display area HW1, and multiple types of decorative patterns (patterns numbered 1 to 9) are displayed in a scrolling manner in each pattern display area.

Above the variable display area HW1 is an instruction display area HW2 that instructs (recommends) the player on how to launch the game ball, and below the variable display area HW1 is a hold display area HW3 that clearly shows the number of hold variable displays.

In normal game mode, the instruction display area HW2 displays "← Left Hit" to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area (left side game area area EA) (such action will be referred to as "left hit" hereafter). In response, the player will play by "left hitting" (such gameplay will be referred to as "left hit game" hereafter).

In addition, a hold icon H461 resembling a life jacket is displayed in the hold display area HW3. In this embodiment, the hold display area HW3 is equipped with an execution correspondence area H462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area, and a hold correspondence area H462b corresponding to each hold area of the first hold information storage area, and is capable of displaying up to five hold icons H461. In this embodiment, the hold icon selected in advance by the player during performance customization, or the default set hold icon (the hold icon H461 resembling a life jacket) is displayed on the display unit 42a.

When a player "hits left," most of the game balls are guided by the above-mentioned nails toward the first start winning section 33WA, which is located below the variable display unit 35 (the lower game area ED). Some of these game balls will win in the first start winning section 33WA.

In this embodiment, the second start winning section 33WB and the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the pair of blade members 33WBb are located to the right of the variable display unit 35 (right-side area EB of the game area). In other words, the second start winning section 33WB and the through gate 34 are located in a position that cannot be reached by a game ball that has flowed down the left side of the variable display unit 35 (left-side area EA of the game area). Therefore, if the player continues to "hit left," the pair of blade members 33WBb will not be opened and the game ball will not enter the second start winning section 33WB.

Furthermore, even if a player were to fire a game ball toward the right side of the game area (the right side game area EB) in normal game mode (such an action will be referred to as a "right hit" hereinafter), with the configuration of this embodiment described above, there is almost no chance that the game ball will enter the second start winning section 33WB. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that in normal game mode, the player can play more advantageously by "left hit play" than by "right hit" (such play will be referred to as "right hit play" hereinafter).

When a gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, multiple types of decorative patterns are displayed in the variable display area HW1 of the effect display device 42, changing in each of the above-mentioned pattern display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" are displayed. The various decorative patterns are displayed in ascending or descending numerical order, scrolling from right to left with a periodicity, thereby forming a series of patterns. Here, in this embodiment, decorative patterns with a design selected in advance by the player during effect customization, or default decorative patterns (decorative patterns related to the "tropical fish group") are displayed on the display unit 42a.

In the upper pattern display area, various decorative patterns are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), while in the middle and lower pattern display areas, various decorative patterns are displayed in ascending order (in order of increasing numbers). After a predetermined time has passed, the varying display stops in the order of upper pattern display area → lower pattern display area → middle pattern display area, and decorative patterns are displayed statically in each pattern display area.

Furthermore, while the pattern is changing, various effects (reach effect, school of fish effect, bubble effect, advance effect, one-shot announcement effect, cut-in effect) selected in advance by the player during effect customization, or various effects set as defaults, may be executed. Furthermore, in reach effects, cut-in effects, etc., a character (main character, sub-character, etc.) selected in advance by the player during effect customization, or a character set as default, may be displayed on the display unit 42a.

If the jackpot lottery is won based on the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, the game will go through a reach state, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination will be displayed frozen on a predetermined jackpot line. In the normal game mode of this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, center, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as five lines). Therefore, when three decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination are displayed frozen on any of the five lines in the top, center, and bottom symbol display areas, the occurrence of a jackpot state is confirmed. In this way, when the jackpot variable display has ended, game status information for the jackpot state corresponding to this variable display, such as text information such as "Jackpot" as shown in Figure 4-45, is displayed on the effect display device 42.

When a jackpot occurs, the large prize opening shutter 32Ab of the variable prize device 32A opens, allowing a game ball to enter the large prize opening 32Aa, and a specified jackpot presentation is initiated on the presentation display device 42. In this embodiment, the jackpot background music selected in advance by the player during presentation customization, or the default jackpot background music, is output from the speaker SP (or earphones 2500).

However, if the player continues to "hit left," it will be extremely difficult to make the game ball flow down toward the variable winning device 32A and win. Furthermore, when the "Time-saving A mode," which is entered after the jackpot ends regardless of the type of jackpot, begins, there will be no reserved memory of the second variable display based on the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, and the first variable display will begin after the jackpot ends.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, a player is more likely to be placed in a more advantageous gaming state if they win a jackpot with the second variable display than if they win a jackpot with the first variable display. Therefore, if the first variable display is displayed in "Time-saving A mode" after a jackpot has ended, it will be disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4-45, when the jackpot effect begins, the instruction display area HW2 displays "Right Hit →" to encourage the player to "hit right." In response, the player switches the game ball launch mode from "left hit" to "right hit" to play a jackpot game so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right-side area EB of the game area.

If the player hits the ball to the right, many of the balls will be guided by the pegs and flow from the right area EB of the play area through the lower area ED of the play area toward the variable winning device 32A, where they will win. This allows the player to win more balls.

In addition, in the right area EB of the game area, a through gate 34 and a second start-up winning section 33WB are provided along the flow path to the variable winning device 32A. During a jackpot, some game balls will pass through the through gate 34 and enter the second start-up winning section 33WB, which opens upon passing through the gate.

In this embodiment, if the game ball wins the start-entry support lottery, which is held based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the pair of blade members 33WBb will open, allowing the game ball to enter the second start-entry section 33WB.

This means that the second variable display is reserved and stored during the jackpot state, and when the "Time-saving A Mode" begins after the jackpot ends, the second variable display can be started immediately, taking priority over the first variable display.

In this embodiment, if a "15R jackpot" is won by a lottery during "normal mode" based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, after the "15R jackpot" ends, a "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 100 variable play times is granted. When the "time-saving A mode for 100 variable play times" is granted, a "rush stage effect" is displayed on the effect display device 42, as shown in FIG. 4-46.

On the other hand, if a "4R jackpot" is won by a lottery during "normal mode" based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, after the "4R jackpot" ends, a "time-saving A mode" with a maximum of 10 variable play times is granted. When the "time-saving A mode with 10 variable play times" is granted, a "battle stage effect" is displayed on the effect display device 42, as shown in FIG. 4-47.

Therefore, when a "Rush Stage Effect (15R or 8R jackpot)" is performed, there is a high probability of winning the next jackpot in succession during that period, whereas when a "Battle Stage Effect (4R jackpot)" is performed, there is a low probability of winning the next jackpot in succession during that period.

In the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect," the variable display area HW1 is displayed in a reduced size downwards. Furthermore, in the reduced variable display area HW1, the top, middle, and bottom symbol display areas are replaced with left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes a single line. Various characters and other effects related to the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect" are displayed on the background screen.

For example, in the "Rush Stage Presentation," as shown in Figure 4-46, during its duration (a maximum of 100 variable displays are executed), a continuous animation (continuous presentation) of moving through the ocean is generated, and a jackpot is indicated by display modes such as a school of fish passing by, a large creature such as a whale appearing, or a treasure chest being discovered.

In addition, in the "Battle Stage Presentation," as shown in Figure 4-47, a humanoid character (such as the main character selected by the player in presentation customization) appears and an animation is generated in which the character fights an enemy, and whether or not the player wins the battle indicates whether or not they have won the jackpot.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Presentation" and "Battle Stage Presentation," since the above-mentioned various presentations indicate that a jackpot has been won, the reduced variable display area HW1 may also be omitted, and decorative symbols may not be displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, in the "Rush Stage Presentation" and "Battle Stage Presentation," the player may be able to select between a symbol presentation mode in which decorative symbols are displayed and an animation presentation mode in which decorative symbols are not displayed by customizing the presentation. Of course, the "Rush Stage Presentation" and/or "Battle Stage Presentation" themselves may also be configured to be customizable by the player.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect," in order to allow more game balls to enter the second start winning section 33WB and reserve and store more second variable displays, the instruction display area HW2 displays "Right Hit →," recommending that the player "hit right," just as in the case of a jackpot.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Effect" and "Battle Stage Effect," the hold display area HW3 is not set on the effect display device 42, and the hold display (derivation of the hold icon) corresponding to the second hold display device 46B (second variable display) is not performed.

Here, even if a first variable display stored in reserve exists, the reserve icon corresponding to that first variable display is not displayed. As described above, if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA while the second variable display is being executed, the first variable display corresponding to that ball is reserved and stored, and an advance command related to the first variable display is sent from the main control unit 261 to the sub-control unit 262, and information related to the first variable display is stored in the first reserve information storage area of the sub-control unit 262. However, during periods such as the "Rush Stage Performance," the reserve icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed. However, even if the reserve icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed here, if a game ball enters the next first start winning section 33WA, the data in the first reserve information storage area will be updated. Then, when the "Rush Stage Performance" or the like ends and the game returns to "Normal Mode," the reserve icon related to the first variable display stored in the first reserve information storage area at that time will be displayed.

In addition, during "Time-saving A Mode (Rush Stage Effect or Battle Stage Effect)," if a game ball enters the second start-up winning section 33WB, a win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) is held, and the result is displayed in the reduced variable display area HW1.

Furthermore, during the "Time-saving A Mode (Rush Stage Presentation or Battle Stage Presentation)," while the player is "hitting right," game balls rarely enter the first start winning section 33WA. However, many game balls tend to enter the second start winning section 33WB, which is in a high ball entry state, in a short period of time, and the number of reserved balls stored in the second variable display tends to quickly reach its upper limit. For this reason, some players switch the game ball launch mode from "hitting right" to "hitting left" when a second variable display with a relatively long presentation time, such as a reach presentation, begins when the number of reserved balls stored in the second variable display has reached its upper limit, and during that time, they allow the game ball to enter the first start winning section 33WA. Of course, the first variable display will not start while the second variable display is being executed, but by storing the first variable display in a reserved state during this time, the reserved first variable display will start immediately after the "Time-saving A Mode" ends, preventing an interruption to the presentation.

In addition, for "Rush Stage Effects" and "Battle Stage Effects," a count display area HW4 is set on the effect display device 42 (see Figures 4-46 and 4-47). The count display area HW4 clearly shows the number of variable display times (the value of the first variable count counter A) corresponding to the current remaining duration of the "Rush Stage Effects" or "Battle Stage Effects." Therefore, for example, if the value of the first variable count counter A is "83," the count display area HW4 will display "83 times remaining."

Then, each time the first or second fluctuation display (mainly the second fluctuation display) is performed once, its value (the value of the first fluctuation count counter A) is decremented by one. Thereafter, during the "Time-saving A mode (rush stage effect or battle stage effect)," if a jackpot does not occur and the set number of fluctuation displays (the value of the first fluctuation count counter A) reaches 0, the "Time-saving A mode" ends, the game mode transitions to "normal mode," and the "Rush stage effect" or "Battle stage effect" on the effect display device 42 ends, returning to the "normal stage effect (see Figure 4-44)."

In addition, when the game mode transitions to "normal mode," "Time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)" ends, and "← hit left" is displayed in the instruction display area HW2 to encourage the player to "hit left." This allows the player to change the game mode upon the end of "Time-saving A mode (rush stage effect or battle stage effect)," preventing the occurrence of problems such as wasting game balls.

In this embodiment, when the game mode is "normal mode" as described above, if the value of the normal mode continuation counter (ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value of "500," that is, if the duration of "normal mode" (number of times the variable display is executed) reaches 500 without a jackpot occurring, "Time-saving B mode" is activated as a benefit awarded to the player.

In this embodiment, a "time-saving B mode" with a maximum limit of 200 variable play times is granted. During "time-saving B mode," a "lucky stage effect" is executed on the effect display device 42. Note that when "time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)" is activated, an activation effect may be executed to liven up the game.

As shown in Figure 4-48, in the "Lucky Stage Effect," a variable display area HW1 is set on the effect display device 42, and basically the same variable decorative pattern display is performed as in "Normal Mode," but some display aspects, such as the background display, differ from those in "Normal Mode."

For example, since the game enters "Time-saving B mode (high ball entry state)," the instruction display area HW2 above the variable display area HW1 displays "Hit right →," recommending that the player "hit right," just as in "Time-saving A mode." Meanwhile, the hold display area HW3 is not set in the effect display device 42, and no hold display (derivation of the hold icon) is performed.

Of course, instead of this, during the duration of the "Lucky Stage Effect" (the period during which a maximum of 200 variable displays are executed), the variable display area HW1 may be displayed in a reduced size downwards, similar to the "Rush Stage Effect" described above, and an animation (continuous effect) in which various characters are displayed may be generated on the background screen. Furthermore, the "Lucky Stage Effect" may also be configured to be customizable by the player.

In addition, for the "Lucky Stage Effect," a count display area HW4 is set on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-48). The count display area HW4 clearly shows the number of variable display times (the value of the second variable display counter B) that corresponds to the current remaining duration of the "Lucky Stage Effect." Therefore, for example, if the value of the second variable display counter B is "155," the count display area HW4 will display "155 times remaining."

Then, each time the first or second variable display (mainly the second variable display) is displayed once, its value (the value of the second variable count counter B) is decremented by one. After that, if the set number of variable displays (the value of the second variable count counter B) reaches 0 without a jackpot occurring during "Time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)," and "Time-saving B mode" ends, the game mode transitions to "Normal mode." This ends the "Lucky stage effect" on the effect display device 42, and the game returns to "Normal stage effect (see Figure 4-44)."

Furthermore, when the "Time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)" ends and the game mode transitions to "normal mode," a notification may be sent to inform the player that the "Time-saving B mode" will not occur again as a rescue measure until the next jackpot occurs and the ceiling is reset.

In this embodiment, "ceiling reset" refers to the process of resetting the value of the normal mode continuation counter (ceiling counter) to "0" and turning off the time-saving B mode activation flag (ceiling activation flag).

Next, we will provide a detailed explanation of the various processes that can be executed while the pachinko machine 10 (effect display device 42) is in standby mode, i.e., during the period when the effect display device 42 is not executing effects such as variable displays (various processes performed in the user response processing of step SH3912 above).

First, we will explain in detail how the player operates the effect button 125 and cross key 126 to make various settings and changes while looking at the effect display device 42 of the pachinko machine 10.

When a player presses the effect button 125 while the pachinko machine 10 (effect display device 42) is in standby mode, the menu screen 3000 (see Figure 4-66) is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42. The control processing (menu selection processing, etc.) performed by the sub-control device 262 to execute this is as follows:

As shown in Figure 4-50, the menu selection process first determines in step SH5500 whether the menu screen 3000 (see Figure 4-66) is currently being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5504.

On the other hand, if the answer is negative in step SH5500, then step SH5501 determines whether the machine is currently in a standby state (waiting for a customer). If the answer is negative in step SH5501, then this process ends.

In addition, a determination process is first performed to determine whether or not the current state is standby, and when the menu screen 3000 is displayed (the same applies when the language setting screen 3001, etc. is displayed), if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, etc., and a specific input such as a variation pattern command is made from the main control unit 261 to the sub-control unit 262, the display of the menu screen 3000, etc. may be forcibly terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step SH5501, a determination is made in step SH5502 as to whether the player has operated the effect button 125. If a negative determination is made here, the process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5502, in step SH5503, a menu screen display process is executed to display the menu screen 3000 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the menu screen 3000 on the performance display device 42.

As shown in FIG. 4-66, the menu screen 3000 displays multiple types of menu items that can be executed by the player. In this embodiment, five menu items are displayed: "Language Settings," "Audio Output Settings," "Brightness Settings," "Effect Customization," and "Game History." Of these menu items, the four items excluding "Game History" - "Language Settings," "Audio Output Settings," "Brightness Settings," and "Effect Customization" - as well as various custom setting items belonging to subcategories of "Audio Output Settings" (described below, such as output device settings) and various custom setting items belonging to subcategories of "Effect Customization" (such as preview effect settings) - constitute the game specifications in this embodiment.

Next, in step SH5504, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Language Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH5506.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5504, language setting processing is executed in step SH5505 to set the language to be used, and then the process proceeds to step SH5506. Details of the language setting processing will be described later.

Next, in step SH5506, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Audio Output Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5508.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5506, in step SH5507, an audio output setting process is executed to set the output level (output volume level) of the audio output from the speaker SP, etc., and then the process proceeds to step SH5508. Details of the audio output setting process will be described later.

Next, in step SH5508, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Brightness Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5510.

If step SH5508 returns a positive answer, step SH5509 executes a brightness setting process to set the brightness of the light emitted from the illumination units 102-104, and then the process proceeds to step SH5510. Details of the brightness setting process will be described later.

Next, in step SH5510, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Performance Customization" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH5512.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5510, step SH5511 executes a performance customization process to customize the performance content, and then the process proceeds to step SH5512. If the performance customization process is executed here, the performance customization screen 3004 is displayed on the performance display device 42 (see Figure 4-72). Details of the performance customization process will be described later.

Next, in step SH5512, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Game History" from the multiple menu items displayed on the menu screen 3000. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH5514.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5512, a history display process is executed in step SH5513 to display the game history, and then the process proceeds to step SH5514. When the history display process is executed, the game history screen 3005 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-73).

Next, in step SH5514, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the menu screen 3000 is displayed. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5516.

If a negative determination is made in step SH5514, a determination is made in step SH5515 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the menu screen 3000 was displayed. If a negative determination is made here, the process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH5515, the process proceeds to step SH5516.

Then, in step SH5516, the display of the menu screen 3000 is terminated, and this processing is terminated. As a result, if the player presses the effect button 125 while the menu screen 3000 is displayed, or if a predetermined display time has elapsed, the display of the menu screen 3000 is terminated, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the original screen, such as the demo screen. With this function, if no operation input is made to select one of the above menu items, such as "Language Settings," before the predetermined time has elapsed while the menu screen 3000 is displayed, it is necessary to display the menu screen 3000 again in order to transition to a state where the language setting screen 3001, etc., is displayed.

In this embodiment, the menu screen 3000 disappears from the effect display device 42 (display unit 42a) and returns to the original screen when the effect button 125 is operated or the display time has elapsed. However, alternatively or additionally, the effect display device 42 (display unit 42a) may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo screen, when a game ball is launched or when a game ball enters a predetermined entry means, such as the start entry section 33WA or 33WB, while the menu screen 3000 is displayed (the same applies to when other setting screens belonging to subcategories of the menu screen 3000, such as the language setting screen 3001, are displayed).

With the above configuration, the player can move the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the menu screen 3000 by operating the up button 126a or down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select a menu item, or can confirm the menu item selected with the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126. In this way, when a specific menu item is selected on the menu screen 3000, a screen corresponding to the selected menu item is displayed on the effect display device 42.

For example, when the menu screen 3000 is displayed and the player selects "Language Settings," the language setting screen 3001 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-67). When the language setting screen 3001 is displayed, the menu screen 3000 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the language setting screen 3001 displays three language options that the player can choose from: "Japanese," "Chinese," and "ENGLISH." Of course, the language options are not limited to these, and the player may also be able to select a language different from these.

The language setting screen 3001 also displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Here, the language setting process in step SH5505 above will be explained with reference to Figure 4-51.

As shown in the figure, the "language setting process" first determines in step SH5600 whether the language setting screen 3001 (see Figure 4-67) is currently being displayed on the performance display device 42. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5602.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH5600, a language setting screen display process is executed in step SH5601 to display the language setting screen 3001 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the language setting screen 3001 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

Next, in step SH5602, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the language setting screen 3001 is displayed. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5604.

If a negative determination is made in step SH5602, a determination is made in step SH5603 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the language setting screen 3001 was displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the display of the language setting screen 3001, such as "End language setting," is terminated in step SH5604, and the screen returns to the menu screen 3000 in the following step SH5605, terminating this processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5603, then in step SH5606, it is determined whether "Japanese" has been selected from the language options displayed on the language setting screen 3001 ("Japanese," "Chinese," and "ENGLISH"), based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches.

If step SH5606 returns a positive result, step SH5607 performs processing to set Japanese as the language used. Specifically, the value of the language setting flag, which is information related to game specifications, is set to a value corresponding to "Japanese" (e.g., "01"). After that, processing proceeds through steps SH5604 and SH5605, and ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5606, in step SH5608, it is determined whether "Chinese" was selected from the language options displayed on the language setting screen 3001, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If step SH5608 returns a positive result, step SH5609 performs processing to set Chinese as the language used. Specifically, the value of the language setting flag, which is information related to game specifications, is set to a value corresponding to "Chinese" (e.g., "02"). Then, processing proceeds through steps SH5604 and SH5605, and ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5608, in step SH5610, it is determined whether "ENGLISH" was selected from the language options displayed on the language setting screen 3001, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If step SH5610 returns a positive result, step SH5611 performs processing to set English as the language used. Specifically, the value of the language setting flag, which is information related to game specifications, is set to a value corresponding to "English" (e.g., "03"). After that, processing proceeds through steps SH5604 and SH5605, and terminates. If step SH5610 returns a negative result, processing terminates.

With the above configuration, the player can move the cursor 3100 up or down on the language setting screen 3001 by operating the up button 126a or the down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select a language option, and then confirm the language option selected by the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126. When the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the language, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion message, such as "The language has been set to English," indicating that the player has completed input of the language selected by the player. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the value of the language setting flag set in the language setting area of RAM 553 to a value corresponding to the language selected by the player, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000. However, if the player does not change the language used here from the default language (Japanese), or if the player inputs a language that is the same as the default language, the output setting process will set the language to the same as the default language.

Of course, if the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the language to be used, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo screen, without returning to the menu screen 3000.

The sub-control device 262 will generate image data and output audio using the corresponding language data based on the value of the language setting flag selected and set as described above. This allows for the display of Japanese, Chinese, and English versions of variable effects, gameplay explanations, and operation guides.

Now, when the menu screen 3000 is displayed and the player selects "Audio Output Settings" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000, the audio output settings screen 3002 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-68). When the audio output settings screen 3002 is displayed, the menu screen 3000 is hidden.

Here, the audio output setting process of step SH5507 above will be explained with reference to Figure 4-52.

As shown in the figure, the "audio output setting process" first determines in step SH5700 whether the audio output setting screen 3002 (see Figure 4-68) is currently being displayed on the performance display device 42. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5702.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH5700, step SH5701 performs an audio output setting screen display process to display the audio output setting screen 3002 on the performance display device 42, and then the process proceeds to step SH5702. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the audio output setting screen 3002 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

In the following step SH5702, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the audio output setting screen 3002 is displayed, based on the operation detection information related to the effect button 125. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5704.

If a negative determination is made in step SH5702, then in step SH5703 it is determined whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the audio output setting screen 3002 was displayed. If a positive determination is made here, then in step SH5704 a message such as "Audio output setting is finished" is displayed, and the display of the audio output setting screen 3002 is terminated. Then, in the following step SH5705, the screen returns to the menu screen 3000, and this processing is terminated.

As a result, if the player presses the effect button 125 while the audio output setting screen 3002 is displayed, or if a predetermined display time has elapsed, the display of the audio output setting screen 3002 will end and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 will return to the previous screen (menu screen 3000).

In this embodiment, when the effect button 125 is operated or the display time has elapsed, the audio output setting screen 3002 disappears from the effect display device 42 (display unit 42a) and returns to the previous screen (menu screen 3000). However, instead, the screen may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo screen.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5703, then in step SH5706, it is determined whether "Output Volume" has been selected from the output setting items ("Output Volume", "Output Device") displayed on the audio output setting screen 3002, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches.

In addition, the audio output setting screen 3002 displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5706, output volume setting processing is executed in step SH5707. Details of the output volume setting processing will be described later. After the output volume setting processing, processing proceeds through steps SH5704 and SH5705, and then ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5706, in step SH5708, it is determined whether or not "Output Device" has been selected from the output setting items ("Output Volume", "Output Device") displayed on the audio output setting screen 3002, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If a positive determination is made in step SH5708, then in step SH5709, output device setting processing is executed. Details of the output device setting processing will be described later. After the output device setting processing, processing proceeds through steps SH5704 and SH5705, and then ends. Note that if a negative determination is made in step SH5708, processing proceeds through steps SH5704 and SH5705, and then ends.

With the above configuration, the player can move the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the audio output setting screen 3002 by operating the up button 126a or down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select the desired output setting item, or can confirm the desired output setting item selected with the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126. In this way, when a specific output setting item is selected on the audio output setting screen 3002, a screen corresponding to the selected output setting item is displayed on the effect display device 42.

Here, for example, when the audio output setting screen 3002 is displayed and the player selects "Output Volume," the output volume setting screen 3011 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-69). When the output volume setting screen 3011 is displayed, the audio output setting screen 3002 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the output volume setting screen 3011 displays five volume levels that the player can select: "1," "2," "3," "4," and "5." Of course, the number of volume levels that the player can select is not limited to this, and other different configurations may be adopted.

In addition, the output volume setting screen 3011 displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Here, the output volume setting process of step SH5707 above will be explained with reference to Figure 4-53.

As shown in the figure, the "output volume setting process" first determines in step SH5720 whether the output volume setting screen 3011 is being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5722.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH5720, step SH5721 performs a volume setting screen display process to display the output volume setting screen 3011, and then the process proceeds to step SH5722. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the output volume setting screen 3011 on the performance display device 42.

In the following step SH5722, it is determined whether a volume-up operation has been performed with the right button 126d based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the right button 126d. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5724.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5722, volume-up processing is executed to increase the output volume in step SH5723, and then the process proceeds to step SH5724.

In step SH5724, it is determined whether a volume-down operation has been performed with the left button 126c based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the left button 126c. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5726.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5724, volume down processing is executed to lower the output volume in step SH5725, and then the process proceeds to step SH5726.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 temporarily stores the volume output level (output volume level) value selected and set by the player in a specified area during the volume up process and volume down process. After confirmation, as described below, the output volume level value set in the volume level setting area of RAM 553 is updated to the output volume level value selected and set as described above.

Next, in step SH5726, based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the effect button 125, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the output volume setting screen 3011 is displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5728.

On the other hand, if the result of step SH5726 is negative, step SH5727 determines whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the output volume setting screen 3011 was displayed. If the result of this determination is negative, the process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5727, step SH5728 displays a message such as "Ending output volume setting" and ends the display of the output volume setting screen 3011, and in the following step SH5729, the screen returns to the menu screen 3000, terminating this processing.

With the above configuration, the player can operate the left button 126c or the right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to move the cursor 3100 left or right on the output volume setting screen 3011 to select the desired output volume level, and then press the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126 to confirm the output volume level selected by the cursor 3100. In this way, when the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the output volume level, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display indicating that the input of the output volume level selected by the player has been completed, such as "Level 2 has been selected as the output volume level." The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the output volume level value set in the volume level setting area of RAM 553 to the output volume level value determined by the player through the volume up process and volume down process, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the audio output setting screen 3002, which is the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the output volume level is not changed by the player from the default value or if the player has entered a value that is the same as the default value, the same value as the default value will be set in the output setting process.

As above, when the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the output volume level, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 may be configured to return to the original screen, such as the demo effect, without returning to the menu screen 3000.

Now, when the audio output setting screen 3002 is displayed and the player selects "Output Device" from the output setting items on the audio output setting screen 3002, the output device setting screen 3012 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-70). When the output device setting screen 3012 is displayed, the audio output setting screen 3002 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the output device setting screen 3012 displays two output device options that the player can choose from: "Speakers" and "Wireless Earphones." Of course, the output device options are not limited to these, and the player may be able to select a different output device.

In addition, the output device setting screen 3012 displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Here, the output device setting process of step SH5709 above will be explained with reference to Figure 4-54.

As shown in the figure, the "output device setting process" first determines in step SH5740 whether the output device setting screen 3012 (see Figure 4-70) is currently being displayed on the performance display device 42. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH5742.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH5740, step SH5741 performs an output device setting screen display process to display the output device setting screen 3012 on the performance display device 42, and then proceeds to step SH5742. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the output device setting screen 3012 on the performance display device 42.

In the following step SH5742, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the output device setting screen 3012 is displayed, based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the effect button 125. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5744.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5742, a judgment is made in step SH5743 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the output device setting screen 3012 was displayed. If a positive judgment is made here, a message such as "Ending output device setting" is displayed in step SH5744, and the display of the output device setting screen 3012 is terminated. Then, in the following step SH5745, the screen returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the audio output setting screen 3002, which is the setting screen for the previous category), and this processing is terminated.

As a result, if the player presses the effect button 125 while the output device setting screen 3012 is displayed, or if a predetermined display time has elapsed, the display of the output device setting screen 3012 will end, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 will return to the previous screen (menu screen 3000 or audio output setting screen 3002).

In this embodiment, when the effect button 125 is operated or the display time has elapsed, the output device setting screen 3012 disappears from the effect display device 42 (display unit 42a) and returns to the previous screen (menu screen 3000, etc.), but instead, the screen may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo screen.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5743, then in step SH5746, it is determined whether "Speaker" has been selected from the output device options ("Speaker" and "Wireless Earphone") displayed on the output device setting screen 3012, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches.

If step SH5746 returns a positive result, step SH5747 performs processing to set a speaker (speaker SP) as the output device to be used. Specifically, the value of the output device information (audio output device setting flag) stored in the audio setting area (output device setting area) of RAM 553 as information related to game specifications is set to a value corresponding to "speaker" (e.g., "01"). Then, processing proceeds through steps SH5744 and SH5745, and ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH5746, in step SH5748, it is determined whether "Wireless Earphone" has been selected from the output device options ("Speaker" and "Wireless Earphone") displayed on the output device setting screen 3012, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If a positive determination is made in step SH5748, then in step SH5749, wireless earphone setting processing is executed. Details of the wireless earphone setting processing will be described later. After the wireless earphone setting processing, this processing is terminated via steps SH5744 and SH5745. Note that if a negative determination is made in step SH5748, then this processing is terminated via steps SH5744 and SH5745.

With the above configuration, the player can select the desired output device by moving the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the output device setting screen 3012 using the up button 126a or down button 126b of the directional pad 126, or can confirm the desired output device selected with the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126.

Now, when the player selects "Brightness Settings" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000, the brightness settings screen 3003 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-71). When the brightness settings screen 3003 is displayed, the menu screen 3000 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the brightness setting screen 3003 displays five brightness levels that the player can select: "1," "2," "3," "4," and "5." Of course, the number of brightness levels that the player can select is not limited to this, and other different configurations may be adopted.

In addition, the brightness setting screen 3003 displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Here, the brightness setting process of step SH5509 above will be explained with reference to Figure 4-55.

As shown in the figure, the "brightness setting process" first determines in step SH5800 whether the brightness setting screen 3003 is being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5802.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH5800, step SH5801 performs brightness setting screen display processing to display the brightness setting screen 3003, and then the process proceeds to step SH5802. This processing causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the brightness setting screen 3003 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

In the following step SH5802, it is determined whether a brightness increase operation has been performed with the right button 126d based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the right button 126d. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5804.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5802, brightness increase processing is performed to increase the brightness in step SH5803, and then the process proceeds to step SH5804.

In step SH5804, it is determined whether a brightness-down operation has been performed with the left button 126c based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the left button 126c. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH5806.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH5804, brightness down processing is performed to reduce the brightness in step SH5805, and then the process proceeds to step SH5806.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 temporarily stores the brightness level value selected and set by the player in a specified area during the brightness increase process and brightness decrease process. Then, after it is confirmed, as described below, the brightness level value set in the brightness level setting area of RAM 553 is updated to the brightness level value selected and set as described above.

Next, in step SH5806, it is determined whether the effect button 125 has been operated while the brightness setting screen 3003 is displayed, based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the effect button 125. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH5808.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SH5806 is negative, then in step SH5807 it is determined whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the brightness setting screen 3003 was displayed. If the determination here is negative, then this processing is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH5807, step SH5808 displays a message such as "Brightness setting completed" and the display of the brightness setting screen 3003 is terminated, and in the following step SH5609, the screen returns to the menu screen 3000, and this processing is terminated.

With the above configuration, the player can move the cursor 3100 left or right on the brightness setting screen 3003 by operating the left button 126c or the right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to select the desired brightness level, and then press the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126 to confirm the brightness level selected by the cursor 3100. When the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the brightness level, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion message, such as "Level 5 has been selected as the brightness level." The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the brightness level value set in the brightness level setting area of RAM 553 to the brightness level value determined by the player through the brightness increase and decrease processes, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000. However, if the player does not change the brightness level from the default value, or if the player inputs a value that is the same as the default value, the output setting process will set the same value as the default value.

As above, when the player presses the center button 126e to confirm the brightness level, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo screen, without returning to the menu screen 3000.

Now, when the player selects "Effect Customization" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000, the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-72). When the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed, the menu screen 3000 is hidden.

The effect customization screen 3004 displays multiple types of customization items that the player can perform. For example, in this embodiment, four customization items are displayed: "BGM Settings," which changes the music played during a specified effect; "Character Settings," which changes the character displayed during a specified effect; "Background Settings," which changes the background image displayed during a specified effect; and "Preview Effects Settings," which changes the appearance rate of preview effects, etc.

The effect customization screen 3004 displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Here, the effect customization process of step SH5511 above will be explained with reference to Figure 4-56.

As shown in the figure, the "effect customization process" first determines in step SH35500 whether the effect customization screen 3004 (see Figure 4-72) is being displayed on the effect display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35504.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH35500, a performance customization screen display process is executed in step SH35503 to display the performance customization screen 3004 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the performance customization screen 3004 on the performance display device 42.

Next, in step SH35504, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "BGM Settings" from the multiple customization items displayed on the effect customization screen 3004. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH35506.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35504, in step SH35505, BGM setting processing is executed to change the setting of the music played in the specified effect, and then the process proceeds to step SH35506. Details of the BGM setting processing will be described later.

Next, in step SH35506, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Character Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the effect customization screen 3004. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH35508.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35506, in step SH35507, character setting processing is executed to change the settings of the character displayed in the specified presentation, and then the process proceeds to step SH35508. Details of the character setting processing will be described later.

Next, in step SH35508, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Background Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the effect customization screen 3004. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH35510.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35508, in step SH35509, background setting processing is executed to change the background image displayed in the specified effect, and then the process proceeds to step SH35510. Details of the background setting processing will be described later.

Next, in step SH35510, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above, it is determined whether a button operation input has been made to select "Preview Effect Settings" from the multiple menu items displayed on the effect customization screen 3004. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH35514.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35510, in step SH35511, a preview effect setting process is executed to change the settings such as the appearance rate of the preview effect, and then the process proceeds to step SH35514. Details of the preview effect setting process will be described later.

Next, in step SH35514, based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the effect button 125, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SH35516.

If a negative determination is made in step SH35514, step SH35515 determines whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the effect customization screen 3004 was displayed. If a negative determination is made here, this processing ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH35515, the processing proceeds to step SH35516.

Then, in step SH35516, the display of the effect customization screen 3004 is terminated, and this processing is terminated. As a result, if the player presses the effect button 125 while the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed, or if a predetermined display time has elapsed, the display of the effect customization screen 3004 is terminated, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the previous screen (menu screen 3000). Due to this function, if no operation input is made to select one of the above customization items, such as "BGM Settings," before the predetermined time has elapsed while the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed, it is necessary to display the effect customization screen 3004 again in order to transition to a state where the BGM settings screen 4001, etc. is displayed.

In this embodiment, when the effect button 125 is operated or the display time has elapsed, the effect customization screen 3004 disappears from the effect display device 42 (display unit 42a) and returns to the previous screen (menu screen 3000). However, instead, the display may be configured to return to the original screen, such as a demo screen.

With the above configuration, the player can move the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the effect customization screen 3004 by operating the up button 126a or down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select a customization item, or can confirm the customization item selected with the cursor 3100 by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126. In this way, when a specific customization item is selected on the effect customization screen 3004, a screen corresponding to the selected customization item is displayed on the effect display device 42.

For example, when the effect customization screen 3004 is displayed and the player selects "BGM settings," the effect display device 42 displays the BGM settings screen 4001 (see Figure 4-74). When the BGM settings screen 4001 is displayed, the effect customization screen 3004 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the BGM setting screen 4001 displays two BGM options that the player can choose from: "BGM during symbol fluctuation" and "BGM during jackpot." Of course, the BGM options are not limited to these, and the player may also be able to select BGM different from these.

The BGM setting screen 4001 also displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Here, when the BGM setting screen 4001 is displayed and the player selects "BGM during symbol change," the BGM during symbol change setting screen 4002 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-75). Similarly, when the BGM setting screen 4001 is displayed and the player selects "BGM during jackpot," the BGM during jackpot setting screen 4003 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-76). When the BGM during symbol change setting screen 4002 or the BGM during jackpot setting screen 4003 is displayed, the BGM setting screen 4001 is hidden.

In addition, the BGM setting screen 4002 for playing BGM during symbol fluctuations and the BGM setting screen 4003 for playing BGM during a jackpot display various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) or the operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

A detailed explanation using a flowchart will be omitted, but with the above configuration, the player first moves the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the BGM setting screen 4002 for symbol fluctuations or the BGM setting screen 4003 for jackpots by operating the up button 126a or down button 126b of the cross key 126 to select the item they want to customize (play order or play round), and then operates the right button 126d to confirm it as a customization item. Next, for the selected customization item, they operate the up button 126a or down button 126b of the cross key 126 to select a specific song from a list of songs (e.g., songs 1-10), and then confirm the song by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the cross key 126.

Then, by the player confirming the various BGM settings in this manner, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display indicating that the input of the specified customization items (BGM) selected by the player is complete, such as "Song 7 has been selected as the music for rounds 1 through 3 during the jackpot." The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the various BGM information (such as flag values and setting values corresponding to songs, etc.) set in the effect customization information storage area of RAM 553 (see Figure 4-65) to the various BGM information selected by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000. However, if the player does not change the specified BGM information from the default or if the player has entered the same information as the default, the same information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figures, subcategories for each song (BGM), such as "melody," "genre," "tempo," and "instrument played," may be configured to be customizable in more detail. Of course, a settings screen for customizing these subcategories may be displayed on the performance display device 42.

Next, the character setting process of step SH35507 above will be explained with reference to Figure 4-57.

As shown in the figure, the "character setting process" first determines in step SH35600 whether the character setting screen 4004 (see Figure 4-77) is being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35602.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH35600, a character setting screen display process is executed in step SH35601 to display the character setting screen 4004 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the character setting screen 4004 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

In addition, the character setting screen 4004 displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Next, in step SH35602, based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the effect button 125, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the character setting screen 4004 is displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35604.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35602, a judgment is made in step SH35603 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the character setting screen 4004 was displayed. If a positive judgment is made here, a message such as "Character setting is completed" is displayed in step SH35604, and the display of the character setting screen 4004 is terminated. Then, in the following step SH35605, the process returns to the effect customization screen 3004, and this process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35603, then in step SH35606, it is determined whether or not a "main character" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the character setting screen 4004 ("main character," "sub-character," "design," and "reserved icon"), based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35606, main character setting processing is performed in step SH35607. After that, processing goes through steps SH35604 and SH35605, and ends.

When the main character setting process of step SH35607 is performed, a main character setting screen display process is executed to display the main character setting screen 4005 (see Figure 4-78) on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the main character setting screen 4005 on the performance display device 42. Then, when the main character setting screen 4005 is displayed, the character setting screen 4004 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the main character setting screen 4005 displays four main character options that the player can choose from: "Girl," "Boy," "Robot," and "Monster." Of course, the main character options are not limited to these, and the player may also be able to select a main character different from these.

The main character setting screen 4005 also displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

When the main character setting screen 4005 is displayed and the player selects, for example, "girl," the girl character setting screen 4006 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-79). Similarly, although not shown, when "boy" is selected, the boy character setting screen is displayed on the effect display device 42; when "robot" is selected, the robot character setting screen is displayed on the effect display device 42; and when "monster" is selected, the monster character setting screen is displayed on the effect display device 42. Note that when the girl character setting screen 4006 or the like is displayed, the main character setting screen 4005 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the girl character setting screen 4006, etc., displays character feature options such as "face," "body type," "clothing," and "accessories" that the player can select (see Figure 4-79). The player can then select the type that suits their preferences for each of the above character features from multiple types (for example, for "body type," Type 1 (slim), Type 2 (standard), Type 3 (plus), etc.)). Of course, the character feature options are not limited to these, and the player may also be configured to be able to select character features different from these.

In addition, the girl character setting screen 4006 and the like displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the cross key 126.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, various customization items such as "hairstyle," "eyes," "nose," and "mouth" are provided as subcategory options related to the character characteristic "face" (see Figure 4-65). Of course, this configuration is not limited to this, and the player may be able to customize various other subcategory items. Of course, a configuration may also be adopted in which a settings screen for customizing the subcategory is displayed on the effect display device 42.

Then, by operating the cross key 126, the player confirms the various main character settings. This causes the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to perform an input completion display, such as "A girl has been selected as the main character." This indicates that the input of the specified customization items (main character) selected by the player is complete. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the various character information (such as flag values and setting values corresponding to the main character) set in the effect customization information storage area (see FIG. 4-65) of RAM 553 to the various character information selected by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified character information from the default (in this embodiment, a girl character is set as the default), or if the player has entered character information identical to the default, the output setting process will set the same character information as the default.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35606, then in step SH35608, it is determined whether a "sub-character" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the character setting screen 4004, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35608, sub-character setting processing is performed in step SH35609. After that, processing goes through steps SH35604 and SH35605, and ends.

When the sub-character setting process of step SH35609 is performed, a sub-character setting screen display process is executed to display a sub-character setting screen (not shown) on the effect display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the sub-character setting screen on the effect display device 42. Then, when the sub-character setting screen is displayed, the character setting screen 4004 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the sub-character setting screen displays four sub-character options that the player can choose from: "dolphin," "manta ray," "whale shark," and "whale." Of course, the sub-character options are not limited to these, and the player may also be able to select a sub-character different from these.

Then, by operating the directional pad 126, the player confirms the sub-character setting. This causes the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to perform an input completion display, such as "A whale shark has been selected as the sub-character." This indicates that the input of the specified customization item (sub-character) selected by the player is complete. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the sub-character information (such as flag values and setting values corresponding to the sub-character, etc.) set in the effect customization information storage area of RAM 553 (see FIG. 4-65) to the sub-character information selected by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified sub-character information from the default (in this embodiment, a dolphin is set as the default), or if the player has entered the same sub-character information as the default, the output setting process will set the same sub-character information as the default.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35608, then in step SH35610, it is determined whether or not a "design" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the character setting screen 4004, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35610, the pattern design setting process is performed in step SH35611. After that, the process goes through steps SH35604 and SH35605, and then ends.

When the pattern design setting process of step SH35611 is performed, a pattern design setting screen display process is executed to display a pattern design setting screen (not shown) on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the pattern design setting screen on the performance display device 42. Then, when the pattern design setting screen is displayed, the character setting screen 4004 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the design setting screen displays three decorative design groups ("Tropical Fish Group," "Northern Sea Fish Group," and "Deep Sea Fish Group") as design options that players can choose from. Of course, the design options are not limited to these, and players may also be able to select design options that are different from these.

Then, by operating the cross key 126, the player confirms the design setting. This causes the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to perform an input completion display, indicating that the input of the specified customization item (design) selected by the player is complete, such as displaying "The deep-sea fish group has been selected as the design." The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the design information (such as flag values and setting values related to the design) set in the customization information storage area of RAM 553 (see FIG. 4-65) to the design information selected by the player, as described above. The display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 then returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified design information from the default (in this embodiment, the "tropical fish group" is set as the default), or if the player has entered the same design information as the default, the output setting process will set the same design information as the default.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35610, then in step SH35612, it is determined whether the "hold icon" was selected from the multiple options displayed on the character setting screen 4004, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If the answer is yes in step SH35612, the hold icon setting process is performed in step SH35613. After that, the process goes through steps SH35604 and SH35605, and then ends. If the answer is no in step SH35612, the process ends.

When the hold icon setting process of step SH35613 is performed, a hold icon setting screen display process is executed to display a hold icon setting screen (not shown) on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the hold icon setting screen on the performance display device 42. Then, when the hold icon setting screen is displayed, the character setting screen 4004 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the reserve icon setting screen displays three reserve icon options that the player can choose from: "life jacket," "swimming goggles," and "peacock pearl." Of course, the reserve icon options are not limited to these, and the player may also be able to select a reserve icon different from these.

Then, by operating the directional pad 126, the player confirms the reserved icon setting. This causes the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to perform an input completion display, such as "Akoya pearl has been selected as the reserved icon." This indicates that the input of the specified customization item (reserved icon) selected by the player has been completed. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the reserved icon information (such as flag values and setting values related to the reserved icon) set in the effect customization information storage area of RAM 553 (see FIG. 4-65) to the reserved icon information selected by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified reserved icon information from the default (in this embodiment, a lifebuoy is set as the default), or if the player has entered the same reserved icon information as the default, the same reserved icon information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

Next, the background (stage) setting process of step SH35509 above will be explained with reference to Figure 4-58.

As shown in the figure, the "background setting process" first determines in step SH35700 whether the background setting screen 4008 (see Figure 4-80) is currently being displayed on the performance display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35702.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH35700, a background setting screen display process is executed in step SH35701 to display the background setting screen 4008 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the background setting screen 4008 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

In addition, the background setting screen 4008 displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Next, in step SH35702, it is determined whether the effect button 125 has been operated while the background setting screen 4008 is displayed, based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the effect button 125. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35704.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35702, a judgment is made in step SH35703 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the background setting screen 4008 was displayed. If a positive judgment is made here, a message such as "Background setting is completed" is displayed in step SH35704, and the display of the background setting screen 4008 is terminated. Then, in the following step SH35705, the process returns to the effect customization screen 3004, and this process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35703, then in step SH35706, it is determined whether or not "Diving Stage" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the background setting screen 4008 ("Diving Stage," "Cruising Stage," "Deep Sea Stage"), based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35706, diving stage setting processing is performed in step SH35707. After that, processing proceeds through steps SH35704 and SH35705, and then ends.

When the diving stage setting process of step SH35707 is performed, a setting process is performed to send a display command to the display control device 45 to display a background image related to the "diving stage" as the background image for the variable display performance on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42. In this embodiment, the background image related to the "diving stage" is set as the default.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35706, in step SH35708, it is determined whether or not "Cruising Stage" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the background setting screen 4008, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35708, cruising stage setting processing is performed in step SH35709. After that, processing proceeds through steps SH35704 and SH35705, and then ends.

When the cruising stage setting process of step SH35709 is performed, setting process is performed to send a display command to the display control device 45 to display a background image related to the "cruising stage" on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 as the background image for the variable display performance.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35708, in step SH35710, it is determined whether or not "Deep Sea Stage" was selected from the multiple options displayed on the background setting screen 4008, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35710, deep sea stage setting processing is performed in step SH35711. After that, processing is terminated via steps SH35704 and SH35705. If a negative judgment is made in step SH35710, processing is terminated.

When the deep sea stage setting process of step SH35711 is performed, setting process is performed to send a display command to the display control device 45 to display a background image related to the "deep sea stage" on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 as the background image for the variable display performance.

When the background (stage) is changed as described above, not only may the background image be changed, but the characters that appear and the presentation method may also be changed. The background (stage) may also be changed not only during standby mode, but also during a predetermined period during the changing display (for example, during a predetermined period from the start of the changing display, during so-called high-speed changes), when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when the player presses the presentation button 125). However, in this case, the customization screen as described above may not be displayed, and the background (stage) may be switched sequentially each time the presentation button 125 is pressed.

Next, the preview effect setting process of step SH35511 above will be explained with reference to Figure 4-59.

As shown in the figure, the "preview effect setting process" first determines in step SH35800 whether the preview effect setting screen 4009 (see Figure 4-81) is currently being displayed on the effect display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35802.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH35800, a preview performance setting screen display process is executed in step SH35801 to display the preview performance setting screen 4009 on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the preview performance setting screen 4009 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45.

In addition, the preview performance setting screen 4009 displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) and operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

Next, in step SH35802, it is determined whether the effect button 125 is operated while the preview effect setting screen 4009 is displayed, based on the operation detection information related to the operation detection switch of the effect button 125. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH35804.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35802, a judgment is made in step SH35803 as to whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the preview effect setting screen 4009 was displayed. If a positive judgment is made here, a message such as "Preview effect setting is finished" is displayed in step SH35804, and the preview effect setting screen 4009 is terminated. Then, in the following step SH35805, the display returns to the effect customization screen 3004, and this processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35803, then in step SH35806, it is determined based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above whether or not "Super Reach Effect" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009 ["Super Reach Effect (including Special Reach Effect)," "School of Fish Effect," "Bubble Effect," "Early Effect (Continuous Preview Effect)," "One-Shot Announcement Effect," "Cut-in Effect," and "Manufacturer Recommended Pack)].

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35806, the Super Reach effect setting process is performed in step SH35807. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and ends.

When the super reach effect setting process of step SH35807 is performed, first, the super reach effect setting screen display process is executed to display the super reach effect setting screen 4010 (see Figure 4-82) on the effect display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the super reach effect setting screen 4010 on the effect display device 42. Then, when the super reach effect setting screen 4010 is displayed, the preview effect setting screen 4009 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the Super Reach effect setting screen 4010 displays three Super Reach effects ("Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," and "Marine Reach") as Super Reach options that the player can choose whether or not to execute.

The super reach effect setting screen 4010 also displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) or operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

The player first moves the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the Super Reach effect setting screen 4010 by operating the up button 126a or down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select the item they wish to customize (either "Kuroshio Reach," "Coral Reach," or "Marine Reach"), and then operates the right button 126d to confirm it as a customization item. Next, for the selected customization item, they operate the left button 126c or right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to select whether or not to execute the effect (ON/OFF), and then confirm whether or not to execute the effect by pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126.

Then, by the player confirming whether or not to execute each Super Reach effect in this manner, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display, such as "Kuroshio Reach has been set to off," indicating that the input of the specified customization item (whether or not to execute a Super Reach effect) determined by the player is complete. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the various reach effect information (such as flag values and setting values related to the various Super Reach effects) set in the effect customization information storage area (see Figure 4-65) of RAM 553 to the various reach effect information determined by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified reach effect information from the default, or if the player has entered the same information as the default, the same information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

In this embodiment, the default settings are "Kuroshio Reach" set to "ON", "Coral Reach" set to "ON", and "Marine Reach" set to "ON".

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35806, then in step SH35808, it is determined whether or not "School of Fish Effect" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

In this embodiment, the "school of fish effect" is an effect that can occur when the variable effect develops into a super reach effect, and is a preview effect in which a school of fish character (see Figures 4-46, 4-47, etc.) appears.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35808, the fish school effect setting process is performed in step SH35809. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and ends.

Before explaining the fish school effect setting process in step SH35809, we will first explain the "reliability (likelihood of winning)" in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the "reliability" of a predetermined preview effect, such as a school of fish effect or bubble effect, refers to the probability that a jackpot will occur when the predetermined preview effect is executed independently.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the fish school reliability is set to 50%, in the long term, the ratio of the fish school effect being executed when a jackpot fluctuation occurs to the ratio of the fish school effect being executed when a loss fluctuation occurs will be set to 1:1.

For example, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to 1/200, so if variable play is performed 20,000 times under normal conditions, there will be 100 jackpots (= 20,000 times / 200) and 19,900 misses (= 20,000 times - 100 times).

Under this configuration, if the school of fish reliability is set to 70%, the school of fish effect will be executed in 70 of the 100 big win fluctuations, and in 30 of the 19,900 losing fluctuations.

Therefore, in this embodiment, if the fish school reliability is set to 70%, the appearance rate of the fish school effect during a jackpot fluctuation is set to 70% (= 70 times/100 times), and the appearance rate of the fish school effect during a miss fluctuation is set to approximately 0.15% (= 30 times/19,900 times) (the same applies to the bubble effect described below).

Of course, this is not a limitation, and the "reliability" of each preview effect may be set taking into account factors such as the probability of a jackpot occurring when multiple preview effects are executed.

In light of this, in this embodiment, when performing the fish school effect setting process of step SH35809, the sub-control device 262 first takes into consideration the fish school reliability information stored in the fish school reliability storage area provided in the user-associated area of RAM 553, i.e., the fish school reliability (reliability 10% to 90%) selected and input by the player.

Then, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter corresponding to the reliability stored here (the school of fish reliability selected by the player) are read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the school of fish effect lottery.

However, in this embodiment, regardless of the reliability stored in the fish school reliability storage area (the fish school reliability selected by the player), ROM 552 only stores a 50% reliability effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the fish school effect lottery.

In other words, regardless of whether the reliability stored in the fish school reliability storage area (the fish school reliability selected by the player) is a value between 10% and 90%, the sub-control device 262 sets a presentation selection table and presentation selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% in a specified area of RAM 553.

More specifically, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% that are taken into consideration when a jackpot occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a 50% appearance rate of the school of fish effect (= 50 times/100 times) are set, and as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 50% that are taken into consideration when a loss occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a 0.25% appearance rate of the school of fish effect (= 50 times/19,900 times) are set.

In other words, regardless of whether the value (reliability) entered by the player for customization is a value greater than 50%, such as "70%" or "80%," or a smaller value such as "20%" or "30%," processing corresponding to a reliability of "50%" will be performed.

In this way, by always using only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter regardless of the fish school reliability selected by the player, the player is given the satisfaction of having freely and actively customized the pachinko machine's 10's presentation in a detailed and diverse manner to suit their preferences. However, the pachinko machine 10 does not need to pre-store numerous effect selection tables corresponding to all values the player can set (reliability levels of 10% to 90%). This prevents the control processing related to the school of fish presentation setting process from becoming too complicated and reduces the processing burden on the sub-control device 262. Furthermore, by configuring the system so that players cannot customize the school of fish presentation by inputting reliability levels of "0%" or "100%," even when only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter (for a reliability level of 50%) is always used, the player is able to perceive the customized input values as if they were reflected in the pachinko machine's 10's internal control, preventing any sense of incongruity regarding the school of fish reliability.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 as described above is periodically updated by the counter update process of step SH3905, and is read out when the sub-control device 262 executes the determination process of step SH45207 described above (process for determining whether to execute the school of fish effect).

Then, in the fish school effect setting process of step SH35809 described above, the reliability setting process shown in Figure 4-60 is performed. This reliability setting process is similar to the reliability setting process performed in the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811 described below, and so its details will be discussed together later.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35808, then in step SH35810, it is determined whether or not "bubble effect" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35810, the bubble effect setting process is performed in step SH35811. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and then ends.

When performing the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811, the sub-controller 262, just as when performing the fish school effect setting process of step SH35809, first takes into consideration the bubble reliability information stored in the bubble reliability memory area provided in the user-associated area of RAM 553, i.e., the bubble reliability selected and input by the player (reliability 10% to 90%).

Then, the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter corresponding to the reliability stored here (the bubble reliability selected by the player) are read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the bubble effect lottery.

However, in this embodiment, regardless of the reliability stored in the bubble reliability memory area (the bubble reliability selected by the player), ROM 552 pre-stores only the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 30% as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the bubble effect lottery.

In other words, regardless of whether the reliability stored in the bubble reliability memory area (the bubble reliability selected by the player) is a value between 10% and 90%, the sub-control device 262 sets the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 30% in a specified area of RAM 553.

More specifically, as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 30% that are taken into consideration when a jackpot occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a bubble effect appearance rate of 30% (= 30 times out of 100 times) are set, and as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a reliability of 30% that are taken into consideration when a loss occurs, a effect selection table and effect selection random number counter with a bubble effect appearance rate of approximately 0.15% (= 30 times out of 19,900 times) are set.

In other words, regardless of whether the value (reliability) entered by the player for customization is a value greater than 30%, such as "70%" or "80%," or a smaller value such as "15%" or "25%," processing corresponding to a reliability of "30%" will be performed.

In this way, by always using only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter regardless of the bubble reliability selected by the player, the player is given the satisfaction of having freely and actively customized the pachinko machine's 10's presentation in a detailed and diverse manner to suit their preferences. However, the pachinko machine 10 does not need to pre-store numerous effect selection tables corresponding to all values the player can set (reliability levels of 10% to 90%). This prevents the control processing related to the bubble presentation setting process from becoming too complicated and reduces the processing burden on the sub-control device 262. Furthermore, by configuring the system so that players cannot customize bubble presentations by inputting reliability levels of "0%" or "100%," even when only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter (for a reliability level of 30%) is always used, the player is able to perceive the customized input values as if they were reflected in the pachinko machine's 10's internal control, preventing any sense of incongruity regarding bubble reliability.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 as described above is periodically updated by the counter update process of step SH3905, and is read out when the sub-control unit 262 executes the determination process of step SH45209 described above (bubble effect execution determination process).

Then, in the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811 described above, the reliability setting process shown in Figure 4-60 is performed.

Here, we will explain the reliability setting process performed in the fish school effect setting process of step SH35809 and the bubble effect setting process of step SH35811, etc., with reference to Figure 4-60.

As shown in the figure, the reliability setting process first determines in step SH36100 whether the reliability setting screen 4015 [see Figure 4-83(a)] corresponding to a specified effect (fish school effect or bubble effect) is currently being displayed on the effect display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH36102.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH36100, a reliability setting screen display process is performed in step SH36101 to display the reliability setting screen 4015, and then the process proceeds to step SH36102. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the reliability setting screen 4015 is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45. When the reliability setting screen 4015 is displayed, the preview performance setting screen 4009 is hidden.

In addition, the reliability setting screen 4015 in this embodiment displays a gauge (symbol omitted) that allows the player to adjust the reliability, and below it the current selected level value (e.g., 50%) is displayed numerically. In this embodiment, the player can select the reliability in 1% increments between a lower limit of 10% and an upper limit of 90%. Of course, this is not limiting, and other different configurations may also be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the player can select the reliability in 5% increments between a lower limit of 5% and an upper limit of 95%.

The reliability setting screen 4015 also displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) on the directional pad 126 or the operation of the decision button (center button 126e).

In the following step SH36102, it is determined whether a reliability increase operation has been performed by operating the right button 126d of the cross key 126 to move the cursor 3100 to the right and select the desired reliability level. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH36105.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH36102, step SH36103 determines whether the reliability has reached the upper limit (90% in this embodiment). If the reliability has already reached the upper limit, the process proceeds directly to step SH36105.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH36103 (if the upper limit has not been reached), a reliability increase process is performed in step SH36104 to increase the reliability, and then the process proceeds to step SH36105.

In step SH36105, it is determined whether a reliability down operation has been performed by operating the left button 126c of the cross key 126 to move the cursor 3100 to the left and select the desired reliability level. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH36108.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH36105, step SH36106 determines whether the reliability has reached the lower limit (10% in this embodiment). If the reliability has already reached the lower limit, the process proceeds directly to step SH36108.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH36106 (if the lower limit value has not been reached), a reliability down process is performed in step SH36107 to lower the reliability, and then the process proceeds to step SH36108.

Next, in step SH36108, it is determined whether the effect button 125 or the center button (decision button) 126e of the directional pad 126 was operated while the reliability setting screen 4015 was displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH36110.

On the other hand, if the result of step SH36108 is negative, step SH36109 determines whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the reliability setting screen 4015 was displayed. If the result of this determination is negative, this processing is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH36109, step SH36110 displays a message such as "Trustworthiness setting is completed" and the display of the reliability setting screen 4015 is terminated, and in the following step SH36111 the display returns to the preview performance setting screen 4009, terminating this processing.

In this embodiment, after the reliability increase process of step SH36104 or the reliability decrease process of step SH36107 has been performed, the player can confirm the reliability level selected in the reliability increase process or reliability decrease process by, for example, pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126, as described above.

Once the reliability level corresponding to the specified effect (school of fish effect or bubble effect) is determined, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display, such as "75% reliability has been entered," indicating that the player has completed input of the reliability of the specified effect (school of fish reliability or bubble reliability), as shown in FIG. 4-83(b). The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the reliability information (such as setting values related to school of fish reliability or bubble reliability) set in the effect custom information storage area (school of fish reliability storage area or bubble reliability storage area) of RAM 553 to the reliability information determined by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified reliability information from the default or if the player has entered the same reliability information as the default, the same reliability information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

In this embodiment, the reliability of the effect selection table (the effect selection table set in a predetermined area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table for the specific effect lottery) internally referenced by the sub-control device 262 when determining whether or not a specific effect (school of fish effect or bubble effect) will be executed does not necessarily match the reliability actually entered by the player (the reliability stored in the school of fish reliability memory area or bubble reliability memory area). However, by displaying the input completion display as described above, it is possible to make it appear as if the reliability entered by the player was set as the reliability when determining whether or not a specific effect will be executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, an image containing text information such as "School of fish reliability input value: 75%" may be displayed in a predetermined position (such as the bottom edge) of the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to prevent the player from forgetting the value they entered.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35810, then in step SH35812, it is determined whether or not "Starting performance (continuous preview performance)" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview performance setting screen 4009, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35812, the process of setting the initial effect (continuous preview effect) is performed in step SH35813. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and ends.

When the advance performance (continuous preview performance) setting process of step SH35813 is performed, the advance performance setting screen display process is first executed to display the advance performance setting screen (not shown) on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the advance performance setting screen is displayed on the performance display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45. Then, when the advance performance setting screen is displayed, the preview performance setting screen 4009 is hidden.

Here, on the starting effect setting screen, the player moves the displayed cursor 3100 by operating the left button 126c or the right button 126d of the directional pad 126 to select whether or not to execute the starting effect (ON/OFF), and then confirms whether or not to execute the effect by pressing the center button (decision button) 126e of the directional pad 126.

Then, by the player confirming whether or not to execute the first effect in this manner, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display, such as "First effect has been set to OFF," to indicate that the input of the effect mode (whether or not to execute the first effect) determined by the player is complete. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the first effect information (such as the value of the first effect execution flag) set in the effect customization information storage area of RAM 553 (see FIG. 4-65) to the first effect information determined by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the first effect information from the default or if the player has entered the same information as the default, the same information as the default will be set in the output setting process. In this embodiment, the "first effect (first effect execution flag)" is set to "ON" as the default setting.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35812, then in step SH35814, it is determined whether or not the "One-shot announcement effect" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the advance notice effect setting screen 4009, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

In this embodiment, the "one-shot notification effect" is an effect that notifies the player that the current fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation (an effect that notifies the player in advance that a jackpot state will occur). In this embodiment, the one-shot notification effect is a light-emitting effect that causes the central illumination unit 103 to flash.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35814, the one-shot announcement effect setting process is performed in step SH35815. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and ends.

When the single-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815 is performed, the sub-control device 262 first takes into consideration the single-shot announcement appearance rate information stored in the single-shot announcement appearance rate storage area provided in the user-associated area of the RAM 553, i.e., the single-shot announcement appearance rate (appearance rate 0% to 100%) selected and input by the player.

If the one-shot announcement appearance rate is set to "0%", the one-shot announcement effect 0% flag located in a specified area of RAM 553 is set to ON. Also, if the one-shot announcement appearance rate is set to "100%," the one-shot announcement effect 100% flag is set to ON. Note that in the default setting, both the one-shot announcement effect 0% flag and the one-shot announcement effect 100% flag are set to OFF.

On the other hand, if the one-shot announcement appearance rate is set to any value between 1% and 99%, the corresponding effect selection table and effect selection random number counter are read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the one-shot announcement effect lottery.

However, in this embodiment, regardless of the appearance rate stored in the one-shot announcement appearance rate storage area (the one-shot announcement appearance rate selected by the player), ROM 552 only stores an effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for an appearance rate of 40% as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the one-shot announcement effect lottery.

In other words, regardless of whether the appearance rate stored in the one-shot announcement appearance rate storage area (the one-shot announcement appearance rate selected by the player) is a value between 1% and 99%, the sub-control device 262 sets the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for an appearance rate of 40% in a specified area of RAM 553.

In other words, regardless of whether the value (appearance rate) entered by the player for customization is a value greater than "40%," such as "70%" or "80%," or a smaller value such as "20%" or "30%," the processing corresponding to an appearance rate of "40%" will be performed.

In this way, by always using only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter regardless of the one-shot announcement appearance rate selected by the player, the player is given the satisfaction of having freely and actively customized the pachinko machine's 10's presentation in a detailed and diverse manner to suit their preferences, while the pachinko machine 10 does not need to pre-store numerous effect selection tables, etc., corresponding to all values that the player can set (appearance rate 1% to 99%). This prevents the control processing related to the one-shot announcement effect setting process from becoming too complicated and reduces the processing burden on the sub-control device 262.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 is periodically updated by the counter update process of step SH3905, and is read out at a predetermined timing (such as the determination process of step SH45205 above), such as when the sub-control device 262 receives a variation pattern command.

Then, in the one-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815 described above, the appearance rate setting process shown in Figure 4-61 is performed. This appearance rate setting process is similar to the appearance rate setting process performed in the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817 described below, and so its details will be discussed together later.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35814, then in step SH35816, it is determined whether or not "Cut-in effect" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above.

In this embodiment, the "cut-in effect" is an effect that can be performed when the variable effect develops into a super reach effect (including when it further develops into a special reach effect), in which the main character or other characters appear by cutting in.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35816, cut-in effect setting processing is performed in step SH35817. After that, processing goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and ends.

When the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817 is performed, the sub-control device 262 first takes into consideration the cut-in appearance rate information stored in the cut-in appearance rate storage area provided in the user-associated area of the RAM 553, i.e., the cut-in appearance rate selected and input by the player (appearance rate 0% to 100%).

If the cut-in appearance rate is set to "0%", the cut-in effect 0% flag located in a specified area of RAM 553 is set to ON. If the cut-in appearance rate is set to "100%," the cut-in effect 100% flag is set to ON. Note that in the default setting, both the cut-in effect 0% flag and the cut-in effect 100% flag are set to OFF.

On the other hand, if the cut-in appearance rate is set to anywhere between 1% and 99%, the corresponding effect selection table and effect selection random number counter are read from ROM 552 and set in a specified area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the cut-in effect lottery.

However, in this embodiment, regardless of the appearance rate stored in the cut-in appearance rate storage area (the cut-in appearance rate selected by the player), ROM 552 pre-stores only the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for a 60% appearance rate as the effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for the cut-in effect lottery.

In other words, regardless of whether the appearance rate stored in the cut-in appearance rate storage area (the cut-in appearance rate selected by the player) is a value between 1% and 99%, the sub-control device 262 sets an effect selection table and effect selection random number counter for an appearance rate of 60% in a specified area of RAM 553.

In this way, by always using only one type of effect selection table and effect selection random number counter regardless of the cut-in appearance rate selected by the player, the player is given the satisfaction of having freely and actively customized the pachinko machine's 10's presentation in a detailed and diverse manner to suit their preferences, while the pachinko machine 10 does not need to pre-store numerous effect selection tables corresponding to all values that the player can set (appearance rates of 1% to 99%). This prevents the control processing related to the cut-in effect setting process from becoming too complicated and reduces the processing burden on the sub-control device 262.

In addition, the effect selection random number counter set in RAM 553 is periodically updated by the counter update process of step SH3905, and is read out at a predetermined timing (such as the determination process of step SH45202 above), such as when the sub-control device 262 receives a variation pattern command.

Then, in the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817 described above, the appearance rate setting process shown in Figure 4-61 is performed.

Here, we will explain the appearance rate setting process performed in the one-shot announcement effect setting process of step SH35815 and the cut-in effect setting process of step SH35817, etc., with reference to Figure 4-61.

As shown in the figure, the appearance rate setting process first determines in step SH36200 whether the appearance rate setting screen 4016 [see Figure 4-84(a)] corresponding to a specified effect (one-shot announcement effect or cut-in effect) is being displayed on the effect display device 42. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH36202.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SH36200, an appearance rate setting screen display process is performed in step SH36201 to display the appearance rate setting screen 4016, and then the process proceeds to step SH36202. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a predetermined display command to the display control device 45, and the appearance rate setting screen 4016 is displayed on the effect display device 42 through display control by the display control device 45. When the appearance rate setting screen 4016 is displayed, the preview effect setting screen 4009 is hidden.

In addition, the appearance rate setting screen 4016 in this embodiment displays a gauge (symbol omitted) that allows the player to adjust the appearance rate, and below it the current selection level value (e.g., 50%) is displayed numerically. In this embodiment, the player can select the appearance rate in 1% increments between a lower limit of 0% and an upper limit of 100%. Of course, this is not limiting, and other different configurations may also be adopted. For example, the configuration may allow the player to select the appearance rate in 5% increments between a lower limit of 5% and an upper limit of 95%.

The appearance rate setting screen 4016 also displays various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the decision button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to the input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., the player's operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) or operation of the decision button (center button 126e) on the directional pad 126.

In the following step SH36202, it is determined whether an appearance rate increase operation has been performed by operating the right button 126d of the cross key 126 to move the cursor 3100 to the right and select the desired appearance rate level. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH36205.

On the other hand, if step SH36202 returns a positive result, step SH36203 determines whether the occurrence rate has reached the upper limit (100% in this embodiment). If the occurrence rate has already reached the upper limit, the process proceeds directly to step SH36205.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH36203 (if the upper limit has not been reached), an appearance rate increase process is executed in step SH36204 to increase the appearance rate, and then the process proceeds to step SH36205.

In step SH36205, it is determined whether an appearance rate down operation has been performed by operating the left button 126c of the cross key 126 to move the cursor 3100 to the left and select the desired appearance rate level. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH36208.

On the other hand, if step SH36205 returns a positive result, step SH36206 determines whether the occurrence rate has reached the lower limit (0% in this embodiment). If the occurrence rate has already reached the lower limit, the process proceeds directly to step SH36208.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH36206 (if the lower limit has not been reached), an appearance rate reduction process is executed in step SH36207 to reduce the appearance rate, and then the process proceeds to step SH36208.

Next, in step SH36208, it is determined whether the effect button 125 or the center button (decision button) 126e of the directional pad 126 was operated while the appearance rate setting screen 4016 was displayed. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SH36210.

On the other hand, if the result of step SH36208 is negative, step SH36209 determines whether a predetermined display time has elapsed since the appearance rate setting screen 4016 was displayed. If the result of this determination is negative, this processing is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH36209, step SH36210 displays a message such as "Ending appearance rate setting" and ends the display of the appearance rate setting screen 4016, and then in the following step SH36211, the display returns to the preview performance setting screen 4009, and this processing ends.

In this embodiment, after the appearance rate increase process of step SH36204 or the appearance rate decrease process of step SH36207 has been performed, the player can confirm the appearance rate level selected in the appearance rate increase process or appearance rate decrease process by, for example, pressing the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the directional pad 126, as described above.

Once the appearance rate level corresponding to the specified effect (sudden announcement effect or cut-in effect) is determined, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display, such as "10% appearance rate has been entered," indicating that the player has completed entering the appearance rate of the specified effect determined by the player, as shown in FIG. 4-84(b). The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the appearance rate information (such as setting values related to the sudden announcement effect appearance rate or cut-in effect appearance rate) set in the effect custom information storage area (sudden announcement appearance rate storage area or cut-in appearance rate storage area) of RAM 553 to the appearance rate information determined by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified appearance rate information from the default or if the player has entered the same appearance rate information as the default, the same appearance rate information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate related to the effect selection table (the effect selection table set in a predetermined area of RAM 553 as the effect selection table for the specific effect lottery) that the sub-control device 262 internally references when determining whether or not to execute a specific effect (such as a one-shot announcement effect or a cut-in effect) does not necessarily match the appearance rate actually entered by the player (the appearance rate stored in the one-shot announcement appearance rate memory area or the cut-in appearance rate memory area). However, by displaying the input completion display as described above, it is possible to make it appear as if the appearance rate entered by the player was set as the appearance rate when determining whether or not to execute a specific effect. Furthermore, during the variable display, an image containing text information such as "Cut-in appearance rate input value: 30%" may be displayed in a predetermined position (such as the top edge) of the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to prevent the player from forgetting the value they entered.

If a negative judgment is made in step SH35816, then in step SH35818, it is determined whether or not a "manufacturer recommended pack" has been selected from the multiple options displayed on the preview effect setting screen 4009, based on the operation detection information related to the various operation detection switches described above. Note that a "manufacturer recommended pack" is a comprehensive set of custom information in which various customization items that can be customized by the player are each set to any desired content.

If a positive judgment is made in step SH35818, the manufacturer recommended pack setting process is performed in step SH35819. After that, the process goes through steps SH35804 and SH35805, and then ends. If a negative judgment is made in step SH35818, the process ends immediately.

When the manufacturer recommended pack setting process of step SH35819 is performed, a manufacturer recommended pack setting screen display process is first executed to display a manufacturer recommended pack setting screen (not shown) on the performance display device 42. This process causes the sub-control device 262 to send a specified display command to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 controls the display to display the manufacturer recommended pack setting screen on the performance display device 42. Then, when the manufacturer recommended pack setting screen is displayed, the preview performance setting screen 4009 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the manufacturer recommended pack setting screen displays three manufacturer recommended packs ("More Schools of Fish Pack," "More Bubbles Pack," and "Balanced Pack") as manufacturer recommended pack options that the player can choose from.

The player first moves the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the manufacturer recommended pack setting screen using the up button 126a or down button 126b of the cross key 126 to select the manufacturer recommended pack they want to select (either "More Schools of Fish Pack," "More Bubbles Pack," or "Balanced Pack"), and then presses the center button (confirmation button) 126e of the cross key 126 to confirm the execution of the manufacturer recommended pack. Of course, it is also possible to return to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category) without selecting any manufacturer recommended pack.

Then, by the player confirming the execution of the manufacturer-recommended pack in this way, an input completion display process is performed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 to display an input completion display, such as "The large school of fish pack has been selected," to indicate that the input of the specified recommended pack selected by the player is complete. The sub-control device 262 then performs an output setting process to update the recommended pack information (such as the value of the recommended pack flag) set in the effect custom information storage area of RAM 553 (see Figure 4-65) to the recommended pack information selected by the player as described above, and the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the menu screen 3000 (or the setting screen for the previous category). However, if the player does not change the specified recommended pack information from the default, or if the player has entered the same information as the default, the same information as the default will be set in the output setting process.

In this embodiment, the default setting is that no manufacturer-recommended packs are set. Furthermore, if any manufacturer-recommended packs (such as a pack with more schools of fish, a pack with more bubbles, or a balanced pack) are set, the contents of that manufacturer-recommended pack take priority, and other custom information, such as the reliability settings for individually set school of fish effects or bubble effects, may be disabled.

As shown in FIG. 4-65, the effect customization information storage area provided in RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 includes a fish school reliability storage area that stores the reliability level of the fish school effect selected by the player, a bubble reliability storage area that stores the reliability level of the bubble effect selected by the player, reach execution flags (Kuroshio reach execution flag, coral reach execution flag, marine reach execution flag) that store whether or not various "super reach effects (including special reach effects)" are executed, a preceding effect execution flag that stores whether or not an "advance effect (continuous preview effect)" is executed, a one-shot announcement appearance rate storage area that stores the appearance rate of a "one-shot announcement effect" when a jackpot fluctuation selected by the player occurs, a cut-in appearance rate storage area that stores the appearance rate of a "cut-in effect" when a "super reach effect (including special reach effect)" selected by the player is executed, and a recommended pack flag that indicates that the player has specified a "manufacturer recommended pack" and its type.

Furthermore, when the player selects "Game History" from the menu items on the menu screen 3000, the game history screen 3005 is displayed on the effect display device 42 (see Figure 4-73). Note that when the game history screen 3005 is displayed, the menu screen 3000 is hidden.

In this embodiment, the game history screen 3005 displays game history information (game data), such as a graph showing changes in income and expenditures as the game progresses, the total number of jackpots for that day, the number of first jackpots, and the current number of starts (number of times the variable display has been executed). Of course, the game history information is not limited to these, and other information may be displayed, such as the number of consecutive jackpots that have been executed without returning to the normal state since the first jackpot (number of consecutive wins). The screen may also be configured to display execution history information related to premium effects and jackpot variable display stored in the game information storage area. This allows the player to perceive the input values customized by the player as if they were reflected in the specified internal control of the pachinko machine 10, while being able to understand how these values have been reflected in the jackpot variable display based on the correlation with the jackpot variable display that was actually executed. As a result, the player may be surprised or delighted by this discrepancy, further enhancing the player's enjoyment.

In gaming halls where gaming machines such as pachinko machines are installed, ambient noises such as in-store announcements (such as in-store background music and announcements) that are constantly played in the hall and sounds emitted from other gaming machines (such as sounds output from speakers and the sound of gaming media being ejected) can be a distraction, making it difficult for players to fully hear the sounds being output from the gaming machine they are playing on, causing discomfort and making it difficult for them to concentrate on their own game.

In response to this, in recent years, consideration has been given to providing gaming machines such as pachinko machines with output terminals (such as earphone jacks) for wired connection of external audio output devices such as earphones or headphones.

This means that even in a noisy environment like an amusement hall, players can listen only to the sound output from the gaming machine they are playing on via earphones or other devices without being distracted by surrounding noise, allowing them to concentrate on their own game. Furthermore, because the gaming machine they are playing on will not output sound to the surrounding area, it also reduces the discomfort felt by players playing nearby.

However, if earphones or other devices are connected to a gaming machine via a wired connection, the connection cable may get in the way when the player is playing the machine, or the presence of the connection cable may be distracting, making it difficult for the player to concentrate on playing the game. Furthermore, if an output terminal such as an earphone jack is provided on the front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that this output terminal may be used to input illegal signals or engage in other fraudulent activities.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the audio played on the pachinko machine 10 can be heard through a BT-compatible device (e.g., earphones 2500) carried by the player, instead of through the speaker SP. This configuration eliminates the need for a cable connecting the gaming machine and the audio output device, reducing the hassle of cables and allowing the player to concentrate on their own game.

More specifically, the system is configured so that a player can connect a BT-compatible device (e.g., earphones 2500) they own to the pachinko machine 10 via BT communication, and listen to the audio output from the pachinko machine 10 via the BT-compatible device. This configuration is described in detail below.

First, we will explain the electrical configuration of the communication system for data communication between the pachinko machine 10 and the earphones 2500. As shown in Figure 4-85, in this embodiment, the system is configured to enable contactless wireless communication between the pachinko machine 10 and the earphones 2500 without a cable connection.

To communicate wirelessly with the earphones 2500, the pachinko machine 10 uses the machine-side BT module 1200 provided within the sub-control device 262.

Here, we will explain in detail the configuration of the table-side BT module 1200. Figure 4-86 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the table-side BT module 1200.

As described above, the base-side BT module 1200 is used to establish a BT communication connection with another BT-compatible device based on the BT communication standard and to perform wireless communication (BT communication) with the BT-compatible device. It includes a control unit 1201 that controls BT communication, an antenna unit 1202 that transmits and receives radio waves for BT communication, and a memory 1203 that serves as a storage unit for storing various information. Here, the "other BT-compatible device" corresponds to the "predetermined terminal device (connectable device)" in this embodiment.

The control unit 1201 is configured using an IC chip (BT chip) equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and is electrically connected to the antenna unit 1202. The control unit 1201 is also electrically connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, RAM 553, etc. of the sub-control unit 262.

The ROM, which serves as the storage unit of the control unit 1201, stores various information necessary for BT communication, such as communication programs and authentication programs based on BT communication standards.

With this configuration, the control unit 1201 has functions such as a receiving unit that detects the current flowing in the antenna unit 1202 (radio waves received by the antenna unit 1202), a demodulating unit that demodulates the signal supplied from the receiving unit, a decoding unit that decodes the signal supplied from the demodulating unit, an input data processing unit that processes data obtained from the decoding unit, an output data processing unit that processes data to be transmitted externally, an encoding unit that encodes data obtained from the output data processing unit, a transmitting unit that sends a current (carrier wave) to the antenna unit 1202 to radiate electromagnetic waves, and a modulation unit that modulates the current flowing from the transmitting unit to the antenna unit 1202 based on the signal supplied from the encoding unit.

The control unit 1201 then controls the sending and receiving of data via BT communication, such as receiving radio waves from other BT-compatible devices and sending radio waves to other BT-compatible devices via the antenna unit 1202.

The control unit 1201 also controls the reading of information from memory 1203 and the writing of information to memory 1203.

In this embodiment, the table-side BT module 1200 is configured to operate using power supplied from the sub-controller 262, and is also capable of rewriting the contents of the memory 1203 based on instructions from the sub-controller 262.

Memory 1203 is composed of non-volatile memory such as EEPROM, from which data can be read and written by the control unit 1201.

Memory 1203 stores various information, including BT device information, which serves as identification information required for the base-side BT module 1200 to establish a BT communication connection (pairing) with other BT-compatible devices. The BT device information may be stored in the ROM of the control unit 1201, for example.

In this embodiment, the device-specific BT device information stored includes the device name of the base-side BT module 1200, the BD address (Bluetooth Device Address) of the base-side BT module 1200, a password (passkey) for establishing a BT communication connection with the base-side BT module 1200, and a profile corresponding to the functions of the base-side BT module 1200.

The BD address is information used to individually identify a BT-compatible device and is set in advance for each device. The password is information used to authenticate a BT-compatible device when establishing a BT communication connection with another BT-compatible device.

With the above configuration, when a BT communication connection is established between the base-side BT module 1200 and another BT-compatible device (the BT module 2510 on the earphone 2500 side, described below), the base-side BT module 1200 can send and receive various data to and from that BT-compatible device.

Note that the configuration of the base-side BT module 1200 (the same applies to the earphone-side BT module 2510 described below) is not limited to the above configuration, and other different configurations may be adopted. For example, a configuration in which the antenna unit 1202 is integrated with the control unit (BT chip) 1201, or a configuration in which the antenna unit 1202 is provided separately from the base-side BT module 1200 may be adopted.

Here we will explain the profiles related to BT-compatible devices such as the base-side BT module 1200.

To enable wireless communication between various devices (electronic devices), Bluetooth defines function type information called "profiles" that specify communication procedures according to the functions of each device. Each Bluetooth-enabled device supports one or more profiles, and for Bluetooth communication to take place between two Bluetooth-enabled devices, the two devices must support the same profile.

BT-compatible devices support basic profiles required for BT communication connections, such as GAP (Generic Access Profile), which is used for device connection, authentication, encryption, etc.

Other profiles supported depending on the capabilities of various BT-compatible devices include A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) for transmitting audio data to audio output devices (such as earphones 2500), and AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) for remote operation.

Therefore, as described below, if the pachinko machine 10 and the BT-compatible device (such as the earphones 2500) both support A2DP, audio data (for example, audio data related to background music or sound effects) stored in the pachinko machine 10 can be output to the BT-compatible device (such as the earphones 2500). The player can then listen to the audio played (streamed) on the pachinko machine 10 via their own BT-compatible device (such as the earphones 2500).

Furthermore, if both the pachinko machine 10 and the BT-compatible device (such as the earphones 2500) support AVRCP, it will also be possible to adjust the volume level of the audio played on the pachinko machine 10, for example, by remote operation from the BT-compatible device (such as the earphones 2500).

In Bluetooth, "classes" are defined according to the maximum output level (maximum output radio wave intensity) of a Bluetooth-compatible device when performing wireless communication. Specifically, the following definitions apply to "Bluetooth Classic."
[Class 1 (Range: approx. 100m)]
100mW (+20dBm) ≥ Output level > 2.5mW (+4dBm)
[Class 2 (Range: approx. 10m)]
2.5mW (+4dBm) ≥ Output level > 1mW (0dBm)
[Class 3 (Range: about 1m)]
1 mW (0 dBm) ≧ output level The base-side BT module 1200 according to this embodiment employs "Class 2."

Furthermore, when BT communication is performed in an amusement hall, if the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the machine-side BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10 is high, radio wave interference or crosstalk may occur, and it may become impossible to output sound properly via the wireless earphones 2500, etc.

There are various possible reasons for this, but as one example, within amusement halls, many pachinko machines 10 are installed side by side on parallel island units, and the aisle space between two opposing island units is narrow enough for just one player to pass through. This means that the densely packed pachinko machines 10 and island units act as obstacles, creating an environment in which radio waves are easily reflected in the enclosed space between the island units, which act as walls. Furthermore, other possible factors include the influence of various radio waves sent and received by wireless LANs (e.g., Wi-Fi) and mobile devices (e.g., smartphones) used within amusement halls, as well as the influence of the numerous electronic devices installed in each pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, in the gaming hall environment described above, if the output level (output radio wave intensity) of the radio waves output from the BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10 is low, when pairing the pachinko machine 10 with a BT-compatible device (such as the earphones 2500), the pachinko machine 10 may not be able to search for the BT-compatible device (such as the earphones 2500) possessed by the player, making it difficult to perform the pairing properly.

In other words, until pairing is established, in order to more reliably detect BT-compatible devices (such as earphones 2500), the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10 needs to be set relatively high. However, if audio data is then output via BT communication at the same output level (output radio wave strength) as during pairing, radio wave interference or crosstalk may occur, preventing proper audio output.

In contrast, in this embodiment, multiple radio wave output levels (output radio wave intensity) are available for output from the BT module 1200, and these can be switched depending on the situation.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the base-side BT module 1200 is configured to be able to switch the output level (output radio wave intensity) of the radio waves output from the antenna unit 1202 between multiple levels (three levels in this embodiment: "strong," "medium," and "weak") within the above-mentioned "Class 2."

For example, in this embodiment, the output level (output radio wave strength) is set to 2.5 mW (+4 dBm) when it is "strong," 2.0 mW (+3 dBm) when it is "medium," and 1.6 mW (+2 dBm) when it is "weak." Of course, this is not limited to three levels, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, the output level (output radio wave strength) may be switchable between two or four or more levels.

In the default setting (initial setting) in this embodiment, the output radio wave strength of the base-side BT module 1200 is set to "medium." Of course, this is not limited to this, and the output radio wave strength of the base-side BT module 1200 may also be set to "strong" by default.

Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the radio wave output level (output radio wave intensity) can be switched between multiple levels within the same "class" as described above, a configuration in which the above-mentioned multiple "classes" can be switched between and by switching between the multiple "classes," the radio wave output level (output radio wave intensity) can be switched between multiple levels.

Next, we will explain in detail the configuration of the earphones 2500 that are capable of wireless communication with the pachinko machine 10.

Earphones 2500 are audio output devices worn by the player in their ears, and consist of earphone 2500L for the left ear and earphone 2500R for the right ear. In this embodiment, earphones 2500 are completely wireless earphones in which the left and right earphones 2500L and 2500R are separate and not connected by a cable.

Furthermore, as will be described in more detail below, the left and right earphones 2500L, 2500R in this embodiment are configured to be able to communicate with each other via Bluetooth. Alternatively, communication between the left and right earphones 2500L, 2500R may be configured to use a wireless communication standard other than Bluetooth, such as NFMI (Near Field Magnetic Induction).

The electrical configuration of the earphones 2500 (2500L, 2500R) is described in detail below. Figure 4-87 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the earphones 2500 (2500L, 2500R).

Note that, of the pair of left and right earphones 2500L, 2500R, the earphone 2500L that can be inserted into the player's left ear and the earphone 2500R that can be inserted into the player's right ear have substantially the same internal configuration. Therefore, in Figure 4-87, the internal configurations of the earphones 2500L and 2500R are given the same reference numerals, and in the following description, when it is not necessary to distinguish between the earphones 2500L and 2500R, they will simply be referred to as earphone 2500.

Each earphone 2500 (2500L, 2500R) includes a control unit 2501, memory 2502, operation unit 2503, speaker 2504, power supply unit 2505, and BT module (hereinafter referred to as the "earphone-side BT module") 2510, and these components are electrically connected via a bus line.

The control unit 2501 includes a CPU that controls the overall operation of the earphone 2500, a ROM that serves as a storage unit for storing control programs and fixed value data for causing the CPU to execute various processes, and a RAM that serves as a storage unit for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM.

Memory 2502 is composed of non-volatile memory, etc., and temporarily stores received data (e.g., audio data) received from the pachinko machine 10 and transmitted data (e.g., control data related to volume adjustment) to be transmitted to the pachinko machine 10.

The operation unit 2503 is composed of a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the side of the earphone 2500, and is configured to allow the player to touch and operate it with their finger, etc. This allows it to accept specified input operations from the player and execute various processes.

For example, in this embodiment, the operation of pressing and holding the operation unit 2503 of the right earphone 2500R once corresponds to the operation of "turning the power on (putting the earphone in pairing standby mode)," and the operation of pressing and holding the operation unit 2503 of the left earphone 2500L once corresponds to the operation of "turning the power off (disconnecting the pairing)."

Furthermore, the operation of quickly tapping the operation unit 2503 of the right earphone 2500R twice corresponds to the operation of "increasing the volume by one level," and the operation of quickly tapping the operation unit 2503 of the left earphone 2500L twice corresponds to the operation of "decreasing the volume by one level." Of course, the operation items and operation methods are not limited to these, and other configurations may be adopted.

The speaker 2504 outputs audio under the control of the control unit 2501. The control unit 2501 converts audio data received via the earphone-side BT module 2510 into an audio signal and supplies the audio signal to an amplifier built into the speaker 2504, thereby outputting a specified sound from the speaker 2504.

The power supply unit 2505 supplies power to each part of the earphone 2500 and is composed of a rechargeable secondary battery or the like.

The earphone-side BT module 2510 is used to establish a BT communication connection with another BT-compatible device (in this embodiment, the machine-side BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10) based on the BT communication standard, and to perform wireless communication (BT communication) with the BT-compatible device. It includes a control unit 2511 that controls BT communication, an antenna unit 2512 that transmits and receives radio waves for BT communication, and a memory 2513 that stores various information (see Figure 4-86).

As shown in Figure 4-86, the basic configuration of the earphone-side BT module 2510 (configuration of the control unit 2511, antenna unit 2512, memory 2513, etc.) is the same as the basic configuration of the stand-side BT module 1200 (configuration of the control unit 1201, antenna unit 1202, memory 1203, etc.), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Note that the earphone-side BT module 2510 according to this embodiment uses "Class 2," just like the stand-side BT module 1200.

The memory 2513 stores various information, including BT device information, which serves as identification information required for the earphone-side BT module 2510 to establish a BT communication connection (pairing) with another BT-compatible device (the stand-side BT module 1200). The BT device information may be stored in the ROM of the control unit 2501, for example.

In this embodiment, the device-specific BT device information stored includes the device name of the earphone-side BT module 2510, the BD address of the earphone-side BT module 2510, a password (passkey) for establishing a BT communication connection with the earphone-side BT module 2510, and a profile corresponding to the functions of the earphone-side BT module 2510.

The earphone-side BT module 2510 of the earphone 2500, like the machine-side BT module 1200, supports the A2DP and AVRCP profiles, and by establishing a BT communication connection (pairing) with the machine-side BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10 based on these profiles, it is possible to receive audio data and transmit control data.

In the earphones 2500 according to this embodiment, the earphone 2500R for the right ear serves as a parent unit capable of communicating with the pachinko machine 10, and the earphone 2500L for the left ear serves as a child unit capable of communicating with the earphone 2500R for the right ear. Of course, this is not limiting, and the earphone 2500L for the left ear may serve as a parent unit and the earphone 2500R for the right ear may serve as a child unit. Alternatively, both earphones 2500L and 2500R may each be configured to be able to communicate independently with the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200).

With the above configuration, in this embodiment, the right-ear earphone 2500R (BT module 2510R) and the pachinko machine 10 (machine-side BT module 1200) are connected (paired) via BT communication, enabling BT communication between the two.

In addition, the right earphone 2500R (BT module 2510R) and the left earphone 2500L (BT module 2510L) are connected (paired) via BT communication, enabling BT communication between them. Note that the BT communication connection between the right earphone 2500R and the left earphone 2500L is set up in advance, so the player does not need to set up the BT communication connection before starting use.

When the right earphone 2500R receives audio data from the pachinko machine 10, it transmits the left channel data of the received audio data to the left earphone 2500L (BT module 2510L) and outputs the right channel data of the audio data from its own speaker 2504R.

On the other hand, when the left earphone 2500L receives left channel data from the right earphone 2500R (BT module 2510R), it outputs the left channel audio data from its own speaker 2504L.

As a result, the right earphone 2500R (speaker 2504R) outputs audio for the right ear obtained by converting the right channel data, and the left earphone 2500L (speaker 2504L) outputs audio for the left ear obtained by converting the left channel data.

Note that the earphones 2500 according to this embodiment are configured to be turned on when the player operates the operation unit 2503, but this is not limiting. For example, the earphones 2500 may be configured to be turned on automatically when removed from a designated storage case (charging case).

Furthermore, when the earphones 2500 are powered on, they enter a pairing standby mode (standby state) in which they can receive inquiry signals from the outside. During pairing standby mode, when a BT communication connection (pairing) has not been established, the BT connection process described below is periodically executed.

Next, we will explain in detail the BT communication that can take place between the pachinko machine 10 and the earphones 2500.

First, the process for establishing a BT communication connection (pairing) between the pachinko machine 10 and the earphones 2500 will be explained with reference to the drawings.

Figure 4-88 is a flowchart showing the flow of the wireless earphone setting process (step SH5749), which is the BT connection process executed on the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) side. Figure 4-90 is a flowchart showing the flow of the BT connection process executed on the earphone 2500 side.

In the wireless earphone setting process, the sub-control device 262 first determines in step SH7501 whether the base-side BT module 1200 is already in a BT communication connection state (pairing) by referring to the BT connection flag set in a specified area of RAM 553.

If the answer here is positive, i.e., if the device is already in a BT communication connection state (pairing), step SH7502 performs a disconnection process to disconnect BT communication, and then the process proceeds to step SH7503.

Specifically, in the BT communication disconnection processing of step SH7502, the BT connection in progress flag is set to OFF, the BT device information stored in the connected device information storage area (described later) in RAM 553 is erased, and the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the antenna unit 1202 of the base-side BT module 1200 is switched from the output radio wave strength "weak" state, which is the output radio wave strength during the BT communication connection state, to the default setting of output radio wave strength "medium." The output radio wave strength setting value is stored in the memory 1203 of the base-side BT module 1200 and is changed as appropriate. Here, the output radio wave strength "weak" state (weak radio wave state) corresponds to the "low output state" in this embodiment.

Instead of the above configuration, the output radio wave strength of the base-side BT module 1200 may be set to "strong" by default. Furthermore, under such a configuration, the output radio wave strength state of "medium" may be set to "low output state (weak radio wave state)."

As will be described later, the BT communication connection state may be disconnected (released), for example, when a BT disconnection request is made by the player (earphone 2500) (when the power is turned off), or when the player (earphone 2500) moves beyond the BT communication range of the pachinko machine 10 and radio waves from the earphone 2500 can no longer be detected.

However, players usually decide which gaming machine to play on depending on their gaming situation (for example, the amount of time available, the amount of money they have, whether they are interested, etc.). Therefore, as the player's gaming situation changes, the gaming machine they play on within the gaming hall will also change. In other words, players will not necessarily continue playing on the same gaming machine within the gaming hall for an extended period of time, but may move seats as appropriate and play on different gaming machines multiple times.

For example, if a player is playing at a given pachinko machine 10 with the earphones 2500 connected via BT communication, and then moves to a nearby pachinko machine 10 to play there without disconnecting the BT communication connection, there is a risk that the BT communication connection will not be disconnected and the BT communication connection state will be maintained.

In such cases, depending on the configuration, it may be possible that another player attempting to play a new game on the specified pachinko machine 10 will be unable to establish a BT communication connection with that specified pachinko machine 10. As a result, this could significantly reduce the player's interest.

In contrast, when a new wireless earphone setting process is started as described above, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be prevented by performing the BT communication disconnection process in step SH7502.

Now, if the result of step SH7501 is negative, i.e., if no BT communication connection is currently established with any BT-compatible device, the process proceeds directly to step SH7503.

After the BT communication disconnection process (step SH7502) is performed, or if the BT communication connection is not in progress (if a negative determination is made in step SH7501), i.e., if the BT communication connection is not currently in progress with any BT-compatible device, a search process is executed in step SH7503. This search process is used to search for BT-compatible devices that can be connected (paired) with the base-side BT module 1200 via BT communication.

Specifically, in the search process of step SH7503, the sub-controller 262 first instructs the base-side BT module 1200 to switch the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the antenna unit 1202 of the base-side BT module 1200 to the reference output level (reference radio wave strength).

In this embodiment, the output signal strength "strong," which is the output level when establishing a BT communication connection, is set as the reference output level (reference signal strength). Therefore, in this embodiment, an instruction is given to the base-side BT module 1200 to switch from the default setting of output signal strength "medium" to output signal strength "strong," which is the output level when establishing a BT communication connection.

The base-side BT module 1200 stores the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from its antenna unit 1202 in its memory 1203. Therefore, when an instruction to switch the output radio wave strength is received from the sub-control device 262, the contents stored in memory 1203 are rewritten.

In addition, when executing the search process of step SH7502, instead of switching from the default setting of "medium" output radio wave strength to the reference output level of "strong" output radio wave strength, it is also possible to set the output radio wave strength of the machine-side BT module 1200 to the reference output level of "strong" in advance, for example, when the sub-control device 262 is started (when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on).

Of course, if the default setting of the machine-side BT module 1200 is the output radio wave strength "strong", which is the reference output level (including when the output radio wave strength is reset to the reference output level by the BT communication disconnection process in step SH7502 above), or if the output radio wave strength is set to the reference output level "strong" in advance when the sub-control device 262 mentioned above is started up, the output radio wave strength switching process in the search process in step SH7503 will be omitted.

Next, the sub-control device 262 instructs the base-side BT module 1200 to search for BT-compatible devices in the vicinity (within a specified radio wave reachable range) with which it can communicate. This causes the base-side BT module 1200 to broadcast an inquiry signal (e.g., an inquiry packet) via the antenna unit 1202 at the output radio wave strength set as described above to "strong."

If, in an environment such as an amusement hall, the pachinko machine 10 were to search for a BT-compatible device held by a player (when displaying multiple device names corresponding to multiple specified BT-compatible devices on the performance display device 42), and the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 were reduced, the pachinko machine 10 would not be able to search for the BT-compatible device held by the player, and it might be difficult to properly establish a BT communication connection between the pachinko machine 10 and the specified BT-compatible device.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 searches for connectable BT-compatible devices, it is configured to output an inquiry signal at the highest output level, the output radio wave intensity "strong." This makes it possible to detect more BT-compatible devices located over a wider area and more reliably detect BT-compatible devices owned by players.

As such, it is desirable that the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 controlled by the machine-side BT module 1200 can be set more precisely depending on the situation. As in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 searches for BT-compatible devices possessed by the player (when displaying multiple device names corresponding to multiple specified BT-compatible devices on the performance display device 42), it would be more convenient if it could output at the highest output level, output radio wave strength "strong."

The BT-compatible device (such as the earphone 2500) that receives the inquiry signal then transmits a search response signal (e.g., an FHS packet) containing some or all of its own BT device information to the base-side BT module 1200, as described below.

The search response signal according to this embodiment includes BT device information (the device name, BD address, password, and profile of the BT-compatible device). However, the configuration is not limited to this. Regarding the profile, for example, after receiving a search response signal in response to the inquiry signal, the profile may be acquired by outputting a new call signal or the like to the BT-compatible device based on the acquired BD address. Furthermore, the password of the BT-compatible device may also be acquired from the BT-compatible device when a BT connection request is made from the BT-compatible device, as described below.

Then, in step SH7504, the sub-control device 262 determines whether a search response signal corresponding to the inquiry signal has been received from a nearby BT-compatible device. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH7510.

On the other hand, if step SH7504 returns a positive result, i.e., if a search response signal is received from a nearby BT-compatible device, then in step SH7505, the BT device information contained in the search response signal is stored in a predetermined search response device storage area in RAM 553. At this time, the BT device information is stored in chronological order in the order in which it was received.

Then, in step SH7506, an extraction process is performed to extract BT-compatible devices capable of audio output.

For example, in large amusement halls and other amusement facilities where many players play, these players will have many BT-compatible devices capable of BT communication (not only audio output devices such as wireless earphones, but also smartphones, tablet devices, laptops, etc.). As will be described later, if all of these were listed as selection candidates and displayed on the performance display device 42, the player would not be able to establish a BT communication connection (pairing) unless they found the device name corresponding to the BT-compatible device they possess from the vast number of BT-compatible device names, which could result in a significant amount of time being required to establish a BT communication connection.

In response to this, by extracting only BT-compatible devices that support profiles required for audio output, such as A2DP, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as those described above when executing the selection list display process (step SH7507) described below, thereby improving convenience for players.

Specifically, in this embodiment, based on the profile of the BT device information stored in the search response device storage area, BT-compatible devices that support profiles required for audio data communication control, such as A2DP, a profile for audio distribution, and AVRCP, a profile for audio remote control, are extracted.

In the following step SH7507, a selection list display process is executed to display a list of the device names of the BT-compatible devices extracted in step SH7506 on the performance display device 42. As a result, only BT-compatible devices capable of delivering audio streams, such as wireless earphones, are displayed in a list on the performance display device 42.

If the sub-control device 262 displays the device names corresponding to all BT-compatible devices on the effect display device 42, the player would have to select the necessary device names from a huge number of device names, including unnecessary ones, which could significantly reduce convenience for the player.

In contrast, as in this embodiment, convenience can be improved by selectively displaying in a specific order, from among device names corresponding to multiple types of BT-compatible devices, device names corresponding to at least certain BT-compatible devices related to the output of audio data (for example, audio-capable devices such as wireless earphones 2500 that support profiles required for audio output, such as A2DP).

Therefore, the "device name of the BT-compatible device" corresponds to "terminal information" in this embodiment. The device name of the BT-compatible device may be a default device name set in advance on the BT-compatible device, or a user-defined device name set by the player.

Here, the connection setting screen 4050 (see Figure 4-89) displayed on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 displays a list of "connectable device names," which are the device names of the BT-compatible devices extracted in step SH7506, as selection candidates. Therefore, the "display unit 42a of the performance display device 42" corresponds to the "predetermined display unit" in this embodiment.

However, in this embodiment, instead of displaying the device names of all BT-compatible devices extracted in step SH7506, only a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) of device names are displayed on the connection settings screen 4050 in chronological order, starting from the most recent device name with the most recent discovery time, from top to bottom.

As mentioned above, in an amusement hall where many players play, there is a high probability that these players will own a large number of specific BT-compatible devices (devices capable of outputting audio, such as wireless earphones 2500), and there is a high probability that there will be a considerable number of audio output devices owned by other players around the player (within a radius of about 10 meters).

For this reason, even if the types of BT-compatible devices displayed on the connection settings screen 4050 are limited to audio output devices such as wireless earphones using a profile as described above, and the number of device names of BT-compatible devices displayed on the connection settings screen 4050 is reduced, there is a high possibility that the device names of a considerable number of BT-compatible devices will still be listed and displayed on the connection settings screen 4050.

If all of these options were listed as selection candidates, the player would be unable to establish a BT communication connection unless they could find the device name corresponding to the specific BT-compatible device they own from the vast number of device names corresponding to specific BT-compatible devices, which could result in a significant amount of time being required to establish a BT communication connection.

In addition, many of the BT-compatible device names displayed in the selection list are similar, making it very difficult for a player to identify the earphones 2500 they own from the selection list.

In contrast, if the configuration is such that the latest device name with the most recent discovery time is displayed at the top of the selection candidates (four connectable device names) displayed on the connection settings screen 4050 as described above, for example, when the connection settings screen 4050 is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 and a player viewing this turns on their BT-compatible device (e.g., earphones 2500) (pairing standby mode), this will be detected by the sub-control device 262 (step SH7504), and their BT-compatible device (e.g., earphones 2500) will be displayed at the top of the selection candidates (selection list) displayed on the connection settings screen 4050. As a result, the player can extremely easily select their BT-compatible device (e.g., earphones 2500) from the selection candidates displayed on the connection settings screen 4050.

To further ensure the above-mentioned effect, the connection settings screen 4050 may be configured to display advice such as "Turn off your earphones and then turn them back on" to display the player's BT-compatible device at the top of the selection list.

In this way, if the device names corresponding to all of the specified BT-compatible devices (devices capable of audio output, such as the wireless earphones 2500) detected by the sub-control device 262 were displayed on the effect display device 42, the player would have to select the necessary device names from a huge number of device names, including unnecessary device names, which could significantly reduce convenience for the player. However, as in this embodiment, when displaying the device names of multiple BT-compatible devices on the effect display device 42, the device names corresponding to a predetermined number of specified BT-compatible devices (devices capable of audio output, such as the wireless earphones 2500) are selectively displayed in a specific order, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and improving convenience for the player.

The display format of the selection candidates (selection list) displayed on the connection settings screen 4050 is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, the selection candidates may be displayed in chronological order from bottom to top, starting with the most recent device name with the most recent discovery time, such that the name of the most recent device with the most recent discovery time is displayed at the bottom of the selection candidates (four connectable device names) displayed on the connection settings screen 4050. Also, in the configuration described above, the selection candidates (four connectable device names) are displayed in a list aligned vertically on the connection settings screen 4050, but the selection candidates (four connectable device names) may also be displayed in a list aligned horizontally. Furthermore, under this configuration, the selection candidates may be displayed in chronological order from left to right or right to left, starting with the most recent device name with the most recent discovery time.

The connection settings screen 4050 also displays a cursor 3100 as instruction confirmation information for specifying a connection target from among the selection candidates, as well as various icons 5001, 5002 (icon 5001 corresponding to the selection buttons and icon 5002 corresponding to the selection button) as instruction confirmation information corresponding to input of instruction information to the sub-control device 262, i.e., operation of the selection buttons (up button 126a, down button 126b, left button 126c, right button 126d) on the cross key 126 by the player to move the cursor 3100, or operation of the confirmation button (center button 126e) on the cross key 126 by the player to select the selection candidate specified by the cursor 3100 as the connection target.

In addition, the connection settings screen 4050 may be configured to display a message such as "Please select the device to pair."

With this configuration, the player moves the displayed cursor 3100 up and down on the connection settings screen 4050 by operating the up button 126a or down button 126b of the directional pad 126 to select the device to be connected (such as the earphones 2500 that the player is wearing), and then presses the center button (decision button) 126e of the directional pad 126 to select the device specified by the cursor 3100 as the device to be connected.

Then, in step SH7510, the sub-control device 262 determines, based on the operation detection information of the various operation detection switches related to the cross key 126, whether a button operation input has been made to select and confirm a specific BT-compatible device (e.g., the earphones 2500) as the device to be connected from the selection list displayed on the connection settings screen 4050. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH7515.

Note that if the connection setting screen 4050 is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 20 seconds) and the selection of the above-mentioned connection target device is not confirmed, the wireless earphone setting process (step SH5749) may be terminated.

On the other hand, if a specific BT-compatible device is selected and confirmed from the selection list displayed on the connection setting screen 4050 (if a positive judgment is made in step SH7510), the sub-control device 262 temporarily stores BT equipment information related to that BT-compatible device (e.g., earphones 2500) in a temporary storage area provided in RAM 553 in step SH7511.

In the following step SH7512, the sub-controller 262 performs processing to switch the output level (output radio wave intensity) of the radio waves output from the antenna unit 1202 of the table-side BT module 1200.

As described above, with a configuration that allows the radio wave output level (output radio wave strength) to be switched between multiple levels, it is also possible to switch the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10 to the BT-compatible device (such as the earphones 2500) with which pairing has been established, in order to prevent interference, etc. from occurring after pairing has been established.

However, the BT communication standard stipulates that the radio wave output level (output radio wave strength) of a BT-compatible device (such as the base-side BT module 1200) can only be changed when the BT communication is not connected (not paired). Therefore, if the radio wave output level (output radio wave strength) is forcibly changed when the BT communication is connected (paired), the BT communication connection will be forcibly disconnected unintentionally, resulting in a disconnected state.

In other words, if the radio wave output level (output radio wave strength) of the machine-side BT module 1200 is changed after a BT communication connection (pairing) has been established, the pairing will be canceled and the BT communication connection will be cut off. In order to resume BT communication, pairing will have to be performed again, which will require the output radio wave strength of the machine-side BT module 1200 to be increased again, resulting in a circular process that could significantly reduce convenience for players.

In contrast, in this embodiment, in step SH7512, the output level (output radio wave intensity) of the radio waves output from the base-side BT module 1200 is switched, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem.

Specifically, the sub-control device 262 instructs the base-side BT module 1200 to switch the radio wave output level (output radio wave strength) from the reference output level (reference radio wave strength) of "strong," which is the output level when establishing a BT communication connection (pairing), to the output level (output radio wave strength) during a BT communication connection state, which is "weak."

If audio data is output via a BT communication connection in an environment such as an amusement hall, if the output radio wave strength of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 is high, radio wave interference or crosstalk may occur, making it impossible to output audio properly via a BT-compatible device (such as the wireless earphones 2500).

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the sub-control device 262 detects input of a selection operation for a specific BT compatible device, it stores BT device information capable of identifying the specific BT compatible device being detected (e.g., wireless earphone 2500), and after the BT device information is stored, it is configured to switch the output radio wave strength so that a weak radio wave state is executed in which audio data is output at an output radio wave strength (in this embodiment, output radio wave strength "weak") that is lower than the output radio wave strength (in this embodiment, output radio wave strength "strong") at the time the selection operation for the specific BT compatible device was detected.

As such, according to this embodiment, after a BT communication connection is established, the BT communication connection is performed in a weak radio wave state, making it less likely that radio wave interference or crosstalk will occur, and audio can be output more optimally via a BT-compatible device (such as the wireless earphones 2500) connected via BT communication.

In particular, this embodiment is highly convenient because when the low output state (weak radio wave state) is activated, audio data is output at the lowest output level, which is the output radio wave intensity of "weak."

As such, it is desirable that the output level (output radio wave intensity) of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 controlled by the machine-side BT module 1200 can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if, as in this embodiment, the minimum amount of audio data could be output when a selection confirmation operation for a specified BT-compatible device is input to the pachinko machine 10.

As a result, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment outputs radio waves at a higher output level (in this embodiment, output radio wave strength "strong") to search for BT-compatible devices to be displayed as selection candidates on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42. This enables the detection of more BT-compatible devices located over a wider area, and more reliably detects BT-compatible devices (e.g., wireless earphones 2500) owned by the player. Meanwhile, after the sub-control device 262 detects the input of a selection confirmation operation for a specific BT-compatible device, the output radio wave strength is switched to a lower output level (in this embodiment, output radio wave strength "weak") and audio data is output to the connected specific BT-compatible device (e.g., wireless earphones 2500). This reduces radio wave interference and crosstalk, and enables audio data to be output preferably via the specific BT-compatible device.

In the following step SH7513, the sub-control device 262 outputs its own BT device information (the device name, BD address, password, and profile of the base-side BT module 1200) to the BT-compatible device (the earphones 2500 in this embodiment) corresponding to the BT device information temporarily stored in the temporary storage area via the base-side BT module 1200.

Next, in step SH7515, the sub-control device 262 monitors the base-side BT module 1200 and determines whether or not a BT connection request has been received from the outside (in this embodiment, whether or not a BT connection request has been received from the earphone 2500 that sent its own BT device information in step SH7513 above). If a negative determination is made here, the process ends.

In addition, when determining whether a BT connection request has been made in step SH7515, if it is determined that a BT connection request has been made, a predetermined connection request flag may be set to on, and thereafter, whether a BT connection request has been made may be determined by taking into consideration the connection request flag.

Also, as described below, the BT connection request received from the earphone 2500 includes the BT device information of the earphone 2500 (the device name, BD address, password, and profile of the earphone-side BT module 2510).

Then, if a BT connection request is received from the earphone 2500 (earphone-side BT module 2510) (step SH7515: YES), the sub-control device 262 stores the BT device information of the earphone 2500 included in the BT connection request in a connected device information storage area provided in RAM 553, sends a BT connection response to the earphone 2500 (step SH7516), sets a predetermined BT connection in-progress flag, establishes a BT communication connection, and starts BT communication control (step SH7517). Then, this process ends.

Normally, a BT-compatible device (e.g., the stand-side BT module 1200) performs a specific authentication process when sending a BT connection response to a communication partner device (e.g., the earphone-side BT module 2510). This authentication process complies with the BT standard, so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but in short, the BT-compatible device determines whether the password received in response to a BT connection request from the communication partner device matches the password it has stored. If the two passwords match, the BT-compatible device sends a BT connection response; however, if the two passwords do not match, the process ends without sending a BT connection response.

In addition, under the BT communication standard, if the authentication process is successful, a link key is created and saved, and during the BT communication connection, encrypted communication is carried out using this link key and an encryption key (random number) of a specified bit length. When the BT communication connection (pairing) is terminated, the link key is automatically discarded, so the next time you use the device, you will need to reconnect (pair) via BT communication.

Meanwhile, when the earphone 2500 (control unit 2501) enters pairing standby mode, it periodically executes the BT connection process shown in FIG. 4-90, periodically monitoring the earphone-side BT module 2510 and determining whether an inquiry signal has been input from the outside (step SH8001). If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH8003.

Then, when an inquiry signal is received from the sub-control device 262 (machine-side BT module 1200) of the pachinko machine 10 (step SH8001: YES), the earphone 2500 (control unit 2501) transmits a search response signal (e.g., an FHS packet) containing some or all of its own BT device information to the sub-control device 262 (machine-side BT module 1200) in step SH8002. Then, the process proceeds to step SH8003. As mentioned above, the search response signal according to this embodiment includes BT device information (the device name, BD address, password, and profile of the earphone-side BT module 2510).

In the following step SH8003, the earphone 2500 (control unit 2501) determines whether the earphone BT module 2510 has received BT device information (device name, BD address, password, and profile of the stand-side BT module 1200) output from the sub-control device 262 (stand-side BT module 1200). Note that here, the earphone BT module 2510 determines whether it has acquired BT device information by taking into account a predetermined flag that is set when it receives BT device information. If the determination here is negative, the process proceeds directly to step SH8005.

When the BT device information is acquired (step SH8003: YES), the BT device information is written to memory 2502, and a BT connection request is made from the earphone-side BT module 2510 to the sub-control device 262 (stand-side BT module 1200) using the BT device information (step SH8004).

The BT connection request output here includes BT device information for the earphone 2500 (device name, BD address, password, and profile of the earphone-side BT module 2510).

In the following step SH8005, the earphone 2500 (control unit 2501) determines whether the earphone-side BT module 2510 has received a BT connection response corresponding to the BT connection request from the sub-control device 262 (stand-side BT module 1200).

Here, if the earphone 2500 (control unit 2501) does not receive a BT connection response from the sub-control device 262 (table-side BT module 1200), it executes processing to deal with the inability to establish a BT connection, such as by outputting an error sound indicating "connection failed" from the speaker 2504 of the earphone 2500 (step SH8006), and terminates this processing.

In contrast, if a BT connection response is received from the sub-control device 262 (machine-side BT module 1200) of the pachinko machine 10 (step SH8005: YES), a predetermined BT connection flag is set, a BT communication connection is established, and BT communication control is started (step SH8007).

When starting BT communication control, the sub-control device 262 performs processing to set the external output device, earphones (earphones 2500), as the output device to be used. Specifically, the value of the output device information (audio output device setting flag) stored in the audio setting area (output device setting area) of RAM 553 as information related to game specifications is set to a value corresponding to "earphones" (for example, "02").

Next, the BT communication processing performed between the pachinko machine 10 and the earphones 2500 when they are in a BT communication connection state will be described with reference to the drawings. Here, the "earphones 2500" corresponds to the "predetermined connected device external to the connected performance control unit" in this embodiment.

Figure 4-91 is a flowchart showing the BT communication processing performed on the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) side during a BT communication connection, and Figure 4-92 is a flowchart showing the BT communication processing performed on the earphone 2500 (control unit 2501) side during a BT communication connection.

As shown in Figure 4-91, in the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262), the sub-control device 262 first determines whether or not a BT communication connection is in progress, taking into consideration the BT connection flag (step SH7101). If a negative determination is made here, the process ends.

On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH7101, a determination is made in step SH7102 as to whether or not the specified output data is stored in the output information storage area of RAM 553. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH7104.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH7102, the output data is transmitted to the earphone-side BT module 2510 of the earphone 2500 via the base-side BT module 1200 (step SH7103).

For example, if audio data (audio stream) is stored in RAM 553 as output data, music data (music stream) is sent to the earphone side BT module 2510 based on A2DP, one of the profiles supported by both.

Next, in step SH7104, the sub-control device 262 determines whether the input data received from the earphone 2500 is stored in the memory 1203 of the base-side BT module 1200. If the determination is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH7104, the input data is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 553 (e.g., a user-associated area) (step SH7105), and this processing ends.

For example, when volume level control information (predetermined operation information instructing to increase or decrease the volume, such as level up information or level down information) is received as input data from the earphone-side BT module 2510 based on AVRCP, one of the profiles supported by both, the sub-control device 262 changes the volume level value set in the volume level setting area of RAM 553 to a value that conforms to the volume level control information. Then, in the above-mentioned user-responsive processing, the sub-control device 262 changes the output volume level based on the volume level value set in the above-mentioned volume level setting area.

In addition, the information regarding the volume level transmitted from the earphone-side BT module 2510 to the stand-side BT module 1200 may not be the volume level control information (level-up information, one-level-down information, etc.) described above, but may be volume level information (numeric information indicating the volume level) that directly indicates the value of the volume level to be set.

Even if a configuration is in place where the audio data output from the pachinko machine 10 can be heard via a BT-compatible device (e.g., wireless earphones 2500) owned by the player, if the BT-compatible device does not allow customization operations related to the audio output, such as volume adjustment operations, the player may be forced to perform complex procedures, such as displaying a specified volume setting screen on the performance display device 42 of the pachinko machine 10 and adjusting the volume, which could result in the player being forced to perform time-consuming and cumbersome operations. Ultimately, there is a risk that players will be put off by the audio output customization function. In addition, convenience for players may be significantly reduced, as customization operations related to the audio output (the customization screen cannot be displayed) can only be performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in standby mode (non-variable display).

In contrast, according to this embodiment, during a BT communication connection performed in a weak radio wave state, it is possible to input predetermined operation information such as volume level control information from a predetermined BT-compatible device (e.g., wireless earphone 2500) connected to the sub-control device 262.

This allows customization operations related to audio output, such as volume adjustment (volume up or volume down), to be performed quickly and easily by operating the operation unit on the BT-compatible device (such as the operation unit 2503 on the earphones 2500) without using the operation unit on the pachinko machine 10 (such as the various buttons 126a to 126e on the cross key 126).

As a result, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed, improving convenience for players. Furthermore, the sound output from a specific BT-compatible device (e.g., wireless earphones 2500) can be adjusted to a more suitable output state (more suitable volume, etc.) for the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 4-92, in the earphone 2500, the control unit 2501 first determines whether or not a BT communication connection is in progress, taking into consideration the BT connection flag (step SH8101). If the determination is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step SH8101, a determination is made in step SH8102 as to whether or not the specified output data is stored in the output information storage area of memory 2502. If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds directly to step SH8104.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SH8102, the output data is transmitted to the machine-side BT module 1200 of the pachinko machine 10 via the earphone-side BT module 2510 (step SH8103).

For example, if volume level control information (or volume level information) is stored in memory 2502 as output data, the volume level control information is sent to the table-side BT module 1200 based on AVRCP, one of the profiles supported by both.

In this embodiment, as described above, when a player operates the operation unit 2503 of the earphones 2500 to adjust the volume (volume up or volume down), volume level control information serving as predetermined operation information based on that operation is stored as predetermined output data in the output information storage area of the memory 2502.

Next, in step SH8104, the control unit 2501 determines whether the input data received from the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the memory 2513 of the earphone-side BT module 2510. If a negative determination is made here, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the answer is affirmative in step SH8104, the input data is stored in memory 2502 (step SH8105), and this processing ends.

For example, when audio data (audio stream) is received as input data from the base-side BT module 1200 based on A2DP, one of the profiles supported by both, the earphone 2500 (control unit 2501) sequentially converts the data into an audio signal and supplies the audio signal to an amplifier built into the speaker 2504, thereby outputting (streaming) the audio from the speaker 2504.

As a result, if a player selects earphones 2500 as the output device, the player can listen to the sound that was previously output from the speaker SP of the pachinko machine 10 through the earphones 2500 that the player carries with them instead of the speaker SP.

In this way, according to this embodiment, when connecting the sub-control device 262 to an external audio output device (earphones 2500) to output audio in a suitable manner, audio output control can be performed in a manner that is highly convenient for the player.

Next, the disconnection process for disconnecting the BT communication connection (pairing) between the pachinko machine 10 and the earphones 2500 will be explained with reference to the drawings.

Figure 4-93 is a flowchart showing the BT communication connection disconnection process performed on the earphone 2500 (control unit 2501) side, and Figure 4-94 is a flowchart showing the BT communication connection disconnection process performed on the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control unit 262) side.

As shown in Figure 4-93, on the earphone 2500 side, first in step SH7301, the player operates the operation unit 2503 of the earphone 2500 to turn off the power (pairing), causing the earphone BT module 2510 to issue a BT disconnection request to the pachinko machine 10 (machine BT module 1200), and in the following step SH7302, the BT connection in progress flag is set to off, disconnecting BT communication.

In response to this, the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 periodically monitors the machine-side BT module 1200 during the above-mentioned user response processing, and as shown in FIG. 4-94, first, in step SH8301, determines whether or not a BT disconnection request has been made from the earphone 2500 (earphone-side BT module 2510) to the machine-side BT module 1200. If a negative determination is made here (step SH8301: NO), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a BT disconnection request has been made (step SH8301: YES), in the following step SH8302, the BT connection flag is set to OFF, the output radio wave strength of the machine-side BT module 1200 is returned to the default setting ("Medium" in this embodiment), and then BT communication is disconnected.

In addition, if the player (earphones 2500) moves beyond the BT communication range from the pachinko machine 10, and radio waves from the earphones 2500 are no longer detected, and it is determined that BT communication is not possible, the sub-control device 262 may be configured to consider that a BT disconnection request has been made, and perform the same processing as when the above-mentioned BT disconnection request has been made, thereby disconnecting BT communication.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the custom information stored in the audio setting area of the user area (volume level information stored in the volume level setting area and output device information stored in the output device setting area) is configured to return to the default setting after the BT communication connection is disconnected or after a predetermined time has elapsed since the disconnection. Alternatively, the custom information may be configured to remain without being erased even after the BT communication connection is disconnected.

The present invention is not limited to the contents of the fourth embodiment described above, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the fourth embodiment, or some or all of them may be applied in any combination to the fourth embodiment. It is also possible to combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the fourth embodiment in any combination.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is a first type gaming machine in which, when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery (variable symbol game) based on a ball entering a predetermined starting ball entry means (e.g., first starting ball entry section 33WA or second starting ball entry section 33WB), a jackpot state (direct hit jackpot) occurs in which a predetermined variable ball entry means (e.g., variable ball entry device 32A) opens and closes.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be implemented as other types of pachinko machines that award predetermined profit games (award profits), different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment. Furthermore, the present invention may also be implemented as various gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as arrange ball machines and mahjong ball machines.

Here, "profit games (awarded profits)" may be any games that bring profits to the player, and may be any games that can realize the gist of the technical idea of the fourth embodiment. For example, prize ball games in which prize balls are paid out (including the awarding of virtual prize balls) when a game ball fired by a player lands in a predetermined ball entry means, prize ball games in which prize balls are paid out (including the awarding of virtual prize balls) when a game ball fired by a player lands in a variable ball entry means that is in a ball entry readiness state based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, lottery games in which a predetermined lottery is executed when a game ball fired by a player lands in a predetermined ball entry means, and games in which a game ball fired by a player lands in a predetermined ball entry means. Examples include action games in which a predetermined moving means (such as a movable device or variable ball entry means) operates when a ball is fired by the player and enters a predetermined ball entry means, performance games in which a predetermined performance function (such as a display means, light emitting means, or sound output means) executes a predetermined performance when a ball fired by the player enters a predetermined ball entry means, and variable games in which a pattern is displayed variably on a predetermined display means when a ball fired by the player enters a predetermined ball entry means, or any combination of these various types of games.

(a-1) For example, this may be implemented as a second type of gaming machine that is equipped with a variable ball entry means that opens when a small jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery (variable symbol game) based on a ball entering a predetermined starting ball entry means, and in which a gaming ball that enters the variable ball entry means enters a specific ball entry section (for example, a V entry port) to trigger a jackpot state (V entry jackpot).

(a-2) It may also be implemented as a third type of gaming machine (for example, a so-called one-type/two-type hybrid machine) that combines the functions of the first type of gaming machine and the second type of gaming machine.

More specifically, the third type of gaming machine (a pachinko machine known as a type 1/type 2 mixed machine) may comprise, for example, a first starting ball entry means for aiming by shooting a gaming ball into the left area of the gaming area (a left hit), a first display device for displaying a first variable display based on the gaming ball entering the first starting ball entry means, a first holding means capable of holding the first variable display a predetermined number of times, a second starting ball entry means for aiming by shooting a gaming ball into the right area of the gaming area (a right hit), a second display device for displaying a second variable display based on the gaming ball entering the second starting ball entry means, a second holding means capable of holding the second variable display a predetermined number of times, and a display device for displaying ... It is equipped with an opening/closing member that changes between an open state allowing a ball to be entered and a closed state preventing a ball from entering. A jackpot lottery is held based on a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means or the second starting ball entry means, and if a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a jackpot state advantageous to the player can be generated. It is also configured to hold a small jackpot lottery based on a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means, and if a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a small jackpot state in which a predetermined variable entry device opens can be generated. If a game ball that enters the variable entry device enters a specific ball entry means (V entry port), a jackpot state can be generated.

Generally, in such pachinko machines, in the normal state (low support state) where it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means, the gameplay is such that the player hits with the left to get the game ball to enter the first start ball entry means in an attempt to reach the jackpot state. On the other hand, in the high support state that can be achieved after the jackpot state ends and where it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means, the gameplay is such that the player hits with the right to get the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means in an attempt to reach the small jackpot state, and then to get the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means (V entry port) within the opened variable entry device in an attempt to reach the jackpot state.

(a-3) It may also be configured as a gaming machine that circulates a predetermined number of gaming balls sealed inside the machine in advance and uses them for pinball play, and instead of lending out real gaming balls (loan balls) or paying out real gaming balls (prize balls), quantifies the gaming value equivalent to the real gaming balls and awards it to the player, a so-called sealed-in pachinko machine.

(a-4) The winning probabilities for various lotteries related to the pachinko machine 10 (such as software lottery processes or lotteries using mechanical mechanisms) are set appropriately for each model, and any value can be used. It goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate, as described below.

(a-5) In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and similar mahjong ball machines.

Furthermore, gaming machines other than pachinko machines can also be implemented as slot machines, which are reel-type gaming machines that use medals or coins as gaming media, or gaming machines that combine pachinko and slot machines (for example, reel-type gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming media). In reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines, predetermined lottery conditions are met when a start lever or other starting operation is performed with gaming media inserted.

(b) The configurations related to the various wins (big wins and small wins) as special game states, such as the number of rounds, opening time, and game mode awarded after completion, are not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

The "special game state" may be anything that is executed after the end of the special variable display that displays the special variable display result that is executed when the result of the win/lose lottery is a special lottery result, and as long as it can realize the gist of the technical idea of this embodiment, it may be anything, such as a small win state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, or a jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state or small win state (more specifically, a jackpot state in which an advantageous state is granted after the end, a jackpot state in which an advantageous state is not granted after the end, a jackpot state in which a high probability state is granted in which the probability of a determination to transition to a special game state by a predetermined lottery means after the end is higher than in the normal game state, or a jackpot state in which a high probability state is not granted after the end).

(b-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the allocation of the jackpot type awarded in the win/lose lottery is different when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and when the gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB. However, the ratio is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and different allocation ratios may also be used.

In addition, the allocation ratio of the jackpot type awarded when the winning lottery is decided may be the same when the gaming ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and when the gaming ball enters the second start winning section 33WB.

(b-2) For example, in the above embodiment, "15R jackpot," "8R jackpot," and "4R jackpot" are set as "jackpots," but this is not limited to these, and other jackpot states with different numbers of rounds may also be configured to occur.

Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that can only generate one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15R jackpot), rather than a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states as a "jackpot."

(c) The configuration of the game mode (such as the award period and configuration content) is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

Here, the game mode may be any type, such as a game state that bestows a predetermined advantageous state on the player (for example, a time-saving state), a game state that increases the probability of winning in the lottery process that determines whether or not a special game state will occur (for example, a high-probability state), a game state that makes it easier for game balls to enter a predetermined ball entry means (for example, a high-ball entry state), a game state that increases the probability of winning in the lottery process that determines whether or not to open the opening/closing member that can open and close the predetermined ball entry means (for example, a high-ball entry state), or a game state that shortens the execution time of the variable display of patterns (for example, a time-saving state).

(c-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 switches between starting ball-scoring support states ("high ball-scoring state" or "low ball-scoring state"), but instead of or in addition to this, it may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that switches between lottery modes ("high probability mode" or "low probability mode").

More specifically, the present invention may be implemented as a pachinko machine of the type in which the lottery mode can be changed between a low probability mode in which the probability of winning the "jackpot" is a first probability (e.g., 1/300), and a high probability mode in which the probability of winning the "jackpot" is a second probability (e.g., 1/30) that is higher than the first probability.

(c-2) In the above embodiment, the "Time-saving A Mode (high ball entry state)" is always granted after the end of a "jackpot" regardless of the type of jackpot. However, this is not limited to this, and the "Time-saving A Mode (high ball entry state)" may not be granted depending on the type of jackpot.

(c-3) In the above embodiment, the "time-saving B mode (ceiling time-saving mode)" is configured to be activated when the number of times a variable game (miss variable game) is executed on the special symbol display device 43A, 43B (mainly the first special symbol display device 43A) reaches a predetermined upper limit (the so-called ceiling) of 500 times without a predetermined jackpot state occurring during "normal mode."

Furthermore, if the number of variable games (miss variable games) executed on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B (mainly the second special symbol display device 43B) during "Time-saving B Mode" reaches a predetermined upper limit of 200 times without the occurrence of a predetermined jackpot state, "Time-saving B Mode" ends and the game transitions to "Normal Mode."

The conditions for activating and terminating "Time-saving B Mode" are not limited to those described in the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted. Furthermore, the gaming machine may be configured so that "Time-saving B Mode" is not activated.

(d) The configuration on the surface of the game board 30 (such as the arrangement of the variable winning device 32A, first start winning section 33WA, second start winning section 33WB, through gate 34, variable display unit 35, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(d-1) For example, in the above embodiment, a through gate 34 is provided in the right area EB of the game area to the right of the variable display unit 35, and a second start-up winning section 33WB is provided downstream of the through gate 34.

However, the second start winning section 33WB may be located in the lower area ED of the play area, or the variable winning device 32A may be located in the right area EB of the play area.

(d-2) In the above embodiment, in normal mode, the game ball is fired toward the left side of the game area (left side game area EA) to play a "left-hand game," and in the event of a jackpot or in time-saving mode, the game ball is fired toward the right side of the game area (right side game area EB) to play a "right-hand game."

In addition to this, the configuration of the game board 30 may be changed so that "right-hand play" is performed in normal mode, and "left-hand play" is performed when a jackpot is hit or in time-saving mode.

(e) The various display units that may constitute the "predetermined display unit" may be any unit capable of displaying various information, and may be any unit capable of realizing the gist of the technical concept of this embodiment. For example, the above embodiment includes special symbol display units 43A and 43B equipped with multiple LEDs (special symbol lamps), and a performance display unit 42 equipped with an LCD display unit.

(e-1) This is not a limitation, and for example, if the gaming board 30 is constructed based on a transparent plate that is a translucent member, a display unit may be disposed at the rear of the gaming board 30 instead of the effect display device 42. More specifically, the configuration may include a display device with a display screen that is large enough to cover substantially the entire back side of the gaming area or substantially the entire back side of the gaming board 30.

(e-2) The type of display unit is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, a display device consisting of a three-color light-emitting diode (three-color LED), a dot matrix display device, a segment display device (7-segment display device), an organic EL display device, etc. may be used.

(e-3) It is also possible to use all or part of a display screen, such as an LCD display, as the display unit.

(f) The "performance function" is not limited to the performance display device 42 and other components described above, but may be configured in other ways. For example, the performance function may include a movable prop that performs a specific performance, or its operational output.

Alternatively, a second performance display device may be provided in addition to the performance display device 42. The second performance display device may then display the menu screen 3000 and other information, allowing various settings to be configured.

(g) In the above embodiment, the standby state is a non-changing state in which the specified change display is not being performed, but this is not limited to this, and other different states may also be the standby state.

For example, this may be a state where a predetermined period of time has passed since a predetermined variable display stopped (such as when a demo screen is being displayed), or a state where the player is not touching an operating means such as a handle.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the effect display device 42 is in a standby state (waiting for customers) where no effects such as variable displays are being performed, the player can press the effect button 125 to create a user-responsive interrupt state, and processing is performed to customize the effect content to suit the player's preferences.

In addition to this, the configuration may also be such that the player can customize and input values (e.g., volume level) for the output mode of a specific effect means by operating input means (including earphones 2500) such as the effect button 125 or cross key 126 for the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display for a specified period on the effect display device 42.

(h) The configuration of the "terminal device (connected device)" connected to the sub-control device 262 is not limited to the earphone 2500 according to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted as long as they are capable of outputting predetermined output information (audio data) from the sub-control device 262 and inputting predetermined operation information into the sub-control device 262.

(h-1) For example, a terminal device such as a mobile phone, smartphone, or tablet may be used, and the player may be able to listen to the audio by connecting earphones or the like to the terminal device via a wired or silent connection.

(h-2) A storage case capable of storing the earphones 2500 (a charging case capable of charging while stored) may be configured as a repeater for BT communication connection. In this case, the BT module provided in the storage case (repeater) may be configured to be capable of BT communication connection with the BT module of the pachinko machine 10, and also capable of BT communication connection with the earphones 2500. Under such a configuration, for example, when the earphones 2500 are removed from the storage case, the power of the earphones 2500 may be automatically turned on (pairing standby mode).

(h-3) In the above embodiment, completely wireless earphones were used in which the left and right 2500L and 2500R were separate and not connected by a cable, but this is not limited to this. Alternatively, integrated wireless earphones in which the left and right 2500L and 2500R are connected by a cable to enable wired communication may also be used.

(h-4) Instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the wireless earphones 2500 are wirelessly connected using BT communication as in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a connection terminal (earphone jack) for connecting the connection terminal (plug) of wired earphones, and the sound output from the pachinko machine 10 may be listened to via the wired earphones.

(i) In the above embodiment, Bluetooth is used as the communication method for connecting the pachinko machine 10 to a terminal device such as a wireless earphone, but the communication method is not limited to this, and other communication methods may also be used.

(i-1) For example, the device may be configured to connect via wireless LAN communication conforming to the IEEE 802.11 standard, such as Wi-Fi. Wi-Fi is an international standard certified by the Wi-Fi Alliance for interoperability between wireless LAN devices.

(i-2) Wi-Fi Direct (registered trademark), which enables one-to-one high-speed wireless communication between devices with wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) functionality, may also be used.

In addition, Wi-Fi Direct uses identification information (device information) such as an SSID (Service Set Identifier), MAC address (Media Access Control Address), and password.

(i-3) Bluetooth also includes an extended specification called BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy), which enables communication with low power consumption.

(j) In the above embodiment, the table-side BT module 1200 is configured to be integrated with the sub-controller 262, but the location at which the table-side BT module 1200 is installed is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the module is configured to be at least electrically connected to the sub-controller 262.

For example, the machine-side BT module 1200 may be configured to be located closer to the player, such as on the front frame 14, inner frame 12, or game board 30.

(k) The output radio wave intensity that constitutes the reference output level (reference radio wave intensity) or the low output state (weak radio wave state) may be configured to be switchable and set automatically based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, detection by a predetermined sensor) or based on a predetermined operation performed externally on the pachinko machine 10.

This configuration makes it possible to appropriately adjust the output level depending on the daily conditions of the gaming hall, either automatically or based on the operation of the hall manager or player.

(k-1) If the radio wave conditions at the gaming hall are poor and the output radio wave strength during a BT communication connection executed in a weak radio wave state is too low, the BT communication connection state may become unstable, and problems such as the BT communication connection state being disconnected may occur.

In contrast, for example, when a weak radio wave state (low output state) is executed (during a BT communication connection executed in a weak radio wave state), audio data may be output at an output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "medium") that is lower than the highest output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "strong") and higher than the lowest output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "weak").

This allows for improved convenience, for example, by allowing the hall manager to adjust the output signal strength during a BT communication connection (weak signal state) so that it does not become too weak when the signal strength is poor in an amusement hall.

As such, it is desirable that the output level (output radio wave intensity) of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 controlled by the machine-side BT module 1200 can be set more precisely depending on the situation. As in the above configuration, when a predetermined operation is input to the pachinko machine 10, for example, when a selection confirmation operation for a predetermined BT-compatible device is input (when a weak radio wave state is executed), it would be highly convenient if audio data could be output at an output level intermediate between the lowest and highest output levels.

(k-2) For example, in amusement halls with a large number of players, such as large amusement halls, when the pachinko machine 10 searches for a BT-compatible device held by a player (when displaying the device name corresponding to a specified BT-compatible device on the specified effect display device 42), if the output radio wave strength of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 is at its maximum, the number of detected BT-compatible devices may become so large that it may become difficult to display the device name corresponding to the specified BT-compatible device on the effect display device 42.

In contrast, the configuration may be such that, based on a predetermined operation performed on the pachinko machine 10 from outside the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an operation to switch the audio output device to a BT-compatible device), the output level of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 searches for a BT-compatible device held by a player can be switched from the highest output radio wave strength (for example, output radio wave strength "strong") to an output radio wave strength (for example, output radio wave strength "medium") that is lower than the highest output radio wave strength and higher than the lowest output radio wave strength (for example, output radio wave strength "weak").

With this configuration, for example in large amusement halls, the hall manager can reduce the output level of the radio waves emitted when searching for BT-compatible devices, thereby reducing the number of BT-compatible devices detected, thereby improving convenience.

As such, it is desirable that the output level (output radio wave intensity) of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 controlled by the machine-side BT module 1200 can be set more precisely depending on the situation. As in the above configuration, when a predetermined operation is input to the pachinko machine 10, for example, when an operation to switch the audio output device to a BT-compatible device is input, it would be highly convenient if audio data could be output at an output level intermediate between the lowest and highest output levels.

(k-3) For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured with an output level changeover switch on the back side (e.g., sub-control device 262) so that it can only be operated by the hall manager.

(k-4) The output level switching means may be provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 so that it can be operated by the player. For example, the output level switching means may be configured to include an operation screen displayed on the performance display device 42 and an operation means for performing input operations on this screen.

(k-5) If a player who is playing at a specific pachinko machine 10 via a BT communication connection between the pachinko machine 10 and a BT-compatible device moves to a nearby pachinko machine 10 and continues playing there without disconnecting the BT communication connection, there is a risk that the BT communication connection state (weak radio wave state) will be maintained without the BT communication connection being disconnected.

In such cases, depending on the configuration, it may be possible that another player attempting to play a new game on a specific pachinko machine 10 will be unable to establish a BT communication connection with that specific pachinko machine 10.

In contrast, the BT communication connection state (weak radio wave state) may be terminated based on a specific operation performed on the pachinko machine 10 from outside the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the hall manager operating a selector switch located on the back of the pachinko machine 10).

It is desirable that the output level (output radio wave intensity) of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10, which is controlled by the machine-side BT module 1200, can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if the weak radio wave state (low output state) could be terminated when a specific operation is input to the pachinko machine 10, as in the above configuration.

(l) The configuration for BT connection processing on the pachinko machine 10 (sub-control device 262) side is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the sub-control device 262 periodically monitors the base-side BT module 1200, and when a BT connection request is received from the earphone 2500 (earphone-side BT module 2510), it sends a BT connection response to the earphone 2500 and establishes a BT communication connection.

Alternatively, the sub-control device 262 may store in a temporary storage area the BT device information of the earphone 2500 selected by the player as the device to be connected, switch the output radio wave strength to "weak," and then issue a BT connection request to the earphone 2500 (earphone-side BT module 2510) based on the BT device information stored in the temporary storage area, and establish a BT communication connection if a BT connection response is received from the earphone 2500.

(m) In the above embodiment, a configuration is exemplified in which only volume adjustment operations can be performed from the terminal device (earphones 2500), but the specified operation information that can be input from the terminal device to the sub-control device 262 is not limited to this.

The terminal device (earphones 2500) may be configured to allow operations such as selecting and determining a specific song from the predetermined song list (songs 1 to 10), or selecting and determining the "melody," "genre," "tempo," "instrument played," etc.

(n) The output level (output radio wave intensity) currently set in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed as "Output level: Strong" or similar on a specified display device (the performance display device 42 or other display device) either continuously or upon a specified operation so that the hall manager or player can check it.

Similarly, some or all of the contents of the custom information stored in the user-associated area of RAM 553 may be configured to be displayed on a specified display device (performance display device 42 or other display device) either continuously or based on a specified operation.

The technical concepts and effects that can be understood from the fourth embodiment are described below.

One type of gaming machine known is a pachinko machine, in which a game is played by firing a gaming ball into a gaming area (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A).

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines output sounds corresponding to various games. The sounds are controlled by the audio control unit of the gaming machine.

When connecting the audio control unit to an external audio output unit to output audio in an optimal manner, audio output control that is highly convenient for players is desired.

More specifically, for example, when wireless earphones for a player playing on a gaming machine are targeted as an external audio output unit connected to the audio control unit, it is desirable to be able to search for, display, select, and pair with the device to be connected, as well as to perform appropriate control after connection.

More specifically, there is a need for suitable control over switching between the output level (output radio wave strength) of radio waves output from a gaming machine when searching for a device to connect to, and the output level (output radio wave strength) of radio waves output from a gaming machine after connection.

The above-mentioned problems will be described in more detail below. As mentioned above, pachinko machines, which are a type of gaming machine that involves firing gaming balls into a gaming area, are known in the past.

For example, in a pachinko machine, a game ball is fired towards the game area, and when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, a variable display of a pattern is executed on a predetermined display means, and if the result of the variable display is a predetermined result, a predetermined winning state occurs.

Amusement machines such as pachinko machines offer players a variety of entertainment options (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A). For example, audio output effects are provided in which sound effects and background music are output from speakers in response to various game states and effects.

However, there was a desire to further improve the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines. For example, there was a desire to have better audio output from gaming machines.

In gaming halls where pachinko and other gaming machines are installed, ambient noises, such as in-store announcements (such as in-store background music and announcements) that are constantly played in the hall and sounds emitted from other gaming machines (such as sounds output from speakers and the sound of gaming media being ejected), can be a distraction, making it difficult for players to fully hear the sounds being output from the gaming machine they are playing on, causing discomfort and making it difficult for them to concentrate on their own game.

In response to this, in recent years, consideration has been given to providing gaming machines such as pachinko machines with output terminals (such as earphone jacks) for wired connection of external audio output devices such as earphones or headphones.

This means that even in a noisy environment like an amusement hall, players can listen only to the sound output from the gaming machine they are playing on via earphones or other devices without being distracted by ambient noise, allowing them to concentrate on their own game. Furthermore, because the gaming machine they are playing on will not output sound to the surrounding area, it also reduces the discomfort felt by players playing nearby.

However, if earphones or other devices are connected to a gaming machine via a wired connection, the connection cable may get in the way when the player is playing the machine, or the presence of the connection cable may be distracting, making it difficult for the player to concentrate on playing the game. Furthermore, if an output terminal such as an earphone jack is provided on the front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that this output terminal may be used to input illegal signals or engage in other fraudulent activities.

In response to this, one possible method is to use short-range wireless communication technology such as Bluetooth, which has recently become available in a wide range of electronic devices, to wirelessly connect a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine to an audio output device (such as wireless earphones or wireless headphones) carried by the player, transmit audio data from the gaming machine to the audio output device, and have the audio output device output the audio.

In order to use Bluetooth to communicate between two electronic devices (BT-compatible devices), a connection setting called pairing must be performed beforehand. Pairing enables BT communication between the two BT-compatible devices.

For example, when pairing a pachinko machine with a BT-compatible device owned by a player, the BT-compatible device to be paired must be selected on the pachinko machine, requiring the following steps:

First, the pachinko machine searches for other connectable BT-compatible devices within the wireless communication range (the radio wave reach of the BT module), and displays a list of the device names of one or more BT-compatible devices discovered during the search on the display screen. The player selects the BT-compatible device (the player's own wireless earphones, for example) with which they wish to pair from the displayed candidates.

The pachinko machine then sends a pairing request to the BT-compatible device selected by the player. Based on this, authentication processing and other procedures are carried out between the BT-compatible device and the pachinko machine, and pairing is established. Once pairing is established, BT communication becomes possible between the BT-compatible device and the pachinko machine, and the player will be able to listen to the audio output from the gaming machine they are playing on via the BT-compatible device.

This configuration eliminates the need for cables connecting the gaming machine and audio output device, reducing the hassle of cables and allowing players to concentrate on their own game.

However, it has become clear that when BT communication is performed in an amusement hall, if the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the BT module of a pachinko machine is high, radio wave interference and crosstalk can occur, making it impossible to output sound properly via wireless earphones, etc.

There are various possible reasons for this, but as one example, inside gaming halls, many island units, each with a large number of gaming machines installed side by side, are installed in parallel, and the aisle space between two opposing island units is narrow enough for one player to pass through at a time. This means that the densely packed gaming machines and island units act as obstacles, creating an environment in which radio waves are easily reflected in the enclosed space between the island units, which act as walls. Furthermore, other factors may include the influence of various radio waves sent and received by wireless LANs (e.g., Wi-Fi) and mobile devices (e.g., smartphones) used within gaming halls, as well as the influence of the numerous electronic devices installed in each gaming machine.

In contrast, if the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the BT module of a pachinko machine is reduced in the gaming hall environment described above, the pachinko machine may not be able to search for the BT-compatible device (earphones, etc.) held by the player when pairing the pachinko machine with a BT-compatible device, which could make it difficult to perform the pairing properly.

In other words, until pairing is established, the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the BT module of the pachinko machine needs to be set relatively high to more reliably detect BT-compatible devices. However, if audio data is then output via BT communication at the same output level (output radio wave strength) as during pairing, radio wave interference or crosstalk may occur, preventing proper audio output.

Therefore, after pairing is established, it may be possible to switch the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the gaming machine's BT module to the BT-compatible device with which pairing has been established, to prevent interference and other problems from occurring.

However, the BT communication standard stipulates that the radio wave output level (output radio wave strength) of a BT-compatible device (such as a BT module) can only be changed when the BT communication is not connected (not paired). Therefore, if the radio wave output level (output radio wave strength) is forcibly changed when the BT communication is connected (paired), the BT communication connection will be forcibly disconnected unintentionally, resulting in a disconnected state.

In other words, if the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the BT module of a pachinko machine is changed after pairing has been established, the pairing will be canceled and the BT communication connection will be cut off. In order to resume BT communication, pairing will have to be performed again, and the output radio wave strength of the BT module will have to be increased again, resulting in a circular process that could significantly reduce convenience for players.

Of course, the above-mentioned problems are not limited to the Bluetooth communication standard, and may also occur with other wireless communication standards.

The technical concept described in the fourth embodiment has been devised to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that allows for audio output control that is highly convenient for players.

In contrast, the following technical features can be extracted from the fourth embodiment described above.

Means LA1. A jackpot lottery unit (main control device 261) that executes a jackpot lottery based on the determination by a determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
a jackpot game execution unit (main control device 261) that executes a jackpot variable display to display the jackpot display result when the result of the jackpot lottery is a winning result, and then executes a jackpot game;
A sub-controller 262 that performs a variation effect using a plurality of effect functions (display effect by the effect display device 42, audio effect by the speaker SP, light effect by the illuminations 102 to 104) at least during the jackpot variation display.
The sub-control device 262 is
The sub-controller 262 can control output radio wave intensity, and the sub-controller 262 is provided with a base-side BT module 1200 that can output audio data at a predetermined output radio wave intensity to a predetermined BT-compatible device (wireless earphone 2500) outside the connected sub-controller 262.
This pachinko machine 10 is
At least a plurality of device names corresponding to a plurality of predetermined BT compatible devices (wireless earphones 2500) in the sub-control device 262, and a cursor 3100, icons 5001, 5002, etc. corresponding to the input of the target device selection decision operation to the sub-control device 262 are configured to be able to be displayed on the performance display device 42,
When detecting an input of a predetermined target device selection and determination operation to the sub-control device 262, the sub-control device 262 is configured to store BT device information capable of identifying the predetermined BT-compatible device (wireless earphone 2500) that is the detection target,
After the BT device information is stored, the output radio wave intensity can be switched so that a weak radio wave state is executed in which the audio data is output at an output radio wave intensity that is smaller than the output radio wave intensity at the time when the input of the predetermined target device selection decision operation is detected,
A pachinko machine 10 characterized in that it is configured to be able to input operation information based on volume adjustment operations from the specified BT-compatible device (wireless earphone 2500) corresponding to the BT equipment information connected to the sub-control device 262 after the weak radio wave state is executed.

Using the above-mentioned means LA1, a BT-compatible device (e.g., wireless earphones 2500) owned by a player can be connected to the pachinko machine 10 via BT communication, allowing the player to listen to the audio output from the pachinko machine 10 via the BT-compatible device.

Furthermore, when input of a predetermined target device selection and decision operation into the sub-control device 262 is detected, the means LA1 is configured to store BT device information capable of identifying the predetermined BT-compatible device (e.g., wireless earphone 2500) that is the detection target, and after the BT device information is stored, to switch the output radio wave strength so that a weak radio wave state is executed in which audio data is output at an output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "weak") that is lower than the output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "strong") at the time when input of the predetermined target device selection and decision operation was detected.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 can output radio waves with a greater output radio wave strength (e.g., "strong" output radio wave strength) to search for BT-compatible devices to display as selection candidates on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, thereby detecting more BT-compatible devices that exist in a wider area and more reliably detecting BT-compatible devices (e.g., wireless earphones 2500) owned by players.

On the other hand, after the input of a predetermined target device selection and decision operation to the sub-control device 262 is detected, the output radio wave strength is switched to a lower output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "weak") and audio data is output to the connected predetermined BT-compatible device (e.g., wireless earphone 2500), thereby suppressing the occurrence of radio wave interference and crosstalk, and enabling audio data to be output preferably via the predetermined BT-compatible device.

Even if a configuration is in place where the audio data output from the pachinko machine 10 can be heard via a BT-compatible device (e.g., wireless earphones 2500) owned by the player, if the BT-compatible device does not allow customization operations related to the audio output, such as volume adjustment operations, the player may be forced to perform complex procedures, such as displaying a specified volume setting screen on the performance display device 42 of the pachinko machine 10 and adjusting the volume, which could result in the player being forced to perform time-consuming and cumbersome operations. Ultimately, there is a risk that players will be put off by the audio output customization function. In addition, convenience for players may be significantly reduced, as customization operations related to the audio output (the customization screen cannot be displayed) can only be performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in standby mode (non-variable display).

In contrast, this means is configured to allow input of predetermined operation information, such as volume level control information, from a predetermined BT-compatible device (e.g., wireless earphone 2500) connected to the sub-control device 262 during a BT communication connection performed in a weak radio wave state.

This allows customization operations related to audio output, such as volume adjustment (volume up or volume down), to be performed quickly and easily by operating the operation unit on the BT-compatible device (such as the operation unit 2503 on the earphones 2500) without using the operation unit on the pachinko machine 10 (such as the various buttons 126a to 126e on the cross key 126).

As a result, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed, improving convenience for players. Furthermore, the sound output from a specific BT-compatible device (e.g., wireless earphones 2500) can be adjusted to a more suitable output state (more suitable volume, etc.) for the player.

Means LA2. The table-side BT module 1200 is configured to be able to switch the output radio wave intensity in at least three stages;
This pachinko machine 10 is
The pachinko machine 10 described in means LA1 is characterized in that when the multiple device names corresponding to the multiple specified BT-compatible devices (wireless earphones 2500) are displayed on the performance display device 42, they are configured to output the largest output radio wave strength (for example, output radio wave strength ``strong'') as the specified output radio wave strength.

If, in an environment such as an amusement hall, the pachinko machine 10 were to search for a BT-compatible device held by a player (when displaying multiple device names corresponding to multiple specified BT-compatible devices on the performance display device 42), and the output radio wave strength of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 were reduced, the pachinko machine 10 would not be able to search for the BT-compatible device held by the player, and it might be difficult to properly establish a BT communication connection between the pachinko machine 10 and the specified BT-compatible device.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means LA2, when the pachinko machine 10 searches for connectable BT-compatible devices, it is able to detect more BT-compatible devices that exist in a wider area, and more reliably detect BT-compatible devices owned by players.

Means LA3. The table-side BT module 1200 is configured to be able to switch the output radio wave intensity in at least three stages;
This pachinko machine 10 is
A pachinko machine 10 described in means LA1 or LA2, characterized in that when the weak radio wave state is executed, it is configured to be able to output the audio data at the smallest output radio wave strength.

If audio data is output via a BT communication connection in an environment such as an amusement hall, if the output radio wave strength of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 is high, radio wave interference or crosstalk may occur, making it impossible to output audio properly via a BT-compatible device (such as the wireless earphones 2500).

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means LA3, after the BT communication connection is established, the BT communication connection is performed in a weak radio wave state with the lowest output radio wave strength, which makes it less likely for radio wave interference or crosstalk to occur, and allows for more optimal audio output via the BT-compatible device (such as the wireless earphones 2500) connected via BT communication.

Means LA4. The table-side BT module 1200 is configured to be able to switch the output radio wave intensity in at least three stages;
This pachinko machine 10 is
A pachinko machine 10 described in any of means LA1 to LA3, characterized in that when the weak radio wave state is executed, it is configured to output the audio data at an output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "medium") that is smaller than the largest output radio wave strength and larger than the smallest output radio wave strength.

If the radio wave conditions at the amusement hall are poor and the output radio wave strength during a BT communication connection executed in a weak radio wave state is too low, the BT communication connection state may become unstable, and problems such as the BT communication connection being disconnected may occur.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means LA4, during a BT communication connection performed in a weak radio wave state, it is possible to output audio data at an output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "medium") that is lower than the highest output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "strong") and higher than the lowest output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "weak").

This allows for improved convenience, for example, by allowing the hall manager to adjust the output signal strength during a BT communication connection (weak signal state) so that it does not become too weak when the signal strength is poor in an amusement hall.

Means LA5. The table-side BT module 1200 is configured to be able to switch the output radio wave intensity in at least three stages;
This pachinko machine 10 is
A pachinko machine 10 described in any of means LA1 to LA4, characterized in that the output radio wave strength can be set from the largest output radio wave strength as the specified output radio wave strength to an output radio wave strength that is smaller than the largest output radio wave strength and larger than the smallest output radio wave strength, based on a specified operation to the pachinko machine 10 from outside the pachinko machine 10.

For example, in a large amusement hall or other amusement hall with a large number of players playing, when the pachinko machine 10 searches for a BT-compatible device held by a player (when displaying the device name corresponding to a specified BT-compatible device on the specified effect display device 42), if the output radio wave strength of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 is at its maximum, the number of detected BT-compatible devices may become so large that it may become difficult to display the device name corresponding to the specified BT-compatible device on the effect display device 42.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means LA5, when the pachinko machine 10 searches for a BT-compatible device owned by a player, the output radio wave strength of the radio waves output from the pachinko machine 10 can be set from the highest output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "strong") to an output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "medium") that is lower than the highest output radio wave strength and higher than the lowest output radio wave strength (e.g., output radio wave strength "weak") based on a predetermined operation performed on the pachinko machine 10 from outside the pachinko machine 10 (e.g., an operation to switch the audio output equipment to a BT-compatible device, etc.).

This allows, for example, in large amusement halls, hall managers to reduce the signal strength of the radio waves emitted when searching for BT-compatible devices, thereby reducing the number of BT-compatible devices detected and improving convenience.

Means LA6. This pachinko machine 10 is
A pachinko machine 10 described in any of means LA1 to LA5, characterized in that it is configured to be able to selectively display in a specific order the device names corresponding to at least the specified BT compatible device (audio output capable device such as wireless earphone 2500) related to the output of the audio data from among the device names corresponding to multiple types of BT compatible devices.

For example, in large amusement halls and other amusement facilities where many players play, these players will have a large number of BT-compatible devices (not only devices capable of audio output such as wireless earphones 2500, but also smartphones, tablet devices, laptops, etc.). If all of these were listed as selection candidates, the player would not be able to establish a BT communication connection unless they found the device name corresponding to their own BT-compatible device from the vast number of device names corresponding to BT-compatible devices, which could take a significant amount of time to establish a BT communication connection.

In contrast, means LA6 is configured to selectively display the device name corresponding to a specific BT-compatible device related to the output of audio data (for example, a BT-compatible device that supports a profile required for audio output, such as A2DP), thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and improving convenience for players.

Means LA7. This pachinko machine 10 is
A pachinko machine 10 described in any of means LA1 to LA6, characterized in that when the multiple device names are displayed on the performance display device 42, the device names corresponding to a predetermined number of the specified BT-compatible devices (such as wireless earphones 2500) can be selectively displayed in a specific order.

As mentioned above, in an amusement hall where many players play, there is a high likelihood that these players will own a large number of specific BT-compatible devices (devices capable of outputting audio, such as wireless earphones 2500). If all of these were listed as selection candidates, a BT communication connection would not be possible unless the player found the device name corresponding to the specific BT-compatible device they own from among the vast number of device names corresponding to the specific BT-compatible devices, which could take a significant amount of time to establish a BT communication connection.

In contrast, the above-mentioned means LA7 is configured to selectively display the device names corresponding to a predetermined number of specified BT-compatible devices (devices capable of audio output, such as wireless earphones 2500), thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and improving convenience for players.

Means LA8. This pachinko machine 10 is
A pachinko machine (10) described in any one of means LA1 to means LA7, characterized in that the weak radio wave state is configured to be terminated based on a specific operation to the pachinko machine (10) from outside the pachinko machine (10).

For example, if a player is playing at a specific pachinko machine 10 by connecting the pachinko machine 10 to a BT-compatible device via BT communication, and then moves to a nearby pachinko machine 10 to play there without disconnecting the BT communication connection, there is a risk that the BT communication connection state (weak radio wave state) will be maintained without the BT communication connection being disconnected.

In such cases, depending on the configuration, it may be possible that another player attempting to play a new game on a specific pachinko machine 10 will be unable to establish a BT communication connection with that specific pachinko machine 10.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means LA8, the BT communication connection state (weak radio wave state) can be terminated based on a specific operation performed on the pachinko machine 10 from outside the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the hall manager operating a selector switch located on the back of the pachinko machine 10), thereby improving convenience.

The following technical ideas can be extracted from the technical features of the fourth embodiment described above.

Means LB1. A lottery unit that executes a winning/losing lottery based on the determination by a determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
A special game execution unit that executes a special variable display to display a special variable display result when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a special lottery result, and then executes a special game state;
A gaming machine comprising: a performance control unit that performs a variable performance using a plurality of performance functions at least during the special variable display;
The performance control unit
The output level can be controlled by the performance control unit, and an output control unit is provided which can output output information at a predetermined output level to a predetermined connected device outside the connected performance control unit,
This gaming machine is
A plurality of pieces of terminal information corresponding to a plurality of predetermined terminal devices in at least the performance control unit and instruction confirmation information corresponding to input of instruction information to the performance control unit are configured to be able to be displayed on a predetermined display unit;
When detecting input of predetermined instruction information to the performance control unit, identification information capable of identifying the predetermined terminal device that is the detection target is stored,
after the identification information is stored, the output level can be switched so as to execute a low output state in which the output information is output at an output level lower than the output level at the time when the input of the predetermined instruction information was detected,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that specified operation information can be input from the specified terminal device corresponding to the identification information connected to the performance control unit after the low output state is executed.

Meanwhile, means LB1 allows a player to connect a terminal device (e.g., wireless earphones) to the gaming machine, enabling the player to listen to the audio output from the gaming machine via the terminal device.

Furthermore, when input of specified instruction information (e.g., an operation to determine the device to be connected) into the performance control unit (e.g., a sub-control device) of the gaming machine is detected, this means LB1 is configured to store identification information (e.g., BT device information) that can identify the specified terminal device (e.g., wireless earphones) that is the target of detection, and after the identification information (e.g., BT device information) is stored, switch the output level (e.g., output radio wave intensity) so that a low-output state is executed in which output information (e.g., audio data) is output at an output level (e.g., output radio wave intensity "weak") that is lower than the output level (e.g., output radio wave intensity "strong") at the time the input of the specified instruction information was detected.

This configuration allows the gaming machine to output radio waves at a higher output level (for example, "strong" output radio wave intensity) and search for terminal devices (for example, wireless earphones) to display as selection candidates on a specified display unit, thereby enabling it to detect more terminal devices located over a wider area and more reliably detect terminal devices owned by players.

On the other hand, once the input of the specified instruction information (e.g., an operation to select a device to connect) is detected, the output level is switched to a lower output level (e.g., output radio wave strength "weak") and output of output information (e.g., audio data) to the connected specified terminal device (e.g., wireless earphones) is configured to suppress radio wave interference and crosstalk, and output of output information (e.g., audio data) can be suitably performed via the specified terminal device.

Even if a gaming machine is configured so that output information (e.g., audio data) can be heard through a terminal device (e.g., wireless earphones) carried by the player, if the terminal device does not allow customization operations related to the audio output, such as volume adjustment operations, the player may be forced to perform complex procedures, such as displaying a specific volume setting screen on the gaming machine's display device and adjusting the volume, which could be time-consuming and cumbersome. Ultimately, this could lead to players being put off by customization functions related to audio output. In addition, convenience for players could be significantly reduced if customization operations related to audio output (the customization screen cannot be displayed) could only be performed when the gaming machine is in standby mode (non-variable display).

In contrast, this means is configured to allow specific operation information to be input from a specific terminal device (e.g., wireless earphones) connected to the performance control unit during a communication connection executed in a low-power state.

This allows players to quickly and easily customize audio output, such as adjusting the volume, by operating the operating means on the terminal device, without using the operating means on the gaming machine. As a result, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be reduced, improving convenience for players.

As a result, the audio output from a specific terminal device (e.g., wireless earphones) can be adjusted to a more suitable output state (more suitable volume, etc.) for the player.

Means LB2. The output control unit is configured to be able to switch the output level in at least three stages,
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in means LB1, characterized in that when the multiple terminal information corresponding to the multiple specified terminal devices is displayed on the specified display unit, it is configured to output the specified output level at the highest output level.

If, in an environment such as an amusement hall, a gaming machine were to reduce the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves it outputs when searching for a terminal device held by a player (when displaying multiple pieces of terminal information corresponding to multiple specified terminal devices on a specified display), the gaming machine would not be able to search for the terminal device held by the player when wirelessly connecting to the specified terminal device, which could make it difficult to properly establish a wireless connection.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means LB2, when the gaming machine searches for connectable terminal devices, it can detect more terminal devices located over a wider area, and more reliably detect terminal devices owned by players.

Means LB3. The output control unit is configured to be able to switch the output level in at least three stages,
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine according to means LB1 or LB2, characterized in that when the low output state is executed, the output information is output at the smallest output level.

If output information (audio data) is to be output via wireless communication (such as BT communication) in an environment such as an amusement hall, if the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the gaming machine is high, radio wave interference or crosstalk may occur, making it impossible to properly output audio via terminal devices (such as wireless earphones).

In contrast, with the above-mentioned method LB3, after the communication connection is established, the communication connection is performed in a low-output state with the lowest radio wave output level, which makes it less likely for radio wave interference and crosstalk to occur, and allows for more optimal audio output via the communication-connected terminal device (wireless earphones, etc.).

Means LB4. The output control unit is configured to be able to switch the output level in at least three stages,
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means LB1 to LB3, characterized in that when the low output state is executed, the output information can be output at an output level that is smaller than the largest output level and larger than the smallest output level.

If the radio wave conditions at the amusement hall are poor and the output level becomes too low during a communication connection performed in low output mode, the communication connection may become unstable, and problems such as the communication connection being disconnected may occur.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means LB4, during a communication connection executed in a low-output state, output information (audio data) is output at an output level (e.g., output radio wave intensity "medium") that is lower than the highest output level (e.g., output radio wave intensity "strong") and higher than the lowest output level (e.g., output radio wave intensity "weak").

This allows for improved convenience, for example, by allowing the hall manager to adjust the output level during communication connection (low output state) so that it does not become too low when the radio wave conditions at the amusement hall are poor.

Means LB5. The output control unit is configured to be able to switch the output level in at least three stages,
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any one of means LB1 to LB4, characterized in that the output level can be set from the largest output level as the predetermined output level to an output level that is smaller than the largest output level and larger than the smallest output level based on a predetermined operation to the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine.

For example, in large amusement halls and other amusement facilities with a large number of players playing, when a gaming machine searches for a terminal device held by a player (when displaying terminal information corresponding to a specified terminal device on a specified display unit), if the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the gaming machine is at its maximum, the number of detected terminal devices may become so large that it may become difficult to display the terminal information corresponding to the specified terminal device on the specified display unit.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means LB5, when the gaming machine searches for a terminal device owned by a player, the output level (output radio wave strength) of the radio waves output from the gaming machine can be set from the highest output level (e.g., output radio wave strength "strong") to an output level (e.g., output radio wave strength "medium") that is lower than the highest output level (e.g., output radio wave strength "strong") and higher than the lowest output level (e.g., output radio wave strength "weak") based on a predetermined operation performed on the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine (e.g., an operation to switch connected devices, etc.).

This allows, for example, in large amusement halls, hall managers to reduce the output level of radio waves emitted when searching for terminal devices, thereby reducing the number of detected terminal devices and improving convenience.

Means LB6. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means LB1 to LB5, characterized in that it is configured to be able to selectively display in a specific order the terminal information corresponding to at least the specified terminal device regarding the output of the output information from among terminal information corresponding to multiple types of terminal devices.

For example, in large amusement halls where many players play, these players will have a large number of terminal devices (not only audio output devices such as wireless earphones, but also smartphones, tablet devices, laptops, etc.). If all of these devices were listed as selection candidates, players would be unable to establish a communication connection unless they could find the device information (device name, etc.) corresponding to their own terminal device from the vast number of terminal devices, which could take a significant amount of time.

In contrast, means LB6 is configured to selectively display terminal information (such as device name) corresponding to a specific terminal device related to the output of output information (audio data) (for example, a terminal device that supports a profile required for audio output, such as A2DP), thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and improving convenience for players.

Means LB7. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means LB1 to LB6, characterized in that when displaying the multiple terminal information on the specified display unit, the terminal information corresponding to a predetermined number of the specified terminal devices can be selectively displayed in a specific order.

As mentioned above, in an amusement hall where many players play, there is a high likelihood that many of these players will have specific terminal devices (audio output devices such as wireless earphones). If all of these were listed as selection candidates, players would be unable to establish a communication connection unless they could find the terminal information (device name, etc.) corresponding to their own specific terminal device from the vast number of specific terminal devices, which could take a significant amount of time to establish a communication connection.

In contrast, means LB7 is configured to selectively display terminal information (such as device names) corresponding to a predetermined number of specified terminal devices (audio output devices such as wireless earphones), thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and improving convenience for players.

Means LB8. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any one of means LB1 to LB7, characterized in that the low output state is configured to be able to be terminated based on a specific operation to the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine.

For example, if a player is playing at a specific gaming machine via a communication connection between the gaming machine and their terminal device, and then moves to an adjacent gaming machine to play there without disconnecting the communication connection, there is a risk that the communication connection state (low output state) will remain undisconnected.

In such cases, depending on the configuration, it may be possible that a new player attempting to play on a specific gaming machine will be unable to establish a communication connection with that specific gaming machine.

In contrast, with means LB8, the low-power state (communication connection state) can be terminated based on a specific operation performed on the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine (for example, the hall manager operating a selector switch located on the back of the gaming machine), thereby improving convenience.

The various technical features shown in the first to fourth embodiments may be combined or substituted as much as possible within the scope of the invention.

Therefore, the following group of inventions can be extracted from the first to fourth embodiments.

Means MA1. A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on the determination by a determination means for determining whether a predetermined lottery condition is met that the predetermined lottery condition is met;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific variable display to display a specific variable display result when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a specific result, and then executing a specific game state;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance execution means for performing a variable performance using a plurality of performance elements at least during the specific variable display,
The performance execution means
an information output means capable of controlling an output amount by the performance execution means and capable of outputting specific information at a predetermined output amount to a predetermined connection target outside the connected performance execution means;
This gaming machine is
A plurality of target information corresponding to a plurality of predetermined detection targets in at least the performance execution means and correspondence information corresponding to input of request information to the performance execution means are configured to be able to be displayed on a predetermined display means;
When detecting input of the predetermined request information to the performance execution means, information capable of identifying the predetermined detection target that is the detection target is stored;
after the information is stored, the output amount can be switched so that a specific state in which the specific information is output at an output amount that is smaller than the output amount at the time when the input of the predetermined request information is detected is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to allow input of specified information from the specified detection target corresponding to the information connected to the performance execution means after the specific state is executed.

By using the above-mentioned means MA1, when outputting sound by connecting the effect execution means (sound control unit) to a specified connection target (external sound output unit) in order to output suitable sound, sound output control can be performed in a way that is highly convenient for the player.

Means MA2. The information output means is configured to be able to switch the output amount in at least three stages,
This gaming machine is
The gaming machine described in means MA1 is characterized in that when the multiple target information corresponding to the multiple specified detection targets is displayed on the specified display means, it is configured to output the largest output amount as the specified output amount.

It is desirable that the amount of information output from the gaming machine controlled by the information output means can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if the largest amount of information could be output when multiple pieces of target information corresponding to multiple specified detection targets are displayed on the display means, as with means MA2 above.

Means MA3. The information output means is configured to be able to switch the output amount in at least three stages,
This gaming machine is
The gaming machine described in means MA1 or MA2 is configured so that when the specific state is executed, the specific information can be output with the smallest output amount.

It is desirable that the amount of information output from the gaming machine controlled by the information output means can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if the gaming machine could output the smallest amount of information when a specific request is input, as with means MA3 above.

Means MA4. The information output means is configured to be able to switch the output amount in at least three stages,
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means MA1 to MA3, characterized in that when the specific state is executed, the specific information can be output at an output amount that is less than the highest output amount and greater than the lowest output amount.

It is desirable that the amount of information output from the gaming machine controlled by the information output means can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if, as with means MA4 above, an amount of information can be output that is intermediate between the minimum and maximum amounts when a specified request is input to the gaming machine.

Means MA5. The information output means is configured to be able to switch the output amount in at least three stages,
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means MA1 to MA4, characterized in that the output amount can be set from the highest output amount as the predetermined output amount to an output amount that is smaller than the highest output amount and larger than the smallest output amount based on a predetermined operation to the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine.

It is desirable that the amount of information output from the gaming machine controlled by the information output means can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if, as with means MA5 above, an amount of information can be output that is intermediate between the minimum and maximum amounts when a specified operation is input to the gaming machine.

Means MA6. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means MA1 to MA5, characterized in that it is configured to selectively display target information corresponding to at least the specified detection target regarding the output of the specific information from target information corresponding to multiple types of detection targets.

If the effect execution means displays information corresponding to all detection targets on the display means, the player would have to sort through the vast amount of information they need, including unnecessary information, which could significantly reduce convenience for the player. In contrast, selectively displaying the necessary detection targets, as with means MA6, increases convenience.

Means MA7. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any of means MA1 to means MA6, characterized in that when the multiple target information is displayed on the specified display means, the target information corresponding to a predetermined number of the predetermined detection targets can be selectively and specifically displayed.

If the effect execution means displays information corresponding to multiple detection targets on the display means, the player would have to sort through the vast amount of information that contains unnecessary information, which could significantly reduce convenience for the player. In contrast, convenience is improved by selectively displaying target information corresponding to a predetermined number of predetermined detection targets, as in the above-mentioned means MA7.

Means MA8. This gaming machine is
A gaming machine described in any one of means MA1 to means MA7, characterized in that the specific state can be ended based on a specific operation to the gaming machine from outside the gaming machine.

It is desirable that the amount of information output from the gaming machine controlled by the information output means can be set more precisely depending on the situation, and it would be highly convenient if a specific state could be ended when a specific operation is input to the gaming machine, as in means MA8 above.

Fifth Embodiment
A pachinko gaming machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with those of the first to fourth embodiments (such as the same components and the same processing content) may be described using the same component names and the same reference numerals.

Pachinko machines, which are a type of gaming machine known in the art, involve launching gaming balls into a gaming area. Gaming machines such as pachinko machines offer a variety of entertainment options to players (see, for example, JP 2010-99379 A).
However, in conventional gaming machines, there is a demand for further improvements in entertainment value, such as more convenient ball control for players.

This concept was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that allows players to control the ball more conveniently.

In order to achieve the above objectives, the gaming machine according to this concept:
a handle base means fixed to the gaming machine body;
a handle base means for rotating the handle so as to launch the game medium;
a first protruding means protruding from the outer periphery of the handle base means;
a biasing means for applying a predetermined biasing force so that at least the first protruding means is positioned relative to the handle base means at a predetermined reference position;
A gaming machine capable of changing the speed of a game medium to be launched in response to a rotational operation amount from the reference position of the first convex means in a rotational operation direction that is the opposite direction to the direction in which the predetermined biasing force is applied,
the first convex means is configured to be rotatable from the reference position of the first convex means based on a predetermined rotation operation in which a player moves the first convex means with a finger,
This gaming machine is
a second protruding means configured to be rotatable in the same rotation operation direction as the first protruding means, on the rear side or the front side of the first protruding means as viewed in a predetermined direction,
In a state where the first convex means is rotated in the rotation operation direction by the predetermined rotation operation amount, the player's finger is positioned between the first convex means and the second convex means fixed at a predetermined position, and the rotation operation amount of the first convex means can be fixed against the predetermined biasing force,
The second convex means is
The second convex means is configured to be rotatable in the same rotation direction as the first convex means by the specific rotation operation of the player using the finger to move the second convex means,
The specific rotation operation can be performed on the second convex means even when the first convex means is in a non-operation state,
This gaming machine is
The gist of this configuration is that when the first convex means rotates in the direction in which the predetermined biasing force is applied by the predetermined biasing force and returns to the predetermined reference position, the second convex means is also configured to always return to its predetermined initial position in conjunction with the rotation of the first convex means.

The gaming machine of the present invention allows players to control the ball more conveniently.

One embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Here, Figure 5-1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, Figure 5-2 is an oblique view, and Figure 5-3 is an oblique view showing the state in which the inner frame 12 and front frame set 14 are open. Figure 5-4 is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame 12 and game board 30, etc. Figure 5-5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 5-6 is an oblique view showing the state in which the inner frame 12 and back pack unit 203, etc. are open. However, for convenience, Figure 5-3 omits the nails and gadgets arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc.

As shown in Figure 5-3, etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of this outer frame 11 so that it can be opened and closed.

As shown in Figures 5-6, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made from wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made from extruded aluminum alloy material. These frame components 11a-11d are assembled together into a rectangular frame shape using detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left-side frame component 11c, respectively (see Figure 5-1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, allowing the inner frame 12 to open and close. The inner frame 12 and other components are housed in an opening formed inside the outer frame 11.

The right-side frame component 11d also has an extending wall 83 that protrudes from near its rear widthwise end toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see Figure 5-6) provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 5-5). Additionally, as shown in Figure 5-3, the front side of the extending wall 83 is provided with a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 that engage with the locking member of the locking device 600. The lower receiving portion 85 also has a pressing portion 86 that protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 and abuts against the inner frame opening detection switch 92 (described below).

In addition, a resin decorative panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. A rib 88 that protrudes upward is integrally formed on the innermost part of the top surface of the decorative panel 87. This makes it less likely that a gap will form between it and the inner frame 12.

As shown in Figure 5-3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward around this opening/closing axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly oval window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

In addition, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 in an openable and closable manner. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 is designed to be able to open forward around an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape, similar to the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 when closed. A roughly oval window 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. This makes it possible to view the game board 30 (play area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed structure of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in Figure 5-1, a lower tray 15 serving as a ball receiving tray is provided at the center of the lower bottom of the front side of the front frame set 14, and game balls serving as game media discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. A ball removal lever 25 for discharging game balls from the lower tray 15 is provided on the front side of the lower tray 15. Additionally, a performance button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower tray 15, and pressing the performance button 125 causes a corresponding performance to be performed or the performance content to be changed on the decorative pattern display device 42, etc., which will be described later.

A game ball launch handle (hereinafter simply referred to as the handle) 18 protruding toward the front is provided to the right of the lower tray 15. The structure of the handle 18 will be described in detail later.

An upper tray 19 is provided above the lower tray 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls, aligns them in a row, and guides them toward the game ball launcher (hereinafter simply referred to as the launcher) 60, which serves as a launching means described below. When the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls that are dispensed are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray connecting passage 71 and discharge port 16, described below.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to the operation. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit. However, in pachinko machines in which game balls are loaned directly from a ball lending device, etc. to the upper tray 19 without going through the card unit, so-called cash machines, the ball lending button 121 and return button 122 are not necessary.

In addition, the upper tray 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) located downstream of the ball guide path on the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 opens, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided (dropped) into the lower tray 15. In other words, by operating the ball removal button 123, the player can transfer the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time.

In addition, various light-emitting devices such as lamps are provided around the front of the front frame set 14. These light-emitting devices are controlled to change their light emission modes, such as lighting up or flashing, in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached, thereby enhancing the presentation effects during play. For example, a circular lighting section 102 incorporating light-emitting devices such as LEDs is provided around the periphery of the window section 101. Furthermore, error indicator lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the circular lighting section 102, which light up in the event of a predetermined error. Furthermore, above each error indicator lamp 104 on the circular lighting section 102, a number of fine through-holes are formed to correspond to the speakers SP (see Figure 5-3) provided on the back of the front frame set 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of rectangular glass panes attached separately at the front and rear, but rather is round overall and is attached as an assembly.

Next, the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) will be described with reference to Figure 5-4. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) behind the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge abutting the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, approximately the center of the front of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 in the resin base 38.

In addition, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 that guides game balls immediately after they are launched from the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39 (game board 30). In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device is used as the launching device 60. Also, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device 63 is provided that guides game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the launch position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (e.g., a solenoid).

Next, the configuration of the gaming board 30 will be explained with reference to Figure 5-4. The gaming board 30 has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning unit (starting opening) 33, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, a first special display device 43L, and a second special display device 43R, etc., arranged in through holes formed by router processing, and attached to the front side of the gaming board 30 with wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a gaming ball enters (wins) various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, or the starting winning unit 33, it is detected by various detection switches, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (or lower tray 15). For example, if a ball enters the starting winning unit 33, three gaming balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15); if a ball enters the general winning opening 31, ten balls are paid out; and if a ball enters the variable winning device 32, fifteen balls are paid out. Additionally, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36, through which game balls that do not enter the various winning ports, such as the general winning port 31, are discharged outside the game area. The game board 30 is also provided with numerous nails to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the game balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

The start-up winning unit 33 comprises an upper winning opening 33a (first starting winning opening) and a lower winning opening 33b (second starting winning opening) as starting ball entry means, and a pair of opening/closing members 33c provided on both sides of the lower winning opening 33b. While the upper winning opening 33a is always capable of receiving game balls, the lower winning opening 33b is configured so that its state can be changed between an open state, in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and a closed state, in which game balls cannot enter, by the opening/closing member 33c opening and closing in response to the establishment of predetermined conditions. As will be described in more detail below, the start winning unit 33 is equipped with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b as condition establishment detection means (ball entry detection means) that detects game balls entering the upper winning slot 33a and the lower winning slot 33b, respectively. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switches 224a and 224b, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot state will be generated, and a variable display is displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R (and the decorative pattern display device 42, described below). If the lottery is won, the jackpot state (special game state) is granted.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpot states are "probable jackpot," "normal jackpot," and "special probable jackpot." In the "probable jackpot" and "normal jackpot" jackpot states, the variable winning device 32 is in an open state for 30 seconds, or eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32, which is repeated 15 times. On the other hand, in the "special probable jackpot" jackpot state, the variable winning device 32 is in an open state for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. In other words, while the "probable jackpot" and "normal jackpot" jackpot states offer the possibility of a significant increase in game balls, the "special probable jackpot" jackpot state offers the possibility of an extremely small number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot state (almost no increase in game balls is possible).

Furthermore, if a "probable jackpot" or "special probable jackpot" occurs, a high-probability state (probable jackpot mode) will be entered after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, if a "normal jackpot" occurs, a low-probability state (time-saving mode, normal mode) will be entered after the jackpot state ends.

In addition, as will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot state awarded if the win/lose lottery is won differs depending on whether the gaming ball enters the upper winning slot 33a or the lower winning slot 33b. If the win/lose lottery triggered by the gaming ball entering the upper winning slot 33a is won, the player is assigned to either a "probable jackpot," a "normal jackpot," or a "special probable jackpot," while if the win/lose lottery triggered by the gaming ball entering the lower winning slot 33b is won, the player is assigned to either a "probable jackpot" or a "normal jackpot."

The first and second special display devices 43L, 43R are constructed from seven-segment display devices and are installed to the right of the variable winning device 32. When a gaming ball enters the upper winning slot 33a of the starting winning unit 33, a switching display (variable display) is performed on the first special display device 43L, and when a gaming ball enters the lower winning slot 33b, a switching display (variable display) is performed on the second special display device 43R. The display content of the special display devices 43L, 43R is directly controlled by the main control device 261, which serves as the main control means, as described below.

Furthermore, after the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R display a varying number, the display mode (e.g., text) when the varying number stops will definitively indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won. For example, when a game ball enters the upper prize slot 33a, the corresponding first special display device 43L rapidly switches (varies) the display (varies) from "-" → "7" → "3" → "2" → "-" → ... (e.g., every 4 msec), and after a predetermined time has passed, one of the display modes freezes (e.g., freezes for a few seconds). If the jackpot is won, either "7," "3," or "2" will be displayed when the varying number stops, and a jackpot state will be triggered.

Specifically, when a "chance jackpot" is awarded, a "7" is displayed as a static number on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R; when a "normal jackpot" is awarded, a "3" is displayed as a static number on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R; and when a "special chance jackpot" is awarded, a "2" is displayed as a static number on the first special display device 43L (the "2" is not displayed on the second special display device 43R).

In addition, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is displaying a change or decision, the other will be turned off (or may display "-"); and when neither is displaying a change or decision, both will display "-".

Furthermore, if a new game ball enters the start winning unit 33 while the first or second special display device 43L, 43R is displaying a variable value, the variable value for that ball will be displayed after the current variable value display has finished. In other words, the variable value display will be put on hold (on hold). The maximum number of variable values that can be held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to four variable values are held for each game ball that has entered the upper winning slot 33a and the lower winning slot 33b (a total of eight variable values). The number of held values is also displayed by lighting the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. Furthermore, if a new game ball enters the start winning unit 33 during a jackpot state, the variable value display for that ball will also be held on hold.

In general, the variable displays triggered by a winning ball entering the upper winning slot 33a are stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the upper winning slot 33a and are consumed in the same order. The variable displays triggered by a winning ball entering the lower winning slot 33b are stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the lower winning slot 33b and are consumed in the same order. However, if both the variable displays triggered by a winning ball entering the upper winning slot 33a and the variable displays triggered by a winning ball entering the lower winning slot 33b are on hold (when one or more of the first hold lamps 46a and second hold lamps 46b are lit), the variable displays triggered by a winning ball entering the lower winning slot 33b are consumed first. In other words, the variable displays triggered by a winning ball entering the upper winning slot 33a will not be displayed unless all variable displays triggered by a winning ball entering the lower winning slot 33b have been consumed. For example, if one first reserved lamp 46a is lit, a game ball enters the lower winning slot 33b, and one second reserved lamp 46b is lit, the display change triggered by the ball entering the upper winning slot 33a will be postponed, and the display change triggered by the ball entering the lower winning slot 33b will be displayed first. For ease of explanation, the display change triggered by the ball entering the upper winning slot 33a will be referred to as the "first display change," and the display change triggered by the ball entering the lower winning slot 33b will be referred to as the "second display change."

The through gate 34 is also configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to pass through it one by one. As will be described in more detail below, the through gate 34 is equipped with a through gate switch 225 that can detect game balls passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, an opening lottery is held to determine whether the start winning unit 33 should be opened, and a variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display device 41. If the opening lottery is won, the start winning unit 33 (opening/closing member 33c) is opened for a specified period of time.

The variable display unit 35 is provided with a normal symbol display device 41 that displays a variable display in response to passing through the through gate 34, and a decorative symbol display device 42 that displays a variable display in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R. Furthermore, the variable display unit 35 is provided with a variable specification lamp 40 that indicates which of the upper winning slot 33a and the lower winning slot 33b the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to, the first and second reservation lamps 46a and 46b, and the reservation lamp 44. In this embodiment, the special display devices 43L and 43R, the variable specification lamp 40, and the decorative symbol display device 42 make up the variable display device.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light and display a "○" or "X" as a normal symbol, and each time a gaming ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol is rapidly switched (varied) from "○" → "X" → "○" → ... If the variable display stops at the "○" symbol (winning symbol) for several seconds, the start winning unit 33 will be opened for a predetermined period of time. The display content of this normal symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later.

Furthermore, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 while the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable number of times, the variable number will be displayed after the current variable number display has finished. In other words, the variable number display will be put on hold (on hold). The maximum number of variable number displays that can be held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to four displays can be held, and the number of times that the display is held is displayed by lighting up the hold lamp 44.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is configured as a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by a sub-controller 262 as a sub-control means (described later) and a display controller 45. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, auxiliary display content is determined by the sub-controller 262 based on commands from the main controller 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the content is displayed by the display controller 45 (described later).
The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas, top, middle, and bottom, and multiple types of symbols (numbers) are displayed (variably displayed) in each symbol display area, and then symbols are displayed in a static manner in each symbol display area in order (for example, in the order of top symbol display area → bottom symbol display area → middle symbol display area). For example, when a jackpot is determined by the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and symbols are displayed statically in a combination corresponding to the jackpot on the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example, the symbols displayed statically in the top symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and bottom symbol display area are the same), and the jackpot state begins.

Also, when symbols are displayed in a combination corresponding to a jackpot, the preliminary step is, for example, to display the same symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas. This state, in which the same symbols are displayed in the upper and lower symbol display areas while the middle symbol display area is still displaying a variable pattern, is called a reach state.

In addition, if a reach state occurs but a jackpot state does not occur, a different pattern from the patterns displayed in the upper and lower pattern display areas will be displayed in the middle pattern display area. Furthermore, in the case of a "probable jackpot" or "normal jackpot," a double-digit number will be displayed in the decorative pattern display device 42 as described above. However, in the case of a "special probable jackpot," a predetermined specific combination of numbers (hereinafter referred to as a chance pattern) will be displayed in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas (for example, "3," "4," and "1" will be displayed in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas).

In addition, the variable specification lamp 40 is equipped with a blue LED and a red LED, and emits blue light when the decorative pattern display device 42 is displaying a variable triggered by a ball entering the upper winning slot 33a, and emits red light when the decorative pattern display device 42 is displaying a variable triggered by a ball entering the lower winning slot 33b.

The variable display unit 35 also has a center frame 47 disposed around the decorative pattern display device 42. An entrance 151 is provided at the top of the center frame 47, and a game ball that enters the entrance 151 is guided onto a stage 153 formed below the decorative pattern display device 42 via a warp channel 152 formed inside the center frame 47 and extending vertically along the side of the decorative pattern display device 42. A game ball guided onto the stage 153 may fall from the stage 153 into the game area ahead, or roll on the stage 153 and then enter a pocket 154 formed at the back center of the stage 153. Furthermore, the pocket 154 is connected to a guide passage 155 that leads to the game area directly above the starting winning unit 33 (upper winning opening 33a), so that a game ball that enters the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability of entering the starting winning unit 33 (upper winning opening 33a).

The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state, preventing game balls from winning, but in the event of a jackpot (occurrence of a special game state), it switches to an open state, allowing game balls to win.

The game board 30 is also fitted with a rail 50, which consists of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 and guides game balls launched from the launching device 60 to the top of the game board 30. As a result, game balls launched in response to the rotation of the handle 18 are guided via the launch rail 61 and rail 50 into the play area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in Figure 5-4). This prevents a game ball that has been guided from the rail 50 into the play area from returning back into the rail 50.

In addition, in this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the gaming board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the gaming board 30. Therefore, the playing area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 in the resin base 38. However, because a gaming ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 before passing through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the playing area.

As shown in Figure 5-3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14, below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray connecting passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 (described later) to the discharge outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray connecting passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is formed with a foul ball passage 72 that guides game balls that fall through the gap to the lower tray 15. As a result, if a game ball launched from the launch device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and travels back up the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball will be discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72.

In addition, the symbol 67 in Figures 5-3 and 5-4 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by the payout mechanism 352 (described later) to the front of the inner frame 12, and is divided into a passage leading to the upper tray connecting passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray connecting passage 71 (lower tray 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the force of a spring or the like, almost closing the outlet of the payout passage 67. In addition, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end of the inlet side of the lower tray connecting passage 71. Furthermore, the entrances (ball inlet sections) of the lower tray connecting passage 71 and the upper tray connecting passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and when the front frame set 14 is closed, each entrance and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance, allowing game balls to pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray connecting passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out will flow toward the lower tray connecting passage 71 (overflowing into the entrance side of the lower tray connecting passage 71), and will be paid out through the lower tray connecting passage 71 to the lower tray 15.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray connecting passage 71. The presence of this full detection switch makes it possible to know when the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (when the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and game balls are stuck in the lower tray connecting passage 71). In this embodiment, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from firing game balls based on the full detection switch continuously detecting game balls for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray connecting passage 71 is resolved and game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are not detected for a predetermined period of time), the launching device 60 is permitted to fire game balls.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 5-5, 5-6, etc. On the rear of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some parts overlapping front to back, and furthermore, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) that supplies game balls, a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. The payout mechanism and protective cover are integrated into one unit, and as the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as the back pack, this unit will be referred to here as the "back pack unit 203."

First, the rear structure of the gaming board 30 will be described. As shown in Figure 5-6, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided protruding rearward on the rear side of the variable display unit 35 (see Figure 5-4), which is arranged corresponding to the through-hole in the center of the gaming board 30. Also, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward through the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 are removably attached in a stacked state in the front and rear.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a, which has an opening for exposing the display unit (LCD screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is fixed to the back side of the frame cover 213. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (storage box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and is fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). An LED control board and other components that drive LEDs and other components built into the center frame 47 are disposed within the frame cover 213. The storage box 42a and board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, allowing the interior to be seen.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, variable winning device 32, start-up winning unit 33, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won in the various winning openings. The game balls recovered by this ball recovery mechanism are guided to the discharge passage 217 (described below) and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control unit 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control unit 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215 and can be opened to the rear.

The main control device 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 comprises a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, with the box base and box cover connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless specified traces are left behind. This makes it easy to detect if the board box 263 has been tampered with.

The game board 30 is also provided with ball entry detection switches (ball entry detection means) that detect game balls that enter various entry ports, such as the general entry port 31, which serve as ball entry means. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5-4, a prize entry port switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general entry port 31, and a count switch 223 is provided on the variable entry device 32. The start entry unit 33 is also provided with a first start entry switch 224a (first condition fulfillment detection means) and a second start entry switch 224b (second condition fulfillment detection means) that correspond to the upper entry port 33a and the lower entry port 33b, respectively. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown in the figure, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the winning slot switch 221, count switch 223, and through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. This first board relay board relays between the winning slot switch 221, etc. and the main control device 261, which serves as the main control means, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

In contrast, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, which detect balls entering the start winning unit 33 (upper winning slot 33a or lower winning slot 33b), are connected directly to the main control unit 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are input to the main control device 261. The main control device 261 then transmits a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status at each time to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the output signal from the payout control device 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, although not shown, a large prize opening solenoid that opens the large prize opening with the variable prize opening device 32 is provided on the back of the game board 30, and a prize opening solenoid that drives the pair of opening/closing members 33c to open and close with the start prize opening unit 33 is provided on the back frame set 215. The back frame set 215 also has a second board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in Figure 5-5, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit consisting of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (right side in Figure 5-5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward around an opening/closing axis extending vertically. In addition, an external relay terminal board 240 is provided in the upper left part (upper right part in Figure 5-5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external relay terminal board 240 is used to relay various information transmissions to the gaming hall's hall computer and is provided with multiple external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numbers are provided, but it includes, for example, a terminal for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, high probability state, etc.), a terminal for outputting information regarding the opening of the front frame set 14 and inner frame 12 detected by the opening detection switches 91 and 92 described below, a terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, no ball in the tank error, and payout error, and a terminal for outputting information regarding the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 311.

The back pack 351 is molded as a single unit from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, with only the bottom open, and is large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to also cover the top and right sides of the board box 263 (the left side in Figure 5-5). As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is closed, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board-side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered.

The payout mechanism 352 is arranged to bypass the protective cover 354. Above the protective cover 354, a tank 355 with an opening at the top is provided, and this tank 355 is continuously replenished with gaming balls supplied from the arcade's island facilities. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which may have, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently slope downstream. Furthermore, a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of gaming balls are appropriately paid out using a predetermined electrical configuration, such as a payout motor. The gaming balls paid out by the payout device 358 are then supplied to the upper tray 19, etc.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 also includes a dispensing relay board 381 that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, as well as a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. Main power, for example, 24V AC, is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

Below the rear pack unit 203 (base box 263), a lower frame set 251 is provided, pivoted on the left side (right side in Figure 5-5) of the inner frame 12 and openable to the rear. As shown in Figure 5-6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage 217 into which game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a discharge chute (not shown) is formed at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage 217 for discharging game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, game balls that win each winning port, such as the general winning port 31, are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the rear frame set 215 and then discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage 217, and game balls that do not win any winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are constructed as separate units that can be opened and closed independently, but the rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 may also be formed as a single unit.

Also, as shown in Figure 5-5, the dispensing control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are removably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a stacked arrangement.

The launch control device 312 and power supply device 313 are housed in a circuit board box 313a and fixed to the rear side of the lower frame set 251. For convenience, the launch control device 312 and power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but in reality they are composed of a single circuit board (printed circuit board).

The dispensing control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 housing the main control device 261 described above, so that evidence that the board box 311a has been opened will be left.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, allowing the interior to be seen.

The dispensing control device 311 is also provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the base box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a dispensing error, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor will rotate forward and reverse, clearing the ball jam (returning to normal operation).

Furthermore, the power supply unit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the circuit board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is maintained, and when power is restored after the power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, when the power is turned off in the normal manner (for example, when the amusement hall closes), the state before the power outage is stored and retained. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, press the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power.

As shown in Figure 5-6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 700 (see Figure 5-1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. By inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotating it in one direction, the inner frame 12 can be unlocked, and by rotating it in the other direction, the front frame set 14 can be unlocked. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As mentioned above, the right-hand frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 has an extended wall 83 formed on it that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 5-5). This makes it difficult to insert a wire or similar object from the rear side of the outer frame 11 and use that wire or similar object to operate the locking device 600. As a result, defensive performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extended wall 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in Figure 5-5) of the rear pack unit 203 and lower frame set 251 from the rear side, so that when the inner frame 12 is closed, the rear pack unit 203 and lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5-4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (to the right of the launching device 60), and as shown in Figure 5-5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in Figure 5-5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can be retracted into the switch main body, with the front frame open detection switch 91 being arranged so that its detection unit faces forward and the inner frame open detection switch 92 being arranged so that its detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is protruding from the switch main body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control unit 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and retracted into the switch main body, it outputs an OFF signal to the main control unit 261. In other words, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14, turning it to the OFF state, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detection part of the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing part 86 integrally formed with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11, turning it to the OFF state, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state.

Next, we will provide a detailed description of the components inside the handle 18.

As shown in Figures 5-7(a) and (b), the handle 18 comprises a fixed handle base 401, a first rotation operation means, a first operation means, and a rotation operation body 402 serving as a first convex means, which are rotatably attached to the handle base 401, and a hemispherical cover 403 located on the front side of the rotation operation body 402 and fixed to the handle base 401.

As shown in Figures 5-8, 5-9, 5-10, and 5-11, the handle base 401 is generally cylindrical overall, with a small diameter section 411 located at the rear and a large diameter section 412 located at the front separated by a partition wall 413. The large diameter section 412 has a partial cutout 414 formed by cutting out a portion of it. Furthermore, a central boss 415 with an insertion hole is integrally formed in the center of the partition wall 413, and a slit-shaped cutout 416 is formed on the inner periphery of the central boss 415.

Furthermore, first, second, and third mounting bosses 417, 418, and 419 are formed to protrude forward from the partition wall 413 at the outer peripheral portion of the central boss 415. In this embodiment, the first and second mounting bosses 417 and 418 are formed in close proximity to each other on a base portion 421 that protrudes from the partition wall 413, and the third mounting boss 419 is formed on the opposite side of the central boss 415 from the base portion 421. A screw hole 422 is formed in the base portion 421 in the intermediate portion between the first and second mounting bosses 417 and 418.

A support shaft 423 protrudes from the partition wall 413 in the vicinity of the third mounting boss 419. Furthermore, the partition wall 413 is formed with an insertion hole (not shown) for guiding various wiring etc. to the rear side.

The rotary operating body 402 comprises a ring portion 431 as a circular first main body portion; multiple protrusions 432 as first protrusions formed on the outer periphery of the ring portion 431; a center mounting portion 433 located at the center of the ring portion 431; and connecting portions 434, 435 extending in two opposite directions from the center mounting portion 433 and connected at their ends to the ring portion 431. Although the rotary operating body 402 is made of resin, its entire surface is covered with a conductive metal plating layer. An annular groove 436 is formed in the ring portion 431 so that the large diameter portion 412 of the handle base 401 can be inserted. The protrusions 432 are designed to make it easier for the player to grip and rotate the device, and are designed to easily accommodate the player's fingers.

Furthermore, the center mounting portion 433 is formed with two bosses 437 for the first gear body, which open toward the rear and have internal threads on their inner circumference. Furthermore, one of the two connecting portions 434, 435, the connecting portion 434, is formed with a spring boss 438, which opens toward the rear and has internal threads on its inner circumference. With this configuration, two approximately arc-shaped openings 439A, 439B are formed by the outer surface of the center mounting portion 433, both side surfaces of the connecting portions 434, 435, and the inner surface of the ring portion 431.

Cover bosses 441, 442, and 443, which protrude toward the rear and have internal threads on their inner peripheries, are formed on the cover 403 so as to face the first to third mounting bosses 417 to 419.

Next, the various components housed between the handle base 401 and the rotary operating body 402 will be described. The partition 413 of the handle base 401 is provided with a variable resistor 445 as a relative rotational position detection means. The variable resistor 445 has a resistor body 446 located on the small-diameter portion 411 side of the partition 413, and a rotary shaft 447 that protrudes from the resistor body 446 and protrudes forward within the large-diameter portion 412. The rotary shaft 447 has a non-circular (approximately D-shaped) cross section and is freely rotatable 360 degrees relative to the resistor body 446. The resistor body 446 varies its resistance value depending on the rotation angle of the rotary shaft 447 and can output a signal related to that resistance value. A second gear body 448 is fitted to the rotary shaft 447. External teeth 449 are formed on approximately three-quarters of the outer periphery of the second gear body 448.

A touch sensor 451 is fixed between the central boss 415 and the base 421. The touch sensor 451 has a metal lead 452, which has a through hole 453 formed in it that corresponds to the screw hole 422 formed in the base 421.

Furthermore, within the large diameter portion 412, a stop switch 455 serving as a stop operation detection means is fixed to the partition wall 413 with screws (not shown). The stop switch 455 is provided with a tongue-shaped pressing operation portion 456 (see Figures 5-15, 5-16, etc.) and a protrusion 457 (see Figure 5-19, etc.) (not shown in Figures 5-8 to 5-11). The protrusion 457 is always maintained in a protruding state by the biasing force of a spring (not shown), thereby maintaining the pressing operation portion 456 in a state pressed in the protruding direction. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion 456 is pressed, the protrusion 457 retracts against the biasing force. This allows the stop switch 455 to detect the pressing operation.

A stop lever 458 serving as a stop operation means is rotatably mounted on the support shaft 423. The stop lever 458 comprises a lever main body 459, an operation portion 461 protruding from the lever main body 459, a pressing portion 462 located on the opposite side of the operation portion 461, and a sliding portion 463 extending from the lever main body 459 and positioned between the stop switch 455 and the partition wall 413. The lever main body 459 comprises an axial hole 464 through which the support shaft 423 is inserted, and an elongated hole 465 through which the third mounting boss 419 is inserted. With this configuration, the operation portion 461 of the stop lever 458 is exposed from the partial cutout 414 of the large diameter portion 412. When the operating portion 461 is pressed, the stop lever 458 rotates around the support shaft 423, causing the pressing portion 462 to press the tip of the pressing portion 456. When the pressing portion 456 is pressed, the protruding portion 457 retracts as described above, and the pressing operation is detected by the stop switch 455. On the other hand, when the operating portion 461 is not operated, the protruding portion 457 remains protruding, and the tip of the pressing portion 456 presses up the pressing portion 462. This causes the operating portion 461 of the stop lever 458 to remain protruding.

Meanwhile, a first gear body 466 is fixed to the center mounting portion 433 of the rotary driver 402. More specifically, the first gear body 466 includes a disk-shaped base portion 467, a substantially cylindrical wall portion 468 that protrudes rearward from the base portion 467, and an assembly boss 469 that protrudes rearward from the center of the base portion 467, located inward of the wall portion 468. Through-holes are formed in the base portion 467 so as to face the two first gear body bosses 437 provided on the center mounting portion 433, and the first gear body boss 437 is screwed in place with these through-holes aligned with the female threads of the first gear body boss 437. Furthermore, slits 471 are formed in the wall portion 468 so as to correspond to the two through-holes. This divides the wall portion 468 into two parts. Of the two wall portions 468, external teeth 472 are provided on the outer periphery of one of the wall portions 468. When the rotation operating body 402 is assembled to the handle base 401, the external teeth 472 of the first gear body 466 mesh with the external teeth 449 of the second gear body 448.

A positioning protrusion 473 is formed at the tip of the mounting boss 469 so as to protrude outward. When assembling the rotary operator 402 to the handle base 401, the mounting boss 469 is inserted into the central boss 415 of the handle base 401. However, this insertion is not possible unless the positioning protrusion 473 is aligned with the slit-shaped notch 416 of the central boss 415. When the insertion is complete, the positioning protrusion 473 faces the rear side of the partition wall 413, enabling the mounting boss 469 to rotate relative to the central boss 415, i.e., allowing the rotary operator 402 to rotate relative to the handle base 401.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 5-13 and elsewhere, one end of a spiral spring 475 serving as a biasing means is fixed by a screw 479 to a spring boss 438 formed on one of the connecting portions 434 of the rotary driver 402. More specifically, the spiral spring 475 is made of a conductive metal material and includes a coiled coil portion 476 and hook portions 477, 478 extending outward from both ends of the coil portion 476 and bent into an annular shape at their tips, forming a generally symmetrical shape in plan view. One hook portion 477 is aligned with the female threaded portion of the spring boss 477 and fixed by the metal screw 479. The coil portion 476 of the spiral spring 475 is housed in a housing groove formed by the assembly boss 469 and wall portion 468. Furthermore, the other hook portion 478 is fixed to the base portion 421 (screw hole 422) of the handle base 401 with a metal screw 481 (this point will be described later).

With this configuration, in the handle 18 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5-12(a), the rotational operator 402 is subjected to a counterclockwise rotational stress due to the biasing force of the spiral spring 475. Meanwhile, one connecting portion 435 of the rotational operator 402 abuts against the second mounting boss 418, and the other connecting portion 434 abuts against the third mounting boss 419, restricting further counterclockwise rotation of the rotational operator 402. Therefore, the relative rotational position of the rotational operator 402 shown in FIG. 5-12(a) becomes the reference position. In other words, the relative rotational position of the second gear body 448 (rotation shaft 447) at this time becomes the reference state where the rotational amount is zero, and the resistance value of the resistor body 446 of the variable resistor 445 in this state becomes a value corresponding to the rotational amount of zero.

On the other hand, when the player rotates the rotary operator 402 clockwise against the biasing force of the spiral spring 475, as shown in FIG. 5-12(b), the center mounting portion 433 of the rotary operator 402 also rotates, causing the first gear body 466 to rotate clockwise. Because the external teeth 449 of the second gear body 448 mesh with the external teeth 472 of the first gear body 466, the second gear body 448 rotates counterclockwise as the first gear body 466 rotates. When the second gear body 448 rotates, the rotation shaft 447 also rotates, and the resistor body 446 of the variable resistor 445 takes on a resistance value corresponding to the rotation angle of the rotation shaft 447, and a signal related to that resistance value is output.

Now, when the relative rotational position of the rotary operator 402 with respect to the handle base 401 is set to a predetermined reference position, the rotational angle of the rotary shaft 477 of the variable resistor 445 must also be the predetermined reference angle. Otherwise, the relative rotational position of the rotary operator 402 and the resistance value will no longer correspond, making it impossible to adjust the firing speed appropriately. Therefore, when assembling the rotary operator 402 to the handle base 401, it is not enough to simply mesh the external teeth 449 of the second gear body 448 with the external teeth 472 of the first gear body 466. In other words, the second gear body 448 must be attached to the rotary shaft 447 in a predetermined correspondence relationship, and the rotational angle of the second gear body 448 (rotary shaft 447) must be maintained at a predetermined reference angle before the first gear body 466 is meshed in a predetermined relative positional relationship.

In this embodiment, the following configuration is adopted to meet the above requirements. That is, as shown in Figures 5-15, 5-16, etc., a locking protrusion 482 serving as a locking portion is integrally formed with the stop lever 458. Meanwhile, a protrusion 483 that protrudes outward is integrally formed with the second gear body 448, and a locking recess 484 serving as a lockable portion with which the locking protrusion 482 can be locked is provided at the tip of the protrusion 483. In this embodiment, the locking protrusion 482 is locked in the locking recess 484 by pressing the stop lever 458 only when the rotation angle of the second gear body 448 (rotation shaft 447) is at a predetermined reference angle.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the assembly of the rotary operating body 402 is complete, even if the stop lever 458 is pressed while the rotary operating body 402 is in a rotated state, the stop lever 458 will not come into contact with the second gear body 448 (particularly the external teeth 449).

Next, we will explain the procedure for assembling the handle base 401, rotation operating body 402, and cover 403 for the handle 18 configured as described above.

First, as shown in Figure 5-13, the first gear body 466 is screwed to the center mounting portion 433 of the rotation driver 402. Next, the coil portion 476 of the spiral spring 475 is placed in the housing groove, and one hook portion 477 is aligned with the spring boss 437, and then secured with the screw 479.

Meanwhile, the variable resistor 445, touch sensor 451, stop switch 455, stop lever 458, etc. are placed in predetermined positions on the handle base 401. The second gear body 448 is also attached to the rotation shaft 447 of the variable resistor 445 so that they are at a predetermined relative angular relationship. However, at this point, with regard to the touch sensor 451, the through hole 453 of the lead portion 452 is merely aligned with the screw hole 422 of the base portion 421 (no screws are used).

Then, the rotation operating body 402, to which the first gear body 466 and spiral spring 475 have been assembled as described above, is assembled to the handle base 401, as shown in Figure 5-14.

At this time, the rotation angle of the second gear body 448 (rotation shaft 447) is adjusted so that the locking protrusion 482 of the stop lever 458 and the protrusion 483 (locking recess 484) of the second gear body 448 are close to each other (see Figures 5-15(a), 5-16, etc.). Then, from the state shown in the figures, the operating portion 461 of the stop lever 458 is pressed, as shown in Figures 5-15(b), 5-17, etc. This causes the locking protrusion 482 to lock into the locking recess 484, and the rotation angle of the second gear body 448 (rotation shaft 447) is set to the predetermined reference angle. Furthermore, as long as this pressed state is maintained, rotation of the second gear body 448 (rotation shaft 447) is restricted, and the reference angle state of the second gear body 448 (rotation shaft 447) is maintained.

Then, while maintaining the second gear body 448 (rotation shaft 447) at the reference angle, the assembly boss 469 of the first gear body 466 attached to the rotary operator 402 is inserted into the central boss 415 (see Figure 5-18, etc.). As described above, this insertion is performed after aligning the positioning protrusion 473 with the slit-shaped cutout 416 of the central boss 415. Furthermore, as the assembly boss 469 is inserted into the central boss 415, the large diameter portion 412 of the handle base 401 is inserted into the annular groove 436 of the rotary operator 402, and the external teeth 449 of the second gear body 448 and the external teeth 472 of the first gear body 466 mesh with each other in a predetermined positional relationship. This completes the assembly of the rotary operator 402 to the handle base 401.

In this manner, in this embodiment, once the second gear body 448 is attached to the rotating shaft 447 in a predetermined correspondence relationship and the rotation angle of the second gear body 448 (rotating shaft 447) is maintained at a predetermined reference angle, the first gear body 466 is meshed in a predetermined relative positional relationship. During this assembly work, the presence of the opening 439A makes it possible to visually confirm the engagement state of the locking protrusion 482 with the locking recess 484. Therefore, the assembly work can be performed while checking the engagement state.

After assembly is complete, the stop lever 458 (operating unit 461) is released from pressure. Once assembly is complete, the positioning protrusion 473 faces the rear side of the partition wall 413 as described above, enabling the assembly boss 469 to rotate relative to the central boss 415, i.e., the rotational operator 402 to rotate relative to the handle base 401. For convenience, Figures 5-17 and 5-18 show only the first gear body 466 as a component on the rotational operator 402 side, but in reality, the rotational operator 402 is assembled.

At the completion of the above assembly, the other hook portion 478 of the spiral spring 475 has not yet been secured. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5-19, the through hole 453 of the lead portion 452 of the touch sensor 451 is aligned with the threaded hole 422 of the base portion 421. The other hook portion 478 is then aligned with this threaded hole 422 and secured with a screw 481. In this embodiment, the threaded hole 422 is provided between the first and second mounting bosses 417, 418. Therefore, by sliding the other hook portion 478 of the spiral spring 475 along (while being guided by) the bosses 417, 418, it is relatively easy to align the hook portion 478 with the threaded hole 422 (through hole 453 of the lead portion 452). Furthermore, the presence of the opening 439B allows the hook portion 478 to be visually confirmed while performing the screwing operation. These factors facilitate smooth fastening with the screw 481.

Once the screw 481 is fully threaded, one hook portion 477 of the spiral spring 475 is screwed to the rotary operator 402 (spring boss 438), and the other hook portion 478 is screwed to the handle base 401 (pedestal 421). The surface of the rotary operator 402 is covered with a metal plating layer, and one end (hook portion 477) of the metal spiral spring 475 is electrically connected to the rotary operator 402, while the other end (hook portion 478) of the spiral spring 475 is electrically connected to the metal lead portion 452 of the touch sensor 451. This establishes electrical continuity between the rotary operator 402 and the touch sensor 451. Therefore, when a player touches the rotary operator 402, this can be detected by the touch sensor 451.

Finally, the first to third mounting bosses 417-419 on the handle base 401 are aligned with the cover bosses 441-443 on the cover 403, and then the cover 403 is fixed to the handle base 401 by fastening each of them with screws.

Next, we will describe in detail the various components, mainly those on the outside of the handle 18, which are characteristic of this embodiment (note that for convenience, the second rotation operating body 800, described below, is omitted from Figures 5-8 to 5-19).

As shown in Figures 5-20 and 5-21, the handle 18 is equipped with a second rotary operating means, a second operating means, and a second rotary operating body 800 serving as a second convex means, which is provided at the rear side of the rotary operating body 402 and is rotatable about the same axis as the rotary operating body 402. The second rotary operating body 800 is fitted onto the small diameter portion 411 of the handle base 401 and includes a main body portion 801 serving as an annular second main body portion, and a second convex portion 802 protruding from the main body portion 801. The second convex portion 802 is composed of a curved root portion 803, a protruding portion 804 protruding radially outward from the root portion 803, and a disc portion 805 provided at the tip of the protruding portion 804. The sides of the root portion 803, protruding portion 804, and disc portion 805 form a "storage portion" capable of accommodating a finger.

The second rotational operating body 800 is also provided with a restricting means 830 that can restrict the rotation of the second rotational operating body 800. The restricting means 830 has a first restricting means 831 located on the front side of the second rotational operating body 800 and a second restricting means 832 located on the rear side. The first restricting means 831 includes a first fixing ring 833 and a compression spring 834. The first fixing ring 833 is fixed in contact with or in close proximity to the partition wall 413 in the small diameter portion 411 of the handle base 401. The compression spring 834 is inserted through the outer periphery of the small diameter portion 411 of the handle base 401, with one end joined to the first fixing ring 833 and the other end joined to the second rotational operating body 800.

The second restricting means 832 has a plurality of mating protrusions 835 that protrude toward the rear from the rear side of the main body 801 of the second rotary operating body 800, and a plurality of mating holes 836 into which the mating protrusions 835 are fitted, and is also equipped with a second annular fixing ring 837 that is fixed to the outer periphery of the small diameter portion 411 of the handle base 401 rearward of the second restricting means 832. Note that in this embodiment, the initial state of the second restricting means 832 is such that no rotational force is being applied by the compression spring 834, and the second restricting means 832 is held in a predetermined initial position (reference position) to which a biasing force is applied (for example, the rotational position shown in Figure 5-7(a) where the mating protrusions 835 are fitted into the corresponding mating holes 836).

In addition, in this embodiment, the outer circumferential surfaces of the ring portion 431 of the rotary operator 402, the first fixed ring 833 of the first restricting means 831, the main body portion 801 of the second rotary operator 800, and the second fixed ring 837 of the second restricting means 832 are substantially flush with each other. The compressible length of the compression spring 834 is set to be longer than the protruding length of the mating protrusion 835. The second rotary operator 800 is disposed a predetermined distance apart from the rotary operator 402 in the rotation axis direction of the rotary operator 402, and can be operated independently from the rotary operator 402.

With this configuration, in this embodiment, the handle 18 can be operated in the following two ways. That is, in the first way, as before, the player can rotate the rotation control body 402 to the desired rotation operation amount (rotation angle) and then continue to hold it, thereby continuously launching game balls.

Furthermore, players who wish to reduce fatigue caused by continued gripping the second rotary operation body 800 can do so by performing the following series of operations (taking the second operation mode). Specifically, as described above, in the initial state, the second restricting means 832 is in a predetermined rotational position, with the mating protrusion 835 mated with the corresponding mating hole 836, as shown in Figures 5-7(a), (b), and 5-22(a). The rear surface of the main body 801 of the second rotary operation body 800 and the front surface of the second fixing ring 837 of the second restricting means 832 are in contact with each other. In this state, the biasing force of the compression spring 834 acts, restricting the rotation of the second rotary operation body 800, i.e., maintaining the rotation-restricted state. From this state, the player grips the second rotary operation body 800 and moves it toward the player, as shown in Figure 5-22(b). As a result, the compression spring 834 is compressed against the biasing force, the fitting protrusion 835 is released, and the second rotation operation body 800 enters a so-called rotation-permitted state. Next, as shown in FIG. 5-22(c), the player rotates the second rotation operation body 800 by an arbitrary rotation operation amount (rotation angle) to rotate the second protrusion 802 to the desired position (a position where the player's fingers can be placed when gripping the handle 18 during play). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5-22(d), the player moves the second rotation operation body 800 to the desired rotation position, and then slowly releases his/her hand while maintaining that rotation position, thereby fitting the fitting protrusion 835 into the fitting hole 836, thereby once again placing the second rotation operation body 800 in a rotation-restricted state. At this time, the biasing force of the compression spring 834 continues to act while the mating convex portion 835 is engaged, maintaining the rotational position. Next, as shown in FIG. 5-22(e), the player rotates the rotational operation body 402 to the desired position. In this state, as shown in FIG. 5-22(f), the player places (places) a finger (e.g., an index finger) between the convex portion 432 and the second convex portion 802 (base portion 803) and abuts against both convex portions 432 and 802. In this state, the convex portion 432 abuts against the right side of the finger, and the second convex portion 802 (base portion 803) abuts against the left side. At this time, a biasing force (action) acts on the finger from the convex portion 432, and a force (reaction) pushing back the biasing force acts from the second convex portion 802 (base portion 803). The forces described above balance out, and as a result, the position of the convex portion 432 is maintained, i.e., the rotational state of the rotational control body 402 is maintained. This means that the amount of rotation of the rotational control body 402 (handle 18) does not change, meaning the strength of the game ball launch remains the same, and the game ball can be shot to approximately the same position (area) on the game board 30 (game area).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Figure 5-20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) serving as the main control means is equipped with a CPU 501, which is a one-chip microcomputer that serves as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 contains a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 502 are executed, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, and each function may be integrated into a separate chip.

RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of the CPU 501's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by the CPU 501 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 503a.

In addition, RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a is backed up.

Backup area 503a is an area that stores the values of the stack pointer, registers, I/O, etc. at the time of power outage (including power outages; the same applies below) so that when power is restored, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off due to a power outage or other reason. Data is written to backup area 503a by the main processing when power is cut off, and conversely, the values written to backup area 503a are restored by the main processing when power is turned on (including power on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies below). Note that when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from power outage monitoring circuit 542 (described below). When a power outage occurs, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501, which has built-in ROM 502 and RAM 503, via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus, a data bus, etc. The input/output port 505 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and normal symbol display device 41, which will be described later. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

For convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input/output port 505 is connected to various detection switches such as the winning slot switch 221, count switch 223, start winning unit switches 224a and 224b, and through gate switch 225, as well as various electrical components such as various boards. In other words, the main control device 261 is provided with multiple terminal sections (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections and the like make up the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) serving as sub-control means comprises a CPU 551, which is an arithmetic unit; a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551; a RAM 553, which is memory that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 552 are executed; an input/output port 554; a bus line 555; and various other circuits, such as an interrupt circuit, timer circuit, and data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). The RAM 553 is memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 via the bus line 555, as well as the display control device 45. Furthermore, the input/output port 554 is connected to the speaker SP, the effect button 125, various illumination units, and lamps 102-104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 causes the display controller 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (e.g., a variable pattern command) sent from the main controller 261, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main controller 261 display whether or not a jackpot has occurred, and the decorative pattern display device 42 controlled by the sub-controller 262 displays information in accordance with the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls using the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is a calculation device, is equipped with a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 that is used as work memory, etc.

Like the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261, the RAM 513 of the dispensing control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the CPU 511 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 513a.

RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is backed up. Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the configuration may be such that data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

Backup area 513a is an area that stores the values of the stack pointer, registers, I/O, etc. at the time of power outage so that when power is restored, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was turned off when power is turned back on if the power is turned off due to a power outage or other reason. Writing to this backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when power is turned off, and the values written to backup area 513a are restored by the main processing when power is turned on. Note that, like CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, a power outage signal SK1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of CPU 511 when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When this power outage signal SK1 is input to CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power outage processing.

The working area is provided with a payout permission flag that sets permission for the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag that is set when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received, and a command buffer that stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out prize balls. A specific command that allows the payout of prize balls is sent from the main control unit 261, and is turned on when the specific command is received, and is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before power was cut off is restored. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initial process of the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a payout restoration command that is sent when power is restored to the main control unit 261.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the dispensing control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the dispensing permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before power was cut off is restored, and it is also turned off when the received command is judged by the command judgment process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control unit 261, a launch control unit 312, a payout unit 358, and the like.

The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation section (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10 and to the card unit (ball lending unit) located to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, and receives ball lending operation commands from the player and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in cash machines where game balls are loaned directly from a ball lending device or the like to the upper tray 19 without going through the card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of gaming balls by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. More specifically, the variable resistor 445, touch sensor 451, and stop switch 455 described above are electrically connected to the launch control device 312. The variable resistor 445 outputs a signal indicating a resistance value, the touch sensor 451 outputs a signal indicating whether the player is touching the rotary control body 402, and the stop switch 455 outputs a signal indicating whether the stop lever 459 is being pressed, all of which are input to the launch control device 312. In this embodiment, the launch device 60 (solenoid) is activated and launches gaming balls with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18, provided that the payout control device 311 outputs a launch permission signal, the touch sensor 451 outputs a signal indicating that the player is touching the rotary control body 402, and the stop switch 455 does not output a signal indicating that the stop lever 459 is being pressed. Furthermore, when a ball is launched, the launch control device 312 adjusts the power supplied to the launch device 60 (solenoid) based on the resistance value signal input from the variable resistor 445, thereby adjusting the launch speed of the game ball.

The display control device 45 executes the variable display of decorative patterns on the decorative pattern display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, program ROM 522, work RAM 523, video RAM 524, character ROM 525, video display processor (VDP) 526, input port 527, output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. The CPU 521, program ROM 522, work RAM 523, and VDP 526 are also connected to the input port 527 via bus line 530. The VDP 526 is also connected to an output port 529 via bus line 531, and the output port 529 is connected to the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives display commands sent from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received commands, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 526 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 526). This controls the display on the decorative pattern display device 42.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs.

Video RAM 524 is memory that stores display data to be displayed on decorative pattern display device 42. By rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of decorative pattern display device 42 are changed. Character ROM 525 is memory that stores character data such as patterns to be displayed on decorative pattern display device 42.

VDP526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal display drive circuit) built into decorative pattern display device 42. Because VDP526 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual function is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP526 adjusts the timing of CPU521, video RAM524, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and also reads display data stored in video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on decorative pattern display device 42.

The power supply device 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each component of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control unit 261, dispensing control unit 311, etc. via a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24-volt AC power supplied from an external source, generates +12V power to drive various switches and motors, +5V power for logic, and backup power for RAM backup, and supplies these +12V, +5V, and backup power sources to the main control unit 261, dispensing control unit 311, etc. The launch control unit 312 is supplied with operating power (+12V, +5V, etc.) via the dispensing control unit 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via the control devices to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the NMI terminals of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control unit 311 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and if this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and perform power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the 5-volt output, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage processing, even after the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage drops below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and dispensing control unit 311 can execute and complete the power outage processing normally.

The RAM clearing switch circuit 543 is a circuit that receives the switch signal of the RAM clearing switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 depending on the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clearing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clearing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clearing signal SK2 to the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clearing switch 323 pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAMs 503, 513 of the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311 are cleared.

As described above in detail, according to this embodiment, some players can continue to shoot game balls by continuing to hold the rotational control body 402 after rotating it to a desired rotational operation amount (rotation angle), as in the past. Furthermore, players who do not wish to hold it in this manner can perform the series of operations described above. That is, by simply rotating the rotational control body 402 and contacting their fingers with the convex portion 432 and the second convex portion 802 (base portion 803), the player can hold the rotational control body 402 at a certain rotational operation amount without exerting force on their fingers. This significantly reduces the sense of fatigue caused by continuing to hold the rotational control body 402. As a result, the player's enjoyment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the rotation restriction state and the rotation permission state can be switched based on the player's intentions. This makes it easy to adjust the amount of rotation of the second rotation operation body 800, and also makes it possible to prevent the second rotation operation body 800 from rotating unintentionally. This also improves convenience.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, fatigue caused by continuing to hold the handle 18 can be significantly reduced. This makes it difficult to, for example, fit a foreign object between the rotational operation body 402 and the handle base 401, causing the rotational operation body 402 to be held and fixed in a predetermined rotational operation state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the handle 18 from being damaged by a foreign object, etc., and ultimately eliminate the risk of the value of the pachinko machine 10 decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation mode for entering the rotation restricted state is different from the operation mode for entering the rotation permitted state. This prevents problems such as players accidentally entering the rotation restricted state or the rotation permitted state, further improving convenience.

In addition, when we look at each rotational driver 402, 800, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved with a relatively simple configuration that includes an annular ring portion 431, a main body portion 801, and protrusions 432, 802 that protrude from the outer surfaces of the ring portion 431 and the main body portion 801. This eliminates the need for a separate special mechanism, making it possible to prevent the structure from becoming complicated and the costs from increasing.

In particular, since the second rotational operation body 800 has an annular main body 801, rotational operation can be easily performed, further improving operability.

Furthermore, the outer circumferential surfaces of the ring portion 431 of the rotary operation body 402, the first fixed ring 833 of the first restricting means 831, the main body portion 801 of the second rotary operation body 800, and the second fixed ring 837 of the second restricting means 832 are substantially flush with each other, which reduces any discomfort when gripping the handle 18 or placing your fingers on it. As a result, operability and convenience are improved.

In addition, the base 803 of the second protrusion 802 is curved, and the base 803 and other components form a storage compartment. This makes it easier to position the finger, allowing for smooth play. Furthermore, by keeping the finger in the storage compartment, problems such as unstable finger positioning can be prevented, and the rotation operation state can be stabilized.

Furthermore, the configuration of the handle 18 in this embodiment (mainly the second rotation operating body 800 and the restricting means 830) is relatively simple and can be realized at low cost. This prevents the configuration from becoming too complicated, thereby improving convenience.

Furthermore, the finger is configured to be held between the convex portion 432 and the second convex portion 802. This prevents problems such as unstable finger positioning during play, and enables stable rotation operation.

In addition, the second rotational operation body 800 is located a predetermined distance in the rotation axis direction from the rotational operation body 402 and can be operated independently from the rotational operation body 402. This makes it less likely that the operation of the second rotational operation body 800 will be hindered by the presence of the rotational operation body 402, further improving operability.

In addition, in this embodiment, the player can rotate the second rotation operation body 800 by performing an operation mode that sets the rotation to a rotation-permitted state (see the explanation related to Figure 5-22(b) above), and can restrict the rotation of the second rotation operation body 800 by performing an operation mode that sets the rotation to a rotation-restricted state (see the explanation related to Figure 5-22(d) above), so the second rotation operation body 800 can be fixed at the rotation position desired by the player. This allows for precise adjustment of the speed of the gaming media being fired, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, since the rotational operation body 402 and the second rotational operation body 800 can be rotated in the same direction, operability for the player can be improved.

Furthermore, the handle base 401 has a large diameter portion 412 and a small diameter portion 411, and the convex portion 432 and the second convex portion 802 both protrude outward from the large diameter portion 412. Therefore, when a player places their finger between the convex portion 432 and the second convex portion 802, they can place the base of the finger or their hand on the large diameter portion 412. This makes it less likely that the finger will feel uncomfortable due to the difference in height (step), which ultimately reduces a loss of interest.

The handle 18 also includes a compression spring 834 that ensures that the rotational position of the second rotational operating body 800 is a predetermined initial position (capable of applying a biasing force to the second rotational operating body 800). Therefore, for players who are unsure of the position to which to rotate the second rotational operating body 800, the second rotational operating body 800 will naturally be positioned in the predetermined initial position, making it easier to use and improving operability. Furthermore, for example, if there is no need to use the second rotational operating body 800, setting the predetermined initial position allows the second protrusion 802 to be positioned in a position that does not interfere with the rotational operation of the rotational operating body 402, thereby minimizing any reduction in operability.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented, for example, as follows:

(a) In the above embodiment, the first restricting means 831 is located on the front side and the second restricting means 832 is located on the rear side relative to the second rotary operating body 800. However, as shown in Figures 5-24, 5-25, and 5-26, the second restricting means 832 may be located on the front side and the first restricting means 831 on the rear side. Note that, since the positions of the first restricting means 831 and the second restricting means 832 shown in Figures 5-20, 5-21, and 5-22 are simply swapped, explanations of the names of the components will be omitted. In this configuration, as in the above embodiment, the handle 18 can be operated in the following two ways. That is, in the first operating way, as before, the player can continuously launch game balls by rotating the rotary operating body 402 to the desired rotational operation amount (rotation angle) and then continuing to hold it.

Furthermore, players who wish to reduce fatigue caused by continued gripping the second rotary operator 800 can do so by performing the following series of operations (taking the second operation mode). Specifically, in the initial state, the second restricting means 832 is in a predetermined rotational position, with the mating protrusion 835 mated with the corresponding mating hole 836, as shown in FIG. 5-26(a). The rear surface of the second fixing ring 837 of the second restricting means 832 and the front surface of the main body 801 of the second rotary operator 800 are in contact with each other. In this state, the biasing force of the compression spring 834 acts, restricting the rotation of the second rotary operator 800, i.e., the rotation-restricted state, and the restriction is maintained. From this state, the player grips the second rotary operator 800 and moves it toward the rear, as shown in FIG. 5-26(b). As a result, the compression spring 834 is compressed against the biasing force, the fitting protrusion 835 is released, and the second rotation operation body 800 enters a so-called rotation-permitted state. Next, as shown in FIG. 5-26(c), the player rotates the second rotation operation body 800 by an arbitrary rotation operation amount (rotation angle) to rotate the second protrusion 802 to the desired position (a position where the player's fingers can be placed when gripping the handle 18 during play). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5-26(d), the player moves the second rotation operation body 800 to the desired rotation position, and then slowly releases his/her hand while maintaining that rotation position, thereby fitting the fitting protrusion 835 into the fitting hole 836, thereby once again placing the second rotation operation body 800 in a rotation-restricted state. At this time, the biasing force of the compression spring 834 continues to act while the mating convex portion 835 is engaged, maintaining the rotational position. Then, as shown in FIG. 5-26(e), the player rotates the rotational operation body 402 to the desired position. In this state, as shown in FIG. 5-26(f), the player places (places) a finger (e.g., an index finger) between the convex portion 432 and the second convex portion 802 (base portion 803) and abuts against both convex portions 432 and 802. In this state, the convex portion 432 abuts against the right side of the finger, and the second convex portion 802 (base portion 803) abuts against the left side. At this time, a biasing force (action) acts on the finger from the convex portion 432, and a force (reaction) pushing back the biasing force acts from the second convex portion 802 (base portion 803). The forces described above balance out, and as a result, the position of the convex portion 432 is maintained, i.e., the rotational state of the rotational operation body 402 is maintained. In this state, the second restriction means 832 is positioned closer to the front than the second rotational operation body 800, so the second convex portion 802 (base portion 803) is positioned closer to the front than in the above embodiment (Figure 5-22 (f)). This prevents problems such as the tip of the finger not being able to reach the finger or the finger position becoming unstable, and stabilizes the rotational operation state.

(b) In the above embodiment, the second rotational operating body 800 is rotated to a desired position, and then the mating projection 835 is fitted into the mating hole 836 to restrict rotation. However, instead of this configuration, as shown in FIG. 5-27, sawtooth portions 850 may be provided on the second rotational operating body 800 (main body 801) and the second fixing ring 837. By providing sawtooth portions 850 with a relatively fine pitch in this way, when rotating the second rotational operating body 800 to a desired position, the rotational position can be adjusted at a finer interval (pitch) than in the above embodiment, thereby further improving convenience.

In addition, the second rotation operating body 800 can be adjusted at finer intervals (pitch) by increasing the number of mating protrusions 835 and mating holes 836 in the above embodiment. Furthermore, instead of the mating holes 836 provided in the second restricting means 832, mating recesses, for example, may be provided. Furthermore, tapered guide portions may be provided at the tips of the mating protrusions 835 and mating holes 836 to facilitate mating.

(c) In the above embodiment, the second convex portion 802 includes a base portion 803, a protruding portion 804, and a disk portion 805, but the shape of the second convex portion 802 is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in Figure 5-28, instead of the disk portion 805, a decorative portion 851 with a rabbit or other motif may be provided. This makes it possible to improve the appearance quality.

(d) While the above embodiment does not mention the materials of the second rotary operation body 800, the restricting means 830, etc., for example, the compression spring 834 may be made of a metal such as stainless steel, and the other components may be made of a resin such as ABS or PP. Of course, these materials are not limited to these. Furthermore, the portion that constitutes the housing for the second convex portion 802 may be made of an elastic material (a material with cushioning properties) such as rubber or elastomer. Such an elastic material can protect the fingers, further significantly reducing fatigue and allowing for longer gameplay. This stabilizes the rotary operation state, further improving convenience for the player.

Furthermore, for example, as shown in FIG. 5-29, a finger protection cover 852 as a rubber elastic member may be provided on the second rotational operating body 800, particularly on the second convex portion 802. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5-29, by configuring the finger protection cover 852 as a separate body from the main body 801 of the second rotational operating body 800, the finger protection cover 852 can be easily replaced or repaired. This not only protects the fingers, but also extends the life of the handle 18.

(e) The second convex portion is not limited to the shape of the second convex portion 802 in the above embodiment, as long as it can accommodate a finger. For example, as shown in FIG. 5-30, a perforated ring 853 having holes spaced equally apart along the midpoints of the inner and outer circumferences may be provided. In this case, the sidewall portion around the holes corresponds to the second convex portion. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5-31, a wave-shaped ring 854 may be provided in which the perforated ring 853 is cut at the midpoint. For example, even if the second rotational operating body 800 shifts from the desired rotation position when the rotation of the second rotational operating body 800 is restricted, the provision of the perforated ring 853 or the wave-shaped ring 854 provides multiple locations for placing fingers, allowing for fine adjustment by slightly shifting the finger placement position. This eliminates the need to set the second rotation operating body 800 to the rotation-permitted state again, then adjust it to the desired rotation position and set it to the rotation-restricted state, further improving convenience.

(f) In the above embodiment, the second convex portion 802 is generally plate-shaped, but the shape is not particularly limited. For example, the outer circumferential surface of the second convex portion 802 may be curved, i.e., rounded without edges (corners). In this case, even if a finger hits the second convex portion 802, it is less likely to be damaged.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the protrusion amount (height toward the outer periphery) of the convex portion 432 is configured to be smaller than the protrusion amount of the second convex portion 802, but it may be configured to be larger. In this case, problems caused by the presence of the second convex portion 802 interfering with the rotation operation of the rotation operation body 402 can be suppressed, while the protrusion amount of the convex portion 432 can be sufficiently ensured, ensuring the desired rotation operability. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to a decrease in operability.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second rotary operating body 800 is set to have a greater depth width than the rotary operating body 402, but it may also be set to have a smaller width. In this case, the space in the depth direction does not need to be expanded as much. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effects while making the pachinko machine 10 more compact.

(g) In the above embodiment, the second rotary operating body 800 is configured to be rotatable using the first restricting means 831 and the second restricting means 832, but it does not necessarily have to be rotatable. For example, as shown in FIG. 5-32, the restricting means 831, 832 may be omitted, and a push-button switch (alternate type) mechanism typically found on devices such as radio cassette players and electric fans may be incorporated. In this configuration, the handle 18 includes an annular main body 860 with multiple holes, and multiple substantially rectangular second protrusions 861 provided in the holes. The second protrusions 861 are switchable between a non-protruding state in which the upper surface of the second protrusions 861 is flush with the main body 860, and a protruding state in which the upper surface of the second protrusions 861 is positioned above the main body 860. By pressing the top surface of the second convex portion 861 in a non-protruding state, the second convex portion 861 will protrude, and by pressing the protruding second convex portion 861 from the outside, it will return to a non-protruding state. This configuration allows the player to protrude the second convex portion 861 to the desired position simply by pressing it, meaning that a rotation operation is no longer necessary. This further improves convenience.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the first operating means and first convex means are the rotary operating body 402 having an annular ring portion 431, and the second operating means and second convex means are the second rotary operating body 800 having an annular main body portion 801. Alternatively, the annular ring portion 431 and the annular main body portion 801 may be omitted. That is, the first convex means may be a first convex means (not shown) that is rotatably mounted on the handle base 401 and protrudes from the outer periphery of the handle base 401 (e.g., lever-shaped), and the second convex means may be a second convex means (not shown) that is rotatably mounted on the handle base 401 and protrudes from the outer periphery of the handle base 401 (e.g., lever-shaped).

The second convex means, such as the second rotary operator 800, can rotate independently (single-handedly, separately) from the first convex means, such as the rotary operator 402, which has a convex portion, in the rotation direction from a predetermined initial position. This configuration allows the second convex means, such as the second rotary operator 800, to be rotated in the rotation direction even when the first convex means, such as the rotary operator 402, is in the reference position, and can then be fixed in place. Furthermore, even when the first convex means, such as the rotary operator 402, is rotated a predetermined amount, the second convex means, such as the second rotary operator 800, can be rotated in the rotation direction. In this way, by allowing the second convex means to be operated independently of the first convex means, the player can fine-tune the flight distance of the game ball depending on the thickness of the player's fingers, etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the second convex means of the second rotational operation body 800 or the like is configured to be rotatable when the first convex means of the rotational operation body 402 or the like is in a non-operated state. However, the first convex means of the rotational operation body 402 or the like may also be configured to rotate the same amount as the second convex means of the second rotational operation body 800 or the like is rotated (in conjunction with, interlocked with, etc.). In a case like this example, the convex portion 432 of the rotational operation body 402 needs to be located further toward the tip of the rotation direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) than the second convex portion 802 of the second rotational operation body 800 (a predetermined positional relationship). However, as long as such a "predetermined positional relationship" is established between the two in their reference positions (initial positions) and a distance sufficient to allow a finger to be placed therebetween is preset, the interlocking configuration as described above may also be acceptable.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 5-33, the restricting means 831, 832 may be omitted and a horizontal movement guide 870 may be used. In this configuration, the handle 18 includes an annular main body 871, a horizontal movement guide 870 fixed to the upper part of the main body 871, a second protrusion 872 slidably mounted on the horizontal movement guide 870, and a fixing screw 873. The second protrusion 872 is slidable in the longitudinal direction of the horizontal movement guide 870 when the fixing screw 873 is loosened, and can be fixed in place by tightening the fixing screw 873. This configuration allows the player to position the second protrusion 872 as desired by sliding it. In other words, as with the handle 18 shown in FIG. 5-32, no rotation is required. This further improves convenience.

(h) In the above embodiment, the second rotary operating body 800 (second protrusion 802) is fixed by fitting the mating protrusion 835 of the second rotary operating body 800 into the mating hole 836 of the second fixing ring 837. However, the second rotary operating body 800 does not necessarily have to be directly fitted. For example, as shown in FIG. 5-34, the first restricting means 831 and the second restricting means 832 may be omitted, and a changeover switch 880 provided in the center of the outer periphery of the cover 403 may be used. In this configuration, a mechanism (such as an electromagnetic locking mechanism not shown) composed of an electromagnet or the like is provided inside the handle 18, which can lock and unlock the second rotary operating body 800 (second protrusion 802) by pressing the changeover switch 880. This mechanism allows the player to rotate the second rotational operation body 800 to the desired position, and then press the selector switch 880 to lock the second rotational operation body 800 (second convex portion 802). This means that there is no need to directly fit the second rotational operation body 800.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 5-35, the first restricting means 831 and the second restricting means 832 may be omitted, and a thumbscrew 881 may be used that can adjust the diameter of the main body 801 (second rotational operation body 800). In this configuration, the player tightens the thumbscrew 881, thereby reducing the diameter of the main body 801 (second rotational operation body 800) and pressing the main body 801 against the handle base 401. This pressing fixes the main body 801 (second rotational operation body 800) to the handle base 401, i.e., fixes the second convex portion 802. Therefore, the player can rotate the second rotational operation body 800 to the desired position, and then tighten the thumbscrew 881 to fix the second rotational operation body 800 (second convex portion 802). In other words, like the handle 18 shown in Figure 5-34, there is no need to directly operate the second rotation operating body 800.

With each of the above configurations, the second convex portion 802 of the second rotary operating body 800 can be fixed in the desired position simply by performing a relatively simple operation, such as pressing the selector switch 880 or tightening the thumbscrew 881. This further improves convenience, and the appearance is simplified compared to the above embodiment, making it possible to improve the appearance quality as well.

(i) For example, as shown in FIG. 5-36, a guide label 890 may be attached to the handle base 401 or the like, which carries information instructing or suggesting the rotation direction of the rotational operation body 402 and the second rotational operation body 800. By checking the guide label 890, the player can grasp at a glance the rotation direction of each rotational operation body 402, 800. As a result, operability for the player can be further improved. Of course, instead of the guide label 890, information instructing or suggesting the rotation direction (for example, an arrow) may be directly attached (printed, engraved, etc.) to the handle base 401 or the like.

(j) In the above embodiment, the second protrusion 802 is provided in only one location. However, as shown in FIG. 5-37, it may be provided in two (or multiple) locations. By using this configuration, it becomes possible to use the second protrusions 802 provided in different locations for different purposes, for example, by using the second protrusion 802 provided on the right side of FIG. 5-37 for normal play (i.e., when hitting from the left), and the second protrusion 802 provided on the left side for use during special bonuses (i.e., when hitting from the right). As a result, convenience can be further improved.

In particular, since the second protrusions 802 are provided in two locations separated by a predetermined distance, for example, when switching the firing speed from normal play (so-called left-hand shots) to special play (so-called right-hand shots), there is no need to rotate the second rotary operation body 800 each time; instead, the player simply places (contacts) a separate second protrusion 802 on which to place (contact) their finger. As a result, this eliminates the hassle for the player, and in this sense, the game's enjoyment can be enhanced.

(k) In the above embodiment, the restricting means 830 is provided, which is composed of the first restricting means 831 and the second restricting means 832. However, the restricting means 830 may be omitted, and a recess or the like may be provided, for example, between the rotational operation body 402 and the second rotational operation body 800. By placing a finger in the recess, the rotational operation body 402 can be held with a constant amount of rotational operation without applying a large amount of force to the finger.

(l) In the above embodiment, a second rotational operation body 800 is provided that is parallel to the rotational operation body 402 and can be rotated around the same axis as the rotational operation body 402. However, as shown in FIG. 5-38, for example, instead of the second rotational operation body 800, a third rotational operation body 900 serving as a second operating means and second convex means can be provided that is parallel to the rotational operation body 402 and can be rotated around a different axis as the rotational center. The third rotational operation body 900 has multiple third convex portions 901 and a ratchet gear-type clutch mechanism (one-way clutch) that can be rotated only clockwise as shown in the figure. This configuration allows the third rotational operation body 900 to be rotated in a manner different from the rotational operation of the rotational operation body 402, thereby improving convenience for the player.

In addition, the rotation radius of the third rotational operator 900 is set smaller than the rotation radius of the rotational operator 402. Therefore, depending on the rotation angle of the third rotational operator 900, the amount of protrusion of the third convex portion 901 can be made smaller. As a result, for players who do not need the third rotational operator 900, the third convex portion 901 can be made not to protrude as much. As a result, a decrease in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, the third rotary operating body 900 is configured to be able to change its state between a small protrusion state, in which the third convex portion 901 protrudes only slightly outward, and a large protrusion state, in which the third convex portion 901 protrudes more outward than in the small protrusion state, depending on its rotational position. Therefore, the protrusion amount of the third convex portion 901 can be made smaller or larger depending on the rotation angle of the third rotary operating body 900. This allows the player to select the protrusion amount that is convenient for them. Also, as mentioned above, for players who do not need the third rotary operating body 900, the small protrusion state allows the third convex portion 901 to not protrude as much. As a result, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, with regard to the amount of outer circumferential protrusion from the handle base 401 of the convex portion (first convex portion) 432 of the rotary operating body 402 serving as the first operating means and first convex portion, and the second convex portion 802 of the second rotary operating body 800 serving as the second operating means and second convex portion (the same applies to the third convex portion 901 of the third rotary operating body 900), the second convex portion 802 of the second rotary operating body 800 serving as the second operating means and second convex portion may protrude more than the convex portion (first convex portion) 432 of the rotary operating body 402 serving as the first operating means and first convex portion. Conversely, the second convex portion 802 of the second rotary operating body 800 serving as the second operating means and second convex portion may protrude less than the convex portion (first convex portion) 432 of the rotary operating body 402 serving as the first operating means and first convex portion. Here, the amount of protrusion may be the length of protrusion from the handle base 401 in the outer circumferential direction, or the volume of the protrusion from the handle base 401 in the outer circumferential direction, or both.

(m) In the above embodiment, the second rotational operation body 800 is provided behind the rotational operation body 402. However, the second rotational operation body 800 (and the regulating means 830, etc.) may also be provided in front of the rotational operation body 402. If the second rotational operation body 800 is located behind the rotational operation body 402, it is possible that, for example, when the rotational operation body 402 is set to a rotational operation position desired by the player (the best position), the player's hands or fingers may get in the way, making it difficult to rotate the second rotational operation body 800. In this regard, if the second rotational operation body 800 (and the regulating means 830, etc.) is provided in front of the rotational operation body 402, it becomes easier to perform operations such as setting the ball, reducing the burden on the player and achieving a desirable ball shot.

(n) Furthermore, the positional relationship between the rotary operation body 402 and the second rotary operation body 800 in the front-to-rear direction (front-to-rear direction) may be the same as that shown in FIG. 5-39. To achieve the positional relationship shown in the figure, for example, a long hole 431a may be provided in the ring portion 431 between the multiple protrusions 423 of the rotary operation body 402, and the second protrusion 802 of the second rotary operation body 800 may protrude from the long hole 431a. In this case, it is also possible to provide a changeover switch 880, an electromagnetic locking mechanism (not shown), or the like, as illustrated in FIG. 5-34, etc. Then, after rotating the second rotary operation body 800 to the desired position, the player may press the changeover switch 880 to lock the second rotary operation body 800 (second protrusion 802) (using an electromagnetic locking mechanism, etc.) and rotate the rotary operation body 402. Even with this configuration, the rotational control body 402 can be held at a constant rotational angle simply by contacting the convex portion 432 and the second convex portion 802 with the fingers, without applying much force to the fingers. This prevents the rotational angle of the rotational control body 402 (handle 18) from changing; in other words, the launch strength of the game ball remains the same, allowing the game ball to be shot to approximately the same position (area) on the game board 30 (play area). In this case, the configuration may also be such that pressing the changeover switch 880 again releases the electromagnetic lock, returning the second rotational control body 800 (second convex portion 802) to its initial position.

(o) Furthermore, in the example shown in the same figure (and, of course, the same applies to the various modified examples described above), when the player releases his/her finger (hand) from the rotational operation body 402 (handle 18), the rotational operation body 402 is returned to its initial position by the biasing force of the spiral spring 475. However, the second rotational operation body 800 may also be configured to (always) return to its initial position in conjunction with this (linked to) this. In this case, the second rotational operation body 800 may be returned to its initial position by a biasing means mechanically following the return of the rotational operation body 402 to its initial position, or a detection means may be provided to detect that the rotational operation body 402 has returned to its initial position, and when this detection means detects that the second rotational operation body 800 has returned to its initial position, the second rotational operation body 800 may also be configured to return to its initial position (for example, it is conceivable to configure the second rotational operation body 800 to be returned to its initial position by the biasing means by releasing the electromagnetic lock).

As mentioned above, when the rotational control body 402 (handle 18) is released, the spring 475 returns the rotational control body 402 to its reference position. However, if the second rotational control body 800 remains locked in a predetermined rotational position in this state, there is a concern that if the player stops playing, other players attempting to play on the gaming machine may feel uncomfortable or repulsed. In this regard, by configuring the second rotational control body 800 to always return to its initial position as the rotational control body 402 is returned to its reference position by the spring 475 (in conjunction with the rotational control body 402), the other players can begin playing without feeling uncomfortable or repulsed, thereby improving convenience. Furthermore, when the rotational operator 402 (handle 18, first convex member) is returned to the reference position and the second rotational operator 800 (second convex member) is in the initial position, the convex member 432 (first convex member) of the rotational operator 402 may be configured to be positioned clockwise (to the right in Figure 5-22, etc.) relative to the second convex member 802 of the second rotational operator 800 (second convex member). This configuration can eliminate the situation where the second convex member 802 gets in the way and makes rotation difficult when rotating the rotational operator 402 (single). Furthermore, when the convex member 432 (first convex member) of the rotational operator 402 and the second rotational operator 800 (second convex member) are to be operated simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, the relative positions of the two can be maintained while the rotational operator operates and the fingers can be positioned. This further improves convenience.

(p) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the rotary operation body 402 (first convex means, handle 18) may be grounded (earthed) or configured to be groundable by contact, and the second rotary operation body 800 (second convex means) may be grounded or configured to be groundable by contact. In particular, by configuring both to be grounded or configured to be groundable, it is possible to eliminate discomfort for the player even when only the second rotary operation body 800 (second convex means) is touched.

[Note]
The technical ideas and the like that can be understood from the above-described embodiment will be described below.

A. Pachinko machines are a type of conventional gaming machine. A handle is provided on the front side of a pachinko machine (see, for example, JP 2010-99379 A). The handle, for example, includes a fixed handle base and a rotary operator attached to the handle base so that it can be rotated to launch gaming balls. A biasing means such as a spring is provided inside the handle, with one end of the biasing means connected to the rotary operator and the other end connected to the handle base. This biases the rotary operator in a predetermined direction (for example, a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Furthermore, the rotary operator that receives the biasing force is configured to stop at a predetermined position when not in operation, and this stop position is set as a predetermined reference position (initial position) for the rotary operator relative to the handle base.

The launch speed of the gaming ball, and therefore the flight distance of the gaming ball, is adjusted according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotating control body from the reference position. In other words, by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the rotating control body, the player can adjust the launch speed of the gaming ball and send the gaming ball flying into the desired flight area.

In this way, players could operate the handle themselves to shoot balls at any area on the game board, and enjoy the game by watching the behavior of the shot balls.

The area to be aimed at is generally determined for each game state. For example, in normal game mode, the ball is often aimed toward the left side of the game board. For example, when aiming the ball toward the left side area, the player will try to hit the ball in the same spot as much as possible.

However, with pachinko machines like those mentioned above, if a player wants to continuously fire game balls, they must maintain the rotational control body. Therefore, if a game continues for a long period of time, the player must maintain the rotational control body at a constant rotational control amount for that period of time, which can lead to fatigue.

To alleviate this fatigue, players sometimes insert a foreign object, such as a coin or card, between the rotary control body and the handle base. This creates friction between the rotary control body and the foreign object, and between the handle base and the foreign object, and this friction allows the rotary control body to be held and fixed in a specified rotational operation state. In this case, the player can continuously launch game balls by simply "touching" the rotary control body with their hand or fingers, without having to hold the rotary control body.

However, the above actions cannot be said to be directly controlled by the player to launch the game balls, and may violate the Entertainment and Amusement Act or deviate from the true spirit of "play." Furthermore, forcibly inserting a foreign object between the rotating control body and the handle body may damage the handle or reduce the value of the gaming machine.

This technical concept was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent damage to the handle and allows players to control the ball more conveniently.

Means A1. A handle base means fixed to the gaming machine body;
a handle base means for rotating the handle so as to launch the game medium;
a first protruding means protruding from the outer periphery of the handle base means;
a biasing means for applying a predetermined biasing force so that at least the first protruding means is positioned relative to the handle base means at a predetermined reference position;
A gaming machine capable of changing the speed of a game medium to be launched in response to a rotational operation amount from the reference position of the first convex means in a rotational operation direction that is the opposite direction to the direction in which the predetermined biasing force is applied,
the first convex means is configured to be rotatable from the reference position of the first convex means based on a predetermined rotation operation in which a player moves the first convex means with a finger,
This gaming machine is
a second protruding means configured to be rotatable in the same rotation operation direction as the first protruding means, on the rear side or the front side of the first protruding means as viewed in a predetermined direction,
In a state where the first convex means is rotated in the rotation operation direction by the predetermined rotation operation amount, the player's finger is positioned between the first convex means and the second convex means fixed at a predetermined position, and the rotation operation amount of the first convex means can be fixed against the predetermined biasing force,
The second convex means is
The second convex means is configured to be rotatable in the same rotation direction as the first convex means by the specific rotation operation of the player moving the second convex means with the finger,
The specific rotation operation can be performed on the second convex means even when the first convex means is in a non-operation state,
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine characterized in that when the first convex means rotates in the direction in which the predetermined biasing force is applied by the predetermined biasing force and returns to the predetermined reference position, the second convex means also always returns to its predetermined initial position in conjunction with the rotation of the first convex means.

According to the above-mentioned method A1, the second convex means is rotated to a desired rotational angle and fixed, while the first convex means is rotated in the rotational direction. The player's finger is then positioned between the first convex means and the second convex means fixed in a predetermined position, and the rotational amount of the first convex means is fixed against the predetermined biasing force. This maintains the position of the first convex means, i.e., its rotational state. In other words, the first convex means can be held at a constant rotational amount. This significantly reduces fatigue. As a result, the player can enjoy more comfortable ball control.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, fatigue caused by holding the handle for a long period of time can be significantly reduced. This makes it less likely that a foreign object will get caught between the first protruding means and the handle base, causing the rotary operator to be held and fixed in a predetermined rotational position, as was the case in the past.

In addition, when the first protruding means rotates in the direction in which the predetermined biasing force is applied and returns to the predetermined reference position due to the predetermined biasing force, the second protruding means always returns to its predetermined initial position in conjunction with the rotation of the first protruding means. When a player finishes playing and releases their finger (hand) from the first protruding means, it is returned to its reference position by the predetermined biasing force. However, if the second protruding means remains fixed in the predetermined rotational position in this state, there is a concern that other players attempting to play on the gaming machine may find it unpleasant or disgusting. In this regard, with means A1, the second protruding means always returns to its initial position as the first protruding means returns to its reference position (in conjunction with it). This allows the other players to start playing without feeling any discomfort or disgust, thereby improving convenience in this respect.

A2. This gaming machine is
The state of the second protruding means is configured to be switchable by a player between a rotation restricted state and a rotation permitted state,
The gaming machine described in means A1 is configured so that the operation mode for bringing about the rotation restricted state is different from the operation mode for bringing about the rotation permitted state.

Method A2 can prevent problems such as players accidentally switching to the rotation restricted state or the rotation permitted state, further improving convenience.

A3. This gaming machine is
The gaming machine described in means A1 is characterized in that the second protruding means is configured so that the amount by which the first protruding means protrudes toward the outer periphery of the handle base means is greater than the amount by which the first protruding means protrudes toward the outer periphery of the handle base means.

Method A3 prevents problems caused by the presence of the first protruding means interfering with the rotation of the second protruding means, and ensures sufficient protrusion of the second protruding means, ensuring the desired rotational operability. As a result, convenience is improved and a loss of interest due to reduced operability is prevented.

A4. This gaming machine is
The handle base means is configured to have a large diameter portion and a small diameter portion smaller than the large diameter portion,
The gaming machine described in means A1 is characterized in that the first convex means and the second convex means are both configured to protrude outward from the large diameter portion.

Method A4 allows the player to place their finger between the first and second protruding means with the base of the finger or their hand resting on the large diameter portion. This makes it less likely that the height difference (step) will cause discomfort to the placed finger, and ultimately reduces loss of interest.

Means A5. This gaming machine is
When the first convex means is located at the reference position and the second convex means is located at the initial position,
The gaming machine described in means A1 is characterized in that the portion of the first convex means that protrudes more radially outward than the handle base means is positioned closer to the rotational operation direction, which is the opposite direction to the direction in which the specified biasing force is applied by the biasing means, than the portion of the second convex means that protrudes more radially outward than the handle base means.

Means A5 eliminates the problem of the second protruding means getting in the way and making it difficult to rotate the first protruding means when rotating the first protruding means. Furthermore, when attempting to operate the first protruding means and the second protruding means simultaneously or nearly simultaneously, it is possible to rotate the first protruding means while maintaining their relative positions, allowing the fingers to be positioned. This further improves convenience.

Means A6. This gaming machine is
The gaming machine described in means A1 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to maintain and fix the specific rotational operation state of the second convex means even when the player is not in contact with the second convex means.

Method A6 allows the player to restrict rotation of the second protruding means by rotating it to any desired rotational angle without coming into contact with the second protruding means, thereby maintaining and fixing the rotational state. This further reduces the player's sense of fatigue.

Means A7. This gaming machine is
The gaming machine described in means A1 is characterized in that not only the first convex means but also the second convex means are configured to be grounded, or are configured to be able to be grounded by contact.

Method A7 eliminates any discomfort felt by the player even when only the second protruding means is touched.

Means A8. This gaming machine is
The gaming machine described in means A1 is characterized in that the first protruding means is configured to be able to rotate by the same amount as the second protruding means is rotated by the specific rotation operation.

Method A8 allows for subtle rotational adjustments to be made to the second protruding means, ensuring the desired launch speed of gaming media for the player without having to make subtle rotational adjustments to the first protruding means. This further improves operability and convenience.

B. Pachinko machines are a type of conventional gaming machine. A handle is provided on the front side of a pachinko machine (see, for example, JP 2010-99379 A). The handle, for example, comprises a fixed handle base and a rotary operator attached to the handle base so that it can be rotated to launch gaming balls. A biasing means such as a spring is provided inside the handle, and one end of the biasing means is connected to the rotary operator and the other end is connected to the handle base. This biases the rotary operator in a predetermined direction (for example, a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Furthermore, the rotary operator that receives the biasing force is configured to stop at a predetermined position when not in operation, and this stop position is set as a predetermined reference position for the rotary operator with respect to the handle base.

The launch speed of the gaming ball, and therefore the flight distance of the gaming ball, is adjusted according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotating control body from the reference position. In other words, by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the rotating control body, the player can adjust the launch speed of the gaming ball and send the gaming ball flying into the desired flight area.

However, with pachinko machines like those mentioned above, if a player wants to continuously fire game balls, they must maintain the rotational control body. Therefore, if a game continues for a long period of time, the player must maintain the rotational control body at a constant rotational control amount for that period of time, which can lead to fatigue.

To alleviate this fatigue, players sometimes insert a foreign object, such as a coin or card, between the rotary control body and the handle base. This creates friction between the rotary control body and the foreign object, and between the handle base and the foreign object, and this friction allows the rotary control body to be held and fixed in a specified rotational operation state. In this case, the player can continuously launch game balls by simply "touching" the rotary control body with their hand or fingers, without having to hold the rotary control body.

However, the above actions cannot be said to be directly controlled by the player to launch the game balls, and may violate the Entertainment and Amusement Act or deviate from the true spirit of "play." Furthermore, forcibly inserting a foreign object between the rotating control body and the handle body may damage the handle or reduce the value of the gaming machine.

This technical concept was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent damage to the handle and allows players to control the ball more conveniently.

Means B1. A handle base in a fixed state;
a first operating means attached to the handle base so as to be rotatable in order to launch the game medium;
a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the first operating means so that a relative rotation position of the first operating means with respect to the handle base portion becomes a predetermined reference position when the first operating means is in a non-operated state;
A gaming machine capable of changing the speed of a game medium to be launched according to the amount of rotation of the first operating means from the reference position in a rotation direction that is the opposite direction to the direction in which the biasing force is applied,
a second operating means provided at a rear side or a front side of the first operating means as viewed in a predetermined direction, the second operating means being rotatable about the same axis as the first operating means;
a restricting means for restricting the rotation of the second operating means,
the restricting means is in a rotation restricted state in which rotation of the second operating means is restricted;
a rotation permitted state in which rotation of the second operating means is permitted,
The first operating means is provided with a first protrusion that protrudes outward,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second operating means is provided with a second convex portion that protrudes toward the outer periphery.

According to method B1, a player can rotate the first operating means by a desired rotational amount (rotation angle) and then continue to hold it, thereby continuously releasing game media. Alternatively, a player who does not wish to hold the first operating means in this manner can perform the following series of actions: First, place the second operating means in a rotation-permitted state. Then, after rotating the second operating means by a desired rotational amount (rotation angle), switch the state of the restricting means to place the second operating means in a rotation-restricted state. Next, rotate the first operating means, and in this state, place (place) a finger (e.g., index finger) between the first and second convex portions, bringing it into contact with both convex portions. In this state, the first convex portion abuts one side of the finger, and the second convex portion abuts the other side. At this time, a biasing force (action) acts on the finger from the first convex portion, and a force (reaction) that pushes back the biasing force acts from the second convex portion. The forces described above balance out, maintaining the position of the first protrusion, i.e., maintaining the rotational state of the first operating means. In other words, by simply rotating the first operating means and placing your fingers against the first and second protrusions, you can hold the first operating means with a constant amount of rotational operation without exerting force on your fingers. This significantly reduces the fatigue caused by continuing to hold the first operating means, and as a result, increases the player's enjoyment.

In addition, this means can switch between a rotation-restricted state and a rotation-permitted state based on the player's intentions. This makes it easy to adjust the amount of rotation of the second operating means and prevents unintentional rotation of the second operating means. This also improves the convenience of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, fatigue caused by holding the handle for a long period of time can be significantly reduced. This makes it difficult to perform conventional actions such as fitting a foreign object between the first operating means and the handle base, thereby holding and fixing the rotary operating body in a predetermined rotational operating state. As a result, it is possible to prevent situations such as damage to the handle due to foreign objects, and ultimately eliminate the risk of the value of the gaming machine decreasing.

Means B2. The gaming machine described in means B1, characterized in that the operation mode for establishing the rotation restricted state is different from the operation mode for establishing the rotation permitted state.

Method B2 can prevent problems such as players accidentally switching to the rotation restricted state or the rotation permitted state, further improving convenience.

Means B3. The first operating means comprises an annular first main body portion and the first protrusion portion protruding from the outer circumferential surface of the first main body portion,
The gaming machine described in means B1 is characterized in that the second operating means comprises a ring-shaped second main body portion and the second convex portion protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the second main body portion.

According to Measure B3, each rotation means simply requires the provision of an annular main body portion and a protrusion protruding from the outer periphery of each main body portion. This eliminates the need for a separate special mechanism, making it possible to prevent the structure from becoming complicated and the costs from increasing.

In particular, since the second operating means has an annular second main body portion, rotation can be easily performed, further improving operability.

Means B4. The gaming machine described in means B3, characterized in that the outer peripheral surface of the first main body portion and the outer peripheral surface of the second main body portion are substantially flush with each other.

According to Measure B4, the outer surfaces of the first and second main bodies are flush, which reduces the discomfort felt when gripping the handle or placing your fingers on it. This improves operability and the convenience of the gaming machine.

Means B5. The second convex portion is in a protruding state in which the second convex portion protrudes by a predetermined amount;
The gaming machine described in means B1 is configured to be able to switch between a state in which the amount of protrusion is smaller than the protrusion state, or a non-protrusion state in which the amount of protrusion is zero.

According to Measure B5, by setting the second convex portion to a protruding state, the effect described in Measure B1 is not only achieved, but by switching the second convex portion to a non-protruding state, players who do not need the second operating means can prevent the second convex portion from interfering with handle operation. This improves the versatility of the handle and makes it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming machine.

Means B6. The gaming machine described in means B1, wherein the second protrusion is provided with a storage portion capable of storing part of a finger.

According to Measure B6, the pre-installed storage section makes it easier to set the finger position, allowing for smooth gameplay. Furthermore, by storing the finger in the storage section, problems such as unstable finger positioning can be prevented, and the rotation operation state can be stabilized.

Means B7. The gaming machine described in means B6, wherein the storage section is provided on at least one of the two side surfaces of the second protrusion, and that side surface is on the rotational operation direction side of the first operating means.

Method B7 allows for more accurate finger positioning, stabilizing the rotation operation state.

Means B8. The gaming machine described in means B1, characterized in that the second convex portion is provided with an elastic member.

Method B8 makes it possible to protect the fingers, further significantly reducing fatigue and allowing players to play for longer periods of time. This makes it possible to stabilize the rotation operation state and improve the convenience of the gaming machine.

Means B9. The gaming machine described in means B8, wherein the elastic member is provided on at least one of the two side surfaces of the second convex portion, and that side surface is on the rotational operation direction side of the first operating means.

Method B9 provides an elastic member on the side where the fingers come into contact, thereby providing more accurate finger protection and further improving the convenience of the gaming machine.

Means B10. The regulating means is
a first restricting means provided on either the rear side or the front side of the second operating means;
a second restriction means provided on the other of the rear side and the front side of the second operation means,
The first restricting means is
a first annular fixing ring fixed to the handle base;
a compression spring that is spirally provided on the outer periphery of the handle base and has both ends joined to the first fixing ring and the second operating means,
The second restricting means is
a plurality of fitting protrusions extending from the second operating means to the other side;
a second annular fixing ring provided with a plurality of fitting recesses or fitting holes into which the fitting protrusions are fitted and fixed to the handle base,
The gaming machine described in means B1 is characterized in that the compressible length of the compression spring is longer than the protruding length of the mating convex portion.

According to means B10, by fitting the fitting protrusions into the multiple fitting recesses or fitting holes, the biasing force of the compression spring is applied, restricting the rotation of the second operating means, i.e., maintaining the rotation-restricted state. In response, by compressing the compression spring against the biasing force, the fitting protrusions are released. This means that the rotation is permitted, and the player can rotate the second operating means. Then, by slowly releasing the grip after the desired rotation position, the fitting protrusions fit into the multiple fitting recesses or fitting holes, and the rotation is once again restricted. Therefore, the structure of means B1 can be realized with a relatively simple and inexpensive configuration. Furthermore, the configuration can be prevented from becoming too complicated, thereby improving the convenience of the gaming machine.

C. Pachinko machines are a type of conventional gaming machine. A handle is provided on the front side of a pachinko machine (see, for example, JP 2010-99379 A). The handle, for example, includes a fixed handle base and a rotary control body that is attached to the handle base so that it can be rotated to launch gaming balls. A biasing means such as a spring is provided inside the handle, and one end of the biasing means is connected to the rotary control body and the other end is connected to the handle base. This biases the rotary control body in a predetermined direction (for example, a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Furthermore, the rotary control body that receives the biasing force is configured to stop at a predetermined position when not in operation, and this stop position is set as a predetermined reference position for the rotary control body relative to the handle base.

The launch speed of the gaming ball, and therefore the flight distance of the gaming ball, is adjusted according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotating control body from the reference position. In other words, by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the rotating control body, the player can adjust the launch speed of the gaming ball and send the gaming ball flying into the desired flight area.

However, with pachinko machines like those mentioned above, if a player wants to continuously fire game balls, they must maintain the rotational control body. Therefore, if a game continues for a long period of time, the player must maintain the rotational control body at a constant rotational control amount for that period of time, which can lead to fatigue.

To alleviate this fatigue, players sometimes insert a foreign object, such as a coin or card, between the rotary control body and the handle base. This creates friction between the rotary control body and the foreign object, and between the handle base and the foreign object, and this friction allows the rotary control body to be held and fixed in a specified rotational operation state. In this case, the player can continuously launch game balls by simply "touching" the rotary control body with their hand or fingers, without having to hold the rotary control body.

However, the above actions cannot be said to be directly controlled by the player to launch the game balls, and may violate the Entertainment and Amusement Act or deviate from the true spirit of "play." Furthermore, forcibly inserting a foreign object between the rotating control body and the handle body may damage the handle or reduce the value of the gaming machine.

This technical concept was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent damage to the handle and allows players to control the ball more conveniently.

Means C1. A handle base in a fixed state;
a first operating means attached to the handle base so as to be rotatable in order to launch the game medium;
a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the first operating means so that a relative rotation position of the first operating means with respect to the handle base portion becomes a predetermined reference position when the first operating means is in a non-operated state;
A gaming machine capable of changing the speed of a game medium to be launched according to the amount of rotation of the first operating means from the reference position in a rotation direction that is the opposite direction to the direction in which the biasing force is applied,
a second operating means provided on the rear side or the front side of the first operating means when viewed in a predetermined direction,
The first operating means is provided with a first protrusion that protrudes outward from the handle base,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second operating means is provided with a second protrusion that protrudes further outward than the handle base.

With means C1, if a player feels tired from rotating the first operating means a predetermined amount to operate the ball, the second operating means can be used to maintain, or fix, the predetermined amount of rotation of the first operating means. This can increase the player's motivation to continue playing.

Furthermore, fatigue can be significantly reduced. This makes it more difficult to perform conventional actions such as wedging a foreign object between the first operating means and the handle base, thereby holding and fixing the rotary operating body in a predetermined rotational operating state. As a result, it is possible to prevent situations such as damage to the handle due to a foreign object, and ultimately eliminate the risk of the value of the gaming machine decreasing.

Means C2. The gaming machine described in means C1 is configured so that, with the first convex portion in a predetermined relative rotational operation position and a finger placed on the handle base and the first operating means, the finger can be positioned between the first convex portion and the second convex portion to fix the first operating means.

Method C2 prevents problems such as unstable finger positioning during play, making it possible to stabilize the rotation operation state.

Means C3. The gaming machine described in means C1, characterized in that the outer peripheral surface of the second convex portion is a curved surface.

According to method C3, even if a finger hits the second convex portion, the outer surface is curved, making it less likely to be damaged.

Means C4. The gaming machine described in means B1, wherein the second operating means is provided at a predetermined distance from the first operating means in the direction of the rotation axis of the first operating means, and is configured to be operable even when the first operating means is not in an operating state.

Meanwhile, C4 makes it less likely that the operation of the second operating means will be hindered by the presence of the first operating means, thereby improving operability.

Means C5. The gaming machine described in means B1, characterized in that the amount of protrusion of the first convex portion relative to the handle base is greater than the amount of protrusion of the second convex portion relative to the handle base.

Meanwhile, feature C5 can prevent problems caused by the presence of the second convex portion interfering with the rotation of the first operating means, while ensuring sufficient protrusion of the first convex portion, thereby ensuring the desired rotational operability. As a result, it is possible to prevent a loss of interest due to reduced operability.

Means C6. A gaming machine described in any one of means C1 to C5, characterized in that the second operating means is set to have a smaller depth width than the first operating means.

According to Measure C6, unlike the first operating means for firing gaming media, the second operating means can fully function with just a part of the finger touching it. In this regard, this measure allows the depth width of the second operating means to be reduced, so the space in the depth direction does not need to be expanded significantly. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effects while making the gaming machine more compact.

D. Pachinko machines are a type of conventional gaming machine. A handle is provided on the front side of a pachinko machine (see, for example, JP 2010-99379 A). The handle, for example, includes a fixed handle base and a rotary control body that is attached to the handle base so that it can be rotated to launch gaming balls. A biasing means such as a spring is provided inside the handle, and one end of the biasing means is connected to the rotary control body and the other end is connected to the handle base. This biases the rotary control body in a predetermined direction (for example, a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Furthermore, the rotary control body that receives the biasing force is configured to stop at a predetermined position when not in operation, and this stop position is set as a predetermined reference position for the rotary control body relative to the handle base.

The launch speed of the gaming ball, and therefore the flight distance of the gaming ball, is adjusted according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotating control body from the reference position. In other words, by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the rotating control body, the player can adjust the launch speed of the gaming ball and send the gaming ball flying into the desired flight area.

However, with pachinko machines like those mentioned above, if a player wants to continuously fire game balls, they must maintain the rotational control body. Therefore, if a game continues for a long period of time, the player must maintain the rotational control body at a constant rotational control amount for that period of time, which can lead to fatigue.

To alleviate this fatigue, players sometimes insert a foreign object, such as a coin or card, between the rotary control body and the handle base. This creates friction between the rotary control body and the foreign object, and between the handle base and the foreign object, and this friction allows the rotary control body to be held and fixed in a specified rotational operation state. In this case, the player can continuously launch game balls by simply "touching" the rotary control body with their hand or fingers, without having to hold the rotary control body.

However, the above actions cannot be said to be directly controlled by the player to launch the game balls, and may violate the Entertainment and Amusement Act or deviate from the true spirit of "play." Furthermore, forcibly inserting a foreign object between the rotating control body and the handle body may damage the handle or reduce the value of the gaming machine.

This technical concept was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent damage to the handle and allows players to control the ball more conveniently.

Means D1. A handle base in a fixed state;
a first operating means attached to the handle base so as to be rotatable in order to launch the game medium;
a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the first operating means so that a relative rotation position of the first operating means with respect to the handle base portion becomes a predetermined reference position when the first operating means is in a non-operated state;
A gaming machine capable of changing the speed of a game medium to be launched according to the amount of rotation of the first operating means from the reference position in a rotation direction that is the opposite direction to the direction in which the biasing force is applied,
a second operating means provided at a rear side or a front side of the first operating means as viewed in a predetermined direction, the second operating means being rotatable about a rotation center coaxial with the first operating means;
The second operating means is configured to be fixable at a predetermined rotation position based on an operation of an operating section different from the second operating means,
The first operating means is provided with a first protrusion that protrudes outward,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second operating means is provided with a second convex portion that protrudes toward the outer periphery.

With feature D1, if a player feels tired from rotating the first operating means a predetermined amount to operate the balls, the second operating means can be rotated a specific amount to fix the amount of balls fired. This can increase the player's motivation to continue playing.

Furthermore, with this means, the second operating means can be fixed in a predetermined rotational position by operating the operating unit based on the player's intention. This makes it easy to adjust the amount of rotation of the second operating means, and also makes it possible to prevent unintentional rotation of the second operating means. This also improves the convenience of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, fatigue caused by holding the handle for a long period of time can be significantly reduced. This makes it difficult to perform conventional actions such as fitting a foreign object between the first operating means and the handle base, thereby holding and fixing the rotary operating body in a predetermined rotational operating state. As a result, it is possible to prevent situations such as damage to the handle due to foreign objects, and ultimately eliminate the risk of the value of the gaming machine decreasing.

Means D2. A gaming machine as described in means D1, characterized in that rotation of the second operating means is restricted based on the player performing a predetermined operation to restrict rotation, and rotation of the second operating means is permitted based on the player performing an operation to release the restriction.

Means D2 allows the player to rotate the second operating means by performing an operation to release the restriction, and the rotation of the second operating means can be restricted by performing a specified operation to restrict rotation, so the second operating means can be fixed at the rotation position desired by the player. This allows for precise adjustment of the speed of the gaming medium being fired, further increasing the game's enjoyment.

Means D3. A gaming machine as described in means D1, characterized in that the first operating means and the second operating means can be rotated in the same direction.

Meanwhile, D3 can improve operability for players.

Means D4. A gaming machine described in any of means D1 to D3, characterized in that the handle base is provided with information that instructs or suggests the rotational operation direction of the first operating means and the second operating means.

Meanwhile, D4 can further improve operability for players.

Means D5. The handle base has a large diameter portion and a small diameter portion smaller than the large diameter portion,
The gaming machine described in means D1 is characterized in that the first convex portion and the second convex portion both protrude outward from the large diameter portion.

Method D5 allows the player to place their finger between the first and second convex portions with the base of the finger or their hand resting on the large diameter portion. This makes it less likely that the height difference (step) will cause discomfort to the placed finger, and ultimately reduces loss of interest.

Means D6. The gaming machine described in means D1, characterized in that the first convex portion and the second convex portion are each provided in plurality at predetermined intervals.

In particular, with feature D6, since the second protrusions are provided at multiple locations spaced at predetermined intervals, for example, when switching the firing speed from so-called left-hand shots to so-called right-hand shots, it is possible to simply place (contact) a different second protrusion on the player's finger without having to rotate the second operating means each time. As a result, this eliminates the hassle for the player, and in this sense, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

E. Pachinko machines are a type of conventional gaming machine. A handle is provided on the front side of a pachinko machine (see, for example, JP 2010-99379 A). The handle, for example, includes a fixed handle base and a rotary control body that is attached to the handle base so that it can be rotated to launch gaming balls. A biasing means such as a spring is provided inside the handle, and one end of the biasing means is connected to the rotary control body and the other end is connected to the handle base. This biases the rotary control body in a predetermined direction (for example, a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Furthermore, the rotary control body that receives the biasing force is configured to stop at a predetermined position when not in operation, and this stop position is set as a predetermined reference position for the rotary control body relative to the handle base.

The launch speed of the gaming ball, and therefore the flight distance of the gaming ball, is adjusted according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotating control body from the reference position. In other words, by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the rotating control body, the player can adjust the launch speed of the gaming ball and send the gaming ball flying into the desired flight area.

However, with pachinko machines like those mentioned above, if a player wants to continuously fire game balls, they must maintain the rotational control body. Therefore, if a game continues for a long period of time, the player must maintain the rotational control body at a constant rotational control amount for that period of time, which can lead to fatigue.

To alleviate this fatigue, players sometimes insert a foreign object, such as a coin or card, between the rotary control body and the handle base. This creates friction between the rotary control body and the foreign object, and between the handle base and the foreign object, and this friction allows the rotary control body to be held and fixed in a specified rotational operation state. In this case, the player can continuously launch game balls by simply "touching" the rotary control body with their hand or fingers, without having to hold the rotary control body.

However, the above actions cannot be said to be directly controlled by the player to launch the game balls, and may violate the Entertainment and Amusement Act or deviate from the true spirit of "play." Furthermore, forcibly inserting a foreign object between the rotating control body and the handle body may damage the handle or reduce the value of the gaming machine.

This technical concept was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent damage to the handle and allows players to control the ball more conveniently.

Means E1. A handle base in a fixed state;
a first operating means attached to the handle base so as to be rotatable in order to launch the game medium;
a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the first operating means so that a relative rotation position of the first operating means with respect to the handle base portion becomes a predetermined reference position when the first operating means is in a non-operated state;
A gaming machine capable of changing the speed of a game medium to be launched according to the amount of rotation of the first operating means from the reference position in a rotation direction that is the opposite direction to the direction in which the biasing force is applied,
a second operating means provided to be rotatably operated on the rear side or the front side of the first operating means when viewed in a predetermined direction;
The first operating means is provided with a first protrusion that protrudes outward,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second operating means is provided with a second convex portion that protrudes toward the outer periphery.

With means E1, if a player feels tired from rotating the first operating means a predetermined amount to operate the ball, the second operating means can be used to maintain, or fix, the predetermined amount of rotation of the first operating means. This can increase the player's motivation to continue playing.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, fatigue can be significantly reduced. This makes it difficult to perform conventional actions such as fitting a foreign object between the first operating means and the handle base, thereby holding and fixing the rotary operating body in a predetermined rotational operating state. As a result, it is possible to prevent situations such as damage to the handle due to foreign objects, and ultimately eliminate the risk of the value of the gaming machine decreasing.

Means E2. The gaming machine described in means E1, characterized in that it is equipped with a second biasing means capable of applying a biasing force to the second operating means so that the rotational position of the second operating means becomes a predetermined reference position.

Means E2 allows the second operating means to be positioned at a predetermined reference position based on the biasing force applied by the second biasing means. Therefore, for a player who does not know to which position to rotate the second operating means, the second operating means will naturally be positioned at the predetermined reference position, which is easy to use and improves operability. Furthermore, by setting a predetermined reference position for times when the second operating means does not need to be used, for example, the second protrusion can be positioned at a position that does not interfere with the rotation of the first operating means, thereby preventing a decrease in operability.

Means E3. The gaming machine described in means E1, wherein the second operating means is arranged to be rotatable about a different axis parallel to the first operating means.

Means E3 allows the rotation of the second operating means to be performed in a manner different from the rotation of the first operating means, thereby improving convenience for the player.

Means E4. The gaming machine described in means E3, characterized in that the rotation radius of the second operating means is set smaller than the rotation radius of the first operating means.

Meanwhile, according to feature E4, the amount of protrusion of the second convex portion can be reduced depending on the rotation angle of the second operating means. Therefore, for players who do not need the second operating means, the second convex portion can be made to not protrude as much. As a result, a decline in interest can be prevented.

Means E5. The gaming machine described in means E3, wherein the second operating means is configured to be able to change its state between a small protrusion state in which the second convex portion protrudes less outwardly and a large protrusion state in which the second convex portion protrudes more outwardly than in the small protrusion state, depending on its rotational position.

Meanwhile, according to means E5, the amount of protrusion of the second convex portion can be made smaller or larger depending on the rotation angle of the second operating means. This allows the player to select the amount of protrusion that is convenient for them. Also, as mentioned above, for players who do not need the second operating means, the second convex portion can be set to a small protrusion state, so that it does not protrude very much. As a result, a decline in interest can be prevented.

10... Pachinko machine, 30... Game board, 261... Main control device, 262... Sub-control device, 32A... Variable winning device, 32Ab... Large winning port shutter, 33WA... First starting winning section, 33WB... Second starting winning section.

Claims (1)

A specific game state that can occur when a specific condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the starting condition;
a predetermined operation means for executing a predetermined operation state a plurality of times when the specific gaming state is reached;
a control means for executing control regarding the specific game state and control of the predetermined operation means,
the control means shifts the predetermined operation means to a predetermined stop state when at least a first state occurs and a second state different from the first state occurs after the predetermined operation means has entered the predetermined operation state in the specific game state,
The control means
a maintenance state execution means for maintaining the predetermined operation means in the predetermined stopped state for at least a predetermined period when the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state,
In the specific game state, when the first state occurs and the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state, the predetermined operation state can be shifted to the predetermined stopped state earlier than when the second state occurs and the predetermined operation means is shifted to the predetermined stopped state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second state is more advantageous to the player than the first state.